Typcal Glass Design GEO.a.kelson

Architectural Specifications for: Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury.
Issued for CORE AND SHELL

September 30, 2011
Project No.: 2011.008
Prepared By:
R. H. Carter Architects Inc. 5040 Dundas Street West Toronto, Ontario M9A 1B8 Telephone: Fax No.: Email: Web: (416) 233-5583 (416) 233-5585 info@rhcarter.com www.rhcarterdesigns.com
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury Project No: 2011.008 PART 1 - THE CONSULTANTS 1.1.
1.1.1.
SECTION 00 01 05 LIST OF CONSULTANTS
THE CONSULTANT
R. H. Carter Architects Inc. 5040 Dundas Street West Toronto, Ontario M9A 1B8 Telephone: Fax No.: Email: Web: (416) 233-5583 (416) 233-5585 info@rhcarter.com www.rhcarterdesigns.com
1.2.
1.2.1.
STRUCTURAL CONSULTANT
MIrkwood Engineering 1131 Invicta Drive, Suite 7 Oakville, Ontario L6H 4M1 Telephone: Fax No.: Email: Web: (905) 849-0062 (905) 849-6303 structural@mirkwood.ca www.mirkwood.ca
1.3.
1.3.1.
MECHANICAL CONSULTANT
TMP The Mitchell Partnership Inc. 285 Yorkland Blvd. Toronto, Ontario M2J 1S5 Telephone: Fax No.: Email: Web: (416) 499-8000 (416) 499-7446 tmp@tmptoronto.com www.tmptoronto.com
1.4.
1.4.1.
ELECTRICAL CONSULTANT
Hammerschlag & Joffe Inc. 69 Lesmill Rd, North York, Ontario M3B 2T8 Telephone: Fax No.: Email: Web: (416) 444-9263 (416) 444-1463 dwg@hamjof.com www.hamjof.com
1.5.
1.5.1.
CODE CONSULTANT
Larden Muniak Consulting Inc. 10 Jour Seasons Place, Suite 700 Toronto, Ontario M9B 6H7 Telephone: Fax No: Email: Web: (416) 762-3808 or 1(800) 285-2041 (416) 762-7746 info@lardenmuniak.com www.lardenmuniak.com
PAGE 00 01 05 - 1
Issued for CORE AND SHELL, SEPTEMBER 30, 2011 R. H. Carter Architects Inc.
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury Project No: 2011.008 1.6.
1.6.1.
SECTION 00 01 05 LIST OF CONSULTANTS
CIVIL ENGINEERING CONSULTANT

SCS Consulting Group 30 Centurian Driave, Suite 100 Markham, Ontario L3R 8B8 Telephone: Fax No.: Email: Web: (905) 475-1900 (905) 475-8335 general@scsconsulatinggroup.com www.scsconsultinggroup.com
1.7.
1.7.1.
LANDSCAPE CONSULTANT
Terraplan Landscape Architects 20 Champlain Blvd., Suite 102 Toronto, Ontario M3H 2Z1 Telephone: Fax No.: Email: Web: (416) 638-4911 (416) 638-4261 info@terraplan.ca www.terraplan.ca
END OF SECTION
PAGE 00 01 05 - 2
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury Project No: 2011.008
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
Sects (X) Section No. Section Title Rev. No. Date
SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Consult.
Page Nos
X X X
00 00 01 00 01 05 00 01 10
PROJECT TITLE PAGE LIST OF CONSULTANTS TABLE OF CONTENTS
----
2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30
RHC RHC RHC
1 Only 1 and 2 1 thru 2
PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS X X X X 00 20 00 00 24 02 00 30 00 00 41 00 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PROCUREMENT SCOPE AVAILABLE INFORMATION BID FORM 00 00 00 00 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 RHC RHC RHC RHC 1 thru 8 1 and 2 1 Only 1 thru 12
CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS X *00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 2011-09-30 OWNER 1 thru 6
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS X X X X X X X 01 10 00 01 20 00 01 30 00 01 40 00 01 50 00 01 60 00 01 70 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS QUALITY REQUIREMENTS TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 RHC RHC RHC RHC RHC RHC RHC 1 thru 8 1 thru 3 1 thru 12 1 thru 17 1 thru 15 1 thru 7 1 thru 21
FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP DIVISION 03 CONCRETE X X 03 35 13 03 45 00 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 00 00 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 RHC RHC 1 thru 12 1 thru 13
DIVISION 04 MASONRY X 04 20 00 MASONRY UNITS 00 2011-09-30 RHC 1 thru 13
PAGE 00 01 10 - 1
DIVISION 05 METALS X X 05 50 00 05 51 00 METAL FABRICATIONS METAL STAIRS AND BALUSTRADES 00 00
SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS
2011-09-30 2011-09-30
RHC RHC
1 thru 9 1 thru 8
DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES X 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 00 2011-09-30 RHC 1 thru 4
DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION X X X X X X X X X 07 21 00 07 25 00 07 42 43 07 54 23 07 62 00 07 81 00 07 81 23 07 84 00 07 92 00 BUILDING INSULATION MISCELLANEOUS AIR/VAPOUR BARRIERS ALUMINUM COMPOSITE METAL PANEL SYSTEM TPO ROOFING MECHANICALLY FASTENED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS INTUMESCENT FIRE-RESISTIVE COATINGS FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS JOINT SEALANTS 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 RHC RHC RHC RHC RHC RHC RHC RHC RHC 1 thru 8 1 thru 6 1 thru 13 1 thru 12 1 thru 5 1 thru 7 1 thru 12 1 thru 13 1 thru 12
DIVISION 08 OPENINGS X X X X X X 08 11 13 08 36 14 08 44 00 08 44 26 *08 71 00 08 91 00 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES GLAZED SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL STRUCTURALLY GLAZED CURTAIN WALL HARDWARE SCHEDULE AND CUT SHEETS (Cover Sheet) LOUVRES 00 00 00 00 00 00 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 RHC RHC RHC RHC UCH RHC 1 thru 10 1 thru 8 1 thru 28 1 thru 28 1 Only 1 thru 6
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT X X 14 21 00 14 84 24 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS FALL ARREST SYSTEM 00 00 2011-09-30 2011-09-30 RHC RHC 1 thru 14 1 thru
LEGEND * Specifications prepared by Consultants other than the Architect have been prefixed with an asterisk. These Specifications are not included under, nor governed by the Architects seal. Consultants Abbreviations: RHC UCH R. H. Carter Architects Inc. Upper Canada Hardware Architectural Consultant Hardware Consultant
END OF SECTION
PAGE 00 01 10 - 2
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 00 20 00 Project No: 2011.008 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
Owner: 685109 ONTARIO LIMITED Project: 2 WEST BALES DRIVE Project Number: 2011.008
PAGE 00 20 00 - 1
1.0 1.1 .1
GENERAL BID CALL Offers signed under seal, executed, and dated will be received by Geo A Kelson located at 113 5 Stellar Drive, Newmarket, Ontario L3Y 7B8 on or before 3 P.M. on October 20, 2011 Bid documents received after the designated time noted above shall be returned to the Bidder unopened. Offers will be opened privately after the time for receipt of bids. Amendments to the submitted offer will be permitted if received in writing prior to bid closing and if endorsed by the same party or parties who signed and sealed the offer. INTENT .1 The intent of this bid call is to obtain an offer to perform work to complete the core and shell for 685109 Ontario Limited for a Stipulated Price Contract in accordance with the Contract Documents. It is the Owners intent to commence construction immediately upon acceptance of the successful bidders. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION .1 The Contract Documents are identified as: RENOVATION AND EXPANSION AT 2 WEST BALES DRIVE EAST GWILLIMBURY, ONTARIO. PROJECT NO. 2011.008 as prepared by the Consultant, R.H. Carter Architects Inc. ADDRESSES .1 The Owner is located at: GEO A. KELSON COMPANY LTD. 1135 Stellar drive Newmarket, Ontario L3Y 7B8 Contact : Mr. Josh Kelson, L.L.B.. Ms. Michelle Kelson, CFO The Prime Consultant is located at: R.H. Carter Architects Inc. 5040 Dundas Street W. Toronto, Ontario M9A 1B8 Tel: (416) 233-5583 Ext. 243 Fax: (416) 233-5585 Contact: Daniel Rodriguez Alissa Laporte ext: 247 Refer to List of Consultants for all other coordinates of Consultants.
.2 .3 .4 1.2
1.3
1.4
.2
.3
PAGE 00 20 00 - 2
2.0 2.1 .1
CONTRACT BID DOCUMENTS DEFINITIONS Contract Documents: Defined in CCDC2 2008 Edition Stipulated Price Definitions. Contract Documents consist of the executed agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, the General Conditions, Supplementary Instructions, Supplementary General Conditions, Drawings, Addendums, Amendments to Drawings incorporated before the execution of the contract and subsequent amendments agreed upon by both parties. Bid Documents: Contract Documents supplemented with Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary General Conditions, Bid Forms and bid securities identified herein. Bid, Offer, or Bidding: Act of submitting an offer under seal. Bid Price: Monetary sum identified by the Bidder in the Bid Form. AVAILABILITY .1 .2 Bid Documents may be obtained at the office of the Architect. A maximum of two copies of Bid Documents can be obtained by general contract bidders upon receipt of a deposit by certified cheque or cash made payable to the Architect in the amount of $ 200.00. Deposit will be refunded if Bid Documents are returned complete, undamaged, unmarked and reusable within 10 days of bid submission. Failure to comply will result in forfeiture of deposit. Bid Documents are made available only for the purpose of obtaining offers for this project. Their use does not confer a license or grant for other purposes. Additional sets of the Bid Documents may be obtained by Bidders, at a cost and subject to available printing time, by calling the Prime Consultant. EXAMINATION .1 .2 Bid Documents may be viewed at the office of the Owner. Upon receipt of Bid Documents verify that documents are complete; notify the Consultant should the documents be incomplete. Immediately notify the Prime Consultant upon finding discrepancies or omissions in the Bid Documents. QUERIES / ADDENDA .1 Direct questions to Mr. Daniel Rodriguez or Ms. Alissa Laporte at the Prime Consultants office. All questions must be addressed to the Consultants in writing. Addenda may be issued during the bidding period. All addenda become part of the Contract Documents. Include costs in the Bid Price.
.2
.3 .4 2.2
.3 .4
.5
2.3
.3
2.4
.2
PAGE 00 20 00 - 3
2.4 .3
QUERIES / ADDENDA (Contd.) Verbal answers are only binding when confirmed by written addenda. Addenda may be transmitted by fax, mail or courier. Clarifications requested by Bidders must be in writing not less than 7 days before date set for receipt of bids. The reply will be in the form of an Addendum, a copy of which will be forwarded to the Bidders. ALTERNATIVES .1 Base bid on products specified. Alternative products will be considered only if submitted as an attachment to the Bid Form using Appendix E of the Bid Form. Base bid on proposed construction contract form and structure. Alternative contract forms and structures will be considered only if submitted as an attachment to the Bid Form using Appendix E of the Bid Form. The submission shall provide sufficient information to enable the Consultant to determine acceptability of such products. Provide complete information on required revisions to other work to accommodate each alternative, the dollar amount of additions to or reductions from the Bid Price, including revisions to other work. Approval to submit alternatives prior to submission of bids is not required. Any additional Consultants fees incurred due to alternative products or alternative system options proposed by the Bidders that require Consultants to revise the tender documents to accommodate the alternatives shall be at the sole expense of the Bidder. SITE ASSESSMENT SITE EXAMINATION .1 The project site and surrounding area MUST be visited before submitting a bid. All parties tendering must examine the site of the proposed work before sending in their tender and make themselves thoroughly acquainted with the same and obtain for themselves any and all information that may be necessary for the proposed carrying out of the contract. No after claim will be allowed or entertained for any work or material that may be requisite and necessary for the proper execution and completion of this Contract. A Site visit has been scheduled for _________________, 2011 at _____________ (A.M. P.M.) A representative from the general bidders must be present. Failure to attend may at the Owners sole and absolute discretion, result in the non acceptance and/or disqualification of the Bid of the general bidder. Bidders may invite any subcontractors who will be preparing a tender price to attend this site visit. No other visits shall be permitted.
.4
2.5
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6
3.0 3.1
.2
.3
PAGE 00 20 00 - 4
4.0 4.1 .1 4.2 .1 5.0 5.1 .1
QUALIFICATIONS PREQUALIFICATION All bidders shall complete and submit CCDC 11 Contractors Qualification Statement (1996) and submit with Section 00 41 00 - Bid Form. SUBCONTRACTORS The Owner (as further described in the General Conditions) reserves the right to reject a proposed Subcontractor for any cause. BID SUBMISSION BID INELIGIBILITY Bid Forms and enclosures which are improperly prepared, incomplete, unsigned, improperly signed or sealed, conditional, illegible, obscure, contain arithmetical errors, erasures, alterations, or irregularities of any kind may, at the discretion of the Owner, be declared informal. Failure to provide bonding and/or insurance requirements may, at the discretion of the Owner, be declared informal. Bids are by invitation only, from selected bidders. Bids from unsolicited bidders shall be returned. SUBMISSIONS .1 .2 Bidders shall be solely responsible for the delivery of their bids in the manner and time prescribed. Bidders shall deliver one (1) original and two (2) copies of the Bid in a large sealed opaque envelope that should be clearly marked as Project Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury and with the name and address of the Bidder and the name of The Owner. All Bids must be in hard copy form and filled out in ink or typewritten. No telephoned, facsimile or email transmissions of the Bid will be accepted. The bid for the Works shall be comprised of the following: .1 .2 CCDC 11 Bid Form: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .6 .3 .6 Agreement to Bond. Insurance. Taxes. Permits. Testing and Inspections. Bid Form Requirements. Bid Signing. Appendices A to G inclusive.
.2 .3 5.2
.3 .4
Construction Schedule.
Alternatives quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owners option. Accepted alternatives will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement.
PAGE 00 20 00 - 5
6.0 6.1 .1
BID ENCLOSURES/REQUIREMENTS AGREEMENT TO BOND Submit with the Bid Form an Agreement to Bond, stating that the surety for the Bidder is willing to supply the Performance Bond required. State in the Bid Form, as a separate price, the cost to provide a 50% Performance Bond and a 50% Labour and Material Bond as it may be requested by the Owner. Indicate the cost of bonds in the Appendix G as a separate price to the bid cost. INSURANCE .1 Provide a signed Undertaking of Insurance on a standard form provided by the insurance company stating their intention to provide insurance to the bidder in accordance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. TAXES .1 Except as noted, tenderers shall include in their tenders, applicable federal and provincial taxes, all other customs, duties and excise taxes for all of the work, VAT (Value Added Taxes) to be extra and should NOT be included in the total of the base bid price. PERMITS .1 The Owner has applied for and paid for the development permit, site plan application and demolition and building permit. All other permits, fees, inspection, certification fees and charges are to be applied and paid for by the Contractor. It is the Bidders responsibility to confirm with the relevant authorities what fees, levies, security deposits, or other charges of any kind (if any) are applicable to this project and to allow for these in the submitted tender. Fees associated with the above shall be included in the tender price. Utility connection charges shall be applied against the cash allowance included in Section 01 20 00. TESTING AND INSPECTIONS .1 Any testing and inspection work included under the general contract, shall in all cases be carried out in coordination with the Consultant. The Owner shall deliver Consultants certificates of inspections where such are required.
.2 6.2
6.3
6.4
.2
6.4
to
the
.2
Testing and verification by an Inspection Company shall be engaged for and paid for by the Owner unless noted otherwise. The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and scheduling of the Inspection Company. The Consultant will submit the names and cost quotations of at lease three (3) Inspection Companies and the Owner will select one. The mandate of the Inspections by the Contractor and those by the Inspection Company is detailed in Section 01 40 00 - Quality Control and in supplementary general requirements. All instructions by the Inspection Company shall be considered as valid as those of the Consultant and shall be binding and final.
.3 .4 .5
PAGE 00 20 00 - 6
6.5 .1 .2 .3 6.6 .1 .2 .3 .4
BID FORM REQUIREMENTS State in the Bid Form, the time in days required to complete the Works. The completion date in the Agreement shall be this completion time added to the commencement date. Include a schedule outlining start (final dates, critical path, etc.) assuming a start date of construction within 7 days of award of contract). The Owner requires that the Work of this Contract be completed in a timely fashion and consideration will be given to the time of completion when reviewing the submitted bids. BID SIGNING The Bid Forms shall be signed under seal by the Bidder. Sole Proprietorship: Signature of sole proprietor in the presence of a witness who will also sign. Insert the words Sole Proprietor under the signature. Affix seal. Partnership: Signature of all partners in the presence of a witness who will also sign. Insert the word Partner under each signature. Affix seal to each signature. Limited Company: Signature of a duly authorized signing officer(s) in their normal signatures. Insert the officers capacity in which the signing officer acts, under each signature. Affix the corporate seal. If the bid is signed by officials other than the President and Secretary of the company, or the President-Secretary-Treasurer of the company, a copy of the by-law resolution of the Board of Directors authorizing them to do so, must also be submitted with the Bid in the Bid envelope. Joint Venture: Each party of the joint venture shall execute the Bid under their respective seals in a manner appropriate to such party as described above, similar to the requirements of a Partnership. APPENDICES TO THE BID FORM .1 .2 .3 .4 Appendix A - Contract Documents: Include a complete listing of all documents and information issued by which the Bid Price was derived. Appendix B Subcontractors: Include the names of all Subcontractors and the portion(s) of the Work the Bidder shall perform. Appendix C - Unit Prices Architectural: Include a listing of unit prices (including overhead and profit) specifically requested by the Contract Documents to be used for changes in the Work. Appendix D Separate Price Architectural: Include a listing of separate prices (including overhead and profit) specifically requested by the Contract Documents to be used for changes in the Work. Appendix E Alternatives: Include a list of alternative work and/or materials as suggested by the Bidder resulting in changes to the specifications. Appendix F Breakdown of Subcontract prices: Include the list of all Subcontract prices for the work the Subcontractor will perform. Appendix G Performance, Labour and Material Bonds: included the documents as referenced in Article 3 of Bid Form.
.5
6.7
.5 .6 .7
PAGE 00 20 00 - 7
.8
Complete and submit all Appendices with Bid Form.
6.8
BID SUMMARIES SITE SERVICING AND GRADING, EXTERNAL ROAD WORKS ENTRANCES AND WORK BEYOND PROPERTY LINE Site Servicing and Grading and External Road Works, Entrances and Work Beyond Property Line as prepared by SCS Consulting Group Ltd. .1 Site Servicing and Grading, Road Works, Entrances and Work Beyond Property Line identified under Site Services shall be tendered as unit price tenders. Bid Forms for these Works are carried in the specification documents as prepared by the Consultant by SCS Consulting Group Ltd and MUST be completed and annexed to the Bid Form carried under Document 00 41 00. Documents for these Works are included in the tender package and are required to be coordinated by the general bidders as part of this contract. The general bidder shall include in the tender bid the cost of coordination and all other costs the bidder may incur including liability coverage for these Works and shall make no claim beyond the stated bid price.
.2
.3
7.0 7.1 .1
OFFER ACCEPTANCE/ REJECTION DURATION OF OFFER Bids shall remain open to acceptance and shall be irrevocable for a period of forty five (45) days after the bid closing date. ACCEPTANCE OF OFFER .1 The Owner may, in its sole discretion and at any time during the tender process: (a) reject any or all offers; (b) accept any offer; (c) accept any offer that is not the lowest offer; (d) if only one offer is made, elect to accept or reject it; (e) elect not to proceed with the tender process or the construction project; (f) alter the timetable, the tender process or any other aspect of it; (g) accept any alternative proposal; and/or (h) cancel this process and subsequently advertise or call for new offers for the subject matter of this tender process. After acceptance by the Owner, the Consultant on behalf of the Owner, will issue to the successful bidder, a written bid acceptance. After a bid has been accepted, all rejected bids will be returned to the respective bidders without interest. The Owner, at its sole discretion and without liability, may offer full or partial explanations or reasons for its decision to any or all participants.
7.2
.2 .3
.4
END OF SECTION
PAGE 00 20 00 - 8
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury Project No: 2011.008 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.
1.1.1.
SECTION 00 24 02 PROCUREMENT SCOPE
GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK

Scope of Work for Core and Shell Tender Package: 1.1.1.1. Verify conditions on Site. Verify condition of new construction completed under Phase 1 of this Project issued for tender on Sept 1, 2011. Phase 1 consisted of: 1.1.1.1.1. 1.1.1.1.2. 1.1.1.1.3. 1.1.1.1.4. 1.1.1.1.5. 1.1.1.1.6. 1.1.1.1.7. 1.1.1.1.8. 1.1.1.1.9. 1.1.1.2. Selective demolition of existing structure. Selective removal of existing footings and foundations. Capping of existing services. Compaction of excavated areas with clean fill. New concrete footings. New concrete foundations. New concrete stair structures. Backfilling. Site services as defined by the engineering documents.
Confirm with the Owner and consultant in writing, that the existing conditions completed under Phase 1 of the Project are adequate to commence and complete the Scope of Work contained herein and contained in the Contract Documents that cover this tender package, prior to the commencement of the work contained in this Contract. Commencement of work contained in this Contract constitutes acceptance of Phase 1 Work. Provide all connections to new and existing building including the connections required by structure including roof, walls and floors such as continuation of the air/vapour barrier, connection joints, roof membrane etc. Provision of structural steel. Provide granular back fill to underside of slab. Provide insulation to underside of slab. Slab on grade, including concrete floor finishing, and preparation of concrete at 2 3rd floor slabs for future finishes. Construction of exit stairs and railings. Provision of exterior doors.
nd
1.1.1.3.
1.1.1.4. 1.1.1.5. 1.1.1.6. 1.1.1.7. 1.1.1.8. 1.1.1.9.
and
1.1.1.10. Provision of new roof system including integration to tie in existing roof to new roof and repair of existing roof system. 1.1.1.11. Provision of exterior wall assemblies: Curtain walls, Precast and ACM wall panels, complete with insulation, membranes and flashing.
PAGE 00 24 02 - 1
SECTION 00 24 02 PROCUREMENT SCOPE
1.1.1.12. Provision of new and repair of existing: fireproofing, fire stopping and intumescent fire resistive coatings. 1.1.1.13. Required preparation of existing and new construction for application or installation of finishes. 1.1.1.14. Coordination of new construction with Mechanical, Plumbing, Electrical, Voice and Data Conduits. Work by Mechanical and Plumbing not included in Tender scope. 1.1.1.15. Provision of Electrical, Voice and Data Conduits and Rough-Ins. 1.1.1.16. Curbs and asphalt paving. 1.1.1.17. Landscaping. 1.1.1.18. Coordination of this Scope of Work with Mechanical and Plumbing contract performed by others. 1.1.1.19. All other work defined in the following Specifications and Contract Documents. 1.1.1.20. Drawings that make up this Scope of Work.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 00 24 02 - 2
1.1.1.
SECTION 00 30 00 AVAILABLE INFORMATION
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Read and conform to: 1.1.1.1. 1.1.1.2. The General Conditions of the Contract CCDC 2. Section 00 73 00, Supplementary Conditions.
1.1.2.
Comply with Division 1 requirements and documents referred to herein.
1.2.
1.2.1. 1.2.2. 1.2.3.
AVAILABLE INFORMATION
Following information available to Bidder is bound in specifications appended to this Section. Following Reports is are for information only. Neither Consultant nor Owner assumes any liability for items extracted from Reports. Geotechnical Investigation Reports: 1.2.3.1. A copy of a geotechnical investigation report and related letters, prepared by Owner's consultant for the Place of the Work are bound herein. Refer to following: 1.2.3.1.1. Geotechnical Investigation Proposed Industrial Building 2 Bales Drive West East Gwillimbury, Ontario, dated January 10, 2005, prepared by Shaheen & Peaker Limited. Letter Re: Update for Geotechnical Investigation Proposed Industrial Building 2 Bales Drive West East Gwillimbury, Ontario dated June 15, 2011, prepared by Coffey Geotechnics Inc..
1.2.3.1.2.
1.2.3.2. 1.2.3.3.
Geotechnical investigation documents are not guaranteed to be representative of actual subsurface conditions. Submit a Base Bid Price which includes and accommodates work implied in, or reasonably inferable from, investigation documents. Owner's investigation consultant will be interpreter of documents. Consultant will be arbiter of a change to Contract Price and/or Contract Time. When calculating soil volumes for bidding purposes, assume flat plane geometric layers formed by straight lines drawn between subgrade elevations, for each material identified in soils report.
1.2.3.4.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 00 30 00 - 1
Date: _________________________
SECTION 00 41 00 BID FORM
Submitted by: (referred to herein as Contractor) __________________________________________________________________________________ (name) _______________________________________________________________ (address) _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ To: Project: Owner: 685109 Ontario Limited Renovation and Expansion at 2 West Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury Ontario
Project No.: 2011.008 1.0 .1 OFFER Having examined the Place of The Work and all matters referred to in the Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, CCDC 2-2008 Edition, Supplementary Conditions to CCDC 2-2008 Edition, the Contract Documents prepared by R.H. Carter Architects Inc. (Consultant) we the undersigned, hereby offer to enter into a Contract to perform the Work for the price of: a) Tender Bid:NOT including HST $_____________________
TOTAL Tender Bid Cost $ ______________________________________________________________________dollars, ($ .2 .3 .4 . ) in lawful money of Canada, NOT including the HST.
For additional work authorized as Change Orders by the Consultant in accordance with the Contract Documents, a ten percent (10%) mark-up shall apply. We have included herewith, the required Agreement to Bond as required by the Instructions to Bidders. All applicable federal taxes and provincial taxes are included in the Bid Price. (excluding the Harmonized Sales Tax)
PAGE 00 41 00 - 1
2.0 .1 .2
ACCEPTANCE This offer shall be open to acceptance and is irrevocable for 45 days from the Bid closing date. If this Bid is accepted by the Owner within the time period stated above, we will: .1 .2 Execute the Agreement within seven days of receipt of the form of execution. Furnish the required bonds within seven calendar days of receipt of the Letter of Intent. Commence work within days after written notification of acceptance of this bid or as otherwise required by the Owner. Complete the Work in of acceptance of this Bid. ( ) calendar weeks from notification
.3
.4
3.0
APPENDICES .1 The following appendices are attached to the bid: Appendix A - A list of the Contract Documents Appendix B List of Subcontractors Appendix E - Alternatives Appendix F - A Breakdown of Contract Prices Appendix G - Performance, Labour and Material Bonds Documents
4.0 .1
ADDENDA The following Addenda have been received. The modifications to the Contract Documents noted therein have been considered and all costs thereto are included in the Bid Price. Addendum # Addendum # Addendum # Dated Dated Dated
PAGE 00 41 00 - 2
5.0 BID FORM SIGNATURE(S)
The Corporate Seal of
(Bidder - please print)
was hereunto affixed in the presence of:
Authorized signing officer
Title (Seal)
Title (Seal)
Title (Seal)
If the Bid is a joint venture or partnership, add additional forms of execution for each member of the joint venture in the appropriate form or forms as above.
PAGE 00 41 00 - 3
Appendix A Contract Documents

Herewith is the list of Contract Documents which setout the required Work as referred to in Article A-1 of Form CCDC-2: (Owner) 685109 Ontario Limited Dated: and which is an integral part of the Bid Form.
1- Documents : TABLE OF CONTENTS As prepared by R.H. Carter Architects Inc., dated September 30th, 2011 Addendum # Addendum # Addendum # Dated Dated Dated page (s) page (s) page (s)
2- Documents: LIST OF DRAWINGS As prepared by R.H. Carter Architects Inc., dated September 30th, 2011 Addendum # Addendum # Addendum # Dated Dated Dated page (s) page (s) page (s)
3- Documents : LIST OF Schedules As prepared by R.H. Carter Architects Inc., dated September 30, 2011 Addendum # Addendum # Addendum # Dated Dated Dated page (s) page (s) page (s)
PAGE 00 41 00 - 4
Appendix B List Of Bidders

Herewith is the list of Subcontractors referred to in Article 3 of the Bid Form submitted by: (Bidder) Dated: and which is an integral part of the Bid Form.
We, the above named bidder, propose to use for the above named project/ contract, the following subcontractors named below and coordinated by us: SECTION OF WORK
General Conditions & Overhead Contract Closeout / As Built drawings Excavation and Backfill Formwork and Reinforcing Landscaping Fencing And Gates Concrete Concrete Caissons Reinforcing Steel Precast Concrete Slabs Precast Concrete Panels Floor Finishing Masonry Structural Steel Steel Joists Cold Form Channel Framing Miscellaneous Metal Architectural Handrails and Stairs Aluminum Composite Panel Metal Siding Carpentry Millwork Roofing Roof Anchors Sprayed fire Protection Firestopping Wood Doors Metal Doors & Frames Overhead Doors Fire Shutters Aluminum Windows & Curtain Wall Glass & Glazing Gypsum Board & Acoustic Tile Ceramic / Porcelain Tile Hardwood Flooring Resilient Flooring & Carpet
NAME
____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ___________________________________________ ___________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________
PAGE 00 41 00 - 5
Appendix B Contd.
Painting Miscellaneous Specialties Elevator Aluminum Composite Panel Washroom Accessories Roof Anchors Miscellaneous Specialties (__________________) Miscellaneous Specialties (__________________) Miscellaneous Specialties (__________________) Miscellaneous Specialties (__________________) Miscellaneous Specialties (__________________) Miscellaneous Specialties (__________________) Miscellaneous Specialties (__________________) Miscellaneous Specialties (__________________) Irrigation System Plumbing H.V.A.C. Sprinklers Electrical Allowance Millwork Allowance finish hardware Allowance service connections Allowance: (_____________________) Moisture Protection/Membrane Waterproofing 50% Performance & 50% Material & Labour Bond ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________
PAGE 00 41 00 - 6
Appendix C
Herewith is the list of Unit Prices referred to in Article 3 of the Bid Form submitted by: (Bidder) (Owner) Dated _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ and which is an integral part of the Bid Form.
The following are Unit Prices for specific portions of the Work as listed, and are applicable to authorized variations from the Contract Documents. The prices quoted below shall remain in effect for the duration of the Contract. We offer to do such extra work or to delete such work as specified below, as the Consultant may require, with increases to or reductions in the Contract Price corresponding to the amount of extra work or deletions multiplied by the unit prices below. The unit prices include all costs, taxes, overhead, profit, etc., and will not require any further charge beyond the product of unit price x quantity. Nature of Work Unit Unit Price for: Extra Work Deletions
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Excavation of earth Trenching by machine Excavation and disposal of soil Import of MTC Granular B fill, compacted Import of MTC Granular A fill, compacted Import of MTC Granular A 32 MPa concrete 25 MPa concrete 140 mm normal conc. block supplied and installed 190 mm normal conc. block supplied and installed Asphalt supplied and installed
/cu m /cu m /cu m /cu m /cu m /cu m /cu m /cu m
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
/sq m /sq m /cu m
_ _ _
11.
PAGE 00 41 00 - 7
Appendix D
Herewith is the list of Separate Prices referred to in Article 3 of the Bid Form submitted by: (Bidder) dated and which is an integral part of the Bid Form.
The following are Separate Prices for specific portions of the Work as listed, and are not included in the Base bid for the Contract. The Separate prices include all costs, taxes, overhead, profit, etc Nature of Work Separate Price for Work
PAGE 00 41 00 - 8
Appendix E - Alternatives
Herewith is the list of Alternatives referred to in Article 3 of the Bid Form submitted by: (Bidder) Dated: and which is an integral part of the Bid Form. _
We offer to supply and install, as required, the following alternative work or any part of it, for the corresponding increases to or reductions in the Bid Price, as set out below. Prices (effect on Bid Price) for alternative equipment, materials and/or methods include all resulting mechanical, electrical and other changes in related section of the specifications. Alternative Work/Product Impact on Schedule Effect on Tender Sum ($) Increase Reduction
PAGE 00 41 00 - 9
Appendix F Contract Values

Herewith is the Breakdown of Subcontract prices referred to in Article 3 of the Bid Form submitted by: (Bidder) Dated: SECTION OF WORK
General Conditions & Overhead Contract Closeout / As Built drawings Excavation and Backfill Formwork and Reinforcing Landscaping Fencing And Gates Concrete Concrete Caissons Reinforcing Steel Precast Concrete Slabs Precast Concrete Panels Floor Finishing Masonry Structural Steel Steel Joists Cold Form Channel Framing Miscellaneous Metal Architectural Handrails and Stairs Aluminum Composite Panel Metal Siding Carpentry Millwork Roofing Roof Anchors Sprayed fire Protection Firestopping Wood Doors Metal Doors & Frames Overhead Doors Fire Shutters Aluminum Windows & Curtain Wall Glass & Glazing Gypsum Board & Acoustic Tile Ceramic / Porcelain Tile
______________________________________________________________________ and which is an integral part of the Bid Form. SUBCONTRACT VALUE
____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ___________________________________________ ___________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________
PAGE 00 41 00 - 10
Appendix F Contd.
Hardwood Flooring Resilient Flooring & Carpet Painting Miscellaneous Specialties Elevator Aluminum Composite Panel Washroom Accessories Roof Anchors Miscellaneous Specialties (__________________) Miscellaneous Specialties (__________________) Miscellaneous Specialties (__________________) Miscellaneous Specialties (__________________) Miscellaneous Specialties (__________________) Miscellaneous Specialties (__________________) Miscellaneous Specialties (__________________) Miscellaneous Specialties (__________________) Irrigation System Plumbing H.V.A.C. Sprinklers Electrical Allowance Millwork Allowance finish hardware Allowance service connections Allowance: (_____________________) Moisture Protection/Membrane Waterproofing 50% Performance & 50% Material & Labour Bond ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________
PAGE 00 41 00 - 11
Appendix G Labour And Material Bond

Herewith is a copy of the Performance, Labour and Material Bonds Documents referred to in Article 3 of the Bid Form submitted by: (Bidder)
Dated:
and which is an integral part of the Bid Form.
The Cost for bonding is to be included in the bid/contract price for this project, said amount shall be identified as a separate cost item in the bid form. The accepted Contractor shall provide all the necessary documentation within 7 calendar days of receipt of Owners Letter of Intent. After acceptance by the Owner of the Performance, Labour and Material Bonds, should the Owner request the shall not be refundable. termination of bonds after issuance the amount of $
PAGE 00 41 00 - 12
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 00 73 00 Project No: 2011.008 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
The Agreement between the Owner and Contractor made on the day of in the year 2011 referred to in these Supplementary Conditions as the Agreement, the Definitions and the General Conditions of the Stipulated Price Contract, each forming part of the Standard Construction Document CCDC 2 2008, for Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury and entered into between:
685109 Ontario Limited as Owner and
as Contractor
are amended as follows: AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR ARTICLE A-1 The Work Insert: May 1, 2012 as date of Substantial Performance of the Work Add new paragraph: 1.4 Time is of the essence in the Contract. It is agreed that one of the reasons the Contractor was selected to perform the Work is the Contractors covenant that it will achieve the Substantial Performance of the Work by May 1, 2012, and the Contractor acknowledges that it is critical to Owner that Substantial Performance of the Work be achieved by May 1, 2012. DEFINITIONS Delete within the general scope of the Contract Documents in the definition of Change Directive. Add definition: Good Industry Practice means using standards, practices, methods and procedures to a good commercial standard, in conformity with Applicable Law and having regard to the standard of care set out in 3.1.3. PAGE 00 73 00 - 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE STIPULATED PRICE CONTRACT PART 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS GC 1.1 Contract Documents In paragraph 1.1.7.1 the order of priority of documents is changed so that the Supplementary Conditions have the highest priority. 1.1.11 The specifications and drawings for the Work are integral. Any Work necessary and described in the specifications but not shown on the drawings or necessary and shown on the drawings but not described in the specifications, shall be deemed part of the Work and shall be carried out as part of this Contract. PART 2. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT GC 2.2 Role of the Consultant Add new paragraph: 2.2.19 Verbal instructions, regardless of their source, will not be binding unless they are confirmed in writing by or on behalf of the person that gives them. GC 2.4 Defective Work Delete and replace with: 2.4.3 If in the opinion of the Consultant it is not expedient or feasible to correct defective work or work not performed as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may deduct from the amount otherwise due to the Contractor the greater of the difference in value between the work as performed and that called for by the Contract Documents and the cost of the work necessary to correct any non-compliance with the Contract Documents. If the Owner and the Contractor do not agree on the difference in value or the cost to correct, they shall refer the matter to the Consultant for a determination.
PAGE 00 73 00 - 2
PART 3. EXECUTION OF THE WORK GC 3.1 Control of the Work Add new paragraph: 3.1.3 The Contractor shall exercise the standard of care, skill and diligence that would normally be provided by a first-class, experienced and prudent contractor supplying similar services, in a timely, good and workmanlike manner, it being acknowledged by the Contractor that its duties and responsibilities shall be interpreted in accordance with this standard and any default or alleged default by the Contractor in the performance of its obligations, duties and responsibilities shall be similarly interpreted in accordance with this standard. GC 3.4 Document Review Delete and replace with: 3.4.1 The Contractor acknowledges having conducted a thorough review of the Contract Documents and has reported to the Consultant and Owner any omission, error or inconsistency (Design Issue) found by the Contractor in the Contract Documents during its review. If the Contractor does discover any Design Issue in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected until it has complied with the instructions of the Consultant. The Contractor acknowledges that it is responsible for the risks assumed by the Contractor in Section 3.14. It is intended that the review of the Contract Documents conducted by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 3.4.1 be carried out by the Contractor using their own experiences and expertise in accordance with the standard of care set out in Section 3.1.3. GC 3.13 Cleanup Add new paragraph: 3.13.4 If there is a dispute concerning the removal of waste products or debris, the Owner may remove them at the cost of the Contractor. Add new General Condition: GC 3.14 Design Issues 3.14.1 The Contractor is responsible for: .1 Design Issues which are properly inferable, readily apparent or readily discoverable from the Contract Documents as forming part of the Work or contrary to Good Industry Practice as it relates to the constructability of the Work;
PAGE 00 73 00 - 3
.2
Design Issues which are related to design coordination and are caused by inconsistencies, conflicts, exclusions, interferences or gaps that are properly inferable, readily apparent or readily discoverable from the Contract Documents; Design Issues which are related to design completion and where the design intent is properly inferable, readily apparent or readily discoverable from the Contract Documents and has not been fully detailed or specified, (collectively, the Contractor Design Issues).
.3
3.14.2 The Owner is responsible for the design, in all respects other than Contractor Design Issues, including the core efficacy and functionality of the design, both in terms of ability and capacity to: .1 produce the desired effect in terms of the building systems, including the structural, mechanical, electrical and information technology systems; meet the requirements of the Building Code in effect at the time the Building Permit was issued, but this shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to provide for all standard Building Code requirements applicable to the installation of the Work, whether or not set out in the specifications; and conform to the functional needs of the Owner.
.2
.3
3.14.3 Subject to and without limiting the Owners responsibilities under 3.14.2 and provided the Owner fulfills its responsibilities under 3.14.2, the Contractor shall deliver fully functional and operational systems and all components shown in the drawings shall be provided as fully complete and fully functional systems in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall verify the dimensions shown in the drawings before the layout of the Work. PART 5 PAYMENT GC 5.1 Financing Information Required of the Owner Delete GC 5.1 Financing Information Required of the Owner and delete all references to GC 5.1 FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER.
PAGE 00 73 00 - 4
GC 5.9 Non-conforming Work Delete and replace with: 5.9.1 Owner may withhold from the payment otherwise due at the time of Substantial Performance of the Work a holdback amount that is 200% of the amount estimated by the Consultant for Owner to complete and rectify work not in accordance with the Contract Documents (Minor Deficiency Holdback). The Consultant shall inspect the Work and shall provide a monthly progress report to the Owner detailing any work that has not been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. As the Contractor completes the incomplete work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner shall release from the Minor deficiency Holdback the amount allocated by the Consultant to the completed work. PART 6 CHANGES IN THE WORK GC 6.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions Delete and replace with: 6.4.1 The Contractor acknowledges that it has carried out a detailed and thorough inspection of the Site. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the Site which are not properly inferable, readily apparent or readily discoverable from inspections of the Site carried out by the Contractor, the Contractor will promptly notify the Consultant who will investigate such conditions and who will then report to the Owner with a finding as to whether such conditions were or were not described in or were not properly inferable, readily apparent or readily discoverable from the Contractors inspections of the Site in accordance with the standard in 3.1.3. 6.4.2 If the conditions were properly inferable, readily apparent or readily discoverable from an inspection of the Site as per 6.4.1, then the Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time. 6.4.3 If the conditions were not properly inferable, readily apparent or readily discoverable from an inspection of the Site as per 6.4.1, and the conditions justify an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, the Consultant may issue a Change Order as provided in Section 6.2.
PAGE 00 73 00 - 5
GC 6.5 Delay 6.5.2 Delete last sentence.
Add new paragraph: 6.5.6 It is agreed by the parties that in the event the Contractor fails to obtain Substantial Performance of the Work by the date set forth herein and in accordance with the Contract Documents, damages will be sustained by the Owner. The parties acknowledge that it is and will be impractical and extremely difficult to ascertain and determine the actual damage and that the sum as calculated in accordance with this Section 6.5.6 represents a reasonable estimate of the actual damages. The parties agree that the Contractor shall pay the Owner liquidated damages (including HST), and not as a penalty, of $5,000.00 per day for each and every calendar day beyond the Substantial Performance of the Work which the Work is delayed.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 00 73 00 - 6
1.1.1.
SECTION 01 10 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1. 1.2.2. 1.2.3.
SPECIFICATION FORMAT
Specifications are addressed to Contractor. Specifications are not intended as detailed description of installation methods but serve to indicate particular requirements in completing the Work. Where Contract Documents do not provide sufficient information for complete installation of item, then as supplement, comply with manufacturer's written instructions for quality of work. Portions of Specifications are written in short form. Therefore, it shall be understood that where item of the Work is stated in heading followed by material, equipment, component, or operation, words "shall be", "shall consist of" or similar words or phrases are implied which denote supply, fabricate and supply, install, provide or commission of such materials, equipment or operations for component of the Work designated by heading. Where items in Contract Documents are referred to in singular, provide as many as required to complete the Work. Words used in 1 gender only shall mean females as well as males and conversely. Drawings, Lists or Schedules of Items are intended to show scope and arrangement of work. For location of item described refer to such Drawings, Lists or Schedules unless location stipulated in Specifications.
1.2.4.
1.2.5.
1.3.
1.3.1.
DEFINITIONS
Consultant: The Consultant is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement. The Consultant is R. H. Carter Architects Inc.. The term Consultant means the Consultant or the Consultant's authorized representative. For greater certainty, Mirkwood Engineering is the Consultant's authorized representative on structural matters and The Mitchell Partnership Inc. is the Consultant's authorized representative with respect to mechanical matters Hamerschlag & Joffe Inc. is the Consultant's authorized representative with respect to electrical matters. Day: Day means a calendar day. Install: Install means completion of the following activities, including the associated labour, services, plant, Construction Equipment required to: 1.3.3.1. 1.3.3.2. 1.3.3.3. 1.3.3.4. Remove Products from storage and locate for placement, Position and adjust Products for final placement, Affix and anchor Products in final placement, in accordance with manufacturers instructions and Contract Documents, Commission and adjust Products for proper operation.
1.3.2. 1.3.3.
PAGE 01 10 00 - 1
1.3.4.
Make Good: Make Good means repairing, restoring, refurbishing, rehabilitating, or performing filling operation on any existing components disturbed due to work of this Contract, to at least the condition existing at the commencement of the Work, in terms of construction integrity, finishes, alignment with existing adjoining surfaces, compatibility of materials, sound attenuation criteria, exfiltration/infiltration requirements, air/vapour barrier and thermal continuity. Supply: Supply means completion of the following activities, including the associated labour, services, plant, Construction Equipment required to: 1.3.5.1. 1.3.5.2. 1.3.5.3. 1.3.5.4. Fabricate or purchase Products, Deliver Products to the Place of the Work, Unload Products, Store Products in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
1.3.5.
1.4.
1.4.1.
DISCREPANCIES/CONFLICTS/OMISSIONS
If discrepancies or conflicts in, or omissions from Drawings, Specifications or other Contract Documents are suspected, or if there is doubt as to meaning or intent thereof, notify Consultant at once. Where there is conflict between Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract, GC 1.1 shall apply with the most stringent requirements prevailing. Advise the Consultant in writing of any contradictions, discrepancies, omissions or errors discovered or revealed. Do not proceed before obtaining clarifications and directions from the Consultant in writing. Failure to follow this shall result in Contractor assuming full responsibility for resulting circumstances and costs. Applicable Law which may include without limitation: Contract Documents are intended to be in compliance with and federal, provincial and municipal laws, by-laws, regulations and other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Perform Work in conformity with such requirements. Where standards of law differ, the most stringent standards shall govern. Comply with Consultant's written instructions or explanations. Comply with GC 3.14 Design Issues. Promptly and not later than within 5 Working Days of becoming aware of circumstances which may require a change in the Work or other directions, give written notice to Consultant outlining such circumstances and request written directions. Do no work in affected area, or that would prevent Consultant from properly assessing situation or evaluating change, without its prior written approval. Consultant will act promptly to give Contractor directions so the Work is not unreasonably delayed.
1.4.2.
1.4.3.
1.4.4. 1.4.5. 1.4.6.
1.5.
1.5.1. 1.5.2. 1.5.3.
DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK

Refer to Section 00 24 02 Procurement Scope for description of Scope of Work. Work of this Contract includes furnishing labour, materials, equipment, services and other related expenses to execute complete construction of facility specified under Contract Documents. Term "NIC" means Work of this Project which is not being performed or provided under this Contract; term means "Not In this Contract" or "Not a Part of the Work to be Performed or Provided by Contractor". "NIC" work may be specified or indicated on Drawings as an aid to Contractor in scheduling amount of time and materials necessary for completion of Contract.
1.5.4.
PAGE 01 10 00 - 2
1.6.1. 1.6.2.
SCHEDULING
Base sequence and scheduling of construction on maintaining continuous operation and access to the Work during construction. Phase construction as described herein. Notify Owner in writing 7 Days prior to beginning work in an occupied area. Owner will accommodate request within 7 Days of notification. Co-ordination with authority at the Place of the Work is crucial. Submit a progress schedule before commencement of the Work. Coordinate any suggested changes to schedule with Owner. Ensure schedule includes adequate time for Product delivery and Shop Drawing preparation, review and resubmission. Allow for un-schedule interruption to schedule of the Work and suspend parts of the Work affected to permit Owner to relocate furniture and equipment from Place of the Work, into finished spaces. Owner will coordinate this interruption.
1.6.3.
1.7.
1.7.1.
COMPLETION DEADLINES
Phase and schedule the Work to meet deadlines originally committed to by Contractor: 1.7.1.1. 1.7.1.2. 1.7.1.3. Phase 1: Demolition, Site Services and Underground. Phase 2: Core and Shell. Phase 3: Finishes.
1.8.
1.8.1. 1.8.2.
OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
Provide partial occupancy and full occupancy as required in areas that have been completed as required by Owner in order to maintain a functioning facility. Complete following requirements 2 weeks prior to scheduled turn over date and submit all required documentation to Consultant for review and comments at that time: 1.8.2.1. 1.8.2.2. 1.8.2.3. 1.8.2.4. 1.8.2.5. 1.8.2.6. 1.8.2.7. 1.8.2.8. 1.8.2.9. provide Certificates from Hydro, other utilities and authorities having jurisdictions. provide confirmation in writing fire proofing and firestopping have been installed in area(s) scheduled to be occupied in accordance with requirements of Contract. complete labeling of equipment and emergency power fixtures. train staff in accordance with requirements of Contract and submit video tape and/or CD as applicable and a list with name of attendees. submit Record Drawings for area(s) to be occupied. record and provide Fire Alarm System complete with address on Record Drawings. provide typed Panel Schedules and installed within panels. test emergency lighting and provide data of lights levels. test exit lighting.
1.8.2.10. provide thermo scan in accordance with requirements of Contract. 1.8.2.11. provide single line distribution diagram in main electrical and secondary electrical rooms that reflect modifications to Normal and Emergency Power distribution systems. 1.8.2.12. complete Protection and Short Circuit Study and submit results.
PAGE 01 10 00 - 3
1.8.2.13. provide in writing that power distribution for both Normal and Emergency Power protection equipment has been adjusted to setting recommended in coordination study for Normal and Emergency Power distribution system. 1.8.2.14. provide lighting test reports for battery packs for areas covered by battery units. 1.8.2.15. provide completed Fire Alarm verification report with no deficiencies. 1.8.2.16. test flow switches as required in Contract. 1.8.2.17. conduct audibility test and conform in writing that audibility requirements have been met in accordance with Code requirements. 1.8.2.18. provide in writing that interface of Fire Alarm System to Dimming System has been completed and tested. 1.8.2.19. provide confirmation and test results in writing regarding interface of Fire Alarm System to Security System; Fire Alarm System to Mechanical Equipment; Fire Alarm System to Facility Management as applicable. 1.8.2.20. provide Fire Alarm Graphic reviewed by Fire Department. Include in Contract Price provision of temporary Fire Alarm Graphic as required to meet phasing requirements of this Project. 1.8.2.21. perform tests on Smoke Control System and provide confirmation in writing that test results have been accepted by Fire Department. 1.8.2.22. perform testing of equipment in accordance with requirements of Contract and equipment manufacturers recommendations. 1.8.2.23. complete commissioning forms for equipment that serves area(s) to be occupied. 1.8.2.24. provide temporary exit signs and ensure its operation prior to support phase of work being turned over. 1.8.2.25. confirm in writing that Owner has received any spare parts such as fuses and similar items.
1.9.
1.9.1.
INTERRUPTIONS IN THE WORK SCHEDULE

Suspend parts of the Work affected as required to allow Consultant to review and accept mock-ups and to establish standards of workmanship for remainder of Work.
1.10.
1.10.1. 1.10.2. 1.10.3.
INCLEMENT WEATHER AND COLD WEATHER WORK

Take precautions during inclement weather and provide adequate protection. Continue the Work, including winter months, if applicable, until the Work is completed and accepted. Inclement weather or extra work caused thereby shall not be considered valid reason for additional payment or delay in satisfactory conclusion of the Work.
1.11.
1.11.1.
PROJECT PERSONNEL
Provide Project personnel at the Place of the Work during execution of each part of the Work.
1.12.
1.12.1.
OWNER OCCUPANCY
Owner reserves right to occupy and use portions of premises, whether partially or entirely completed, or whether completed on schedule or not, provided such occupancy does not interfere with Contractor's continuing work.
PAGE 01 10 00 - 4
1.12.2.
Partial occupancy or installation of equipment by Owner does not imply acceptance of the Work in whole, or in part, nor shall it imply acknowledgment that terms of Contract are fulfilled.
1.13.
1.13.1.
PLACE OF THE WORK

Confine extent of construction activities to area indicated on Drawings as Place of the Work and/or within area defined by property lines. Confine all equipment, materials, debris, offices, storage sheds and storage areas to area previously defined. Contractor has complete and exclusive use of Place of the Work for performance of the Work. Assume responsibility for premises assigned, for performance of the Work. Should Contractor require that boundaries of Place of the Work be temporarily extended, obtain approval of Consultant. Certain restrictions are specified as to use by Contractor of various portions of Place of the Work. Become familiar with these restrictions and establish work plan to accommodate these restrictions. No claims for extra costs due to such restrictions will be considered by Owner. Assume responsibility for care, custody and control of property which is assigned for performance of the Work. Assume responsibility for and Make Good damage to existing property attributable to performance of the Work.
1.13.2. 1.13.3. 1.13.4.
1.13.5.
1.14.
1.14.1.
DEMOLITION, SECURITY AND ACCESS

Coordinate demolition times, security requirements and access with Owner. Provide and pay for responsible security personnel to guard the site and contents of the site. Contractor is responsible for securing the site, and for monitoring and controlling the access of its own forces and all its own Subconsultants, Subcontractors, Suppliers and other Contractors executing parts of the Work on the site or supplying materials to the site.
1.15.
1.15.1. 1.15.2.
SETTING OUT THE WORK

Refer to Section 01 70 00 for Survey submission requirements. Employ the services of a Registered Ontario Land Surveyor, licensed for the location of the Place of the Work, to execute the following: 1.15.2.1. Verify existing grades, lines, orientations, levels, dimensions, site services and bench marks. 1.15.2.2. Lay out the Place of the Work. 1.15.2.3. Locate building. 1.15.2.4. Establish new grades, lines, orientations, levels and dimensions: 1.15.2.4.1. Particularly locations and datum reference elevations of each floor, footings, foundations, piles and caissons.
1.15.2.5. Maintain iron pins, survey bars, monuments, geodetic datum and similar reference markers which are disturbed, moved or lost during construction.
1.16.
1.16.1.
SITE DIMENSIONS
Before proceeding with Shop Drawings, fabrication, or supply of each new part of the Work, examine installed parts of the Work and verify as-built site dimensions to coordinate previously built construction with pending construction.
PAGE 01 10 00 - 5
1.17.1. 1.17.2. 1.17.3.
EXISTING AREAS
Commencement of parts of the Work, in existing areas, will be deemed to signify Contractor's acknowledgment and acceptance of those parts of the Work. Immediately report defects, which affect quality and performance of the Work, in writing to Consultant. Existing premises will remain occupied during the Work. Execute the Work to cause minimum interference with activities in existing premises and maintain maximum safety to occupants. Take reasonable measures to minimize and control noise, dirt and dust during the Work. Before entering existing premises to carry out the Work or to obstruct or take out of use any area of existing premises, or to cause any other interference, request meeting with Consultant in order to reach agreement as to time and length of time you may interfere, possess, obstruct or remove from use any such area or services. Maintain temporary entrances to building(s) including enclosed hoardings as required. Maintain access to existing service entrance(s) at all times, including ready access for fuel oil trucks and delivery vehicles. Bridge excavations with construction to safely support any load that could be imposed or provide personnel to assist in deliveries to building(s) as required.
1.17.4.
1.17.5.
1.18.
1.18.1. 1.18.2.
SIGNS, ADVERTISING AND PUBLICATIONS

Do not erect or display devices, signs or advertisements of labour, materials or services provided to the Work. Signs relative to fire, danger and safety are exempted from this requirement. Do not consent to advertising of the Work, of any kind, without Owner's and Consultant's written approval. Do not consent to mention of the Work in any advertising or articles in any publication relating to the Work without approval of copy and written permission from Owner and Consultant.
1.19.
1.19.1.
PROCEDURE AND SUPPLY OF CRITICAL MATERIALS

Supply Products in ample time to be installed into the Work together with templates, measurements and other information required for placement.
1.20.
1.20.1.
RESTRICTIONS
The Work shall be confined to the Work site limits indicated on Drawings and/or within area defined by property lines. Work on Municipal property shall be carried out under regulations of respective Municipality and authorities having jurisdiction including without any limitations any associated fees, permits, insurance or bonding required. Bring following restrictions to attention of workers on the Work and enforce them: 1.20.2.1. Restrict construction personnel to Place of the Work and necessary access routes to it. Restrict non-construction personnel from site, except for Contractor-authorized visitors. 1.20.2.2. Noisy and disruptive work may require off hours scheduling and shall be coordinated with Owner. 1.20.2.3. Do not use explosives without written acceptance of Consultant and authorities having jurisdiction.
1.20.2.
1.21.
1.21.1.
SECURITY REGULATIONS
Execute the Work in accordance with following security requirements and regulations.
PAGE 01 10 00 - 6
1.21.2.
Ensure only necessary tools and equipment are brought to each work area where access by public is possible. Keep constant check on these items and, at end of each work shift, bring all tools and equipment to storage room as directed. Perform the Work between hours of 7:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m., Monday to Friday. Obtain prior written approval to do work on other Days and times. Owner may issue suitable keys to Contractor, where possible. Contractor shall sign receipt for keys issued and shall be responsible for admittance of its authorized personnel only to areas for which keys provide access. Return keys to Owner immediately upon request. Provide and pay for responsible security personnel to guard the site and contents of the site. Contractor is responsible for securing the site, and for monitoring and controlling the access of its own forces and all its own Sub-consultants, Subcontractors, Suppliers and other Contractors executing parts of the Work on the site or supplying materials to the site. Direct enquiries regarding security regulations to Owner, who will advise Contractor of any additional requirements. Execute the Work taking into consideration movement of occupants.
1.21.3. 1.21.4.
1.21.5. 1.21.6.
1.21.7. 1.21.8.
1.22.
1.22.1. 1.22.2. 1.22.3.
EXISTING SITE SERVICES

Before commencing the Work, establish location and extent of existing services in area of the Work and notify Consultant of findings. Consult public and service companies' records and become fully informed of locations and extent of buried and overhead services and utilities. If disruption of services which affects operation of existing building is necessary, give minimum 5 Working Days notice to Consultant and Owner. Provide temporary services and obtain prior acceptance from Consultant and Owner with regard to timing and methods for providing temporary services.
OR
1.22.4. Submit schedule to and obtain approval from Consultant for each proposed shut-down of active service or facility. Adhere to approved schedule and provide notice to affected parties. Disconnect and relocate public utilities encountered in connection with the Work with minimum disturbance to occupants, their activities, pedestrian, vehicular traffic, public and private property. Issue notices, arrange for or provide services involving: 1.22.4.1. gas mains. 1.22.4.2. water pipes. 1.22.4.3. sanitary and storm sewers. 1.22.4.4. telephone conduits and cables. 1.22.4.5. electrical conduits and cables. 1.22.4.6. fire hydrants. 1.22.4.7. lampposts. 1.22.4.8. sign posts. 1.22.4.9. other similar items.
PAGE 01 10 00 - 7
1.22.5.
Should any piping, sewers, cables, or similar services be encountered during work of this Contract that are not known from Owner's and utility companies' records, notify Consultant and do not proceed with removal or cutting until directed.
1.23.
1.23.1.
TEMPORARY SHUT DOWNS OF CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS

Contractors and Subcontractors shall be aware at all times that ongoing functions and activities of existing facility will continue. Owner and/or existing facility representative may at any given time request that any work of Contract be temporarily ceased. Temporary reasonable shut downs and interference are for emergency and security reasons and they shall not be construed as cause of elimination or restriction of Contractors Working Schedule, claims for delay of Work, nor additional costs. Contract Price shall include and allow for such temporary shut downs.
1.23.2.
1.23.3.
1.24.
1.24.1. 1.24.2.
SITE WORK
Restore existing paving, sidewalks, curbs and landscaping damaged during construction. Provide paving, walks, curbs and landscaping to match existing conditions where not otherwise shown. Provide sod to replace damaged grass and maintain it until it has rooted properly.
1.25.
1.25.1. 1.25.2.
NO SMOKING POLICY
Cooperate, respect and comply with Smoke Free Workplace policy requirements of Place of the Work. This policy applies to everyone who visits and works on this Project. Ensure Contractors staff, Subcontractors and Suppliers performing work on site on Contractors behalf are instructed to comply with Smoke Free Workplace policy requirements.
1.26.
1.26.1.
RELICS AND ANTIQUITIES

Relics and antiquities and items of historical or scientific interest such as cornerstones and contents, commemorative plaques, inscribed tablets and similar objects found on site or in building(s) to be demolished, shall remain property of Owner. Protect such articles and request direction from Consultant. Give immediate notice to Consultant if evidence of archaeological finds are encountered during construction and await his written instructions before proceeding with work in this area.
1.26.2.
1.27.
1.27.1.
ACOUSTIC PARTITIONS/CEILINGS
Partitions and/or ceilings with sound attenuation insulation are designated as Acoustic Partitions and Ceilings. Provide sound rated partitions and ceilings in locations indicated to meet required minimum Sound Transmission Class (STC) ratings. If not stated otherwise, STC rating is 47. Coordinate work of various Subcontractors to avoid short circuiting of the STC rating for Acoustic Partitions and Ceilings. Carefully locate and treat ducts, grilles, diffusers, electrical outlets, boxes and other similar mechanical and electrical devices. Where electrical boxes are situated back-to-back serving each side of the partitions, locate them at least 250 mm (10") apart laterally and if interconnected, use flexible connections. Ensure to seal around cutouts for lights, cabinets, pipes, ducts, electrical boxes and other similar items. Avoid back-to-back penetrations of the diaphragm, flanking paths and door/ borrowed light openings. Refer to Section 09 21 16 for additional requirements.
1.27.2.
1.27.3.
END OF SECTION PAGE 01 10 00 - 8

Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 01 20 00 Project No: 2011.008 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.
1.1.1.
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. CCO: Contemplated Change Order. CD: Change Directive. CO: Change Order. VAT: Value Added Taxes.
1.3.
1.3.1.
CASH FLOW SCHEDULE

Prior to commencement of the Work, submit a detailed cash flow projection schedule indicating anticipated billings on a month-by-month basis for duration of the Work, including timing of holdback release. Update cash flow schedule monthly, recording cumulative as well as monthly totals.
1.3.2.
1.4.
1.4.1. 1.4.2.
PROGRESS BILLING BREAKDOWN

Prior to commencement of the Work, submit a detailed progress billing breakdown and obtain approval of Consultant. Progress billing breakdown shall include itemized values, (each excluding VAT), applied against each of following: 1.4.2.1. 1.4.2.2. 1.4.2.3. 1.4.2.4. 1.4.2.5. mobilization and start-up. general site expenses. each Section of Specifications (Divisions 2 - 49 inclusive). as-built Drawings broken down by Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical and Communications disciplines. Project closeout, comprising separate sums for: 1.4.2.5.1. 1.4.2.5.2. 1.4.2.5.3. manuals. maintenance materials. commissioning and training/demonstration for Owner's staff.
PAGE 01 20 00 - 1
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 01 20 00 Project No: 2011.008 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.5.
1.5.1.
ALTERNATIVE PRICES
Ensure alternative prices include labour, materials, Products, equipment, services and respective overhead, profit, taxes (excluding VAT), disbursements and related charges required for substituting, deleting or changing of materials, Products and/or construction from that shown or specified and represent the total amounts which will be added to or deducted from Base Bid Price (as noted for each item). If any or all following alternatives are required to be included in the Contract, no change to Contract Time will be allowed unless otherwise stated with respective Alternative Price.
1.6.
1.6.1.
CHANGES IN THE WORK DUE TO A SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTION

Supplemental Instruction does not normally include any change in Contract Price nor in Contract Time. Contractor shall formally notify Consultant in writing within 10 Days that Supplemental Instruction requires an amendment in Contract Price and/or Contract Time. If satisfied, Consultant will issue a CCO for processing, or if notification has not been received within 10 Days, it is understood that there are no anticipated changes in Contract Price and Contract Time.
1.7.
1.7.1. 1.7.2.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

Conform to Part 6, CHANGES IN THE WORK. Further to GC 6.1 of the General Conditions of the Contract, promptly and not later than 10 Working Days after becoming aware of circumstances which may require a change in Work or other directions, give written notice to Consultant outlining such circumstances and requesting proposed change. Do no work in affected area, or that would prevent Consultant from properly evaluating circumstances and proposed change, without obtaining written approval. Consultant will act promptly to give Contractor directions so Work is not unreasonably delayed. Advise Consultant in writing of any contradictions, discrepancies, omissions or errors discovered or revealed. Do not proceed before obtaining clarifications and directions from Consultant in writing. Failure to follow this shall result in Contractor assuming full responsibility for resulting circumstances and costs.
1.7.3.
1.8.
1.8.1. 1.8.2.
CHANGE ORDER AND CHANGE DIRECTIVE

Conform to GC 6.2 and GC 6.3. Any variation in the Contract involving a change in total amount of Contract Price or in Contract Schedule shall be initiated through Consultant in form of a CCO describing work proposed under variation and requesting a quotation from Contractor. Three copies of CCOs or CDs will be issued to Contractor. Additional copies of these documents, including referenced Drawings and Schedules, shall be provided by Contractor. Immediately inform all relevant Subcontractors and Suppliers of the proposed change. Upon receipt of a CCO by Contractor and where specifically directed by Consultant, suspend all work affected by the proposed change until a CO is issued, or until CCO is cancelled. Upon receipt of a CD, begin work described therein as soon as possible and prepare a quotation for the work. Return 1 copy of the CCO or CD with a quotation for the work. Include all work described in the CCO and all other work caused, however incidental it may be, by the proposed change. Once the CO is issued by Owner, no further claims for extra costs or time extensions will be accepted.
1.8.3. 1.8.4. 1.8.5. 1.8.6. 1.8.7. 1.8.8.
PAGE 01 20 00 - 2
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 01 20 00 Project No: 2011.008 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
1.8.9. 1.8.10. 1.8.11. If quotation received is unacceptable, Consultant will reject quotation and request revised quotation from Contractor. When Consultant deems quotation acceptable, it will prepare a CO. Value of changes in work shall be determined and processed in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract.
1.9.
1.9.1. 1.9.2.
APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS AND PROGRESS PAYMENTS

Conform to Part 5, PAYMENT. Conform to GC 5.2 and GC 5.3 respectively
END OF SECTION
PAGE 01 20 00 - 3
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 01 30 00 Project No: 2011.008 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.
1.1.1.
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. MSDS: Material Safety Data Sheets. OHSA: Occupational Health and Safety Act. WHMIS: Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System.
1.3.
1.3.1. 1.3.2.
PROJECT COORDINATION
Refer to Section 01 20 00 regarding Contract Modification Procedures. Study Contract Documents to determine extent of work required by each Section and upon which work of other Sections depend and coordinate scope and extent of work to be performed by each trade. Neither organization of Specifications into Divisions and 3-part Section format nor arrangements of Drawings, Schedules and Standard Drawings shall affect in any way Contractor's control in, or diminish its responsibility for, dividing Work or establishing each trade's scope of work. Claims for additional compensation arising from disputes between trades due to lack of coordination by Contractor will not be considered. Coordinate work of each Section as required for satisfactory and expeditious completion of Work. Take field dimensions required. Take into account existing installations to assure best arrangements of components in available space. Consult before commencing Work in critical locations. Fabricate and erect Work to suit field dimensions and field conditions. Provide forms, templates, anchors, sleeves, inserts and accessories or other components required to be fixed to or inserted in Work. As applicable set them in place or instruct related Sections as to their location. Pay cost of extra work caused by and make up time lost as result of failure to comply with these requirements at proper time. Coordinate work of all trades including construction sequence, schedule and interfacing of all work. Coordinate work as required to incorporate metric modular components. Coordinate work of each trade as required for satisfactory and expeditious completion of Work. Ensure components to be built in are supplied in time with setting drawings and other related information. Fabricate and erect Work to suit field dimensions and field conditions. Ensure Contract Documents are fully coordinated with respect to architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical and other specialty requirements. Cooperate and coordinate with Consultant for moving Owner's equipment into building when Work or substantial part thereof is ready for use for purpose intended.
1.3.3.
1.3.4.
1.3.5. 1.3.6.
1.3.7. 1.3.8.
PAGE 01 30 00 - 1
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 01 30 00 Project No: 2011.008 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 1.4.
1.4.1. 1.4.2.
DOCUMENTS ON SITE
Refer to the General Conditions of the Contract. Maintain in good condition and order on site 1 copy of Addenda, proposed changes in Work, change orders, test reports, manufacturer's installation and application instructions, progress photographs, asbuilt drawings, approved progress schedules, minutes of site meetings, and other modifications to Contract Documents.
1.5.
1.5.1. 1.5.2. 1.5.3.
OWNER, CONSULTANT AND CONTRACTOR (OCC) MEETINGS

Purpose: To review policy, financial status and schedule. Period: Monthly on a mutually acceptable schedule. Attendees: 1.5.3.1. 1.5.3.2. 1.5.3.3. Owner. Consultant(s). Contractor.
1.5.4. 1.5.5.
Chair: Consultant. Consultant shall prepare minutes recording decisions, comments, instructions required and a report on Schedule. Consultant will distribute minutes to each participant within 5 Working Days.
1.6.
1.6.1. 1.6.2.
SITE COORDINATION AND PROGRESS MEETINGS

Refer to the General Conditions of the Contract. Conduct site meetings at regular intervals (every week), to identify and resolve construction coordination items, record minutes including significant proceedings and decisions and identify "action by" parties; and reproduce and distribute to meeting participants, copies of minutes within 3 Working Days after each meeting. Consultant also reserves right to call additional special emergency site meetings on short notice without any cost to Owner. Attendees: 1.6.3.1. 1.6.3.2. 1.6.3.3. 1.6.3.4. Contractor's project manager and site superintendent. Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors. Subcontractors invited by Contractor. Owner and/or Consultant(s).
1.6.3.
1.6.4. 1.6.5.
Chair: Contractor. Include following: 1.6.5.1. 1.6.5.2. 1.6.5.3. 1.6.5.4. Prepare agenda for meetings. Distribute written notice of each meeting minimum 5 Days in advance of meeting date, stating time and place, to persons whose presence is required. Make physical arrangements for meetings. Record minutes and attendees; include significant proceedings and decisions.
PAGE 01 30 00 - 2
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 01 30 00 Project No: 2011.008 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
1.6.5.5. 1.6.5.6. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes after each meeting to parties attending meeting, to parties affected by decisions made at meeting and to Consultant. Ensure representatives of Contractor, Contractor's consultants, Subcontractors and Suppliers attending meetings are qualified and authorized to act on behalf of entity each represents. Ensure relative information is available to allow meetings to be conducted efficiently. Consultant may attend meetings to ascertain Work is consistent with Contract. Documents and Construction Progress Schedule.
1.6.5.7. 1.6.5.8. 1.6.5.9.
1.6.5.10. Construction Progress Schedule may be reviewed to ensure rapid and efficient completion of Work in accordance with Contract requirements. Keep Consultant informed of progress, of delays and of potential delays during all stages of Work. 1.6.5.11. Review, approval or correction of minutes of previous meeting. 1.6.5.12. Review of work progress since previous meeting. 1.6.5.13. Field observations, problems, conflicts. 1.6.5.14. Problems which impede Construction Progress Schedule. 1.6.5.15. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules. 1.6.5.16. Review of submittals schedules. 1.6.5.17. Review of mock-up and sample installation requirements and schedules. 1.6.5.18. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedules. 1.6.5.19. Quality standards. 1.6.5.20. Pending changes and substitutions. 1.6.5.21. Other business.
1.7.
1.7.1. 1.7.2.
START-UP MEETING
Presided over by Consultant, after award of Contract. Attendees: 1.7.2.1. 1.7.2.2. 1.7.2.3. 1.7.2.4. 1.7.2.5. 1.7.2.6. Consultant(s). Contractor. Contractor's Superintendent. Subcontractors (Mechanical, Electrical). Major Equipment Suppliers. Others as appropriate.
1.7.3.
Minimum Agenda: 1.7.3.1. 1.7.3.2. List of major Subcontractors and Suppliers. Tentative construction progress schedules.
PAGE 01 30 00 - 3
1.7.3.3. 1.7.3.4. Start date; submission of schedules; long term delivery items. Insurance Certificates, Cash Flow Schedule, Construction Schedule, Shop Drawing submission schedule, bonds including Value Added Taxes, Trade Breakdown including value for Close Out, Work place and Safety & Insurance Board Clearance Certificate, Project Sign. Critical work sequencing. Major equipment and Product deliveries and priorities. Designation of responsible personnel. Building Permit status. Procedures for maintaining record documents.
1.7.3.5. 1.7.3.6. 1.7.3.7. 1.7.3.8. 1.7.3.9.
1.7.3.10. Use of Premises: Office, keys, work and storage areas; Owner's requirements (storage delivery, path of construction activities, vehicle, by foot, carts, exterior and interior, elevator use, washrooms, bin location). 1.7.3.11. Construction facilities, controls, temporary hoarding, dust partitions, parking, hours, noisy work, interruption of services, smoking, cell phone usage and construction aids. 1.7.3.12. Construction scheduling (particularly drying time for concrete slabs). 1.7.3.13. Temporary utilities. 1.7.3.14. Safety and first-aid procedures. 1.7.3.15. Security procedures. 1.7.3.16. Housekeeping procedures.
1.8.
1.8.1.
PREINSTALLATION TRADE MEETINGS

If a trade requires a meeting prior to starting work, arrange for such meeting of all parties associated with trade as designated in Contract Documents or as requested by Consultant. Presided over by Contractor, include Consultant who may attend, include Subcontractor performing work of trade involved, Testing Company's Representative and Contractor's consultants of applicable discipline. Review Contract Documents for work included under trade and determine complete understanding of requirements and responsibilities relative to work included, storage and handling of materials, materials to be used, installation of materials, sequence and quality control, Project staffing, restrictions on areas of concrete placement and other matters affecting construction, to permit compliance with intent of trade under consideration.
1.9.
1.9.1.
SCHEDULE OF THE WORK

Submit a detailed critical path construction schedule as referenced in Bid Form Requirements in Section 00 20 00 (maximum 7 days after award of contract) with activities itemized to enable Contractor and Consultant to monitor progress of the Work. Schedule shall indicate without limitations dates for: 1.9.2.1. 1.9.2.2. 1.9.2.3. 1.9.2.4. demolition. erection and dismantling of temporary facilities. submission of Shop Drawings for various divisions of Work. submission of Mechanical and Electrical trades coordination and interference drawings.
1.9.2.
PAGE 01 30 00 - 4
1.9.2.5. 1.9.2.6. 1.9.2.7. 1.9.2.8. 1.9.2.9. submission of samples and installation dates for mock-ups and sample installations. commencement and completion of each major division of Work, including work to be done by Subcontractors. critical work sequencing. drying time for concrete slabs to allow for placement of moisture sensitive floor coverings. major equipment deliveries and priorities.
1.9.2.10. final completion date. 1.9.3. Update and resubmit schedule on a monthly basis. Before any revisions are incorporated into the Schedule, the Consultant and Owner must accept the revisions. Provide with schedules a narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule. Indicate corrective action recommended and its effect, and the effect of changes on schedules of other contractors on site.
1.10.
1.10.1.
SHORT TERM SCHEDULE

On a bi-weekly basis, provide Owner with a 2 week short term schedule based on above schedule, indicating important construction activities as the Owner and Consultant may see suitable for Project requirements.
1.11.
1.11.1. 1.11.2.
PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
Submit progress photographs in digital and hard copy formats, from date of commencement of the Work until date of Substantial Performance of the Work. Submit colour, glossy, 200 mm x 250 mm (8" x 10") photographs in a clear sheet protector suitable for storage in a binder with a white patch in bottom, right corner indicating name of Project, compass direction of exposure, subject title, date and time of exposure. Prior to commencement of Work, submit minimum 12 (interior and exterior) photographs of the Place of the Work and minimum 6 photographs along the lines forming the perimeter of the Place of the Work. During Work, submit minimum 12 photographs reproduced in duplicate, each month, taken from different vantage points to illustrate progress of Work, both exterior and interior. Submit minimum 8 exterior and minimum 36 interior photographs when Work has been certified by Consultant as Substantially Performed.
1.11.3.
1.11.4. 1.11.5.
1.12.
1.12.1.
PERSONNEL APPOINTMENT
Appoint a senior member of staff, with full authority to commit Contractor to methods and schedules for construction, to participate actively in administration and maintenance of detailed construction schedule. Provide necessary information on progress of the Work to enable a status report to be produced every 2 weeks.
1.13.
1.13.1. 1.13.2.
GENERAL REVIEW
The Consultant shall conduct periodic field review to review the Work for general conformance with Contract Documents, Code and authorities having jurisdiction. Review includes review of Shop Drawings, review of field work and review of reports produced by various inspection and testing agencies.
PAGE 01 30 00 - 5
1.13.3. Record each review in manner suitable for submission to Consultant at completion of Project along with inspection and testing reports at site meetings every second week.
1.14.
1.14.1.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROPOSALS

After award of Construction Contract, Product substitution proposals will not be reviewed nor accepted except in cases where written proof from Product manufacturer/distributor has been submitted to verify specified Products: 1.14.1.1. are unavailable (providing reasons why). 1.14.1.2. were ordered in advance and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for lead time but timely delivery of specified Products is not possible in order to maintain construction schedule.
1.14.2.
Submit following for each Product substitution proposal: 1.14.2.1. Shop Drawings, product literature, including full details. 1.14.2.2. samples. 1.14.2.3. difference in price, if any, in form of certified quotations of both selected and proposed substitutions.
1.14.3.
Submit Contractor's written acceptance of use of substituted Products and certification substituted Products: 1.14.3.1. will not exceed space requirements allocated for originally specified Products or, if they do, Contractor is including with substitution submission, design drawings, to accommodate substituted Product. 1.14.3.2. are compatible with and inert to adjacent materials. 1.14.3.3. will not affect Project schedule due to delays in delivery and installation. 1.14.3.4. have been priced to include design adjustments required to accommodate substituted Products.
1.14.4.
Proposed substitutions require Consultant's review and acceptance in writing and, if there is a difference in price, extra or credit requires Owner's acceptance.
1.15.
1.15.1.
CERTIFICATES AND TRANSCRIPTS

Immediately after receiving notification of award of Contract, submit Workplace Safety & Insurance Certificate status, transcription of insurances and other certificates and transcripts required by Contract Documents or Consultant.
1.16.
1.16.1.
CONTRACTOR'S PERSONNEL AND SUBCONTRACTORS

Submit complete list of Contractor's Subcontractors with addresses, phone numbers and personnel along with Contractor's list of personnel.
PAGE 01 30 00 - 6
1.17.1.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Submit to Consultant, and to authorities having jurisdiction as required, documents listed to be submitted for review. Submit with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as not to cause delay in the Work. Failure to submit in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time or extra costs and no claim for extension of Contract Time or increase to Contract Price by reason of such default will be allowed. Final approval of authorities having jurisdiction, where required, shall be obtained prior to submitting Shop Drawing or other documentation to Consultant. Prior to submission to Consultant, Contractor shall review submittals. Submittals not stamped, signed, dated and identified as to specific Project will be returned without being examined and shall be considered rejected. Verify field measurements and ensure affected adjacent Work are coordinated. Confirm and correlate information pertaining to fabrication processes, quantities, techniques of construction and installation and similar information.
1.17.2.
1.18.
1.18.1. 1.18.2. 1.18.3.
SHOP DRAWINGS
Shop Drawing Schedule: Submit a Shop Drawing schedule, in accordance with GC 3.10. Fabrication: Do not fabricate until Shop Drawings are indicated as "REVIEWED" or "REVIEWED AS NOTED". Consultant's Shop Drawing Review: 1.18.3.1. Consultant's review of Shop Drawings is for sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with general design concept. 1.18.3.2. Consultant's review does not provide approval of items which remain Contractor's responsibility. 1.18.3.3. Without limitation, among other things, Contractor remains responsible for: 1.18.3.3.1. 1.18.3.3.2. 1.18.3.3.3. 1.18.3.3.4. 1.18.3.3.5. 1.18.3.3.6. detail design inherent in Shop Drawings. errors and omissions in Shop Drawings. meeting requirements of Contract Documents. confirmed and correlated site dimensions. information that pertains solely to fabrication processes, techniques of construction and installation. co-ordination of work of all trades.
1.18.4.
Shop Drawing Requirements: 1.18.4.1. Indicate following minimum requirements as applicable: 1.18.4.1.1. 1.18.4.1.2. 1.18.4.1.3. 1.18.4.1.4. 1.18.4.1.5. plans, sections and details. verified site dimensions. materials thicknesses and finishes. methods of setting and sealing. methods of securing, fastening and anchoring including field connections.
PAGE 01 30 00 - 7
1.18.4.1.6. signed and sealed Shop Drawings and calculations where specifically required herein.
1.18.4.2. Do not make Product substitutions on Shop Drawings without Consultant's written acceptance in accordance with Product substitution proposal process or they will be rejected. Replace unaccepted Product substitutions and complete Work in accordance with Contract Documents. 1.18.4.3. Determine which Shop Drawings the local Building Department will require for its approval and submit 2 final copies of each Shop Drawing to local Building Department. Obtain approval and pay associated charges and fees. 1.18.5. Shop Drawing Procedures: 1.18.5.1. Consultant will provide a Shop Drawing stamp to Contractor for use on the Work. Shop Drawing stamp remains Consultant's property and must be returned at conclusion of the Work. 1.18.5.2. Execute following prior to submitting Shop Drawings to Consultant: 1.18.5.2.1. review, check and mark-up Shop Drawings with comments and revisions and re-direct back to Subcontractor (REVISE AND RESUBMIT, etc.) in the first instance if required prior to forwarding to Consultant. stamp each Shop Drawing with Shop Drawing stamp deemed acceptable by Consultant. insert applicable Specification Section reference, e.g. "10 28 00" for Section 10 28 00, Washroom Accessories. insert next consecutive Shop Drawing number within that Section, e.g. "002" for second Drawing within Section 10 28 00. insert Contractor's review date and signature of Contractor's reviewer.
1.18.5.2.2. 1.18.5.2.3. 1.18.5.2.4. 1.18.5.2.5.
1.18.5.3. Submit following for Consultant's review: 1.18.5.3.1. 1.18.5.3.2. 1.18.5.3.3. 1 print of each stamped Shop Drawing, to be returned to Contractor. 3 prints of each stamped Shop Drawing, not returned to Contractor. If catalogue cuts acceptable to Consultant, submit as many copies of catalogue cuts for review as agreed to. Only 1 set to be returned to Contractor.
1.18.5.4. Reproductions of Consultants Contract Documents are not acceptable as Shop Drawings. 1.18.5.5. Shop Drawings not conforming to above criteria will be automatically returned without review. Any resulting delays will be Contractor's responsibility. 1.18.5.6. Shop Drawings submitted without specified professional engineer design and stamp will be automatically returned without review. Any resulting delays will be Contractor's responsibility. 1.18.5.7. Do not resubmit Shop Drawings indicated as "REVIEWED" and "REVIEWED AS NOTED". 1.18.5.8. Resubmit Shop Drawings indicated as "REVISE AND RESUBMIT" with required changes and comments addressed. Insert letter "R" after Shop Drawing number on resubmitted Shop Drawings, re-date and re-sign. Identify revisions from earlier submissions graphically on revised Shop Drawings.
PAGE 01 30 00 - 8
1.18.5.9. Consultant requires 10 Days for review of Shop Drawing from time of Consultants receipt to time of Consultants return to Contractor. Contractor will establish a steady flow of Shop Drawings for review and avoid accumulation of an excessive quantity of Shop Drawings in a single submission. 1.18.5.10. Provide Shop Drawings required by Contract Documents.
1.19.
1.19.1. 1.19.2.
INTERFERENCE DRAWINGS
Prepare drawings indicating relationship of new and existing and/or unforeseen conditions at congested areas prior to commencement of work in area. For congested locations, before commencing installation, prepare drawings showing relationship of ductwork, conduit, piping, sprinklers, ceiling supports and framing, communication and specialized equipment located within ceiling and shaft spaces. Indicate locations of visible items such as air handling outlets, light fixtures, smoke detectors, sprinkler heads, communication grilles and access panels occurring at these locations. Ensure interference drawings are initialed by a responsible person of each Subcontractor involved along with Contractor's signature and submitted to Consultant for review and record purposes.
1.19.3. 1.19.4.
1.20.
1.20.1. 1.20.2. 1.20.3. 1.20.4.
SAMPLES
Prior to fabrication or supply of Products, submit samples for Consultant's review. Remove and discard Products whose samples have not been reviewed and accepted by Consultant. Deliver samples to Consultant as directed with charges prepaid and allow for 1 of samples to be kept by Consultant. Unless otherwise specified, submit samples in duplicate. Identify each sample with: 1.20.4.1. Project name and Project number. 1.20.4.2. date of sample submission. 1.20.4.3. component name using the Specification's terminology. 1.20.4.4. material (including alloy). 1.20.4.5. finish including colour, sheen, texture. 1.20.4.6. dimensions including thickness.
1.20.5.
Exhibit each of following for each sample: 1.20.5.1. materials. 1.20.5.2. finishes: 1.20.5.2.1. 1.20.5.2.2. 1.20.5.2.3. 1.20.5.2.4. 1.20.5.2.5. material. colour including maximum colour range within each specified colour. sheen, tone. texture. range of blemishes and other markings.
PAGE 01 30 00 - 9
1.20.6. 1.20.7. 1.20.8. 1.20.9. Alter, refinish or provide additional samples until they are reviewed and accepted by Consultant. Fabricate samples using same tools and techniques to be employed in actual installation of the Work. Provide Products in the Work which are identical to accepted samples. Provide samples required by Contract Documents.
1.21.
1.21.1.
ACCESS PANELS AND ACCESS DOORS

Before commencing installation of mechanical and electrical work, prepare, together with mechanical and electrical Subcontractors, on a set of Drawings provided for that purpose, a complete lay-out of all access panels and access doors which will be required. Submit these lay-outs for review as specified for Shop Drawings and show exact sizes and locations of access panels and doors. Revisions may be required to lay-out before final review. Allow Consultant to revise layout or quantity of access doors and panels, by relocating related building services a maximum of 2000 mm (6' - 7") at no extra cost to Owner. Should relocation exceed this measurement then Contract Price will be adjusted in accordance with provisions for changes in Contract Documents. Finish access panels and doors to match adjacent wall and/or ceiling finish unless otherwise specified or indicated.
1.21.2.
1.22.
1.22.1. 1.22.2. 1.22.3.
WHMIS REQUIREMENTS
Comply with WHMIS in accordance with OHSA requirements. Before commencement of the Work and during full term of Contract, provide a list with current MSDS of all hazardous materials proposed for use on Project. In addition to submission of MSDS as required under regulations, submit emission reports where available or off-gassing data to help control possible harmful effects to indoor air quality during construction, occupation and including maintenance period. Label hazardous materials used and/or supplied on Project in accordance with WHMIS requirements. Provide detailed procedures for safe handling storage and use of hazardous materials. List special precautions and safe clean up and disposal procedures. Conform to Environmental Protection Act and other requirements of authorities for disposal and clean up requirements. Obtain from Owner, where applicable, a list and MSDS of hazardous materials that may be handled, stored or used by Owners employees and/or other contractors retained by the Owner at location where the Work of this Contract will be performed. Ensure those who handle and/or are exposed to or are likely to handle or be exposed to hazardous materials are fully instructed and trained in accordance with WHMIS requirements.
1.22.4. 1.22.5.
1.22.6.
1.22.7.
1.23.
1.23.1.
COLOURS
Colour and gloss value selection by Consultant. Obtain direction on colour and gloss value in advance of need. If requested, submit samples for colour and gloss selection. Follow colour schedule provided by Consultant and use colours and gloss designated.
1.24.
1.24.1.
RECORD DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

Keep 1 set of Drawing prints and Specifications on site for use in maintaining record information. Ensure these drawings and Specifications are kept on site at all times available for review by Owner and/or Consultant at any given time. Accurately and neatly record deviations from Contract Documents, including Addenda, Site Instructions and Change Orders, caused by site conditions.
1.24.2.
PAGE 01 30 00 - 10
1.24.3. 1.24.4. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal actual work until required information is recorded. Legibly indicate each item to record actual construction including: 1.24.4.1. Field changes of dimension and details. 1.24.4.2. Details or information not on original Contract Drawings. 1.24.5. Catalogue field review reports and cross reference to relevant trade, building area and component. Submit inspection and testing reports in accordance with requirements of Specifications. Highlight unsatisfactory inspection and testing results with supplementary instructions issued by Consultant. Identify Drawings as Project Record Copy, maintained and available for inspection on site by Consultant. Prior to applying for Certificate of Substantial Performance submit record Drawings and Specifications to Consultant.
1.24.6. 1.24.7.
1.25.
1.25.1. 1.25.2. 1.25.3.
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
Prior to applying for Certification of Substantial Performance, Consultant will provide Contractor a electronic set of requested Drawings for As-Built purposes. Disks of Drawings may be obtained from Consultant at the cost of $5.00 plus Value Added Taxes, per Drawing. Contractor is responsible for: 1.25.3.1. maintaining As-Builts during progress of work, in complete sets, at the Place of the Work. 1.25.3.2. including additional changes over and above those included in any Addenda, Site Instructions and Change Orders. 1.25.3.3. including accurate locations, depths, sizes and types of underground utilities and concealed services in the As-Built Drawings. 1.25.3.4. having changes recorded in a manner consistent with original Drawings using minimum AutoCad 2007 software. 1.25.3.5. ensuring outline clouds and notations are removed from Drawings. 1.25.3.6. having 1 set As-Built Drawing prints submitted to Consultant for review before final submission. 1.25.3.7. incorporating any review comments made by Consultant. 1.25.3.8. resubmitting final reviewed set in following format: 1.25.3.8.1. 1.25.3.8.2. 1.25.3.8.3. 1 set on electronic disk. 1 set on reproducible prints (i.e. mylar). 1 set of white prints.
1.25.4.
Refer to Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27 and 28 for supplementary requirements.
PAGE 01 30 00 - 11
1.26.1.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL

Upon completion of the Work, submit 3 sets of operation and maintenance instructions manual to Consultant. Include following: 1.26.1.1. data books and literature. 1.26.1.2. maintenance instructions, specifying warnings of any maintenance practice that may damage or disfigure specified Products. 1.26.1.3. operational information on Products, cleaning and lubrication schedules, filters, overhaul and adjustment schedules and similar maintenance information. 1.26.1.4. recommended maintenance Products.
1.26.2. 1.26.3. 1.26.4.
Submit instructions in plain language to guide Owner in proper operation and maintenance of building components. Organize contents into applicable categories of the Work, numbered to match the Specification Section numbering system. Bind contents of operation and maintenance instructions manual in 3-ring, hard-covered, vinyl jacketed binders, label spine "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL" and include following: 1.26.4.1. title sheet, labelled "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", containing Project name and completion date. 1.26.4.2. list of contents. 1.26.4.3. list of names, addresses and telephone numbers of installing Subcontractors and Suppliers for future repair or maintenance. 1.26.4.4. schedule of Finishes (as-built) listing paints, colours and fabrics provided.
1.26.5. 1.26.6.
Refer to Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27 and 28 for supplementary requirements. Provide Operation and Maintenance Instructions as required by Contract Documents.
1.27.
1.27.1.
MISCELLANEOUS SUBMITTALS
Supply submittals required by Contract Documents (e.g. plans, reports, certifications, results, records, etc.) for Consultant's review.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 01 30 00 - 12
1.1.1.
SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
REFERENCES
Reference Standards: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. 1.2.1.5. 1.2.1.6. 1.2.1.7. 1.2.1.8. ASTM E329-11a CSA A283-06 CSA W47.1-09 CSA W59-03(08) CSA W178.1-08 CSA W178.2-08 CAN/CSA-Z234.1-00(11) NFPA 101-09 - Specification for Agencies Engaged Inspection, Testing or Special Inspection in Construction
- Qualification Code for Concrete Testing Laboratories - Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel - Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) - Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations - Certification of Welding Inspectors - Metric Practice Guide - Life Safety Code
1.3.
1.3.1.
REGULATIONS REQUIREMENTS
Comply with The Building Code Act, as amended, OBC as amended and Regulations and by-laws of other authorities having jurisdiction, including latest amendments thereto; all hereafter referred to as Code. Where Code or Contract Documents do not cover particular requirement which is covered by NBC, as amended, conform to requirements of NBC including its related supplements. Where Contract Documents exceed Code requirements, satisfy such additional requirements. Pre-Start Health and Safety Review (PSR): Whether or not this is required by law, under this Contract ensure any Product, tool or process provided as work of this Contract complies with the requirements of the Occupational Health and Safety Act (Ontario), Regulation 851, as amended and certify same to Consultant prior to Substantial Performance of the Work. For guidance, refer to Guidelines for PreStart Health and Safety Reviews: How to Apply Section 7 of the Regulation for Industrial Establishments dated April 2001 published by the Government of Ontario. Ensure all exemption documents or PSR reports are complete and correct prior to handing over to Owner. Provide 3 sets of originals. Conform to OBC for exit requirements. Conform to OFC enacted under The Fire Marshalls Act, including latest amendments for facilities undergoing alteration, renovation, retrofitting or being demolished and repaired.
1.3.2.
1.3.3. 1.3.4.
PAGE 01 40 00 - 1
1.3.5.
Where material is designated in Contract Documents for certain application, unless otherwise specified, that material shall conform to standards designated in OBC and in absence of more restrictive requirement comply with Division B, Part 9 "Housing and Small Buildings" of the Code. Similarly, unless otherwise specified and not required otherwise by OBC, installation methods and standards of workmanship shall also conform to standards of Division B, Part 9. Where specific requirements for a material are not specified for certain use, select from choice offered in Division B, Part 9. Unless otherwise indicated, obtain and pay for all other permits, licenses and certificates of inspection. Ensure permits, licenses and certificates included under specific Sections are provided as specified. Forward copies of all permits to Consultant before commencing work. Conform to hours of work, rates of wages paid, terms of employment and working conditions in accordance with Ontario Fair Wage Program - Labour Conditions For Industrial, Commercial and Institutional Sector Construction Contract. Comply with all requirements of the Workplace Safety & Insurance Boards Act, including payments due thereunder. Apply The Trades Qualification and Apprenticeship Act, R.S.O. 1990, Chapter T-17, including latest amendments and regulations, to performance of this Contract.
1.3.6.
1.3.7.
1.3.8.
1.4.
1.4.1.
IMPERIAL SYSTEM OF UNITS (SI)

Submittals containing measurements of any kind are to be submitted with minimum Imperial system of measurement. Addition of measurements in metric will be permitted provided Imperial measurements are submitted.
1.5.
1.5.1.
REFERENCES
Where reference is made to codes, specification standards, manuals, contract forms, installation, application and maintenance instructions, produced by various organizations, conform to edition of standards specified or, if not specified, to latest edition as amended and revised to date of Contract. Amendments to reference documents after award of Contract affecting Contract Price shall be dealt with in accordance with Part 6, Changes in the Work of General Conditions of the Stipulated Price Contract. If requested provide copy on site of such standard(s).
1.5.2.
1.5.3.
1.6.
1.6.1.
ACRONYMS
Following acronyms are used in Contract Documents: AA ACI AHA AIEE AISC ANSI API ASHE ASHRAE ASME ASTM AWI AWMAC AWWA Aluminum Association (USA) American Concrete Institute American Hospital Association American Institute of Electrical Engineers American Institute of Steel Construction American National Standards Institute American Petroleum Institute American Society for Healthcare Engineering American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-conditioning Engineers American Society of Mechanical Engineers American Society for Testing and Materials American Woodwork Institute (USA) Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer's Association of Canada American Water Works Association
PAGE 01 40 00 - 2
BCA BCLMA BHMA BMEC CAN CCA CCDC CEC CGA CGSB CISC CLA CMHC COFI CPCI CPMA CRCA CSA CSC CSDMA CSPI CSSBI CTC CWC DND EEMAC ECP ESA FM GANA IEEE IGMAC MTO NAAMM NBC NBFU NEMA NFPA NHLA NLGA NRCC NSC OBC OFC OFM Building Commissioning Association British Columbia Lumber Manufacturer's Association Building Hardware Manufacturer's Association Building Materials Evaluation Commission National Standards of Canada Canadian Construction Association Canadian Construction Documents Committee Canadian Electrical Code (published by CSA) Canadian Gas Association Canadian General Standards Board Canadian Institute of Steel Construction Canadian Lumbermen's Association Canadian Mortgage and Housing Corporation Council of Forest Industries of British Columbia Canadian Prestressed Concrete Institute Canadian Paint Manufacturer's Association Canadian Roofing Contractor's Association Canadian Standards Association Construction Specifications Canada Canadian Sheet Door Manufacturers Association Corrugated Steel Pipe Institute Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute Canadian Transport Commission Canadian Wood Council
Department of National Defence, Construction Material Board Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers Association of Canada Environmental Choice Program Electrical Safety Authority Factory Mutual Glass Association of North America Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association of Canada Ministry of Transportation, Province of Ontario National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers National Building Code of Canada, 1995 National Board of Fire Underwriters (USA) National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (USA) National Fire Protection Association National Hardwood Lumber Association (USA) National Lumber Grades Authority National Research Council Canada National Standards of Canada Ontario Building Code, "The Building Code", Ontario Regulation 350/06, including amendments thereto Ontario Fire Code, "The Fire Code", Ontario Regulation 388/97, including amendments thereto Ontario Fire Marshall
PAGE 01 40 00 - 3
OIRCA OMCA OPCA OPSS PEO SJI SSPC TSSA TTMAC ULC UL WHPS Ontario Industrial Roofing Contractor's Association Ontario Masonry Contractors Association Ontario Painting Contractors Association Ontario Provincial Standards Section Professional Engineers of Ontario Steel Joist Institute Steel Structures Painting Council Technical Standards & Safety Authority Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (USA) Warnock Hersey Professional Services
1.7.
1.7.1.
ABBREVIATIONS
Following abbreviations are used in Contract Documents: <
o
m # A AB A/C AC ACP ACT AD ADJ AFF AFL ALUM or AL ANOD AP APPROX ARCH A/VB BH BLDG BLKG B.M BN BOL B.RLG BUR CABT CB C.BLK
angle degree (angles) micrometre number (before numerals) ampere air barrier air conditioning alternating current acoustic panel acoustic ceiling tile access door adjustable Above Finished Floor access flooring aluminum anodized access panel approximate Architectural air/vapour barrier bore hole building blocking bench mark bull nose bollard bumper railing built up roof cabinet catch basin concrete block
PAGE 01 40 00 - 4
CEM CEM.BD CEM.PL cfs CG CGL CH CHK.BD CHK.PL CI CJ CLG CO COL CONC CONSTR CONT CPT or CP CR CSK CT cu ft cu yd CW c/w DB deg C deg F DET DF DFT DG dia DN DP DPC DWG EF EIFS EJ EJC ELEC ELEV EMT ENAM ENCL ENT EP EQUIP ET EXIST EXP EXT cement cement board cement plaster cubic feet per second corner guard clear glass coat hook chalk board checkered plate cast iron control joint centreline ceiling clean out column concrete construction continuous carpet chair rail countersunk ceramic tile cubic feet cubic yard curtain wall complete with decibel degree Celsius degree Fahrenheit detail drinking fountain dry film thickness double glazed diameter down dampproof dampproof course Drawing epoxy flooring exterior insulation and finish system expansion joint expansion joint cover electric elevation electro metallic tubing enamel enclosure entry electrical panel equipment epoxy terrazzo existing exposed exterior
PAGE 01 40 00 - 5
FA FBD FBR FC FD FHC FIN FL FOB FP fpm FS (ft)(') FTG FWC FWP g ga gal GALV GASK GB GCB GFI GFRG GL GL.B GRAN.A GRAN.B GRD GT GWG ha HB HC HDBD HM HORIZ hp hr H/RAIL H.RLG HS HSS HT HU Hz id Igpd Igph (in.)(") INCL fire alarm fibreboard face brick flexible coating floor drain fire hose cabinet finished floor free on board fireproofing feet per minute firestopping foot footing fabric wall covering fiberglass wall protection gram gauge gallon (Imperial measure) galvanized gasket gypsum board glazed concrete block ground fault interrupter glass fibre reinforced gypsum glass/glazing glass block granular A granular B ground glass tile georgian wired glass hectare hose bib hollow core hardboard hollow metal horizontal horsepower hour handrail hand railing hollow steel hollow structural section height heating unit hertz inside diameter gallons per day (Imperial measure) gallons per hour (Imperial measure) inch including
PAGE 01 40 00 - 6
INSUL INT INV J JT KD kg km kN KO kPa l LAB LAV lb lb/ft LH LHR lin ft LIN.MET LINO LL LS l/s LSSJ LUM m 2 m 3 m MATL max MB MBF MCC MECH MEZZ min misc ML mm MPa MRGB N NIC N.m No. NOM NTS O/A oc insulation interior invert joule joint knocked down kilogram kilometre kilonewton knock out kilopascal litre laboratory lavatory pound pound per foot Left Hand Left Hand Reverse linear foot linear metal ceiling linoleum lead lined light standard litre per second long span steel joist luminous metre square metre cubic metre material maximum marker board thousand board feet motor control centre mechanical mezzanine minimum miscellaneous metal lath millimetre megapascal moisture resistant gypsum board newton Not in Contract newton metre Number nominal not to scale overall on centre
PAGE 01 40 00 - 7
od O/H OPP OWSJ oz P Pa PA P.CONC PERP PL PLAM PLAS PLYWD PM PR PREFAB PREFIN PRP PS psi PT PVC QT R RB R. CONC RD REINF REQ'D rev RH RHR RM rpm RS RT RWL RWP s SAN SAT SB SC SG SHV SIM SLC SLR SLT SN SPEC outside diameter overhead opposite Open Web Steel Joist ounce partition Pascal public address system precast concrete perpendicular plate plastic laminate plaster plywood pressed metal pair prefabricated prefinished plastic resin paneling pressed steel pounds per square inch paint polyvinyl chloride quarry tile riser resilient base reinforced concrete roof drain reinforced required revision Right Hand Right Hand Reverse room revolutions per minute reducing strip rubber tile rain water leader rigid wall protection second sanitary suspended acoustic tile sand blast solid core security glazing sheet vinyl similar sealed concrete sealer slate tile stair nosing specification
PAGE 01 40 00 - 8
SPR SQ sq ft sq mi sq yd SR SS STL STRUCT SUSP t TB TBR TEL TEMP TERR T&G TYP U/C U/G U.O.N. U/S USgpm V VB VCT VERT VEST VT vt ft VWC VWP W WB W.CAB WC WD WF WGL WM WP WPM WPS WR WVP WWF WWM yd Z ZCS sprinkler square square feet square mile square yard seamless resin stainless steel steel structural suspended tonne tack board to be removed telephone temporary terrazzo tongue & groove typical under cut under ground unless otherwise noted under side gallons per minute (United States measure) volt vapour barrier vinyl composite tile vertical vestibule vinyl tile vertical foot vinyl wall covering vinyl wall protection watt white board writing cabinet water closet wood wide flange wired glass wire mesh waterproofing waterproof membrane wall protection strip washroom wood veneer paneling welded wide flange welded wire mesh yard zinc zinc coated steel
PAGE 01 40 00 - 9
1.8.1.
WASHROOM ACCESSORIES ABBREVIATIONS

Following abbreviations are used for washroom accessories: CH GRB HCH MIR MIR/S MPH NVU ND SD SH.ROD SH.ROD/C SH.ST SK SND SNV SPD TDD TDL PTD TTD TWB Clothing Hook Grab Bar Clothing Hook (Handicapped) Mirror Mirror with Shelf Mop Holders Napkin and Tampon Vending Unit Napkin and Tampon Disposal Soap Dispenser Shower Rod Shower Rod with Curtain Shower Seat Sink Sanitary Napkin Disposal Sanitary Napkin Vendor Soap Dish Towel Dispenser/Disposal Towel Disposal Paper Towel Dispenser Toilet Tissue Dispenser Towel Bar
1.9.
1.9.1.
BUILDING SCIENCE PRINCIPLES

Obtain and read following references: 1.9.1.1. 1.9.1.2. 1.9.1.3. 1.9.1.4. 1.9.1.5. 1.9.1.6. 1.9.1.7. 1.9.1.8. 1.9.1.9. 1.9.1.10. 1.9.1.11. 1.9.1.12. 1.9.1.13. NRCC 13487 Canadian Building Digest 21 Canadian Building Digest 40 Canadian Building Digest 48 Canadian Building Digest 50 Canadian Building Digest 55 Canadian Building Digest 72 Canadian Building Digest 95 Canadian Building Digest 96 Canadian Building Digest 150 Canadian Building Digest 151 Canadian Building Digest 155 Canadian Building Digest 175 - Walls Windows and Roofs for the Canadian Climate - Cavity Walls - Rain Penetration and its Control - Requirements for Exterior Walls - Principles Applied to an Insulated Masonry Wall - Glazing Design - Control of Air Leakage Important - Roofing Membrane Design - Use of Sealants - Protected Membrane Roofs - Drainage From Roof - Joint Movement and Sealant Selection - Vapour Barriers: What Are They? Are They Effective?
PAGE 01 40 00 - 10
1.10.1. 1.10.2.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Study and be aware of principles discussed in above documents in order to understand their significance to Contract Documents. Some information in above reference documents may not be applicable to the Work and no recommendations or statement therein is a mandatory requirement of Contract unless required by Contract Documents.
1.11.
1.11.1. 1.11.2.
BUILDING SCIENCE REQUIREMENTS

Provide a continuous, unbroken and non-perforated air and vapour seal to totally enclose building envelope and to separate interior and exterior environments. Provide particular attention to following areas: 1.11.2.1. 1.11.2.2. 1.11.2.3. 1.11.2.4. Exterior wall systems. Roofing systems. Junctions of walls and roofs. Seals at openings such as doors, windows.
1.11.3. 1.11.4. 1.11.5. 1.11.6. 1.11.7.
Employ procedures, sequences and coordination of construction to install the Work in accordance with principles of building science explained in above reference documents. Provide special care at the sealed junction of different Products which make up airseal system to assure lasting continuity. Verify compatibility of fasteners and adhesives with surfaces to which they are applied. Fasten and adhere Products making up airseal system to withstand windloads required of exterior cladding system. Design and provide airseals at following miscellaneous penetrations of airseal system: 1.11.7.1. mechanical and electrical service penetrations. Accommodate vibration and thermal movement.
1.11.8. 1.11.9.
Provide exterior rain screen assemblies in accordance with building science principles. Compartmentalize rain screens to reduce air pressure differentials across rain screen. Provide thermal insulation to exterior of vapour diffusion barrier. Note vapour diffusion barrier is often same as airseal system. Apply thermal insulation to vapour diffusion barrier to eliminate air pockets, channels and other discontinuities.
1.11.10. Minimize thermal bridges. 1.11.11. Apply building science principles to building interior spaces with differing environments, e.g. differing temperature and humidity conditions. 1.11.12. Comply with other building science requirements as part of application of building science principles identified in other Sections of the Work. 1.11.13. Do Work in neat and careful manner to retain Work plumb, square and straight. 1.11.14. Ensure Work is properly related to form close joints and appropriately aligned junctions, edges and surfaces and is free of warp, twist, wind, wave or other irregularities.
PAGE 01 40 00 - 11
1.11.15. When required by Specifications or by manufacturer's recommendations, have manufacturer, Supplier or accredited agent, inspect work which incorporates their Products. 1.11.16. Do not permit materials to come in contact with other materials whether in presence of moisture, or otherwise, if conditions will result in corrosion, stain or discolouration or deterioration of completed Work. Provide compatible, durable separators where such contact is unavoidable. 1.11.17. Indoor Air Quality Management: 1.11.17.1. Site superintendent (or other person designated by Contractor) is responsible Indoor Air Quality coordination which may include following activities: 1.11.17.1.1. 1.11.17.1.2. 1.11.17.1.3. 1.11.17.1.4. 1.11.17.1.5. 1.11.17.1.6. 1.11.17.1.6.1. identifying, implementing and documenting measures to promote the comfort and well-being of construction workers and building occupants. supervising on-site indoor air quality management activities on a daily basis. coordinating indoor air quality management tasks with Subcontractors to ensure timely and orderly progress of the work. conducting indoor air quality management inspections and making necessary repairs during construction and prior to occupancy. maintaining an indoor air quality inspection log to document observations, deficiencies and corrective actions. selecting Products/materials meeting following requirements: Low Emitting Materials: Use low-emitting materials to reduce the quantity of indoor air contaminants that are odorous, irritating and/or harmful to the comfort and well-being of installers and occupants including but not limited to: Adhesives and Sealants Paints and Coatings Flooring Systems Provide permanent entryway grilles/gratings to reduce infiltration of dirt and particulates and other potentially hazardous natural or chemical pollutants from entering the building. reporting indoor air quality management progress to Consultant.
1.11.17.1.6.1.1. 1.11.17.1.6.1.2. 1.11.17.1.6.1.3. 1.11.17.1.6.2.
1.11.17.1.7.
1.12.
1.12.1.
TOLERANCES
Unless more stringent tolerances are required by a Section of the Specifications or a referenced standard, meet following tolerances for installed work: 1.12.1.1. plumb means plumb within 3 mm in 3 m (1/8" in 10' - 0"). 1.12.1.2. level means level within 3 mm in 3 m (1/8" in 10' - 0"). 1.12.1.3. square means not in excess of 10 seconds, less or more than 90. 1.12.1.4. straight means within 3 mm in 3 m (1/8" in 10' - 0"), under a 3 m (10' - 0") straightedge.
PAGE 01 40 00 - 12
1.13.1.
QUALIFICATIONS
For manufacturers, fabricators and installers qualifications, conform to requirements specified under respective trade Section as applicable. Where applicable, manufacturers field services shall be obtained as specified under respective trade Section.
1.14.
1.14.1.
PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS QUALIFICATIONS

Employ a professional engineer registered to practice in Province of Ontario carrying a minimum $2,000,000.00 professional liability insurance to: 1.14.1.1. 1.14.1.2. 1.14.1.3. 1.14.1.4. 1.14.1.5. 1.14.1.6. 1.14.1.7. design components of work of this Project specific to their license to practice. be responsible for determining sizes or other specific requirements within their license to practice in accordance with applicable codes and regulations. be responsible for production and review of Shop Drawings. inspect work of this Section during fabrication and erection/installation. be responsible for stamping and signing each Shop Drawing and associated calculations performed. provide site administration and inspection of this part of the Work. Certification: Submit certification stating performance of engineered work will perform as required.
1.15.
1.15.1. 1.15.2. 1.15.3. 1.15.4.
TESTING AGENCY QUALIFICATIONS

Conduct testing in accordance with requirements of OBC unless advised otherwise in Contract Documents or by Consultant. Obtain certification where required by applicable codes and standards. Ensure testing agency is an independent testing agency with experience and capability to conduct testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E329. Qualifications of Inspectors: Submit list of inspectors to be employed on this Project and obtain Consultant approval. Ensure testing and inspection is performed by qualified inspectors and/or technologist certified by Professional Engineer or performed directly by Professional Engineer in conformance with applicable codes and certification programs. Ensure inspectors are qualified to perform type of inspection or testing required.
1.15.5.
1.16.
1.16.1. 1.16.2.
CONTRACTORS QUALIFICATIONS
Prior to commencement of Work, establish quality control system protocols, rules, related chain of commands and commitment to provide quality work as intended in Contract Documents for Work. Provide position Specification of quality control staff, shop and field supervisors complete with their skills, knowledge, duties and responsibilities.
1.17.
1.17.1. 1.17.2.
WELDER QUALIFICATIONS
Have welding executed by firms certified in accordance with CSA W47.1 Division 1 or 2.1 and submit copies of certificates to Consultant prior to start of work. Ensure operators employed on the Work are qualified per CSA W47.1 for work as required by Contract and submit copies of certificates to Consultant prior to start of work.
PAGE 01 40 00 - 13
1.17.3.
Ensure Inspection/Testing Company and welding inspector and supervisors meet qualifications per CSA W178.1 and CSA W178.2 and are certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau in Category (a), Buildings. Have welding undertaken by companies and welders fully approved to following codes and reference standards and carry proof with them while on site: 1.17.4.1. 1.17.4.2. 1.17.4.3. CSA W47.1. Operators shall be qualified "Class O" per CSA W47.1. CSA W59.
1.17.4.
1.18.
1.18.1.
PAYMENT FOR QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES

Owner to appoint and pay independent inspection and testing company or consultant to verify requirements of Contract Documents. Be responsible for quality control, employ quality control staff, supervisors and implement quality control procedures. Conform to GC 2.3 as required. Inspection and testing required by Contract Documents, Codes and Regulations and/or by authorities having jurisdiction is Owners responsibility and paid for by Owner. Inspection by Owner does not relieve Contractor of its responsibility for performance of Work in accordance of Contract Documents. Be responsible for care and control of Work. In addition to inspection and testing specified to be provided as part of Work or provided by Owner for its own verification of Work, Consultant may appoint separate inspection and testing companies for certain work where specifically stated or where it may later require. Wherever documents state that inspection and testing companies may be appointed by Owner, give adequate notice to Consultant to determine if such inspection and testing companies will be appointed. Services performed by inspection and testing companies and other consultants are a function to assist Consultant and do not to replace Contractor's responsibility for conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for continuous checking and inspections to ensure Contract performance is in accordance with Contract Documents as the Work proceeds. In such cases, following will apply: 1.18.5.1. Owner will pay costs of such additional inspection and testing; except where such additional tests or inspections reveal work not in accordance with Contract then Contractor shall bear cost of such tests and further tests as required, to verify acceptability of corrected work. Consultant will advise Owner of work to be inspected and companies appointed therefor and will supply them with necessary Drawings and Specifications. Advise Consultant and applicable inspection and testing companies not less than 5 Working Days prior to commencement of work to be inspected or tested and ensure proper facilities and coordination are provided. Do no work without required inspection and testing.
1.18.2. 1.18.3. 1.18.4.
1.18.5.
1.18.5.2. 1.18.5.3.
1.18.6.
Establish schedule of testing, number of testing reports, submission and distribution of testing reports. Inspection and testing reports shall provide all pertinent data regarding site conditions, dates, test references, Product identification, procedures and description, instructions and recommendations and other relevant information. Identify clearly Products not meeting requirements of Contract Documents and provide measures and recommendations for correcting situation. Advise Consultant promptly when Product or system fails to meet applicable Standards. Refer to individual specification section Division 02 - 49 inclusively for required testing.
PAGE 01 40 00 - 14
1.18.7.
Materials and work not in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents will be rejected at any time during progress of the Work. Defective material and work, whenever found prior to final completion of the Work, may be rejected regardless of previous inspection or testing.
1.19.
1.19.1. 1.19.2. 1.19.3.
COOPERATION WITH TESTING AND INSPECTION COMPANIES

Representatives of the testing laboratories shall have access to work at all times; provide facilities for such access in order that the laboratories may properly perform its function. Cooperate with testing and inspection companies and give adequate notification of any changes in source of supply, additional work shifts and any other proposed changes. Prior to commencing significant segments of work, give Consultant and independent testing and inspection agencies appropriate notification so as to afford them reasonable opportunity to review work previously completed. Failure to meet this requirement may be cause for the Consultant to classify the work as defective. Ensure no Product is installed before it is tested when a test is specified, nor work executed where a test or inspection is required and the inspectors cannot attend. Cooperate in permitting access for inspection to all places where work is being done or material is stored prior to shipping. Allow free access to testing agencies and supply necessary sampling materials for tests. Supply additional labour required to assist the testing and inspection companies in making tests. Cost of above labour and material shall be borne by individual Subcontractors concerned. Testing and inspection service does not relieve Contractor and Subcontractor of their responsibility for normal shop inspection, quality control of production and for errors made by them.
1.19.4. 1.19.5. 1.19.6. 1.19.7. 1.19.8.
1.20.
1.20.1.
SCHEDULES FOR TESTING

Establishing Schedule: 1.20.1.1. 1.20.1.2. By advance discussion with selected testing laboratories, determine the time required for laboratories to perform their tests and to issue each of their findings. Provide required time within construction schedule.
1.20.2.
Adherence to Schedule: 1.20.2.1. 1.20.2.2. Contractor shall advise testing laboratories in advance when testing of work is required. When testing laboratories are ready to test according to predetermined schedule, but are prevented from testing or taking specimens due to incompleteness of work, extra costs for testing attributable to the delay may be back-charged to Contractor and shall not be borne by Owner.
1.21.
1.21.1.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

Refer to respective trade Sections for source quality control requirements.
PAGE 01 40 00 - 15
1.22.1.
SITE QUALITY CONTROL

Contractor shall perform inspection and testing required by Code or governing authorities, required by Contract Documents and as required to clearly demonstrate compatibility of materials, integrity of systems and quality of work performance. Inspection and testing may apply without limitations to geotechnical work, compaction tests, cast-in-place concrete, concrete products, waterproofing, structural steel, welding, building envelope, roofing, thermography; thermal bridging and air leaks and other requirements of Contract. Cooperate and coordinate testing and inspection requirements with testing agency for designated requirements. Retain Geo-technical Report on site. Provide full cooperation to testing company by providing assistance on site as well submitting samples of fill materials. Refer to respective trade Sections for field quality control requirements.
1.22.2.
1.23.
1.23.1.
TESTING AND INSPECTION OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Provide testing and inspection of Mechanical and Electrical Systems as defined in Contract Documents under trade Sections of Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27 and 28 respectively.
1.24.
1.24.1. 1.24.2. 1.24.3. 1.24.4.
PROJECT MOCK-UPS
Arrange with Consultant to assist in preparing a schedule fixing the dates for mock-up review. Prior to manufacture and delivery of Products, arrange for Consultant's and Owner's review and acceptance of mock-ups. Allow time for modifications and subsequent reviews. Failure to obtain review and acceptance of mock-ups in ample time will not be considered sufficient reason for extensions to Contract Time or for extra costs. Provide following types of mock-ups: 1.24.4.1. 1.24.4.2. Transportable Mock-Ups. Refer to Specification Sections for size requirements. Arrange and pay for delivery and pick-up. Site Mock-Ups: Refer to Sections to determine if mock-ups will form part of Work or are built separately. Demolish mock-ups built separately after work of applicable Section is completed and Consultant has reviewed that part of Work. Obtain Consultant's acceptance of location of site mock-ups.
1.24.5. 1.24.6.
Modify mock-ups in accordance with Consultant's review at no additional cost to Owner. Mock-ups are used to refine design of components. Changes to mock-ups will be made. Allow time in schedule for revisions to be made to mock-ups and Shop Drawings. Mock-up review and revisions will not be accepted as basis of claim for delay or additional cost. Provide mock-ups using personnel assigned to the Work and Products and techniques to be used on the Work. Mock-ups shall serve as standard for remaining parts of the Work. Refer to each Section of the Work for additional mock-up requirements.
1.24.7. 1.24.8. 1.24.9.
1.24.10. Provide mock-ups required by Contract Documents.
1.25.
1.25.1.
CLADDING SYSTEMS
Provide a site mock-up of complete cladding systems in locations indicated on Drawings and where required by individual specification sections.
PAGE 01 40 00 - 16
1.26.1. 1.26.2. 1.26.3. 1.26.4.
EXTERIOR BUILDING ENVELOPE

Exterior Wall: (masonry, stone in similar components exposed to exterior, detail illustrating continuity of air/vapour barrier at junctions of building components). Aluminum Glazed Curtain Wall or Corner Supported Glazed Walls: (entrances, glazed wall, swing doors with special automatic door operators and similar items). Metal Cladding: Metal panels including corner conditions, air pressure equalization, rainscreen and moisture/water control, finishes, flashing and joint conditions. Precast Concrete Walls.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 01 40 00 - 17
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 01 50 00 Project No: 2011.008 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.
1.1.1.
1.1.2. 1.1.3.
Comply with Division 1 requirements and documents referred to herein. Be responsible for arranging, obtaining and paying for any applications, obtaining permits, and pay fees for providing for temporary utilities, facilities and controls. Provide and maintain all temporary facilities and controls. Remove them when directed and/or when no longer required. Payment for temporary facilities and controls shall be made by Contractor unless specified otherwise. Contractor shall arrange for and provide all temporary utilities required for the Work including power, water, gas, telephone, storm and sanitary services. Provide temporary utilities for temporary site offices. Provide and maintain adequate temporary supports, structures, light, power and water in accordance with GC 3.3, as required by all trades and to pay all charges for use of water, power, gas, etc. all such payments being part of the Contract Price. Produce environment for Work to proceed without delay at all times of year. Pay for installation, light, power and water used, maintenance and removal. The Contractor to provide all temporary services necessary for the performance of the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractor and tenant contractors, centrally located within the areas of Work and in accordance with governing regulations and ordinances. The Contractor shall coordinate electrical service requirements with the Owner and provide details of the proposed temporary service connection and metering provisions prior to installation.
1.1.4.
1.1.5.
1.1.6.
1.1.7.
1.2.
1.2.1.
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Temporary Water Supply: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. 1.2.1.5. Provide a continuous supply of water for construction use and for fire-fighting throughout the Work. Ensure adequate pressure at each floor. Provide a continuous supply of potable water for drinking by workers. Provide and maintain necessary temporary lines, extensions, hoses and pumps. Arrange for connection with appropriate utility company. Remove temporary water systems, connections, lines on completion and take-over of respective parts of Work. Restore surfaces damaged due to installation and removal of temporary water systems. Pay costs for installation of temporary water systems, water consumed, maintenance and removal. Restore parts of Work and other items damaged by water at the expense of those causing the damage.
1.2.1.6. 1.2.1.7. 1.2.2.
Temporary Power: 1.2.2.1. Provide for continuous temporary electric power for temporary lighting, for operation of power tools, construction aids, temporary facilities and other devices for construction use.
PAGE 01 50 00 - 1
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 01 50 00 Project No: 2011.008 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1.2.2.2. Provide and pay for necessary electrical panels, circuit breakers, junction boxes ad transformers, ad for distribution to work areas in accordance with governing regulations and ordinances. Arrange for connections with utility company. Remove temporary power from the site upon completion and take-over of respective parts of Work. Restore surfaces damaged due to installation and removal of temporary power. Pay costs for installation, power consumed, maintenance and removal.
1.2.2.3. 1.2.2.4. 1.2.2.5. 1.2.3.
Temporary Lighting: 1.2.3.1. 1.2.3.2. 1.2.3.3. 1.2.3.4. Provide and maintain temporary access lighting system throughout the Work. Locate and secure lighting systems to prevent displacement, falling or interference. Provide devices to protect fixtures, bulbs and tubes from accidental breakage. Have subcontractors provide additional lighting necessary for performance of parts of the Work as may be specified in other sections of the specifications and as may be required by trades and Subcontractors, as recommended by Product manufacturers and Suppliers ad as may be required by inspection and testing firms. Pay costs for installation, power consumed, replacement of burnt-out bulbs, tubes and ballasts, maintenance and removal. Level of illumination on all floors and stairs shall be not less than 161 lux (15 lumens per square foot or 15 foot candles) evenly distributed ad at acceptable intensities and as required for safety and security. When finishing trades are performing work, provide illumination comparable to final illumination. Extension cords, lamps and hoses shall be provided by those using them in accordance with governing regulations and ordinances. Remove temporary lighting from the site upon completion and take-over of respective parts of the Work. Restore surfaces damaged due to installation and removal of temporary lighting.
1.2.3.5. 1.2.3.6.
1.2.3.7.
1.2.4.
Temporary Communications Systems: 1.2.4.1. Contractor to pay as part of the Contract price all charges for use of Contractor telephone, internet, fax machine and other data.
1.2.5.
Temporary Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning: 1.2.5.1. Provide temporary heating required during construction period for the Work to ensure adequate protection of all parts of the Work under way and completed and for protection of Products to be incorporated into the Work. Maintain heating during delays and shutdowns and other such events as necessary to protect Work. Ensure temperature attained and maintained is not injurious to Products and to workmanship of any trade engaged on the Work. Record in daily log, high-low temperatures. Use only oil or propane fired heaters with enclosed combustion chamber vented to exterior in accordance with good practice and safety regulations, and as approved by Consultant and jurisdictional authorities. Provide equipment, shelter, maintenance, fuel and storage facilities.
1.2.5.2. 1.2.5.3. 1.2.5.4. 1.2.5.1.
1.2.5.2.
PAGE 01 50 00 - 2
1.2.5.3. 1.2.5.4. 1.2.5.5. 1.2.5.6. 1.2.5.7. 1.2.5.8. 1.2.5.9. Provide adequate ventilation to the outside. Keep building free of exhaust or combustion gases to ensure the safety and health of the workers and others. Store fuel outside building. If heaters are used in areas of completed building, provide protection to floors and surfaces to prevent damage, including damage caused by refuelling. Provide protection and heating as necessary should bearing surfaces, shoring and other surfaces of excavations be in danger of freezing before concrete or other Work is placed. Protect building footings, foundation and shear walls from frost. Remove temporary heating systems on completion and take-over of respective parts of Work. Restore surfaces damaged due to installation and removal of temporary heating systems.
1.2.5.10. Pay costs for installation of temporary heating systems, fuel consumed, maintenance and removal. 1.2.5.11. Provide temporary heating, ventilation and air conditioning for enclosed building until Substantial Performance of the Work to ensure adequate protection of work under way and of completed work. Temporary heating, ventilation and air conditioning without limitation includes heating, cooling and desiccant de-humidification equipment, associated power cables, gas lines, temporary duct work and accessories. 1.2.5.12. Provide controlled environment for construction drying and curing of construction work to prevent growth of mold and speed up drying of concrete to meet moisture emission levels required by finish flooring installation. Conform to following performance requirements, except where more stringent requirements are required by work of other Sections: 1.2.5.12.1. 1.2.5.12.2. 1.2.5.12.3. 1.2.5.12.4. 1.2.5.12.5. 1.2.5.12.6. Supply Air: Minimum 1 air change every 120 minutes. Filtration of Out Air: 100%. Temperatures: Minimum between 15 deg C (59 deg F) and 27 deg C (80 deg F). Relative Humidity: Maintain at or below 50% RH. Ensure moisture content in wood and hardwood materials is stabilized to maximum percentage recommended by AWI/AWMAC requirements. Control condensation and maintain environmental conditions, including air and surface temperatures suitable for surface preparation, application and curing of paints and coatings. Noise Criteria: Conform to requirements specified in Contract Documents.
1.2.5.12.7.
1.2.5.13. Submit schematic equipment layout, duct and/or pipe route, staging, sequencing layouts, enclosure and barricade construction. 1.2.5.14. Submit Product data, climate control equipment, temperature and humidity controls, duct, duct accessories, pipe and piping accessories materials and construction. Where placed outside, anchor and securely attach temporary supply canvas spiral duct to withstand wind damage. Ensure interior distribution polyethylene tubing has perforations to distribute air evenly throughout areas being served.
PAGE 01 50 00 - 3
1.2.5.15. Provide proper heating for drying out of new work. Maintain minimum temperature specified herein. Uniformly distribute heat to avoid hot or cool areas or excessive drying. Protect concrete, masonry, excavations, backfilling and other work from frost during construction. 1.2.5.16. Dehumidify interior spaces continuously during installation and curing periods required for moisture emitting work to maintain required relative humidity levels, including without limitations work of involving: 1.2.5.16.1. 1.2.5.16.2. 1.2.5.16.3. 1.2.5.16.4. 1.2.5.16.5. joint compounds, skim coating, gypsum board work and plaster. cementitious materials. paints. spray applied fireproofing. finish carpentry, casework, wood paneling, wood flooring and other millwork.
1.2.5.17. Ensure environmental control company performing this work is specialized in this work and having documented 5 years continuous experience performing work of similar size, scope and type. 1.2.5.18. As soon as construction is sufficiently advanced, and in order to prevent delays in progress of Work, enclose building using necessary tarpaulins, plastic sheeting or glazing and temporary doors, with locks to doors. 1.2.5.19. Maintain supervision of operation of temporary heating and ventilation equipment. Maintain temporary climate control equipment in service until completion of building commissioning or when use is no longer required as directed by Consultant. 1.2.5.20. Remove climate control equipment from site at successful commissioning of new HVAC equipment. 1.2.5.21. Do not use any of permanent facilities and controls without obtaining written permission from Consultant. 1.2.6. Use of Building HVAC System: 1.2.6.1. 1.2.6.2. When building HVAC system is available and approved by Consultant, for temporary heating. Be responsible for damage there to. Before any portion of heating system can be considered by Consultant for use by Contractor, verify following requirements: 1.2.6.2.1. 1.2.6.2.2. 1.2.6.2.3. 1.2.6.2.4. 1.2.6.2.5. 1.2.6.2.6. equipment must be properly commissioned with safety and operating contract devices operational. proper electrical power requirements and equipment operating within nameplate ratings. rotation of equipment certified. flow rates of equipment verified to be within design tolerances. submission of Operation and Maintenance Data. service and maintain systems and equipment in accordance with Operation and Maintenance Data.
PAGE 01 50 00 - 4
1.2.6.3. On completion of Work for which permanent heating system was used, replace filters, inspect and replace defective bearings and lubricate all bearings and clean strainer baskets. This includes painting of equipment if required, repacking of pumps, cleaning out of ductwork; all as determined by Consultant. Date of Substantial Performance of the Work and warranties for heating system shall not commence until entire system is in as near original condition as possible and is so certified by Consultant. Warranties shall not commence earlier than Date of Substantial Performance of the Work. Pay costs for providing and maintaining temporary heat, if and when using permanent heating system. Be responsible for damage to the Work due to failure in providing adequate heat and protection during construction.
1.2.6.4.
1.2.6.5. 1.2.6.6. 1.2.7.
Temporary Drainage: 1.2.7.1. Protect excavation, trenches and building from damage by rainwater, ground water, backing up of drains or sewers and other water, frost and other weather conditions. Provide sheeting, piling, shoring, pumps, equipment, temporary drainage, protective covering and enclosures. Provide necessary pumps including spare pump for keeping project free of water throughout construction period. Keep site properly and efficiently drained during construction and until completion. Be responsible for disturbances, dirt and damage which may be caused by or result from water backing up or flowing over, through, from or along any part of the Work or due to operations which may cause water to flow else where. Drain water away from site without causing any danger to public health.
1.2.7.2.
1.2.8.
Construction Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan: 1.2.8.1. Create and implement an erosion and sedimentation control plan for all construction activities associated with the project in order to prevent loss of soil by stormwater runoff and or wind erosion as well as to prevent infiltration of sediment in storm sewer or receiving streams or other forms of watershed.
1.2.9.
Temporary Protection: Provide and maintain following temporary protection at all times: 1.2.9.1. 1.2.9.2. 1.2.9.3. 1.2.9.4. Window Openings: Translucent, weatherproof protection until windows and glazing are installed. Door Openings: Minimum wood doors, frames, hinges, locks and bolts to exterior and interior to existing areas. Air Intakes: Provide protection against infiltration of dirt, dust and other deleterious matter. Temporary Dust Tight Partitions: Separate areas of work from occupied portions of building with temporary dust tight partitions constructed from floor to underside of structure. Construct temporary dust tight partitions as fire separations having a fire resistance rating of 1 hour consisting of 16 mm (5/8") gypsum board, both sides on steel stud partition conforming to ULC Design No. W407 and to ULC Design No. W408. Paint public sides of partitions with minimum 2 coats of low VOC paint in colours selected by Consultant. Seal edges and joints to achieve positive protection. Provide lockable door(s) in temporary dust tight partition(s) where indicated on Drawings and extra key to Consultant. Remove temporary dust tight partitions promptly when no longer required and Make Good adjacent surfaces. Hoarding/temporary dust tight partitions are to remain in-place unless noted otherwise.
PAGE 01 50 00 - 5
1.2.9.5. 1.2.9.6. Provide temporary dust tight partitions beyond those shown where risk of falling objects exist, to protect the public and Owners personnel. Dust-Down Vestibules: Provide as described in Section 01 10 00 having a minimum size of 3658 mm (12' - 0") long x 2440 mm (8' - 0") wide, equipped with vacuum, walk-off mats, clothing hooks and lighting and electricity. Double flap inner end with minimum 0.203 mm (8 mils) thick polyethylene sheet. Provide 2 - 914 mm x 2032 mm (3' - 0" x 6' - 8") hollow metal doors with pressed steel frame, closer and lock on outer end. Stair treads and landings. Roof and Waterproofing Protection: planking or other protection to prevent damage from falling materials, construction traffic, etc. Scaffolding Enclosures: to enable the Work to continue during inclement weather and winter conditions.
1.2.9.7. 1.2.9.8. 1.2.9.9. 1.2.10.
Temporary Fire Protection: 1.2.10.1. Provide and maintain sufficient temporary standpipes and connections, fire hose, valves, temporary cabinets and extinguishers, to comply with requirements of the governing Municipal and Provincial authorities to satisfaction of Consultant and local fire department and insurance authorities in order to protect the property of Owner and Contractor against fire hazards during construction. 1.2.10.2. Adjust and modify temporary fire protection facilities to accommodate progress of the Work. 1.2.10.3. Bulk storage of flammable liquids and other hazardous materials is not allowed on site. 1.2.10.4. Handle flammable liquids in approved containers. 1.2.10.5. Bringing in, use and disposal of gasoline, benzine or other flammable materials must be handled with good and safe practice as required by authorities having jurisdictions. 1.2.10.6. Maintain temporary fire protection systems in operation 24 hours a Day. 1.2.10.7. Provide and maintain temporary access routes to exits, clear and visibly identified, 24 hours a Day. 1.2.10.8. Take necessary precautions to eliminate fire hazards and to prevent damage to work, building materials, equipment and other property both public and private having to do with the Work. Inspect work of this Contract at least once a week for this purpose. 1.2.10.9. In areas of existing building being renovated and adjacent areas where affected by construction activities, make necessary adjustments and modifications to temporary fire protection as required during progress of the work, removing such temporary modifications when the permanent system is installed and operating. Maintain all existing fire exits at all times. 1.2.10.10. Provide fire protection to satisfaction of Consultant, to authorities having jurisdiction and to insurance authorities stipulated by Owner. Maintain in operation 24 hours a Day. 1.2.10.11. Provide and maintain free access from street to fire hydrants and to outside connections for standpipes or other fire extinguishing equipment, permanent or temporary; and maintain free access to control valves and hoses on fire lines within building and to all portable fire extinguishers. Ensure devices are visibly identified 24 hours a Day.
PAGE 01 50 00 - 6
1.2.10.12. Provide and maintain in working order, suitable Underwriters labelled fire extinguishers and locate in prominent positions, to approval of authorities having jurisdiction. Such extinguishers remain property of Contractor. Remove from building at date of Substantial Performance of the Work. 1.2.10.13. Store and locate materials and equipment packed in cardboard cartons, wood crates and other combustible containers in orderly and accessible manner. Place approved types of fire fighting equipment in vicinity of materials or equipment packed in this type of crate or carton until permanent fire protection and equipment are available. 1.2.10.14. Store rags and waste containing oil, grease or other flammable materials in an approved metal container and remove from site at end of each Working Day. 1.2.10.15. Only fire resistant tarpaulins are permitted on site. 1.2.10.16. Provide temporary standpipes as work proceeds in accordance with the regulations under the Occupational Health and Safety Act. 1.2.10.17. In eliminating fire risks, or effectively controlling site activities to minimize fire risk, observe following precautions as a minimum: 1.2.10.17.1. Prior to commencing work in any area, ensure workers are acquainted with the location of all fire-fighting apparatus and are familiar with its proper use and apparatus is in good working order. Stop all work immediately when any deficiencies in fire protection are encountered after work commences. Remedy all such deficiencies before resuming any other work. In areas where spraying with water will not cause damage, including areas at roof level, thoroughly wet area before commencing welding, oxyacetylene cutting, brazing, grinding or other hot work and keep area thoroughly wet until at least 1/2 hour following the last of previously stipulated hot work ceases. In areas where spraying with water would cause damage, provide approved fire retardant mats or blankets to cover all areas which might be reached by sparks, flame, hot slag, or other hot material from welding, cutting, brazing, grinding, or other hot work. In addition, provide blank flanges, plugs, caps, or other suitable means to seal openings and/or hot material and fill those items with water before commencing hot work. Stop all work immediately if water is lost or drained from any of those rubber-lined items. These requirements for rubber-lined items also apply to all other items with combustible linings. When electric or gas welding, brazing, cutting and performing any operation with an open flame within 3000 mm (10') or above space that may be occupied by persons, keep a portable fire extinguisher within 3000 mm (10') or above of operator at all times. Provide adequate fire watch at all times when welding, burning, cutting, brazing, or other hot work is in progress and until such times as the source of ignition or flame has been extinguished and for longer as required. Ensure each fire watcher has a suitable fire extinguisher on hand at all times. Ensure fire watchers have no duties other than fire protection and that fire watch continues through coffee breaks, meal periods and after normal work hours as necessary to ensure fire watch for at least 1/2 hour after welding, burning, brazing, cutting and similar hot work ceases.
1.2.10.17.2.
1.2.10.17.3.
1.2.10.17.4.
1.2.10.17.5.
1.2.10.17.6.
PAGE 01 50 00 - 7
1.2.10.17.7. Comply with the rules and regulations of the Fire Marshall Act and the Accident Prevention Regulations of The Workplace Safety Insurance Board.
1.2.10.18. Notify the Fire Department and Consultant immediately should a fire of any nature occur whether the fire has been extinguished or not. Notify the Fire Department and Consultant of any fire alarm shutdowns; notify once fire alarm has been recertified and operational. 1.2.10.19. If Contractor is the cause of a false alarm, it may be required to reimburse Owner for any charges from the Municipal Department resulting from the false alarm. 1.2.10.20. Establish a log book maintained by the Contractor which records all activity affecting the Owners fire alarm system. The log book shall record the date, time, trade, worker's name, nature and location of work performed, zone or zones affected, status of the system while work was performed, time and date of completion of the operation, and status of the system upon completion of the Work. At the end of each Working Day, Contractor shall review the log and sign indicating system is fully operational, except as recorded by the log. Inform Owner of system status and which zones may be affected daily prior to the commencement of any new operation that affects the fire alarm system. 1.2.10.21. Fire Watch: 1.2.10.21.1. A fire watch is required for each of the following activities regardless of the number, duration or size of activity in operation on a single floor or in a single area: any open flame activity (e.g. soldering and welding). shutdown of fire detection system. shutdown of sprinkler system. any other situation Consultant may deem appropriate.
1.2.10.21.1.1. 1.2.10.21.1.2. 1.2.10.21.1.3. 1.2.10.21.1.4.
1.3.
1.3.1. 1.3.2. 1.3.3. 1.3.4. 1.3.5. 1.3.6. 1.3.7.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
Provide construction facilities as necessary to perform the Work expeditiously. The temporary facilities shall be maintained by Contractor as required for the duration of the Work, unless directed otherwise. Locate all temporary facilities on the southeast corner of the site. Provide temporary buildings and hygienic facilities that meet the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain all temporary facilities clean and free from nuisances so as to avoid damage to property or structures. Remove from the site, all such construction facilities after use and make good any damages caused by their removal. Construction Site Plan: 1.3.7.1. Contractor shall submit to the Owner for review, a detailed plan of the site. This plan shall show the location of all field offices and other temporary facilities or work areas, the locations of areas to be designated for use by other contractors, hoarding locations, construction access locations, access roads, crane locations, site restrictions and the required staging of the various portions of the field offices, work areas and other temporary facilities as necessary.
PAGE 01 50 00 - 8
1.3.7.2. 1.3.8. The Owners review of the site plan shall be obtained before Contractor proceeds with any parts of the Work at the site, unless otherwise directed by the Owner.
Sanitary Facilities: 1.3.8.1. Provide and maintain temporary facilities for use by workers in compliance with Occupational Health and Safety Act, applicable codes and by-laws. Provide portable, weatherproof toilets, serviced at least weekly. Misuse of water closets and washing facilities or fouling of building by workers shall constitute grounds for instant dismissal from site.
1.3.8.2. 1.3.9.
Garbage Removal: Do not use institutional garbage bin facilities for removal of construction rubbish and debris. Provide garbage bins and schedule pick up of garbage. Coordinate location of garbage bins with authorities at institution. Conform to their requirements. Repair damage to site surface upon removal of garbage. Safety Program: 1.3.10.1. Conform to GC 3.6, undertake role of "Constructor" as defined under The Occupational Health and Safety Act, as amended. Be responsible to provide full safety program for anyone who gets paid for services on site including management, labour, delivery drivers, service personnel and others involved for services on site. Arrange for pre-project meeting related to safety, joint safety inspections with Contractor's consultant where required, site safety training and safety committees complete with accident investigation procedures. 1.3.10.2. Prior to commencement of construction, design fire safety plan in conjunction with local Fire Chief. Post fire plan throughout construction as recommended. Do not allow accumulation of waste that may constitute fire hazard. 1.3.10.3. Prior to commencement of Work, carry out preconstruction safety audit to identify hazards and establish protocols, commitment to safety, safety rules and safety related chain of commands for selective demolition work, sequential contract work, removal of designated hazardous materials, replacements of components and glazing items. For sequential contracts, preconstruction safety audit shall include reviewing work carried out under previous contract which is to be taken over to form part of this Contract. Design, implement, monitor and maintain a safe work environment throughout Contract in accordance with procedures established during preconstruction safety audit. Consultant will have authority to correct deficiencies and disregard for good safety practice at Contractor's expense. Attendance to pre-construction safety audit shall be mandatory for Contractor, Subcontractors and major Suppliers. 1.3.10.4. Conform to Construction Safety Association of Ontario's Manual on Propane in construction. Watch work area for minimum of 30 minutes after hot work is completed. Provide site fire security when required by local building department and/or municipal fire department. Ensure water supply is adequate for fire fighting. 1.3.10.5. Provide on site such equipment and medical facilities as are necessary to furnish first aid to anyone who may be injured in connection with Work in accordance with regulations of Occupational Health and Safety Act (Ontario). 1.3.10.6. Promptly report in writing to Consultant all accidents arising out of or in connection with performance of Work, whether on or adjacent to site, which caused death, personal injury or property damage, giving full details and statements of witnesses. In addition, in case of death, serious injuries or damages, report accident immediately by telephone or messenger to Consultant.
1.3.10.
PAGE 01 50 00 - 9
1.3.10.7. If any claim is made by anyone against Contractor or any Subcontractor on account of any accident or damage, promptly report facts in writing to Consultant, giving full details of claim.
1.4.
1.4.1.
CONSTRUCTION AIDS
Construction Hoists: Provide, install, operate, maintain, locate where directed and pay costs for hoisting equipment where required for moving of workers, products and equipment. Position equipment so not to interfere with Work. Operate equipment by qualified hoist operator along with well trained flag and signal persons. Trade Sections shall make their own financial and schedule arrangements with Contractor for use thereof. Provide concrete pads for hoisting equipment. Scaffolding: 1.4.2.1. Erect fixed or mobile scaffolding as applicable independent of walls. Use it in manner as to interfere as little as possible with other Sections. When not in use, move it as necessary to permit installation of other work. Construct and maintain scaffolding in rigid, secure and safe manner. Remove it promptly when no longer required or remove it at end of each Day and store in secure place as directed. Provide and maintain scaffolding, ramps, ladders, swing staging, platforms, and temporary stairs.
1.4.2.
1.4.2.1. 1.4.3.
Site Storage/Loading: 1.4.3.1. 1.4.3.2. Confine Work and operations of employees within the Site. Confine storage to southeast corner of site. Do not load or permit to load any part of the Work with a weight or force that will endanger the Work.
1.4.4.
Equipment, Tools and Materials Storage: 1.4.4.1. 1.4.4.2. Provide and maintain, in a clean and orderly condition, lockable weatherproof sheds for storage of tools, equipment and Products. Locate Products not required to be stored in weatherproof sheds on site in a manner to cause least interference with Work activities.
1.5.
1.5.1.
VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING

Provide access roads as may be necessary to provide safe and adequate access for materials, Products and other supplies. Provide and maintain access sidewalks, roadways and similar facilities as may be required for access to the Work. Do not block public roads, or impede traffic during work of this Project and if required to temporarily block traffic then provide flag person to direct traffic acceptable to Municipal authorities. Remove accumulations of ice and snow from areas providing access to site. Ensure access is available for emergency vehicles. Comply with fire plan for vehicular traffic. Provide roads, walks, ramps stairs and other such means of access as necessary. Maintain temporary entrances to building(s) including enclosed hoarding as required. Maintain access to existing service entrance(s) at all times, including ready access for fuel oil trucks and delivery vehicles. Bridge excavations with construction to safely support any load that could be imposed or provide personnel to assist in deliveries to building(s) as required. Parking for Contractors vehicles shall be arranged with Consultant. Owner will not be responsible for parking fines incurred by Contractor, Subcontractors or their employees.
1.5.2.
1.5.3.
PAGE 01 50 00 - 10
1.5.4. 1.5.5. Do not be nuisance to public traffic any time. Manage construction traffic by using designated roads and by providing trained flag persons to direct public traffic as appropriate. Existing Parking Facilities: Confine parking to facilitys designated parking facilities. Limited parking will be permitted on the Site at the front of the Building provided it does not disrupt access along north side of the building and the Owners se of the facility. Arrange and pay for associated costs. Do not block any streets, walkways or allow their use for parking by any construction crew or visitors except with approved specific permission from appropriate authorities and in accordance with stipulated standing regulations and restrictions. Minimize traffic movement and temporary closing of access streets.
1.6.
1.6.1.
TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES

Occupation of Public Property: 1.6.1.1. Arrange for and provide hoarding and barricades around areas occupying public property, (within and outside the boundary of the Place of the Work), required to execute the Work. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Pay fees associated with occupation of public property. Structural Design and Inspection: Employ a full time professional structural engineer registered in the province of Ontario to: 1.6.1.3.1. 1.6.1.3.2. 1.6.1.3.3. 1.6.1.3.4. design hoarding and barricades located on public property. be responsible for production and review of shop drawings. stamp and sign each shop drawing. provide site inspection of this part of the Work.
1.6.1.2. 1.6.1.3.
1.6.2.
Site Enclosure: 1.6.2.1. 1.6.2.2. 1.6.2.3. Any enclosures shall be constructed and maintained by Contractor in compliance with the requirements of any authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary barriers and enclosures in order to execute the Work expeditiously. Remove from the site, all such temporary barriers and enclosures after use and make good any damages caused by their removal.
1.6.3.
Hoarding: 1.6.3.1. 1.6.3.2. Erect hoarding as necessary to protect the public, workers, public and private property from injury or damage ad to secure he Work. Provide hoarding and lockable gates in accordance with the requirements of the Municipality, the Occupational Health and Safety Act, Regulations for Construction Projects and other authorities having jurisdiction to: 1.6.3.2.1. 1.6.3.2.2. 1.6.3.3. 1.6.3.4. Protect public, Owner's occupants, personnel and property from injury and damage. Exclude non-construction personnel and public from parts of the Place of the Work under construction.
Relocate and reconstruct hoarding to accommodate phasing of the Work. Remove and dispose of hoarding upon completion of the parts of the Work.
PAGE 01 50 00 - 11
1.6.4. Temporary Heated Enclosures: 1.6.4.1. 1.6.4.2. 1.6.4.3. Conform to requirements of Occupational Health and Safety Act. Take precautions and provide temporary protection to prevent damage to Work affected by temperature, water, weather and other environmental conditions. Provide temporary heated enclosures in advance of cold weather to continue full scope of operations through cold climatic temperature and weather from commencement to completion without delay. Take precautions to protect openings made in existing building(s) from entry of elements and of persons during construction and to protect existing structure and finishes from damage. Protection of exterior enclosure shall be air tight and have minimum thermal resistance value of R = 5 (RSI = 1). Provide heating to maintain the recommended Product storage, mixing, substrate, ambient air, placement, Product installation and curing temperatures recommended by respective Product manufacturers. Provide temporary enclosures and heating required by Contract Documents. Provide weather tight closures to the existing building upon demolition and to all unfinished door and window openings, tops of shafts and other openings in floors and roofs. Structural Engineering Requirements: Employ a full time, professional, structural engineer registered in the province of Ontario to: 1.6.4.8.1. 1.6.4.8.2. 1.6.4.8.3. 1.6.4.8.4. 1.6.5. design components of the Work of this Section requiring structural performance, be responsible for determining design forces, framing component sizes and installation detailing. inspect the Work of this Section during fabrication and erection provide site administration and inspection of this part of the Work.
1.6.4.4.
1.6.4.5.
1.6.4.6. 1.6.4.7. 1.6.4.8.
Dust Barriers: Separate areas of work from occupied portions of building with dust-tight screens. Screens shall consist of plywood minimum 6 mm (1/4") thick on wood stud supports, or equivalent. Seal edges and joints to achieve positive protection. Provide lockable door(s) in screen(s) where indicated on Drawings and extra key to Consultant. Remove screens promptly when no longer required and make good adjacent surfaces. Guardrails and Barricades: 1.6.6.1. Provide board fences, gates and locks, covered ways, hoardings, guard rails, barriers, night lights and pavement protection, notices, warning boards and all kinds protection features for protection workers as well as for protection of public and of public and private properties; for public rights-of-way; and as required by law or by authorities having jurisdiction. Alter, remove and relocate or replace as required, hoardings, barriers and entrances therein as required by authorities having jurisdiction and by Work. Provide secure, rigid guardrails and barricades around deep excavations, open shafts, open stairwells, open edges of floors, roofs and shafts to protect workers and public from injury. Provide and maintain guard lights at barricades, railings, obstructions in streets, roads or sidewalks, and at trenches or pits adjacent to public walks or roads.
1.6.6.
1.6.6.2. 1.6.6.3. 1.6.6.4.
PAGE 01 50 00 - 12
1.6.6.5. Close off access routes by placing barricades or posting guards to prevent unauthorized personnel from having access to Work. Unauthorized personnel shall mean public and anyone not directly concerned with execution, supervision or inspection of Work.
1.6.7.
Tree and Shrub Protection: 1.6.7.1. Protect trees and shrubs existing on site and on adjacent properties which are to be retained, except where otherwise required by Contract Documents. Do not remove interfering branches adjacent to excavation without obtaining prior approval from Consultant. Do not injure tree trunks. Protect roots against damage due to compaction of soil, excavating, backfilling and rough grading, and against oil, gasoline and other chemicals due to spillage and for seepage. Keep disturbance of root system to absolute minimum and promptly protect and cover exposed roots. Replace damaged trees as directed without any expense to Owner. Fence off existing trees at dripline to protect root system. Carefully wrap trees adjacent to construction work, material storage areas and trucking lanes in burlap to height of 2.4 m (8') and encase with protective framework from grade to height of 2.4 m (8') consisting of 38 mm x 89 mm (1-1/2" x 3-1/2") lumber around tree at 150 mm (6") oc. Hold framework in place with minimum of 3 suitable wire bands. Existing Trees: 1.6.7.5.1. Remove trees indicated to be removed in a manner to prevent hazard to persons and property. Employ expert woodsmen for tree removal over 150 mm (6") caliper. Dispose of felled trees. Cut trees to 1800 mm (6') lengths, debark and stack in a manner to permit drying. Do not cut trees or prune roots and tree branches. Arrange and pay for pruning by the Forestry Section of the Parks Division of the Municipality. Protect existing trees indicated to remain with barriers erected at the perimeter of the branch spread (drip line) and minimum 1800 mm (6') from trunk. Construct barriers of wood framing and plywood, minimum 1200 mm (4') high at areas adjacent to vehicular and construction machinery traffic. Construct barriers of wooden snow fencing minimum 1200 mm (4') high except at areas adjacent to traffic. Maintain barriers until final grading and planting is to commence within the barrier perimeter.
1.6.7.2.
1.6.7.3. 1.6.7.4.
1.6.7.5.
1.6.7.5.2. 1.6.7.5.3.
1.6.7.5.4. 1.6.7.5.5. 1.6.7.5.6. 1.6.7.6.
Work adjacent to base of trees: 1.6.7.6.1. 1.6.7.6.2. 1.6.7.6.3. 1.6.7.6.4. 2400 mm (8') radius: Do not excavate mechanically or store materials and equipment. 1200 mm (4') to 2400 mm (8') radius: Excavate by hand 1200 mm (4') radius: Do not disturb soil. Do not secure bracing, rigging cables and other fastenings to existing trees.
PAGE 01 50 00 - 13
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 01 50 00 Project No: 2011.008 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.7.
1.7.1.
TEMPORARY CONTROLS
Pollution Control: Take appropriate dust control measures to avoid contamination of adjacent areas near site from dust. Respond immediately to complaints of dust received from public, authorities, or Consultant. Keep public and private roads free of dust, mud and construction debris resulting from trucks employed on this Project. Noise and Vibration Control: Control noise and vibration generated by Work. Respond immediately to complaints of noise and vibration received from public, authorities or Consultant. Pest Control: Be responsible to provide control measures, restraining procedures and treatments to prevent infestation and spread of insects, rodents and other pests deemed to be present at site and/or noticed during course of the Work. Carry out fumigation, pest control procedure and posting of warning signs, notices including contents of such notices in accordance with requirements of Pesticides Act and any other authorities having jurisdiction. Designated Lunch Area: 1.7.4.1. 1.7.4.2. Provide designated temporary lunch areas to be used by workers on site. One portable toilet (maintain). cleaning maintenance (daily).
1.7.2. 1.7.3.
1.7.4.
1.8.
1.8.1.
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
Provide a Project sign as detailed and including: 1.8.1.1. 1.8.1.2. 1.8.1.3. 1.8.1.4. 1.8.1.5. 1.8.1.6. 1.8.1.7. Material: Minimum 19 mm (3/4") exterior grade plywood with reinforced resin facing. Size: Maximum 1800 mm (6') high x 3600 mm (12') wide unless otherwise directed by Owner. Support: Wood frame. Mounting Height and Location: As directed by Consultant. Trim: Wood moulding at perimeter. Information Required: Project name, Owner's name, Consultant's and other associated Consultants' names, major contributors as designated by Owner, Contractor's name. Layout and Colours: To Consultant's acceptance.
1.8.2. 1.8.3. 1.8.4. 1.8.5.
Provide Consultant's sign of same size, construction and quality as Project sign, bearing Consultant's name in accordance with Consultant's directions. Prior to proceeding, submit drawings by a sign painter for acceptance by Consultant. Contractor's signs, flags, etc., bearing name of Contractor, may only be installed with Consultant's prior approval. Remove Project signs at completion of the Work.
1.9.
1.9.1. 1.9.2.
DUST AND SPILLAGE CONTROL

Clean daily the road pavement and sidewalks for the entire frontage of the property. Trucks and vans leaving the site should be cleaned of all loose soil and dust from demolition debris including the washing of tires and sweeping or washing of exteriors and tail gates by a designated labourer. A daily log of each truck leaving the site should be kept by Contractor noting when the truck was cleaned and by whom.
PAGE 01 50 00 - 14
1.9.3. Tarp trucks leaving the site which have been loaded with indigenous soil or demolition debris.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 01 50 00 - 15
1.1.1.
SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
REFERENCES
Reference Standards: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. 1.2.1.5. 1.2.1.6. 1.2.1.7. ANSI/ASME B18.6.3-03(08) - Machine Screws and Machine Screw Nuts CSA W47.1-09 CSA W47.2-11 CSA W59-03(08) CSA W59.2-M91(08) CAN/ULC-S101-07 CAN/ULC-S107-03 - Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel - Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Aluminum - Welded Steel Construction - Welded Aluminum Construction - Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials - Methods of Fire Tests of Roof Coverings
1.3.
1.3.1.
BASIC PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

Material, Machinery, Equipment and Fixtures: Product employed in the Work shall be those which affect indoor air quality as little as possible. Provide adequate ventilation during installation of finishing materials to avoid effect on indoor air quality. Material, plant, equipment and fixtures specified shall form basis of Contract. Where more than 1 brand or manufacturer is named in Specifications, or on Drawings, Contractor shall have choice to use 1 of specified manufacturer or brand provided requirements of Drawings and Specifications are met. Ensure materials, plant, equipment and fixtures are not damaged or defective and of quality specified and compatible for purpose intended. If requested provide evidence as to type, source and quality. Remove and replace defective Products, at own expense, regardless of previous reviews and be responsible for delays and expenses caused thereby. Replace factory finished equipment, or parts thereof, whose paint finish is damaged and cannot be reasonably remedied by paint touch-up. When conflict occurs between specified technical description and manufacturer's standard model numbers and/or manufacturer's printed description of given model number, technical description specified in Contract Documents shall govern. Manufacturers shall make necessary modifications in their manufacturing methods to meet requirements specified. Do not expose trademarks, labels and nameplates, including applied labels, in finished Work. Remove visible trademarks and labels except those which are giving operating instructions, which are essential to obtain identification of mechanical and electrical equipment for maintenance and replacement purposes and for mandatory fire ratings. In general Owner retains right to select all choices available within specified Products colours, finishes and other options unless specified otherwise.
1.3.2.
1.3.3.
1.3.4.
1.3.5.
1.3.6.
PAGE 01 60 00 - 1
1.3.7. Environmental Requirements: 1.3.7.1.
Recycled Content: Use materials with recycled content to reduce environmental impacts resulting from extraction and processing of virgin materials. These may include: carpet, tile, steel and masonry/concrete (flyash). Regional Materials: Use materials or products that have been extracted, harvested, recovered and processed locally in an attempt to support the use of indigenous resources and reduce the environmental impacts resulting from transportation, These may include: precast concrete manufactured adjacent to the project site. Rapidly Renewable Materials: Use of rapidly renewable building materials and products in order to reduce the use and depletion of finite raw materials and long-cycle renewable materials. Certified Wood: Use wood-based materials and product that are certified in accordance with the Forest Stewardship Councils (FSC) Principles and Criteria in order to encourage environmentally responsible forest management. Use products with low VOC, refer to Section 01 40 00.
1.3.7.2.
1.3.7.3.
1.3.7.4.
1.3.7.5. 1.3.8.
Toxic or Hazardous Substances and Materials: 1.3.8.1. 1.3.8.2. Comply with Supplementary Conditions. Definitions: 1.3.8.2.1. Normal Mould Concentrations: Indoor concentrations of spores, hyphae and mycelia fragment (both airborne and on surfaces) that are similar in concentration and species population distribution that would be found outdoors in natural environment. Mould Amplification: Growth or elevated population of mould (both airborne and on surfaces) including visible growth or staining on any building material. This amplification is most often caused by water damage to building materials.
1.3.8.2.2.
1.3.8.3.
Products and materials incorporated in the Work shall be as free as possible of noxious or toxic volatile emissions or emissions of irritating or toxic particles, so interior air of completed building is as pollution-free as possible. (For example, Products emitting benzene, mercury, lead or other known toxic compounds are not acceptable.) Prior to commencement of the Work, Owner will investigate and inspect existing building for potential mould amplification that may affect the Work. Owner will appoint and pay for inspection and testing company having qualified and experienced bio-contamination investigator to carry out sampling and laboratory analysis to document type of mould, if any. Inspection and testing company will provide a detailed report documenting type of mould and its removal procedures. Owner will arrange and pay for any necessary removal. Contractor shall be responsible for satisfying itself that site is free of mould amplification prior to commencement of work in existing building. If mould amplification is found to be present during construction, Contractor shall be responsible for correction/abatement at its cost. Product with visible or invisible signs of mould amplification whether installed or not, shall be considered defective and shall be removed at Contractors expense. Contractor shall be responsible to retain a qualified and experienced bio-contamination investigator acceptable to Consultant to conduct at its expense sampling and laboratory analysis and other required assessment steps to determine whether or not materials are impacted by mould amplification and follow up recommended contamination management method.
1.3.8.4.
1.3.8.5.
PAGE 01 60 00 - 2
1.3.8.6.
Ensure construction workers are not exposed to amplified moulds. Take every reasonable precaution in circumstances for protection of workers, as air movement and handling of contaminated material can release spores into atmosphere which can cause adverse health effects. Mould metabolites including mycotoxins, when in contact with skin or inhaled, may irritate skin, eyes, nose and throat resulting in allergy-like symptoms such as difficulty in breathing, runny nose, watery eyes, fatigue, headache, asthmatic attacks and general flu like symptoms. Do not permit workers with weakened immune system to work in mould amplified areas as they may experience, in addition to the symptoms specified hereinbefore, an increased risk of fungal infection. Follow work practices set out by Health Canada in Fungal Contamination of Public Buildings: A Guide to Recognition and Management as a reasonable standard. Where odourless Products are not available, Products shall be chosen where possible so odours are minimized within a 1 month gas-off period following installation at normal occupancy ventilation levels. Ventilation levels during the construction period shall be set sufficiently high to encourage the gassing off of materials to their minimum levels prior to occupancy of the building, where possible. Products for installation within the air-handling and distribution systems shall be especially chosen to minimize the introduction of pollutants into the fresh air supply to the building.
1.3.8.7.
1.3.8.8.
1.3.8.9. 1.3.9.
Availability: 1.3.9.1. Immediately upon signing the Contract, review Product delivery requirements and anticipate foreseeable supply delays for any items. If delays in supply of Products are likely or possible, or Products are no longer available, or a specified manufacturer is no longer in business, notify Consultant of such, in order that substitutions or other remedial action may be authorized in ample time to prevent delay in performance of the Work. Products which are specified by their proprietary names, by part, or catalogue number form basis of the Contract. No substitutes for these are permitted without Consultant's acceptance in writing. In the event of failure to notify Consultant at commencement of the Work and should it subsequently appear that Work may be delayed for such reason, Consultant reserves right to substitute more readily available Products of similar character, at no increase in Contract Price. No substitution of materials will be allowed on basis of long deliveries, unless such long delivery problems are identified at time of Bidding.
1.3.9.2.
1.3.9.3.
1.3.9.4. 1.3.10.
Mechanical & Electrical Location Drawings: 1.3.10.1. Mechanical and electrical drawings indicate approximate locations diagrammatically. Prior to installation, request and obtain final locations and arrangement drawings for mechanical and electrical items. Allow Consultant to adjust final locations within a 1500 mm (5') radius from diagrammatic position indicated, without change to Contract Price. 1.3.10.2. Align and cluster devices and fitments neatly in accordance with specified mounting heights, properly aligned horizontally and vertically.
1.3.11.
Gauges: 1.3.11.1. Interpret gauges of uncoated steel sheet based on manufacturers standard gauge (msg), stainless steel sheet based on United States Standard Gauge (Revised) and non-ferrous sheet metals based on Brown & Sharpe Gauge. For galvanized steel sheet based on galvanized sheet gauge (ga).
PAGE 01 60 00 - 3
1.3.11.2. Interpret gauges specified for wire as Steel Standard and for non-ferrous wire, as American. 1.3.12. Fire Rating: 1.3.12.1. Where material, component or assembly is required to be fire rated, fire rating shall be determined on basis of results of tests conducted in conformance with CAN/ULC-S101 by 1 of following testing authorities acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1.3.12.1.1. 1.3.12.1.2. 1.3.12.1.3. 1.3.12.1.4. 1.3.12.1.5. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC); www.ulc.ca Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL); www.ul.com FM Global; www.fmglobal.com National Research Council of Canada; www.nrc.ca Warnock Hersey ITS; www.intertek.com
1.3.12.2. Where reference is made to only 1 testing authority, an equivalent fire rating as determined or listed by another of aforementioned testing authorities is acceptable if approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain and submit such approval of authorities, in writing, when requesting acceptance of a proposed equivalent rating or test design. 1.3.13. Roof Covering Classification: 1.3.13.1. Roof Covering classification shall be determined in accordance with CAN/ULC-S107. 1.3.13.2. Unless permitted by Code, every roof covering shall have Class A, B, or C classification as determined in accordance with Code requirements. 1.3.14. Manufacturers Written Instructions: 1.3.14.1. Unless specified otherwise, use each Product in accordance with manufacturer's published written instructions regarding handling, storage, preparation, methods of installation, protection and cleaning. Take into account site conditions and provide ancillary Products or accessories. 1.3.14.2. Conform to manufacturer's recommended installation temperatures. If finishes are installed at temperatures different from operation or service temperatures, make provisions for expansion and contraction in service as acceptable to manufacturer and Consultant. Repair resulting damage should expansion provisions prove inadequate. 1.3.14.3. Notify Consultant, in writing, of conflicts between Contract Documents and manufacturer's instructions, so Consultant may establish course of action to be taken. If requested, make a copy of those instructions available at site. 1.3.14.4. Improper installation or erection of Products, due to failure to comply with these requirements, shall require removal and re-installation at no increase in Contract Price. 1.3.14.5. Whenever specific reference to following manufacturer's directions or instructions is made in Specifications, upon request submit copies thereof for review before commencing such work. 1.3.15. Anchors and Fasteners: 1.3.15.1. Supply appropriate anchors, fasteners, accessories and adhesives required for fabrication and erection of Work. 1.3.15.2. Unless specified otherwise use exposed metal fastenings and accessories of same texture, colour and finish as Product being fastened.
PAGE 01 60 00 - 4
1.3.15.3. Use metal fastenings of same material as metal component being fastened, or of metal which will not generate electrolytic action and cause damage to fastening or metal component under moist conditions. In general use non-corrosive or hot dip galvanized steel anchors occurring on or in exterior wall, slab or other exterior locations, unless higher standard is indicated or specified. 1.3.15.4. Fastening devices or adhesives shall be of appropriate type, used in sufficient quantity and in such manner to provide positive, permanent fastening which will not shift, work loose or fail during occupancy of building due to vibration or other causes resulting from normal use of building. Install anchors at spacing to provide required load/stress carrying capacity. Do not use wood plugs. 1.3.15.5. Lay out fastenings neatly, evenly spaced and aligned. Keep exposed fastenings to minimum. 1.3.15.6. Supply adequate instructions and templates and, if necessary supervise installation, where fastenings or accessories for your Section are required to be built into work of other Sections. 1.3.15.7. Do not use fastenings which will cause spalling, cracking, or deformation or deterioration of material being fastened by or to. 1.3.15.8. Do not use powder actuated fastening devices, which are used in tension, without approval. Take stringent safety precautions when using powder actuated fastenings. Use only low velocity plunger-type devices. 1.3.15.9. Use adhesives specified, or if not specified, those recommended by manufacturer of materials involved, compatible with materials to be joined, and effective in forming permanent joint of adequate strength. 1.3.15.10. Use screws, nails, staples and other similar, driven fasteners suitable to materials to be joined and to conditions under which they are installed and used. Ensure in finished work, fasteners are sized to take durable hold under stress to be encountered without damage to, or weakening of, elements secured together and fastenings will not corrode or cause staining of exposed surfaces. 1.3.15.11. Security Screws: Complying with ANSI/ASME B18.6.3; provide only tamper-resistant Torx Plus or break off type screws as specified and noted on Drawings. Provide flathead security screws where Torx-Plus or breakoff is indicated to be counter sunk otherwise provide only trusshead or buttonhead for Torx-Plus and only roundhead for breakoff type. Torx-Plus Temper resistant screws with heads having a deep hex-lobular recess with a solid post formed in the centre requiring a special metal driver to install or remove screw. Fasteners and tools shall be of type produced by licensed manufacturer. Break-Off head security screws with drive heads having an additional hexagonal shaped head designed to break off after installation at a predetermined torque level. Grind remaining portion of neck smooth after hex-head is broken off. Acceptable manufacturers, Temper Proof Screws Inc or Folger Adam Security Inc, or Sentry Security Fasteners, Inc. or Temper proof Screw Co. 1.3.15.12. Do brazing or soldering to form durable connections of strength adequate to resist stresses to be encountered without deformation of elements joined. Prepare base metals and use methods and materials to ensure clean joint, and to prevent staining, corrosion, discolouration, deformation or other damage to finished Work. 1.3.15.13. Do welding to CSA W59 for steel and to CSA W59.2-M for aluminum, unless specified otherwise. Have welding performed by companies certified operatives to CSA W47.1 or CSA W47.2-M.
PAGE 01 60 00 - 5
1.3.15.14. Provide accessory items or materials required, such as brackets, cleats, connectors, sealants, lubricants, cleaners, protection and similar items, whether specified or not, so Work is complete and performs as required. 1.3.16. 1.3.17. 1.3.18. Built in Items: Provide and coordinate location of chases, slots and reglets including frames, sleeves, inserts, anchors, fasteners and bolts, forms and templates. Patents: Verify existence or exclusivity of patent licenses for Products prior to installation. Trademarks and Labels: Do not expose trademarks and labels, including applied labels, in finished Work. Remove visible trademarks and labels except those which are essential to obtain identification of mechanical and electrical equipment for maintenance and replacement purposes and for mandatory fire ratings. Barrier Free Design Requirements: 1.3.19.1. Conform to Code requirements for barrier free installations. 1.3.19.2. Install switches, telephones, fire-alarm pull stations, washroom accessories and other equipment and devices requiring accessibility by building staff and public, excluding mechanical and electrical room installations, to meet barrier-free requirements. If there is conflict between this requirement and any other building code requirement bring to attention of Consultant prior to installation.
1.3.19.
1.4.
1.4.1. 1.4.2. 1.4.3. 1.4.4. 1.4.5. 1.4.6. 1.4.7.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

Package, crate and brace Products to prevent damage during delivery, storage and handling. Provide protection to finished surfaces to prevent damage during delivery, storage and handling. Store packaged materials in original, undamaged condition with manufacturers' labels and seals intact. Handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturers' and Suppliers' recommendations, in protected locations. Store materials susceptible to environmental damage in weather-tight enclosures, raised clear of the ground and protected from weather, dampness and deterioration. Replace Products damaged during delivery to Place of the Work, storage, handling and installation. Conform to written procedures for safe handling, storage and use of noxious and hazardous materials including special precaution, safe clean-up and disposal procedures. Conform to the environmental protection requirements under Code. Mould Control During Product Storage and Handling: 1.4.8.1. 1.4.8.2. Do not bring building Products onto site containing toxic moulds. Exercise continuous quality control and enforce mould control requirements upon Subcontractors and establish proper Product storage and delivery sequence to protect Products from weather and other exposures conducive to mould growth. Take special care while handling and storing materials, without limitation, such as particleboard, plywood, cellulose materials, wallpaper, ceiling panels, gypsum boards and insulation with kraft paper back up. Monitor humidity levels and provide adequate ventilation in storage areas. Be watchful of any moisture condition in storage areas. Do not use materials which have been damaged by exposure to moisture and/or showing signs of mould growth.
1.4.8.
1.4.8.3.
1.4.8.4.
PAGE 01 60 00 - 6
1.4.8.5.
Take measures during Product storage and handling to provide mould free finished construction.
1.5.
1.5.1.
CONCEALMENT OF SERVICES
Conceal pipes, service lines and ducts in chases, behind furring or above ceilings, except where they are indicated as being exposed to view. Where no ceiling is provided, such items may be exposed, but must be neatly and logically arranged.
1.6.
1.6.1.
MANUFACTURED ITEMS
Where a conflict occurs between specified technical description and manufacturer's standard model numbers and/or manufacturer's printed description of given model number, technical description specified herein governs. Manufacturers shall make necessary modifications in their manufacturing methods to meet all aspects of these Specifications.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 01 60 00 - 7
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 01 70 00 Project No: 2011.008 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.
1.1.1.
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
REFERENCES
Reference Standards: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. ASTM C843-99(06) ASTM C926-11 - Specification for Application of Gypsum Veneer Plaster - Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster
1.3.
1.3.1.
PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS SERVICE

Obtain full time engineering service from professional engineer licensed to practice in Province of Ontario in applicable discipline. Engineering service shall include without limitation, design of structural elements and full inspection services during fabrication, erection and administration during construction.
1.4.
1.4.1.
DESIGN INTEGRITY AND ARCHITECTURAL REQUIREMENTS

Air/Vapour Barrier Integrity: 1.4.1.1. This Project incorporates design principles of positive air and vapour leakage control at building enclosure line. Drawing details illustrate continuity of air/vapour barrier at penetrating elements such as door, window and louver frames. Barrier system is designed to allow not more than 0.06 cfm/sq ft to leak from interior of building to exterior or to pressure-equalized cavity as applicable. Barrier extends nominally from foundation line, vertically along exterior walls and to positive contact with roof air/vapour barrier or roofing membrane as applicable. Continuity also extends to waterproofing at podia areas. Continuity also extends to inner surface of glazing units. In order to maintain continuity of envelope, interfacing of various building elements requires close coordination by all trades involved with exterior building elements. Positive mechanical connections and seal of transition medium extending from primary wall air/vapour barrier to theoretical "insulation line" of window or door frame shall be made with proper construction sequencing established by Contractor to ensure such interfacing. All such transition installation may be inspected by Consultant and/or Inspection and Testing Company prior to concealing with subsequent construction. Manufacturers of such window or door frames shall ensure correctly designed and positioned metallic legs, extensions or recesses are provided at thermal break line to facilitate connections of rigid or flexible transition medium prior to setting such elements in their allotted openings.
1.4.1.2.
1.4.1.3.
1.4.1.4.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 1
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 01 70 00 Project No: 2011.008 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
1.4.2. Continuity of Fire Separations: 1.4.2.1. Conform to following requirements to maintain continuity of fire separations: 1.4.2.1.1. Fire separations may be pierced by openings for electrical and similar service outlets provided such boxes are noncombustible and are tightly fitted. Where a fire separation is required to be of noncombustible construction terminates at exterior wall, underside of floor, ceiling or roof structures and at floors, opening shall be fire stopped with a ULC approved Listed material.
1.4.2.1.2.
1.4.2.2. 1.4.2.3.
Combustible members, fastenings and like shall not be used to anchor fixtures to fire separations. Continuity of Sound Attenuating Partitions and Ceilings: Maintain acoustical value of partitions and sound attenuated ceilings by careful location and treatment of ducts, grilles, diffusers and similar mechanical devices and of electrical outlets, boxes and similar electrical devices. Where electrical boxes are situated back-to-back, serving each side of partition, locate them at recommended distance apart laterally and if interconnected, use flexible connections. Holes Through Walls, Floors and Roof: Ensure holes through walls, floors and roof are provided by trades as specified and are complete with sleeves, packing insulation, fire stopping and sealant as required for each particular condition.
1.4.2.4.
1.5.
1.5.1.
EXAMINATION
Acceptance of Conditions: 1.5.1.1. Examine site at no cost or risk to Owner for all matters relating to Work, extent of Work, means of access and egress, all obstacles, rights and interests of other parties which may be interfered with during execution of Work, all conditions and limitations Contractor to take into consideration in performing Work, including obstructions, existing structures or facilities, local conditions, actual levels, character and nature of project and any other consideration which may affect performance of Work. Where available obtain existing drawings pertaining existing building layout, architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical details and assess impact in performing work of this Contract. Examine existing conditions at no additional cost to Owner, surfaces and substrata upon which your work depends. Drawings are, in part, diagrammatic and are intended to convey scope of Work and indicate general and approximate location, arrangement and sizes of fixtures, equipment, ducts, piping, conduit and outlets and similar items. Obtain more accurate information about locations, arrangement and sizes from study and coordination of Drawings, including Shop Drawings and manufacturers' literature and become familiar with conditions and spaces affecting these matters before proceeding with Work. Ensure each Subcontractor has full understanding of extent of its work. Report in writing defects in such work and notify Subcontractors responsible for unfavourable and unsatisfactory conditions. Do not commence Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Verify corrected work prior to commencing work. Execution and application of your work shall be deemed acceptance of work upon which your work depends.
1.5.1.2.
1.5.1.3.
1.5.1.4.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 2
1.5.2. Existing Activities, Facilities and Conditions: 1.5.2.1. Existing institution may be in operation throughout Work. Do not interrupt existing services, facilities and activities at complex, except for authorized and scheduled interruptions of services acceptable to Owner. Obtain written permission of Owner at least 3 Working Days in advance of any shutdown required for tie-in of new construction systems. Written requests for shutdown permission shall clearly identify exact extent of systems affected, time and duration. Make necessary enquiries to determine locations of existing services such as hydro, telephone, water, natural gas, sewer and like. Make arrangements and pay all costs to temporarily relocate, shore, underpin or in any way accommodate existing services which affect Work of this Contract. Should any piping, sewers, cables, or similar services be encountered during work of this Contract that are not known from Owner's and utilities companies' records, notify Consultant and do not proceed with removal or cutting until directed. Protect and maintain in operation all existing services and systems. When removing or altering existing services, make safe, secure and maintain seals as applicable for all lines affected. Perform required shutdowns outside of normal working hours at no increase in cost if requested by Owner.
1.5.2.2.
1.5.2.3.
1.5.2.4.
1.5.2.5. 1.5.3.
Existing Conditions: Before commencing work in existing areas, furnish 3 copies of report listing defects and deficiencies, supplemented with photographs if necessary, covering work which will remain in area of Work or whose proximity to alteration work renders it vulnerable to damage. Make Good at own expense defects and deficiencies not recorded. Contractor and Consultant shall initial report before alteration work commences.
1.6.
1.6.1.
MATERIALS
Where Specification requirements include design of a Product or system, and minimum material requirements are specified, design of such Product or system shall employ materials specified within applicable Section. Where materials or components are not specified, Contractor shall augment materials with those of its choice within applicable Code limitations while maintaining integrity of design and architectural requirements. Defective Products, whenever identified prior to completion of Work, will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Inspection does not relieve responsibility, but is a precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective and/or damaged Products at own expense and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection. Ensure new materials used to repair damage are compatible with existing work. Salvaged Items for Relocation: Items for relocation are salvaged as part of the work of Section 02 41 00. Bonding Slurry: Surfacrete Concentrate by Sika Canada or Acrylic Additive by Chemrex Inc. Ensure all admixturers are compatible with polished concrete system on floors.
1.6.2.
1.6.3. 1.6.4. 1.6.5.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 3
1.6.6. Moisture Emission Reduction Barrier: Provide 1 of following: 1.6.6.1. One part system consisting of 2 component moisture tolerant, high density, low odour, chemically enhanced epoxy based materials which reduces vapour emissions to 1.36 kg/93 2 m (3 lb/1000 sq ft) after 24 hours of application and is compatible with floor finishes and adhesives approved by floor finish manufacturer. Compressive strength in accordance with ASTM D695 shall be 80 MPa (11,000 psi). Acceptable Product: Maxxon DPM by Maxxon Canada; www.maxxon.ca Planiseal MRB by Mapei, surface-applied, 2 component, solvent-free epoxy coating specially formulated to reduce moisture vapour transmission of concrete substrate up to 2 5.44 kg/93 m (12 lbs/1000 sq ft) per 24 hours by a minimum of 75% to achieve an 2 acceptable rate of below 1.36 kg/93 m (3 lbs/1000 sq ft) per 24 hours and is compatible with Mapeis premium tile- and stone-setting materials, Mapecem Quickpatch quick setting high-flow concrete patch, self-leveling mortar systems and reactive resin polyurethane floor covering adhesives such as Ultrabond G19 and Ultrabond G21 and W55.
1.6.6.2.
1.7.
1.7.1.
PREPARATION
Planning, Scheduling & Coordination of Alterations: 1.7.1.1. 1.7.1.2. 1.7.1.3. Plan and schedule alterations to accommodate anticipated difficulties, indicated on and inferable from the Contract Documents. Plan, schedule and coordinate alterations to accommodate on-going operations of Owner with minimal disruption. Plan, schedule and coordinate alterations, required in Owner-occupied spaces or adjoining or below the Place of the Work, on a room-by-room basis and in accordance with a schedule mutually agreed upon with Owner. Requests for access to occupied areas shall be made to Owner a minimum of 1 week in advance of requested access time. Co-ordinate alterations with other contractors and proceed with the Work expeditiously.
1.7.1.4. 1.7.2.
Surveying: 1.7.2.1. 1.7.2.2. Contractor to supply drawings to show line of Place of the Work. Engage registered Ontario Land Surveyor to make survey of perimeter footings (and foundations) once constructed, to verify they are properly located with respect to property lines, elevations, easements and other buildings. Submit 3 copies of survey showing such verification. Engage registered Ontario Land Surveyor to lay out building, to determine unconfirmed dimensions and elevations, other construction work and to provide as-built survey identifying permanent bench marks. Establish on site grades, lines, levels, dimensions, and location of existing roads, sidewalks, buried utilities and other similar features on site. Carefully preserve bench marks, reference points and other reference marks. Lay out work in accordance with lines, levels and dimensions indicated and/or provided on bench marks established by survey. Verify lines, levels and dimensions. Thicknesses shown on Drawings are nominal only. Ascertain actual sizes on site. Report errors or inconsistencies in Drawings and obtain direction before commencing Work. Ensure work is executed in accordance with verified dimensions and positions indicated which maintain levels and clearances to adjacent work as set out in Contract Documents.
1.7.2.3.
1.7.2.4. 1.7.2.5.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 4
1.7.2.6. 1.7.2.7. 1.7.2.8. 1.7.2.9. Except as provided by survey, provide lines, levels and dimensions necessary to relate your work to work of other Sections. Location of electrical and mechanical service lines, curbs, light standards, trees and contours shown or specified but not dimensioned shall be considered approximate. Confer with Consultant to determine actual location of items not dimensioned as may be required to suit job conditions. Relocate as directed within +/-1500 mm (5' - 0") horizontally. Do such relocation without increasing Contract Price.
1.7.2.10. Owner will accept no claims for extra expenses incurred by Contractor for not complying with requirements of this Section. 1.7.3. Existing Services: 1.7.3.1. 1.7.3.2. Before commencing Work, establish location and extent of existing services in area of Work and notify Consultant of findings. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangements, make such changes with approval of Consultant at no additional cost to Owner. Similarly, where existing conditions interfere with new installation and require relocation, such relocation is included in Work. Whenever it is necessary to cut, interfere with, or connect to existing services or facility do so at hours and times recommended by governing authorities and approved by Consultant; and with minimum disturbance to occupants, pedestrian and vehicular traffic and public and private property. Submit schedule of interruption to services and obtain approval from Consultant for each proposed shut-down of active service or facility. Adhere to approved schedule and provide notice to affected parties. If unknown services are encountered, immediately notify Consultant and confirm findings in writing. Obtain Consultant's written direction if such services require cutting, capping or relocation to do Work.
1.7.3.3.
1.7.3.4.
1.7.3.5.
1.7.4.
Access for Large Equipment: 1.7.4.1. Where new mechanical and electrical equipment is located in existing areas of building, do necessary cutting, dismantling and reassembling of equipment, modifications to equipment, hoisting, shoring and patching required for installation of such equipment in space provided. Where Drawings show specific locations of walls, ceilings, slabs and like being broken out for access for equipment, this is merely to indicate an architectural preference for route and it is not intended that Drawings necessarily show all such breaking out required.
1.7.4.2.
1.8.
1.8.1.
EXECUTION
Existing Conditions: 1.8.1.1. 1.8.1.2. 1.8.1.3. Make Good surfaces and finishes damaged or disturbed due to Work of this Contract to match existing. Ensure materials used to repair damage are compatible with existing work. Restore site to condition equal to or, if specified elsewhere, to condition better than existing conditions. Restore lands outside of limits of Work which are disturbed due to Work to original condition in addition to complying with requirements of General Conditions of the Contract.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 5
1.8.2. Installation: 1.8.2.1. Except where specified otherwise, use each Product in accordance with manufacturer's published or written instructions, Specifications or recommendations regarding handling, storage, preparation, site conditions, ancillary Products or accessories, methods of installation, protection and cleaning. Submit copy of such instructions and indicate if and where there is discrepancy between them and requirements of Specifications and obtain direction. Whenever specific reference to following manufacturer's directions or instructions is made in Specifications, submit copies as requested thereof for review before commencing such work. Do Work in accordance with industry practice for type of work unless Contract Documents stipulate more precise requirements. Do not let unskilled, incompetent workers perform work. Do Work in neat and careful manner to retain Work plumb, square and straight. Ensure Work is properly related to form close joints and appropriately aligned junctions, edges and surfaces and is free of warp, twist, wind, wave or other irregularities. When required by Specifications or by manufacturer's recommendations, have manufacturer, supplier or accredited agent, inspect work which incorporates their Products. Do not permit materials to come in contact with other materials whether in presence of moisture or otherwise if conditions will result in corrosion, stain or discolouration or deterioration of completed Work. Provide compatible, durable separators where such contact is unavoidable. Obtain Consultants approval prior to use of explosives on this Project and where approved, use, handling and storage of explosives shall be performed by a designated, competent worker in accordance with Regulation for Construction Project made under Occupational Health and Safety Act. Load no part of structure during construction with load greater than it is calculated to bear safely when completed. Make every temporary support as strong as permanent support. Place no load on concrete structure until it has sufficient strength to safely carry such load.
1.8.2.2.
1.8.2.3.
1.8.2.4. 1.8.2.5. 1.8.2.6. 1.8.2.7.
1.8.2.8.
1.8.2.9.
1.8.2.10. Conceal pipes, ducts, conduits, tubing, wiring and other items requiring concealment in floor, wall and ceiling construction of finished areas except where indicated or specified otherwise. If in doubt as to method of concealment, or intention of Contract Documents in this connection, request clarification from Consultant before proceeding with work in question. 1.8.2.11. Install and arrange fixtures, equipment, ducts, piping and conduit to conserve as much headroom and space as possible, and avoid interference and obstruction of access. Observe good installation practice for safety, access, maintenance and follow manufacturer's recommendations. Location of fixtures, access panels, outlets and mechanical and electrical components indicated are approximate. Make changes requested to comply with these requirements at no additional cost to Owner. 1.8.2.12. If requested by Consultant, and before their installation, relocate equipment, services, doors, openings, furring and other work at no additional cost to Owner; provided such relocation involves only reasonable minor adjustments and reasonable advance notice is given in writing. Ensure identification of electrical and mechanical system installations and other automated systems or equipment shall be provided in accordance with Contract Documents.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 6
1.8.3. 1.8.4. Lay out mechanical and electrical work in advance of concrete placement and furring installation to allow for its proper concealment. Test and inspect work before applying pipe covering and before Work is concealed.
1.9.
1.9.1. 1.9.2. 1.9.3. 1.9.4. 1.9.5.
ALTERATIONS AND REPAIRS

Refer to Section 02 41 00. Conform to Owners Policies and Procedures for Contractors and shut down protocol where applicable. Perform work in a manner such as to cause a minimum of noise and interference to use of existing premises and services. Provide maximum safety for occupants during work. Throughout entire construction period, provide proper and safe means of fire exit from all zones of existing building at all times, to approval of authorities having jurisdiction. Wherever it becomes necessary to cut or interfere in any manner with existing apparatus for short periods of time, do work at such times as agreed upon with Owner and Consultant. If unscheduled disturbance to use of existing premises and services is required to complete work, inform Owner with advance notice of 1 week minimum. Provide information of requirements and perform work at times directed by Owner. Make provisions to join new work to existing and to install new supporting members, anchors and other items necessary for completion of work. Provide temporary bracing where required. Proceed with demolition of or alterations to any portion of existing building only after approval of Consultant has been obtained and after weather tight and dustproof screens have been erected to provide thorough protection to adjoining areas and rooms. When permission has been granted to proceed with alterations in existing building, carry out work expeditiously and continuously to completion. Carry out work so as to minimize dust migration. Protect items sensitive to and which could be damaged by dust. Where practical, keep demolition areas wetted. During performance of work, adequately protect work completed and in progress, and existing work to remain, such as floors, finishes, trim and similar components, as completely as possible to minimize replacement of damaged work by each Subcontractor and trade. Work damaged or defaced due to failure to provide adequate protection shall be repaired, or removed and replaced as directed by Consultant. Properly coordinate work of various Sections and trades. Take into consideration existing installations to assure best arrangement of pipes, conduits, ducts and mechanical, electrical and other equipment and items, in available space. Under no circumstances will any extra payment be allowed due to failure by Contractor to coordinate work. Remove, store and reinstall existing fixed equipment, fixtures and components which interfere with construction work. Cutting, patching and making good of existing work to accommodate new work and requirements specified under other Sections shall be done in conjunction with work specified herein. Coordinate such work. Employ tradesmen qualified in work being cut and patched to perform work correctly and skillfully. Do not undermine, damage or endanger existing structure, footings, foundations, pipe lines, electrical conduit and wiring by digging, cutting or any other operation in performance of Work of this Contract. Immediately repair and Make Good existing work so affected, including working after regular working hours, to Consultant's approval, recommendation and satisfaction at no additional cost to Owner.
1.9.6. 1.9.7.
1.9.8. 1.9.9. 1.9.10.
1.9.11.
1.9.12. 1.9.13.
1.9.14. 1.9.15.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 7
1.9.16. Cut off, cap, divert or remove existing services in areas being altered which are affected by changes as required or as directed by municipal authorities and utility company concerned and Consultant. Protect and maintain active services to existing building. Where new work connects with existing and where existing work is altered, perform necessary cutting and fitting required to make satisfactory connections with existing work under this Contract, so as to leave entire work in a finished condition. Match new Work exactly with existing work in material, form, construction and finish unless otherwise noted or specified. Make joining work inconspicuous. Make Good materials, surfaces, and finishes damaged or disturbed due to work of this Contract. Except where structural requirements are indicated on Drawings, do not cut, drill or sleeve load bearing members without first obtaining Consultant's written authorization for each condition. Perform drilling of existing work carefully, leaving a clean hole no larger than required. Make cuts clean and true with smooth edges. Fit units to tolerances established by existing work and in conformance with best standard practice for applicable class of work. Fill unused and unfilled sleeves and holes in non-fire rated floors and partitions not otherwise filled, by approved means. If unused sleeve is in fire or sound barrier, fill in manner to restore or maintain fire or sound barrier rating. Filling of openings in fire rated floors and partitions specified under Section 07 84 00. If non-designated and unclassified sprayed fire resisting, sound absorbing, or insulation applications are encountered, inform Consultant for examination and instructions. Restore damaged non-asbestos type fireproofing to original condition before covering with finishes. Work shown on Drawings, Schedules and Specifications may or may not be all work required to be done in existing building. Make Good and execute all necessary work including incidentals to make a complete job of alterations work. Alterations (Changes/modifications): 1.9.25.1. Provide alterations indicated on and inferable from the Contract Documents. 1.9.25.2. Demolish existing, obsolete construction as part of alterations, in accordance with Section 02 41 00 and prepare areas to receive new work. 1.9.25.3. Refer to mechanical and electrical Specifications and Drawings for removal, capping, and alterations to work of Divisions 21, 22, 23 26, 27 and 28, e.g., conduit, wiring, fixtures, ducts, piping and other service lines. 1.9.25.4. Protect active services which are intended to remain and which pass through spaces involved in alterations and repairs. 1.9.25.5. Conceal piping, duct, conduit and other service alterations in ceilings, walls and furred spaces if possible. 1.9.26. Repairs/Renovations (Restoration to Previous Condition): 1.9.26.1. Repair adjacent construction and surfaces which are damaged or disturbed as a result of alterations. 1.9.26.2. Provide Products, materials, construction, workmanship and finish to match existing unless indicated otherwise. 1.9.27. Rehabilitate (Restore to Good Condition): 1.9.27.1. All areas affected by demolition.
1.9.17.
1.9.18. 1.9.19. 1.9.20. 1.9.21. 1.9.22.
1.9.23.
1.9.24.
1.9.25.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 8
1.9.28. Cutting and Patching - General: 1.9.28.1. Coordinate openings with Subcontractors to avoid unnecessary cutting and patching. 1.9.28.2. Coordinate cutting and patching with Subcontractors to avoid unscheduled cutting and patching work. 1.9.28.3. Prior to cutting, sawing, breaking and core drilling provide integrated penetrating system to detect conduits, cables, pipes and similar items in suspended floor slabs and in walls where applicable. Carry out scanning to detect location of live power or energy transmitted from power source such as feeds for electric motors, compressors, heating and cooling systems prior to core drilling and sawing of typical slab on grade. 1.9.28.4. Prior to cutting, sawing, breaking and core drilling through concrete, structural masonry and steel and load bearing members, including floors, ceilings, columns, beams and walls, obtain Consultant's written acceptance. 1.9.28.5. Execute cutting neatly and carefully, no larger than necessary, employing workers skilled in erection of the part of the Work being cut. 1.9.28.6. Patch parts of the Work to match adjacent construction and finishes unless otherwise specified or indicated on Drawings. 1.9.28.7. Provide patching Products equal to existing finishes. 1.9.28.8. Join new work to existing in neat, accurate manner. 1.9.28.9. Provide soundproof interior junctions. 1.9.28.10. Provide weathertight exterior work. 1.9.28.11. Design and provide permanent and temporary reinforcement and supports, as directed by Consultant. 1.9.28.12. Maintain fire separations and provide fire and smoke penetration sealants in cut and patched parts of the Work. 1.9.28.13. Unless otherwise indicated, run piping, ducts and conduit in ceilings and furred spaces. Bury conduit in walls. 1.9.28.14. Saw-cut floors, walls and ceilings accurately. Provide holes and openings no larger than necessary to minimize damage. Core drill circular holes in concrete. Accurately cut new openings for electrical outlets and other recessed items in walls. 1.9.28.15. After cutting and patching is completed, re-finish surfaces to minimum 100 mm (4") outside patch perimeter, floor to ceiling and to nearest break in wall surfaces, such as inside and outside corners. Match patch finish to existing adjacent surfaces to completely conceal patch. 1.9.29. Cutting and Patching - Exterior Envelope Alterations: 1.9.29.1. Cut exterior envelope to accommodate alterations and repairs. 1.9.29.2. Patch and repair exterior envelope to provide a continuous air and vapour seal. 1.9.30. Cutting and Patching - Structural Alterations: 1.9.30.1. Prior to cutting and drilling through structural and load bearing members, (e.g. slabs, columns, beams and shear walls), obtain Consultant's review and written acceptance of cut location and layout.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 9
1.9.30.2. Locate existing reinforcement and conduit and obtain approval of Consultant before coring or cutting existing or new slabs, beams or walls. Retain an independent testing company to locate existing reinforcement and conduit in the areas of proposed openings and to mark locations of the surfaces of slabs and walls on which the cores and cuts are to be started. Scan concrete using non-destructive methods to accurately locate reinforcement and conduit. Remove toppings prior to locating reinforcement and conduit. Mark locations and sizes of cores and openings and locations of reinforcement and conduit using indelible markers with red for top bars, green for bottom bars and black for cores, openings and conduit. Consultant will review marked-up locations once a week. If locations are not acceptable to Consultant, relocate proposed openings and repeat process at no extra cost to the Contract. 1.9.31. Cutting and Patching - Fire Separation Alterations: 1.9.31.1. Maintain fire separations for duration of work of this Section. 1.9.31.2. Provide fire and smoke penetration sealants at alterations and repairs in accordance with Section 07 84 00. 1.9.31.3. Provide continuous and solid framing, blocking or masonry work around service penetrations through fire separations in accordance with the fire penetration sealant design to maintain the continuity of the fire separation. 1.9.32. Cutting and Patching - Mechanical and Electrical Alterations: 1.9.32.1. Provide cutting and patching required for access to execute services alterations. Conceal capped services unless specifically indicated to remain exposed. Patch to conceal altered and capped services. 1.9.32.2. Provide cutting, e.g., core drilling of existing concrete and masonry walls and slabs, required to pass services through existing assemblies to accommodate alterations. 1.9.33. Removal of Flooring and Preparation of Substrate: 1.9.33.1. Remove flooring and adhesive/setting bed materials completely, down to concrete substrate. 1.9.33.2. Remove ridges and trowel marks and scrape substrate to a smooth level surface. 1.9.33.3. Fill new and existing depressions, dished areas, low spots, voids, gaps, cracks, joints, holes and other substrate defects with skim coat and self-leveling topping to achieve a flat substrate to within following tolerances: 1.9.33.3.1. 3 mm (1/8") total maximum deviation +/- along a 3000 mm (10') straight edge applied omni-directionally over entire floor area.
1.9.33.4. Provide skim coats, primers and bonding agent slurries to neutralize residue adhesives and setting beds and to provide a suitable substrate to receive scheduled floorings. 1.9.34. Removal of Existing Carpet Adhesive and Setting Bed: 1.9.34.1. Prepare existing surface acceptable to Consultant, suitable and compatible with subsequent applied underlayment or applied finish. Remove existing flooring and bases where indicated unless specified to be carried out under other Sections. Remove carpet and adhesive/setting bed materials completely, down to concrete substrate. Prepare, mix and apply coats to neutralize residues adhesives and setting beds and to provide suitable substrate to receive scheduled flooring in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 10
1.9.34.2. Shot blast existing concrete or prepare existing surfaces by or means acceptable to Consultant. Level slabs as required to accommodate flooring with self leveling underlayment to suit application. Grind existing concrete slab as required, clean surfaces and remove residue adhesives. Remove ridges and trowel marks and scrape substrate to a smooth level surface. Surfaces shall be clean, free of gouges, matter detrimental to bond of underlayment and flooring and be ready to receive underlayment and flooring. Prepare for flush application of new flooring material. 1.9.34.3. Fill new and existing depressions, dished areas, low spots, voids, gaps, cracks, joints, holes and other substrate defects with skim coat and self-leveling topping to achieve a flat substrate to within following tolerances: 3 mm (1/8") total maximum deviation +/- along 3000 mm (10') straight edge applied omni directionally over entire floor area. 1.9.34.4. Underlayment shall have compressive strength of 4000 psi after 28 Days and tolerance specified above. 1.9.34.5. Coordinate with substrate preparation specified in floor finish Section.
1.10.
1.10.1.
CLEANING
Progress Cleaning: 1.10.1.1. Keep access areas to Work in tidy condition, free from accumulation of waste products and debris during construction and on completion, other than caused by Owners crew or other contractors. Do not dispose of volatile fluid wastes (such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner) in storm or sanitary sewer systems or into streams or waterways. 1.10.1.2. Keep site and building, including concealed spaces, free from accumulation of dirt, debris, garbage and excess material. Remove oily rags and waste from premises at close of each Day work is performed, or more often if required. 1.10.1.3. Remove waste material and debris and deposit in recycling and/or waste container as required by waste management procedures at end of each Working Day. Remove from finished surfaces deposits which could stain, harden, set or become difficult to remove. 1.10.1.4. Remove rubbish and surplus materials promptly and dispose of in a legal manner. Do not allow scrap piles to accumulate. Do not permit fires. 1.10.1.5. Lower waste materials in a controlled manner with minimum handling; do not drop or throw materials from heights. Schedule cleaning operations so dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. Sprinkle dusty debris with water. 1.10.1.6. A demolition bin will be allowed on site where indicated on Drawings and as coordinated with Owner. 1.10.1.7. Sweep adjacent roads and sidewalks daily to remove dirt and clods of earth deposited on adjacent public and private properties by construction traffic. 1.10.1.8. Vacuum-clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations.
1.10.2.
Storage and Collection of Recyclables: 1.10.2.1. Provide a designated area adjacent to waste containers which serves the entire building for the separation, collection and storage of recyclables in order to facilitate the reduction of waste generated by building occupants that is hauled to and disposed of in landfills.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 11
1.10.2.2. Divert construction and demolition debris from landfills and incineration facilities, by redirecting recyclables and reusable materials back into the manufacturing process or the appropriate sites. Designated disposal bins may be used for the following categories: wood, drywall, metal, concrete, cardboard or other similar type. 1.10.3. Final Cleaning: 1.10.3.1. Prior to occupancy, clean the Place of the Work thoroughly, free of rubbish and surplus material. Dispose of rubbish and debris. Vacate the Place of the Work in a clean and tidy condition satisfactory to Consultant. 1.10.3.2. Dismantle and remove work of Section 01 50 00 from the Place of the Work. 1.10.3.3. Prior to cleaning, submit to Consultant a complete list of manufacturers' cleaning/ maintenance instructions for all components of the Work. 1.10.3.4. Final finishing is in addition to and compatible with cleaning and finishing specified in trade Sections. 1.10.3.5. Clean new and existing components in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations including, but not limited to: 1.10.3.5.1. 1.10.3.5.2. Floors. Tile/Vinyl/Stone Flooring: Sweep floor free of debris; clean corners and base boards free of marks and dirt. Scrub new flooring using appropriate solutions to remove factory installed protective coatings. Strip existing flooring using appropriate chemical solution to remove any existing floor finish coating and base seal coatings. Apply to new and existing flooring 2 coats of sealer recommended by manufacturer of flooring materials. Let floor completely dry between coats. Use prime quality top line Products. Do not apply finish to baseboards. Vacuum carpet flooring using power brush equipped vacuum cleaner. Remove stains using approved stain removal methodology. Where carpet is exposed to extensive dry wall dust and other fine dust particles, carpet shall be pile lifted using rotary pile lifting machine. In addition, carpet shall be cleaned using extraction method approved by manufacturer. Walls shall be completely dusted and all marks removed. Where necessary wall shall be washed if painting is not an option. Ceilings. Window coverings. Doors, windows and frames. Electrical switch gear. Exposed interior and exterior glazed surfaces. Hardware. Mechanical and electrical fixtures and equipment. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, brass, bronze and other metals. The Place of the Work outside building envelope: remove debris, rake sod, sweep sidewalks and pavement.
1.10.3.5.3.
1.10.3.5.4. 1.10.3.5.5. 1.10.3.5.6. 1.10.3.5.7. 1.10.3.5.8. 1.10.3.5.9. 1.10.3.5.10. 1.10.3.5.11. 1.10.3.5.12. 1.10.3.5.13.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 12
1.10.3.6. Use professional cleaners with minimum 10 years experience for final cleaning. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned. 1.10.3.7. Final cleaning includes, without limitations, requirements specified herein, removal of surplus materials, tools, construction machinery and equipment from site. Carry out final cleaning in accordance with manufacturers instructions for each material. Clean Work in accordance with applicable Sections and/or manufacturer's directions. 1.10.3.8. Remove stains, spots, marks, dust, smudges caused by Work within work areas of this Contract. Remove from decorative work, electrical and mechanical fixtures, furniture fitments, walls, ceiling and floors. Vacuum, clean and buff resilient flooring. 1.10.3.9. Clean and polish interior and exterior glass, windows, entrances, skylights, mirrors, hardware, wall tile, stainless steel, chrome, porcelain, baked enamel, plastic laminate, mechanical, plumbing fixtures and electrical fixtures. 1.10.3.10. Vacuum clean and dust building interiors, behind grilles, louvres and screens. Vacuum clean ducts, fans, blowers and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. 1.10.3.11. Wax, seal, shampoo or prepare floor finishes, as recommended by manufacturer. 1.10.3.12. Broom clean and wash interior as well as exterior walks, paved surfaces, concrete floors, steps and other similar surfaces. 1.10.3.13. Replace broken, damaged, disfigured or scratched glass and mirrors, which are part of Work. 1.10.3.14. Make Good any damage caused outside work area. Include doing necessary cleaning required due to Work. 1.10.3.15. Use appropriate apparatus and cleaning materials. 1.10.3.16. Close rooms and areas finished by cleaners, painters and decorators to all but authorized persons. 1.10.3.17. Upon completion of final cleaning, remove cleaning equipment, excess materials and debris from building and site.
1.11.
1.11.1. 1.11.2.
SNOW REMOVAL
Allow no accumulation of ice and snow on site and on roof deck when roofing operations are scheduled to take place. Be responsible for general clearing of snow from access roads within the overall "Place of the Work", site circulation paths, at hoarding, Contractors parking areas and elsewhere as required to permit access to the Work, parking and uninterrupted construction progress. Give complete cooperation with respect to snow clearing operations in proximity to Ambulance Entry, ensuring Owner's staff have clear access for vehicles, including snow-clearing equipment. Use only sand for de-icing purposes. Maintain trailer area, storage areas as well as work areas of this Contract and assigned Subcontracts free of ice and snow to maintain progress of the Work. Place cleared snow in areas on site as directed by Consultant. Be responsible to keep access road and circulation paths accessible during a snowfall. Remove snow as necessary to prevent interruption to work in progress until completion of the Work.
1.11.3.
1.11.4.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 13
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 01 70 00 Project No: 2011.008 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 1.12.
1.12.1. 1.12.2.
STARTING AND ADJUSTING

Commissioning Survey: Conform to requirements of Section 01 80 00. Trial Usage and Instructions - Mechanical: 1.12.2.1. Thoroughly instruct Owners authorized representative(s) in safe operation of systems and equipment after installation and prior to Substantial Performance of the Work. Coordinate with Consultant and arrange schedule for instruction times. Ensure operating, maintenance and or documents have been submitted to Consultant prior to demonstration. Submit a commissioning schedule to Consultant 1 week prior to commissioning of each system. 1.12.2.2. Arrange and pay for services of qualified service engineers and manufacturers' representatives to instruct Consultant on specialized portions of installation, such as refrigeration machines, boilers, automatic controls and water treatment. 1.12.2.3. Submit a complete record of instructions as part of maintenance instructions and data book given to Consultant. For each instructional period, supply following data: 1.12.2.3.1. 1.12.2.3.2. 1.12.2.3.3. 1.12.2.3.4. 1.12.2.3.5. 1.12.2.3.6. date. system or equipment involved. names of persons giving instructions. names of persons being instructed. other persons present. carry out instructional period during a continuous period of 30 Days unless otherwise agreed with Consultant.
1.12.2.4. Permit Consultant trial usage of systems or parts of systems for purpose of testing and learning operational procedures. Trial usage shall not affect warranties nor be construed as acceptance and no claim for damage shall be made against Consultant for any injury or breakage to any part or parts of above due to aforementioned tests, where such injuries or breakage are caused by a weakness or inadequacy of parts, or by defective materials or quality of performance of any kind. 1.12.2.5. Obtain and submit to Consultant, signature of Owner's representatives stating they understand system and equipment installation, operation and maintenance requirements. 1.12.2.6. Obtain and submit to Consultant, letters from manufacturers of equipment and systems indicating their technical representatives have inspected and tested systems and have approved methods of installation, connections and operation. 1.12.2.7. Only exception to foregoing requirements for acceptance of equipment and systems, will be 'fine tuning' which may be performed after Substantial Performance of Work and prior to Completion of Contract. 1.12.2.8. In conjunction with foregoing requirements, Contractor shall arrange necessary inspections and obtain written approval and acceptance of equipment and systems requiring approval by authorities and correction of unacceptable items to satisfaction of authorities.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 14
1.12.3. Trial Usage and Instructions - Electrical: 1.12.3.1. Provide services of manufacturers specialized representatives to instruct Owner's representatives in operation of systems and equipment after installation and prior to Substantial Performance of Work. Coordinate with Consultant and arrange schedule for instruction times. Ensure operating, maintenance and documents have been submitted to Consultant prior to demonstration. Submit a commissioning schedule to Consultant, 1 week prior to commissioning of each system. 1.12.3.2. Permit Owner's representatives, in order to familiarize themselves with equipment, to operate systems for a reasonable period of time as arranged. 1.12.3.3. Trial usage of equipment by Owner's representatives shall not affect warranties, nor be construed as acceptance of equipment or system and no claim for damage shall be made against Owner for injury or breakage to any part or parts of above due to aforementioned tests, where such injuries or breakage are caused by a weakness or inadequacy of parts, or by defective materials or quality of performance of any kind. 1.12.3.4. Review information provided in maintenance instructions and data book with Consultant to ensure Owner's representatives have a complete understanding of electrical equipment and systems and their operation.
1.13.
1.13.1.
PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

Protection of Work During Construction: 1.13.1.1. Provide continuous protection to public, Work, Owners property and adjacent property during construction. Protect work of other trades from damage while performing subsequent work. 1.13.1.2. Protect finished flooring from damage. Make special efforts and take measures when moving heavy loads or equipment over them. Keep floors free of oils, grime, grease or other materials likely to discolour them or affect bond of applied surfaces. 1.13.1.3. Protect, relocate and maintain existing, active services wherever they are encountered. Wherever inactive services are encountered, cap them off and remove unwanted portion, with approval of authorities having jurisdiction or public utility concerned in manner approved by them. 1.13.1.4. Adequately protect floors and roofs from damage. Take special measures when moving heavy loads or equipment on them. 1.13.1.5. Keep floors free of oils, grease or other materials likely to discolour them or affect bond of applied surfaces including fumes generated by temporary heating devices. Take care not to spill or allow oil, grease, gasoline, diesel and fuel oil, chemicals and other substances to contaminate soil or water on or adjacent to site. Should such contamination accidentally occur report it immediately and clean up to satisfaction of Consultant. 1.13.1.6. Protect work of other Sections from damage resulting from your work. 1.13.1.7. Damaged work shall be made good wherever possible by Section whose work is damaged but at expense of those causing damage. 1.13.1.8. Protect glass and other finishes against heat, slag and weld splatter using suitable protective shields or covers.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 15
1.13.1.9. Take precautions to protect openings made in existing building(s) from entry of elements and of persons during construction and to protect existing structure and finishes from damage. Protection of exterior enclosure shall be air tight and have minimum thermal resistance value of R = 5 (RSI = 1). 1.13.1.10. Provide and maintain in working order, suitable Underwriters' labelled fire extinguishers and locate in suitable positions, to approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.13.1.11. Provide minimum of 3 safety helmets for Consultant and any other authorized visitors to site if required. 1.13.1.12. Protect public and those employed on Work from injury. Equipment (mobile) when not in use shall have keys removed and locked up in secure location. 1.13.2. Correction after Completion: In conformance with General Conditions of the Contract, Make Good any defects and deficiencies due to faulty materials or quality of performance that become apparent in Work within 12 months from date of Certificate of Substantial Performance or for such longer period as specified for certain Products in Contract Documents. Conform to requirements of General Conditions of the Contract and provide Warranty for 12 month period and for extended period where applicable, in writing in an approved form acceptable to Consultant signed by authorized official of Contractor.
1.14.
1.14.1.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Final Site Review: Consultant will perform final inspection in accordance with provisions under final Certificate for Payment. Conform to Construction Lien Act for commencement, procedure and release of hold back fund. Lien Period commencement, procedure and release of hold back monies will be in accordance with Construction Lien Act. Takeover Procedure: 1.14.2.1. Conform to requirements of following General Conditions of Contract for take-over procedure: 1.14.2.1.1. Comply also with recommended takeover procedures contained in OAA/OGCA Document No. 100, except as modified by Contract Documents. In case of conflict with Contract Documents conform to more stringent requirements. Procedure described in document consists of following stages: Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 4 Stage 5 Stage 6 Contractor's Inspection for Substantial Performance Contractor's Application Performance for Certificate of Substantial
1.14.2.
1.14.2.1.1.1. 1.14.2.1.1.2. 1.14.2.1.1.3. 1.14.2.1.1.4. 1.14.2.1.1.5. 1.14.2.1.1.6.
Consultant's Certificate of Substantial Performance Consultant's Certificate for Payment of Holdback Monies Final Inspection for Completion of Contract Warranty Period(s)
1.14.2.2. All stages will be reviewed at first Coordination Site Meeting to ensure all parties understand their responsibilities. 1.14.3. Substantial Performance Review: Provide a written request to Consultant for Substantial Performance review of Work. Such request shall include a reconciliation of compliance with money test given in Clause 2 (1) (b) of Construction Lien Act in addition to all documentation specified in Contract Documents.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 16
1.14.4. Certification of Substantial Performance: Prepare Certificate of Substantial Performance in a form required by Construction Lien Act. When issued attach a normal progress Certificate showing statement of account to date and sub-titled "SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE". Wherever practicable, accompany it with Final Change Order, sub-titled "FINAL". Consolidate all expenditures from cash allowances. Defect and Deficiency: 1.14.5.1. A defect is an item of Work required by Contract which has been installed but requires repair and/or replacement at a specific time. 1.14.5.2. A deficiency is an item of Work required by Contract which has not been installed or put into operating condition. 1.14.5.3. A warranty item is an item of Work, installed under Contract which manufacturer or installer agrees to maintain in, or restore to perfect condition for a specific period of time, after Owner's acceptance of Work as being substantially completed. 1.14.5.4. When, in Consultant's opinion, Work under Contract is substantially complete and prior to final inspection by Owner, a preliminary inspection shall be made at which time all defects and deficiencies shall be listed, taking care to distinguish between 2. 1.14.6. Deficiency Inspection: 1.14.6.1. Provide a written request to Consultant for deficiency inspection of Work. Such request shall include a statement by Contractor that Work to be reviewed by Consultant for deficiencies is, to best of his knowledge, in compliance with Contract Documents, reviewed Shop Drawings, samples and that all previously instructed corrections by Consultant have been corrected. 1.14.6.2. Provide a schedule of planned deficiency inspections having regard to foregoing. 1.14.7. Deficiency Lists: 1.14.7.1. Neither Owner's representatives, nor Consultant will be responsible for issue of extensive lists of deficiencies. Contractor assumes prime responsibility for ensuring items shown on Drawings and described in Specifications are completely his. Any inspections to approve Certificates of Substantial Performance will be immediately canceled if it becomes obvious that extensive deficiencies are outstanding. 1.14.7.2. Promptly correct deficiencies noted by Consultant. Do not proceed with installation of subsequent parts of Work until deficiencies have been corrected. Every effort shall be made to ensure both defects and deficiencies are Made Good prior to final inspection. 1.14.7.3. During inspection, a decision will be made as to which elements must be completed at a later date due to uncontrollable circumstances such as weather, which defects must be rectified before building can be accepted and which defects are to be treated as warranty items. 1.14.7.4. Make Good deficiencies before Contract is considered complete. 1.14.8. Notification of Correction of Deficiencies: Advise Consultant in writing, upon completion of rectification of deficiencies noted by Consultant. Failure to provide such notification may be cause to withhold final payment. Documents: 1.14.9.1. Within 21 Days of commencement of Work, Contractor shall make first submittal required by OAA/OGCA Document 100, Take-Over Procedures.
1.14.5.
1.14.9.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 17
1.14.9.2. Submit documents in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 1.14.9.3. Submit required documents along with request for certification of Substantial Performance. Consultant's inspection for Substantial Performance is not required until such submittal is received. 1.14.10. Final Inspection for Final Payment: 1.14.10.1. Further to requirements of GC 5.4, final review of Work shall constitute inspection precedent to issuance of final certificate of payment. 1.14.10.2. If there are any further deficiencies determined by this review, they shall be listed by Consultant and provided to Contractor. This list shall be recognized as final deficiency list for purposes of acceptance of Work under Contract. 1.14.10.3. Such deficiencies shall be corrected by a date mutually agreed upon between Consultant and Contractor, unless a specific date is required by Contract and a re-inspection by Consultant shall be called for by Contractor following his own inspection to take place within 7 Days from date of request. 1.14.10.4. Contractor shall thereafter submit his invoice for final payment. 1.14.11. End of Warranty Period Inspection: 1.14.11.1. At beginning of 12th month after substantial performance of Contract in accordance with GC 12.3, Owner, Contractor and Consultant, along with key Subcontractors as designated by Consultant, carry out a complete inspection of building and its systems to determine which deficiencies are to be rectified under warranty. 1.14.11.2. Prior to completion of warranty period, arrange with Consultant to carry out complete review of defects and deficiencies which have been observed during warranty period to determine which are to be corrected.
1.15.
1.15.1.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Certificate of Substantial Performance: 1.15.1.1. Conform to Construction Lien Act and publish copy of Certificate of Substantial Performance once in a construction trade newspaper. 1.15.1.2. Submit promptly copies of construction trade newspaper containing publication of copy of Certificate of Substantial Performance.
1.15.2.
Environmental Consultants Report: 1.15.2.1. Retain services of recognized Environmental Consultant acceptable to the Consultant to submit Report confirming the Place of the Work is free from mould contamination. 1.15.2.2. Submit above Report along with mould preventative maintenance plan and recommendations to Consultant prior to Owner using the Place of the Work for the purpose intended or obtaining Certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, whichever date comes first.
1.15.3.
Pre-Start Health and Safety Review Reports (PSR): Submit all exemption documents or PSR reports prior to Substantial Performance of the Work in accordance with Section 01 40 00.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 18
1.15.4. Product Record Documents: 1.15.4.1. Obtain from Consultant and pay cost for 1 copy of Specifications and 1 set of white prints of Contract Drawings at commencement of Work and 10 Days prior to date of Substantial Performance; Submit as-built site set of white prints and Specifications; as built CAD system disks based on AutoCad Release as instructed by Consultant and 1 set of reproducible transparencies of Contract Drawings, for "as-built" record purposes produced from disks. 1.15.4.2. As Work progresses, clearly mark in a neat and legible form on Specifications and white prints significant changes and deviations from Contract Drawings and Specifications caused by site conditions, Additional Instructions and Change Orders. Changes and deviations marked on as-built record drawings and Specifications by reference to and other documents are not acceptable. 1.15.4.3. Have items relating to mechanical and electrical work recorded by respective trade. 1.15.4.4. Print lettering and numbers in size to match original. Lines may be drawn free hand provided they are neat and accurate. Add "AS-BUILT RECORD" at each drawing title block and on title page of Specifications. 1.15.4.5. Record following changes and deviations on record drawings: 1.15.4.5.1. 1.15.4.5.2. 1.15.4.5.3. 1.15.4.5.4. 1.15.4.5.4.1. 1.15.4.5.4.2. depths of various elements of foundation in relationship to first floor level. field changes of dimensions. other significant deviations and changes which are concealed in construction and cannot be identified by visual inspection. show actual locations of following on record drawings: access doors and panels. Inverts of services at key points within building, at points where entering and leaving building, and at property lines. Dimension services in relation to structure and building grid lines. duct work, piping, conduit, mechanical and electrical equipment and associated work. concealed piping, conduit, equipment and conveying systems, including such items provided for future use. record following information on record Specifications: Products, materials and other items selected from those specified. approved substitutions and accepted alternatives. other approved changes and deviations to items specified.
1.15.4.5.4.3. 1.15.4.5.4.4. 1.15.4.5.4.5. 1.15.4.5.4.5.1. 1.15.4.5.4.5.2. 1.15.4.5.4.5.3.
1.15.4.6. Have record drawing white prints and Specifications available for inspection at all times. 1.15.5. Maintenance Instructions and Data Book: Provide Consultant with 3 sets of operating and maintenance instructions and data books, 10 Days prior to advising Consultant that Work is substantially performed which include: 1.15.5.1. Complete listing of Subcontractors' names, addresses and telephone numbers with notation as to which portions of Contract have been provided by them.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 19
1.15.5.2. Complete listing of materials, Products and equipment including serial numbers, manufacturer's names and sources of supply. 1.15.5.3. Description of each system, with description of each major component of systems. 1.15.5.4. Operation and installation instructions for each assembly, component and system. 1.15.5.5. Complete cleaning and maintenance instructions for each finish, assembly, component and system, including warnings of harmful practices. 1.15.5.6. Lists of spare parts for each assembly, component and system complete with names, addresses and telephone numbers of Suppliers. 1.15.5.7. Operating curves of mechanical and electrical equipment. 1.15.5.8. A lubrication schedule of all equipment. 1.15.5.9. Page-size Valve Tag Schedule and Flow Diagrams. 1.15.5.10. Water treatment procedures and tests. 1.15.5.11. Final balancing reports for mechanical systems. 1.15.5.12. Installation manual or installation instructions for each mechanical, electrical or architectural item, stamped and signed by Subcontractors submitting them. 1.15.5.13. Record drawings of mechanical, electrical and special installations. 1.15.5.14. Final reviewed Shop Drawings. 1.15.5.15. Copies of all warranties, properly executed. 1.15.5.16. Provide books consisting of 3-ring hard cover loose-leaf binders, indexed as to contents and identified on binding edges as "Maintenance Instructions and Data Book, for (Project name)". Ensure binders contain name of Contractor and date of Substantial Performance of the Work. 1.15.5.17. Organize and label contents into applicable categories of work, parallel to Specification Sections and provide a Table of Contents. 1.15.5.18. Use consistent terminology in books. 1.15.5.19. Submit maintenance and operation instructions which are manufacturer's latest published editions at date of submission. 1.15.5.20. Should any finish, Product or assembly be injured or damaged by faulty maintenance materials, practices not warned against in maintenance manual or by failure to provide proper maintenance manuals in time, rectify such damage or injury at no additional cost to Owner. 1.15.6. Distribution System Diagrams: Prior to date of Substantial Performance, submit framed single line diagrams of electrical distribution systems.
1.16.
1.16.1.
DEMONSTRATIONS FOR OWNERS PERSONNEL

Provide qualified technicians to demonstrate operation and/or maintenance of systems to Owners staff.
PAGE 01 70 00 - 20
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 01 70 00 Project No: 2011.008 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 1.17.
1.17.1.
MISCELLANEOUS CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Submit following to Owner: 1.17.1.1. keys. 1.17.1.2. hydro certificate. 1.17.1.3. one valve directory, framed behind glass and installed in main Mechanical Room. 1.17.1.4. electrical panel directories, inside panels. 1.17.1.5. elevator as-built circuit drawings, parts list, and date book. 1.17.1.6. one electrical riser diagram, framed behind glass and mounted. 1.17.1.7. final certified survey by OLS.
1.18.
1.18.1. 1.18.2.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
Examine Sections of the Specifications to ensure inclusion of Warranties specified. In addition to requirements of the General Conditions, Article GC 12.3 WARRANTY, Contractor shall note extended warranty periods required by Contract Documents for certain Products, systems and assemblies as specified under their respective Sections. Typical clause: Similar clause applies to trades listed herein as applicable: "WARRANTY: Warrant Work of aluminum windows against defects and deficiencies in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period, to satisfaction of Consultant and at no expense to Owner. Defects include but are not limited to failure of system to remain completely weather tight, leaking in excess of specified tolerances and limits, deformation of members, failure of insulated glass units, glass breakage, condensation in excess of specified tolerances and limits, mechanical failure and discolouration of finishes.
1.18.3.
1.18.4.
Spare Parts: 1.18.4.1. Supply extra maintenance materials and/or spare parts and store in a locked room as directed by Owner. 1.18.4.2. Suitably package maintenance materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions and label to identify Product type, manufacturer, Product name, colour number, dye lot and quantity. 1.18.4.3. Store maintenance materials, e.g., positioning, proper side up, etc., in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 01 70 00 - 21
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 03 35 13 Project No: 2011.008 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.
1.1.1.
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide concrete floor finishing including but not limited to following: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. 1.2.1.5. 1.2.1.6. penetration floor sealer. curing and sealing. concrete grinding and polishing. premoulded joint filler. sawcutting construction and control joints in concrete. caulking construction and control joints and over premoulded joint filler with sealant.
1.2.2.
Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. 1.2.2.3. Concrete formwork: Section 03 11 00, Concrete Formwork. Concrete reinforcing: Section 03 20 00, Concrete Reinforcing. Cast-in-place concrete: Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. MSDS: Material Safety Data Sheets. NFSI: National Floor Safety Institute: www.nfsi.org. OHSA: Occupational Health and Safety Act.
1.3.2.
Reference Standards: 1.3.2.1. 1.3.2.2. 1.3.2.3. 1.3.2.4. ACI 302.1R-04 ASTM C156-05 ASTM C309-07 ASTM C779/C779M-05 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction - Test Method for Water Retention by Liquid MembraneForming Curing Compounds for Concrete - Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces.
PAGE 03 35 13 - 1
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 03 35 13 Project No: 2011.008 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING
1.3.2.5. ASTM C1028-07 - Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method - Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction - Methods of Test for Concrete - Standard for Evaluating High-Traction Flooring Materials Coatings, and Finishes.
1.3.2.6. 1.3.2.7. 1.3.2.8.
CSA A23.1-04 CSA A23.2-04 NFSI Test Method 101-A
1.4.
1.4.1.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Coordination: 1.4.1.1. 1.4.1.2. Comply with manufacturers ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. Coordinate polished concrete requirements with structural concrete consultant including but not limited to finishes, reinforcement placement, cleavage membranes, admixtures, and control joint locations. Refer to Section 03 30 00. Coordinate requirements for concrete mixtures and admixtures with polished concrete trade. Ensure finish, aggregate exposure and slab requirements are elected to ensure finish slab matches Consultants sample.
1.4.1.3.
1.4.2.
Pre-Installation Meetings: 1.4.2.1. Prior to commencement of work, arrange for Project site meeting of all parties associated with work of this Section. Presided over by Consultant, include manufacturer, Contractor, Subcontractor performing work of this Section and Testing Company's Representative. Review Specification for work included under this Section and determine complete understanding of requirements and responsibilities relative to work included, storage and handling of materials, materials to be used, installation of materials, sequence and quality control, Project staffing, restrictions on areas of placement and other matters affecting construction, to permit compliance with intent of this Section. Review following: 1.4.2.3.1. 1.4.2.3.2. 1.4.2.3.3. 1.4.2.3.4. 1.4.2.3.5. 1.4.2.3.6. 1.4.2.3.7. 1.4.2.3.8. 1.4.2.3.9. Scheduling and phasing of work. Coordination with other work and personnel. Protection of adjacent surfaces. Surface preparation. Repair of defects and defective work prior to installation. Coordination of existing and new concrete work and differences in polishing methods for each. Cleaning. Installation of polishes floor finishes, including liquid hardener, densifiers and sealer. Protection of finished surfaces after installation.
1.4.2.2.
1.4.2.3.
PAGE 03 35 13 - 2
1.4.2.4. Sequencing: Comply with manufacturers written recommendations for sequencing construction operations.
1.5.
1.5.1.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's Product data, performance criteria and other documentation for each material specified in this Section proposed for use, including: 1.5.1.1. 1.5.1.2. 1.5.1.3. 1.5.1.4. liquid curing/sealing and curing/hardener. joint sealant and primer. product MSDS. Manufacturers preparation and concrete grinding procedures.
1.5.2.
Shop Drawings: 1.5.2.1. 1.5.2.2. 1.5.2.3. Typical layout including dimensions and floor grinding schedule. Plan view of floor and joint pattern layout. Hardener, sealer, densifier in notes.
1.5.3.
Samples: 1.5.3.1. Provide 12 x 12 Samples of concrete ground and polished to Level 3: High Sheen level (800 grit) as requested by Consultant.
1.6.
1.6.1.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01 70 00 to Consultant. Contribute to this manual with complete detailed and specific instructions for maintaining, preserving and keeping clean surfaces of this work and which give adequate warning of maintenance practices or materials detrimental to sealed surfaces. Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Letter of certification from the NFSI confirming the system has been tested and passed phase two level of certification when tested by Method 101-A or tested in accordance with ASTM C1028 and with shoe sole leather and shoe sole rubber with a static coefficient of friction of minimum 0.6 on horizontal surfaces.
1.6.2. 1.6.3.
1.7.
1.7.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications: 1.7.1.1. Manufacturers: Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation during construction and approving application method. Ensure manufacturer has minimum 5 years experience in manufacturing components similar to or exceeding requirements of project. Installers: Provide work of this Section executed by competent installers with minimum 5 years experience in the application of Products, systems and assemblies specified and with approval and training of the Product manufacturers. Have a senior qualified representative on site at all times to direct work of this Section.
1.7.1.2.
PAGE 03 35 13 - 3
1.7.2. Mock-Ups: Construct minimum 100 sq ft mock-up Sample area where directed employing materials, tools, and techniques to be used on job at Project location designated by Consultant for acceptance. Once accepted, sample remains part of finished work and used as a quality reference standard for balance of Project. Mock-up will be used to judge concrete substrate preparation, operation of equipment, material application and final selection of sheen level.
1.8.
1.8.1.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: 1.8.1.1. Deliver materials in manufacturers original packaging with identification labels and seals intact.
1.8.2.
Storage and Handling Requirements: 1.8.2.1. 1.8.2.2. 1.8.2.3. 1.8.2.4. 1.8.2.5. 1.8.2.6. 1.8.2.7. 1.8.2.8. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer. Protect concrete slab. Protect from petroleum stains during construction. Diaper hydraulic power equipment. Restrict use of pipe cutting machinery. Restrict placement of reinforcing of slab. Restrict use of acids or acidic detergents on slab. Refer to product MSDS for precautionary measures during storage and handling.
1.8.3.
Packaging Waste Management: 1.8.3.1. Recycle packaging in accordance with waste management plan where applicable.
1.9.
1.9.1.
SITE CONDITIONS
Ambient Conditions: 1.9.1.1. 1.9.1.2. 1.9.1.3. Temporary Lighting: Minimum 1-200 W light source, placed 2.5 m (8') above floor surface, 2 for each 40 m (430 sq ft) floor being finished. During hot weather, conform to CSA A23.1, Clause 7.4. During cold weather, provide temporary heating and enclosures required. Mix, place and protect concrete in accordance with CSA A23.1, Clause 7.4.
1.10.
1.10.1.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer Warranty: Warrant work of this Section for period of 5 years against defects and/or deficiencies in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period, to satisfaction of Consultant and at no expense to Owner. Defects include but are not limited to; failure of floor finish remaining in place and bonding to structural slab and finish becoming defective and spalling and/or cracking.
PAGE 03 35 13 - 4
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 03 35 13 Project No: 2011.008 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1.
2.1.1.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer List: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 2.1.1.1. 2.1.1.2. 2.1.1.3. 2.1.1.4. 2.1.1.5. 2.1.1.6. ChemRex Inc.; www.chemrex.com CPD Construction Products; www.cpd.ca Euclid Chemical Canada Ltd.; www.euclidchemical.com Retroplate Canada; www.retroplatesystem.ca Sika Canada Inc.; www.sika.ca W.R. Meadows of Canada; www.wrmeadows.com
2.2.
2.2.1.
MATERIALS
Description: 2.2.1.1. Regulatory Requirements: 2.2.1.1.1. 2.2.1.1.2. Comply with requirements of OBC, OHSA, and applicable requirements of all other authorities having jurisdictions. Comply with applicable laws, bylaws, codes, fire regulations, health and safety regulations of governments having jurisdiction or requirements of this specification which ever are more stringent.
2.2.1.2.
Provide polished concrete flooring that has been selected, manufactured and installed to achieve following: 2.2.1.2.1. 2.2.1.2.2. 2.2.1.2.3. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C779/C779M, Method A, high resistance, no more than 0.008 wear in 30 mins. Reflectivity: Increase of 35% as determined by standard gloss meter. High Traction Rating: NFSI 101-A, non-slip properties and/or ASTM C1028 with minimum 0.6 slip coefficient.
2.2.1.3.
Hardened Concrete Properties: 2.2.1.3.1. 2.2.1.3.2. 2.2.1.3.3. 2.2.1.3.4. 2.2.1.3.5. 2.2.1.3.6. Minimum Concrete Compressive Strength: 3500 psi - 5000 psi. Normal Weight Concrete: No lightweight aggregate. Non-air entrained. Natural concrete slump of 4.5 to 5. Admixtures and superplasticizers may be used in moderation where acceptable by floor finishing manufacturer. Pozzolans no more than 15% cement replacement.
PAGE 03 35 13 - 5
2.2.1.4. Placement Properties: 2.2.1.4.1. 2.2.1.4.2. 2.2.1.4.2.1. 2.2.1.4.2.2. 2.2.1.4.2.3. 2.2.1.4.3. 2.2.1.4.4. 2.2.1.4.4.1. 2.2.1.4.4.1.1. 2.2.1.4.4.2. 2.2.1.4.4.3. 2.2.1.4.4.4. 2.2.2. 2.2.3. Natural concrete slump of 4-1/2 5. Admixtures may be used. Flatness Requirements: Overall Floor Flatness (FF): 40. Local Floor Flatness (FL): 20. Preferred Floor Levelness: 35 Hard-Steel Troweled (3 passes) Concrete: No burn marks. Finish to ACI 302.1R, Class 5 floor. Curing Options: Membrane forming curing compounds (ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B, all resin, dissipating cure). Acrylic curing and sealing compounds not permitted. Wet Curing: Minimum 7 Day cure with non staining fabric. Polyethylene film not recommended. Slab Cure: 28 Days minimum. Laser screeding permitted.
Supply liquid admixtures for concrete from single manufacturer. Supply liquid curing/sealing compound by same manufacturer which is supplying hardener. Concrete Sealer, Hardener, Densifer and Polisher: Finish exceeding ADA recommendations for wet and dry surfaces tested in accordance ASTM C1028 for coefficient of friction, Retroplate 99 by Advanced Floor Products Limited, Diamond Hard Concrete Polishing by Euclid Chemical Canada Ltd. or Liqui-Hard Concrete Densifier and Chemical Hardener by W.R. Meadows of Canada. Water for Curing: Water conforming to CSA A23.1, Clause 4.2.2, clear and entirely free from any elements which might cause staining of concrete. Polyethylene Film (for Water Curing): Minimum 0.1 mm (4 mils) thick, complying with maximum allowable moisture loss requirements of ASTM C156. Backer Rod: Extruded, closed cell, circular polyethylene foam, sized 25% larger than joint width into which it will be installed, Cera-Rod Non-Gassing, Heat-Resistant Backer Rod by W.R. Meadows of Canada. Heavy Duty Sealant for Sawcut Joints: Epoxy modified joint sealant, cold-applied, 2 component, pour grade self levelling compound with minimum Shore A Hardness of 80 and Shore D Hardness of 50. Euco 700 by Euclid Chemical Canada Ltd., EP 280 Control Joint Sealant by ChemRex Inc., Loadflex by Sika Canada Inc., ReziWeld Flex by W.R. Meadows of Canada or Cipadam E-13 by CPD Construction Products.
2.2.4. 2.2.5. 2.2.6.
2.2.7.
PAGE 03 35 13 - 6
2.2.8. Standard Joint Sealant: 2 component, chemically reactive polyurethane or polysulfide modified sealant over premoulded joint filler; self-levelling, grey colour. Vulkem 245 by Tremco, Eucolastic II by Euclid Chemical Canada Ltd., Sikaflex 2C/SL by Sika Canada Inc., Deck-O-Seal Pour Grade Two-Part, Elastomeric, Polysulfide-Based Sealant by W.R. Meadows of Canada or Sonolastic SL2 by Chemrex Inc. Finish: Level 1: Level 3: High Sheen: 800 grit. Cleaning Solution: Proprietary, mild, highly concentrated liquid concrete cleaner and conditioner containing wetting and emulsifying agents; biodegradable, environmentally safe.
2.2.9. 2.2.10.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1.

3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
Verification of Conditions: Verify actual site dimensions and location of adjacent materials prior to commencing work. Notify Consultant in writing of any conditions which would be detrimental to the installation. Ensure manufacturer inspects site to ensure proper preparation of existing/new slab and coordination of required components of finishing system. Verification of Conditions: 3.1.3.1. Verify actual site dimensions and location of adjacent materials prior to commencing work. Notify Consultant in writing of any conditions which would be detrimental to the installation. Commencement of work implies acceptance of previously completed work. Verify concrete substrate conditions, previously installed under other sections and/or the existing slab, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturers instructions prior to installation of concrete finishing materials. Verify Concrete Slab Performance Requirements: 3.1.3.3.1. 3.1.3.3.2. Verify concrete is cured to 28 Day minimum 3500 psi strength. Verify concrete surfaces received a hard steel-trowel finish (3 passes) during placement.
3.1.2. 3.1.3.
3.1.3.2.
3.1.3.3.
3.2.
3.2.1.
PREPARATION
Protection of In-Place Conditions: Protect materials and work of this Section from damage in accordance with CSA A23.1, Clause 8.5.7. Protect other work from damage resulting from this Work. Replace damaged work which cannot be satisfactorily repaired. Surface Preparation: 3.2.2.1. 3.2.2.2. 3.2.2.3. 3.2.2.4. After concrete has been placed, strike off concrete level and flush to screeds with true straight edge. Immediately after striking off concrete, level and consolidate with wooden darby or bull float. Complete levelling and consolidation before free moisture (bleeding) rises to surfaces. Wait until concrete stiffens sufficiently to sustain foot pressure with only about 6 mm (1/4") indentation. Float concrete with hand float or with power float. If free bleed water remains on surface at this time, remove it before floating.
3.2.2.
PAGE 03 35 13 - 7
3.2.2.5. Ensure surfaces are clan and free of dirt and other foreign matter harmful to performance of finishing materials.
3.3.
3.3.1.
INSTALLATION
Floor Finishing: 3.3.1.1. Laser screed floor slabs as scheduled herein, using laser screed vehicle. Laser vibratory screed is to be operated only by trained and qualified personnel who are familiar with equipment. Power screed interior floor slabs with mechanical vibratory screeding equipment. Machine float and machine trowel floor surfaces to smooth, level and dense surfaces free from trowel marks, ridges and depressions, except where specified otherwise. Use hand held vibrators and hand screed, float and trowel areas where power equipment is inaccessible, to same density and surface quality specified for floors finished with power operated equipment. For concrete mixes containing steel fibre reinforcement, ensure finishing process leaves surface free of protruding fibres. If fibres protrude from surface after concrete has set, remove protruding fibres by grinding. Concrete Sealer, Hardener, Densifer and Polisher: In areas to receive concrete sealer, hardener, densifier and polisher, prepare surfaces as recommended and apply at rate of application in accordance with manufacturers recommendation for desired level of finish. Level 2 hard shell medium sheen. Grind/Polish in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and reapply sealer where recommended by manufacturer: 3.3.1.5.1. 3.3.1.5.2. 3.3.1.5.3. Provide polished concrete floor treatment to entire slab as indicated on Drawings. Provide consistent finish in all contiguous areas. Apply floor finish prior to installation of fixtures and accessories. Diamond polish concrete floor surfaces with power disc machine recommended by floor finish manufacturer. Sequence with coarse to fine grit using dry method. Comply with manufacturers recommended polishing grits for each sequence to achieve desired finish level. Ensure level of sheen matches reviewed mock-up. Expose aggregate in concrete surface only as determined by reviewed mock-up. Ensure concrete surfaces are uniform in appearance. Follow manufacturers instructions for installation, coating thicknesses, application methods and drying time between coats and polishing methods.
3.3.1.2.
3.3.1.3.
3.3.1.4.
3.3.1.5.
3.3.1.5.3.1.
3.3.1.5.3.1.1. 3.3.1.5.3.1.2. 3.3.1.5.3.1.3.
3.3.2.
Sawcutting of Control Joints and Construction Joints: 3.3.2.1. Sawcut control joints and construction joints in slabs where indicated on Drawings, 5 mm wide x 50 mm deep (3/16" x 2") for slabs on grade, in straight lines.
PAGE 03 35 13 - 8
3.3.2.2. Unless soft cut method is used, perform sawcutting 12 to 24 hrs after concrete has been placed, depending on when saw can run over concrete surface without leaving tread marks, when concrete can be sawn without dislodging aggregate and before uncontrolled shrinkage has occurred. Do not postpone sawing operations beyond these time limitations. Do not sawcut concrete, not utilizing retarding admixtures placed with temperature exceeding 26 deg C (79 deg F) later than 12 hrs after placing. Continuously spray water on saw blade at all times during sawing. Grind edges of sawcuts to eliminate burrs; do not grind to bevel or chamfer joint edges. In sawcutting floor slabs on metal deck, run wet vacuum cleaner immediately behind sawcutting equipment. After sawing and grinding, clean joints with jet of water and blow-out with compressed air. Immediately broom clean, residue caused by sawing operation as work progresses. When cleaned joints are dry and prior to traffic being allowed over area, install temporary filler using polyethylene rope in such joints to prevent contamination of same.
3.3.2.3.
3.3.2.4. 3.3.2.5. 3.3.3.
Curing/Sealing of Floors: 3.3.3.1. Liquid Curing/Sealing Compound: Prior to sawcutting operations cure and seal floor with 1 coat of liquid curing/sealing compound by method and at rate recommended by manufacturer. Water Curing: 3.3.3.2.1. 3.3.3.2.2. 3.3.3.2.3. Coordinate curing methods with manufacturer in areas to be polished. Water cure floors designated to be surfaced with ceramic or quarry tile, epoxy or urethane. Do not use curing/sealing compound. Water down entire floor area and cover with polyethylene sheets for minimum 7 Days. Sheet coverage includes exposed edges. Provide suitable weights to prevent blow-off or displacement of sheets. Remove cover after minimum 7 consecutive Days. Allow to air dry until concrete has developed design strength.
3.3.3.2.
3.3.3.2.4. 3.3.4. Joint Sealant: 3.3.4.1.
Following joint sealant installation specifications do not apply in areas of concrete slab to receive subsequent floor finishes such as quarry tile, ceramic tile, carpet, resilient tile and epoxy topping system. Do not fill isolation joints, construction joints and control joints sooner than 120 Days after concrete placement. Execute joint sealing during cool, dry ambient conditions when slab is in contracted state to minimize future joint separation at sealant filled joints. Remove temporary filler from sawcut joints. Remove 6 mm (1/4") scored strip from top of premoulded joint filler. Clean joints and blow clean with compressed air. Reinstall backer rod into construction/expansion joints, set to proper sealant depth per sealant manufacturer's printed directions. Fill remainder of joint with standard joint sealant. Floors exposed to heavy wheel traffic: No sooner than 120 Days, fill interior sawn construction and control joints in concrete slabs full depth with heavy duty sawcut joint sealant in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. Caulk over premoulded isolation joint fillers with specified standard joint filler sealant.
3.3.4.2.
3.3.4.3. 3.3.4.4. 3.3.4.5.
3.3.4.6.
PAGE 03 35 13 - 9
3.3.4.7. Prime wall of joint as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Mix sealant as directed by manufacturer. Coat surfaces of metal in contact with sealant with primer as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's application and substrate temperature requirements. Mask floor to edge of joints and fill joint with sealant. After initial set, prime sealant surface with sealant and refill joints with sealant as required to produce slightly convex joint surface.
3.3.4.8.
3.3.5.
Tolerances: 3.3.5.1. Construct forms to produce plumb and level concrete and true to linear building lines. Maximum variations (not accumulative) as follows: 3.3.5.1.1. 3.3.5.1.2. Variation from plumb in concrete surfaces not to exceed 6 mm in 3 m nor 9 mm in 6 m (1/4" in 10' nor 3/8" in 20') or more. Variation of concrete slabs and toppings from dead level or slopes indicated on Drawings not to exceed 3 mm in 3 m (1/8" in 10').
3.4.
3.4.1.
REPAIR
Crack Repair: 3.4.1.1. After concrete has cured, examine concrete floor surfaces and repair cracks. Route cracks out with mechanical router to minimum depth of 13 mm (1/2"). Then clean and fill cracks in same manner as control joints. Correct defects in defined traffic floor only by grinding or removal and replacement of defective slabs. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified by Consultant. Verify corrected areas with Consultant. Perform corrective work at times convenient to Consultant and at no cost to Owner.
3.4.1.2.
3.4.1.3.
3.5.
3.5.1.

Site Tests and Inspections: 3.5.1.1. 3.5.1.2. 3.5.1.3. 3.5.1.4. 3.5.1.5. Independent inspection and testing company may be appointed and paid for by Owner to carry out inspection and testing as directed by Consultant. Perform tests in accordance with CSA A23.2. Test floor for compliance with static co-efficient of friction to ensure floor surface meets requirements and OHSA recommendations under both wet and dry conditions. Forward Inspection Company's reports of tests to Consultant and Contractor with opinion or reason for any abnormalities noted thereon. Cooperate with and assist Inspection Company's personnel during inspection and tests.
3.5.2.
Manufacturer Services: 3.5.2.1. Employ services of a trained concrete technician from staff of surface hardener manufacturer to give assistance to this Section in proper use of material during initial periods of installation. Give 3 Days notice to surface hardener manufacturer in advance of commencing work.
3.5.2.2. 3.5.3.
Non-Conforming Work: Remove defective materials and completed work which fail tests and replace as directed by Consultant.
PAGE 03 35 13 - 10
3.5.4. 3.5.5. Adjusting: Polish to higher gloss those areas not meeting specified gloss levels per mock-up. Fill joints flush to surface.
3.6.
3.6.1. 3.6.2.
CLEANING
Mechanically scrub treated floors for 7 Days with soft to medium pads with approved cleaning solution. Waste Management: Remove surplus and excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment. Vacuum grinding dust as slab is ground.
3.7.
3.7.1. 3.7.2.
PROTECTION
Protect installed product from damage during construction. Do not apply wax or topical sealer to polished concrete floor.
3.8.
3.8.1.
MAINTENANCE
Comply with manufacturers written instructions to maintain installed polished concrete flooring.
3.9.
3.9.1.
ATTACHMENTS
Floor Finishes Schedule: 3.9.1.1. Carpet: 3.9.1.1.1. 3.9.1.1.2. 3.9.1.1.3. 3.9.1.2. Finish: Hardener: Curing: Steel trowel. None required. Curing/sealing compound, or water or poly curing.
Resilient Flooring: 3.9.1.2.1. 3.9.1.2.2. 3.9.1.2.3. Finish: Hardener: Curing: Steel trowel followed by blastrack. None required. Curing/sealing compound, or water or poly curing.
3.9.1.3.
Liquid Applied Rubber or Plastic Membrane (Mechanical Waterproofing): 3.9.1.3.1. 3.9.1.3.2. 3.9.1.3.3. Finish: Hardener: Curing: Steel trowel. None required. Water or poly curing.
3.9.1.4.
Ceramic and Quarry Tile: 3.9.1.4.1. 3.9.1.4.1.1. 3.9.1.4.1.2. 3.9.1.4.1.3. 3.9.1.4.2. 3.9.1.4.2.1. Adhesive or Thinset Mortar: Finish: Hardener: Curing: Mortar Setting Bed: Finish: Steel trowel followed by blastrack. Steel trowel. None required. Water or poly curing.
PAGE 03 35 13 - 11
3.9.1.4.2.2. 3.9.1.4.2.3. 3.9.1.5. Hardener: Curing: None required. Water or poly curing.
Finished Concrete, Standard Exposed: 3.9.1.5.1. 3.9.1.5.2. Finish: Curing: Steel trowel. Curing/sealing compound.
3.9.1.6.
Finished Concrete, Moderate or Heavy Duty: 3.9.1.6.1. 3.9.1.6.2. Finish: Hardener/Curing: Steel trowel. Concrete Sealer, Hardener, Densifer and Polisher
3.9.1.7.
Interior Stairs and Pedestrian Ramps: 3.9.1.7.1. 3.9.1.7.2. 3.9.1.7.3. Finish: Hardener: Curing: Swirled. Non-metallic shake. Curing/sealing compound, or water or poly curing.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 03 35 13 - 12
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 03 45 00 Project No: 2011.008 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.
1.1.1.
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide architectural precast concrete including but not limited to following: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. 1.2.1.5. 1.2.1.6. 1.2.1.7. 1.2.1.8. 1.2.1.9. steel reinforcement for precast units. supply of anchor bolts for wall panels. supply of inserts for foundation walls to anchor wall panels. insulated prestressed, non-load bearing precast concrete wall and fascia panels to match existing. specially shaped wall panels. connecting, anchoring and supplementary bracing hardware. installation of expansion joint flashings. provision of anchors, baseplates, angles, inserts, removable plugs, reglets and other items embedded in precast concrete units. erection and temporary bracing.
1.2.1.10. grouting. 1.2.1.11. caulking and sealing between and around wall panels, interior and exterior. 1.2.2. Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. 1.2.2.3. 1.2.2.4. Foundation walls, installation of inserts for connection of wall panels: Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. Supply of flexible expansion joint flashings: Section 04 20 00, Masonry Units. Provision of flashing including flashing for parapets: Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. Caulking and sealing between precast concrete and adjacent materials installed after completion of architectural precast concrete work: Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. OBC: Ontario Building Code, 2006.
PAGE 03 45 00 - 1
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 03 45 00 Project No: 2011.008 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
1.3.1.2. 1.3.2. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (formerly known as Steel Structures Painting Council); www.sspc.org.
Reference Standards: 1.3.2.1. 1.3.2.2. 1.3.2.3. 1.3.2.4. 1.3.2.5. 1.3.2.6. 1.3.2.7. 1.3.2.8. 1.3.2.9. ASTM A307-10 ASTM A666-10 ASTM C260/C260M-10a ASTM C920-11 ASTM C1107/C1107M-08 CSA A23.1-04 CSA A23.4-05 CSA O121-08 CSA W47.1-03(08) - Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar - Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink) - Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction - Precast Concrete - Materials and Construction - Douglas Fir Plywood - Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures - Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) - Canadian Institute of Steel Construction Standard 2.75 A Quick Drying Primer for Use on Structural Steel - Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering
1.3.2.10. CSA W59-03(08) 1.3.2.11. CISC/CPMA 2.75 1.3.2.12. CAN/ULC-S701-01
1.4.
1.4.1.
SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings: 1.4.1.1. 1.4.1.2. Submit complete structural design of architectural panels showing structural integrity of whole assembly including lateral stability and attachment to main building structure. Submit to Consultant for review, Shop Drawings and anchor and insert setting diagrams, including following: 1.4.1.2.1. 1.4.1.2.2. 1.4.1.2.3. 1.4.1.2.4. 1.4.1.2.5. 1.4.1.2.6. Location of each unit in completed structure and identifying marks for each unit. Size and dimensions of each unit, jointing clearances and clearance between units and structural framework. Size and location of penetrations and openings. Reinforcing details including grade and finish of reinforcing steel, post tensioning, steel details, size and length of welds. Concrete design mixes, strength and admixtures. Fire resistance ratings (materials and methods).
PAGE 03 45 00 - 2
1.4.1.2.7. Complete details of connections, bracing members, lugs, hooks and inserts including materials, size and length of welds. Accurately dimension location of embedded items. Grout material. Insulation material. Full size details of typical methods of joint sealing. Final location of sample wall panel in completed wall structure. Type of finish of precast unit. Location and details of lifting hooks and handling points. Sequence of erection and any special handling instructions or bracing required, shown on separate erection drawings. Special precautions to be taken by other trades whose work affects work of this Section.
1.4.1.2.8. 1.4.1.2.9. 1.4.1.2.10. 1.4.1.2.11. 1.4.1.2.12. 1.4.1.2.13. 1.4.1.2.14. 1.4.1.2.15. 1.4.1.3.
Ensure Shop Drawings include complete design calculations for system and documentation in regard to reaction of units to short term and long term panel deformations due to curing, shrinkage, creep, expansion and contraction and temperature effects and similar documentation stating supports, bracing and anchorage will safely support superimposed loads without failure relative to function, appearance and safety. Submit complete comprehensive design calculations pertaining to differential movement anticipated between precast concrete cladding and framing at points of support due to temperature changes, and assurance that this movement can be safely accommodated in the design of attachments, supports, bracing and anchorage. Ensure a registered structural engineer specified herein is responsible for: 1.4.1.4.1. 1.4.1.4.2. production and review of Shop Drawings. stamping and signing each Shop Drawing and any associated calculations performed.
1.4.1.4.
1.4.2.
Samples: 1.4.2.1. Prepare minimum 2 600 m x 600 mm (24 x 24) samples for review. Do not commence panel fabrication until finish sample showing profile, colour and finish have been accepted by Consultant. Provide samples of precast panels depicting actual colour and finish required. Samples to match existing precast architectural concrete panels including profile, finish and colour. Provide samples of accepted finished panels 300 mm x 300 mm (12 x 12) for use in sealant stain and adhesion tests. Coordinate with sealant manufacturers for required number of samples. Prepare sample of precast concrete architectural pieces minimum 300 mm (12) in length depicting actual colour to match precast concrete panels. Units not within tolerances depicted by site sample, will not be accepted and be removed from site and replaced with acceptable units.
1.4.2.2. 1.4.2.3.
1.4.2.4. 1.4.2.5.
PAGE 03 45 00 - 3
1.4.3. Test and Evaluation Reports: At completion of sealant testing on precast substrate submit copies of test report, prepared by testing and inspection agency, for each specified test showing required performance criteria and test results.
1.5.
1.5.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications: 1.5.1.1. 1.5.1.2. Manufacturers: Design and fabricate precast concrete panel system by a fully experienced and recognized manufacturer of precast concrete Products. Installers: Perform erection and related work with skilled and competent tradesmen only, under continuous supervision of fully qualified superintendents and applying only the best trade practice in various phases of erection and application operations, including hoisting, positioning, anchoring, welding and weather sealing. Licensed Professionals: Employ a full time professional structural engineer carrying minimum $2,000,000.00 professional liability insurance and is registered in the Province of Ontario.
1.5.1.3.
1.5.2.
Preconstruction Testing: 1.5.2.1. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion: Ensure precast concrete panels are thoroughly cleaned of contaminants affecting compatibility and adhesion of sealants such as laitance, form oil, release agents, dirt, etc. Test results confirming compatibility and adhesion are mandatory on mock-up for concealed and exposed sealant materials in contact with precast concrete panels, curtain wall, exterior glazing, other sealants, flashings, metal framing, primers and shims prior to construction of balance of installation construction. Staining: Ensure sealant manufacturers test precast concrete samples to ensure sealant does not detrimentally affect the precast concrete panel finish through staining.
1.5.2.2. 1.5.3.
Mock-Ups: 1.5.3.1. Panels: 1.5.3.1.1. 1.5.3.1.2. Conform to requirements of Section 01 40 00. Before fabrication of precast commences, provide and maintain in accordance with submitted samples, 2 adjacent full size panel to serve as minimum standard for architectural precast units delivered to, and installed at site, in area(s) designated by Consultant. Install units where directed by Consultant which may form part of final wall structure. Identify on backside of unit, in a manner not detrimental or visible, final panel location. Mock-ups show location, size, shape, quality of installation and depth of panel complete with following: backup materials, primer, caulking and/or sealants and quality of sealant system installation. location, size, colour, shape and depth of panel joints and sealant.
1.5.3.1.3.
1.5.3.1.4. 1.5.3.1.4.1. 1.5.3.1.4.2. 1.5.3.2.
Sealant Testing: Mock-up to be used in field tests for joints designated. Approved mock-up will show sealant system achieves adhesive and cohesive requirements and sealant does not stain precast concrete panels.
PAGE 03 45 00 - 4
1.5.3.3. Corrective Measures: Correct any deficiencies in mock-ups observed during testing and repeat tests as may be required to show compliance with performance standards. Deficiencies requiring repair or modification to mock-ups shall mandate a complete retesting of mock-ups unless otherwise directed by Consultant. If compliance with performance standards is not achieved after 2 complete retests Contractor bears costs for additional retesting until compliance with performance standards is accomplished. Incorporate corrective measures indicated by test report into final exterior wall assemblies after review by Consultant. Approved mock-up will become standard of comparison for precast concrete substrate preparation, sealant and caulking work on site and become part of work.
1.5.3.4.
1.6.
1.6.1.

Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: 1.6.1.1. 1.6.1.2. Deliver work of this Section and work of other Sections from damage of any kind. Take necessary measures to protect precast concrete from cracking and chipping. Be responsible for transportation and protection of components. Allow for any limitations of transport from shop to site. Allow for any limitations on site which are imposed by building structure. Deliver precast concrete panels to site clearly marked in an acceptable manner as indicated on Shop Drawings, showing date of casting and final position on building. Ensure sequence of delivery to site conforms to an erection schedule. Schedule timing or delivery to suit storage space available and handling and erection operations. Adequately protect structure and work of other contractors during delivery.
1.6.1.3.
1.6.1.4. 1.6.2.
Storage and Handling Requirements: 1.6.2.1. 1.6.2.2. 1.6.2.3. 1.6.2.4. Store materials on site in a manner to prevent damage thereto. Protect from weather. Comply with CSA A23.1, Clause 7.1. Handle and protect work of this Section and work of other Sections from damage of any kind. Take necessary measures to protect precast concrete from cracking and chipping. Do not store wall panels in contact with earth; do not store so to expose to splashing of earth, mud and the like. Ensure blocking, packing and protective materials are of type that will not cause damage, staining or other disfigurement, and provision and maintenance of this protection remains responsibility of this Contractor until precast units are installed, completed and accepted by Consultant. Properly store packaged materials under dry conditions on site, including seals, flashings, compounds, hardware and metal items; protect from damage and theft. Adequately protect structure and work of other contractors during storage and handling. Erect adequate barricades, warning lights and signs to safeguard traffic, public, tradesmen and others beneath and in immediate area of precast concrete hoisting and handling operations.
1.6.2.5. 1.6.2.6. 1.6.2.7.
1.7.
1.7.1.
SITE CONDITIONS
Ambient Conditions: Comply with CSA A23.4, Clause 31.
PAGE 03 45 00 - 5
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 03 45 00 Project No: 2011.008 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 1.8.
1.8.1.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer Warranty: 1.8.1.1. Warrant work of this Section for period of 5 years against defects and/or deficiencies in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period, to satisfaction of Consultant and at no expense to Owner. Defects include but are not limited to; spalling, cracking, pitting, splitting, deformation; failure to retain true line, plumbness, weathertightness, staining and colour variation under all conditions and failure of anchorage system and sealants. Promptly Make Good defects and/or failures in the work upon written notification by Owner that such exist. Remedy includes labour, materials, equipment and services required to make good defective work, and replacement of components, finishes and Owner's property damaged or disturbed in course of remedying defects.
1.8.1.2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1.

2.1.1.
MANUFACTURERS
Precast Architectural Concrete Panels: To match existing (based on Precon Flexwall recently purchased by Armtec) panels which are 200 mm thick overall with insulation and a 38.1 mm fluted finish. Match existing panels including but not limited to finish, profile and colour. Manufacturer List for Sealants: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 2.1.2.1. 2.1.2.2. 2.1.2.3. 2.1.2.4. 2.1.2.5. 2.1.2.6. 2.1.2.7. 2.1.2.8. ChemRex Inc.; www.chemrex.com Dow Corning; www.dowcorning.com Euclid Chemical Canada Inc.; www.euclidchemical.com Master Builders Technologies Limited; www.masterbuilders.com Momentive Performance Materials; www.momentive.com Sika Canada Inc.; www.sika.ca Tremco Canada; www.tremcosealants.com W.R. Meadows of Canada; www.wrmeadows.com
2.1.2.
2.2.
2.2.1.
MATERIALS
Performance/Design Criteria: 2.2.1.1. Be responsible for design of architectural precast concrete work, components and accessories thereof including cast-in lifting devices and connections in accordance with CSA A23.4, OBC and regulatory standards. Ensure it is understood that details indicated on Drawings are a guide only for aesthetic and interfacing requirements of panels to and with, other work and are not to be construed or taken as engineering design or adequate to meet engineering design requirements. Core: Insulated sandwich panels as shown to match existing. Ensure insulation extends, unbroken, completely across width of panel and from top to bottom.
2.2.1.2.
2.2.1.3.
PAGE 03 45 00 - 6
2.2.1.4. Design insulated wall panels using a core of insulation which has no capillary action. Butt tightly sections of insulation. Tape joints or take other precautions to prevent concrete entering joints between insulation sections. Provide total panel thickness as shown. Make special panels as required to accommodate openings and other facilities, to enclose columns, to close facade runs, to form corners and to accommodate other special requirements. Ensure non-prestressed reinforcement in outer wythe is commercial galvanized. Exterior Finish: To match existing. Interior Finish: Smooth steel trowel finish to match existing. Design panels, connections and anchors to withstand without failure, positive and negative forces imposed by wind, earthquake, gravity loads, temperature and shrinkage stresses, deflections of supporting or adjacent structures, reaction due to superimposed loads, all within deflection limitations governed by design of supporting structure. Calculate external pressure of suction due to wind on part or all of surface of precast concrete panels in accordance with the OBC. Connections or specially manufactured and fabricated inserts may be required testing by Consultant. If requested, submit complete calculations for review. Be completely responsible for design of connections. Consultant has the right to demand modifications if connections are architecturally unacceptable or unsuitable to accommodate structure. Ensure anchors, lifting hooks, shear bars, fastening devices, spacers and other inserts or fittings, including devices required for support and attachment of the Work are recommended and/or designed by manufacturer for complete and rigid installation. Ensure each conforms to requirements of local building authorities and by-laws and be of type satisfactory to Consultant. Provide recessed type lifting hooks adequately sized to safely handle units according to dimension and weight. Conceal anchors, inserts, etc.
2.2.1.5. 2.2.1.6. 2.2.1.7.
2.2.1.8.
2.2.1.9.
2.2.1.10. Design panels so no face handling methods will be employed. Panels handled by inserts on exposed faces requiring subsequent patching, filling and the like, are unacceptable. 2.2.1.11. Make proper provision for use of proprietary materials and components from other Contractors which form part of the Work. 2.2.1.12. Design connections and anchorage to transfer forces to structure in conformity with structural and architectural constraints. Design connections in a manner that actual and future temperature condition, shrinkage of panels are taken into account possible future movement. Likewise, design connections to provide means of compensating for deviations of building structure. Select and join materials in a manner to prevent embrittlement of assembled connections. 2.2.1.13. Fireproof exposed connections on precast concrete members to provide required fire resistance ratings where required. 2.2.1.14. Structural Design: Employ a registered structural engineer specified herein to: 2.2.1.14.1. 2.2.1.14.2. design components performance. for work of this Section requiring structural
be responsible for determining sizes, yield strengths, gauge thicknesses and joint spacing to allow thermal movement and loading of components in accordance with applicable codes and regulations.
2.2.2.
Portland Cement: Grey and white Portland Cement as required to match existing, Type GU (Type 10), conforming to CSA A3000. Obtain from 1 source and stockpile in sufficient quantity to assure consistency throughout the work.
PAGE 03 45 00 - 7
2.2.3. 2.2.4. 2.2.5. 2.2.6. 2.2.7. 2.2.8. Coarse Aggregate: Conforming to CSA A23.1, Clause 4.2.3.4, Group I, 20-5 mm. Use silica sand where required to match existing precast panels. Fine Aggregate: Conforming to CSA A23.1, Clause 4.2.3.3. Water: Conforming to CSA A23.1, Clause 4.2.2. Insulation: Supply "Styrofoam Panelmate" by Dow conforming to CAN/ULC-S701 - Type 2, thickness as shown on Drawings. Air Entraining Admixture: MB-AE10 by Master Builders Technologies Limited or "Eucon Air" by Euclid Chemical Canada Inc. conforming to ASTM C260/260M. Formwork: Constructed of approved steel, fiberglass reinforced plastic or high density overlaid plywood complying with CSA O121 and as required to obtain the quality of the finish specified, of type to keep dimensional tolerances and architectural concrete quality consistently maintained. Hardware: Stainless steel sections confirming to ASTM A666, minimum Type 304, of size and thickness to adequately secure, connect and support units. Hardware includes anchors, lifting hooks, fastening devices, supports and panel connections. Hot dip galvanize hardware cast in concrete for attachment of panels after fabrication. Clean other exposed miscellaneous hardware associated with precast concrete work to SSPC-SP 3 and prime paint with primer conforming to CISC/CPMA 2.75. Bolt, Nuts and Washers: Conforming to ASTM A307. Sealant: Provide 1 of following types: 2.2.12.1. Non-sag type, 1 component ultra low-modulus, pre-pigmented, neutral cure elastomeric silicone sealant conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT, G, M, A and O. Supply in standard colours as selected. Supply 1 of following: 2.2.12.1.1. 2.2.12.1.2. 2.2.12.1.3. Dow Corning 790 Silicone Building Sealant by Dow Corning. GE SilPruf LM SCS2700 by Momentive Performance Materials. Spectrem 1" by Tremco Canada.
2.2.9.
2.2.10.
2.2.11. 2.2.12.
2.2.12.2. Non-sag type, 1 component medium-modulus, pre-pigmented, neutral cure elastomeric silicone sealant conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, G, M, A and O. Supply in standard colours as selected. Supply 1 of following: 2.2.12.2.1. 2.2.12.2.2. 2.2.12.2.3. Dow Corning 795 Silicone Building Sealant by Dow Corning. GE SilPruf SCS2000 by Momentive Performance Materials. Spectrem 2" by Tremco Canada.
2.2.12.3. Non-sag type, multi-component polyurethane sealant conforming to ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, G, M, A and O. Supply in standard colours as selected. Supply 1 of following: 2.2.12.3.1. 2.2.12.3.2. 2.2.12.3.3. 2.2.12.3.4. Sonoplastic NP 2" by ChemRex Inc. Sikaflex -2c NS by Sika Canada Inc. DYmeric 240 by Tremco Canada. Eucolastic 2 by Euclid Chemical Canada Inc.
PAGE 03 45 00 - 8
2.2.13. 2.2.14. 2.2.15. 2.2.16. Sealant Primer: Where recommended and supplied by sealant manufacturer for various surfaces. Sealant Backing: Closed cell, "Ethafoam" by Dow. Plastic Vents: PVC tubing, 9 mm (3/8") dia. Grout: Pre-mixed, non-shrink, non-metallic, cementitious grout, containing no chlorides, conforming to ASTM C1107/C1107M; M-Bed Standard" by Sika Canada Inc., CG-86 Construction Grout by W.R. Meadows of Canada, Set Grout by ChemRex Inc. or NS Grout by Euclid Chemical Canada Inc. Prime Paint: Zinc rich primer. Screw Inserts: Sealtight Philblocks, Type A2, where required to secure materials requiring screwed fastenings to precast concrete. Plugs: Non-corrosive, waterproof "screw type". Fabrication: 2.2.20.1. Prior to fabrication examine related Drawings which affect this work. Notify Consultant promptly of any defects or discrepancies. 2.2.20.2. Fabricate work accurately, true to dimensions, square and in true planes, free from waves, warp, twists, cracks, checks and broken edges. Keep arises straight, clean, accurate and true. Fabricate precast units to profiles and sizes detailed on Drawings and in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings, samples and this Specification. 2.2.20.3. Ensure manufacturer and his methods of manufacturing, handling, etc. conforms to CSA A23.4 for architectural concrete. 2.2.20.4. Manufacture units in clean, accurate moulds designed to withstand vibration and lateral forces. Set reinforcing steel, anchors, flashing, metal ties, cramps, lifting hooks and other built-in items. Supply and cast in anchors, blocking and inserts required by other trades to accommodate their work as shown on reviewed Shop Drawings. 2.2.20.5. Identify precast units in a manner not to mar surface of unit. Produce and number units sequentially. 2.2.20.6. No false joints, horizontal joints or horizontal sawcuts will be allowed. 2.2.20.7. Vibrate continuously during casting of concrete until full thickness is reached. Suitably brace and stiffen forms to avoid deformations under pressure of wet concrete and vibrators. 2.2.20.8. Support precast concrete panels uniformly while curing. Keep a daily check to discover any development of warpage or other distortion. Rearrange supports as required to compensate for warpage or distortion. 2.2.20.9. Where field welding is required, remove galvanizing 50 mm (2") away from weld. After field welding, clean un-galvanized areas to bare metal and apply primer. 2.2.20.10. Cast-in lifting devices required for erection of precast concrete panels. Ensure lifting devices used externally or cast into units are capable of supporting precast concrete panels in all positions panels may be in, during course of manufacture, transportation and erection. 2.2.20.11. Install fastenings in accordance with CSA A23.4. 2.2.20.12. Provide necessary holes for penetrations including wall hydrants and siamese connections and sinkages for anchors, shelf angles, cramps, etc. 2.2.20.13. Provide plugs at inserts in panels.
2.2.17. 2.2.18. 2.2.19. 2.2.20.
PAGE 03 45 00 - 9
2.2.20.14. After removal from forms, remove laitance and retarder residue from edges of precast panels. 2.2.20.15. Fabrication Tolerances: In accordance the CSA A23.4 and following (per unit): 2.2.20.15.1. 2.2.20.15.2. 2.2.20.15.3. 2.2.20.15.4. 2.2.20.15.5. Any Dimension: +/-3 mm (+/-1/8). Thickness: +6 mm (+1/4) to -1.6 mm (-1/16). Maximum out of squareness of major and minor axes measured at end of minor axis: +/-3 mm in 3 m (1/8" in 10'). Maximum bowing (concave or convex) of any part of flat surface: (length of bow/360 but not greater than 6 mm in 6 m (1/4 in 20). Maximum warpage of 1 corner out of plane with other 3: The greater of 1.5 mm in 300 mm (1/16 in 12) or 3 mm (1/8) from the nearest adjacent corner. Location of openings and cast-in items: +/-3 mm (+/-1/8).
2.2.20.15.6.
2.2.20.16. In event of conflict, more stringent of above specified tolerances applies. Tolerances are non-cumulative. 2.2.21. Mixes: 2.2.21.1. Ready-mixed concrete and concrete proportions shall be in accordance with CSA A23.1, Clause 4.3 and as follows: 2.2.21.1.1. 2.2.21.1.2. Minimum allowable compressive strength shall be 35 MPa (5000 psi) at 28 Days of age, unless otherwise noted or shown.
3 Minimum cement content shall be 375 kg/m (23.4 lb/cu ft) of concrete. If blended normal Portland cement/cementitious hydraulic slag is used, slag content shall not be more than 25% of total mass of cement.
2.2.21.1.3. 2.2.21.1.4. 2.2.21.1.5.
Ensure slump at point of deposit is 80 mm (3-1/8") prior to addition of superplasticisers, with a maximum tolerance of +/-30 mm (+/-1-1/4"). Keep water-cement ratio to a minimum to increase strength and durability of concrete. The maximum water-cement ratio shall not exceed 0.40. Air entrain concrete. Air content shall be 7% maximum and 4% minimum.
2.2.21.2. Calcium chloride or other admixtures will not be accepted in the work.

3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
Verification of Conditions: Verify actual site dimensions and location of adjacent materials prior to commencing work. Notify Consultant in writing of any conditions which would be detrimental to the installation. Evaluation and Assessment: Commencement of work implies acceptance of previously completed work.
3.1.2.
PAGE 03 45 00 - 10
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 03 45 00 Project No: 2011.008 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 3.2.
3.2.1.
INSTALLATION
Provide and use safe and adequate equipment on site to execute the work including hoisting, scaffolding, staging, safety protection equipment, tools, plant and other equipment required for performance of the work. Take precautions necessary to safeguard public and workmen. Ensure wire ropes for cranes or lifting bars are of full section, not bent, kinked, twisted, torn or stretched. Clearly mark lifting capacity of lifting beams, platforms and trusses. Ensure ultimate capacity of erection equipment meets current provincial safety requirements. Brace structure during all stages of construction so structure will safely withstand any load to which it may be subjected. Leave temporary bracing in position until connections have been completed (and joints grouted/sealed). Erect wall panels plumb and square with joints parallel and uniform and in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings. Grout horizontal joints with specified grout, steel trowel finished, suitable for painting. Erection tolerances shall be in accordance with CSA A23.4. Adherence to accepted tolerances does not relieve Contractor from responsibility of providing a neat workmanlike job, with particular attention at corners. Secure units safely and adequately in position by positive mechanical connections capable of maintaining loads. Drill concrete foundation walls and place anchor bolts. Erect panels, shim bottom, adjust anchor bolts and set panels plumb, level and in true planes with correct joint widths. Fill holes around anchor bolts and void between bottom of panels and concrete foundation walls, with grout, trowel smooth. Do not erect panels until same have been inspected and approved by Consultant. Welding: 3.2.6.1. 3.2.6.2. 3.2.6.3. Perform welding in accordance with CSA W59, with operators fully certified by Canadian Welding Bureau under requirements of CSA W47.1. Take precautions during welding to prevent staining of panels. Protect adjoining materials wherever welding is carried out to prevent fires and damage. Provide portable fire extinguisher at locations where welding is in progress.
3.2.2.
3.2.3.
3.2.4. 3.2.5.
3.2.6.
3.2.7. 3.2.8.
Touch up abraded galvanized components and field welds, bolts, nuts, etc. with 2 coats of zinc rich paint. Caulking: 3.2.8.1. Apply caulking only after tests have been carried out showing there will be no staining. Carry out a typical application of joint sealing for Consultant's review of colour and application method before commencing caulking. Apply caulking only when surfaces are cleaned, packed and primed. Progressively as the work proceeds and in a manner to prevent contamination of joint surfaces, caulk horizontal and/or vertical joints between precast concrete panels and between panels and adjoining construction at exterior and interior faces. Use a modified rain screen system for joints between wall panels: airtight (airseal) at interior face; vented (weatherseal) at exterior face. At corner joints use a bellows joint: airtight neoprene for interior face; vented sealant joints for exterior face. Seal interior and exterior joints and bottom, horizontal joints between precast panel and edge of concrete foundations, floors, walls and other members.
3.2.8.2. 3.2.8.3.
3.2.8.4.
PAGE 03 45 00 - 11
3.2.8.5. 3.2.8.6. Prime sides of joints as directed by approved caulking material manufacturer's specifications and recommendations. Ensure sealed joints and spaces are completely free from form oil or other release agents, clean, dry and free of dust, loose mortar, oil, grease and other foreign material. Use only skilled applicators. Install plastic venting tubes at top and bottom of each exterior vertical joint. Insert backing in joints to be sealed and set to give 9 mm (3/8") depth of sealant. Where surfaces adjacent to joints are likely to become coated with sealing compound, mask these surfaces with masking tape prior to priming and sealing.
3.2.8.7. 3.2.8.8. 3.2.8.9.
3.2.8.10. Apply sealant using pressure operated guns fitted with suitable nozzles approved by sealant manufacturer. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions and recommendations. 3.2.8.11. Clean bond faces free from laitance, dust, etc. Prime surfaces with primer or conditioner as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3.2.8.12. Apply sealant in a manner to assure good adhesion to sides of joints and to completely fill voids in joints. Ensure surface of sealing compound is smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and embedded impurities. After joints have been completely filled, tool to a flat or slightly concave surface. 3.2.8.13. Caulk joints, interior and exterior. Where interior joints are inaccessible from interior, caulk same from exterior. 3.2.8.14. Remove masking tape and excess sealing compound which may have been deposited on surfaces near joints. 3.2.8.15. Remove excess material immediately and clean off surrounding surfaces, leaving whole work in a neat, clean condition. 3.2.9. Tolerances: Manufacture and install precast concrete panel joints between panels are within following limits: 3.2.9.1. 3.2.9.2. 3.2.9.3. 3.2.9.4. Face Width of Joint: +/-5 mm (+/-3/16). Joint Taper: 0.5 mm in 300 mm (0.02 in 12) length but not more than 3 mm (1/8) total. Step in Face: 3 mm (1/8). Jog in Alignment of Edge: 3 mm (1/8).
3.3.
3.3.1.

Site Tests and Inspections: 3.3.1.1. 3.3.1.2. 3.3.1.3. Structural Inspection: Ensure a registered structural engineer specified herein inspects work of this Section during erection/installation. Panels will be inspected before and after delivery and again, during erection. Cooperate with and provide access for inspection company and provide facilities required for storage of test specimens. Provide samples of materials, results of in-plant tests taken by fabricator, for examination by inspection company. Pay shipping charges to deliver material samples to inspection company.
PAGE 03 45 00 - 12
3.3.1.4. 3.3.1.5. 3.3.2. Give timely notice to inspection and testing company as to when work is ready for inspection. Inspection by an inspection company does not relieve Contractor from responsibility for matching approved samples and for compliance with design, fabrication and erection.
Non-Conforming Work: Remove damaged or defective work in sole judgement of Consultant from site and replace at no cost to Owner.
3.4.
3.4.1.
PROTECTION
Protect work of this Section from damage. Protect other work from damage resulting from this work.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 03 45 00 - 13
1.1.1.
SECTION 04 20 00 MASONRY UNITS
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide masonry units including but limited to following: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. 1.2.1.5. 1.2.1.6. 1.2.1.7. 1.2.1.8. 1.2.1.9. concrete block masonry. reinforced concrete block masonry. block lintels and other special units. masonry mortar. masonry reinforcing. masonry tie systems. reinforcing steel bars and concrete fill to block lintels and reinforced masonry. dampproof course. expansion joints and joint flashings.
1.2.1.10. control joints and preformed joint filler. 1.2.1.11. compressible filler. 1.2.1.12. concrete fill for reinforced masonry. 1.2.1.13. building recesses to receive recessed work of this Contract; i.e. washroom accessories, fire extinguisher cabinets, drinking fountains, electrical panels, boxes and other work as shown or specified. 1.2.1.14. continuous grouting of fire rated frames in concrete and concrete block walls. 1.2.1.15. cleaning masonry. 1.2.2. Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. Vertical reinforcing steel and wire ties, and reinforcing of masonry: Division 03, Concrete. Supply and installation of flashing reglets, dovetail anchor slots in concrete and dovetail anchors; grouting under column base plates; concrete fill for top 2 courses of load bearing wall, setting, installing wall plates for steel joists and beams: Section 03 30 00, Cast-InPlace Concrete. Supply of miscellaneous steel required to be built-in, or installed in masonry: Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.
1.2.2.3.
PAGE 04 20 00 - 1
1.2.2.4. 1.2.2.5. 1.2.2.6.
Firestopping and smoke seals: Section 07 84 00, Firestopping and Smoke Seals. Caulking at exterior expansion and control joints and caulking of interior control joints; caulking between masonry walls and adjacent materials: Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. Sleeves for mechanical and electrical works penetrating masonry walls or partitions, including packing and sealing same: Division 21, Fire Suppression, Division 22, Plumbing, Division 23, Heat, Ventilating and Air Conditioning, Division 26, Electrical, Division 27, Communications and Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. 1.3.1.4. OBC: Ontario Building Code, 2006. OMCA: Ontario Masonry Contractors Association; www.canadamasonycentre.com. OHSA: Occupational Health and Safety Act. ULC: Underwriters Laboratories of Canada; www.ulc.ca.
1.3.2.
Reference Standards: 1.3.2.1. 1.3.2.2. 1.3.2.3. 1.3.2.4. 1.3.2.5. 1.3.2.6. 1.3.2.7. 1.3.2.8. 1.3.2.9. ASTM A82/A82M-07 ASTM A123/A123M-08 ASTM A153/A153M-05 ASTM A580/A580M-08 ASTM A666-10 ASTM C207-06 ASTM C305-06 ASTM C1107/C1107M-06 CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes - Practice for Mechanical Mixing of Hydraulic Cement Pastes and Mortars of Plastic Consistency - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink) - Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction - Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction - Asphalt Saturated Organic Roofing Felt - Concrete Block Masonry Units - Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry - Connectors for Masonry - Masonry Construction for Buildings
1.3.2.10. CSA A23.1-04 1.3.2.11. CSA A123.3-05 1.3.2.12. CSA A165.1-04 1.3.2.13. CSA A179-04 1.3.2.14. CSA A370-04 1.3.2.15. CSA A371-04
PAGE 04 20 00 - 2
1.3.2.16. CAN/CSA-A3000-08 1.3.2.17. CSA S304.1-04 - Cementitious Materials Compendium - Design of Masonry Structures
1.4.
1.4.1.
SUBMITTALS
Samples: Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Submit 1 each of following samples to Consultant: 1.4.1.1. 1.4.1.2. concrete blocks. reinforcement and connectors, 300 mm (12") long.
1.4.2.
Test and Evaluation Reports: 1.4.2.1. 1.4.2.2. 1.4.2.3. If requested, submit laboratory test reports certifying compliance of masonry units and mortar ingredients as specified herein. Submit manufacturer's certificate verifying masonry reinforcement supplied to Project conforms to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B-2 hot dipped galvanized requirements. Submit manufacturers certificate verifying stainless steel masonry reinforcement is type 304/316; wire ties/reinforcing conforms to ASTM A580/A580M and plates/strips/sheets conform to ASTM A666.
1.5.
1.5.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installers Qualifications: Provide work of this Section executed by competent installers with minimum 5 years experience in the application of Products, systems and assemblies specified and with approval and training of the Product manufacturers. Membership in good standing in OMCA. Mock-Ups: Conform to requirements of Section 01 40 00. Construct 1 site mock-up of following for Consultant's review: 1.5.2.1. 1.5.2.2. 1.5.2.3. Mock-Up Size: 2400 mm x 2400 mm (8' x 8'). Provide bond pattern and jointing as specified. Do not commence remainder of work of this Section until mock-up panel has been reviewed by Consultant and required changes completed. Approved panel shall become standard of comparison for masonry work on site and shall not be destroyed or moved until authorized by Consultant.
1.5.2.
1.6.
1.6.1.

Storage and Handling Requirements: 1.6.1.1. 1.6.1.2. Handle, stack and store masonry units to avoid chipping, protect against staining and moisture entry. Do not store or locate materials, plant and equipment in areas which will obstruct access to work by others.
1.7.
1.7.1. 1.7.2.
SITE CONDITIONS
Provide uniformly distributed and continuous heating. Prevent stratification and cold spots. Maintain masonry continuously at minimum 4 deg C (39 deg F) during placement and for 48 hours after placement.
PAGE 04 20 00 - 3
1.7.3.
Employ protection and heating methods which will prevent evaporation of moisture from masonry during curing.

2.1.1.
MATERIALS
Description: 2.1.1.1. Regulatory Requirements: Provide a Pre-Start Health and Safety Review in accordance with the Occupational Health and Safety Act (Ontario), Regulation 851, as amended. Refer to Section 01 40 00 for further requirements.
2.1.2.
Performance/Design Criteria: 2.1.2.1. Concrete Block Fire and Smoke Separations: Refer to Ontario Concrete Block Association, Metric Technical Manual and provide hollow or solid block assemblies to achieve required fire ratings. Fire and smoke masonry separations shall conform to OBC requirements with respect to materials, classification, equivalent thicknesses, fire resistant ratings, type of concrete and other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or provide fire rated, ULC listed concrete block assemblies for fire separations. Conform to requirements of CSA S304.1 for determination of loads acting on connectors and design requirements and to CSA A370 and CSA A371 for construction requirements, except where more stringent requirements are noted and/or indicated on Drawings and specified herein.
2.1.2.2.
2.1.3. 2.1.4. 2.1.5.
Obtain each masonry unit from 1 manufacturer. Provide units of uniform texture and colour for each kind required. Concrete Blocks: Normal, metric modular, moisture controlled units conforming to CSA A165.1, Normal Type(s) Hollow Units: H/15/A/M and Full Solid Units: SF/15/A/M, Semi-Solid Units: SS/15/A/M. Ensure exposed surfaces are free of cracks, chips or other blemishes and broken corners. Include required sash blocks for control joints, solid block where noted and concrete block lintels over openings in concrete block walls unless steel lintels are shown. Unless shown otherwise, external corners on exposed interior block masonry shall be bullnosed units or alternatively, regular units with corners ground smooth with Carborundum grinder. Dampproofing for Interior Masonry Partitions on Slab-On-Grade: No. 15 asphalt impregnated nonperforated roofing felt complying with CSA A123.3. Lateral Support and Anchorage for Masonry Walls: In accordance with CSA S304.1 and as specified and supplied as part of work of Sections 05 30 00 and 05 50 00. Block Filler: 2.1.9.1. 2.1.9.2. Dry pack grout to consist of 1 part Portland Cement, 1-1/2 parts sand, 2 parts 9 mm (3/8") pea gravel with only sufficient water to dampen mixture. Measure and mix block filler in accordance with CSA A179; mix filler to consistency in accordance with manufacturers recommendations; do not mix different types of grout in same mixer used for mixing of mortar unless mixer is thoroughly cleaned. Use and place grout in its final position within 2-1/2 hours of mixing it. Discard grout not used within 2-1/2 hours. Use coarse grout where required, in spaces 50 mm (2") or more in least horizontal dimension. Use fine grout in spaces less than 50 mm (2") in horizontal dimension.
2.1.6. 2.1.7. 2.1.8. 2.1.9.
2.1.10.
Bituminous Paint: Supply Bakor 810-07 by Bakor Inc.
PAGE 04 20 00 - 4
2.1.11. 2.1.12. 2.1.13.
Anchor Bolts: Minimum 9 mm (3/8") dia steel. In length shown on Drawings, hot dip galvanized, unless otherwise noted on Structural Drawings. Compressible Filler: Backerseal by Emseal Corporation; www.emseal.com Premoulded Filler: Rodofoam PR grade by Grace Construction Products or Rescor Expansion Joint Filler by W. R. Meadows of Canada Ltd. Premoulded filler shall be twice thickness of opening to be filled. Horizontal Joint Material: DA2010 Rapid Soft Joint by Dur-O-Wal Limited. Size: 9 mm (3/8) thick x 75 mm (3") wide x roll length. Rubber Concrete Block Control Joint Material: DA2001 Regular Rubber Control Joint by Dur-O-Wal Limited or Titewall BL-A Control Joint by Blok-Lok Limited. Control Joint Bond Break: CAN/CGSB-51.34-M, 0.15 mm (6 mil) thick clear polyethylene cut into 1 piece strips with width to suit wall thickness. Sealant: Polyurethane, tested for non-staining of masonry conforming to requirements of Section 07 92 00. Colour selected by Consultant. Continuous Grout: Pre-mixed, non-shrink, non-metallic, cementitious grout, containing no chlorides, conforming to ASTM C1107/C1107M; M-Bed Standard" by Sika Canada Inc., CG-86 Construction Grout by W.R. Meadows of Canada Ltd., Set Grout by ChemRex Inc., or NS Grout by Euclid Canada. Masonry Reinforcement: 2.1.19.1. Masonry Connectors and Reinforcement: Performance tolerance requirements and corrosion protection for masonry connectors and horizontal reinforcing in accordance with requirements of CSA A370, CSA A371 and ASTM A82/A82M. Provide corrosion and dielectric protection for anchors, connectors, ties, reinforcement and other metal accessories to suit wall design and thickness as follows: 2.1.19.1.1. 2.1.19.1.2. Level I Corrosion Protection, Mill Galvanized: For interior masonry not subject to moisture. Level II Corrosion Protection, Hot Dip Galvanized: For interior masonry in heavy moisture environment; hot dip galvanized after fabrication with min zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M Class B for wire ties/reinforcing 458 g/m (1.5 oz/sq ft) and ASTM A123/A123M for plates/strips/sheets 610 g/m (2.0 oz/sq ft) (on each face). Level III Corrosion Protection, Stainless Steel Reinforcement at Building Envelope: Type 304 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A580/A580M for wire ties/reinforcing and ASTM A666 for plates/strips/ sheets.
2.1.14. 2.1.15. 2.1.16. 2.1.17. 2.1.18.
2.1.19.
2.1.19.1.3.
2.1.19.2. Masonry Reinforcement for Interior Single Wythe Walls: DW 100 Dur-O-Wal Truss or Ladur by Dur-O-Wal Limited or BL30" by Blok-Lok Limited, 3.8 mm (9 ga) deformed wire for single block wythes; sized 50 mm (2") narrower than wall or partition. Provide shop fabricated corners, intersections and curved configuration where required. Finish as specified herein depending upon location of walls. 2.1.20. Beams, Lintels, Shelf Angles and Spacers: Loose steel beams, shelf angles, spacers and their associated bearing plates, angles and pads, to be set into or to support masonry, are supplied as part of work of Section 05 12 00 or Section 05 50 00, for installation as part of work of this Section. Access Doors: Supplied as part of work of Divisions 22, 23 and 26 for installation as part of this Section.
2.1.21.
PAGE 04 20 00 - 5
2.1.22. Mortar: 2.1.22.1. Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry: Conforming to CSA A179. 2.1.22.2. Masonry Cement: Conforming to CAN/CSA-A3000. 2.1.22.3. Hydrated Lime: Conforming to ASTM C207; Lime Type "S".
2.1.22.4. Sand: Clean, sharp, washed and conforming in all respects to requirements of CSA A179. 2.1.22.5. Water for Mortar Mixing: Potable, free from any deleterious substances. 2.1.23. Fabrication: 2.1.23.1. Masonry Lintels: Fabricate masonry block lintels as indicated on Drawings. Section 03 20 00 shall supply and set reinforcing bars into masonry block lintels over openings in block masonry wall in accordance with lintel schedule noted on Structural Drawings. Use concrete, not mortar, to fill block. 2.1.23.2. Cutting Units: Cut masonry units with wet saw; pre-soak units using clean water prior to cutting them and clean units using a stiff fibre brush and clean water. Allow units to surface dry prior to placement in wall system. 2.1.24. Mixes: 2.1.24.1. Mortar Mixing: 2.1.24.1.1. Mixing Method 1: Prepare and mix mortar materials under supervision and in small batches for immediate use only. Use and mix proprietary mortar in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to produce following mortar types, CSA A179. Do not use re-tempered mortars except for ready mixed mortar which shall be re-tempered in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Discard mixed mortar after 2 hours. Mixing Method 2: Mix required amount from site silo (including colour load at pre-set rate) as required. Take representative samples for testing consistency of strength (and colour) according to CSA A179. Use mortar within 2 hours after mixing at temperature of 26 deg C (79 deg F), or 2-1/2 hours at temperatures under 10 deg C (50 deg F). Mix mortar in a mechanical batch mixer. Do not hand mix except for work of a very minor nature. Mix mortar colour pigment and masonry or Portland cement in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and adjust loading as required to produce mortar matching accepted sample. Provide mortar within 2 hours of mixing. Discard mortar after 2 hours. Mortar may be re-tempered within 2 hours of mixing to replace water lost by evaporation (1 hour when temperature is over 26 deg C (79 deg F)).
2.1.24.1.2.
2.1.24.1.3. 2.1.24.1.4.
2.1.24.1.5.
2.1.24.2. Proprietary Mortar Mixes: Lafarge Canada Inc, St. Lawrence Cement Company or Daubois Inc. materials conforming to mix requirements specified. 2.1.24.3. Site Silo Mortar Mixes: Daubois Inc., Maxi-Mix Ltd. or Jiffy Concrete Products conforming to mix requirements specified.
PAGE 04 20 00 - 6
2.1.24.4. Load Bearing Masonry Unit Mortar: 1/2 part Portland cement (CAN/CSA-A3000 Normal) to 1 part masonry cement (CAN/CSA-A3000 Type H) to 4-1/2 parts damp sand plus water to produce mortar with a minimum compressive strength of 12.5 MPa (1813 psi) at 28 Days of age, conforming to CSA A179, Type "S". 2.1.24.5. For Bedding Steel Bearing Plates, Lintels, for Laying Bearing Courses Under Concentrated Loads and for Laying Masonry Below Grade: Use Type 'S' cement mortar, having a compressive strength of 12.5 MPa (1813 psi) minimum.

3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
3.1.2.
3.2.
3.2.1.
PREPARATION
Protection of In-Place Conditions: 3.2.1.1. 3.2.1.2. Provide temporary bracing for masonry work during erection to prevent damage due to winds or other lateral loads until permanent structure provides adequate bracing. Cold Weather Protection: 3.2.1.2.1. During cold weather, provide temporary enclosures and coverings in order to protect masonry work and to allow laying of masonry during inclement weather. Provide temporary sheltering of freshly built masonry work, during installation and not less than 96 hours after erection to ensure required ambient temperatures. Provide temporary wind bracing for newly laid masonry walls. Completely cover open tops of freshly built walls each night with waterproof tarpaulins or plastic sheet coverings. Apply coverings to tops and faces of walls during rain or snow or upon stoppage of work.
3.2.1.2.2.
3.2.1.2.3. 3.2.1.2.4.
3.2.1.3.
Cold Weather Masonry: Provide temporary heated enclosures in accordance with Section 01 50 00 if necessary to maintain: 3.2.1.3.1. Product manufacturer's recommended temperatures for following, before, during and after installation until full cure: Ambient air, substrate, stored Products, installed Products. Conform to CSA A371 for Cold Weather Requirements, which applies to mixing, enclosure, placing and curing of masonry materials. Cementitious materials storage in accordance with CAN/CSA-A3000. Aggregate materials storage in accordance with CSA A23.1.
3.2.1.3.2. 3.2.1.3.3. 3.2.1.3.4.
PAGE 04 20 00 - 7
3.2.1.4.
Conform to CSA A371 for temporary wind bracing for masonry during construction. Provide temporary bracing for masonry work during erection to prevent damage due to winds or other lateral loads until permanent structure provides adequate bracing. Protect masonry units and mortar ingredients before use from rain, snow, ice and freezing in accordance with requirements of CSA A371.
3.2.1.5. 3.2.2.
Surface Preparation: 3.2.2.1. 3.2.2.2. 3.2.2.3. Apply bituminous paint to steel buried in masonry. Coordinate location of dovetail anchor slots supplied for installation as part of Section 03 11 00. When ambient air temperature is at or below 4 deg C (39 deg F), preheat 3.2.2.3.1. 3.2.2.3.2. 3.2.2.3.3. 3.2.2.3.4. 3.2.2.4. 3.2.2.5. 3.2.2.6. 3.2.2.7. 3.2.2.8. 3.2.2.9. masonry units to 15 deg C (59 deg F). cement and aggregate to 15 deg C (59 deg F). water to minimum 10 deg C (50 deg F), maximum 15 deg C (59 deg F). mixers, reinforcement and ties to 15 deg C (59 deg F).
Just prior to installing masonry remove snow, surface frost and ice from surfaces masonry is to be constructed against. Do not mix in water until cement and aggregate have been combined. Do not allow frozen lumps, ice or snow to contaminate mortar mix. Maintain mortar continuously at minimum 10 deg C (50 deg F) during mixture. Do not provide chemicals, additives or other contaminants to mortar mixture without written acceptance from Consultant. Wet exposed masonry surfaces minimum once every 24 hours for 14 Days to minimize and retard surface evaporation. Do not allow surface freezing.
3.3.
3.3.1. 3.3.2.
INSTALLATION
Provide scaffolding required to complete work of this Section. supported from floor or ground. Provide scaffolding independently
Conform to the OHSA; erect scaffolding adequate for proper execution of work, maintain and remove on completion. Lay masonry from scaffolds erected on same side as face work. Do not support scaffolding from finished building surfaces. Conform to CSA S304.1 and CSA A371 for masonry work. Do masonry mortar and grout work in accordance with CSA A179 and CSA A371 except where specified otherwise. Execute masonry work under continuous supervision and direction of a competent foreman. Lay and set masonry units using experienced mechanics. Do not erect more than 1500 mm (5') in height of any wall in any 1 Working Day and do not raise any part of wall more than 600 mm (24") above remainder at any time.
3.3.3. 3.3.4. 3.3.5. 3.3.6. 3.3.7.
PAGE 04 20 00 - 8
3.3.8. 3.3.9.
Do not tooth at wall terminations. Rake back 1/2 unit length where stop-off occurs in horizontal run of masonry. Lay up units true to line with accurately spaced courses. Keep bond plumb throughout. Provide corners and reveals plumb and true. Provide horizontal and vertical joints of uniform thickness in straight lines. Keep exposed faces free from stains, chips and cracks. Keep tolerance in plane 3 mm in 2400 mm (1/8" in 8'). Provide running bond unless indicated otherwise. Avoid overplumbing and pounding of masonry corners and jambs after setting position. After mortar has set, if adjustment is required, remove mortar and replace with new mortar. Install masonry wall base anchors in masonry foundation walls to line up with voids in masonry walls above as indicated on Drawings. Solidly fill voids between anchors and masonry with mortar. Provide exterior inspection ports in cavity walls by leaving out every 3rd block of first course over all dampproof courses and flashings until wall panel supported by that course of units is constructed and reviewed. Clean cavity and obtain Consultant's review prior to filling inspection ports to match adjacent masonry. Dampproof Coursing of Exterior Walls: 3.3.14.1. Install dampproof course where indicated on Drawings. If not fully indicated, install in locations as follows and as specified hereafter: 3.3.14.1.1. 3.3.14.1.2. Below second exterior block masonry course above new grade line. Below first masonry course of inner wythe at floors on grade. Extend dampproof coursing through full thickness of inner wythe.
3.3.10. 3.3.11. 3.3.12. 3.3.13.
3.3.14.
3.3.14.2. Provide corner flashing on inner wythe exterior corner to prevent water or moisture penetration on masonry. Apply as recommended by manufacturer and compatible with adjacent materials. 3.3.14.3. In non-cavity wall install flashing through full thickness of wall to provide dampproofing in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 3.3.14.4. Install flashings to provide continuous waterproofing flashing in wall except where such courses occur over openings in walls extend them past opening minimum of 200 mm (8") and turn up minimum 150 mm (6") at each end to create waterproof dam to prevent water draining into cavity. End dam where flashings terminate at an opening. 3.3.15. 3.3.16. Dampproof coursing of Interior Partitions: Below first masonry course of inner wythe at floors on grade. Extend dampproofing through full thickness of inner wythe. Laying Concrete Block: 3.3.16.1. Do not wet concrete block before laying. Lay first course of block work in full beds of mortar with joints of uniform thickness. Provide 100% solid blocks at following locations: 3.3.16.1.1. 3.3.16.1.2. 3.3.16.1.3. 3.3.16.1.4. top course of interior block walls and block back-up wythes. at sills of openings e.g. windows, louvers, etc. top course of block below beams, joists and lintels bearing on walls. at top of parapet walls.
3.3.16.2. Provide square end blocks at jambs of openings.
PAGE 04 20 00 - 9
3.3.16.3. Provide concrete masonry units with face shells and end joints fully filled with mortar. Do not slush mortar into joints. 3.3.16.4. Provide damming and grout fill to vertical concrete block wall cavities at control joints and at end wall dovetail anchorages. 3.3.16.5. Extend block partitions, both fire rated and non-fire rated, up to within 25 mm (1") of underside of structure above unless otherwise indicated, to allow for structural deflection. 3.3.16.6. Where gypsum board is applied directly to block walls, level walls to 3 mm in 3000 mm (1/8 in 10'). 3.3.17. Concrete Block Lintels: 3.3.17.1. Unless indicated otherwise on Structural Drawings, provide concrete block lintels over openings in masonry walls. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Drawings for location of ducts and equipment mounted in or projecting through masonry walls. Refer to Structural Drawings for Lintel Schedules. 3.3.17.2. Unless otherwise noted in Door [and Frame] Schedule, set precast U-shaped reinforced block lintels for full thickness of wall plus minimum 200 mm (8") bearing. Provide reinforcement as indicated on Structural Drawings. 3.3.17.3. Fill lintels with concrete and leave shoring in place for minimum 10 Days before removal. 3.3.17.4. Set concrete blocks over lintel unit in a full mortar bedding. 3.3.18. Lateral Support Angles: 3.3.18.1. Install lateral support angles to underside of structure, at 2000 mm (6' - 6") oc, for lateral stability of interior masonry walls. 3.3.18.2. Install lateral supports at either horizontal or vertical intervals spaced at not more than: 3.3.18.2.1. 3.3.18.2.2. 3.3.18.2.3. 3.3.19. Joint Tooling: 3.3.19.1. Provide joints in masonry, firmly pointed, compacted and tooled. 3.3.19.2. Exterior Masonry Joint Tooling: 3.3.19.2.1. 3.3.19.2.1.1. 3.3.19.2.1.2. Concrete Block: Exposed: Concave joints. Concealed: Flush joints. 20 x wall thickness for solid wall of solid units. 18 x wall thickness for solid wall of hollow units. 36 x wall thickness for partitions.
3.3.19.3. Interior Masonry Joint Tooling: 3.3.19.3.1. 3.3.19.3.1.1. 3.3.19.3.1.2. Concrete Block: Exposed: Concave joints. Concealed: Flush joints.
PAGE 04 20 00 - 10
3.3.20. Built-In Work:
3.3.20.1. Solidly build items of hollow metal work and miscellaneous metal work, including but not limited to grilles, hose cabinets, electrical panels into masonry work, and ensure they are set square and true in walls and partitions. 3.3.20.2. Cut for and build into masonry, anchors, sleeves, inserts, reglets, piping, conduit, outlet boxes, metal flashings and leave chases, slots or openings required for fixing of work of other Sections. Build chases into masonry walls; do not cut. 3.3.20.3. Firestopping and Smoke Seal: Firestopping and smoke seals around penetrations, at control joints and deflection spaces in fire separations shall be part of work of Section 07 84 00. Provide assistance as required to trade performing firestopping. 3.3.20.4. Access Doors: Install access doors and panels supplied as part of work of Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27 and 28. 3.3.21. Continuous Grouting: 3.3.21.1. Coordinate continuous grouting with Section 03 30 00 and Section 04 20 00 respectively. 3.3.21.2. Comply with manufacturers recommendations for surface preparation, cleaning, forming, mixing, placement and curing of grout. 3.3.21.3. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C305 requirements. 3.3.21.4. Provide grouting employing established procedures recommended by manufacturers. Use minimum water required to produce placement consistency. 3.3.21.5. Grout pressed steel door, screen and sidelight frames in masonry and concrete fire rated walls solid with grout. Do not use pumped slurry method to perform grouting. 3.3.22. Control Joints: 3.3.22.1. Provide vertical control joints in masonry walls where indicated and as detailed on Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, provide vertical and horizontal control joints as follows: 3.3.22.1.1. 3.3.22.1.2. 3.3.22.1.3. 3.3.22.1.4. 3.3.22.1.5. 3.3.22.1.6. 3.3.22.1.7. 3.3.23. at column grid locations. at abrupt changes in wall height. at changes in wall thickness, such as those at pipe or duct chases and those adjacent to columns or pilasters. above joints in foundations and floors. below joints in roofs and floors that bear on wall. at a distance of not over 1/2 allowable joint spacing from bonded intersections or corners. at 1 or both sides of door and window openings unless other crack control measures are used, such as joint reinforcement or bond beams.
Movement/Expansion Joints: Provide vertical movement/expansion joints in masonry walls where indicated and as detailed on Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, provide vertical and horizontal control joints as follows: 3.3.23.1. below shelf angle supports.
PAGE 04 20 00 - 11
3.3.23.2. near changes in wall direction (such as building corners). 3.3.23.3. at changes of building height. 3.3.23.4. at changes in wall thickness. 3.3.23.5. periodically along continuous lengths of wall. 3.3.23.6. at wall openings (such as windows and doors) and 3.3.23.7. at changes of building materials. 3.3.23.8. provide slip plane under steel angles and plates. 3.3.24. Masonry Reinforcement:
3.3.24.1. Install masonry connectors and masonry reinforcement in accordance with CSA A370 and CSA A371. 3.3.24.2. Provide block reinforcement in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Reinforce all blockwork. 3.3.24.3. Supervise and coordinate installation of anchors. 3.3.24.4. Reinforce load bearing interior masonry partitions every alternate horizontal joint with continuous block reinforcing. 3.3.25. 3.3.26. Beams, Shelf Angles, Shelf Angle Brackets and Spacers: Install bearing plates and pads, angles, beams, shelf angles and spacers accurately in position. Engineered Masonry: Engineered masonry shall conform to CSA A371 and CSA S304.1 and to details as indicated on Structural Drawings.
3.4.
3.4.1.
REPAIR
Repointing and Tuckpointing: Repoint defective joints as follows: 3.4.1.1. Cut back joints 13 mm (1/2") taking care not to damage units. Remove dust and loose materials by brushing or by water jet. If water jet is used, allow excess water to drain before repointing. Repoint with same mix and colour as original. Pack mortar tightly in thin layers and tool joint to match non-defective joints.
3.4.1.2. 3.4.1.3.
3.5.
3.5.1.

Non-Conforming Work: 3.5.1.1. 3.5.1.2. 3.5.1.3. Replace damaged work which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, restored or cleaned, to satisfaction of Consultant at no cost to Owner. Replace masonry units stained or chipped, or materials affected by inadequate protection. Remove and replace work of this Section damaged by frost and freezing.
PAGE 04 20 00 - 12
3.6.1.
CLEANING
Obtain cleaning materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and block manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and verify cleaning procedures outlined in CSA A371 with 2 manufacturers. Test sample area, 10 m (100 sq ft), to judge effectiveness of cleaning procedures and obtain Consultant's approval. Keep wall clean and free of mortar stains during laying. Allow mortar droppings which adhere to wall to dry out but not set. Then rub with small piece of masonry followed by brushing to remove all traces. On completion of masonry construction, after mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry thoroughly. Protect windows, trim and metal from cleaning agents. Remove mortar with wood paddles and scrapers before wetting. Saturate masonry with clean water and flush off loose mortar and dirt. Clean blockwork using water, scrubbing brushes and wood paddles only. Clean masonry to be left exposed, using procedures as outlined herein and, where this is inadequate, try following recommendations outlined in BIAs Technical Note No. 20, June 2006. Should these methods prove inadequate consult masonry manufacturer before undertaking unusual cleaning procedures and obtain Consultant's prior consent. Clean adjacent surfaces completely, which have been soiled or otherwise marred.
3.6.2.
3.6.3. 3.6.4.
3.6.5. 3.6.6. 3.6.7.
3.7.
3.7.1. 3.7.2. 3.7.3.
PROTECTION
Protect masonry from absorbing water from precipitation and condensation. Keep masonry materials and Products completely free from frost, snow and ice. Protect masonry from absorbing water from precipitation and condensation.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 04 20 00 - 13
1.1.1.
SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide metal fabrications including but not limited to following: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. 1.2.1.5. 1.2.1.6. 1.2.1.7. 1.2.1.8. steel ladders and cages. overhead door jambs and headers. overhead door track and operator anchorage. lateral support for masonry walls (where not covered by structural). metal supports associated with architectural woodwork/countertops. suspended toilet partition supports. steel framing, auxiliary support steel and guide-rail brackets for elevators. miscellaneous sections and framing.
1.2.2.
Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. 1.2.2.3. 1.2.2.4. 1.2.2.5. 1.2.2.6. 1.2.2.7. 1.2.2.8. 1.2.2.9. Installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications in concrete: Section 03 10 00, Concrete Formwork and Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. Concrete fill in stair treads, risers and landings: Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. Installation of metal fabrications in masonry: Section 04 20 00, Masonry Units. Provision of recessed floor grilles: Division 05, Metals. Provision of building structural steel: Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel. Provision of metal decking: Section 05 30 00, Metal Decking. Provision of metal pan stairs, landings and balustrades: Section 05 51 00, Metal Stairs and Balustrades. Provision of architectural woodwork: Section 06 40 00, Architectural Woodwork. Provision of finish paint system: Section 09 91 00, Painting.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Reference Standards: 1.3.1.1. ANSI/UL 263-03(07) - Fire Resistance Ratings
PAGE 05 50 00 - 1
1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. 1.3.1.4. 1.3.1.5. 1.3.1.6. 1.3.1.7. ASTM A123/A123M-09 ASTM A153/A153M-09 ASTM A167-99(09) ASTM A307-10 ASTM A325M-09 ASTM A653/A653M-10
- Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength - Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints [Metric] - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials - Standard Test Methods for Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Metric Bolts, Screws, and Studs - Standard Specification for Style 1 Stainless Steel Metric Nuts - Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use - Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating - Protective Coatings for Metals
1.3.1.8. 1.3.1.9.
ASTM B117-09 ASTM E119-11a
1.3.1.10. ASTM E736-00(11) 1.3.1.11. ASTM F738M-02(08) 1.3.1.12. ASTM F836M-02(10) 1.3.1.13. ASTM F844-07a 1.3.1.14. CAN/CGSB-1.181-99 1.3.1.15. CAN/CGSB-85.10-99
1.3.1.16. CSA G40.20/G40.21-04(09) - General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel 1.3.1.17. CSA W48-06 1.3.1.18. CSA W59-03(08) 1.3.1.19. CSA W117.2-06 - Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding - Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) - Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes
1.4.
1.4.1.
SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for work of this Section in accordance with Section 01 30 00. In addition to minimum requirements indicate following: 1.4.1.1. 1.4.1.2. 1.4.1.3. 1.4.1.4. large scale details of members, materials and connections. jointing details. methods of setting, sealing, securing, anchorage. field connections.
PAGE 05 50 00 - 2
1.4.1.5.
Ensure a registered structural engineer specified herein is responsible for: 1.4.1.5.1. 1.4.1.5.2. production and review of Shop Drawings. stamping and signing each Shop Drawing and any associated calculations performed.
1.4.1.6.
Submit Shop Drawings for following work bearing the stamp of a Professional Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario: 1.4.1.6.1. ladders.
1.4.2.
Samples: Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Submit following samples in sizes indicated: 1.4.2.1. 1.4.2.2. extruded and formed metals: minimum 300 mm (12") long. metal sheet: minimum 300 mm (12") square and of specified thickness.
1.5.
1.5.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications: 1.5.1.1. Installers: Provide work of this Section executed by competent installers with minimum 5 years experience in the application of Products, systems and assemblies specified and with approval and training of the Product manufacturers. Welding: Provide welding in accordance with CSA W59 performed by a fabricator and mechanics fully approved by the Canadian Welding Bureau. Licensed Professionals: Employ a full time professional structural engineer carrying minimum $2,000,000.00 professional liability insurance and is registered in the Province of Ontario.
1.5.1.2. 1.5.1.3.
1.5.2.
Structural Design and Inspection: 1.5.2.1. Design following: 1.5.2.1.1. ladders.
1.5.3.
Certifications: 1.5.3.1. Submit certification from registered professional structural Engineer registered in Province of Ontario, who shall affix his/her seal and signature to certificate, stating structure is capable of supporting its own weight and specified live loads. Welders employed on this Project may be asked by Consultant at any time for their welding certificate.
1.5.3.2.
1.6.
1.6.1.

Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Coordinate deliveries to comply with construction schedule and arrange ahead for strategic off-the-ground, undercover storage locations. Do not load areas beyond the designed limits. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1.6.2.1. Handle and store metal materials at job site in such a manner to prevent damage to other materials, (to existing buildings) or property.
1.6.2.
PAGE 05 50 00 - 3
1.6.2.2.
Handle components with care, and provide protection for surfaces against marring or other damage. Ship and store members with cardboard or other resilient spacers between surfaces. Use lifting chokers of material that will not damage surface of steel members.

2.1.1.
MATERIALS
Description 2.1.1.1. Regulatory Requirements: Provide a Pre-Start Health and Safety Review in accordance with the Occupational Health and Safety Act (Ontario), Regulation 851, as amended. Refer to Section 01 40 00 for further requirements.
2.1.2.
Performance/Design Criteria: 2.1.2.1. Structural Design: Employ a registered structural engineer specified herein to: 2.1.2.1.1. 2.1.2.1.2. design components performance. for work of this Section requiring structural
be responsible for determining sizes, yield strengths, gauge thicknesses and joint spacing to allow thermal movement and loading of components in accordance with applicable codes and regulations.
2.1.3. 2.1.4. 2.1.5.
Structural Shapes, Plates, Etc.: New material conforming to CSA G40.20/G40.21, Grade 300W. Hollow Structural Sections: New material conforming to CSA G40.20/G40.21, Grade 350W, Class H. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 304 alloy with exposed surfaces having No. 4 polished finish. Sizes as required to meet design requirements: 2.1.5.1. Provide highest architectural quality in various forms, straight and true. Ensure there are no scratches, scars, creases, buckles, ripples or chatter marks. Provide finish surfaces suitable for polishing where required. Ensure finished surfaces exposed to view are free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, oil-canning, stains, discolourations or other imperfections. Refer to Drawings for stainless steel work.
2.1.5.2. 2.1.6. 2.1.7. 2.1.8.
Structural Aluminum: to CSA HA series - M, Type 6061-T6, clear anodized. Welding Materials: Conforming to CSA W48 and CSA W59. High Strength Bolts: 2.1.8.1. 2.1.8.2. 2.1.8.3. 2.1.8.4. Supply bolts, nuts and washers conforming to ASTM A325M. Supply each type and size of bolt and nut of same manufacture and of same lot. Bolts: Heavy, hexagon head high strength structural bolts, of standard size, of lengths required for thickness of members joined and for type of connection. Nuts: Heavy hexagon semi-finished nuts. Washers: Flat and smooth hardened washers, quenched and tempered to suit applications and conforms to ASTM F844. Provide AISI Type 304 stainless steel washers at exterior locations. Stainless Steel Bolts: To suit applications and conforms to ASTM F738M. Stainless Steel Nuts: To suit applications and conforms to ASTM F836M.
2.1.8.5. 2.1.8.6.
PAGE 05 50 00 - 4
2.1.8.7.
Lock Washers: Helical spring type steel lock washers to suit applications and conforms to Federal specification FF-W-84. Provide AISI Type 304 stainless steel lock washers at exterior locations. Exterior Vandal Resistant Fasteners: AISI Type 304 stainless steel, dual pin type vandal resistant fasteners to suit applications and acceptable to Consultant. Security Fasteners: Button head "Torx Plus R" screw tamper resistant #10, 25 mm (1") long 2 per glass stop minimum stainless steel machine screws.
2.1.8.8. 2.1.8.9. 2.1.9.
Common or Ordinary Bolts and Anchor Bolts: Unfinished bolts conforming to ASTM A307, Grade A, with hexagon heads and nuts where exposed in the finish work. Supply common bolts of lengths required to suit thickness of material being joined, but not projecting more than 6 mm (1/4") beyond nut, without the use of washers. Supply anchor bolts of lengths noted, but projecting not less than 13 mm (1/2") beyond nut unless otherwise noted. Dielectric Separator: Provide best grade, quick drying non-staining alkali resistant bituminous paint or epoxy resin solution or membrane type to acceptance of Consultant. Galvanized Primer Paint: Zinc rich conforming to CAN/CGSB-1.181 for new galvanized metal. High Performance Corrosion Protection for Perimeter Steel: 1 component, moisture cured, micaceous iron oxide/zinc filled primer, UL Classified in accordance with ANSI/UL 263 (ASTM E119), corrosion protection in accordance with ASTM B117, meeting Class B Slip Certification in accordance with American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) requirements for slip critical bolted connections, tested in accordance with ASTM E736 for its suitability for application of primer over steel to receive sprayed fireproofing, Series 394, PerimePrime by Tnemec Company Incorporated; www.tnemec.com. Galvanizing: Hot dipped galvanizing with minimum zinc coating of 600 g/m2. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Supply 0.91 mm (20 ga) core thickness commercial quality to ASTM A653/A653M, CS Type A, with Z275 (G90) zinc coating designation to ASTM A653/A653M. Fabrication: 2.1.15.1. Fabricate each item of work of this Section in accordance with following general requirements: 2.1.15.1.1. 2.1.15.1.2. 2.1.15.1.3. 2.1.15.1.4. 2.1.15.1.5. 2.1.15.1.6. members square and straight. members plumb and true. joints accurately and tightly fitted. intersecting members in true, flush planes. fasteners concealed. steel connections.
2.1.10. 2.1.11. 2.1.12.
2.1.13. 2.1.14. 2.1.15.
2.1.15.2. Fabricate, fit and assemble work in shop where possible. Where shop fabrication is not possible, make trial assembly in shop. 2.1.15.3. Provide hangers, rods, bars, bolts, anchors, brackets, rivets, bearing plates and bracing, fitting, drilling, stopping, soldering, as required for a complete assembly. 2.1.15.4. Isolate dissimilar metals including stainless steel and galvanized steel using dielectric separator to prevent galvanic corrosion. 2.1.15.5. Weld connections unless otherwise indicated.
PAGE 05 50 00 - 5
2.1.15.6. Shop Welding: 2.1.15.6.1.
Execute welding to avoid damage or distortion to the Work. Should there be, in the opinion of Consultant or Inspection Company, doubt as to adequacy of welds, they shall be tested for efficiency and any work not meeting Standards be removed and replaced with new work satisfactory to Consultant. Carry out welding in accordance with following standards: CSA W48 CSA W59 CSA W117.2 - for Electrodes (If rods are used, only coated rods are allowed). - for design of connections and workmanship. - for safety.
2.1.15.6.1.1. 2.1.15.6.1.2. 2.1.15.6.1.3. 2.1.15.6.2.
Thoroughly clean welded joints and steel exposed for a sufficient space to properly perform welding operation. Neatly finish welds. Ensure welds exposed to view and finish painted are continuous and ground smooth.
2.1.15.7. Provide exposed metal fastenings and accessories of same material, texture, colour and finish as base metal to which they are applied or fastened. 2.1.16. Finishes: 2.1.16.1. Cleaning and Shop Painting: 2.1.16.1.1. 2.1.16.1.2. Clean steel to SSPC-SP 6 and remove loose mill scale, weld flux and splatter. Shop prime steel with 1 coat of primer paint to dry film thickness of 0.025 mm (1 mil). Paint on dry surfaces, free from rust, scale and grease. Do not paint when temperature is lower than 7 deg C (45 deg F). Paint items under cover and leave under cover until primer is dry. Follow paint manufacturer's recommendations regarding application methods, equipment, temperature and humidity conditions. Shop prime non galvanized perimeter steel members and structural steel members to receive sprayed fire resistive materials with 1 coat of high performance corrosion protection primer to dry film thickness of 0.025 mm (1 mil). Paint on dry surfaces, free from rust, scale or grease. Do not paint when temperature is lower than 7 deg C (45 deg F). Paint items under cover and leave under cover until primer is dry. Follow paint manufacturer's recommendations regarding application methods, equipment, temperature and humidity conditions. Shop prime galvanized steel in accordance with CAN/CGSB-85.10. Clean but do not paint surfaces being welded in the field and surfaces in contact after assembly.
2.1.16.1.3.
2.1.16.1.4. 2.1.16.1.5.
2.1.16.2. Hot Dip Galvanizing: 2.1.16.2.1. After fabrication, hot dip galvanize specific miscellaneous steel items noted on Drawings and/or called for herein. Plug relief vents air tight. After galvanizing, remove plugs, ream holes to proper size and re-tap threads. Straighten shapes and assemblies true to line and plane after galvanizing. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces with "Galvafroid" by W.R. Meadows in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions.
PAGE 05 50 00 - 6
2.1.16.2.2.
Galvanize members exposed to elements when in final location; members embedded on exterior side of exterior walls; members imbedded in concrete; members specified in this Section or noted on Drawings. Hot-dip galvanize members, in accordance with requirements of following ASTM standards, with minimum coating weights or thicknesses as specified: Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips: ASTM A123/A123M; average weight of zinc coating per sq/ft of actual surface, for 4.8 mm (3/16") and less thickness members 2 ounces, for 6 mm (1/4") and heavier members 2.3 ounces. Iron and Steel Hardware: ASTM A153/A153M; minimum weight of zinc coating, in ounces per sq ft of surface shall be in accordance with Table 1 of ASTM A153/A153M, for the various classes of materials used on the Project. Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M; weight of zinc coating, per sq ft on both sides of sheet. Coating designation Z275 (G90), minimized spangle and chemically treated.
2.1.16.2.3.
2.1.16.2.3.1.
2.1.16.2.3.2.
2.1.16.2.3.3.

3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
3.1.2.
3.2.
3.2.1. 3.2.2. 3.2.3. 3.2.4.
INSTALLATION
Erect work of this Section plumb, square, true and level. Securely anchor work of this Section and rivet, weld or bolt to structural framing of the building. Where secured to concrete, provide bolts for setting in concrete. Provide expansion bolt supports to masonry. Provide necessary fitting, setting and cutting required in connection with the fitting of work of this Section to other parts of the Work. Field Painting: Paint bolt heads, washers, nuts, field welds and previously unpainted items. Touch up with matching paint, shop primer damaged during transit and installation.
3.3.
3.3.1.

Site Tests and Inspections: 3.3.1.1. Structural Inspection: Ensure a registered structural engineer specified herein inspects work of this Section during erection/installation.
3.3.2.
Non-Conforming Work: Replace damaged work which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, restored or cleaned, to satisfaction of Consultant at no cost to Owner.
3.4.
3.4.1.
CLEANING
On completion of installation, carefully clean metal work.
PAGE 05 50 00 - 7
3.5.1.
SCHEDULES
STEEL LADDERS 3.5.1.1. Provide galvanized steel ladders for following locations: 3.5.1.1.1. 3.5.1.1.2. 3.5.1.2. 3.5.1.3. 3.5.1.4. One ladder in elevator pit from 1500 mm (5') above last floor served to bottom of pit. On vertical exterior walls for roof access where indicated.
Obtain exact locations of ladders from the Consultant where not otherwise indicated. Provide 6 mm (1/4") galvanized steel checker plate platform and 38 mm x 38 mm x 6 mm (1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/4") angle framing for ladders. Provide a hot dip galvanized steel safety cage from 2200 mm (7' - 0") from the finished roof to 900 mm (36") above the parapet where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.5.2.
OVERHEAD DOOR JAMBS AND HEADERS 3.5.2.1. 3.5.2.2. Provide HSS, channel framing and 6 mm (1/4") plate steel closures to profile as indicated. Finish: Galvanized steel.
3.5.3.
OVERHEAD DOOR TRACK AND OPERATOR ANCHORAGE 3.5.3.1. 3.5.3.2. Provide inside jamb extensions, centre spring mount and motor supports in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Finish: Prime finish.
3.5.4.
LATERAL SUPPORTS FOR MASONRY WALLS 3.5.4.1. Lateral Support of Interior Masonry Walls: Supply 75 mm x 75 mm x 6 mm (3" x 3" x 1/4") steel angles 300 mm (12") long to be secured to underside of structure as part of the work of Section 04 20 00. Finish: Galvanized.
3.5.4.2. 3.5.5.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK/COUNTER TOP SUPPORTS 3.5.5.1. 3.5.5.2. Provide miscellaneous steel items required as part of the work of Section 06 40 00, e.g.: valance supports, vanity support brackets or framing. Finish: prime finish.
3.5.6.
SUSPENDED TOILET PARTITION SUPPORTS 3.5.6.1. 3.5.6.2. Provide as detailed. Finish: alkyd prime painted.
3.5.7.
PROVISION OF STEEL FRAMING, AUXILIARY SUPPORT STEEL AND GUIDE-RAIL BRACKETS FOR ELEVATORS 3.5.7.1. 3.5.7.2. 3.5.7.3. Provide steel framing, auxiliary support steel and guide-rail brackets in size and quantity recommended by manufacturer. Install as directed. Finish: Galvanized.
PAGE 05 50 00 - 8
3.5.8. MISCELLANEOUS SECTIONS AND FRAMING 3.5.8.1.
Provide miscellaneous steel sections which are not shown or identified on Structural Drawings, or specified under another Section of Specifications.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 05 50 00 - 9
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 05 51 00 Project No: 2011.008 METAL STAIRS AND BALUSTRADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.
1.1.1.
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide steel stairs and railings including but not limited to following: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. steel stairs with metal pan treads and landings. support steel, hangers, posts, reinforced steel pan construction for treads, main and intermediate landings, steel railings, face plate trim and closure plates at landings. metal pan stair balustrades. wall and floor mounted balustrades and fixings to main structure.
1.2.2.
Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. 1.2.2.3. 1.2.2.4. 1.2.2.5. 1.2.2.6. Concrete fill in stair treads, risers and landings and installation of metal fabrications in concrete walls: Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. Installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications in masonry: Section 04 20 00, Masonry Units. Building structural steel: Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel. Provision of metal decking: Section 05 30 00, Metal Deck. Temporary wood treads and landings: Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry. Provision of finish paint system: Section 09 91 00, Painting.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. MSDS: Material Safety Data Sheets. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (formerly known as Steel Structures Painting Council); www.sspc.org.
1.3.2.
Reference Standards: 1.3.2.1. 1.3.2.2. 1.3.2.3. ASTM A53/A53M-10 ASTM A307-10 ASTM A325M-09 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength [Metric]
PAGE 02 41 00 - 1
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 05 51 00 Project No: 2011.008 METAL STAIRS AND BALUSTRADES
1.3.2.4. ASTM A653/A653M-10 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process - Cold Curing, Gloss Epoxy Coating - High Build, Gloss, Epoxy Coating - Cold Curing Epoxy Primer - Inorganic Zinc Coating - General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel - Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding - Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) - Commercial Blast Cleaning - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning - Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning
1.3.2.5. 1.3.2.6. 1.3.2.7. 1.3.2.8. 1.3.2.9.
CAN/CGSB-1.146-99 CAN/CGSB-1.153-00 CAN/CGSB-1.165-04 CAN/CGSB-1.171-98 CSA G40.20/G40.21M-04
1.3.2.10. CSA W48-06 1.3.2.11. CSA W59-03(08) 1.3.2.12. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3 1.3.2.13. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4 1.3.2.14. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2
1.4.
1.4.1.
SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings: 1.4.1.1. Submit Shop Drawings of the work of this Section in accordance with Section 01 30 00. In addition to minimum requirements indicate following: 1.4.1.1.1. 1.4.1.1.2. 1.4.1.1.3. 1.4.1.1.4. 1.4.1.2. large scale details of members, materials and connections, attachments, reinforcing, anchorage and location of exposed fastenings. jointing details. methods of setting, sealing, securing, anchorage. field connections.
1.4.1.3.
Submit Shop Drawings for the following work bearing the stamp of a Professional Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario: 1.4.1.3.1. 1.4.1.3.2. steel stairs. handrails and balustrades.
PAGE 02 41 00 - 2
1.4.2. Samples: Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Submit following samples in sizes indicated: 1.4.2.1. Steel Sheet: minimum 300 mm (12") square and of specified thickness.
1.5.
1.5.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications: 1.5.1.1. Installers: Provide work of this Section executed by competent installers with minimum 5 years experience in the application of Products, systems and assemblies specified and with approval and training of the Product manufacturers. Welding: Provide welding in accordance with CSA W59 performed by a fabricator and mechanics fully approved by the Canadian Welding Bureau. Licensed Professionals: Employ a full time professional structural engineer carrying minimum $2,000,000.00 professional liability insurance and is registered in the Province of Ontario.
1.5.1.2. 1.5.1.3.
1.5.2.
Structural Design and Inspection: 1.5.2.1. Design following without limitations: 1.5.2.1.1. 1.5.2.1.2. stairs including landings and supports. balustrades, handrails and railings.
1.5.3.
Certifications: Submit certification from registered professional structural engineer carrying a minimum $2,000,000.00 professional liability insurance and is registered in Province of Ontario, who shall affix his/her seal and signature to certificate, stating steel stairs and railings is capable of supporting its own weight and specified live loads.
1.6.
1.6.1.

Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Coordinate deliveries to comply with construction schedule and arrange ahead for strategic off-the-ground, undercover storage locations. Do not load areas beyond the designed limits. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1.6.2.1. 1.6.2.2. Handle and store metal materials at job site in such a manner to prevent damage to other materials, to existing buildings or property. Handle components with care, and provide protection for surfaces against marring or other damage. Ship and store members with cardboard or other resilient spacers between surfaces. Use lifting chokers of material which will not damage surface of steel members.
1.6.2.

2.1.1.
MATERIALS
Performance/Design Criteria: 2.1.1.1. Structural Design: Employ a registered structural engineer specified herein to: 2.1.1.1.1. design components performance. for work of this Section requiring structural
PAGE 02 41 00 - 3
2.1.1.1.2. be responsible for determining sizes, yield strengths, gauge thicknesses and joint spacing to allow thermal movement and loading of components in accordance with applicable codes and regulations.
2.1.2. 2.1.3. 2.1.4. 2.1.5.
Structural Shapes, Plates, Etc.: New material conforming to CSA G40.20/G40.21, Grade 350W. Hollow Structural Sections: New material conforming to CSA G40.20/G40.21, Grade 350W, Class H. Welding Materials: Conforming to CSA W48 and CSA W59. High Strength Bolts: 2.1.5.1. 2.1.5.2. 2.1.5.3. 2.1.5.4. Supply bolts, nuts and washers conforming with ASTM A325M. Supply each type and size of bolt and nut of same manufacture and of same lot. Bolts: Heavy, hexagon head high strength structural bolts, of standard size, of lengths required for thick-ness of members joined and for type of connection. Nuts: Heavy hexagon semi-finished nuts. Washers: Flat and smooth hardened washers, quenched and tempered.
2.1.6.
Common or Ordinary Bolts and Anchor Bolts: Unfinished bolts conforming with ASTM A307, Grade A, with hexagon heads and nuts where exposed in the finish work. Supply common bolts of lengths required to suit thickness of material being joined, but not projecting more than 6 mm (1/4") beyond nut, without the use of washers. Supply anchor bolts of lengths noted, but projecting not less than 13 mm (1/2") beyond nut unless otherwise noted. Primer Paint: Supply "MR053" by Selectone or DuPont "209 Series" as distributed by SWT. Steel Pipe Handrails: Conforming to ASTM A53/A53M, Type "S", Schedule 40, Grade A steel pipe of sizes shown. Sheet Steel: Supply 0.91 mm (20 ga) core thickness commercial quality to ASTM A653/A653M, Grade A. Non-Slip Inserts: 9 mm x 9 mm x 1.21 mm (3/8" x 3/8" x 18 ga) galvanized steel strips, Super Grit by Wooster Products Inc., or Stafast Channel by Domus Engineering Company. Fabrication: 2.1.11.1. Fabricate each item of work of this Section in accordance with following general requirements: 2.1.11.1.1. 2.1.11.1.2. 2.1.11.1.3. 2.1.11.1.4. 2.1.11.1.5. 2.1.11.1.6. members square and straight. members plumb and true. joints accurately and tightly fitted. intersecting members in true, flush planes. fasteners concealed. steel connections.
2.1.7. 2.1.8. 2.1.9. 2.1.10. 2.1.11.
2.1.11.2. Fabricate, fit and assemble work in shop where possible. Where shop fabrication is not possible, make trial assembly in shop.
PAGE 02 41 00 - 4
2.1.11.3. Provide hot rolled structural steel channel stringers, other framing members, steel shapes; channels, angles and plates. Provide treads, risers, soffits, metal pans and landings as detailed. Ensure treads, landings, metal pans and risers are 3 mm (1/8") thick minimum, unless otherwise indicated. Provide stair handrails and pickets spaced as shown. Provide wall railings to match balustrade railings complete with brackets. 2.1.11.4. Provide hangers, rods, bars, bolts, anchors, brackets, rivets, bearing plates and bracing, fitting, drilling, stopping, soldering, as required for a complete assembly. 2.1.11.5. Insulate dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic corrosion. 2.1.11.6. Weld connections unless otherwise indicated: 2.1.11.6.1. 2.1.11.6.2. Provide exposed welds continuous. File and grind exposed welds smooth and flush.
2.1.11.7. Provide exposed metal fastenings and accessories of the same material, texture, colour and finish as the base metal to which they are applied or fastened. 2.1.12. Finishes: 2.1.12.1. Provide work of this Section free from: 2.1.12.1.1. 2.1.12.1.2. 2.1.12.1.3. wrinkles, waves, cracks or other defects which would reduce the strength or mar the appearance of finished work. distortion, weld splatter, weld burn and defects detrimental to appearance. File and grind marks and other imperfections to a smooth surface.
2.1.12.2. Touch-up surfaces damaged due to cutting, welding, threading and installation. 2.1.12.3. Do not provide trademarks or labels on exposed finished surfaces. 2.1.12.4. Interior Finish: Prime paint finish unless indicated otherwise. 2.1.12.4.1. 2.1.12.4.1.1. 2.1.12.4.1.1.1. 2.1.12.4.1.1.2. 2.1.12.4.1.1.3. 2.1.12.4.1.2. 2.1.12.4.2. 2.1.12.4.2.1. 2.1.12.4.2.2. 2.1.12.4.3. 2.1.12.4.3.1. 2.1.12.4.3.2. 2.1.12.4.3.3. Surface Preparation: Bare Ferrous Metal: Remove rust, grease, oil and scale. Provide SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3 Commercial sandblast. Provide SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2 Near White sandblast. Solvent wipe. Previously Primed Metal: Remove rust, oil, grease and loose paint. Repair shop prime coat and feather edges. Previously Galvanized Metal: Remove oils and passivation coatings. Provide SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4 Brush sandblast. Apply chemical pretreatment if necessary for good bond.
PAGE 02 41 00 - 5
2.1.12.4.3.4. Touch-up finish: 1.171. inorganic zinc rich primer conforming to CAN/CGSB-
2.1.12.5. Prime Paint Finish: 2.1.12.5.1. 2.1.12.5.2. 2.1.12.5.3. 2.1.12.5.4. Surface Preparation: As specified above. System: 1 coat CAN/CGSB-1.165-M. (0.051 mm (2mils)) Epoxy: Conform to
Apply prime finish in shop. Touch-up on site with same material.
2.1.12.6. Shop Epoxy Finish: 2.1.12.6.1. 2.1.12.6.2. 2.1.12.6.2.1. 2.1.12.6.2.2. 2.1.12.6.2.3. 2.1.12.6.2.4. 2.1.12.6.3. 2.1.12.6.4. Surface Preparation: As specified above. Apply epoxy finish in shop. Surface preparation to SSPS-SP 10. Epoxy primer: CAN/CGSB-1.165-M inorganic. Epoxy finish coat: CAN/CGSB-1.146 (0.076 mm (3 mils/coat)). Epoxy finish coat: CAN/CGSB-1.153 (0.127 mm - 0.152 mm (5 - 6 mils/coat)). Touch-up on site with sanded perimeter and epoxy finish coat. Colour to be selected by Consultant.

3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
3.1.2.
3.2.
3.2.1.
INSTALLATION
Where fastenings, anchors, or angles/plates for welding have to be built in by other trades, supply necessary templates, instructions and supervise to ensure satisfactory installation. Provide weld plates and anchorages for building in by other Sections as indicated and required. Erect treads, metal pans, stringers, hanger assemblies, landings, closures, balustrades and handrails of this Section plumb, square, true and level. Weld connections between handrails and balusters and in lengths of handrails continuously. Weld balustrades to steel stairs. Secure wall handrails to walls. Ensure ends of tube railings have closure plates continuously welded to railing. Securely anchor work of this Section and rivet, weld or bolt to structural framing of the building. Where secured to concrete, provide bolts for setting in concrete. Provide expansion bolt supports to masonry.
3.2.2. 3.2.3. 3.2.4. 3.2.5.
PAGE 02 41 00 - 6
3.2.6. 3.2.7. 3.2.8. 3.2.9. 3.2.10. 3.2.11. 3.2.12. Provide 1 coat of bituminous paint to metal surfaces in contact with concrete, masonry or dissimilar metals. Grind off surplus welding material smooth and flush. Ensure internal and external corners have sharp lines. Remove grind marks. Provide necessary fitting, setting and cutting required in connection with the fitting of the work of this Section to other parts of the Work. Provide WWF 51 x 51 x MW9.1 x MW9.1 welded wire mesh reinforcement in tread pans, which are designated to receive concrete fill. Prior to filling tread pans with concrete install and secure-in-place, non-slip inserts (where stair finish is to be exposed concrete only). Provide renovation stair tread in locations shown on Drawings in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Erect stair work to line, plumb, square, true and level, with runs of stairs registering level with floor levels.
3.3.
3.3.1.

3.3.2.
3.4.
3.4.1.
CLEANING
On completion of installation, carefully clean metal work. Touch up damaged portions of primed finish coat where necessary.
3.5.
3.5.1.
SCHEDULES
METAL PAN STAIRS AND BALUSTRADE (INTERIOR) 3.5.1.1. Stringers: minimum 250 x 12.5 MC prime painted steel channel sections. 3.5.1.1.1. 3.5.1.1.2. 3.5.1.2. Stringer end cover plate: minimum 6 mm (1/4") continuous prime painted steel, welded. Finish: prime finish.
Tread and riser carrier bars (horizontal and vertical): minimum 30 mm x 30 mm x 6 mm (11/4" x 1-1/4" x 1/4") prime painted steel angles, welded to the steel stringers. 3.5.1.2.1. Finish: prime finish.
3.5.1.3.
Treads and landings: minimum 2.657 mm (12 ga) sheet steel, welded: 3.5.1.3.1. 3.5.1.3.2. 3.5.1.3.3. Finish: prime finish. Pan depth: 38 mm (1-1/2"). Projection: 25 mm (1").
PAGE 02 41 00 - 7
3.5.1.3.4. 3.5.1.3.5. 3.5.1.3.6. 3.5.1.4. Reinforce tread and landing nosings with 2 - 3.416 mm (10 ga) gusset plates. Provide concrete to fill metal pans and provide tile finish in locations shown on drawings. Do not provide non slip nosings on stairs where tile is to be applied. Refer to Drawings.
Risers: open/closed (as shown on Drawings), minimum 2.657 mm (12 ga) sheet steel, welded: 3.5.1.4.1. Finish: prime finish.
3.5.1.5.
Balustrade: 3.5.1.5.1. 3.5.1.5.2. 3.5.1.5.3. Balustrade Posts: minimum 38 mm (1-1/2") diameter. Balustrade Pickets: minimum 12 mm (1/2") diameter. Balustrade and Wall Bracket Finish: prime finish, epoxy finish.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 02 41 00 - 8
1.1.1.
SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide rough carpentry including but not limited to following: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. miscellaneous interior carpentry. temporary wood treads on steel stairs and landings. equipment mounting panels. roofing carpentry.
1.2.2.
Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. 1.2.2.3. 1.2.2.4. Provision of concrete formwork: Section 03 11 00, Concrete Formwork. Removal of temporary treads and landings: Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. Provision of steel pan stairs and landings to receive temporary wood infills: Section 05 51 00, Metal Stairs and Balustrades. Provision of ACM panels on fire rated plywood: Section 07 42 43, Aluminum Composite Metal Panel System.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. 1.3.1.4. 1.3.1.5. CCA: Chromated Copper Arsenate. MSDS: Material Safety Data Sheets. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org. ULC: Underwriters Laboratories of Canada; www.ulc.ca. UL: Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com.
1.3.2.
Definitions: 1.3.2.1. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 50 mm (2) nominal or greater but less than 125 mm (5) nominal in least dimension.
1.3.3.
Reference Standards: 1.3.3.1. 1.3.3.2. CSA O80 Series-08 CSA O121-08 - Wood Preservation - Douglas Fir Plywood
PAGE 06 10 00 - 1
1.3.3.3. CAN/ULC-S102-07
- Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies
1.4.
1.4.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Grading: 1.4.1.1. 1.4.1.2. Provide lumber bearing the grading stamps of an agency certified by the Canadian Lumber Standards Administration Board for identification. Provide "treated" and "fire treated" wood and plywood bearing the stamp of the Canadian Wood Preservers Bureau.
1.5.
1.5.1.

Storage and Handling Requirements: 1.5.1.1. 1.5.1.2. Store lumber in a dry place and protect from dampness and damage. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

2.1.1.
MATERIALS
Regulatory Requirements: Provide a Pre-Start Health and Safety Review in accordance with the Occupational Health and Safety Act (Ontario), Regulation 851, as amended. Refer to Section 01 40 00 for further requirements. Softwood Lumber: Of grades conforming to NLGAs "Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber", graded as follows: 2.1.2.1. 2.1.2.2. Light Framing: Species Group D, Standard Grade. Structural Light Framing: Species Group D, No. 1 Grade.
2.1.2.
2.1.3. 2.1.4. 2.1.5. 2.1.6. 2.1.7. 2.1.8. 2.1.9.
Hardwood Lumber: Of grades conforming to grading rules of U.S. National Hardwood Lumber Association, solid Yellow Birch, select or better. Concealed Framing Lumber: No. 2 White Pine, No. 2 Red Pine, or No. 1 Construction Eastern Spruce, Balsam Fir or Jack Pine, kiln dried, free from sap, shakes, splits, knots and other defects. Grounds, Nailing Strips and Blocking: No. 2 White Pine, No. 2 Red Pine, or No. 1 Construction Eastern Spruce, kiln dried, free from sap, shakes, splits, knots and other defects. Exterior Plywood: 19 mm (3/4") thick, waterproof, grade stamped exterior grade Douglas Fir plywood, select grade, unsanded conforming to CSA O121. Glue: Waterproof. Field Applied Wood Preservative: For field cut ends, supply Wolman End Cut by Koppers Company Inc. or same CCA preservative as used for shop impregnation. Rough Hardware: Supply rough hardware to frame and fix rough carpentry. This includes bolts, anchors, nails, expansion shields and other fastenings required. Hot dip galvanize hardware for exterior work; elsewhere, provide cadmium plated hardware. Provide spiral thread nails except as indicated otherwise.
PAGE 06 10 00 - 2
2.1.10. "Treated" Wood and Plywood (Decay and Termite Resistant):
2.1.10.1. Koppers Company Inc., Wolmanized, Distributed by Hickson Building Products Limited. 2.1.10.2. Timber Specialties K-33. 2.1.10.3. Provide vacuum/pressure impregnated lumber treated in accordance with CSA O80. 2.1.10.4. Retention/Penetration Standards: Conform to CSA O80. 2.1.10.5. Provide treated wood kiln dried to maximum 12% moisture content. 2.1.10.6. Cut end liquid wood preservative as recommended by manufacturer of treated wood. 2.1.11. "Fire Treated" Wood and Plywood: 2.1.11.1. Koppers Company Inc., Dricon, Distributed by Hickson Building Products Limited. 2.1.11.2. Timber Specialties Flame Proof LHC. 2.1.11.3. Flame Spread: Max 25 in 30 minutes in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102. 2.1.11.4. Provide fire treated wood kiln dried to max 15% moisture content. 2.1.11.5. Do not resurface or rip fire treated wood if it affects the ULC Label. 2.1.11.6. Provide fire treated material bearing the stamp of the Canadian Wood Preservers Bureau and the ULC stamp. 2.1.11.7. Fire Retardant Treated Lumber and Plywood: Pressure treated lumber and plywood with fire retardant chemicals to meet an UL/ULC FR-5 rating with a surface-burning characteristics rating of 25 or less for flamespread, fuel contributed and smoke developed. Ensure each piece of fire retardant treated lumber and plywood bears a ULC label or imprint attesting to this rating.

3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
3.1.2.
3.2.
3.2.1. 3.2.2. 3.2.3. 3.2.4. 3.2.5.
INSTALLATION
Properly erect the Work of this section with members accurately cut to size, closely fitted, well spiked and erected in a substantial manner, plumb, level, square and true to dimension. Locate joints over bearing or supporting surfaces. Provide running members full length wherever possible. Design for expansion and contraction of the materials. After cutting, drilling and fitting "treated" wood and plywood but before installation, apply 1 full coat of wood preservative to exposed surfaces, including ends of blocking, furring, nailers and rough carpentry.
PAGE 06 10 00 - 3
3.2.6. 3.2.7. Provide fasteners and rough hardware for a rigid and secure installation.
Mix intumescent paint coating product to manufacturers recommendations. Do not thin or strain. Apply primer and paint coating providing fire resistant barrier in accordance with manufacturers 2 recommendations to achieve requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Apply at rate 3.2 m /l (125 sq ft/gal) to obtain dry film thickness of 0.25 mm (10 mils). Miscellaneous Interior Carpentry: Provide plywood, blocking, furring, nailers, rough carpentry, grounds and nailing strips as indicated and/or as required for proper installation. Equipment Mounting Panels: 3.2.9.1. 3.2.9.2. Provide 19 mm (3/4") thick exposed plywood backboard panels. Refer to Electrical Drawings for sizes and locations and securely mount panels to wall surfaces. Provide "fire treated" plywood.
3.2.8. 3.2.9.
3.2.10.
Roof Carpentry: 3.2.10.1. Install continuous wood nailers around roof perimeters, curbs and roof openings at edges of insulation. Use cadmium plated self tapping screws for securing wood to metal deck and cadmium plated lag screws for securing wood to concrete as shown. Install cut cant strips and continuous nailers on copings and curbs as detailed. 3.2.10.2. Install continuous wood nailers along roof control joints, building and roof expansion joints as shown. Fasten nailers as specified. 3.2.10.3. Set sleepers and cleats on roof during roofing application and before installation of flood coat of asphalt and gravel surfacing.
3.2.11.
Temporary Wood Treads: Install and secure 50 mm x 250 mm (2" x 10") full length, temporary spruce treads and landings on steel stairs shown to receive concrete fill.
3.3.
3.3.1.

3.4.
3.4.1.
PROTECTION
Protect rough carpentry from weather.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 06 10 00 - 4
1.1.1.
SECTION 07 21 00 BUILDING INSULATION
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide building insulation including but not limited to following: 1.2.1.1. board, batt and loose insulation throughout building, except as specified under other Sections. This Section establishes insulation and accessory Products and minimum performance criteria which apply to board, batt and loose insulation types used throughout this Project. Read and become familiar with insulation requirements of all Sections. where combustible insulation or vapour barrier materials are specified herein, comply with applicable Code requirements including supply and installation of approved noncombustible backing and independently-supported, non-combustible insulation covering except where these provisions are expressly specified as work of other Sections. ensure material types (trade names), compatibility, sealing and adhesive qualities for each combination of insulation, adhesive and substrate encountered in work are reviewed for compatibility and suitability prior to commencement of installation. Include manufacturer's laboratory reports on adhesive quality and compatibility of each of these conditions. air sealing to supplement and provide continuity of main and primary air/vapour barrier assembly including sealing and/or filling of perimeter of door and window openings, crevices, gaps, cracks in walls, roof/wall connections, mechanical and electrical penetrations in walls, floors, roofs, curtain wall mullions, beams, columns enclosures and other similar locations with polyurethane foam consisting of a single mix of chemical in pressurized container formulated to cure when exposed to moisture present in air to provide and maintain air/vapour barrier integrity and impermeable barrier to air infiltration or loss.
1.2.1.2.
1.2.1.3.
1.2.1.4.
1.2.2.
Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. 1.2.2.3. 1.2.2.4. 1.2.2.5. 1.2.2.6. Provision of insulation in precast concrete wall panels: Section 03 45 00, Precast Architectural Concrete. Installation of insulation at metal panel system: Section 07 42 43, Aluminum Composite Metal (ACM) Panel System. Provision of roof insulation in conventional roofing system: Section 07 54 23, TPO Roofing Mechanically Fastened. Provision of insulation in curtain wall: Section 08 44 00, Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall. Provision of insulation in gypsum partition walls: Section 09 21 16, Gypsum Board. Insulation for mechanical work: Division 21, Fire Suppression, Division 22, Plumbing and Division 23, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.
PAGE 07 21 00 - 1
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. 1.3.1.4. LTTR: Long Term Thermal Resistance. NRCC: National Research Council of Canada; www.nrc-cnrc.gc.ca. OBC: Ontario Building Code, 2006. ULC: Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada; www.ulc.ca.
1.3.2.
Definitions: 1.3.2.1. Rain Screen Principle: A theory governing the design of a building enclosure in such a way as to prevent water penetration due to rain; in other words, a scientific approach to eliminating water leakage.
1.3.3.
Reference Standards: 1.3.3.1. ASTM C1303/1303M-11a - Test Method for Estimating the Long-Term Change in the Thermal Resistance of Unfaced Rigid Closed Cell Plastic Foams by Slicing and Scaling Under Controlled Laboratory Conditions - Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials - Vapor Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction
1.3.3.2. 1.3.3.3. 1.3.3.4. 1.3.3.5. 1.3.3.6. 1.3.3.7. 1.3.3.8. 1.3.3.9.
ASTM C1338-08 ASTM E84-08a-11a CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86
CGSB 71-GP-24M AMD 1-83 - Standard for Adhesive, Flexible, for Bonding Cellular Polystyrene Insulation CSA A440-05 CAN/ULC-S102-07 CAN/ULC-S701-11 CAN/ULC-S702-97 - Windows - Test Method of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies - Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering - Standard for Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation for Buildings - Standard for Thermal Insulation - Bead Applied OneComponent Polyurethane Air Sealant Foam, Part 1: Material Specification - Standard for Thermal Insulation - Bead Applied OneComponent Polyurethane Air Sealant Foam, Part 2: Application - Standard for Thermal Insulation - Bead Applied TwoComponent Polyurethane Air Sealant Foam, Part 1: Material Specification - Standard for Thermal Insulation - Bead Applied TwoComponent Polyurethane Air Sealant Foam, Part 2: Application
1.3.3.10. CAN/ULC-S710.1-05
1.3.3.11. CAN/ULC-S710.2-05 1.3.3.12. CAN/ULC-S711.1-05
1.3.3.13. CAN/ULC-S711.2-05
PAGE 07 21 00 - 2
1.3.3.14. CAN/ULC-S770-03
- Standard Test Method for Determination of Long-Term Thermal Resistance of Closed Cell Thermal Insulating Foams
1.4.
1.4.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installers Qualifications: Provide work of this Section executed by competent installers with minimum of 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies specified and with approval and training of the Product manufacturers.
1.5.
1.5.1. 1.5.2.

Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver materials to site in original wrappings with labels intact and store in areas directed by Consultant. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1.5.2.1. 1.5.2.2. Store insulation on raised platforms and protect with waterproof covers. Prevent exposure of insulation to sun. Store materials inside buildings for 24 hours prior to installation.
1.6.
1.6.1.
SITE CONDITIONS
Ambient Conditions: Maintain surface and ambient temperatures during application and curing of adhesive at temperature recommended by manufacturer of type of adhesive used.

2.1.1.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer List: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 2.1.1.1. 2.1.1.2. 2.1.1.3. 2.1.1.4. 2.1.1.5. Dow Chemical Canada Inc.; www.dow.com Ottawa Fibre Inc.; www.ofigroup.com Owens Corning; www.owenscorning.com Roxul Inc.; www.roxul.com Thermafiber Inc.; www.thermafiber.com
2.1.2.
Substitution Limitations: Comparable Products from other manufacturers not listed herein will be accepted provided they meet requirements of this Specification after full review by Consultant.
2.2.
2.2.1.
MATERIALS
PAGE 07 21 00 - 3
2.2.2. Performance/Design Criteria: 2.2.2.1.
Exterior envelope is based on "Rain Screen Principle" by NRCC. This requires construction behind cladding act as an air/vapour barrier to prevent passage of moisture laden air and diffusion of water vapour. To ensure continuity of air/vapour barrier within construction specified herein and with adjacent barrier construction is part of responsibility of this Section. Refer to Drawings for thicknesses of insulation required. Select appropriate products from list of materials on basis of their maintaining thermal value of envelope, total compatibility when incorporated into finished system while ensuring substrate conditions as well as their ability to adhere components permanently, where applicable in rigid manner and maintain flexibility where required in finished work. Ensure insulation materials and their facings do not support fungal growth when tested in accordance with ASTM C1338.
2.2.2.2.
2.2.2.3. 2.2.3.
Wall or Perimeter Insulation: 2.2.3.1. Rigid Polystyrene Foundation Insulation: CAN/ULC-S701, Type 4, extruded polystyrene insulation with LTTR of RSI (R) value of 0.87 (5.0) per 25 mm (1") when determined in accordance with CAN/ULC-S770 and ASTM C1303/1303M, compressive strength 210 kPa (30 psi), thickness as indicated on Drawings. Supply boards with shiplapped edges at horizontal locations and butt joints elsewhere; "Styrofoam SM" by Dow Chemical of Canada Inc. or "Celfort 300" by Owens Corning.
2.2.4. 2.2.5. 2.2.6. 2.2.7. 2.2.8.
Foundation Insulation: Refer to Section 07 12 00. High Density Insulation Under Concrete Slab: Refer to Section 07 12 00. Insulation Air/Vapour Barriers at Curtain Wall: Refer to Section 08 44 00. Sound Attenuation Batts: Refer to Section 09 21 16. Insulation Behind Convectors: Glass fibre rigid board insulation, faced with aluminum foil on 1 side, 3 density of 72.1 kg/m (4.5 lb/cu ft) or rockwool mineral rigid board insulation, faced with aluminum foil 3 on 1 side, density of 96 kg/m (6 lb/cu ft), min RSI (R) value of 0.76 (4.32) per 25 mm (inch) thickness indicated on Drawings, CAN/CGSB-51.10. Batt or Roll Insulation: 2.2.9.1. Miscellaneous Batt or Roll Insulation: CAN/ULC-S702, Thickness as shown on Drawings. 2.2.9.1.1. Minimum 3 lb density, 610 mm x 1220 mm (24" x 48") semi rigid board OFI-48" by Ottawa Fibre Inc., FBX 1240" by Fibrex Insulations, Inc. or CurtainRock by Roxul Inc. Minimum 2 lb density, 610 mm x 1220 mm (24" x 48") batt or semi rigid board OFI-32" by Ottawa Fibre Inc., Fibrex MB Plus by Fibrex Insulations, Inc. or Roxul Plus Metal Building" by Roxul Inc.
2.2.9.
2.2.9.1.2.
2.2.9.2.
Soffit or Ceiling Insulation: Preformed glass fibre or rockwool batt or roll insulation, conforming to CAN/ULC-S702, thickness as indicated on Drawings. Noise Control by Ottawa Fibre Inc. or Roxul Plus Batts by Roxul Inc. Loose Insulation: Loose mineral fibre insulation, CAN/ULC-S702, Type 4, thickness as indicated on Drawings.
2.2.9.3.
PAGE 07 21 00 - 4
2.2.10. Foamed-In-Place:
2.2.10.1. Air Seal Insulating Sealant, Foam in Place Polyurethane Foam Insulation: One-component foam, slow rise, Compressive Strength: 34 kPa (5 psi), Shear Strength: 83 kPa (12 psi); Closed Cell Content: <50%; tack free within 10 minutes; Cuttable within 1 hour, ULC classified sealant for insulating, sealing, bonding, filling, preventing air infiltration. Ensure 1 component foams meet CAN/ULC-S102 and ASTM E84 flame spread requirements for caulks and sealants, flame Spread 25, cure in place within 24 hours to densities between 3 16.02 to 32.04 kg/m (1.0 to 2.0 lb/cu ft) and carry R-value of 0.03 w/mk (4 to 5 per inch). Cured foam can be trimmed, sanded and/or painted. 2.2.10.2. Zerodraft Air Sealant Foam and Insulating Sealant conforming to CAN/ULC-S710 or CAN/ULC-S711 by Zerodraft (Division of Canam Building Envelope Specialists Inc.), www.zerodraft.com or Handi-Foam by Fomo Products, Inc.; www.fomo.com. 2.2.11. 2.2.12. Vapour Barrier: Polyethylene film, CAN/CGSB-51.34-M, 0.15 mm (6 mils) thick. Adhesive Tape for Sealing Vapour Barrier Joints: 2.2.12.1. Polyethylene Adhesive Tape: Scotch brand No. 483 by 3M Canada Inc. 2.2.12.2. Foil Vapour Barrier Tape: Pressure sensitive aluminum foil tape, 0.127 mm (2 mils) thick, 75 mm (3") wide, Scotch brand No. 425" by 3M Canada Inc. or dead soft aluminum foil tape by Canadian Hanson Ltd. 2.2.13. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer of insulating materials: 2.2.13.1. Type B: For polystyrene rigid insulation. CGSB 71-GP-24M, Type 1, for bead application and Type 2 for trowel application. 2.2.13.2. Type C: For polystyrene or glass fibre rigid insulation. Vapour barrier type, medium trowel consistency, or 260-08" by Bakor Inc. 2.2.14. Mechanical Fasteners: 2.2.14.1. Insulation Clips: Impale type, perforated 50 mm x 50 mm (2" x 2") cold rolled steel adhesive back, spindle of length to suit insulation plus 25 mm (1") with speed washers. Acceptable Product: Self-Stick Insul-Anchor by Continental Studwelding Ltd.; www.constud.ca. 2.2.14.2. Strip Impalement Clips: 25 mm (1") wide strip of Insul Hold Clips by Insul Hold Canada Ltd., fabricated from galvanized sheet in rolls with punch out insulation securement arrows. 2.2.14.3. Nails: Galvanized steel, length 25 mm (1") longer than insulation thickness. 2.2.14.4. Staples: Galvanized wire, 12 mm (1/2") minimum.

3.1.1.
PREPARATION
Surface Preparation: Ensure surfaces to receive adhesive or insulation are dry, firm, straight and free from loose material, projections, ice, frost, slick, grease, oil or other matter detrimental to bond of adhesive or uniform bedding of insulation.
3.2.
3.2.1.
INSTALLATION
Install insulation when conditions meet requirements specified under Preparation.
PAGE 07 21 00 - 5
3.2.2. 3.2.3. 3.2.4.
Install insulation to maintain continuity of thermal protection to building elements and spaces as indicated on Drawings. Fit insulation tight to electrical boxes, plumbing and heating pipes and ducts, around exterior doors and windows and other projections or openings. Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Butt joints tightly, offset vertical joints. Use only insulation panels free from ripped backs or chipped or broken edges. Ensure integrity and continuity of insulation at juncture with different types of materials and seal in acceptable manner. Stagger joints in row. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not cover insulation and air/vapour barrier installed under this Section or other Sections until it has been reviewed by Consultant. Rigid Insulation: 3.2.7.1. With glass fibre or mineral wool, polystyrene, apply Type B adhesive to insulation board at a 2 rate of 0.35 l/m (130 +/-10 sq ft/gal), by spot method with daubs, 25 mm - 40 mm (1" to 11/2") dia x 25 mm (1") high at 200 mm (8") oc each way or by bead method with 8 mm (5/16") dia beads 350 mm (14") oc. With polystyrene and glass fibre insulation apply Type C adhesive to substrate material at 2 rate of 3 l/m (16 sq ft/gal) 3 mm (1/8") thick, to achieve a continuous vapour retardant film. Butter edges of board for continuous seal. Fix insulation clip type fasteners on substrate, 2 per 600 mm x 1200 mm (24" x 48") board minimum. Impale insulation board on insulation clips, butting joints firmly together and secure with washers, cut off spindles 3 mm (1/8") beyond washer. Leave insulation board joints unbonded over line of expansion and control joints. Bond a continuous 150 mm (6") wide 0.15 mm (6 mils) polyethylene strip over joint using compatible adhesive prior to application of insulation. Provide flexible insulation of equivalent thickness and thermal insulation to fit areas where application of rigid insulation is not possible to provide continuous coverage. Perimeter Insulation: Refer to Section 07 12 00. Under Concrete Floor Slab Insulation: Refer to Section 07 12 00.
3.2.5. 3.2.6. 3.2.7.
3.2.7.2.
3.2.7.3.
3.2.7.4.
3.2.7.5. 3.2.7.6. 3.2.7.7. 3.2.8.
Batt or Roll Insulation: 3.2.8.1. 3.2.8.2. 3.2.8.3. 3.2.8.4. Install batt or roll insulations where indicated on Drawings. Fit batt between framing and press firmly into place. Butt tightly at joints, free of gaps. Insulate behind pipes, ducts, electric conduits and outlets or junction boxes. Cut insulation to fit around and behind obstructions and non-standard spaces. Place insulation over soffit grid system sealing around metal hangers and at wall on all sides. Carry insulation up wall and fit around steel or in masonry voids and over plaster ceiling.
3.2.9.
Loose Insulation: 3.2.9.1. Pour or pack or pneumatically place loose wall insulation above ceiling between joists or in walls between studs or between wythes exterior cavity walls or where indicated on Drawings to thicknesses indicated. Ensure areas exposed to outside air are insulated.
3.2.9.2.
PAGE 07 21 00 - 6
3.2.9.3. 3.2.10. Provide vapour barrier before application of ceiling finish.
Air Seal Insulating Foam Sealants: 3.2.10.1. Install air seal insulating foam sealants materials to OBC requirements in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and Consultant to provide required air seal. 3.2.10.2. Apply sealants within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealants cannot be applied within specified ranges. 3.2.10.3. In low humidity, mist area with water to aid cure of one-component sealant. 3.2.10.4. Paint or cover foam exposed to ultra-violet radiation. 3.2.10.5. Avoid overfilling restricted spaces. 3.2.10.6. Use 1-component foam for cracks or openings 6 mm (1/4") to 50 mm (2") wide. Use 2component foam sealant for gaps over 50 mm (2") wide and for voids in hidden cavities. 3.2.10.7. To provide continuity with air/vapour barrier for this Project, without limitations seal following areas: 3.2.10.7.1. 3.2.10.7.2. Various roof areas including sloped roof/wall junctions, penetrations of all kinds and roof/wall junctions. Junction of roof air/vapour barrier and wall air/vapour barrier.
3.2.10.8. Ensure continuity of air and vapour seal between wall and window frame is in accordance with requirements of CSA A440. Window heads, jambs and sills in cavity walls. Window frames at walls and columns where applicable. Window frames and parapets in wall construction. 3.2.10.9. Provide door and window weatherstripping and seals as per manufacturer's installation guidelines. Door weatherstripping and sealing of exterior doors and windows, or for any door drawing air from outside, i.e. mechanical room door, fire door, elevator room door, vestibule door or similar type door. Ensure use of proper type of weatherstripping to provide appropriate levels of durability, expandable and appearance without impeding use of doors and windows. Install weatherstripping/seals plumb, square and level, wherever possible. Adjust weatherstripping for correct function and to form weathertight seal. 3.2.10.10. In cavity wall construction at roof/wall junctions, window perimeters, exhaust vents and soffits. At intervals in cavity wall to achieve compartmentalization. In masonry, curtain wall systems at window perimeters and at metal panel interface locations. 3.2.10.11. Where gypsum board meets roof slab and floor slab. 3.2.10.12. Junctions at mechanical equipment located on roof. 3.2.10.13. Basement, corridor penetrations made vertically through floors or horizontally through walls. 3.2.10.14. Inspect roof perimeter for air leakage paths such as fluted deck itself, truss and structural beam penetrations above and below top of wall, open mortar joints and conduit and pipe penetrations. 3.2.10.15. Use smoke tester kits to identify and locate leakage. 3.2.10.16. Use both 1-component and 2-component foam sealants in combination to create a continuous foamed-in-place seal between wall and roof air/vapour barrier. 3.2.10.17. Where deck flutes run perpendicular to wall, foam open flutes completely out to fascia.
PAGE 07 21 00 - 7
3.2.10.18. Where closed flutes occur, punch flutes and inject foam through holes. Locate holes as close to wall as possible so that plane of injected and cured foam within closed flute is level with plane of exposed foam in open flutes. 3.2.10.19. Where steel deck is parallel to wall, fill void with either 1 component or 2 component material, depending on gap size. 3.2.11. Vapour Barrier: 3.2.11.1. Staple vapour barrier to inside face of insulation. Ensure continuous vapour barrier envelope of entire building. 3.2.11.2. Staple vapour barrier securely in place at 400 mm (16") oc both directions. 3.2.11.3. Lap joints 150 mm (6"). 3.2.11.4. Tape joints with polyethylene tape.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 07 21 00 - 8
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 25 00 Project No: 2011.008 MISCELLANEOUS AIR/VAPOUR BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.

1.1.1.
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide miscellaneous air/vapour barriers including but not limited to following: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. air/vapour barriers required to maintain air/vapour integrity of building envelope not shown or identified on Drawings or specified under another Section. coordination of work of this Section with other trades working on building envelope.
1.2.2.
Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. Thermal insulation and non-air/vapour type adhesives: Section 07 21 00, Building Insulation. Gypsum board work: Section 09 21 16, Gypsum Board.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. 1.3.1.4. 1.3.1.5. ELA: Equivalent Leakage Air. MSDS: Material Safety Data Sheets. OBC: Ontario Building Code. SAT: Self Adhesive Type. TFT: Thermal Fusible Type.
1.3.2.
Reference Standards: 1.3.2.1. 1.3.2.2. CGSB 37-GP-9Ma-83 CAN/CGSB-51.33-M89 - Primer, Asphalt, Unfilled, for Asphalt Roofing, Dampproofing and Waterproofing - Vapour Barrier Sheet, Excluding Polyethylene for Use in Building Construction
1.4.
1.4.1.
SUBMITTALS
Samples: Submit samples in accordance with requirements of Section 01 30 00.
PAGE 07 25 00 - 1
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 25 00 Project No: 2011.008 MISCELLANEOUS AIR/VAPOUR BARRIERS 1.5.
1.5.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications: 1.5.1.1. Installers: Provide work of this Section executed by competent installers with minimum of 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies specified and with approval and training of the Product manufacturers.
1.5.2.
Mock-Ups: To identical substrate materials scheduled for use in finished building, provide on site in location as directed, mock-up panels to which each combination of materials to be used under this Section is installed, interlapped, reinforced and secured to demonstrate compatibility, adhesion and cohesion qualities, fastening systems of flats and general workmanship to be used throughout finished work.
1.6.
1.6.1.

Storage and Handling Requirements: 1.6.1.1. 1.6.1.2. Store materials in weathertight enclosure raised clear of ground so they are protected from sunlight, weather exposure, moisture and deterioration. Comply with manufacturer's printed recommendations for handling of materials.
1.7.
1.7.1.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer Warranty: Warrant work of this Section for period of 3 years against defects and/or deficiencies in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period, to satisfaction of Consultant and at no expense to Owner. Defects include but are not limited to; material remaining air and water tight.

2.1.1.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer List: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 2.1.1.1. 2.1.1.2. 2.1.1.3. 2.1.1.4. 2.1.1.5. 2.1.1.6. Bakor Inc.; www.bakor.com Grace Construction Products; www.graceconstruction.com IKO Industries Ltd.; www.iko.com Soprema; www.soprema.ca Tremco Canada; www.tremcosealants.com W.R.Meadows of Canada; www.wrmeadows.com
PAGE 07 25 00 - 2
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 25 00 Project No: 2011.008 MISCELLANEOUS AIR/VAPOUR BARRIERS 2.2.
2.2.1.
MATERIALS
Performance/Design Criteria: 2.2.1.1. Ensure air/vapour membrane system controls air leakage, moisture and thermal transfer while maintaining its structural integrity in accordance with NBC. Ensure air/vapour membrane is continuous and compatible with interfacing materials in plane of air-tightness and sealed at interfaces to provide proper air barrier system in construction. Provide greater attention for air/vapour barrier continuity at physical connections of material components between window frames and wall assembly while taking into consideration construction tolerance, reduction of unnecessary interfaces in system and providing proper structural support to air/vapour barrier connections, such that wind loads, deflection and air pressure differentials do not cause connections to fail. Ensure air/vapour membrane has an air permeance of less than 0.02 l/s/m (0.06 cfm/sq ft) under a pressure differential of 75 Pa (1.56 psf). Air/vapour membrane is able to withstand 2 kPa (42 psf) air pressure from either direction, with no increase in ELA.
2.2.1.2. 2.2.1.3. 2.2.2.
Material Compatibility: Of various materials specified herein, select combination of base materials, transition, bridging and reinforcing membranes, adhesives and accessories so that when cured, they are compatible and give bonding characteristics equivalent to shear strength of selected air/vapour barrier materials used. Air/Vapour Barrier Membrane: Supply 1 of following systems: 2.2.3.1. TFT System: 2.2.3.1.1. 2.2.3.1.2. 2.2.3.1.3. Primer: Unfilled asphalt conforming to CGSB 37-GP-9Ma. Mastic: As recommended by manufacturer. Membrane: Torch applied, thermofusible reinforced modified asphalt membrane with average minimum thickness of 2.5 mm (3/32"), reinforced with non-woven polyester or glass fibre fabric, both sides of membrane covered with plastic film, cut to suit design and lap requirements; Sopraseal 60" by Soprema, Blueskin TG by Bakor Inc. or IKO AquaBarrier TG by IKO Industries Ltd.
2.2.3.
2.2.3.2.
SAT System (with Primer): 2.2.3.2.1. 2.2.3.2.2. 2.2.3.2.3. Primer: Water based primer meeting VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction or as recommended by membrane manufacturer. Mastic: As recommended by manufacturer. SAT Membrane: SBS modified bitumen membrane, minimum 1 mm (40 mils) thick with polyethylene film membrane on 1 side and siliconized release paper on the other, cut to suit design and lap requirements, PermA-Barrier by Grace Construction Products, Blueskin SA by Bakor Inc., IKO AquaBarrier AVB by IKO Industries Ltd., Air Shield by W. R. Meadows of Canada or ExcAir 110/110LT Self-Adhered by Tremco Canada. Primer as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
2.2.3.3.
Polyethylene sheet of minimum 150 m (6 mils) thickness to CAN/CGSB-51.33-M, Type 2. Supply minimum 1800 mm (6') roll widths.
PAGE 07 25 00 - 3
2.2.4. 2.2.5.
Joint Sealing Tape: Air resistant pressure sensitive adhesive tape, type recommended by air/vapour barrier manufacturer, 50 mm (2") wide for lap joints and perimeter seals, 25 mm (1") wide elsewhere. Adhesive: As recommended by sheet manufacturers.

3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
Verification of Conditions: 3.1.1.1. 3.1.1.2. Verify actual site dimensions and location of adjacent materials prior to commencing work. Notify Consultant in writing of any conditions which would be detrimental to the installation. Examine surface to receive membranes to assure they are smooth, dry and free from conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality of work.
3.1.2.
Evaluation and Assessment: Commencement of work implies acceptance of previously completed work.
3.2.
3.2.1. 3.2.2. 3.2.3.
INSTALLATION
Do not install air/vapour barrier until other work which penetrates membrane has been completed. Apply air/vapour barrier envelope to this Project with utmost care to ensure positive support and continuity. TFT System: 3.2.3.1. 3.2.3.2. 3.2.3.3. Completely thermo-fuse (after application of primer) entire membrane in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Ensure complete coverage of and adhesion to substrate, including wall protrusions. Cooperate with other trades to ensure continuity of membrane. Support vertically placed membrane runs near top of each sheet with mechanical fasteners, applied to concrete substrate at 1500 mm (5') oc. Carefully and completely lap a minimum of 25 mm (1") and flame-seal junction of each membrane sheet. Reinforce corners with 300 mm (12") wide sheets of Type TFT membrane prior to installing main wall sheets. Inspect air/vapour barrier for continuity. Repair punctures, rips and tears with pieces of membrane completely heat-fused to damaged membrane. Where punctures and tears are extensive, replace entire damaged section. Install joint reinforcements and transition membranes in accordance with requirements specified herein, bridging cracks greater than 3 mm (1/8") wide, bends up to 120 and transitions to framing members and similar items penetrating air/vapour barrier membrane. At overlapping joints, smooth out with hot trowel.
3.2.3.4. 3.2.3.5. 3.2.3.6. 3.2.3.7.
3.2.3.8. 3.2.4.
SAT System: 3.2.4.1. Begin installation after mechanical insulation clips have been applied to substrate, have cured and are examined for bond.
PAGE 07 25 00 - 4
3.2.4.2.
Priming: 3.2.4.2.1. Apply fluid primer to surfaces and allow to dry tack-free. Prime only areas to be covered by membrane within same Day. Re-prime surfaces not covered within same Day. Apply primers at a rate recommended by membrane manufacturer.
3.2.4.2.2. 3.2.4.3.
Flashing, Corner Reinforcing and Transition Membrane: 3.2.4.3.1. Install membrane flashing in 900 mm (36") widths wherever possible. Where applicable, bring flashing a minimum of 150 mm (6") onto horizontal surfaces and a minimum of 200 mm (8") up walls from horizontal elevation shown. SAT membrane will be acceptable materials for transition conditions at frames and the like. Stagger flashing and membrane seams. Install flashing to protrusions, expansion joints, control joints and the like. Bring flashing a minimum of 150 mm (6") onto membrane.
3.2.4.3.2. 3.2.4.3.3. 3.2.4.3.4. 3.2.4.4. Installation: 3.2.4.4.1. 3.2.4.4.2.
Install membrane in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions over flashings and corner reinforcement. Lay membrane without buckles, fishmouths and avoid stretching membrane. Where membrane cannot extend at least 100 mm (4") onto horizontal surface, terminate in a horizontal reglet and seal. Lap membranes 50 mm (2") on side laps and 100 mm (4") on end laps. Stagger end laps. Roll membrane with a hand roller.
3.2.4.4.3. 3.2.4.4.4. 3.2.4.5.
Inspection: Inspect membrane for punctures, misaligned seams and fishmouths, apply additional layer of membrane over affected area, extending minimum of 150 mm (6") beyond damaged area in all directions.
3.2.5.
Flexible Membrane, Reinforcement and Accessories: 3.2.5.1. Unless otherwise noted, it is responsibility of this Section to provide and maintain continuity of air seal to adjacent dissimilar materials. Fit flexible seals at locations required to provide air/vapour/water resistant and weathertight junctions. Ensure continuity of seal at end joints between lengths of material by overlapping and cementing. Seal junctions of system components to themselves and other Work with sealant to maintain effective vapour, air and water barrier. Ensure air seal membrane termination consists of a compatible flexible membrane reinforcement sheet embedded in a permanent, compatible sealant or fluid type air/vapour barrier material, lapping a minimum of 200 mm (8") on to base materials and having free edge installed to penetrating framing by combination of adhesive or fluid coating. Where deflection of structure will cause dynamic joint movement between metal framing work and dissimilar materials, provide flexible seals of sufficient width to allow formation of bellows to take up any torsional and shear stresses.
3.2.5.2.
3.2.5.3.
PAGE 07 25 00 - 5
3.2.5.4. 3.2.5.5. 3.2.5.6.
Where SAT membrane are used as base air/vapour barrier, same material may also be used as flexible transition material. This work is considered as 2-phase work, with final attachment of reinforced bridging sheet being made at time of installation of door frames and windows under separate contract. Where air/vapour barrier crosses junction between concrete block and concrete columns or beams, provide flexible membrane of 150 mm (6") minimum width to bridge possible openings at such locations.
3.2.6.
Provide flexible sheet membrane at junctions with dissimilar materials and corners as indicated. Where attaching air seal membrane to metal frames and the like, apply sealant in addition to fluid adhesive.
3.3.
3.3.1. 3.3.2.

Non-Conforming Work: Replace damaged work which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, restored or cleaned, to satisfaction of Consultant at no cost to Owner. Manufacturer Services: Ensure membrane manufacturer's representative is on site at beginning of installation to provide training and supervision of Contractor's personnel in installation of air/vapour barrier. Ensure manufacturers representative provides frequent inspection visits thereafter to assure quality and competence of membrane installation. Air Seal Membrane Continuity: Ensure air/vapour barrier provides an impermeable membrane seal to resist infiltration and exfiltration of air and moisture. Ensure function of air/vapour membrane as indicated.
3.3.3.
3.4.
3.4.1.
PROTECTION
Protect surrounding surfaces against damage from this work.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 07 25 00 - 6
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 42 43 Project No: 2011.008 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE METAL PANEL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.
1.1.1.
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide preformed aluminum composite metal panel system including but not limited to following: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. 1.2.1.5. 1.2.1.6. installation of air/vapour barrier. subgirts installation of insulation. preformed ACM panels. related trims and extrusions. fasteners.
1.2.2.
Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. 1.2.2.3. 1.2.2.4. structural steel framing members and other structural supports required for support of ACM panels: Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel. fire rated exterior sheathing: Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry. supply of Wall and Perimeter Insulation: Refer to Section 07 21 00. supply of Air/Vapour Barrier Membrane: Refer to Section 07 25 00
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. 1.3.1.4. 1.3.1.5. 1.3.1.6. ACM: Aluminum Composite Material. Ontario Building Code. NRCC: National Research Council of Canada; www.nrc-cnrc.gc.ca. PVDF: Polyvinyldiene Fluoride. SAT: Self Adhesive Type. TFT: Thermal Fusible Type.
PAGE 07 42 43 - 1
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 42 43 Project No: 2011.008 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE METAL PANEL SYSTEM
1.3.2. Definitions: 1.3.2.1. Rain Screen Principle: A theory governing the design of a building enclosure in such a way as to prevent water penetration due to rain; in other words, a scientific approach to eliminating water leakage.
1.3.3.
Reference Standards: 1.3.3.1. AAMA 2604-05 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings and Aluminum Extrusions and Panels - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings and Aluminum Extrusions and Panels - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by Hot Dip Process - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus - Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum and of Other Nonconductive Coatings on Nonmagnetic Basis Metals with Eddy-Current Instruments - Test Method for Specular Gloss - Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering of Paints - Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive - Standard Test Method for Climbing Drum Peel for Adhesives - Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates - Test Method for Oxidation Stability of Distillate Fuel Oil (Accelerated Method) - Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test - Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by uniform Static Air Pressure - Standard Test method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference - Strength Design in Aluminum - Standard for: Adhesive, Flexible, for Bonding Cellular Polystyrene Insulation Test method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Build Materials.
1.3.3.2.
AAMA 2605-05
1.3.3.3.
ASTM A653/A653M-08
1.3.3.4. 1.3.3.5.
ASTM B117-09 ASTM B244-09
1.3.3.6. 1.3.3.7. 1.3.3.8. 1.3.3.9.
ASTM D523-08 ASTM D714-02(09) ASTM D968-05(10) ASTM D1781-98(04)
1.3.3.10. ASTM D2244-11 1.3.3.11. ASTM D2274-10 1.3.3.12. ASTM D3363-05(11) 1.3.3.13. ASTM D4214-07 1.3.3.14. ASTM E330-03(10)
1.3.3.15. ASTM E331-00(09)
1.3.3.16. CSA S157/S157.1-05 1.3.3.17. CGSB 71-GP-24M 1.3.3.18. CAN/ULC-S102-08
PAGE 07 42 43 - 2
1.3.3.19. CAN/ULC-S134-92(98) 1.3.3.20. CAN/ULC-S702-97 Fire Test of Exterior Wall Assemblies. - Standard for Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation for Buildings
1.4.
1.4.1.
SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for work of this Section in accordance with Section 01 30 00. In addition to minimum requirements indicate following: 1.4.1.1. 1.4.1.2. 1.4.1.3. 1.4.1.4. 1.4.1.5. 1.4.1.6. 1.4.1.7. 1.4.1.8. 1.4.1.9. elevations, profiles, dimensions and thickness of panels. size, spacing and location of structural supports. cladding system details. airseal closures to adjacent parts of the Work. panel sizes, finishes and identifying marks. provision for thermal movement. jointing details including joints necessary to accommodate thermal movement.. cut and drilled holes. Indicate attachment clips, joint extrusion system and installation details including anchorage and securement systems including clearances.
1.4.1.10. interfaces with work of other Sections. 1.4.1.11. material identification, thicknesses and gauges. 1.4.1.12. flashing installation method. 1.4.1.13. locations and details of horizontal fire stopping. 1.4.1.14. sequence of erection and any special handling or bracing required. 1.4.1.15. Indicate panel sizes and finishes in elevation, sections, materials and thicknesses arrangements of joints and bonding, metal framing and anchorage and flashing. 1.4.1.16. Panels shall be identified on the shop drawings as to building location to facilitate panel removal and replacement. 1.4.1.17. Ensure a registered structural engineer specified herein is responsible for: 1.4.1.17.1. production and review of Shop Drawings attesting to the ability of the metal panels assembly to withstand the specified loads. 1.4.1.17.2. stamping and signing each Shop Drawing and any associated calculations performed. 1.4.2. Samples: Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Submit following samples: 1.4.2.1. 1.4.2.2. 1.4.2.3. 300 mm x 300 mm (12" x 12") ACM panel. minimum 89 mm x 89 mm (3- x 3-) samples of each colour selected. 300 mm (12") each of extruded and formed trim.
PAGE 07 42 43 - 3
1.4.3. Certificates: Submit in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Submit preformed ACM panel system manufacturer's written certification that Products, systems and assemblies have been installed in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.
1.5.
1.5.1.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operational and Maintenance Data: 1.5.1.1. 1.5.1.2. Provide maintenance data for cleaning and maintenance of aluminum finishes for incorporation into manual specified in Section. Submit instructions for touch-up, repair and removal of panels.
1.6.
1.6.1.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

Extra Stock Materials: Submit a 1 litre (1 pint) sealed can touch-up paint, properly identified for each panel colour provided.
1.7.
1.7.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications: 1.7.1.1. Installers: Provide work of this Section executed by competent installers with minimum of 10 years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies specified and with approval and training of Product manufacturers. Licensed Professionals: Employ a full time professional structural engineer carrying minimum $2,000,000.00 professional liability insurance and is registered in the Province of Ontario.
1.7.1.2.
1.7.2.
Testing: Provide testing to show: 1.7.2.1. Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more that 0.3 L/s per sq. m. (0.06 cfm/sq. ft.) of wall area when tested according to ASTM E283 at the test pressure difference of 75 Pa (1.57 lbf/sq.ft). Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E331 at the test pressure difference of 300Pa (6.24 lbf/sq.ft.). Structural Performance: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand the effects of the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing to ASTM E330: 1.7.2.3.1. Wind Loads: Design wall system to resist wind loads, positive and negative, expected in this geographical region NBCC climatic data, 50 year probability without causing rattling, vibration or excessive deflection of panels, overstressing of fasteners, clips or other detrimental effects on wall system. Deflection Limit: Panels must return to an essentially flat condition after design wind load is removed with permanent set not to exceed L/800.
1.7.2.2. 1.7.2.3.
1.7.2.3.2. 1.7.2.4.
Fire-Performance: 1.7.2.4.1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide materials with the following surfaceburning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per Canadian Standard CAN/ULC S102 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: Flame-Spread Index: 0 or less.
1.7.2.4.2.
PAGE 07 42 43 - 4
1.7.2.4.3. 1.7.2.5. Smoke-Developed Index: 20 or less.
Non-combustible Characteristics: Provide core material with the following combustibility characteristics as determined by testing identical products per CAN/ULC-S134 or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Composite Building Panel must be included in the Intertek, ULC, or Warnock Hersey Listing Directory for CAN/ULC S134, and CAN/ULC S102 to certify that the 4mm or 6mm product being supplied for this project is identical to the product originally tested to these standards.
1.7.2.6.
1.7.3.
Mock-Ups: 1.7.3.1. 1.7.3.2. 1.7.3.3. 1.7.3.4. 1.7.3.5. Conform to requirements of Section 01 40 00. Prior to installation of work of this Section construct 1 site mock-up of preformed ACM panel system including components of wall system for Consultant's review. Modify site mock-up detailing if necessary in accordance with Consultant's review. Site mock-up will serve as reference for detailing and quality of construction for remaining work of this Section. Erect mock-up panels in locations and size as directed by Consultant. Ensure at least one 4 way joint, corner condition and soffit condition is covered. Also ensure parapet profile is included. Mock-up panel shall include all components of the wall system and if approved by Consultant may be incorporated in to finished work. Notify 72 hours before installation of mock-up for inspection by Consultant. Do not proceed with panel system work until mock-up has been approved.
1.7.3.6. 1.7.3.7.
1.8.
1.8.1.

Storage and Handling: 1.8.1.1. 1.8.1.2. Protect finish and edges using a plastic film adhered to panel in accordance with panel manufacturer's recommendations. Store components recommendations. and materials in accordance with panel manufacturer's
1.9.
1.9.1.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer Warranty for Panel System Fabricator: Warrant work of this Section for period of 5 years for conformance to design and performance and requirements in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period, to satisfaction of Consultant and at no expense to Owner. Manufacturer Warranty for Panel Manufacturer: Warrant work of this Section for period of 10 years against delamination of panels and defective materials under normal weathering and fabricated to manufacturers instructions in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period, to satisfaction of Consultant and at no expense to Owner. Panel Finish Warranty: Warrant work of this Section for a period of 20 years against peeling, checking or cracking (except bent edges); chalking in excess of 8 rating measured in accordance with ASTM D4214 and/or fading in excess of 5 delta (color difference units) measured in accordance with ASTM D2244, under normal weathering.
1.9.2.
1.9.3.
PAGE 07 42 43 - 5
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 42 43 Project No: 2011.008 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE METAL PANEL SYSTEM PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1.
2.1.1.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer List: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 2.1.1.1. Alpolic Composite ACM Panels by Alpolic Composite Materials Inc. ; www.alpolic.com
2.1.2.
Substitution Limitations: Comparable Products from manufacturers not listed herein will be accepted provided they meet requirements of this Specification after a full review by Consultant.
2.2.
2.2.1. 2.2.2.
MATERIALS
Description: Performance/Design Criteria: 2.2.2.1. Design, fabricate and erect preformed ACM panel system to meet following requirements: 2.2.2.1.1. 2.2.2.1.2. Rain Penetration: Prevent rain penetration through wall system. Design system based on "Rain Screen Principle" by NRCC. Incorporate means of draining moisture to exterior. Design drainage system to provide clear, internal paths of drainage of any trapped moisture to exterior. Ensure weep water discharges in a manner that avoids staining of architectural finishes, collecting in puddles or the formation of icicles.
2.2.3.
Temperature Change (Range): 20 deg C, ambient; 40 deg C, material surfaces 2.2.3.1.1. 2.2.3.1.2. Design metal framing system to support thermal insulation and ACM panel system. Wind Load: Design wall system to resist wind loads, positive and negative, expected in this geographical region (NBC climatic data, 10 year probability) without causing rattling, vibration or excessive deflection of panels, over stressing of fasteners, clips and other detrimental effects on wall system. Structural and Thermal Movement: Accommodate movement of supporting structural framing and movement caused by thermal expansion and contraction due to solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss of system component parts without causing buckling, bowing, backing, delamination, oil canning, failure of joint seals, excessive stress on fasteners or any other detrimental effects. Air/Vapour Barrier: Ensure it is continuous and sealed at joints, laps, terminations and penetrations to prevent air infiltration and exfiltration and to effectively retard moisture vapour migration through system. Fire Resistance: Ensure ACM panel system has been tested by an independent testing organization accredited by Standard Council of Canada in accordance with CAN/ULC-S134.
2.2.3.1.3.
2.2.3.1.4.
2.2.3.1.5.
2.2.3.2.
Panel flatness tolerance applies to even rises and falls across panel. Local bumps and depressions will not be accepted. Fabricate panels not exceeding following tolerances: 2.2.3.2.1. 1.5 mm (0.06") in a convex direction, measured perpendicularly to normal plane.
PAGE 07 42 43 - 6
2.2.3.2.2. 2.2.3.3. 2.2.3.4. 2.2.4. 1.5 mm (0.06") in a concave direction, measured perpendicularly to normal plane.
Maximum deviation from vertical and horizontal alignment of erected panels: 6 mm (1/4") in 6 m (20' - 0"). Ensure maximum deviation from panel flatness is 3 mm (1/8") in 1500 mm (59") panel in any direction for assembled units (non-accumulative).
Structural Design: Employ a registered structural engineer specified herein to: 2.2.4.1. 2.2.4.2. design components for work of this Section requiring structural performance. be responsible for determining sizes, yield strengths, gauge thicknesses and joint spacing to allow thermal movement and loading of components in accordance with applicable codes and regulations. Primer: Recommended by membrane manufacturer.
2.2.4.3. 2.2.5. 2.2.6. 2.2.7.
Supply of Air/Vapour Barrier Membrane: Refer to Section 07 25 00. Supply of Wall and Perimeter Insulation: Refer to Section 07 21 00. Fasteners for Insulation: Type N "Stik-Klip" fasteners and Type S neoprene adhesive, with self-locking washers by Eckel Industries of Canada Ltd., Morrisburg, "Insul-Anchors" by Continental Stud Welding Inc., or impale type, perforated 50 mm x 50 mm (2" x 2") cold rolled steel, 22 ga adhesive pack, spindle of 0.098 x 0.106" dia. annealed steel, length to suit insulation 25 mm (1") dia. washers of selflocking nylon by Fleck Bros. Insulation Adhesive: CGSB 71-GP-24M, Type II, rubber asphalt adhesive, compatible with insulation, "Bakor 230-21" by Bakor Inc. Preformed ACM Panels: 2.2.9.1. 2.2.9.2. Face and Liner Material: Minimum 0.51 mm (0.02") 3105 aluminum alloy. Core: Thermoplastic material conforming to performance and design requirements when fabricated into thermally bonded composite assembly. Submit data regarding which type of core is suitable according to the project condition. Extruded thermoplastic fr core. Peel Strength: 22.5 in.lb/in, to ASTM D1781. Panel Thickness: 4 mm (5/32"). Panel Finishes: 100% Lumiflon FEVE (2nd generation Fluoropolymer) or PVDF compliant to AAMA 2605. Laminated products not acceptable. Tolerances: 2.2.9.7.1. 2.2.9.7.2. Panel Bow: Maximum 0.80% per lineal foot panel dimension (width or length). Panel Dimensions: Make allowance for field adjustments, in manner recommended by manufacturer, where final dimensions cannot be established by field measurement prior to panel manufacturing. Panel lines, breaks and angles to be sharp and true: panel surfaces to be free from warp or buckle.
2.2.8. 2.2.9.
2.2.9.3. 2.2.9.4. 2.2.9.5. 2.2.9.6. 2.2.9.7.
2.2.9.7.3. 2.2.10.
Strippable Coating: Applied prior to roll forming and embossing.
PAGE 07 42 43 - 7
2.2.11. Panel, Wall and Soffit Accessories: 2.2.11.1. Complete Installation: Provide proprietary aluminum extrusions compatible with panel edges, manufacturer's standard profiles, vertical and horizontal joint closures and perimeter trim as required for a complete installation. 2.2.11.2. Fasteners: As recommended by panel manufacturer, concealed and non-corrosive. 2.2.11.3. Extrusions and Extrusion Clips for Attaching Panels to Substructure: Purpose made aluminum. Install a separator between extrusions and sub-girts. 2.2.11.4. Joint Filler Strip: Same material as panels. 2.2.12. Composite Extrusion Wall Systems: 2.2.12.1. Wall Systems must meet or exceed the following tests: 2.2.12.1.1. Air Infiltration: according to ASTM E 283. 2.2.12.1.2. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: according to ASTM E 331. 2.2.12.1.3. Structural Performance: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand the effects of the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing to ASTM E 330. 2.2.12.1.4. Deflection Limit: Panels must return to an essentially flat condition after design wind load is removed with permanent set not to exceed L/800. 2.2.12.1.5. Approved System & System Suppliers include: 2.2.12.1.5.1. 2.2.12.1.5.2. 2.2.12.1.5.3. 2.2.12.1.5.4. 2.2.13. Accumet 2000 by Flynn, www.flynn.ca C-2000 by Cladco, www.cladco.com Optima System 1 by Ritz Metal, www.ritzmetal.ca System 3 by Vicwest, www.vicwest.com
Adjustable Angles, Sub-Girts, Z-bars: Sheet steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, Grade A Zinc coating to Z275 (G90) designation, formed from minimum 1.219 mm (18 ga) base thickness engineered to accommodate expansion and contraction, dynamic movements and design load requirements.. Dielectric Separator: Provide best grade, quick drying non-staining alkali resistant bituminous paint or epoxy resin solution or membrane type to acceptance of Consultant. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to meet design load requirements specified and to maintain a weather-resistant installation. Flashings: Panel design to include for corners, jambs and abutments. Flashings will not be permitted at these locations. Sill flashings to be of matching gauge and finish as panels complete with reinforce back up splice plates at joints and directional changes.
2.2.14. 2.2.15. 2.2.16. 2.2.17.
PAGE 07 42 43 - 8
2.2.18. Finishes: 2.2.18.1. High Performance Coating Finish Process: (2 Coat Wet System) including thermal setting application of 70% fluoropolymer resin, PVDF with added colour pigment finish exceeding or meeting AAMA 2604 requirements. Ensure fluoropolymer baked resins form a continuous physically locked finish during manufacturing process. Apply fluoropolymer finish after multistage chemical treatment cleaning providing corrosion resistance surface ready to receive primer. During baking process apply acrylic or epoxy primer in accordance with manufacturers recommendations followed by a flash process whereby evaporating solvent and then fluoropolymer finish sprayed on to aluminum; apply another flash procedure and then bake for approximately 10 minutes when aluminum surface reaches a temperature of 232 deg C (450 deg F). 2.2.18.2. Primer and fluoropolymer thermal setting enamel meeting or exceeding AAMA 2604 with minimum 70% fluoropolymer resin, PVDF, 2 coat system, Duranar by PPG Industries Inc. Description 2.2.18.2.1. Coating Thickness: Performance Characteristics 0.0063 +/-0.0013 mm (0.25 mil +/-0.05 mils) primer 0.025 mm (1.0 mil) colour coat Multi-Stage Conversion Cleaning Coating with Chemical
2.2.18.2.2. Pre-Treatment: 2.2.18.2.3. Gloss (ASTM D523 @ 60): 2.2.18.2.4. Pencil Hardness (ASTM D3363): 2.2.18.2.5. Abrasion Resistance Falling Sand (ASTM D968): 2.2.18.2.6. Acid Resistance 10% Muriatic Acid Spot Test: 2.2.18.2.7. Alkali Resistance-Mortar Pat Test 100% R.H. @ 100F: 2.2.18.2.8. Colour Retention 10 yrs, 45 South Florida (ASTM D2244): 2.2.18.2.9. Gloss Retention: 10 yrs, 45 South Florida: 2.2.18.2.10. Humidity Resistance ASTM D714, ASTM D2274, 4000 hrs, 100% R.H. @ 100F: 2.2.18.2.11. Salt Spray Resistance ASTM B117, 4000 hrs 5% NaCl @ 100F:
Low and medium gloss F minimum 20 l/ml
15 minutes - no attack
24 hours - no attack
E <5.0 Minimum of 50%
Few #8 blisters maximum
1/16 maximum undercutting
PAGE 07 42 43 - 9
2.2.18.2.12. Chalking Resistance 10 yrs, 45 South Florida (ASTM D4214): 2.2.18.2.13. Erosion Resistance: 10 yrs, 45 South Florida (ASTM B244):
No more than #8 (#6 for Whites)
Maximum 5%
2.2.18.3. Pretreatments: Recommended by finish coat manufacturer suitable for application and accepted by Consultant. 2.2.18.4. Colours and Sheens: to 80% gloss range. Manufacturers standard colour range is to include finishes with 15%
2.2.18.4.1. To match Consultants samples. 2.2.18.4.2. ACM-1: white. 2.2.18.4.3. ACM-2: red. 2.2.18.5. Apply to metal exposed on interior and exterior with finishes specified herein to suit design requirements. Ensure colour and sheen are uniform with no visible variations. 2.2.18.6. Painting: Ensure concealed surfaces of aluminum and galvanized steel which would otherwise come in direct contact with structural steel, concrete, masonry are given a heavy coating of bituminous paint.

3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
Verification of Conditions: 3.1.1.1. Confirm all walls and openings are to be within 3 mm (0.12) of the location shown on architectural drawings. The faade is to be plumb within 1:1000 of the overall height with a maximum of 25mm. Verify actual site dimensions and location of adjacent materials prior to commencing work. Notify Consultant in writing of any conditions which would be detrimental to the installation. Do not install air/vapour barrier until other work which penetrates membrane has been completed.
3.1.1.2. 3.1.1.3. 3.1.2.
3.2.
3.2.1.
INSTALLATION
Air/Vapour Barrier: 3.2.1.1. TFT System: 3.2.1.1.1. 3.2.1.1.2. Ensure entire membrane is completely thermo-fused (after application of primer), in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Ensure complete coverage of and adhesion to substrate, including wall protrusions. Co-operate with other trades to ensure continuity of membrane.
PAGE 07 42 43 - 10
3.2.1.1.3. Ensure vertically placed membrane runs are supported near top of each sheet with mechanical fasteners, applied to concrete substrate at 1500 mm (5') oc. Carefully and completely lap a minimum of 25 mm (1") and flame-seal junction of each membrane sheet. Reinforce corners with 300 mm (12") wide sheets of TFT membrane prior to installing main wall sheets. Inspect air/vapour barrier for continuity. Repair punctures, rips and tears with pieces of membrane completely heat-fused to damaged membrane. Where punctures and tears are extensive, replace entire damaged section. Install joint reinforcements and transition membranes in accordance with requirements specified herein, bridging cracks greater than 3 mm (1/8") wide, bends up to 120 and transitions to framing members and similar items penetrating air/vapour barrier membrane. At overlapping joints, smooth out with hot trowel.
3.2.1.1.4. 3.2.1.1.5. 3.2.1.1.6. 3.2.1.1.7.
3.2.1.1.8. 3.2.1.2.
SAT System: 3.2.1.2.1. 3.2.1.2.2. 3.2.1.2.2.1. Begin installation after mechanical insulation clips have been applied to substrate, have cured and are examined for bond. Priming: Apply fluid primer to concrete and masonry and other surfaces and allow to dry 1 hour or until tack-free. Prime only areas to be covered by membrane within 24 hours. Re-prime surfaces not covered within 24 hours.
2 Apply primers at a rate of 6 - 8 m /l (300 - 400 sq ft/gal) for SAT membrane.
3.2.1.2.2.2. 3.2.1.2.2.3. 3.2.1.2.3. 3.2.1.2.3.1.
Form fillets at inside corners of walls/slabs with liquid membrane. Flashing, Corner Reinforcing and Transition Membrane: Install membrane flashing in 900 mm (36") widths. Where applicable, bring flashing a minimum of 150 mm (6") onto horizontal surfaces and a minimum of 200 mm (8") up walls from horizontal elevation shown. SAT membrane will be acceptable materials for transition conditions at frames and like. Stagger flashing and membrane seams. Install flashing to protrusions, expansion joints, control joints and like. Bring flashing a minimum of 150 mm (6") onto membrane. Apply mastic with inorganic mesh to flashing seams. Installation: Install membrane in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions over flashings and corner reinforcement. Lay membrane without buckles, fishmouths and avoid stretching membrane. Where membrane cannot extend at least 100 mm (4") onto horizontal surface, terminate in a horizontal reglet and seal.
3.2.1.2.3.2. 3.2.1.2.3.3. 3.2.1.2.3.4. 3.2.1.2.3.5. 3.2.1.2.4. 3.2.1.2.4.1. 3.2.1.2.4.2.
PAGE 07 42 43 - 11
3.2.1.2.4.3. 3.2.1.2.4.4. 3.2.1.2.5. Lap membranes 65 mm (2-1/2") on side laps and 150 mm (6") on end laps. Stagger end laps. Roll membrane with 75 mm (3") wide hand roller. Inspection: Inspect membrane for punctures, misaligned seams and fishmouths, apply additional layer of membrane over affected area, extending minimum of 150 mm (6") beyond damaged area in all directions.
3.2.2. 3.2.3.
Sub-Girt Installation: Erect sub-girts fastened through air/vapour barrier to steel studs or concrete block, as applicable, in accordance with system manufacturer's installation details and instructions. Insulation: 3.2.3.1. 3.2.3.2. Ensure surfaces to receive insulation are dry and free of matter detrimental to uniform bedding of insulation.
2 Apply adhesive to insulation board at rate of 1 l/m (50 sq ft/gal) by notched trowel with 5 2 mm (3/16") notches at 10 mm (3/8") oc or apply at rate of 0.35 l/m (130 +/-10 sq ft/gal) by spot method with daubs 25 mm - 40 mm (1" to 1-1/2") dia x 25 mm (1") high at 200 mm (8") oc each way or by bead method with 8 mm (5/16") diameter beads 350 mm (14") oc.
3.2.3.3.
Fix insulation clip type fasteners on substrate, 2 per 610 mm x 1220 mm (24" x 48") board minimum. Impale insulation board on insulation clips, butting joints firmly together and secure with washers, cut off spindles 3 mm (1/8") beyond washer. Install insulation to maintain continuity of thermal protection to building elements and spaces.
3.2.3.4. 3.2.4.
Wall Panel System: 3.2.4.1. 3.2.4.2. 3.2.4.3. 3.2.4.4. 3.2.4.5. Erect panels and joint filler strip in accordance with system manufacturer's details and instructions and so as to meet specified design and performance requirements. Ensure finished work is securely anchored, free of distortion and surface imperfections, uniform in colour and gloss. Use concealed fastenings only, except where exposed fastenings are specifically permitted by Consultant in writing. Install panels plumb, true, level and in alignment to established lines and elevations. Where indicated on Drawings or as required to complete work of this Section, supply and install closures, caps, fascias, covers and trims with colour matching panel finish, where exposed.
3.2.5.
Parapet Panels: Install panels on fire rated plywood panels as shown on Drawings. Structural steel framing to be engineered and provided by Structural Engineer.
3.3.
3.3.1.
REPAIR
Repair and touch-up with colour matching high grade enamel minor surface damage, only where permitted by Consultant and only where appearance after touch-up is acceptable to Consultant.
3.4.
3.4.1.

PAGE 07 42 43 - 12
3.4.2. 3.4.3. Non-Conforming Work: Replace damaged work which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, restored or cleaned, to satisfaction of Consultant at no cost to Owner. Manufacturer Services: 3.4.3.1. Ensure manufacturers representative carries out intermediate inspections of air barriers and insulations in the system prior to enclosure and concealment of cladding and soffit cladding system. Ensure walls and openings are within +/-3 mm (+/-1/8") and structure is plumb within 1:1000 of overall height. Have manufacturers representative and Contractor carry out final inspection and approval of completed work. Ensure membrane manufacturer's representative is on site at beginning of installation to provide training and supervision of Contractor's personnel in installation of air/vapour barrier. Ensure manufacturers representative provides frequent inspection visits thereafter to assure quality and competence of membrane installation.
3.4.3.2. 3.4.3.3. 3.4.3.4.
3.5.
3.5.1. 3.5.2.
CLEANING
Remove protective film from panels. Clean exposed panel surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 07 42 43 - 13
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 54 23 Project No: 2011.008 TPO ROOFING MECHANICALLY FASTENED PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.
1.1.1.
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide TPO roofing system mechanically fastened including but not limited to following: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. 1.2.1.5. 1.2.1.6. 1.2.1.7. 1.2.1.8. sloped roof deck by structural. vapour retarder. roof insulation. single ply TPO roofing membrane and flashings. roof drains. roof accessories. roof walkways. removal and replacement and tying into existing roofing systems.
1.2.2.
Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. 1.2.2.3. 1.2.2.4. 1.2.2.5. 1.2.2.6. 1.2.2.7. 1.2.2.8. Cutting existing roof slabs: Section 02 41 00, Demolition and Salvage. Concrete deck finish: Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. Metal deck and metal curbs: Section 05 30 00, Metal Decking. Plywood and wood framing: Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry. Supply of prepainted flashings: Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. Sealants except for sealant required for roof flashings: Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. Provision of fall arrest anchors: Section 14 84 24, Fall Arrest System. Supply of roof drains: Division 22, Plumbing.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. CaGBC: Canadian Green Building Council; www.cagbc.org. CRCA: Canadian Roofing Contractors Association; www.roofingcanada.com. FM: Factory Mutual Global; www.fmglobal.com.
PAGE 07 54 23 - 1
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 54 23 Project No: 2011.008 TPO ROOFING MECHANICALLY FASTENED
1.3.1.4. 1.3.1.5. 1.3.1.6. 1.3.1.7. 1.3.2. 1.3.3. LTTR: Long Term Thermal Resistance. OIRCA: Ontario Industrial Roofing Contractors Association; www.ontarioroofing.com. TPO: Thermoplastic polyolefin. ULC: Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada; www.ulc.ca.
Definitions: Conform to ASTM D1079 for glossary of terms and definitions of roofing terminology. Reference Standards: 1.3.3.1. 1.3.3.2. 1.3.3.3. 1.3.3.4. 1.3.3.5. 1.3.3.6. 1.3.3.7. 1.3.3.8. 1.3.3.9. ASTM D1079-10 ASTM D3273-00(05) - Standard Terminology Relating to Roofing and Waterproofing - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber
ASTM D6878/D6878M-11a - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing ASTM E84-11a ASTM E136-11 CSA B111-74(03) FM 4450-89 FM 4470-86 CAN/ULC-S102-07 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750C - Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples - Approval Standard for Class 1 Insulated Steel Deck Roofs - Approval Standard for Class 1 Roof Covers - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Roof Coverings - Standard Method of Test for Determination of NonCombustibility in Building Materials - Standard Method of Test for Fire Spread Under Roof-Deck Assemblies - Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polyisocyanurate, Boards, Faced Polyurethane and
1.3.3.10. CAN/ULC-S107-10 1.3.3.11. CAN/ULC-S114-05 1.3.3.12. CAN/ULC-S126-06 1.3.3.13. CAN/ULC-S704-03 1.3.3.14. CAN/ULC-S770-03
- Standard Test Method for Determination of Long-Term Thermal Resistance of Closed Cell Thermal Insulating Foams
1.4.
1.4.1.
Coordination: Coordinate the integration of new membrane with existing roof system. Maintain continuity of membrane.
PAGE 07 54 23 - 2
1.4.2. Preinstallation Meetings: 1.4.2.1. Arrange preinstallation meeting 1 week prior to commencing work with parties associated with trade as designated in Contract Documents or as requested by Consultant. Presided over by Contractor, include Consultant who may attend, Subcontractor performing work of this trade, testing company's representative and consultants of applicable discipline. Review Contract Documents for work included under this trade and determine complete understanding of requirements and responsibilities relative to work included, storage and handling of materials, materials to be used, installation of materials, sequence and quality control, Project staffing, restrictions on areas of work and other matters affecting construction, to permit compliance with intent of work of this Section. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work including roofing requirements for interfacing with roof accessories and roof mounted equipment. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during roofing. Review flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
1.4.2.2. 1.4.2.3. 1.4.2.4. 1.4.2.5. 1.4.2.6. 1.4.2.7. 1.4.2.8. 1.4.2.9. 1.4.3.
Scheduling: 1.4.3.1. 1.4.3.2. Co-operate fully with other Subcontractors on the Work and promptly proceed with this work as rapidly as job conditions permit. Supply items to be built in, in ample time to be incorporated into work of other Subcontractors as it is carried up. Proceed with insulation, roofing and flashing work as soon as walls and roof decks are ready to receive same.
1.5.
1.5.1. 1.5.2.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit Product data on membrane, insulation, flashing materials and roof accessories. Shop Drawings: 1.5.2.1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01 30 00 showing method of installation and layout of each layer, fastening and flashings at edges, flashing of protrusions and penetrations, details of insulation and vapour retarder. Ensure Shop Drawings are approved and signed by manufacturer's representative.
1.5.2.2. 1.5.3.
Samples: Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Submit following samples in sizes indicated: 1.5.3.1. 1.5.3.2. insulation (standard and tapered) 300 mm x 300 mm (12" x 12") square. roof membrane 300 mm x 300 mm (12" x 12") square.
PAGE 07 54 23 - 3
1.5.3.3. 1.5.4. metal flashing material 300 mm (12") long.
Tests and Evaluation Reports: 1.5.4.1. Provide Product test reports based on evaluation of comprehensive test performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency for components of roofing system. Indicate components of roofing system comply with requirements of these Specifications including quantity, statistical and descriptive data for each Product.
1.5.4.2.
1.6.
1.6.1.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operational and Maintenance Data: 1.6.1.1. 1.6.1.2. Supply necessary maintenance data and repair instructions for binding into maintenance manuals described in Section 01 70 00. Bind into each maintenance manual, Project name, location, dated and executed copy of manufacturer's guarantee, described herein and name, address and phone number of nearest manufacturer's representative. Include recommendations for periodic inspections, care and maintenance. Identify common causes of damage with instructions for temporary patching until permanent repair can be made.
1.7.
1.7.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications: 1.7.1.1. Manufacturer: Ensure manufacturer of membrane is able to show Owner or Consultant an existing operational TPO roof system supplied by same manufacturer that has been operational for a minimum of 10 years. Installers: 1.7.1.2.1. Ensure applicator of roofing work is a member in good standing with CRCA and has a minimum of 5 years experience in installing single-ply roofing and have specialized equipment in proper operating condition to perform work in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Ensure applicator is trained and approved by manufacturer of system being installed.
1.7.1.2.
1.7.1.2.2. 1.7.2.
Conform to CRCAs Roofing Specifications manual as amended to date of this Specification, as applicable, except where indicated or specified otherwise. Do roofing work employing roofing Products, roof sheathing, plates and fasteners conforming to FM data for proposed roofing system. More stringent requirements in Consultants opinion shall govern.
1.8.
1.8.1. 1.8.2.

Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver and store materials undamaged in original containers with manufacturer's labels and seals intact. Store membrane rolls flat and protected from moisture. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1.8.2.1. Store materials undamaged in original containers with manufacturer's labels and seals intact. Store membrane rolls flat and protected from moisture.
PAGE 07 54 23 - 4
1.8.2.2. Store solvent based liquids, adhesives and sealants away from excessive heat and open flames and at temperatures between 15 deg C (59 deg F) and 26 deg C (79 deg F). Contact adhesives and cleaning fluids are extremely flammable, avoid open flame and sparks. Smoking is prohibited in area of roofing application. Contact adhesives contain petroleum distillates; avoid breathing vapours and provide adequate ventilation when using same within enclosed areas. Do not expose insulation to wet weather. Store and handle insulation to prevent broken edges and corners, punctures, indentations or other damage. Remove damaged insulation from site. Store materials at site within temporary sheds or trailers; such facilities must be well sealed and kept at least 3 deg C (5 deg F) warmer than exterior ambient temperature to ensure materials remain dry in terms of roofing. Do not use wet, damp, frozen or damaged materials. Do not store more than 1 Day's supply of materials on the roof at any time. On roof, stack materials on pallets and completely cover with incombustible waterproof tarpaulin whenever work is interrupted, or when there is precipitation of any kind. Securely tie covering to pallets in such way as to be weathertight. Plastic covers and shrinkwrap covers by manufacturers are not acceptable for site storage and be removed upon delivery to roof. Distribute materials stored on roof to stay within designated live load limits of the roof construction. Provide ample bases under equipment and materials to distribute weight to conform to these live-load limits. Do not store materials on, or transport materials across, completed roof areas. Provide fire extinguishers at each installation and storage location, of proper type for materials being used and stored.
1.8.2.3.
1.8.2.4.
1.8.2.5.
1.8.2.6.
1.8.2.7.
1.9.
1.9.1.
SITE CONDITIONS
Ambient Conditions: Do not install materials in rain, fog, sleet, cold (temperatures below -15 deg C (5 deg F)), moisture, frost, snow or other climatic conditions which could jeopardize proper application of materials. Refer to and comply with manufacturer's recommendations and limitations relative to this subject. Existing Conditions: 1.9.2.1. Modifications may take place on existing adjacent roof areas as part of work of this Section. Do not use existing roof areas as storage, except to extent required for removal, alteration and replacement work. Existing roofing may be covered by roofing warranty or guarantee. Obtain from Consultant necessary information regarding such warranty or guarantee and notify guarantor system manufacturer and guarantor roofing contractor, by letter before work is commenced on existing roofing system. Execute alteration work in manner as to maintain existing warranty or guarantee. Provide temporary protection as specified in Section 01 50 00, while existing construction is open.
1.9.2.
1.9.2.2.
1.9.2.3. 1.9.2.4.
PAGE 07 54 23 - 5
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 54 23 Project No: 2011.008 TPO ROOFING MECHANICALLY FASTENED 1.10.
1.10.1.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer Warranty: 1.10.1.1. Warrant work of this Section using manufacturers standard form of warranty for a period of 10 years against defects and/or deficiencies (total membrane system warranty; labour, material and workmanship) in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies resulting in water leakage within warranty period and render roofing membrane to a watertight condition to satisfaction of Consultant and at no expense to Owner. 1.10.1.2. In addition to above, provide to Owner a written warranty covering defects of workmanship for a period of 2 years commencing from date of Substantial Performance of the Work and agree to Make Good promptly any defects which occur or become apparent within warranty period in conjunction with membrane manufacturer's warranty. Ensure warranty is on either CRCA's or OIRCAs Standard Form of Warranty.

2.1.1.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer List: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 2.1.1.1. 2.1.1.2. 2.1.1.3. 2.1.1.4. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated; www.carlisle-syntec.com Firestone Building Products; www.firestonebpco.com Johns Manville; www.jm.com Lexcan Ltd.; www.lexcan.com
2.2.
2.2.1.
MATERIALS
Description: 2.2.1.1. Regulatory Requirements: 2.2.1.1.1. 2.2.1.1.2. Fire Hazard Classification: Fire classification not required as assembly is protected by sprinklers. FM: Ensure roofing and flashing membranes comply with FM 4470, single ply (TPO) roofing system over steel deck complies with FM 4450 as part of roofing assembly listed in FM Approval Guide for Class 1 as applicable for Windstorm Classification 1-90. Install membrane and assembly using fastening patterns as indicated to meet 1-90. Pre-Start Health and Safety Review: Where required, provide a Pre-Start Health and Safety Review in accordance with the Occupational Health and Safety Act (Ontario), Regulation 851, as amended. Refer to Section 01 40 00 for further requirements.
2.2.1.1.3.
2.2.2.
Performance/Design Criteria: 2.2.2.1. Roofing System: TPO mechanically fastened membrane roofing system consisting of following without limitation: 2.2.2.1.1. sloped metal decking (by others).
PAGE 07 54 23 - 6
2.2.2.1.2. 2.2.2.1.3. 2.2.2.1.4. 2.2.2.1.5. 2.2.2.1.6. 2.2.2.1.7. 2.2.3. 2.2.4. 2.2.5. vapour retarder. base insulation. roofing membrane (TPO). roof flashings. roof drains. metal cap flashings.
Vapour Retarder: MB Base SA by Firestone Building Products or equivalent equal.. Vapour Retarder Adhesive: Permstop Adhesive by Johns Manville or Permate Adhesive by Lexcan. Roof Insulation Board: 2.2.5.1. Rigid Polyisocyanurate Insulation Boards: Square edged, closed cell polyisocyanurate foam manufactured using Hydrocabon (HC), Zero Ozone Depleting Potential (ZeroODP) HCFC free blowing agents and integrally laminated to heavy, non-asphaltic, fibre reinforced, felt facers, meeting requirements of CAN/ULC-S704, Type 2 or 3, CAN/ULC-S126 and CAN/ULC-S107. Approved and listed by Factory Mutual Global for Class 1-90 as applicable windstorm classification and conforming FM4450/4470 approval requirements for Class 1 Fire as a component in roof deck construction. Provide 100 mm (4") thick with LTTR Rvalue of R-25 for insulation when determined in accordance with CAN/ULC-S770 and following: 2.2.5.1.1. Multiple Layers: Ensure maximum thickness for 1 layer of insulation is 50 mm (2") having compressive strength of 140 kPa (20 psi) and LTTR Rvalue of 12.1 per square edged layer. Ensure joints are staggered. Dimension Stability: 2% maximum linear change when conditioned at 158 deg F (70 deg C) and 97% relative humidity for 7 Days; curing time 24 hours minimum, plus an additional 24 hours minimum per inch (25 mm) of thickness, at a minimum of 60 deg F (16 deg C) before shipment from manufacturer. Ensure maximum board size for mechanically attached insulation boards is 1200 mm x 2400 mm, (4' x 8'), maximum board size for insulation boards adhered to substrate is 1200 mm x 1200 mm (4' x 4').
2.2.5.1.2.
2.2.5.1.3.
2.2.6.
Fasteners: 2.2.6.1. Fasteners and pressure distribution plate to meet Factory Mutual 4470 for Class 1-90. Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion resistance provisions in FM 4470; designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength; and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. Ensure fasteners engage in steel deck a maximum of 19 mm (3/4"). Screws: Zinc and dichromate plated. Nails: Non-ferrous or galvanized steel, flat head, barbed roofing nails, CSA B111, Table 12, size and type to suit application. Metal Plates: 75 mm x 75 mm (3" x 3") with stiffening ribs. Metal Discs: Flat caps of 25 mm (1") minimum diameter, 0.759 mm (22 ga) minimum sheet metal, formed to prevent dishing. No discs are required with roofing nails having 25 mm (1") diameter solid cap heads.
2.2.6.2. 2.2.6.3. 2.2.6.4. 2.2.6.5.
PAGE 07 54 23 - 7
2.2.7. Roofing Membrane: Sure-Weld by Carlisle, "UltraGard SRT-60 FR" by Johns Manville, Hi-Tuff TPO by Lexcan or Ultraply TPO by Firestone Building Products, 1.5 mm (60 mils) thickness, polyester reinforced, ultra-violet light resistant, white coloured thermoplastic polyolefin elastomeric sheet membrane conforming to ASTM D6878/D6878M. Membrane Fastening: "UltraFast" by Johns Manville or HD Seam Plates by Firestone Building Products self-tapping, corrosion-resistant fastener and disc, corrosion-resistant 75 mm (3") round metal distribution plate for in-seam securement of roof membrane. Flashing Membrane: Sure-Weld by Carlisle, "UltraGard SRT-60 FR" by Johns Manville, Hi-Tuff TPO by Lexcan or Ultraply TPO by Firestone Building Products, 1.5 mm (60 mils) thickness, polyester reinforced, ultra-violet light resistant, white coloured thermoplastic polyolefin elastomeric sheet membrane. Bonding Adhesive: "UltraGard TPO Membrane Adhesive" by Johns Manville, Hi-Tuff TPO Bonding Adhesive by Lexcan or Ultraply Bonding Adhesive by Firestone Building Products applied to underside of membrane and BA-90 Bonding Adhesive applied to substrate, elastomer solvent based. Membrane Cleaner: Sure-Weld Membrane Cleaner by Carlisle, UltraGard TPO Weathered Membrane Cleaner by Johns Manville, Lexcan Hi-Tuff TPO Seam Cleaner by Lexcan or Splice Wash by Firestone Building Products. Edge Sealant: "UltraGard TPO Cut Edge Sealant" by Johns Manville, Lexcan Hi-Tuff TPO Cut Edge Sealant by Lexcan or Ultraply TPO Cut Edge Sealant by Firestone Building Products, polymeric based, 1 component sealing compound, colour grey. Primer: "UltraGard TPO Membrane Primer by Johns Manville, Lexcan Hi-Tuff TPO Seam Cleaner by Lexcan or Ultraply Quick Prime by Firestone Building Products. Roof Walkways: Traffic Pads: Heat Weldable Walkway Pads by Carlisle, Hi-Tuff TPO Walkway Pads by Lexcan Ltd. or TPO ECO by Firestone Building Products. Conduit Flashing: "MEF-AG1/TPO" by Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. or Gooseneck Wire & Cable Flashing by Lexcor, size, quantity and locations as shown. Vent Pipe Flashings: "SJ-27/TPO" by Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. or Vent Stack Covers by Lexcor, size, quantity and locations as shown. Roof Drains: Flash-Tite SuperDrains by Lexcor, complete with clamping ring and back-flow prevention seal, to fit drainage pipe. Loose Insulation: CAN/ULC-S702, glass fibre insulation by Owens Corning.
2.2.8.
2.2.9.
2.2.10.
2.2.11.
2.2.12.
2.2.13. 2.2.14. 2.2.15. 2.2.16. 2.2.17. 2.2.18.

3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
Verification of Conditions: 3.1.1.1. 3.1.1.2. 3.1.1.3. Report any defects or irregularities in roof deck detrimental to roof application. Do not proceed until corrected. Check deck is properly installed with required slopes to attain positive drainage and drains are connected. Ensure openings, walls and projections through deck are completed and affixed and reglets and nailing strips are in place prior to membrane installation. Cooperate with mechanical and/or electrical Divisions as necessary.
PAGE 07 54 23 - 8
3.1.1.4. 3.1.1.5. Ensure deck substrate scheduled to receive roof system is smooth, dry, clean and free of sharp projections and of sufficient strength to withstand construction traffic and equipment. Ensure plywood and lumber nailer plates and parapets are installed and secure as shown. Verify sleeves, anchors and other items to be secured to or to pass through roof membrane are installed.
3.1.2.
3.2.
3.2.1.
PREPARATION
Surface Preparation: 3.2.1.1. Immediately before any roofing materials are applied, clean deck in accordance with roofing manufacturer's recommendations. Remove ice and snow and dry decks. Do not use salt or calcium to remove snow or ice. Do no roofing work during rain, fog, sleet or snow, or upon surfaces covered with dust, water, dew, ice, frost, snow and similar detrimental conditions. Before commencing work, ensure environmental and site conditions are suitable for installation of material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Prevent debris from blocking drain pipes during work of this Section. Ensure roof anchors have been coordinated and installed in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
3.2.1.2. 3.2.1.3. 3.2.1.4. 3.2.1.5.
3.3.
3.3.1.
INSTALLATION
Perform work per roof membrane manufacturer's printed installation instructions for the specified system, per CRCAs "Roofing Specifications manual, "FM" and "ULC" requirements and as specified herein. Do not phase roofing installation. Install complete roof system on a daily basis, including flashings. Fibre Cants: Install cants at intersections of roofing and vertical surfaces except where indicated otherwise on Drawings. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Lay true to line, level and with flush, butt joints and accurate corner mitres. Vapour Retarder Directly over Metal Deck: Install vapour retarder so it provides continuous barrier. Overlap and seal to adjacent air/vapour barrier at top of parapets and curbs to ensure air/vapour barrier continuity of building envelope. Install vapour retarder under cant strips, blocking and onto vertical surfaces to meet wall air/vapour barrier and seal with fire retardant adhesive. Completely seal vapour retarder at terminations, obstructions and penetrations to prevent air movement into roofing system. Roof Insulation: 3.3.5.1. 3.3.5.2. Before laying any roof insulation, verify integrity of and repair any damage to vapour retarder. Use full size insulation boards wherever possible and minimum half boards at abutting vertical surfaces. Place insulation in tight contact at joints between boards and at abutting surfaces. When cutting insulation board, cut completely through board thickness and trim to provide plain butt joints; do not break or tear insulation board to fit detail. Any areas of insulation system having voids will be rejected.
3.3.2. 3.3.3.
3.3.4.
3.3.5.
PAGE 07 54 23 - 9
3.3.5.3. Do not lay more insulation than can be completely covered as a finished roofing system on the same Day. Install insulation board in straight parallel rows with long side at right angle to flutes of steel deck. Stagger end joints of base layer insulation minimum 50%. Cut ends of base layer insulation units as required to provide minimum 50 mm (2") edge bearing on ribs of roof deck. Verify roof deck type and rib spacing with metal roof deck manufacturer prior to ordering insulation. Secure overall insulation assembly through vapour retarder into steel roof deck with screw and plate type fasteners as specified. Install 6 fasteners per 1200 mm x 2400 mm (4' x 8') top layer insulation board, 4 fasteners per 1/2 board and a minimum of 2 fasteners per partial piece. Fasten insulation according to requirements in FM Approval Guide for specified Windstorm Classification. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter and field of roof. Provide cut-offs by turning back vapour retarder sheet, or otherwise, at the exposed edges of insulation under cant strips at roof edges and vertical surfaces. Reduce thickness of insulation at roof drains by 13 mm (1/2") for a distance of 600 mm (24") from drain. At steel roof deck, install insulation in flutes to support insulation where its thickness is reduced at roof drains.
3.3.5.4.
3.3.5.5.
3.3.5.6.
3.3.5.7. 3.3.5.8. 3.3.5.9.
3.3.5.10. Trim insulation to provide plain butt joints at perimeter of the insulation, at copings, parapets, curbs, drains and where the insulation meets a vertical surface passing through the roof. 3.3.5.11. Do not let roof insulation become wet or damp during storage or installation. 3.3.6. Roofing Membrane: 3.3.6.1. Unroll membrane sheets and position according to reviewed Shop Drawings. Bring outside perimeter sheets flush to base of perimeter parapet or wall, or in the case of a roof edge, extend over outside edge a minimum of 75 mm (3"). Overlap adjoining sheets a minimum 140 mm (5-1/2") on sides and whenever fasteners are included within seam. Lap end laps without fasteners a minimum of 50 mm (2"). Install perimeter sheets (whether 1/2 sheets or full sheets) parallel to perimeter in a "picture frame" pattern with overlapping corners, as shown in manufacturers standard details. Follow manufacturers recommendation for number of perimeter sheets required. Install field sheets perpendicular to direction of underlying insulation's longer dimension. Place fastening discs and screws at spacing and patterns required by FM wind uplift requirements. Set self-drilling screws with torque controlled screwdriver so not to crush insulation or strip substrate penetration. Apply 140 mm (5-1/2") to 175 mm (7") wide cover piece of roof membrane over exposed disc and fasteners required by wind uplift design. Ensure weld is a minimum 38 mm (1-1/2") wide. Hot air weld cover pieces to exterior of roof membrane. Completely fasten each membrane sheet before proceeding to next sheet. Weld field seams with an automatic hot air welder operated by an individual thoroughly trained and competent in machine's operation. Small work and repairs can be done efficiently with a hand welder, however, hand-held welders are not an accepted means of field seaming.
3.3.6.2.
3.3.6.3. 3.3.6.4.
3.3.6.5. 3.3.6.6.
PAGE 07 54 23 - 10
3.3.6.7. 3.3.6.8. Clean contaminated or dirty membrane prior to welding. Scrub visible dirt with a detergent and water or Fantastik cleaner, followed by a water rinse. Excessively dirty membrane or membrane exposed for an extended period of time may require cleaning with membrane cleaner. With a clean scrub pad saturated with membrane cleaner, aggressively scrub seam area of roof membrane. Follow with a final 1 swipe pass, being careful not to re-deposit contaminants back onto cleaned area. Ensure membrane cleaner has completely flashed off before welding. Follow standard welding procedures with a 20% reduction in speed. All splices are to be probed along their entire length with a seam probing tool to verify welder is operating effectively. Allow membrane to cool prior to testing. In addition, there should be a destructive peel strength test performed at the start of each Day and each time the robot welder is reused after being allowed to cool. Destructive test sample should be 50 mm (2") wide and should show membrane delamination from the scrim prior to weld failure.
3.3.6.9.
3.3.6.10. Seal cut membrane edges by applying edge sealant from a squeeze tube along exposed edge. 3.3.7. Membrane Flashings: 3.3.7.1. Install flashing membrane to vertical substrates, horizontal coping substrates and other vertical projections from roof including to roof accessories per reviewed Shop Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Adhere flashing membrane with bonding adhesive to vertical areas and flashings. Using a 2 solvent-resistant paint roller, coat surface with bonding adhesive at a rate of 0.33 l/m (120 sq ft/gal) and allow to dry 15 to 30 minutes. Do not apply under excessively humid conditions or at temperatures below -10 deg C (14 deg F). Do not coat more substrate than can be covered with membrane in 1 Day. Unroll flashing membrane in position and turn back 1/3 of its width. Coat underside of 2 flashing membrane with bonding adhesive at a rate of 0.17 l/m (60 sq ft/gal) and allow adhesive to flash-off until tacky but does not string when touched with a dry finger. Turn down membrane carefully onto coated surface and press solidly down. Repeat procedure with remaining 2/3 of membrane width. Brush the membrane heavily with a push broom to assure complete contact. Avoid any adhesive at lap area. Clean with membrane cleaner if necessary. Heat weld laps. Cut and weld interior corners and mitres as required. Overlap flashings at least 75 mm (3') onto roofing membrane and heat weld to produce a tight seal.
3.3.7.2.
3.3.7.3.
3.3.7.4.
3.3.8.
Roof Drains: 3.3.8.1. Install roof drain centred in depressed area of roof sump. Cut hole through insulation assembly and sump pan, to size of outside diameter and profile of drain body. Secure roof drain flange through insulation and roof sump pan with stainless steel screws at 150 mm (6") on centre around drain. Use countersunk flat head screws. Extend roofing membrane into drain opening and trim to suit allowing for clamping of membrane with cast aluminum dome. Apply continuous bead of sealant at leading edge termination between membrane and drain flange. Secure cast aluminum dome with nuts on threaded studs to provide watertight connection.
3.3.8.2.
3.3.9. 3.3.10.
Fastening to Existing Roof: Provide curb and transition joint or membrane as shown on Drawings. Roof Walkways: Where indicated on Drawings, place weldable walkway pads in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
PAGE 07 54 23 - 11
3.3.11. Roof Accessories: Install prefabricated miscellaneous roof accessory units in accordance with manufacturer's details and directions.
3.4.
3.4.1.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Site Tests and Inspections: 3.4.1.1. 3.4.1.2. 3.4.1.3. Consultant may appoint an independent roofing inspection company. If so required by inspection company, or by Consultant, make any cut tests required. Costs of such tests and making good afterwards to roofing shall be paid by this Subcontractor. Inspection - Roof Levels: 3.4.1.3.1. 3.4.1.3.2. Before roofing is commenced, inspect and check roof surfaces for levels. Undertake a series of spot levels to determine if there is any unevenness in roof decks which may result in pools of water being left on completed roofing in excess of 13 mm (1/2") depth. Ensure deck has been inspected and approved by Consultant prior to start of roofing work.
3.4.1.3.3. 3.4.1.4.
Check completed single ply membrane welds for continuity after cooling by use of a screw driver run along welded seam. Ensure joints indicate an uninterrupted extrusion of melted material from joint. Inspect completed membrane and flashings for punctures, tears and discontinuous weld seams. Apply additional layer of membrane over punctures and tears, extending minimum 50 mm (2") beyond damaged area in any direction and heat weld. Re-weld seams where necessary.
3.4.1.5.
3.5.
3.5.1.
PROTECTION
Provide adequate protection of materials and work of this Section from damage by weather, traffic and other causes. At the end of each Day's work provide temporary water cutoff between finished roofing membrane and roof deck substrate to prevent weather damage and water from entering finished roof assembly. Remove such temporary cutoff strip completely prior to commencing with work. Provide protection covering out of 13 mm (1/2") thick plywood underlaid with 25 mm (1") thick polystyrene insulation board adhered to it, over roofed areas when working from, or over, such roof surfaces. Provide such protection below hoist rigs, ladders, pallets of material, and in other circumstances where the roofing membrane is exposed to potential damage. Secure protection boards mechanically against wind storm loss. Temporarily block drain pipes during application of roofing membrane. Remove blocking each night or when work is not in progress and after work of this Section is completed. Protect existing and completed portions of roof from damage. At conclusion of each Day's work, seal exposed edges of roof insulation. Remove when resuming work. Protect work of other trades from damage resulting from work of this Section. Make Good such damage at no cost to Owner.
3.5.2.
3.5.3. 3.5.4. 3.5.5. 3.5.6.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 07 54 23 - 12
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 62 00 Project No: 2011.008 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.
1.1.1.
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim including but not limited to following: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. 1.2.1.5. pre-painted metal coping flashings. miscellaneous metal flashings on roof. sheet metal flashings at roof expansion joints. flashings at roof openings. caulking.
1.2.2.
Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. 1.2.2.3. 1.2.2.4. 1.2.2.5. Wood copings, cants and curbs: Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry. Fully adhered single ply TPO membrane roofing system: Section 07 54 23, TPO Roofing Mechanically Fastened. Sealing and caulking: Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. Flashing at curtain wall systems: Section 08 44 00, Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall and Section 08 44 13, Structurally Glazed Curtain Wall. Prefabricated curbs for mechanical equipment on roof and counterflashing for ducts penetrating roof: Division 23, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. CRCA: Canadian Roofing Contractors' Association; www.roofingcanada.com. EPDM: Eythlene Propylene Diene Monomer. OIRCA: Ontario Industrial Roofing Contractors' Association; www.ontarioroofing.com.
1.3.2.
Reference Standards: 1.3.2.1. 1.3.2.2. 1.3.2.3. ASTM B32-08 ASTM C920-11 CSA B111-74(03) - Specification for Solder Metal - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants - Wire Nails, Splices and Staples
PAGE 07 62 00 - 1
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 62 00 Project No: 2011.008 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1.4.
1.4.1.
ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Preinstallation Meetings: Prior to commencing work for this Section, arrange for Contractor, installer and manufacturers representative to meet on site and review conditions under which work is to be performed, installation procedures and inspect surfaces to receive this work.
1.5.
1.5.1.
SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings: Submit fully detailed Shop Drawings showing proposed method of shaping, forming, jointing, fastening and application of sheet metal work, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Submit lists of materials to be used to Consultant. Samples: Submit a representative sample section of pre-painted metal flashing illustrating "S" lock jointing, minimum 600 mm (24") long, method to accommodate thermal movement, cleats and fasteners. Submit sample well in advance of material fabrication.
1.5.2.
1.6.
1.6.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications: 1.6.1.1. Installers: 1.6.1.1.1. Ensure work of this Section is installed by a company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with 5 years documented experience and a member in good standing of CRCA. Conform to requirements contained in CRCA manual.
1.6.1.1.2.
1.7.
1.7.1.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer Warranty: Warrant work of this Section for period of 2 years against defects and/or deficiencies in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period, to satisfaction of Consultant and at no expense to Owner. Defects include but are limited to actual leakage, loosening and splitting of seams of flashings. Ensure warranty is on either CRCAs or OIRCAs Standard Form of Warranty.

2.1.1. 2.1.2. 2.1.3. 2.1.4. 2.1.5. 2.1.6. 2.1.7.
MATERIALS
Sheet Steel Concealed from View: Commercial quality galvanized sheet to ASTM A653/A653M, 0.50 mm (26 ga) thick minimum, Z275 (G90) zinc coated by hot-dip process. Aluminum Flashings, Closures and Trim: AA 1100, H14 temper aluminum alloy, 1.0 mm aluminum sheet, finish to match adjacent cladding finish/colour. Solder: Provide solder conforming to ASTM B32. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper; 1.2 mm thick EPDM strips or modified bituminous sheet Bituthene 3000" by Grace Construction Products. Dielectric Separator: Provide best grade, quick drying non-staining alkali resistant bituminous paint or epoxy resin solution or membrane type to acceptance of Consultant. Bedding Compound: Rubber-asphalt type. Plastic Cement: As recommended by installer and acceptable to Consultant.
PAGE 07 62 00 - 2
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 62 00 Project No: 2011.008 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
2.1.8. 2.1.9. 2.1.10. 2.1.11. Sealant: Supply 1 part polysulphide, PRC "Rubber Caulk 5000-S", Parr "Unilastic" or other sealants conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS. Starter Strips: Of same material as flashing used, 1.2 mm (18 ga), minimum 38 mm (1-1/2") wide, interlocked with metal flashing. Flashing Cleats, Starter Strips, Skirts, Clips and Backup Plates: Same as specified sheet metal, unless indicated otherwise, make cleats at best 50 mm (2") wide and interlocked with metal flashing. Flashing Fasteners: Nails, screws, bolts and other fastening devices and fasteners to CSA B111, Table 12, finished to match metal being fastened where exposed to view. Size and type to suit applicable conditions. Use stainless steel where connecting directly to concrete. Fabrication: 2.1.12.1. Fabricate copings, parapet vertical flashings, flashings, curb counter flashing starter clips, strips and miscellaneous flashings in accordance with CRCA recommendations and to detail indicated. 2.1.12.2. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. Equally space joints in any 1 run of flashing to suit building module or window spacing and in all cases locate in consultation with Consultant before installation commences. Make dedicated flashings meeting the Project requirements for roof mounted equipments to details shown. 2.1.12.3. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet, minimum 50 mm (2") wide, interlockable with sheet. 2.1.12.4. Form pieces in longest practical lengths. Make joints to permit thermal movement. Make flashing surfaces free from building, warp, wave, dents, oil canning or other defects. 2.1.12.5. Hem exposed edges on underside 13 mm (1/2"); mitre and seam corners. 2.1.12.6. Form material with standing seam. 2.1.12.7. Fabricate corners from 1 piece with minimum 450 mm (18") long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. Make corners square and surfaces straight and in true planes. 2.1.12.8. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 6 mm (1/4") and hemmed to form drip. 2.1.12.9. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 50 mm (2") over roofing gravel and paver. Return and brake edges. Form sheet metal pans 150 mm (6") nominal size, with 75 mm (3") upstand and 100 mm (4") flanges. Fill pans watertight with plastic cement. 2.1.13. Finishes: 2.1.13.1. Shop prepare and prime exposed ferrous metal surfaces. 2.1.13.2. Concealed metal surfaces to receive 1 coat of bituminous paint, 0.4 mm (1/64") thickness. 2.1.13.3. To match adjacent metal finishes designated on Drawings.
2.1.12.
PAGE 07 62 00 - 3
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 62 00 Project No: 2011.008 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1.
3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
Verification of Conditions: 3.1.1.1. 3.1.1.2. 3.1.1.3. Verify actual site dimensions and location of adjacent materials prior to commencing work. Notify Consultant in writing of any conditions which would be detrimental to the installation. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place and nailing strips located. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed and secure.
3.1.2.
3.2.
3.2.1.
PREPARATION
Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work.
3.3.
3.3.1. 3.3.2. 3.3.3. 3.3.4. 3.3.5. 3.3.6. 3.3.7. 3.3.8. 3.3.9. 3.3.10. 3.3.11.
INSTALLATION
Conform to drawing details included in CRCA manuals. Install copings, curb coverings, starter strips, (back-up plates), pipe collars and other flashings to details shown on Drawings. Exposed fastenings will not be permitted in the Work. Install starter strips where indicated or required to present a true, non-waving, leading edge. Anchor to back-up to provide rigid, secure installation. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with plastic wedges. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only in locations accepted by Consultant. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. Provide and maintain continuity of air/vapour barrier to adjacent dissimilar materials. Seal to form weathertight seal between flashing and adjoining surfaces and between flashing and other work. Aluminum Coping Flashings: Make end joints where adjacent lengths of metal flashing meet, using a 300 mm (12") long back-up flashing secured in place before installing flashing. Apply beads of caulking compound on face of back-up plate to seal ends of metal flashing. Leave 13 mm (1/2") wide space between ends of adjacent lengths of metal flashing. Fabricate back-up plates of same material and finish as metal flashing with which it is being used. Make back-up plate profile of flashing allowing for metal thickness. Caulking: Caulk where required to form weathertight seal between flashing and adjoining surfaces and between flashing and other work of this Section. Caulking work consists of bedding between members where possible and with neatly formed caulking bead where exposed.
3.3.12.
PAGE 07 62 00 - 4
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 62 00 Project No: 2011.008 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 3.4.
3.4.1.

3.5.
3.5.1. 3.5.2.
PROTECTION
Protect work of this Section from damage. Protect reglets from ice formation during freezing weather.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 07 62 00 - 5
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 81 00 Project No: 2011.008 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.
1.1.1.
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide sprayed fire-resistive materials including but not limited to following: 1.2.1.1. spray applied fire-resistive materials.
1.2.2.
Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. 1.2.2.3. Provision of structural steel and steel joists: Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel. Provision of steel deck: Section 05 30 00, Metal Decking. High performance corrosion protection primer for non galvanized steel members and galvanized primer for galvanized perimeter steel and structural steel members to receive sprayed fire resistive materials: Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel, Section 05 30 00, Metal Decking and Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. 1.3.1.4. 1.3.1.5. 1.3.1.6. 1.3.1.7. 1.3.1.8. AWCI: The Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International; www.awci.org. MSDS: Material Safety Data Sheets. NIOSH: The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health; www.cdc.gov/niosh. OBC: The Ontario Building Code, 2006. SFRM: Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials. TLV: Threshold Limit Value. UL: Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com. ULC: Underwriters Laboratories of Canada; www.ulc.ca.
1.3.2.
Reference Standards: 1.3.2.1. 1.3.2.2. 1.3.2.3. ANSI/UL 263 ASTM E84-11a ASTM E119-11a - Fire Resistance Ratings (BXUV) - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
PAGE 07 81 00 - 1
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 81 00 Project No: 2011.008 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
1.3.2.4. 1.3.2.5. 1.3.2.6. 1.3.2.7. 1.3.2.8. 1.3.2.9. ASTM E605-93(11) ASTM E736-00(11) ASTM E760-92(11) ASTM E761-92(11) ASTM E859-93(11) ASTM E937-93(11) - Standard Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material (SFRM) Applied to Structural Members - Standard Test Method for Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Sprayed FireResistive Material Applied to Structural Members - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members - Standard Test Method for Air Erosion of Sprayed FireResistive Materials (SFRMs) Applied to Structural Members - Standard Test Method for Corrosion of Steel by Sprayed FireResistive Material (SFRM) Applied to Structural Members - Adhesive, Contact, Brushable - Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials - Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies
1.3.2.10. CAN/CGSB-71.20-M88 1.3.2.11. CAN/ULC-S101-07 1.3.2.12. CAN/ULC-S102-07
1.4.
1.4.1.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit brand names and descriptive catalogue data of proposed Products as follows: 1.4.1.1. Include complete test report in cases where references are not published by testing laboratories and where authority having jurisdiction has approved significant changes from tested assembly on basis of an engineering study; ensure study calculations accompany report. Where SFRM are scheduled to be applied directly over existing primed surfaces, or where contact is made with primed surfaces, submit letter from manufacturer of fireproofing signifying compatibility between all contact materials.
1.4.1.2.
1.4.2.
Certificates: 1.4.2.1. 1.4.2.2. Submit applicator's certification that SFRM have been applied in accordance with ULC or UL Designs specified. Submit test results in accordance with CAN/ULC-S101 or ANSI/UL 263 for fire endurance and CAN/ULC-S102 or ASTM E84 for surface burning characteristics.
1.5.
1.5.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications: 1.5.1.1. Installers: Provide work of this Section executed by competent installers with minimum of 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies specified and with approval and training of the Product manufacturers.
PAGE 07 81 00 - 2
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 81 00 Project No: 2011.008 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 1.6.
1.6.1.

Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver SFRM in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name, brand of Product, certification labels for fire hazard and fire resistance classifications (ULC or cUL labels). Storage and Handling Requirements: 1.6.2.1. 1.6.2.2. Refer to Product MSDS for precautionary measures during storage and handling. Store materials in dry, protected area, off ground in original undamaged, sealed containers. Discard any bags or containers that have been exposed to water before use.
1.6.2.
1.7.
1.7.1.
SITE CONDITIONS
Ambient Conditions: 1.7.1.1. Maintain air and substrate temperature of 5 deg C (40 deg F) for 24 hours prior to installation, during and for a minimum of 24 hours after application of materials. Provide heated enclosures to maintain temperatures. Provide adequate air circulation and exhaust to outdoors to achieve total air exchange rate of 4 times per hour until material is completely dry.
1.7.1.2.
1.8.
1.8.1.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer Warranty: Warrant work of this Section for a period of 2 years against defects and/or deficiencies in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period, to satisfaction of Consultant and at no expense to Owner. Defects include but are not limited to; flaking, delamination, fibre loss, crazing and cracking or evidence of other defects of finish.

2.1.1.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer List: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 2.1.1.1. 2.1.1.2. 2.1.1.3. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.; www.adfire.com Cafco Industries Inc.; www.cafco.com Grace Construction Products; www.graceconstruction.com
2.1.2.
Substitution Limitations: Comparable Products from manufacturers listed herein will be accepted provided they meet requirements of this Specification. No further substitutions will be permitted.
2.2.
2.2.1.
MATERIALS
Description: 2.2.1.1. Regulatory Requirements: 2.2.1.1.1. Ensure materials and applied systems have full acceptance by authorities having jurisdiction. Ensure minimum acceptable standards SFRM conform to OBC, Division B, Part 3, Subsection 3.1.7 "Fire Resistance Rating" and CAN/ULC-S101, ANSI/UL 263, ASTM E84 and ASTM E119.
PAGE 07 81 00 - 3
2.2.1.1.2. Minimum acceptable physical performance standards are those stated herein. Materials having higher performance standards are not precluded from submission or acceptance. Conform to ULC or cUL providing restrained or unrestrained fire rating as scheduled to suit design requirements.
2.2.1.1.3. 2.2.2.
Fire-Resistive Materials: Gypsum based cementitious materials with synthetic or organic aggregates, Portland cement based or inorganic mineral wool fibres; containing factory added mould inhibitors to prevent growth of organisms and fungi; listed in specified ULC or cUL design, providing fire rating specified and meeting physical performance characteristics as specified. Provide materials certified as fire resistant by ULC or cUL in accordance with CAN/ULC-S101, ANSI/UL 263 or ASTM E119 and are asbestos free. Ensure materials do not induce deterioration of members to which they are applied. Ensure bonding agents, binders, accessories, cleaning solvents, aggregates and sealers are in accordance with base material manufacturers recommendation. Ensure mixing water is potable, clear and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic matter, sediment or any other deleterious or stain-producing substances. Fiberglass Mesh: Symmetrical, interlaced glass fibre made from twisted multi-end strands with alkaline 2 resistant coating of 32.21 36.28 g/m (0.95 1.07 oz/sq yd), for compatibility with system materials. Ensure mesh is shift-proof, with trimmed roll edges to minimize building on overlapped seams. Ensure 2 nominal Greige weight of mesh is 130.54 g/m (3.85 oz/sq yd). Ensure reinforcing mesh adhesive is water resistive type glue of approved characteristics and manufacturer, suitable for use intended; contact type to CAN/CGSB-71.20-M. Expanded Metal Lath: In sheet sizes of 685 mm x 2438 mm (27" x 96") from galvanized, copper alloy 2 steel sheets. Use 9 mm (3/8") rib lath at 7.05 kg/m (3.4 lbs/sq yd). Ensure water is clean, potable and free of any deleterious substances harmful to fireproofing material. Sealer: Type recommended by SFRM manufacturer, qualified for use in ULC or cUL Design specified or indicated. Gypsum Based Cementitious Type 1: "Monokote Type MK-6" by Grace Construction Products, "CAFCO 300" by Cafco Industries Inc. or A/D Type 5" by A/D Fire Protection Systems similar type meeting performance criteria specified herein and approved by Consultant. Physical Performance Characteristics: 2.2.12.1. Type 1 Gypsum Based Cementitious: Characteristics 2.2.12.1.1. 2.2.12.1.2. 2.2.12.1.3. 2.2.12.1.4. 2.2.12.1.5. 2.2.12.1.6. Bond Strength Corrosion Density Compressive Strength Air Erosion Deflection ASTM References E736 E937 E605 E761 E859 E759 Required Results 150 psf Pass 15 PCF 750 psf 0.000 G/SF < 0.025 G/SF Pass
2.2.3. 2.2.4. 2.2.5. 2.2.6. 2.2.7.
2.2.8. 2.2.9. 2.2.10. 2.2.11.
2.2.12.
PAGE 07 81 00 - 4
2.2.13. Mixes: 2.2.13.1. Mix SFRM as recommended by manufacturer. 2.2.13.2. Do not use partially set, frozen, caked or lumpy materials. Mix each batch separately in mechanical mixer and clean mixer free of particles before mixing new batch.

3.1.1. 3.1.2. 3.1.3. 3.1.4.
EXAMINATION
Examine surfaces to receive SFRM and report to Consultant any defects. Commencement of work implies acceptance of surfaces and conditions. Ensure ducts, pipe, conduit and other items which would interfere with application of sprayed fireresistive materials, have not been installed until SFRM work is completed. Do not apply SFRM until clips, hangers, inserts, sleeves and similar items have been installed in areas to receive SFRM. Verify application of high performance corrosion protection primer on non galvanized steel members and galvanized primer for galvanized perimeter steel and structural steel members to receive SFRM. Ensure primed surfaces to receive SFRM are compatible with SFRM and bond requirements. Do not commence application of SFRM prior to completion of concrete work on steel decking. Do not commence application of SFRM prior to completion of roofing application and roof traffic has ceased. Evaluation and Assessment: Commencement of work implies acceptance of previously completed work.
3.1.5. 3.1.6. 3.1.7.
3.2.
3.2.1.
PREPARATION
Protection of In-Place Conditions: 3.2.1.1. 3.2.1.2. Provide temporary enclosures and masking to prevent spray from contaminating adjacent areas and surfaces. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray, fall-out and dusting of SFRM.
3.2.2.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces free of dust, dirt, oil, grease, loose paint, mill scale and other foreign matter which would interfere with bond of SFRM. Ensure surfaces to be sprayed are dry and reviewed by Consultant before spraying.
3.3.
3.3.1.
APPLICATION
Safety Precautions: 3.3.1.1. Respiratory Protection from Dust: Use NIOSH approved N95 dust mask for cementitious fireproofing application and NIOSH approved N95 respirators for mineral fibre fireproofing application. Ventilation: Provide sufficient air supply to maintain dust levels below TLV. Eye Protection: Wear dust goggles.
3.3.1.2. 3.3.1.3.
PAGE 07 81 00 - 5
3.3.1.4. 3.3.2. 3.3.3. 3.3.4. Protective Equipment: Wear loose fitting long sleeve shirt and pants when handling fireproofing materials.
Apply SFRM according to manufacturer's printed instruction, required ULC or cUL Design numbers and using spray equipment approved by manufacturer of SFRM. Apply SFRM to required total thickness and density. Apply SFRM in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and to ULC or cUL Designs requirements to suit design requirements for restrained and unrestrained conditions and as indicated on Drawings to achieve required ratings. Water tamp fibrous SFRM after application to provide dense, medium smooth surfaces. Board tamp fibrous SFRM when use in high velocity plenum and in vertical contact areas (i.e. columns in Mechanical Room) to provide additional surface protection. Apply sealer or curing compound to surface of fibrous SFRM, as required by manufacturer. Do cutting, patching and repairing of damage caused by work of this Section or of unsatisfactory SFRM as directed. Repair areas cut out or damaged as result of testing. Except as provided above, repair damaged SFRM at expense of those causing damage. Do repairs before SFRM are concealed, or if exposed, before final inspection. After application clean off any overspray and broom clean floor.
3.3.5. 3.3.6. 3.3.7. 3.3.8. 3.3.9. 3.3.10.
3.4.
3.4.1.

Site Tests and Inspections: 3.4.1.1. 3.4.1.2. 3.4.1.3. Carry out tests required by authorities having jurisdiction. Consultant may appoint independent inspection and testing company as specified in Section 01 40 00. Inspector may perform tests in accordance with AWCIs Technical Manual 12-A Standard Practice for the Testing and Inspection of Field Applied Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials; an Annotated Guide.
3.4.2.
3.5.
3.5.1.
CLEANING
Waste Management: 3.5.1.1. 3.5.1.2. Sweep up and place in disposal containers if material is accidentally released or spilled. Avoid inhalation of dust. Use approved landfill site for waste disposal.
3.6.
3.6.1. 3.6.2.
PROTECTION
Protect during installation any adjacent finished surfaces from contamination and damage due to work under this Section. Protect completed work, vulnerable corners, edges and surfaces liable to be damaged due to construction activities. Provide wood cover strips and sheet material as required to prevent damage.
PAGE 07 81 00 - 6
3.6.3. Method and materials to effect protection are subject to review by Consultant.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 07 81 00 - 7
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 81 23 Project No: 2011.008 INTUMESCENT FIRE RESISTIVE COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.
1.1.1.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide intumescent fire resistive coatings including but not limited to following: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. preparation of substrate materials for application of intumescent fire resistive coatings. inspection of substrate materials for application of intumescent fire resistive coatings. water-based intumescent fire resistive coating system: 1.2.1.3.1. 1.2.1.3.2. 1.2.1.3.3. 1.2.1.4. 1.2.1.5. primer coat for adhesion. intumescent base coat. decorative protective top coat.
inspection of intumescent fire resistive coating system thickness. protection of adjacent surfaces.
1.2.2.
Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. Provision of structural steel and steel joists: Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel. Provision of applied fireproofing not covered in this Section: Section 07 81 00, Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials. Provision of firestopping and smoke seals: Section 07 84 00, Firestopping and Smoke Seals. Provision of painting: Section 09 91 00, Painting.
1.2.2.3.
1.2.2.4.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. AWCI: Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries International. DFT: Dry Film Thickness. ULC: Underwriters Laboratories of Canada.
PAGE 07 81 23 - 1
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 81 23 Project No: 2011.008 INTUMESCENT FIRE RESISTIVE COATINGS
1.3.2. Definitions: 1.3.2.1. Intumescent: Foaming and swelling of a plastic or other material when exposed to high surface temperatures or flames, causing material to increase in volume and decrease in density as in an endothermic reaction. Usually containing chemically bound water which is used to elongate time before item being protected from heat or flame is affected. Intumescent Coatings: A family of Products, which when properly applied, offer protection to a substrate from flame spread or smoke generation, or (in the case of structural steel) protection from structural failure during a fire. This family of Products includes both intumescent fireproofing and intumescent paint Products. These may be inorganic or organic. Intumescent Fireproofing: These Products are divided into 2 sub-categories: Intumescent thin-film coatings and intumescent mastic coatings. Intumescent Mastic Fireproofing: An industry slang referring to intumescent mastic coatings. Intumescent Mastic Coating: Mastics are a thicker application of the intumescent thin-film coatings. They generally refer to solvent based intumescents. They are typically designed to be much more durable than thin-film intumescent coatings and do not offer a finish as aesthetically pleasing as thin-film intumescent coatings. These coatings may have additives such as fibres and other binder materials. Mastic coatings can be either single or multilayered having a total thickness generally greater then 5.0 mm (197 mils). Mastic coatings may also be classified with respect to vapour hazard due to the percent of solvent or other volatiles. Intumescent Thin-Film Coatings: These factory mixed Products are intended to protect structural steel columns and beams from failure during a fire. They are typically designed to not only meet the fireproofing requirements but also to offer a more aesthetically pleasing, thin-film appearance more closely resembling a paint-like finish. The coatings are either single or multi-layered having a total thickness generally within the range of 0.5 mm (20 mils) to 5.0 mm (197 mils). Surface Preparation: Cleaning or treating of substrate to be coated to ensure best possible bond between substrate and coating to be applied; remove surface contaminants that will affect performance of coating, without limitations such as oil, grease, salts, dust, dirt, dust, rust scale, mill scale and old coatings where applicable. Remove surface imperfections without limitations such as weld spatter, sharp edges, burrs, slivers, laminations, pits, porosities and crevices. Prepare surfaces to provide anchor profile or surface profile which improve mechanical bonding of coating to prepared surface by increasing surface area.
1.3.2.2.
1.3.2.3.
1.3.2.4.
1.3.2.5.
1.3.2.6.
1.3.2.7.
1.3.3.
Reference Standards: 1.3.3.1. 1.3.3.2. ASTM D2240-05(10) ASTM D2794-93(10) - Test Method for Rubber PropertyDurometer Hardness - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact) - Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abrader - Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers
1.3.3.3.
ASTM D4060-10
1.3.3.4.
ASTM D4541-09e1
PAGE 07 81 23 - 2
1.3.3.5. ASTM E84-11a - Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials - Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials - Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Sprayed FireResistive Material (SFRM) Applied to Structural Members - Test method for Effect of Deflection on Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members - Standard Test Method for Effect of Impact on Bonding of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material Applied to Structural Members - Standard Test method for Compressive Strength of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members - Technical Manual 12-B, Standard Practice for the Inspection of Field Applied Thin Film Intumescent Fire Resistive Material; an Annotated Guide - Steel Structures Painting Council: Paint Application Specification No. 2 - Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages - Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Surface Preparation Standards - Solvent Cleaning - Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Surface Preparation Standards - Hand Tool Cleaning - Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Surface Preparation Standards - Power Tool Cleaning. - Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Surface Preparation Standards - Commercial Blast Cleaning
1.3.3.6.
ASTM E119-11a
1.3.3.7.
ASTM E605-93(11)
1.3.3.8.
ASTM E759-92(11)
1.3.3.9.
ASTM E760-92(11)
1.3.3.10. ASTM E761-92(11)
1.3.3.11. AWCI - 12-B
1.3.3.12. SSPC-PA 2
1.3.3.13. SSPC-SP 1
1.3.3.14. SSPC-SP 2
1.3.3.15. SSPC-SP 3
1.3.3.16. SSPC-SP 6/NACE 3
1.4.
1.4.1.
Coordination: 1.4.1.1. Where access will be limited, coordinate installation of piping, ducts, conduit or other suspended equipment until application of intumescent fire resistive coatings is complete in that area. Ensure any painting of intumescent fire resistive coatings is coordinated with intumescent manufacturer for compatible primers and paints.
1.4.1.2.
1.4.2.
Sequencing: 1.4.2.1. Coordinate sequence of work with other installers of work that need to penetrate intumescent fire resistive coatings, to avoid unnecessary damage and patching. Coordinate sequence of work with other installers of work that would obstruct access to surfaces to be fireproofed.
1.4.2.2.
PAGE 07 81 23 - 3
1.4.3. Scheduling: Cooperate in coordination and scheduling of intumescent fire resistive coatings work to avoid delays in Work Schedule.
1.5.
1.5.1.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Submit Product data indicating: 1.5.1.1. 1.5.1.2. 1.5.1.3. 1.5.1.4. 1.5.1.5. 1.5.1.6. Product characteristics. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. Performance and limitation criteria. Preparation instructions and recommendations. Application instructions, field application manual, methods and performance. ULC Design Listings for specific applications required.
1.5.2.
Samples: If requested, submit samples in accordance with Section 01 30 00 for intumescent fire resistive coatings showing successive stages of application. Submit following: 1.5.2.1. Top Coat: 2 minimum 200 mm x 250 mm (8 x 10) sample of each colour and gloss type used.
1.5.3.
Certificates: 1.5.3.1. Submit certification of acceptability of intumescent fire resistive coating materials to Authorities having Jurisdiction. Provide a schedule indicating surfaces, ratings and thicknesses required for Project.
1.5.3.2. 1.5.4.
Test and Evaluation Reports: 1.5.4.1. Submit test reports and certificates as requested showing conformance with ULC or cUL approved designs, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Verify hourly rating, influence of coatings expansion and ability to retain insulating char layer on structural steel with manufacturers test data. In cases where such test reports are not available and/or where changes to such test reports are required, arrange, pay for, and submit test reports on basis of engineering studies and tests from an accredited testing company acceptable to Authorities having Jurisdiction.
1.5.4.2.
1.6.
1.6.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications: 1.6.1.1. Manufacturers: 1.6.1.1.1. Ensure manufacturer is a company specializing in manufacturing Products for a minimum of 10 years.
PAGE 07 81 23 - 4
1.6.1.1.2. Ensure manufacturers quality management system has been assessed and registered by an independent registrar in accordance with requirements of ISO 9001.
1.6.1.2.
Installers: 1.6.1.2.1. Provide work of this Section executed by competent applicator with minimum of 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies specified and with approval and training of the Product manufacturers. Ensure applicator is approved and licensed for this type of work by manufacturer of materials. Use equipment approved by intumescent fireproofing material manufacturer.
1.6.1.2.2.
1.7.
1.7.1.

Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver materials to site in manufacturers unopened, undamaged containers, fully identified as to trade name, type and other identifying data. Ensure packages bear ULC or cUL labels and seals for fire resistance ratings. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1.7.2.1. Store Products in dry, protected area off ground in original, undamaged sealed containers bearing manufacturer's labels, application instructions and certification labels for fire hazard and fire resistance classifications. Ship and store materials at temperatures recommended by material manufacturer. Do not freeze. Check freeze-watch indicators before accepting delivery of water-based Products unless they are immediately stored in temperature controlled spaces. Remove damaged packages found unsuitable for use and any materials which have come into contact with contaminants prior to use. Store materials at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer, and protect from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Do not store in direct sunlight. In enclosed areas, ensure ventilation is not less than 4 complete air exchanges per hour. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials and materials used with solvent-based fire resistive coating materials in accordance with requirements of local Authorities having Jurisdiction.
1.7.2.
1.7.2.2.
1.7.2.3.
1.7.2.4.
1.8.
1.8.1.
SITE CONDITIONS
Ambient Conditions: 1.8.1.1. Comply with manufacturer's recommended requirements for ambient and substrate temperature, relative humidity and substrate moisture content during application and curing of materials. Temperature and Humidity Requirements for Water-Based Intumescent Fire Resistive Coatings: Maintain air temperature and relative humidity conditions as recommended by manufacturer in spaces where Products will be installed throughout entire application and drying period until coatings are fully dried, including any interim period prior to application of top coat.
1.8.1.2.
PAGE 07 81 23 - 5
1.8.1.3. Ensure heat is uniformly distributed and adequate ventilation and dehumidification equipment (as required) is provided during application and minimum 24 hours after application of final coat of intumescent fire resistive coating and/or top coat are applied. Provide temporary enclosures as necessary to control conditions. Use electric heat if supplemental heat is required. When temperature of substrate is less then 4 deg C (40 deg F) above dew point, follow manufacturers instructions for cold weather installation. When ambient temperatures are less then 10 deg C (50 deg F), follow manufacturers instructions for cold weather installation. Relative Humidity: Water-based - 40% to 60% in work area. Not to exceed following: 1.8.1.8.1. Maximum of 75% relative humidity during application and drying of intumescent coating. Maximum of 65% relative humidity during application and drying of protective decorative top coat.
1.8.1.4. 1.8.1.5. 1.8.1.6.
1.8.1.7.
1.8.1.8.
1.8.1.8.2.
1.8.1.9.
Provide dehumidification as required to maintain humidity range and facilitate drying.
1.8.1.10. Ensure substrate is completely dry for solvent-based intumescent system application. 1.8.1.11. Maintain ventilation after application of intumescent fire resistive coatings in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
1.9.
1.9.1.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer Warranty: Warrant work of this Section for a period of 2 years against defects and/or deficiencies in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period, to satisfaction of Consultant and at no expense to Owner. Defects include but are not limited to; cracks, chalking, spalling, separation and blistering.

2.1.1.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer List: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and specifications: 2.1.1.1. 2.1.1.2. 2.1.1.3. 2.1.1.4. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.; www.adfire.com Albi Manufacturing Inc. a Division of StanChem Inc.; www.albi.com Cafco Industries Inc. by Isolatek International; www.cafco.com Carboline Protective Coatings and Linings; www.carboline.com
PAGE 07 81 23 - 6
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 81 23 Project No: 2011.008 INTUMESCENT FIRE RESISTIVE COATINGS 2.2.
2.2.1.
MATERIALS
Performance/Design Criteria: 2.2.1.1. Fireproofing: Provide thin-film intumescent fire resistive coating system, tested by independent testing agency in accordance with ASTM E119 and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 2.2.1.1.1. 2.2.1.2. Listed by ULC and bearing the ULC label.
Apply intumescent fire resistive coating materials to required thickness to provide required ULC fire resistive ratings. Be responsible for and ensure intumescent fire resistive coating materials and application, on their own and in combination with structural components and building assemblies provide specified fire resistance classification to approval of authorities having jurisdiction. Conform to fire rating requirements indicated on Drawings.
2.2.1.3.
2.2.1.4. 2.2.2.
Intumescent Fire Resistive Coating Systems: Ensure fire resistive coating system is listed by ULC and bearing ULC or cUL label on each container. Primer Coat: Corrosion inhibiting type primer for ferrous metal surfaces, hi-build type primer for irregular ferrous metal surfaces and acceptable primer for galvanized surfaces as recommended by intumescent fire resistive coating material manufacturer for use with their Product to suit site conditions. As required by intumescent fire resistive coating manufacturer. Water-Based Intumescent Fire Resistive Coating(s): Provide water-based intumescent thin-film and/or mastic fire resistive coat as follows: 2.2.4.1. 2.2.4.2. Product: Cafco SprayFilm WB3 by Cafco Industries Inc. or equivalent equal. Characteristics: 2.2.4.2.1. 2.2.4.2.2. 2.2.4.2.3. Maximum VOC Limit: 0.0 g/L. Thickness: as required by ULC system. Deflection Resistance: Pass without spalling, cracking or delaminating, when tested in accordance with ASTM E759. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 5 and smoke developed index of 30-35, Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Hardness: 69, when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240, using Durometer Hardness: Shore D. Density: 1.42 g/cc (11.0 lb/gal), when tested in accordance with ASTM E605. Cohesion and Adhesion: 340 kPa (2,013 psf) @ 65 mil DFT. when tested in accordance with ASTM D4541.
2.2.3.
2.2.4.
2.2.4.2.4.
2.2.4.2.5.
2.2.4.2.6.
2.2.4.2.7.
PAGE 07 81 23 - 7
2.2.4.2.8. Impact Resistance: 0.44 kgm. (40 inchlb) @ 65 mil DFT, when tested in accordance with ASTM D2794. and pass when tested in accordance with ASTM E760. Abrasion Resistance: 0.2600 g/1000 cycles @ 125 mL DFT when tested in accordance with ASTM D4060.
2
2.2.4.2.9.
2.2.5.
Glass Cloth: Self-adhesive, alkali resistant, 152 g/m (4.5 oz/sq yd) glass mesh cloth for use as reinforcement when required by tested fire resistive design. Interior Protective Decorative Top Coat: Provide low VOC compatible silicone alkyd coating. 2.2.6.1. Deflection Resistance: Pass without spalling, cracking or delaminating when tested in accordance with ASTM E759. Finish: Troweled. Gloss Rating: To match Consultants sample. Colour: White.
2.2.6.
2.2.6.2. 2.2.6.3. 2.2.6.4. 2.2.7. 2.2.8.
Cleaning Solvents: In accordance with fireproofing manufacturer's recommendations. Decorative Paint over Intumescent Fire Resistive Coating System: Consult manufacturer for approved paint types and application.

3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
Verification of Conditions: 3.1.1.1. Ensure ducts, pipe, conduit and other items which would interfere with application of intumescent fire resistive coatings have not been installed until intumescent fire resistive coating work is completed. Sequence work in conjunction with installation of ceiling hanger tabs, sprinkler pipes, HVAC systems, other mechanical systems and electrical equipment to avoid conflicts and damage to intumescent fire resistive coatings. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared to receive primers, basecoats or intumescent fire resistive coatings. Do not apply intumescent fire resistive coatings until clips, hangers, supports, inserts, sleeves and similar devices have been installed in areas to receive intumescent fire resistive coating system application. Identification marking of steel components must be by wax crayon to facilitate ease of removal prior to application of this intumescent fire resistive coatings. Start application only when surface and local environmental conditions are satisfactory. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another trade, notify Consultant of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. Verify substrates are ready to receive intumescent fire resistive coatings.
3.1.1.2.
3.1.1.3.
3.1.1.4.
3.1.1.5. 3.1.1.6.
PAGE 07 81 23 - 8
3.1.1.7. Verify other work that would obstruct access to surfaces to receive intumescent fire resistive coatings has not yet been installed. Verify sufficient clear working space is available. Make arrangements to install intumescent fire resistive coatings on inaccessible surfaces (less than 1 m (3) clear working access) prior to erection of steel members, either at point of fabrication or on-site. Existing Condition: Verify substrate and workspace temperature and humidity conditions are in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.1.1.8.
3.1.1.9.
3.1.1.10. Ensure primers applied beneath intumescent fire resistive coatings are compatible with applied intumescent fire resistive coatings. 3.1.1.11. Where intumescent fire resistive coatings are to be exposed to view as a finished surface, verify surfaces are smooth, without voids, cracks or projections. 3.1.2. Evaluation and Assessment: Commencement of work implies acceptance of previously completed work.
3.2.
3.2.1.
PREPARATION
Protection of In-Place Conditions: Mask or otherwise protect surrounding surfaces and areas. Install durable protective coverings on floors and adjacent walls and ceilings, to protect from overspray, fallout and dusting. Surface Preparation: 3.2.2.1. Before application, permit materials to reach same temperature as surface temperature of steel by storing unopened containers in room or area where it will be applied. Remove identification markings on steel components and grind weld flashes smooth prior to commencement of application. Clean surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose paint, rust, mill scale and other foreign matter which would interfere with bond of applied intumescent fire resistive coatings in accordance with SSPC SP 1, SSPC SP 2, SSPC-SP 3 or SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3 as recommended by intumescent fire resistive coating manufacturer. Ensure work to be protected is dry and has been approved before application of material. Seal penetrations and open ended intumescent fire resistive coating terminations as required by manufacturer. Prime galvanized and ferrous metal substrate surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Ensure surfaces are completely covered. Allow to dry. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving best result for the substrate under Project conditions. Coordinate scheduling and sequencing of work with work specified in other Sections.
3.2.2.
3.2.2.2.
3.2.2.3.
3.2.2.4.
3.2.2.5.
3.2.2.6.
3.3.
3.3.1.
APPLICATION
Prime required surfaces unless existing primer is suitable and undamaged and compatible with intumescent fire resistive coating. Allow to dry. Install base coat and reinforcing if required by intumescent fire resistive coating system design. Allow to dry. Re-coat where required. Repeat until required thickness is achieved.
3.3.2.
PAGE 07 81 23 - 9
3.3.3. Mix and apply intumescent fire resistive coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and using equipment approved by manufacturer. Apply intumescent fire resistive coating and top coat by spray, brush or trowel applied as recommended by manufacturer to achieve fire rating requirements. Apply intumescent fire resistive coating in number of coats required to achieve smooth uniform texture and total thickness necessary to provide required fire ratings. Allow to dry between coats as per manufacturers required drying time. Apply subsequent coats only after previous coat has thoroughly dried. Do not exceed wet film thickness per coat recommended by material manufacturer as detailed in manufacturers drying guidelines (based upon temperature, relative humidity and air movement/ ventilation). Use as many passes as necessary to cover with a monolithic coating of uniform hardness, density and texture. Comply with specified fire resistive designs, or use fire resistive coating thickness selection tables to determine DFT of fire resistive coating and basecoat if required, for sizes of steel elements being protected and for required fire resistance rating. At ducts, pipes and similar items passing through fire protected structural members, extend intumescent fire resistive coating material 150 mm (6") on either side along penetrating item. Measure final thickness with a calibrated DFT gauge in accordance with AWCI International Technical Manual 12-B. Do not apply top coat until it has been determined that required DFT of intumescent fireproofing has been provided. Determine DFT by field sample. Conform to SSPC-PA 2 for method of thickness determination and in accordance with AWCI International Technical Manual 12-B. Allow minimum of 5 to 15 Days between application of final coat of intumescent fire resistive coating material and application of top coat, as recommended by Product manufacturer. Apply top coat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. If system is to be painted, apply approved paint type according to intumescent fire resistive coating manufacturers instructions. Do cutting, patching and repairing of damages caused by work of this Section or of unsatisfactory intumescent fire resistive coating, as directed. Repair areas cut out or damaged as result of testing. Where intumescent fire resistive coating is subsequently cut away to facilitate installation of other work, patch intumescent fire resistive coating to same thickness and texture after installation of other work at no cost to Owner.
3.3.4.
3.3.5.
3.3.6.
3.3.7.
3.3.8.
3.3.9.
3.3.10.
3.3.11.
3.3.12. 3.3.13.
3.3.14.
3.3.15.
3.4.
3.4.1. 3.4.2.
REPAIR
Repair damaged work caused by other trades at expense of those causing damages. Remove intumescent fire resistive coating system from surfaces not specifically required to be fireproofed. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged Products before Substantial Completion.
3.4.3.
PAGE 07 81 23 - 10
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 81 23 Project No: 2011.008 INTUMESCENT FIRE RESISTIVE COATINGS 3.5.
3.5.1.

Site Tests and Inspections: 3.5.1.1. 3.5.1.2. Perform tests required by Authorities having Jurisdiction as part of work of this Section. Owner may engage services of an independent inspection and testing company to carry out inspection and testing of materials and application for Owner's quality control. Cost of such inspection and testing, if required, will be paid by Owner. Conform to requirements of AWCI International Technical Manual 12-B for testing and inspection of field applied intumescent fire resistive coating materials. Testing will occur immediately following complete drying of final thickness of intumescent fire resistive coat and before application of top coat. Notify Consultant at least 7 Days in advance to allow prompt scheduling of testing. Maintain complete record of environmental conditions such as continuous monitoring of air temperature, surface temperature, dew point temperature and percent relative humidity during and after application of intumescent fire resistive coatings. Deduct dew point temperature from surface temperature to determine probability of condensation. Accurately and non-destructively measure total dry film thickness of intumescent fire resistive coating to determine if adequate coverage has been applied to protect structure for fire rating time required by Authorities having Jurisdiction during crisis situations. Make inspection report available to Consultant. Do not proceed with top coating and/or painting until testing has been completed.
3.5.1.3.
3.5.1.4.
3.5.1.5. 3.5.2.
Non-Conforming Work: Replace damaged work which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, restored or cleaned, to satisfaction of Consultant at no cost to Owner. Manufacturer Services: 3.5.3.1. Before commencing work of this Section, have material manufacturer's representative examine surface conditions and verify substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. Arrange for periodic visits by manufacturer's representative while work is in progress to verify proper materials, methods and procedures are being followed. Verify cured intumescent fire resistive coating thickness at random locations chosen by and in presence of Consultant and manufacturers representative.
3.5.3.
3.5.3.2.
3.6.
3.6.1.
CLEANING
Clean adjoining walls, floors, equipment, ducts, pipes and other surfaces coated as a result of work of this Section. Remove excess material, over spray, droppings and debris. Do cleaning in an acceptable manner to prevent damage to finish work. Clean intumescent fire resistive coating surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
3.6.2.
3.7.
3.7.1.
PROTECTION
Protect work area from inclement weather and moisture during application and curing of materials. Protect work area from windblown dust. Protect installed Products and finish surfaces until completion of Project.
3.7.2.
PAGE 07 81 23 - 11
3.7.3. Touch-up, patch, repair or replace damaged Products before Substantial Completion, in accordance with material manufacturer's recommendations. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Clean installed Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove and legally dispose of construction debris.
3.7.4.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 07 81 23 - 12
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 84 00 Project No: 2011.008 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.
1.1.1.
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide firestopping and smoke seals including but not limited to following: 1.2.1.1. firestopping and smoke seals in accordance with Code requirements, at openings and around penetrations, at un-penetrated openings, at projecting and recessed items and at openings and joints within fire separations and assemblies having fire resistance rating, excluding those inside sealed mechanical and electrical assemblies (e.g. inside ducts, dampers, bus ducts etc.). firestopping and smoke seals in accordance with Code requirements, at openings and spaces at perimeter edge conditions, excluding those inside sealed mechanical and electrical assemblies (e.g. inside ducts, dampers, bus ducts etc.). firestopping and smoke seals between back of curtain wall and edge of slab. seals to form draft tight barriers to retard passage of flame and smoke and where specifically designated, passage of liquids while passing hose stream test. ensure seal provides and maintains a fire-resistance rating as determined by OBC for adjacent floor, wall or other fire separation assembly to requirements of and as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and to Consultant. firestopping and smoke seals in and around fire separations, including spaces around mechanical and electrical penetrations, at tops of fire walls, between slab edges and other gaps and penetrations at fire assemblies. ensure Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27 and 28 respectively are responsible for firestopping and smoke seals within mechanical (i.e. inside ducts, dampers) and electrical assemblies (i.e. inside electrical bus ducts). Ensure firestopping and smoke seals around outside of such mechanical and electrical assemblies where they penetrate fire-rated separations are part of work of this Section. systems and specified Products are only a guide and may not address all firestopping conditions pertaining to situations which may be present in the Work. Provide firestopping and smoke seal required for the Work. These Products and systems are not presented to restrict other tested and approved listed assemblies of other manufacturers designing assemblies conforming to Code and resolving firestopping required for the Work.
1.2.1.2.
1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. 1.2.1.5.
1.2.1.6.
1.2.1.7.
1.2.1.8.
1.2.2.
Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. Cutting and patching: Section 01 70 00, Execution and Closeout Requirements. Demolition: Section 02 41 00, Demolition and Salvage.
PAGE 07 84 00 - 1
Issued for CORE AND SHELL DRAFT REVIEW, SEPTEMBER 30, 2011 R. H. Carter Architects Inc.
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 84 00 Project No: 2011.008 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS
1.2.2.3. 1.2.2.4. 1.2.2.5. 1.2.2.6. 1.2.2.7. 1.2.2.8. 1.2.2.9. Poured concrete slabs and walls: Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete and Section 03 35 13, Concrete Floor Finishing. Masonry partitions including mortaring in of fire dampers: Section 04 20 00, Masonry Units. Provision of metal decking: Section 05 30 00, Metal Decking. Temporary sheet steel covers: Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Sealants and caulking: Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. Gypsum board partitions: Section 09 21 16, Gypsum Board. Firestopping and smoke seals inside mechanical assemblies: Division 21, Fire Suppression, Division 22, Plumbing and Division 23, Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning.
1.2.2.10. Firestopping and smoke seals inside electrical assemblies: Division 26, Electrical, Division 27, Communications and Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. 1.3.1.4. MSDS: Material Safety Data Sheets. OBC: Ontario Building Code, 2006. ULC: Underwriters Laboratories of Canada; www.ulc.ca. VOC: Volatile Organic Compound.
1.3.2.
Definitions: 1.3.2.1. Firestop System Types: 1.3.2.1.1. Head of Wall Joint Firestop Systems: (HW): Systems intended for installation in vertical separations between wall and floor or roof structures. Ensure these systems do not incorporate penetrating items such as pipes or cables. Joint Firestop Systems (JF): Systems intended for installation in openings such as construction joints, gaps and spaces in floors or walls or at floor and wall intersections in accordance with approved systems. Ensure these systems do not incorporate penetrating items such as pipes or cables. Perimeter Joint Firestop Systems (PJ): Perimeter joint firestop system rating are governed by lowest of fire resistance ratings of individual components (i.e. the wall, floor or joint system). These systems consist of floor with fire endurance rating, exterior wall with or without fire endurance rating and perimeter joint system. Ensure these perimeter joint firestop systems do not incorporate penetrating items such as pipes or cables. Service Penetration Firestop Systems (SP): Systems intended for installation in openings of limited dimensions and shape in floor or wall assemblies in accordance with approved systems. Ensure penetrating pipes, cable trays and similar items are in exact accordance with approved systems.
1.3.2.1.2.
1.3.2.1.3.
1.3.2.1.4.
PAGE 07 84 00 - 2
1.3.2.1.5. Service Penetration for Combustible Systems (SPC): Systems intended for installation in openings of limited dimensions and shape in floor or wall assemblies in accordance with approved systems. Ensure penetrating pipes are in exact accordance with approved systems. These systems are tested with a minimum differential pressure of 50 Pa between exposed and unexposed surfaces of assembly to meet Code requirements for Combustible Pipes for Use in Drain, Waste and Vent Piping.
1.3.2.2.
Ratings: Rating of firestop system applies to its use in specific assembly of materials, penetration and floor or walls in which it is tested as follows: 1.3.2.2.1. F Rating: When system remains in opening during fire test for rating period without permitting passage of flame through openings or occurrence of flaming on any element of unexposed side of assembly. FT Rating: When system remains in opening during fire test in accordance with F Rating requirement and additionally, transmission of heat through firestop system during rating period shall not have been such as to raise temperature of any thermocouple on unexposed surface of system more than 163 deg C (325 deg F) above initial temperature. FH Rating: When system remains in opening during fire and hose test in accordance with F Rating requirement and additionally, during hose stream test firestop system shall not develop any opening that would permit a projection of water from stream beyond unexposed side. FTH Rating: When system remains in opening during fire test and hose stream test within limitations described for F, FT and FH ratings. L Rating: Based on volume of air flowing, per unit of time through opening around test sample under specified pressure difference applied across surface of system. L Ratings are intended to determine acceptability of firestop systems with reference to control of air movement through assembly. Rating is expressed in litres per second (l/s) per linear metre of opening for joint systems.
1.3.2.2.2.
1.3.2.2.3.
1.3.2.2.4. 1.3.2.2.5.
1.3.3.
Reference Standards: 1.3.3.1. 1.3.3.2. 1.3.3.3. 1.3.3.4. 1.3.3.5. 1.3.3.6. NFPA 101-09 CAN/ULC-S101-07 CAN/ULC-S102-07 ULC-S115-05 ULC Guide No. 40 U19 - Life Safety Code - Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials - Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies - Standard Method of Fire Tests of Firestop Systems - Firestop Systems
ULC Guide No. 40 U19.13 - Firestop Systems Components
PAGE 07 84 00 - 3
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 84 00 Project No: 2011.008 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS 1.4.
1.4.1.
ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Preinstallation Meetings: Prior to commencement of sealing, arrange for Product manufacturer's knowledgeable representative to meet and discuss installation procedures and unique conditions at the Place of the Work, inspect substrate surfaces and recommend solutions to accommodate adverse conditions, periodically visit and verify installations before being concealed and report unsatisfactory conditions to Contractor, attend final inspection and to submit written certification that Products, systems and assemblies have been installed in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Scheduling: Coordinate with trades involved and advise dates where work will take place throughout various areas of work.
1.4.2.
1.5.
1.5.1.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturers specifications and technical data for each material including compositions, limitations, documentation conforming ULC and/or cUL firestop system proposed for this Project and manufacturers installation instructions. Shop Drawings: 1.5.2.1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Submit complete and detailed Shop Drawings for each condition encountered on site. Indicate following: 1.5.2.1.1. 1.5.2.1.2. 1.5.2.1.3. 1.5.2.1.4. 1.5.2.1.5. 1.5.2.1.6. ULC and/or cUL assembly number certification and material safety data sheets. required temperature rise and flame rating. hose stream rating (where applicable). thickness. proposed installation methods. material of firestopping and smoke seals, primers, reinforcements, support and securement methods, damming materials, reinforcements and anchorages /fastenings. size of opening. adjacent materials. number of penetrations.
1.5.2.
1.5.2.1.7. 1.5.2.1.8. 1.5.2.1.9. 1.5.2.2.
Designate on Shop Drawings fixed penetrants, relative positions, number of penetrations, expansion and control joints in rated slabs and walls, firestopping details at receptacles and similar poke-through devices and surrounding permanent materials. Identify re-entry locations. Submit fireproofing manufacturer's written verification that manufacturers have identified where firestopping is required, have selected correct firestop system and applicators have been trained by system manufacturers. Products, systems and assemblies have been installed in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.
1.5.2.3.
1.5.3.
Samples: Submit only as requested and in accordance with Section 01 30 00, various types of firestopping and smoke seal material.
PAGE 07 84 00 - 4
1.5.4. Certificates: 1.5.4.1. 1.5.4.2. Submit manufacturer's verification that installed firestopping and smoke seal materials comply with specified requirements. Submit copies of ULC, Warnock Hersey and/or cUL Listing cards for review.
1.6.
1.6.1.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operational and Maintenance Data: Provide maintenance data for materials and prefabricated devices, providing descriptions sufficient for identification on site in accordance with requirements of Section 01 70 00.
1.7.
1.7.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications: 1.7.1.1. Installers: Provide work of this Section executed by competent installers experienced, trained, licensed and approved, by material or system manufacturer for application of materials and systems being used having minimum 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies specified. Ensure firestopping systems conform to requirements of ULC-S115 tested assemblies that provide fire rating as shown.
1.8.
1.8.1. 1.8.2.

Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's sealed and labelled containers. Materials are subject to Consultant's inspection. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1.8.2.1. 1.8.2.2. Store materials inside building for 24 hours prior to use; store in area designated by Consultant. Protect from damage and environmental conditions detrimental to material. Comply with manufacturer's temperature, relative humidity and substrate moisture content for storage, mixing, application and curing of Products.
1.9.
1.9.1.
SITE CONDITIONS
Ambient Conditions: 1.9.1.1. Comply with manufacturer's recommended requirements for temperature, relative humidity, moisture content and presence of any sealer or release agents on substrate during application and curing of materials. Ensure surfaces are dry and frost free. Maintain minimum temperature of 5 deg C (40 deg F) for minimum period of 1 week before application, during application and until application is fully cured. Ventilate areas in which firestopping is being applied. Protect water-soluble material from wetting until fully cured.
1.9.1.2. 1.9.1.3.
1.10.
1.10.1.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer Warranty: Warrant work of this Section against defects and deficiencies for period of 5 years in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period, to satisfaction of Consultant and at no additional expense to Owner. Defects include but are not limited to cracking, breakdown of bond, failure to stay in place or bleeding.
PAGE 07 84 00 - 5
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 84 00 Project No: 2011.008 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1.
2.1.1.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer List: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 2.1.1.1. 2.1.1.2. 2.1.1.3. 2.1.1.4. 2.1.1.5. 2.1.1.6. 2.1.1.7. 2.1.1.8. 2.1.1.9. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.; www.adfire.com GE Canada, Inc.; www.gesilicones.com Electrical Products Division/3M; www.3m.com Grace Construction Products; www.graceconstruction.com Hilti (Canada) Corporation; www.ca.hilti.com Instant Firestop Inc. Johns Manville, Fire Protection Systems; www.jm.com McGill Architectural Products, www.mcgillarchitecural.com Nelson Firestop Products; www.nelsonfirestop.com
2.1.1.10. Tremco Canada; www.tremcosealants.com 2.1.2. Substitution Limitations: Comparable Products from manufacturers listed herein will be accepted provided they meet requirements of this Specification. No further substitutions will be permitted.
2.2.
2.2.1.
MATERIALS
Regulatory Requirements: Where required, provide a Pre-Start Health and Safety Review in accordance with the Occupational Health and Safety Act (Ontario), Regulation 851, as amended. Refer to Section 01 40 00 for further requirements. Performance/Design Criteria: Ensure firestop systems intended for installation in fire separations have assigned fire ratings as defined herein when tested in accordance with ULC-S115. Ensure firestop systems intended for use in fire resistive wall and/or floor assemblies are evaluated in accordance with CAN/ULC-S101 (Refer to ULC Guide No. 40 U19). Head of Wall Joint Firestop Systems: (HW): Systems intended for Supply materials and systems capable of effectively impeding passage of fire, smoke, gasses and where specifically indicated passage of liquids. Use only firestop systems that have been ULC and/or cUL tested for specific fire rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements and fire rating involved for each separate instance. Ensure firestopping system provides fire-resistance rating, flame and temperature not less than fire resistance rating of surrounding floor, wall or assembly, in accordance with requirements of OBC. Firestop System Rating: Where applicable, comply with F rating based on number of hours system can resist flames and gases; T rating based on maximum temperature rise of 163 deg C (325 deg F) above ambient for any thermocouple in addition to flame, gas and stream performance and H rating based on capacity to withstand hose stream after burn. Design combined and/or built-up site systems in accordance with approved restrictions and technical evaluations acceptable to Consultant and authorities having jurisdiction. Ensure systems provide fire and temperature rating in accordance with those outlined in OBC and effectively impeding passage of flame, smoke and gasses.
2.2.2.
2.2.3.
2.2.4. 2.2.5.
2.2.6.
PAGE 07 84 00 - 6
2.2.7. 2.2.8. Firestopping seals except for wall joints in visible areas must be of easily identifiable colour, such as red or yellow to be clearly distinguished from other building materials. Ensure service penetration components and assemblies, including back-up materials and supports are certified in accordance with ULC-S115 or CAN/ULC-S101 and be ULC listed by a certified authority recognized by building Code officials in locality in which Building is situated. Ensure suitability of Products for application and compatibility of materials with surfaces to which it will be applied. Ensure site system assembly is in accordance with ULC-S115 labeled and listed system design limitations, unless proposed assembly is approved by authorities having jurisdiction and meets Consultant's approval. Design combined and/or built-up site systems in accordance with approved restrictions and technical evaluations acceptable to Consultant and authorities having jurisdiction. Engineering judgements from firestopping manufacturers reviewed by Consultant and authorities having jurisdiction may be used for conditions where a ULC and/or cUL firestopping system is not available. Ensure sealants and putty for overhead and vertical joints are non-sagging; seals for floors, selflevelling. Ensure flexible fire stop sealant provides movement capability in fire rated joint applications. Ensure sealants are compatible with base materials such as without limitations masonry, concrete, metal, gypsum board and other similar items. Ensure Products have a compressive strength capable of providing self support at a penetrating item and shall maintain their integrity as tested in a ULC vertical application. Ensure Products are compatible with abutting dissimilar architectural coatings and finishes at floors, walls, ceilings, waterproofing membranes and the like. Check with Room Finish Schedule and manufacturer of selected materials being installed. Integral Pipe Sleeves/Firestopping Components: Other Sections within Divisions 21, 22 and 23 may specify fire-rated pipe sleeves, cast-in pipe/sleeve assemblies and integral firestopped penetration devices and accessories listed by authorized testing and certification authorities. These systems may eliminate need for separate firestopping applications at certain designated locations and it is responsibility of this Section to determine any and all locations where such devices will be utilized on Project. Do not provide Products containing asbestos. Firestopping System 1 (JF Systems): 2.2.16.1. This Firestopping System is primarily an expansion, control and perimeter seal without smoke resistance and be non-combustible, semi-rigid, felt fire protection. Certified assembly of 1 of listed manufacturers and acceptable to Consultant. 2.2.16.2. Ensure blanket type firestopping is listed and labelled in accordance with ULC Guide No. 40 U19 or 40 U19.13, with reference to `JF System Listings'. 2.2.16.3. Where required by listing, ensure impaling clips are heavy gauge galvanized wire or 25 mm (1") wide x 0.607 mm (24 ga) galvanized steel, Z formed with horizontal bottom and dimensions conforming to location of firestopping and width of void to be filled. Ensure compression of joint do not damage clips. 2.2.17. Firestopping System 2: Same materials as in System 1, but without use of impaling clips and with smoke and fluid seal with hose stream resistance. Certified assembly of 1 of listed manufacturers and acceptable to Consultant.
2.2.9. 2.2.10.
2.2.11.
2.2.12. 2.2.13.
2.2.14.
2.2.15. 2.2.16.
PAGE 07 84 00 - 7
2.2.18. Firestopping System 3: Fire, gas, fluid and hose stream resistant elastomeric sealant with movement capabilities, ULC labeled assembly of 1 of listed manufacturers and acceptable to Consultant. Ensure materials have elastic characteristics where used at openings subject to movement. Intumescent pads may form part of this system, at Contractors option. Firestopping System 4: Ensure firestopping, gas, fluid and hose stream resistant seals at openings intended for ease of re-entry such as cables be an elastomeric seal or proprietary assembly of following types; a cementitious or rigid seal at such locations is not permitted. Certified assembly of 1 of listed manufacturers and acceptable to Consultant. Firestopping System 4-A: Where openings are considered large such as at cable trays and bus ducts. Certified assembly of 1 of listed manufacturers and acceptable to Consultant. Firestopping System 5 (Cavity Wall Compartment Closer and Firestopping): Strips of "RXL Safe" semirigid mineral fibre insulation by Roxul Inc. 75 mm (3") wide by depth of cavity plus 13 mm (1/2") with galvanized skewers for securement at 300 mm (12") oc., or compressed 25% to fill depth of cavity. Primers: To manufacturer's recommendations for specific material, substrate and end use. Damming and Backup Materials, Supports and Anchoring Devices: Non-combustible, to manufacturer's recommendations in accordance with tested assembly being installed and as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Ensure sheet steel covers over temporarily unused sleeves in tenant and similar spaces are minimum 0.912 mm (20 ga) thick galvanized sheet steel formed to a tight fit over opening with specified firestopping materials installed beneath. Combustible materials are acceptable only if they are approved under ULC or cUL systems, otherwise they should be removed after permanent firestop materials have cured. Pipe and Duct Insulation and Wrappings Compatible with Firestopping Systems: "Nelson WRP" by Nelson Electric Ltd. for use with Nelson Electric Ltd. firestops and "Instant Type PI" by Instant Firestop Inc. for use with Instant Firestop Inc. firestops; or "TREMstop WS" by Tremco Canada. Intumescent Pads: FSP 1077" by Grace Construction Products or "FSP Pads" by Nelson Electric, or "Instant Putty 200" by Instant Firestop Inc., or "Type PLW Firestop Pillow" by Electrovert Ltd. Re-Entry Pillows: Permanently pliable, FSPIL Pillows" by Grace Construction Products or "Type PLW Firestop Pillow" by Electrovert; or "PLW" by Nelson Electric; or "TREMstop PS" by Tremco Canada. Mixes: 2.2.27.1. Mix materials at correct temperature and in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 2.2.27.2. Cleaning Materials: As recommended by firestop manufacturer.
2.2.19.
2.2.20. 2.2.21.
2.2.22. 2.2.23.
2.2.24.
2.2.25. 2.2.26. 2.2.27.

3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
Verification of Conditions: 3.1.1.1. 3.1.1.2. 3.1.1.3. Verify actual site dimensions and location of adjacent materials prior to commencing work. Notify Consultant in writing of any conditions which would be detrimental to the installation. Verify openings, dimensions and surfaces conform to fire and smoke seal assembly. Examine sizes of penetrating service, percentage fill and sleeve or opening sizes with exact annular space calculations, anticipated movement and conditions necessary to establish correct type, thickness and installation of back-up materials and seals.
PAGE 07 84 00 - 8
3.1.2. Evaluation and Assessment: Commencement of work implies acceptance of previously completed work.
3.2.
3.2.1.
PREPARATION
Surface Preparation: 3.2.1.1. 3.2.1.2. Provide primer or surface conditioner if required by Product manufacturer. Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Remove combustible material and loose material detrimental to bond from edges of penetration. Clean, prime or otherwise prepare substrate material to manufacturer's recommendation. Remove insulation from insulated pipe and duct where such pipes or ducts penetrate a fire separation unless ULC certified assembly permits such insulation to remain within assembly, or where mechanical trades have installed special fire rated insulated sleeves. Ensure continuity of thermal and vapour barriers where such are removed, altered or replaced, to satisfaction of Divisions 21, 23, 23 and Consultant. Alternatively, ensure pipe and duct insulation and wrappings occurring within openings to receive firestopping and smoke seals under this Section are installed prior to work of this Section and insulation and wrappings within fire seals are ULC listed components of system to be installed under this Section, unless ULC certified assembly permits such other insulation and wrappings to remain within assembly. Coordinate work of this Section with Divisions 21, 22 and 23. Clean bonding surfaces to remove deleterious substances including dust, paint, rust, oil, grease, moisture, frost and other foreign matter which may otherwise impair effective bonding.
3.2.1.3.
3.2.1.4.
3.2.1.5.
3.3.
3.3.1.
INSTALLATION
Do not apply firestop material to surfaces previously painted or treated with sealer, curing compound, water repellent to other coatings unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of materials. Remove coatings as required. Provide temporary forming, packing and bracing materials necessary to contain firestopping. Apply materials with sufficient pressure to properly fill and consolidate mass to seal openings. Upon completion, remove forming and damming materials not required to remain as part of system. Install damming and firestopping materials as per manufacturer's instructions. Mix and apply firestopping and smoke seals in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and tested designs to provide required fire (temperature and flame) rated seal, to prevent passage of smoke and where specifically designated, passage of fluids. Tool or trowel exposed surfaces. Allow materials to cure by not covering up materials until full curing has taken place. Where a designated system described hereinafter does not meet Code requirements for particular service condition, substitute with next higher system meeting required rating. Notify Consultant when completed installations are ready for inspection and prior to concealing or enclosing firestopping and smoke seals.
3.3.2.
3.3.3. 3.3.4.
3.3.5. 3.3.6. 3.3.7.
PAGE 07 84 00 - 9
3.3.8. System 1: 3.3.8.1. Install fire rated joint firestopping by compressing material minimum of 25% to ensure complete sealing and to follow irregularities of concrete slabs at perimeter of building where junction occurs with back of cladding system. Apply firestopping sealant of spray over compressed mineral wool. Butt succeeding sections of firestopping material tightly up against preceding. Leave no voids. Provide firestopping between exterior wall cladding and concrete floor slab. Secure and support to suit design requirements. Use this System for joint seals through fire-resistance rated floor slabs, ceilings and roofs unless otherwise stipulated.
3.3.8.2. 3.3.8.3. 3.3.8.4. 3.3.9. System 2: 3.3.9.1.
At fire-rated masonry walls and gypsum board partitions which extend nominally to within 19 mm (3/4") of underside of deck above, insert fire rated joint assembly firestopping material in 25% compression in accordance with ULC test requirements and manufacturer's instructions. Provide adequate depth of material to fill gap flush with face of wall, except as otherwise specified. Apply firestopping sealant of spray over compressed mineral wool. Insert at intersection of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions. Insert at both sides of control and sway joints in fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions and walls. Where wall/slab junction is exposed in finished work, keep fibre back 9 mm (3/8") from face of block and apply fire-resistant sealant to gap, tooling to a concave joint. At perimeter slab locations where this system would otherwise be exposed in finished work and where smoke seal is required, provide cover spray material of thickness as recommended by manufacturer of System 3 material set flush with top of slab and tooled smooth. Minimum cover spray thickness 3 mm (1/8"). Where anticipated movement in joint width is inevitable, select sealant with elastic capabilities.
3.3.9.2. 3.3.9.3. 3.3.9.4. 3.3.9.5.
3.3.10.
System 3: 3.3.10.1. This System establishes fire rated firestopping for service penetrations throughout the Project. Seal gaps and holes in fire-rated walls and slabs and composite construction through which conduit, wire, cables, ductwork, piping and other protrusions pass as a result of work using fire-resistant penetration sealant. Include opening which have been formed, sleeved and cored. 3.3.10.2. Apply at unpenetrated openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire-resistance rated assemblies. 3.3.10.3. Apply this System between spaces having different air pressures. (See Mechanical Drawings for pressurized areas and locations of moving penetrants.) 3.3.10.4. Apply at "wet" rooms supported by suspended slabs at locations over Electrical and Equipment Rooms or similar areas containing power devices in which future re-entry is not required. 3.3.10.5. Apply at Mechanical Rooms and similar rooms having systems containing liquids, including piping runs, unless such rooms are located over slab-on-grade.
PAGE 07 84 00 - 10
3.3.10.6. Install System 3 materials at elevator shafts, duct shafts and other similar locations over occupied spaces. 3.3.10.7. Install 6 mm to 9 mm (1/4" to 3/8") bead of firestop caulking at interface of retaining angles around fire dampers, where angles meet fire-rated assembly and between retaining angles and fire damper, both sides of penetration. At floor locations, sealant bead at top of assembly is adequate. 3.3.10.8. Where necessary, remove insulation from insulated pipe and duct where such services penetrate a fire separation unless certified assembly permits such insulation to remain within assembly. Apply wrapping materials as listed herein. 3.3.10.9. Install System 3 materials at open wall joints, including expansion joints between fire rated enclosures and assemblies. 3.3.11. Systems 4 and 4A: Install at following locations: 3.3.11.1. At Electrical, Electrical Switchgear, Electrical Transformer Rooms and at Telephone Equipment Rooms requiring re-entry for additional services. 3.3.11.2. Install at communications and computer cable penetration points throughout. 3.3.12. Accessories: At hollow fire-rated walls, apply intumescent pads to back surfaces and cable entry points of electrical boxes, panels and other service penetration points, ensuring close coordination with electrical, mechanical and drywall trades. Where greater dimension of panel exceeds 500 mm (20"), gypsum board trades construct fire-rated enclosure around recessed panels. System 5: Maintain maximum cavity wall compartments to lesser of following 2 criteria by bridging gap between cavity back-up material and back face of brick with full-depth strips of compartment closer and firestopping material, securing in position with mechanical fasteners and sealing against firm, primary cavity materials: 3.3.13.1. 10 m (100 sq ft). 3.3.13.2. Division B, Part 3, Paragraph 3.1.11 of OBC. 3.3.14. Penetration Sizing: Ensure following regulates sizing of service penetrations to be firestopped, other than for fire dampered openings: 3.3.14.1. Ensure single, circular penetration is sleeved by work of Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27 and 28. 3.3.14.2. Multiple penetrations of circular elements are defined as more than 1 circular penetration having a maximum space of 100 mm (4") between closest faces of such penetrating elements. Forming of such multiple penetrations is responsibility of respective trades whose service penetrates rated assembly and such formed opening shall be square or rectangular frame around group of penetrations in which maximum clearance between outer penetration element and face of opening shall be 25 mm (1"). 3.3.14.3. Create single and multiple rectangular penetrations in same manner as specified above, but edge clearance may be increased to a maximum of 50 mm (2"). 3.3.14.4. Exception; at fire dampers, clearances are governed by testing authorities' requirements. 3.3.14.5. For purposes of this specification, a moving penetrant is defined as a penetrating device having an anticipated movement of greater than 9 mm (3/8") when measured at right angles to face of rated assembly.
3.3.13.
PAGE 07 84 00 - 11
3.3.15. Cable Tray Penetrations: 3.3.15.1. Seal cable tray penetrations with re-enterable matrices having a minimum compressive strength of 250 psi having a minimum FTH Rating of 1/2 hr for 500 MCM cables and 2 hr for 300 MCM cables. 3.3.15.2. Ensure listings are for cable tray tests carried out having maximum percentage listed by ULC and/or UL of cable density.
3.4.
3.4.1.

Site Testing and Inspections: 3.4.1.1. Perform a series of 5 fog tests to random locations as designated by Consultant. Should any penetration, joint or void, under jurisdiction of this Section, emit visible fog, make repairs and replace deficiencies and re-perform fog test at no additional cost to Owner. Ensure fog units (machines) have a formulation output range of (1.5 gal/hr). Formulation particle size 0.5 - 25 m. Ensure fogging agent is non-toxic, non-staining and provides a heavy fog at 30 ppm with a permissible airborne level concentration of 50 ppm. Fog at a rate of 4 s/100 cu ft. Maintain fog density until inspection is complete. Independent inspection and testing company may be appointed and paid for by Owner to carry out additional inspection and testing as directed by Consultant. Refer to Section 01 40 00. Tests include 3 fog tests per floor at random locations. Where work or materials fail to meet requirements as indicated by test results, pay costs of additional inspection and testing required for new replacement work or materials.
3.4.1.2.
3.4.1.3. 3.4.1.4.
3.4.1.5. 3.4.2.
Ensure firestopping systems do not affect structural integrity of load bearing walls and assemblies. Coordinate with Consultant prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly. For unusual firestop application for which no tested system is available, ensure manufacturers submit their proposal to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Ensure work of this Section is by 1 Subcontractor responsible for firestopping materials and systems for all work except as specified herein. Conform to both temperature and flame ratings of standards listed hereinafter and other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Manufacturer Services: Consult with Product manufacturer's technical representative about following items: 3.4.5.1. 3.4.5.2. 3.4.5.3. fire stopping system for fire separation required. curing characteristics of materials specified. joint characteristics as built.
3.4.3. 3.4.4. 3.4.5.
3.5.
3.5.1.
CLEANING
Remove excess materials and debris and clean adjacent surfaces immediately after application to satisfaction of Consultant. Remove and or correct staining and discolouring of adjacent surfaces as directed. Remove temporary dams after initial set of firestopping and smoke seal materials where such materials are left exposed in finished areas and flame spread rating of such materials exceed a value of 25, in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102.
3.5.2.
PAGE 07 84 00 - 12
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 07 84 00 Project No: 2011.008 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS 3.6.
3.6.1.
PROTECTION
Fully protect walls, windows, floors and other surfaces around areas to be firestopped from marring or damage. Mask where necessary to avoid spillage on to adjoining surfaces. Mask areas adjacent to openings, where necessary to prevent contamination or marring of adjacent surface materials. Remove masking after seal has been completed and an initial set has been achieved. Remove stains on adjacent surfaces as required.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 07 84 00 - 13
1.1.1.
SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
Read and conform to: 1.1.1.1. 1.1.1.2. The General Conditions of the Contract CCDC 2, 2008. Section 00 73 10, Supplementary Conditions.
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide joints sealants including but not limited to following: 1.2.1.1. Exterior: 1.2.1.1.1. 1.2.1.1.2. 1.2.1.1.3. 1.2.1.1.4. 1.2.1.1.5. 1.2.1.1.6. 1.2.1.1.7. 1.2.1.2. Interior: 1.2.1.2.1. 1.2.1.2.2. 1.2.1.2.3. 1.2.1.2.4. 1.2.1.2.5. 1.2.1.2.6. 1.2.1.2.7. 1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. tile control and expansion joints. joints between different materials listed above. perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows and elevator entrances. joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors and counters. other joints as indicated. control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete. joints between architectural precast concrete units. control and expansion joints in unit masonry. joints between metal panels. perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. joints between different materials listed above. other joints as indicated.
mildew resistant sealants. self leveling sealants.
1.2.2.
Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. Filling and sealing of sawcut joints in concrete slab: Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
PAGE 07 92 00 - 1
1.2.2.2. 1.2.2.3. 1.2.2.4. 1.2.2.5. 1.2.2.6.
Sealants for architectural precast concrete panels: Section 03 45 00, Architectural Precast Concrete. Masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets: Section 04 20 00, Masonry Units. Sealing and sealants in conjunction with roofing: Section 07 54 23, TPO Roofing Mechanically Fastened. Firestopping and smoke seals: Section 07 84 00, Firestopping and Smoke Seals. Sealing and sealants between aluminum entrances members and between aluminum entrance door and adjacent construction, and between all glass entrance doors and structurally glazed curtain wall: Section 08 44 00, Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall, Section 08 44 13, Structurally Glazed Curtain Wall. Sealing of joints around sound attenuating gypsum board partitions: Section 09 21 16, Gypsum Board. Read other Sections of Specifications for extent of sealing specified in those Sections. Do other sealing indicated, specified or required.
1.2.2.7. 1.2.2.8.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. 1.3.1.4. IPA: Isopropyl Alcohol. MEK: Methyl-ethyl-ketone. MSDS: Material Safety Data Sheets. SWRI: Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute; www.swrionline.org.
1.3.2.
Reference Standards: 1.3.2.1. 1.3.2.2. ASTM C661-06(11) ASTM C719-93(10) - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness Elastomeric-Type Sealant by Means of a Durometer of
- Standard Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement (Hockman Cycle) - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants - Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants
1.3.2.3. 1.3.2.4. 1.3.2.5. 1.3.2.6.
ASTM C834-10 ASTM C920-11 ASTM C1021-08 ASTM C1248-08
1.4.
1.4.1.
Preinstallation Meeting: 1.4.1.1. Prior to start of work, arrange for Project site meeting of parties associated with work of this Section. Presided over by Contractor, include Consultant who may attend, Subcontractor performing work of this trade, Testing Company's Representative, Contractor's consultants of applicable discipline and manufacturers representative.
PAGE 07 92 00 - 2
1.4.1.2.
Review Specification for work included under this Section and determine complete understanding of requirements and responsibilities relative to work included, storage and handling of materials, materials to be used, installation of materials, sequence and quality control, Project staffing, restrictions on areas of work and other matters affecting construction, to permit compliance with intent of this Section. Discuss also following items: 1.4.1.2.1. 1.4.1.2.2. 1.4.1.2.3. 1.4.1.2.4. 1.4.1.2.5. 1.4.1.2.6. 1.4.1.2.7. verify with sealant manufacturer that specified sealants are compatible with and will satisfactorily adhere to substrates. weather conditions under which work will be done. anticipated frequency and extent of joint movement. joint design. suitability of durometer hardness and other properties of material to be used. recommendations of manufacturer for mixing of multi-component sealants. number of beads to be used in sealing operation and priming operation if required.
1.5.
1.5.1.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit Product information from sealant manufacturer prior to commencement of work of this Section verifying: 1.5.1.1. 1.5.1.2. 1.5.1.3. 1.5.1.4. 1.5.1.5. 1.5.1.6. 1.5.1.7. selected sealant materials are from those specified. composition and physical characteristics. surface preparation requirements. priming and application procedures. suitability of sealants for purposes intended and joint design. test report on adhesion, compatibility and staining effect on samples of adjacent materials used on Project. sealants compatibility with other materials and Products with which they come in contact including but not limited to sealants provided under other Sections, insulation adhesives, bitumens, brick, stone, concrete, masonry, metals and metal finishes, ceramic tile, plastic laminates and paints. suitability of sealants for temperature and humidity conditions at time of application.
1.5.1.8. 1.5.2.
Test and Evaluation Reports: 1.5.2.1. Compatibility Testing Report: Submit in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Prior to supply or installation, test exterior sealant materials for compatibility with joint substrates. Test for staining and adhesion including substrates treated with sealers, curing compounds and water repellants etc. Submit a written report of test results to Consultant. Colour: Submit colours for acceptance in accordance with following general colour hierarchy i.e. Between 2 dissimilar materials, colour the sealant to match the material with the higher relative position on the colour hierarchy scale (highest is at ".1"): 1.5.2.2.1. concrete.
1.5.2.2.
PAGE 07 92 00 - 3
1.5.2.2.2. 1.5.2.2.3. 1.5.2.2.4. 1.5.3. masonry. metal extrusions. metal (formed).
Samples: Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Provide cured, colour samples of manufacturer's standard range of colours in each type of sealant and caulking compound for colour selection by Consultant. Submit samples of primer, bond breaker tape and joint backing material, if requested.
1.6.
1.6.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications: 1.6.1.1. Installers: Provide work of this Section executed by competent installers who have a membership in good standing with SWRI and have minimum of 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies specified and with approval and training of Product manufacturers. Testing Agencies: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct testing indicated. Ensure Products are verified by SWRI in accordance with ASTM C719 and ASTM C661.
1.6.1.2.
1.6.2.
Preconstruction Testing: 1.6.2.1. Test for compatibility of sealant and accessory Products with joint substrates. Provide test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation required for proper adhesion. For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturers written instructions for corrective measures, including use of specialty formulated primers. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements of ASTM C920 and where applicable, to other standard test methods. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements of ASTM C719 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in peel and indentation hardness. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard Specifications and test methods.
1.6.2.2. 1.6.2.3. 1.6.2.4. 1.6.3. 1.6.4.
Include lists of completed Projects with Name of Consultants and contact persons. Mock-Ups: Conform to requirements of Section 01 40 00. At site, in area(s) designated by Consultant, erect sample panels 1 m (39") long for each type(s) of sealant joint design, showing location, size, shape and depth of joint complete with backup materials, primer, caulking and sealant, bond, colour and quality of installation work. If requested conduct field test for joints designated. Construct additional samples if required to obtain approval. Do no sealant work until samples have been approved. Ensure approved samples become standard of comparison for sealant and caulking work on site and become part of work.
1.7.
1.7.1.

Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver caulking and sealant materials to site in original, unopened containers with manufacturers labels and seals intact. Labels to identify manufacturer's name, brand name of Product, grade and type, application directions and shelf life or expiry date of Product.
PAGE 07 92 00 - 4
1.7.2. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1.7.2.1. 1.7.2.2.
Handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. Store flammable materials in safe, approved containers to eliminate fire hazards. Do not use caulking and sealant materials that have been stored for period of time exceeding maximum recommended shelf life of materials.
1.8.
1.8.1.
SITE CONDITIONS
Ambient Conditions: 1.8.1.1. Do not apply any sealant under adverse weather conditions, when joints to be sealed are damp, wet or frozen or when at ambient temperatures below 5 deg C (40 deg F) except where sealant is silicone. Refer to manufacturers written requirements for silicone sealants. Maintain minimum temperature of application during application and for 8 hours after application. Consult manufacturer for specific instructions before proceeding and obtain Consultant's approval. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated and until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.8.1.2.
1.9.
1.9.1.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer Warranty: Warrant work of this Section for period of 20 years for silicone type sealants and 5 years for other sealants against defects and/or deficiencies in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period, to satisfaction of Consultant and at no expense to Owner. Defects include but are not limited to; cracking, crumbling, melting, shrinkage, sag, failure of adhesion, cohesion or reversion, air and moisture leakage, marbling or streaking due to improper mixing, discolouration due to dirt pick-up during curing and staining of adjacent materials.

2.1.1.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer List: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 2.1.1.1. 2.1.1.2. 2.1.1.3. 2.1.1.4. 2.1.1.5. 2.1.1.6. 2.1.1.7. 2.1.1.8. ChemRex Inc.; www.chemrex.com CPD Construction Products; www.cpd.com Dow Corning; www.dowcorning.com Euclid Chemical Canada Ltd.; www.euclidchemical.com Momentive Performance Materials; www.momentive.com Sika Canada Inc.; www.sika.ca Tremco Canada; www.tremcosealants.com W.R. Meadows of Canada; www.wrmeadows.com
PAGE 07 92 00 - 5
2.2.1.
MATERIALS
Regulatory Requirements: Provide a Pre-Start Health and Safety Review in accordance with the Occupational Health and Safety Act (Ontario), Regulation 851, as amended. Refer to Section 01 40 00 for further requirements. Performance/Design Criteria: Provide exterior and interior elastomeric joint sealants establishing and maintaining water tight, water resistant and air tight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. General: Ensure elastomeric sealants comply with Standards specified herein for type, grade, class and uses. Provide Products with capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement in accordance with ASTM C719, to withstand required percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C920 for uses indicated. Where elastomeric sealants shall be non-staining to porous substrates, provide Products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. Type A Sealant: Low dirt pick-up, non-sag type, 1 component medium-modulus, pre-pigmented, neutral cure elastomeric silicone sealant conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, G, M, A and O. Supply in standard colours as selected. Supply 1 of the following: 2.2.6.1. 2.2.6.2. Dow Corning 756 SMS Building Sealant by Dow Corning. GE SilPruf NB SCS9000 by Momentive Performance Materials.
2.2.2.
2.2.3. 2.2.4.
2.2.5.
2.2.6.
2.2.7.
Type B Sealant: Non-sag type, 1 component, mildew resistant silicone containing non-toxic fungicidal agents sealant conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Supply in standard colours as selected. Supply 1 of following: 2.2.7.1. 2.2.7.2. 2.2.7.3. 2.2.7.4. Dow Corning 786" by Dow Corning. Trade Mate Tub, Tile & Ceramic Silicone Sealant by Dow Corning. GE Sanitary SCS1700" by Momentive Performance Materials. Tremsil 200, white or clear" by Tremco Canada.
2.2.8.
Type C Sealant: Provide 1 of following: 2.2.8.1. Non-sag type, 1 component, acrylic latex sealant conforming to ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade -18C. Supply in standard colours as selected. Supply 1 of following: 2.2.8.1.1. 2.2.8.1.2. 2.2.8.1.3. 2.2.8.2. GE RCS20" by Momentive Performance Materials. Sonolac by Sonneborn. Tremflex 834" by Tremco Canada.
Non-sag type, multi-component polyurethane sealant conforming to ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Use T, I, M, A and O. Supply in standard colours as selected. Supply 1 of following: 2.2.8.2.1. 2.2.8.2.2. Sonoplastic NP 2" by ChemRex Inc. Eucolastic II by Euclid Chemical Canada Ltd.
PAGE 07 92 00 - 6
2.2.8.2.3. 2.2.8.2.4. 2.2.8.3. Sikaflex -2c NS by Sika Canada Inc. DYmeric 240 by Tremco Canada.
Non-sag type, 1 component polyurethane sealant conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, A and O. Supply in standard colours as selected. Supply 1 of following: 2.2.8.3.1. 2.2.8.3.2. 2.2.8.3.3. Sonoplastic NP1" by ChemRex Inc. Sikaflex -1a by Sika Canada Inc. DyMonic and/or Vulkem 116" by Tremco Canada.
2.2.9.
Type E Sealant: Self-levelling type, epoxy modified joint sealant, cold-applied, 2 component, pour grade, grey colour. Supply 1 of following: 2.2.9.1. 2.2.9.2. 2.2.9.3. 2.2.9.4. EP 280 Control Joint Sealant by ChemRex Inc. CPD Joint-Flex P.E. by CPD Construction Products. Loadflex by Sika Canada Inc. Rezi-Weld Flex by W.R. Meadows of Canada.
2.2.10.
Joint Primer: Non-staining, suitable for substrate surfaces, compatible with joint forming materials and as recommended by sealant manufacturer for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. Joint Backing: Preformed, compressible, resilient, non-waxing, non-extruding, non-staining strips of closed cell polyethylene or urethane foam, compatible with joint substrates and are approved by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory test. Sizes and shapes to suit various conditions, diameter 25% greater than joint width. Ensure backing is compatible with sealant, primer and substrate. Bond Breaker Tape: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. Masking Tape: Provide non-staining, non-absorbent tapes and sheets which effectively mask substrate without leaving an adhesive residue compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. Cleaning Material: Non-corrosive, non-staining, solvent type, xylol, MEK, toluol, IPA or as recommended by sealant manufacturer and acceptable to material or finish manufacturers for surfaces adjacent to sealed areas free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
2.2.11.
2.2.12.
2.2.13.
2.2.14.

3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
Verification of Conditions: 3.1.1.1. Examine joints for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Ensure joints are suitable to accept and receive sealants.
PAGE 07 92 00 - 7
3.1.1.2. 3.1.1.3. 3.1.1.4. 3.1.2. 3.1.3.
Verify joint surfaces are clean, sound, free of defects and dimensions are within sealant manufacturers size requirements. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Do not apply sealant to masonry until mortar has cured.
Preinstallation Testing: Before any sealing work is commenced, test materials for indications of staining or poor adhesion. Evaluation and Assessment: Commencement of work implies acceptance of previously completed work.
3.2.
3.2.1.
PREPARATION
Protection of In-Place Conditions: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. Surface Preparation: 3.2.2.1. Clean joints and spaces which are to be sealed and ensure they are dry and free of dust, loose mortar, oil, grease, oxidation, coatings, form release agents, sealers and other foreign material. Clean porous surfaces such as concrete, masonry or stone by wire brushing, grinding or blast cleaning, mechanical abrading or combination of these methods as required to obtain clean and sound surfaces. Remove laitance by grinding or mechanical abrading. Remove oils by sandblast cleaning. Remove loose particles present or resulting from grinding, abrading or sandblast cleaning by thorough brushing. Clean ferrous metals of rust, mill scale and foreign materials by wire brushing, grinding or sanding. Wipe non-porous surfaces such as metal and glass to be sealed, except pre-coated metals, with cellulose sponges or clean rags soaked with ethyl alcohol, ketone solvent, xylol or toluol and wipe dry with clean cloth. Where joints are to be sealed with silicone based sealants clean joint with MEK or xylol. Do not allow solvent to air-dry without wiping. Clean pre-coated metals with solutions or compounds which will not injure finish and which are compatible with joint primer and sealant. Check ferrous metal surfaces are painted before applying sealant. Examine joint sizes and where depth of joint exceed required depth of sealant correct to achieve proper following width/depth ratio: 3.2.2.8.1. 3.2.2.9. Maintain 2:1 Width/Depth Ratio: Ensure maximum sealant depth is 13 mm (1/2) and minimum contact width with each substrate is 6 mm (1/4").
3.2.2.
3.2.2.2.
3.2.2.3. 3.2.2.4. 3.2.2.5. 3.2.2.6. 3.2.2.7.
3.2.2.8.
Install joint backing material to achieve correct, uniform joint profile and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
3.2.2.10. Do not leave gap between ends of sealant backing; do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings; remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.
PAGE 07 92 00 - 8
3.2.2.11. Where joint design or depth of joint prevents use of joint backing material, apply bond breaker tape at back of joint to prevent 3-sided adhesion. 3.2.2.12. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear joint backing. Butt joint backing at intersections. Install bond breaker tape at back of joint where joint backing is not required or cannot be installed. 3.2.2.13. On horizontal traffic surfaces, support joint filler against vertical movement which might result from traffic loads, including foot traffic. 3.2.2.14. Where surfaces adjacent to joints are likely to become coated with sealant during application, mask them prior to priming and sealing. 3.2.2.15. Do not exceed shelf life and pot life of materials and installation times, as stated by manufacturer. 3.2.2.16. Be familiar with work life of sealant to be used. Do not mix multiple component materials until required for use. 3.2.2.17. Use materials as received from manufacturer, without additions, deletions and adulterations of materials. 3.2.2.18. Mix multiple component sealants and bulks sealants using mechanical mixer capable of mixing without mixing air into material, in accordance with manufacturers directions and recommendations. Continue mixing until material is homogeneously blended, uniform in colour and free from streaks of unmixed material. Install compound prior to start of hardening or curing cycle. 3.2.2.19. Prior to painting, seal joints in surfaces to be painted. Where surfaces to be sealed are prime painted in shop before sealing ensure prime paint is compatible with primer and sealant. If they are incompatible, inform Consultant and change primer and sealant to compatible types approved by Consultant. 3.2.2.20. Where irregular surface or sensitive joint border exists, apply masking tape at edge of joint to ensure joint neatness and protection. 3.2.2.21. Prime sides of joints for type of surface being sealed prior to application of joint backing, bond breaker or sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3.2.3. Removal: 3.2.3.1. 3.2.3.2. Remove existing caulking and/or sealant from joints as required. Remove existing caulking and/or sealants including any residual caulking/sealant material using suitable methods to prevent damage to adjacent surfaces. Take care to ensure no damage or visible changes take place to surface of substrate that will not be covered by replacement sealant material. Clean surfaces of joints and spaces in accordance with procedures specified herein under Surface Preparation. Ensure materials in contact with sealant are compatible. Where required, mask adjacent surfaces prior to priming and application of sealant to prevent staining. Prime inner surfaces of joint, where required, immediately prior to caulking, in accordance with sealant manufacturers recommendations, to provide full adhesion and to prevent staining of adjacent exposed surfaces.
3.2.3.3. 3.2.3.4. 3.2.3.5. 3.2.3.6.
PAGE 07 92 00 - 9
3.3.1. 3.3.2. 3.3.3.
APPLICATION
Apply in accordance with manufacturer's directions and recommendations unless more stringent requirements apply. Apply sealant by proven techniques using hand operated guns or pressure equipment fitted with suitable nozzle size and equipment approved by sealant manufacturer. Force sealant into joint and against sides of joints to obtain uniform adhesion. Use sufficient pressure to completely fill voids in joint regardless of variation in joint widths and to proper joint depth as prepared. Ensure full firm contact with interfaces of joint. Superficial pointing with skin bead is not acceptable. Finish face of compound to form smooth, uniform beads. At recesses in angular surfaces, finish compound with flat face, flush with face of materials at each side. At recesses in flush surfaces, finish compound with concave face flush with face of materials at each side. Compound may be tooled, provided such tooling does not damage seal or tear compound. Avoid pulling of sealant from sides. Tool surfaces as soon as possible after sealant application or before any skin formation has occurred, particularly when using silicone sealants. Ensure joint surfaces are straight, neatly finished, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, dirt, stains, air pockets and embedded foreign matter or other defacement and be uniform in colour, free from marbling and/or colour streaking due to improper mixing or use of out of shelf life Products. Do not use solvent curing sealants indoors. Use 1 of sealants specified for each type in following locations. Ensure sealant chosen (from several specified under each type under "MATERIALS") for each location is recommended by manufacturer for use for conditions encountered: 3.3.9.1. Type A: Typically used in joints between metal frames and adjacent masonry and/or concrete construction in exterior walls, exterior and interior sides; control and expansion joints in exterior and interior surfaces of poured-in-place concrete walls, precast architectural wall panels and unit masonry walls; sealing of joints between underside of prestressed precast concrete floor slabs and masonry; and other locations where sealant is required or noted on Drawings except in locations designated for Type B, C, and E and except where sealant is specified in other Sections. Type B: Typically used in joints between urinals and walls, around washrooms accessories, at corners of walls, between splash backs and walls, in shower, damp or wet areas, at ceramic tiles where mildew resistant sealant is required. Type C: Typically used in joints between interior metal and/or wood frames and adjacent construction in interior partitions. Type E (load bearing): Typically used in static joints in horizontal surfaces where selflevelling sealants are required.
3.3.4.
3.3.5. 3.3.6. 3.3.7.
3.3.8. 3.3.9.
3.3.9.2.
3.3.9.3. 3.3.9.4. 3.3.10.
Joint designation in preceding paragraphs and fact that Drawings do not show all locations to be sealed does not limit responsibility of this Section to seal all locations except those indicated in other Sections of work, required to create and ensure continuous enclosure. Firestopping and Smoke Seal: Sealants part of firestopping systems and smoke seals provided within fire rated assemblies are part of work of Section 07 84 00 and carried out under supervision of this Section.
3.3.11.
PAGE 07 92 00 - 10
3.4.1.
REPAIR
Repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
3.5.
3.5.1.

Site Tests and Inspections: 3.5.1.1. 3.5.1.2. 3.5.1.3. 3.5.1.4. Independent inspection and testing company may be appointed and paid for by Owner to carry out inspection and testing as directed by Consultant. Refer to Section 01 40 00. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a manner acceptable to Consultant. Tests may include sampling of installed Product where adhesion, cohesion or reversion failure is suspected. Where work or materials fail to meet requirements as indicated by test results, pay costs of additional inspection and testing required for new replacement work or materials.
3.5.2. 3.5.3.
Non-Conforming Work: Replace damaged work which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, restored or cleaned, to satisfaction of Consultant at no cost to Owner. Manufacturer Services: 3.5.3.1. 3.5.3.2. 3.5.3.3. Prior to commencement of sealing, arrange for sealant manufacturer's technical representative to visit the Place of the Work and inspect surfaces and joints to be sealed. Confirm in writing by manufacturers representative to be on site throughout construction period work to inspect application of sealant and surface preparation. Consult with manufacturer's technical representative about following items: 3.5.3.3.1. 3.5.3.3.2. 3.5.3.3.3. 3.5.3.3.4. 3.5.3.3.5. 3.5.3.3.6. 3.5.3.3.7. 3.5.3.3.8. weather conditions under which work will be done. anticipated frequency of joint movement. shape factor of the joint. Durometer hardness, slump and curing characteristics of materials specified. joint characteristics as built. installation procedures to be adopted. mixing procedures to be adopted. conditions under which the Work will be done, in order that any alternative recommendations may be made should adverse conditions exist.
3.6.
3.6.1.
CLEANING
Immediately clean adjacent surfaces which have been soiled and leave work in neat, clean condition. Remove excess materials, compounds smears or other soiling resulting from application of sealants. Use recommended cleaners and solvents. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of spillovers onto adjacent surfaces.
PAGE 07 92 00 - 11
3.7.1.
PROTECTION
Provide approved, non-staining means of protection for completed joint sealant installations where required to protect work from mechanical, thermal, chemical and other damage by construction operations and traffic. Maintain protection securely in place until completion of Work. Remove protection when so directed by Consultant.
3.7.2.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 07 92 00 - 12
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 08 11 13 Project No: 2011.008 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.
1.1.1.
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide steel doors and frames including but not limited to following: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. 1.2.1.5. 1.2.1.6. provision of hollow metal doors. supply of hollow metal door frames. preparation of hollow metal doors and frames for finish hardware. glazing stops. Installation of finish hardware. preparation of hollow metal doors and frames for security system including CSA approved wiring, conduit and junction boxes for electronic hardware.
1.2.2.
Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. 1.2.2.3. 1.2.2.4. 1.2.2.5. 1.2.2.6. 1.2.2.7. 1.2.2.8. Building in steel door frames in masonry walls: Section 04 20 00, Masonry Units. Caulking and/or sealing door frames: Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. Supply of finish hardware: Section 08 71 00, Finish Hardware. Provision of glazing: Section 08 80 00, Glass and Glazing. Installation of frames in gypsum board partitions: Section 09 21 16, Gypsum Board. Finish painting: Section 09 91 00, Painting. Wiring and conduit for electronic hardware in frame: Division 26, Electrical. Provision of security system: Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. 1.3.1.4. CSDMA: Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association; www.csdma.org. OBC: Ontario Building Code, 2006. STC: Sound Transmission Class. ULC: Underwriters Laboratories of Canada; www.ulc.ca.
PAGE 08 11 13 - 1
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 08 11 13 Project No: 2011.008 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
1.3.2. Reference Standards: 1.3.2.1. 1.3.2.2. 1.3.2.3. ANSI A224.1-94 ANSI A250.4-01 ASTM A568/A568M-11a - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcings - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus - Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation - Insulated Steel Doors - Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) - Guide Specification for Installation of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies - Standard for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies and Glass Block Assemblies - Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies - Standard Specification for Fire Door Frames Meeting the Performance Required by CAN/ULC-S104 - Standard Method for Fire Test of Window and Glass Block Assemblies - Standard for Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation for Buildings
1.3.2.4.
ASTM A653/A653M-10
1.3.2.5.
ASTM C177-10
1.3.2.6.
ASTM C518-10
1.3.2.7. 1.3.2.8. 1.3.2.9.
ASTM E90-09 ASTM E413-10 CAN/CGSB-82.5-M88
1.3.2.10. CSA W59-03(08) 1.3.2.11. NAAMM-HMMA 840-07 1.3.2.12. NFPA 80-07 1.3.2.13. NFPA 252-08 1.3.2.14. NFPA 257-07 1.3.2.15. CAN/ULC-S104-M10 1.3.2.16. CAN/ULC-S105-M09 1.3.2.17. CAN/ULC-S106-M80(85) 1.3.2.18. CAN/ULC-S702-09
1.4.
1.4.1.
Scheduling: Submit a schedule indicating each door and frame related to the Door [and Frame] Schedule.
PAGE 08 11 13 - 2
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 08 11 13 Project No: 2011.008 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.5.
1.5.1.
SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Show each type of frame, door, core, metal thicknesses and finishes, openings (glazed), fire ratings, location of exposed fasteners, cutouts, hardware blanking, reinforcing, tapping and drilling arrangements. Show large scale frame sections and anchoring details. Submit door and frame schedule identifying each unit. Ensure each unit bears legible identifying mark corresponding to that listed in Door and Frame Schedule. Samples: Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Provide 1 cut-away corner sample minimum 300 mm (12") square for each type of door to indicated following: 1.5.2.1. 1.5.2.2. 1.5.2.3. 1.5.2.4. core. reinforcing. facing. frame.
1.5.2.
1.5.3.
Test and Evaluation Reports: Submit following test and evaluation reports: 1.5.3.1. 1.5.3.2. 1.5.3.3. 1.5.3.4. 1.5.3.5. Steel door and frame assemblies supplied under this Section meet acceptance criteria of ANSI A224.1 and ANSI A250.4, Level A. Insulated door cores supplied in exterior doors under this Section meet specified thermal resistance rating. Thermally broken frames meet or exceed CAN/CGSB-82.5-M. Acoustic door and frame assemblies provide the STC values specified with the critical frequency range, as determined and scheduled by the Consultant. Ensure reports include name of testing authority, date of test, location of test facility, descriptions of test specimens, procedures used in testing and indicate compliance with acceptance criteria of the test. Submit in addition to fire label, certificate to substantiate design and construction of firerated screen assemblies, if required by Consultant or authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5.3.6.
1.6.
1.6.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications: 1.6.1.1. Manufacturers: Execute work of this Section by a manufacturer who is a member of CSDMA.
1.7.
1.7.1.

Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: 1.7.1.1. 1.7.1.2. Protect doors and frames during shipping. Note damage incurred during shipping.
1.7.2.
Storage and Handling Requirements: 1.7.2.1. 1.7.2.2. Protect doors and frames during storage. Store and protect materials in accordance with NAAMM-HMMA 840. Coordinate this requirement with Section 06 90 00 for installing doors.
PAGE 08 11 13 - 3
1.7.2.3. Remove wrappings or coverings from doors upon delivery at site. Store doors in vertical position, spaced by blocking to permit air circulation between them.
1.8.
1.8.1.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer Warranty: Warrant work manufactured from ASTM A653/A653M, A40 galvannealed steel, touched up only with zinc-rich rust inhibitive primer where coating was removed during its manufacture for period of 10 years against defects and/or deficiencies in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period, to satisfaction of Consultant and at no expense to Owner. Defects include but are not limited to; rust perforation when stored, installed and finish painted in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.

2.1.1.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer List: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 2.1.1.1. 2.1.1.2. 2.1.1.3. 2.1.1.4. 2.1.1.5. 2.1.1.6. Ali-Porte Inc.; www.aliporte.com Artek Door Limited; www.artekdoor.com Baron Metal; www.baronmetal.com Daybar Industries Limited; www.daybar.com Fleming Door Products Ltd.; www.flemingdoor.com Metal Door Ltd.; www.metaldoorltd.com
2.2.
2.2.1.
MATERIALS
2.2.2.
Performance/Design Criteria: 2.2.2.1. Ensure Product is manufactured by a firm experienced in design and production of standard and custom commercial steel door and frame assemblies, integration of builders or electronic hardware and glazing assemblies and other items affecting work. Ensure door and frame assembly meet acceptance criteria of ANSI A224.1 and is be certified as Level A (1,000,000 cycles) and Twist Test Acceptance Criteria (deflection not to exceed 6 mm/13.6 kg (1/4"/30 lb) force, total deflection at 136 kg (300 lb) force not to exceed 64 mm (2-1/2") and permanent deflection not to exceed 3 mm (1/8")) when tested in accordance with ANSI A250.4. Ensure tests are conducted by an independent nationally recognized accredited laboratory. Test fire rated doors, frames, transom frames and sidelight assemblies in accordance with requirements of CAN/ULC-S104-M and NFPA 252. Test borrowed lights and screens in accordance with CAN/ULC-S106-M and NFPA 257. Ensure Products are listed by a nationally recognized testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and approved by Consultant having factory inspection services.
2.2.2.2.
2.2.2.3.
PAGE 08 11 13 - 4
2.2.2.4. 2.2.2.5. 2.2.2.6. 2.2.2.7. 2.2.3. Ensure core materials for exterior doors attains thermal resistance of RSI 1.06 (R 6) when tested in accordance with ASTM C177 or ASTM C518. Provide thermally broken assemblies as indicated on Drawings and noted on Door Schedule tested in accordance with requirements of CAN/CGSB-82.5-M. Provide acoustic assemblies as indicated on Drawings and noted on Door Schedule tested as a fully operable unit in accordance with requirements of ASTM E90 and ASTM E413. Ensure Product quality meets standards set by CSDMA.
Sheet Steel: Commercial grade steel to ASTM A568/A568M, Class 1, hot-dip galvanized to ASTM A653/A653M, ZF120 (A40), known commercially as "Colourbond", "Satincoat", or "Galvanneal". Steel sheet thicknesses specified are base metal thicknesses prior to galvanizing. Wired Glass (WGL) for Fire Rated Doors with Lites: Clear transparent wired glass conforming to ASTM C1036, Type II, Class 1, Quality Q5, Form 1, Mesh 2(M2), minimum 6 mm (1/4") thick. Door Cores: 2.2.5.1.
3 Insulation: Mineral wool insulation, density 24 kg/m (1.5 pcf) minimum consisting of durable fibrous material processed from rock, slag or glass, bound with deterioration resistant binders, CAN/ULC-S702, Type 1.
2.2.4. 2.2.5.
2.2.5.2. 2.2.6.
Polyisocyanurate: Rigid, modified polyisocyanurate, closed cell board with a density of 32 3 kg/m (2.0 pcf) and minimum R-value of RSI 1.9 (R11).
Adhesives: 2.2.6.1. Polystyrene and Polyisocyanurate Cores: Heat resistant, epoxy resin based, low viscosity, contact cement.
2.2.7. 2.2.8. 2.2.9. 2.2.10. 2.2.11.
Primer: Rust inhibitive touch-up only. Door Silencers (Bumpers): Single stud rubber/neoprene type. Fasteners for Stops: Cadmium plated steel, counter sunk flat or oval head sheet metal Phillips screws. Mortar Guard Boxes: Minimum 0.8 mm thick (22 ga) steel. Frame Anchors: 2.2.11.1. Floor Anchors: Minimum 3 mm (1/8") thick adjustable base anchors with 2 holes for bolting to floor. 2.2.11.2. Wall Anchors: 2.2.11.2.1. 2.2.11.2.2. 2.2.11.2.3. 2.2.11.2.4. 2.2.11.2.5. Masonry T-strap Type Wall Anchors: Minimum 1.2 mm thick (18 ga) steel Existing Masonry/Concrete Wall Type Anchors: Minimum 0.912 mm thick (20 ga) steel. Masonry Stirrup-strap Type 50 mm x 250 mm (2" x 10"): Minimum 1.519 mm thick (16 ga) steel. Steel Stud Type: Minimum 0.912 mm thick (20 ga) steel. Steel/Wood Stud Tension and Associated Wall Type: Minimum 0.912 mm thick (20 ga) steel.
2.2.12.
Fire Rated Door and Frame Assemblies: Conform to CAN/ULC-S104-M, CAN/ULC-S105-M, NFPA 80 and NFPA 252.
PAGE 08 11 13 - 5
2.2.13. Fabrication: 2.2.13.1. Permit access by an approved inspection and testing company for purpose of inspecting at random doors under fabrication. 2.2.13.2. Welding: Carry out welding in accordance with CSA W59. 2.2.13.3. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush. Fill open joints, seams and depressions with filler or by continuous brazing or welding. Grind smooth to true sharp arises and profiles and sand down to smooth, true, uniform finish. 2.2.13.4. Hardware Requirements: Blank, mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors and frames to receive mortised templated hardware. Check hardware list for requirements. 2.2.13.5. Frames - General: 2.2.13.5.1. 2.2.13.5.2. 2.2.13.5.3. Fabricate frames for doors, screens and borrowed lights to profiles indicated. Ensure exterior frames are welded type construction thermally broken. Ensure interior frames are welded type construction. Reinforce frame as required for surface mounted hardware. For door frames wider than 1500 mm (5'), reinforce door frame head and jamb and mullions at junction of head. Protect mortise cut outs with mortar guard boxes. Omit for gypsum board applications. Where frames occur in masonry provide strip strap, T-strap or wire type anchors. Where frames occur in gypsum board provide stud type anchors. Locate each wall anchor immediately above or below each hinge reinforcement on hinge jamb and directly opposite on strike jamb. Provide 2 anchors for rebate opening heights up to and including 1500 mm (5') and 1 additional anchor for each additional 760 mm (30") of height or fraction thereof, except as indicated below. For frames in previously placed concrete, masonry or structural steel provide anchors located not more than 150 mm (6") from top and bottom of each jamb and intermediate anchors at 660 mm (26") on centre maximum. Where floor finishes allow, fabricate frames to extend 38 mm (1-1/2") below finished floor level. Where frames are to terminate at finished floor level, provide plates for anchorage to slabs. Prepare each door opening for single stud door silencers: 3 for single door openings placed opposite hinges: 2 for double door openings approximately 150 mm (6") each side of centreline of head stop. Supply removable portion of stop and frame where required for overhead concealed door closers and properly connect to frame and prepare for attachment to closer prior to shipment. Provide 0.912 mm thick (20 ga) steel snap-in or welded-in Z type stud anchors for door frames installed in steel stud gypsum board partitions. Ensure snap-in clips are supplied to Section 09 21 16.
2.2.13.5.4. 2.2.13.5.5. 2.2.13.5.6.
2.2.13.5.7.
2.2.13.5.8.
2.2.13.5.9.
2.2.13.5.10.
PAGE 08 11 13 - 6
2.2.13.5.11. Fabricate thermally broken door frames in accordance with Shop Drawings. Provide wall and floor anchors suitable for installation conditions. Anchoring devices must not permit thermal conductivity from exterior frames to interior frame sections. Provide thermal break to separate interior and exterior frame sections. Factory apply touch-up primer to areas where zinc coating has been removed during fabrication. Construct door frames of labelled fire doors as detailed in Follow-up Service Procedures/Factory Inspection Manuals issued by nationally recognized listing agency to individual manufacturers and tested in conformance with CAN/ULC-S104-M. Ensure ratings for frames match doors as minimum requirement. Locate label on frame jamb on hinge side, so it is concealed when door is closed.
2.2.13.5.12. 2.2.13.5.13.
2.2.13.6. Hollow Metal Frames: 2.2.13.6.1. 2.2.13.6.1.1. 2.2.13.6.1.2. 2.2.13.6.2. 2.2.13.6.2.1. 2.2.13.6.2.2. 2.2.13.6.2.3. 2.2.13.6.2.4. 2.2.13.6.2.5. 2.2.13.6.2.6. 2.2.13.6.3. Steel: Interior: Minimum 1.519 mm thick (16 ga) steel. Exterior: Minimum 1.9 mm thick (14 ga) steel. Reinforcements: Lock and Strike Reinforcements: Minimum 1.519 mm thick (16 ga) steel. Hinge Reinforcements: Minimum 3.4 mm thick (10 ga) steel. Flush Bolt Reinforcement: Minimum 1.519 mm thick (16 ga) steel. Reinforcement for Surface Applied Hardware: Minimum 1.2 mm thick (18 ga) steel. Concealed Door Closer or Holder Reinforcements: Minimum 2.6 mm thick (12 ga) steel. Top and Bottom End Channels: Minimum 1.2 mm thick (18 ga) steel. Jamb Spreaders: Minimum 0.912 mm thick (20 ga) steel.
2.2.13.7. Sidelight and Window Frame Assemblies: 2.2.13.7.1. 2.2.13.7.2. Steel: Minimum 1.519 mm thick (16 ga) steel. Glazing Stops: Minimum 0.912 mm thick (20 ga) steel, formed, drilled and countersunk for fastenings.
2.2.13.8. Welded Type Frames: 2.2.13.8.1. 2.2.13.8.2. Mitre corners of frames. Cut frame mitres accurately and weld continuously across inside of entire profile. When required due to site access or due to shipping limitations, fabricate frame Product for large openings in sections, with splice joints for field assembly. Indicate joints for field assembly on Shop Drawings. Accurately cope and securely weld butt joints of mullions, transom bars, centre rails and sills. Grind welded joints to a smooth, uniform finish. Securely attach floor anchors to inside of each jamb profile.
2.2.13.8.3. 2.2.13.8.4.
PAGE 08 11 13 - 7
2.2.13.8.5. 2.2.13.8.6. Weld in 2 temporary jamb spreaders at each frame to maintain alignment during shipment. Use formed channel glazing stops, minimum 16 mm (5/8") in height, accurately fitted, butted at corners and fastened to frame sections with counter-sunk oval head sheet metal screws.
2.2.13.9. Doors - General: 2.2.13.9.1. Fabricate doors to be swing type flush with 1 continuous face free from joints, tool markings and abrasions and with provisions for glass openings as indicated on Door Schedule and Drawings. Fabricate exterior doors using insulated steel stiffened construction. Fabricate interior doors using steel stiffened construction. Fabricate doors with top and bottom inverted recessed spot welded channels. Provide flush steel top cap on exterior doors. Reinforce, blank, drill and tap doors for mortised, templated hardware. Reinforce doors for surface mounted hardware. Undercut 19 mm (3/4") for air intake at washrooms and other doors indicated on Door Schedule if required by mechanical consultant. Factory prepare holes 13 mm (1/2") diameter and larger. Factory prepare holes less than 13 mm (1/2") when required for function of device for knob, lever, cylinder, turn pieces or when these holes overlap function holes. Fabricate fire rated door assemblies as detailed in Follow-up Service Procedures/Factory Inspection Manuals issued by nationally recognized listing agency to individual manufacturer and tested in conformance with CAN/ULC-S104-M. Provide labels for fire rated doors. Fabricate fire rated doors where indicated in Door [and Frame] Schedule or Drawings, to meet required maximum temperature rise on unexposed side of door in accordance with OBC and ULC requirements. Construct rail and stile doors in same manner as flush doors. Construct panels to match doors. Reinforce panels to prevent oil canning. Install panels with concealed fasteners and reinforce to accommodate hardware as required. Provide door top and rebated matching panel where no transom mullion occurs. Interior Hollow Metal Doors: Face Sheets: 1.519 mm thick (16 ga) minimum unprimed steel sheet. Vertical Stiffeners: 0.912 mm thick (20 ga) minimum unprimed steel sheet. Glazing Stops: 1.519 mm thick (16 ga) minimum unprimed steel sheet, formed, drilled and countersunk for fastenings. Interior Fire Rated Hollow Metal Doors: Face Sheets: 1.519 mm thick (16 ga) minimum unprimed steel sheet.
2.2.13.9.2. 2.2.13.9.3. 2.2.13.9.4. 2.2.13.9.5. 2.2.13.9.6. 2.2.13.9.7. 2.2.13.9.8.
2.2.13.9.9.
2.2.13.9.10.
2.2.13.9.11. 2.2.13.9.12. 2.2.13.9.13.
2.2.13.9.14. 2.2.13.9.14.1. 2.2.13.9.14.2. 2.2.13.9.14.3. 2.2.13.9.15. 2.2.13.9.15.1.
PAGE 08 11 13 - 8
2.2.13.9.15.2. 2.2.13.9.16. 2.2.13.9.16.1. 2.2.13.9.16.2. 2.2.13.9.16.3. 2.2.13.9.16.4. Vertical Stiffeners: 0.912 mm thick (20 ga) minimum unprimed steel sheet. Exterior Hollow Metal Doors: Face Sheets: 1.519 mm thick (16 ga) minimum unprimed steel sheet. Vertical Stiffeners: 0.912 mm thick (20 ga) minimum unprimed steel sheet. Glazing Stops: 1.519 mm thick (16 ga) minimum unprimed steel sheet, formed, drilled and countersunk for fastenings. Exterior Top Caps: Minimum 0.912 mm thick (20 ga) steel.
2.2.13.10. Doors (Steel Stiffened Construction): 2.2.13.10.1. 2.2.13.10.2. Fabricate door faces with a single sheet of steel welded to steel stiffeners. Reinforce steel stiffened doors with 0.912 mm thick (20 ga) continuous interlocking vertical steel stiffeners spaced 150 mm (6") oc maximum, spot welded at 150 mm (6) oc maximum to face sheets. Fill voids with mineral wool insulation specified herein.
2.2.13.11. Prime Painting: Apply factory touch up primer at areas where zinc coating has been damaged during fabrication.
2.3.
2.3.1.


3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
Verification of Conditions: Verify actual site dimensions and location of adjacent materials prior to commencing work. Verify frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. Notify Consultant in writing of any conditions which would be detrimental to the installation. Evaluation and Assessment: Commencement of work implies acceptance of previously completed work.
3.1.2.
3.2.
3.2.1.
INSTALLATION
Fire Labeled Doors and Frames: 3.2.1.1. 3.2.1.2. Install fire labeled doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and NFPA 80. Verify labeled doors and frames are placed in their designated openings. Review, inspect and certify where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.2.2.
Hollow Metal Doors: 3.2.2.1. 3.2.2.2. Install hollow metal doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install in accordance with following edge clearances unless otherwise indicated: 3.2.2.2.1. Between doors and frames at head and jambs: 3 mm (1/8").
PAGE 08 11 13 - 9
3.2.2.2.2. 3.2.2.2.3. At door bottom: 19 mm (3/4") maximum to unfinished floor, 16 mm (5/8") maximum to finished floor unless indicated to be undercut. Between meeting edges of pairs of doors: 3 mm (1/8").
END OF SECTION
PAGE 08 11 13 - 10
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 08 36 14 Project No: 2011.008 GLAZED SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1 1.1.
1.1.1.
GENERAL
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide glazed sectional overhead doors including but not limited to following: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. 1.2.1.5. 1.2.1.6. 1.2.1.7. electrically operated insulated glazed sectional overhead doors with glazed and unglazed sections. door guides, tracks and accessories. counterweight and counterweight enclosures. fender guards for overhead door tracks. supplementary steel supports required for installation. operators, motors, control panels, loop detectors, photo-electric devices, etc. and electrical work as specified. shop finishing.
1.2.2.
Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. 1.2.2.3. Head and jamb door structural framing: Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel. Head and jamb door framing: Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Wiring from power source to line side of main disconnect switch in door control panels: Division 26, Electrical.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. 1.3.1.4. CSA: Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca. EEMAC: Electrical Equipment Manufacturers Association of Canada. EMT: electro metallic tubing. ULC: Underwriters Laboratories of Canada; www.ulc.ca.
1.3.2.
Reference Standards: 1.3.2.1. 1.3.2.2. ASTM C1048-04 ASTM C1172-09e1 - Standard Specification for Heat Treated Flat Glass Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass.
PAGE 08 36 14 - 1
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 08 36 14 Project No: 2011.008 GLAZED SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
1.3.2.3. 1.3.2.4. CSA S136-07 ANSI Z97.1-09 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members - Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings Safety Performance and Methods of Test
1.4.
1.4.1.
SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings: 1.4.1.1. 1.4.1.2. Submit Shop Drawings for the work of this Section in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Clearly show and describe in detail, detailed door assemblies and adjacent construction, including elevations, sections and details of door, track, hardware and operating components, dimensions, gauges, finishes and of relationship of door, frames, track, hardware and operating components to adjacent construction. Submission includes detailed descriptions and catalog cuts of specified door controls. Submit complete electrical schematics with Shop Drawings. Submit complete engineering design data for doors to confirm doors have been designed to meet design requirements specified. Ensure design calculations are prepared by a registered Professional Engineer experienced in industrial steel door design and registered to practice in the Place of the Work. Ensure Shop Drawings bear his seal. Ensure a registered structural engineer specified herein is responsible for: 1.4.1.5.1. 1.4.1.5.2. production and review of Shop Drawings. stamping and signing each Shop Drawing and any associated calculations performed.
1.4.1.3. 1.4.1.4.
1.4.1.5.
1.5.
1.5.1.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit printed operation instructions and maintenance data for doors, as follows: 1.5.1.1. 1.5.1.2. 1.5.1.3. Wiring Diagrams: "As built" straight line wiring diagrams showing electrical connections and control circuitry. Instructions explaining operation. Lubrication chart indicating lubrication points and type of lubricant recommended for equipment.
1.6.
1.6.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications: 1.6.1.1. Installers: Provide work of this Section executed by competent installers with minimum of 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies specified and with approval and training of Product manufacturers. Licensed Professionals: Employ a full time professional structural engineer carrying minimum $2,000,000.00 professional liability insurance and is registered in the Province of Ontario.
1.6.1.2.
1.7.
1.7.1.

Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver materials in sequence to meet the installation schedule and arrange ahead for off-the-ground, undercover storage locations.
PAGE 08 36 14 - 2
1.7.2. Storage and Handling Requirements: Handle components with care. Protect against damage, dirt, disfigurement and weather.
1.8.
1.8.1.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer Warranty: Warrant work of this Section for a period of 3 years against defects and/or deficiencies in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period, to satisfaction of Consultant and at no expense to Owner. Defects include but are not limited to; buckling, opening of seams and bond failure.
PART 2 2.1.
2.1.1.
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer List: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 2.1.1.1. 2.1.1.2. 2.1.1.3. Sectional Doors: Aluminum SA7000 Glazed Sectional Doors by Steelcraft Door Products Ltd.; www.steel-craft.ca. Power Door Lift Motor: hp GT 7500 heavy duty commercial series by Chamberlain, www.chamberlain.com Products by manufacturers not listed herein will be accepted provided they meet the requirements of this specification after a full review by Consultant.
2.2.
2.2.1.
MATERIALS
Performance/Design Criteria: 2.2.1.1. Design exterior doors to withstand horizontal wind loads in closed position of 0.95 kN/m2 (20 2 psf) positive, 0.57 kN/m (12 psf) negative, with operators to function against 0.383 kPa (8 psf) wind load. Ensure maximum deflection under full design load is L/240 of the span. Calculate properties of steel sections and allowable stresses used in determination of structural performance in accordance with CSA S136. Structural Design: Employ a registered structural engineer specified herein to: 2.2.1.3.1. 2.2.1.3.2. design components for work of this Section requiring structural performance. be responsible for determining sizes, yield strengths, gauge thicknesses and joint spacing to allow thermal movement and loading of components in accordance with applicable codes and regulations.
2.2.1.2. 2.2.1.3.
2.2.2.
Steel Supports: Design, fabricate and install following to carry overhead doors and tracks: 2.2.2.1. 2.2.2.2. Galvanized steel jamb and head supports Miscellaneous framing, not shown on structural Drawings, to support operators and tracks e.g. centre spring mount and motor anchorage plates.
2.2.3. 2.2.4.
Glazed Overhead Sectional Doors: 45mm (1-3/4") thick 6063-T5 aluminum alloy with glazing infill panels. Glazing: Except for glass types and composition specified below, all other provisions of Section 08 80 00, on glass and glazing apply to this Section. Final glass thickness to be determined from the results of testing defined in herein and by calculations.
PAGE 08 36 14 - 3
2.2.5. Design to withstand a load of 0.5 kN applied over an area 100 mm x 100 mm: 2.2.5.1. 2.2.5.2. 2.2.5.3. 2.2.5.4. All glass and glazing details shall be reviewed for thermal and design sizes (loads) and approved by the glass manufacturer. The glass manufacturer shall perform a thermal stress and load stress analysis. Ensure glass bears manufacturer's labels indicating quality. Leave labels in place until final cleaning. Tempered Glass (TGL): Clear transparent tempered glass conforming to ASTM C1048, Kind FT and meeting requirements of ANSI Z97.1, minimum 6 mm (1/4) thick. Ensure surface compression is equal to or greater than 68.9 MPa (10 000 psi). Tempered Laminated Glass (TLGL): Clear transparent tempered laminated glass conforming to ASTM C1172, Kind LT and meeting requirements of ANSI Z97.1, minimum 6 mm (1/4") thick overall; clear PVB interlayer of 1.6 mm (0.060") thickness. Performance Criteria for Factory Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Factory sealed insulating glass units to requirements of CAN/CGSB-12.8-M using dual seal. Maintain separation of panes with non-corrosive desiccant filled spacer core. Dehydrate air space and hermetically seal inner and outer panes at periphery with flexible sealer. Ensure thermal resistance of 2 glazing system edge seals are minimum 0.06 m C/W for units having service conditions of 2 interior building relative humidity of greater than 35% and minimum 0.035 m C/W for other areas. Insulated Glass Unit Type: 2.2.5.7.1. Factory Sealed Insulating Glass Unit (Type VG-1): Insulated glass assembly consisting of outboard pane of 6 mm (1/4) thick clear tempered glass TGL (2 layers of 3 mm (1/8) clear tempered glass (TLGL) laminated with 1.6 mm (0.060) thick clear PVB interlayer), with Low E' Solarban 60 by PPG) coating on surface 2, minimum 12 mm (1/2) airspace filled with 90% argon gas and inboard pane of 6 mm (1/4") thick clear tempered glass TLGL, and conforming to requirements specified herein.
2.2.5.5.
2.2.5.6.
2.2.5.7.
2.2.5.8.
Glass materials to be set on two rubber blocks on bottom edge to absorb impact as door closes. All glazing materials sealed to door frame with glazing compound and held securely with rigid PVC snap-in mouldings.
2.2.6.
Frame: 2.2.6.1. Material thickness of top rail, bottom rail, end stiles and intermediate stiles 1.8 mm (0.071") (3 mm (1/8") at fastener locations). Top rail height 44 mm (1-3/4") overall. Bottom rail height 50 mm (2") overall. Combined height of meeting rails 94 mm (3-3/4"). Intermediate stiles 60 mm (2-3/8") wide. End stiles 100mm (3-15/16") wide. Bottom rail of bottom section and top rail of top section 100 mm (3-15/16") wide. Framework to provide 16mm wide glazing shelf.
2.2.7.
Hardware: 2.2.7.1. Track: 50mm (2") Z275 (G90) galvanized steel for torsion spring lifting. Material thickness 1.9 mm (0.075") for 50 mm track and 2.7 mm (0.105") for 75mm track. Vertical tracks to have a graduated slope. Vertical tracks to be bracket mounted 3.4 mm (0.135") or continuous angle mounted 2.2 mm (0.087") and fully adjustable for sealing to door to jamb. Horizontal track to be adequately reinforced per door size and weight.
PAGE 08 36 14 - 4
2.2.7.2. Door Face Hardware: Graduated roller hinges and centre hinges galvanized steel. Heavy duty rollers with hardened inner and outer races with 10 grade 500 ball bearings. Strutting: Aluminum 6063-T5 alloy angular shaped 44 mm (1-3/4") deep. Material thickness 3 mm (0.118") at furthest point from door face. Anodizing applied to AAMA 611, 607, 608 standards. Painted product (special order) painted to AAMA 2605, 2604, 2603. Strutting is required for doors 4000 mm (13'0") and over in width. Counterbalance System: Class II Oil Tempered ASTMA229 wire minimum 10,000 cycle torsion springs on continuous steel shaft (solid or tubular shaft as required by size and operation). Aircraft quality galvanized lift cables with a minimum safety factor of 5 to 1. Locking: Interior mounted slide lock suitable for pad locking. Bottom Weatherstrip: U type arctic grade vinyl fits into integral bottom retainer. Section Interface Weatherstrip: Arctic grade vinyl bubble shapped weatherstrip at all section meeting rails in integral retainer. Jamb Mounted Weatherstrip: Anodized aluminum with two point flexible arctic grade vinyl weatherstrip. Header Mounted Weatherstrip: Anodized or painted aluminum with two point flexible arctic grade vinyl weatherstrip.
2.2.7.3.
2.2.7.4.
2.2.7.5. 2.2.7.6. 2.2.7.7. 2.2.7.8. 2.2.7.9. 2.2.8. 2.2.9.
Operation: Equip doors for operation by electrical heavy duty trolley type gear drive operator, 3.4 HP. Provide metal framed wire mesh enclosures.
2.2.10. Track Description: 2.2.10.1. Material: Roll formed galvanized steel. 2.2.10.2. Depth: 50 mm (2"). 2.2.10.3. Curve Radius: Minimum 400 mm (16"). 2.2.10.4. Thickness: 3 mm (1/8") core minimum. 2.2.10.5. Overlap jambs and head minimum 25 mm (1"). 2.2.10.6. Steel Framing, Supports, Hangers, Stiffeners and Bracing: Z275 (G90) galvanized steel minimized spangle. 2.2.10.7. Verify track design and clearances and provide suitable standard or low headroom track if necessary. 2.2.10.8. Provide sub-framing to support track hangers between bottom chords of roof trusses. 2.2.10.9. Provide diagonal and sufficient stiffeners to prevent distortion and sagging. 2.2.10.10. Provide continuous track mounting angles along tracks. 2.2.10.11. Provide double bar latch cylinder locks with electrical interlock.
PAGE 08 36 14 - 5
2.2.11. Rollers: 2.2.11.1. Bearings: Full floating, hardened steel. 2.2.11.2. Provide industrial grade galvanized steel roller brackets and hinges. 2.2.12. Lifting Cables: Galvanized multi-strand aircraft type, with an 8:1 safety factor. 2.2.13. Electrical Components: 2.2.13.1. Provide CSA and ULC approved electrical components 2.2.13.2. Provide time delay timers adjustable from 0.5 to 180 seconds. 2.2.14. Safety Edge System: 2.2.14.1. Provide a door bottom safety edge to stop downward travel of door when it comes into contact with an obstruction. 2.2.14.2. Provide a reversing time delay on the safety edge system operation. 2.2.15. Manual Chain Hoist Operator: Provide a manual chain hoist operator with reduction unit as backup in case of electrical system failure. 2.2.16. Electric Operators: 2.2.16.1. 3/4 H.P. suitable for 208V / 3 phase/60-cycle power. Chamberlain hp GT 7500 heavy duty commercial series by The Chamberlain Group Inc., www.chamberlain.com. 2.2.16.2. Provide operators/controllers complete with magnetic brake, instant reversing motors and 3 heater elements for overload protection including push buttons and control relays as applicable. 2.2.16.3. Provide controller units, with 1 to 2 second delay timers in the reversing circuit and 1 to 5 minute timers in the close circuit, 0-60 second timer stations, relays and other electrical components to CSA and ULC approval with CEMA or NEMA 12 wall mounted control panel. 2.2.16.4. Provide power supply to control panel and motor. Refer to electrical drawings for power supply voltage. 2.2.16.5. 100,000 cycle oil tempered torsion springs counter balancing mechanism mounted on a 25 mm (1") keyed solid steel shaft. 2.2.17. Control Operation: 2.2.17.1. Remote Control Switch Stations: Card operated, mounted as detailed. 2.2.17.2. Timer and Safety Control System: 2.2.17.2.1. Locate magnetic safety loop detector for non-heated ramps Siemens vi D7 motion detector control for heated ramps, and as required to suit site condition to reset timer at entry. Locate magnetic loop detector prior to installation of traffic topping, if applicable, to 300 to 375 mm inside overhead door opening to control and reset timer. Locate magnetic loop detector prior to installation of traffic topping, if applicable, to 3000 to 3750 mm inside overhead door opening to control and set timer.
2.2.17.2.2.
2.2.17.2.3.
PAGE 08 36 14 - 6
2.2.17.3. Manual Safety Release for Draw-Bar Operator: Wide cable leading from door panel to drive yoke to free door for manual operation. 2.2.17.4. Door Speed: 300 mm per second. 2.2.17.5. Mounting Brackets: Galvanized steel, size and gauge to suit conditions. 2.2.17.6. Control Transformer as required for operator.
2.3.
2.3.1.
FINISH
Anodizing applied to AAMA 611, 607, 608 standards.
PART 3 3.1.
3.1.1.
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
3.1.2.
3.2.
3.2.1. 3.2.2. 3.2.3. 3.2.4.
INSTALLATION
Employ manufacturer's qualified representatives to install overhead doors in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Provide wiring and EMT conduit from the disconnect switch at each jamb to the operators and controls. Provide watertight operators, push buttons and wiring on the interior. On completion, adjust and lubricate moving parts in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, check controls and demonstrate operation and controls of doors to Owner.
3.3.
3.3.1.

3.3.2.
3.4.
3.4.1.
ADJUSTING
Lubrication: 3.4.1.1. 3.4.1.2. Upon completion of erection of units and operating equipment, lubricate moving parts before operation. Grease sprockets, bearings, cables, link chains and guides. Use lubricant recommended by manufacturer.
3.5.
3.5.1.
CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
Demonstration: Test operate new doors and demonstrate operation of same to satisfaction of Consultant at time of acceptance of completed work.
PAGE 08 36 14 - 7
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 08 36 14 Project No: 2011.008 GLAZED SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 3.6.
3.6.1.
PROTECTION
Protect other work resulting from work of this Section.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 08 36 14 - 8
1.1.1.
SECTION 08 44 00 CURTAIN WALL
1.1.2.
Curtain wall Work will be treated as Design-Build. Design-Build refers to the process where Subcontractor awarded work of this Section is responsible for structural and performance design, fabrication and installation of curtain wall in compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents, applicable codes at time of award and ordinance and requirement of local officials. Curtain wall design is based on mutually agreed upon design of extrusions and details as submitted by Subcontractor for final review by Consultant. Architectural Drawings covering work of this Section show design intent and profiles that are diagrammatic in nature. Drawings also show some general building standards for tying into adjacent building trades, which are to be completed and coordinated by this Section. In addition to Specification requirements, final design and performance of curtain wall and approval by authorities having jurisdiction is responsibility of this Section. Identify locations where system design proposed varies from Consultants design Drawings. Comply with Division 1 requirements and documents referred to herein.
1.1.3.
1.1.4. 1.1.5.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide curtain wall system including but not limited to following: 1.2.1.1. dual sealed, pressure equalized, compartmentalized stick built double glazed pre-finished aluminum curtain wall and cladding system(s) as required and/or specified herein and indicated on Drawings. compartmentalized spandrel panels, including cavity wall insulation and galvanized metal air/vapour barrier work as required and/or specified herein and indicated on Drawings. visual mock-up curtain wall unit. aluminum sunshade and light shelf. swing door including finish hardware except lock cylinders and door contacts. expansion joints within curtain wall system. fixing plates, brackets and assemblies required for complete installation including embeds. Coordinate embed installation. mullion reinforcement and bracing to floors. coordination of mullions with recessed floor grilles.
1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. 1.2.1.5. 1.2.1.6. 1.2.1.7. 1.2.1.8. 1.2.1.9.
1.2.1.10. pre-finished aluminum formed components at termination and closure points as indicated and required to meet design requirements. Include extruded aluminum sills, clips and supports for sills. 1.2.1.11. firestopping between back of curtain wall and edge of slab.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 1
1.2.1.12. sealing joints within work of this Section, at abutting joints of this work and interface work of adjacent trades. 1.2.1.13. coordination with electrical and security trades for installation of their respective work within work of this Section. 1.2.2. Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. 1.2.2.3. 1.2.2.4. 1.2.2.5. 1.2.2.6. 1.2.2.7. Casting-in insert anchors at perimeter slab conditions: Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. Aluminum composite metal (ACM) panel cladding: Section 07 42 43, Aluminum Composite Metal Panel System. Sealant requirements: Section 07 92 00, Sealants. Structurally glazed and corner supported curtain wall, vestibule and all glass doors: Section 08 44 13, Structurally Glazed Curtain Wall. Provision of lock cylinders, thresholds and door hardware not listed herein: Section 08 71 00, Finish Hardware. Glazing requirements: Section 08 80 00, Glass and Glazing. Provision of door contacts: Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. 1.3.1.4. 1.3.1.5. 1.3.1.6. 1.3.1.7. 1.3.1.8. AAMA: American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org. AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; www.ashrae.org. EPDM: Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer. IGMAC: Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.igmaonline.org. OBC: Ontario Building Code, 2006. STC: Sound Transmission Class. SWRI: Sealant Waterproofing & Restoration Institute; www.swrionline.org.
1.3.2.
Definitions: 1.3.2.1. Air/Vapour Barrier: A continuous membrane including joints of membrane to adjacent construction which seals or prevents rate of penetration of moisture laden air and diffusion of water vapour through it at air infiltration/exfiltration rates given.
1.3.3.
Reference Standards: 1.3.3.1. 1.3.3.2. AAMA TIR-A9-91 AAMA 501-05 - Metal Curtain Wall Fasteners - Methods of Test for Exterior Walls
PAGE 08 44 00 - 2
1.3.3.3. 1.3.3.4. AAMA 501.1-05 AAMA 501.4-09
- Standard Test Method for Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors for Water Penetration using Dynamic Pressure - Recommended Static Test method for Evaluating Curtain Wall and Storefront Systems Subjected to Seismic and Wind Induced Interstory Drifts - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls and Sloped Glazing Systems - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test - Energy Code for Commercial and High-Rise Residential Buildings - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric] - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric] - Standard Test Method for Measuring Compressive Properties of Thermal Insulations - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness Elastomeric-Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer of
1.3.3.5. 1.3.3.6.
AAMA 503-03 AAMA 1503-98
1.3.3.7.
ANSI Z97.1-04
1.3.3.8. 1.3.3.9.
ASHRAE 90.1-07 ASTM A167-99(04)
1.3.3.10. ASTM A653/A653M-08
1.3.3.11. ASTM B209M-07 1.3.3.12. ASTM B221M-07 1.3.3.13. ASTM C165-07 1.3.3.14. ASTM C177-04
1.3.3.15. ASTM C661-06 1.3.3.16. ASTM C719-93(05)
- Standard Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement (Hockman Cycle) - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-In-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants - Standard Specification for Flat Glass - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass - Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass
1.3.3.17. ASTM C794-06 1.3.3.18. ASTM C920-08 1.3.3.19. ASTM C1036-06 1.3.3.20. ASTM C1048-04 1.3.3.21. ASTM C1172-03
PAGE 08 44 00 - 3
1.3.3.22. ASTM C1376-03 1.3.3.23. ASTM D523-08 1.3.3.24. ASTM D412-06ae2 1.3.3.25. ASTM E96/E96M-05 1.3.3.26. ASTM E283-04
- Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat Glass - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss - Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension - Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference - Test Method for Insulating Glass Unit Performance - Test Method for Testing Resistance to Fogging in Insulating Glass Units - Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation - Heat Absorbing Glass - Insulating Glass Units - Spandrel Glass - Structural Design of Glass for Buildings - Energy Performance of Windows and Other Fenestration Systems - Structural Quality Steel - Limit States Design of Steel Structures - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members - Strength Design in Aluminum - Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel - Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Aluminum - Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) - Standard for Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation for Buildings
1.3.3.27. ASTM E330-02
1.3.3.28. ASTM E331-00
1.3.3.29. ASTM E547-00
1.3.3.30. ASTM E2188-02 1.3.3.31. ASTM E2189-02 1.3.3.32. ASTM E2190-08 1.3.3.33. CAN/CGSB-12.4-M91 1.3.3.34. CAN/CGSB-12.8-97 1.3.3.35. CAN/CGSB-12.9-M91 1.3.3.36. CAN/CGSB-12.20-M89 1.3.3.37. CSA A440.2-04 1.3.3.38. CSA G40.21-04 1.3.3.39. CSA S16-01 1.3.3.40. CSA S136-07 1.3.3.41. CSA S157-05 1.3.3.42. CSA W47.1-03(08) 1.3.3.43. CSA W47.2-M87(08) 1.3.3.44. CSA W59-03(08) 1.3.3.45. CAN/ULC-S702-97
PAGE 08 44 00 - 4
1.3.3.46. NFRC 100
- Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors
1.4.
1.4.1.
Coordination: 1.4.1.1. Notify concerned trades of items required to be incorporated into work of separate Sections. Certain components specified or referenced under this Section including items which are closely integrated with air/vapour barrier transitions, entrances, glazing components, flashing pieces and architectural metalwork specified under separate Sections require close coordination with such allied trades. Perform total coordination required to ensure correct installation procedures and results.
1.4.2.
Preinstallation Meetings: 1.4.2.1. Arrange preinstallation meeting 1 week prior to commencing work with parties associated with this trade as designated in Contract Documents or as requested by Consultant. Presided over by Contractor, include Consultant who may attend, Subcontractor performing work of this trade, testing company's representative and consultants of applicable discipline. Review Contract Documents for work included under this trade and determine complete understanding of requirements and responsibilities relative to work included, storage and handling of materials, materials to be used, installation of materials, sequence and quality control, Project staffing, restrictions on areas of work and other matters affecting construction, to permit compliance with intent of work of this Section. Review installation methods, procedures, time schedule and conditions under which work shall proceed including manufacturer's written instructions and coordination required with related work. Review and finalize construction schedule, verify availability of materials, experienced installer, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
1.4.2.2.
1.4.2.3.
1.5.
1.5.1.
SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings: 1.5.1.1. Submit Shop Drawings for work of this Section in accordance with Section 01 30 00 for Consultants review before any work is fabricated. In addition to minimum requirements indicate following: 1.5.1.1.1. Indicate with plans, sections, elevations and sufficient full size details to indicate components and methods of assembly, materials, finishes, colour and their characteristics relative to their purpose and other fabrication information. Identify and describe material types and components being supplied, their manufacturers, wall thicknesses of extrusions and shapes including connections and grades, attachments, reinforcing, anchorage and locations of fastenings. allowances for thermal and structural movement between components and thermal isolation materials. line of airseal, water drainage, venting and water shed continuous, clearly shown and defined, including continuity of air seal and membrane flashing with adjacent trades.
1.5.1.1.2.
1.5.1.1.3. 1.5.1.1.4.
1.5.1.2.
Include description of materials, metal finishing specifications and other pertinent information.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 5
1.5.1.3.
1.5.1.4. 1.5.1.5.
Provide copies of final reviewed Shop Drawings as required for submission to authorities having jurisdiction. Verify on site and coordinate dimensions and modules related to the work with other trades and other trade Shop Drawings. Include a complete layout of modular and referenced dimensions for curtain wall assemblies and aluminum panels. Properly identify showing overall construction and detailed design of all parts of the installation and materials, including intersections of adjacent trades. Final comment on Shop Drawings are contingent upon complete submission of structural calculations, documentation, certifications, approvals of anchoring and firestop assemblies, samples, mock-up and test reports. Samples, technical material and pre-test results to be submitted for review prior to submission of Shop Drawings. Consultants review of Shop Drawings does not relieve Contractor from its responsibility for errors, or for providing components and materials in full compliance with the Contract Documents.
1.5.1.6. 1.5.1.7.
1.5.1.8.
1.5.2.
Samples: 1.5.2.1. 1.5.2.2. 1.5.2.3. Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Submit 3 samples, minimum 300 mm (12") square of each curtain wall type, with each specified glass type and edge seals. Samples of finish prepared as specified on respective aluminum components for both extrusion and sheet. Submit samples as many times as required to obtain approval of range. Mark direction of metal grain and rolling and paint application on back of control samples. Submit full-sized samples demonstrating methods of sealing both primary and secondary seals of expansion joints within wall system as well as where they meet surrounding dissimilar systems and joints. Provide sealant manufacturer, production run samples of metal, glass, gasketing and setting blocks to be used to perform adhesion and compatibility tests both prior to sitework, and progressively as construction proceeds.
1.5.2.4.
1.5.2.5.
1.5.3.
Record Documents and As-Built Drawings: 1.5.3.1. 1.5.3.2. As Work progresses, clearly mark changes and deviations from Shop Drawings onto a bound set of white prints. Keep prints available at site for periodic inspection throughout duration of work. Pay particular attention to accurately dimensioning the exact location of concealed work, noting work concealed in inaccessible locations. When work is complete and ready for inspection, neatly transfer as-built information from marked-up prints mentioned above and on to a set of Contract Drawings on the most recent revision and submit to Consultant.
1.5.3.3.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 6
1.5.4. Design Calculations: 1.5.4.1.
Submit under seal, calculations prepared by a professional structural engineer registered in Province of Ontario, providing design assumptions regarding loadings related to OBC, applicable Standards and authorities having jurisdiction. Submit detailed designs of mullions and spandrel panels. Detailed designs of anchorage hardware including but not limited to, clip angles, washers, anchor bolts, welds and torque pressures. State materials proposed and their allowable shear and bending stresses, ensuring failure load is substantiated by previous tests and in accordance with AAMA TIR-A9. Submit calculations verifying conformity with specified wind pressure parameters. Submit design calculations and tabular data for design of members, including methods of attachment to supporting structure with design loads and maximum support reactions. Prepare calculations in a clear and comprehensive manner so they can be easily reviewed and cross-referenced to applicable Shop Drawing detail. Submit for review, type and location of fixing with regard to load applied to building structure. Deflection summary for anticipated primary structural deflections, as shown on Structural Drawings.
1.5.4.2. 1.5.4.3.
1.5.4.4.
1.5.5.
Test and Evaluation Reports: 1.5.5.1. 1.5.5.2. Submit in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Prior to fabrication of curtain wall, submit certified test data performed by an independent Standards Council of Canada approved laboratory displaying results of testing program carried out on typical curtain wall systems proposed for this Project. Provide test report on adhesion to production samples of metal and glass testing in accordance with ASTM C794. Ensure test results show compliance with standards specified under this Section. Glazing Thermal Stress Analysis: 1.5.5.5.1. Submit results of a thermal stress analysis for glazing, including any stresses developing from solar radiation or other causes - prior to or during installation of glass - and allow for protection or method of handling and storage of glass to avoid such stresses and conform to safety requirements for glass application in accordance with ASTM C1036. Identify glazing which can be expected to fail under service conditions and submit recommendations for resolution of problem to avoid glazing failure.
1.5.5.3. 1.5.5.4. 1.5.5.5.
1.5.5.5.2. 1.5.5.6.
Laboratory Test Results: 1.5.5.6.1. Submit test results from an independent testing organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada displaying results of laboratory testing program carried out on typical curtain wall systems proposed for this Project. As soon as possible after award of Contract submit Shop Drawings including full size details with actual dimensions and thickness of component parts, engineering calculations, describing test unit assemblies and test procedures for Consultants review.
1.5.5.6.2.
1.5.5.7.
Thermal performance calculations per AAMA 1503 or CSA A440.2.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 7
1.6.1.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions in accordance with Section 01 70 00. Include in Maintenance Manual; printed copies of maintenance instructions for glazed curtain wall, proper care and maintenance of curtain wall and hardware, recommended inspection schedule, copy of each duly reviewed Shop Drawing in its most recent amended form, complete explanation of operation principles and sequences, complete parts and materials list with numbers and glass sizes, method statement of re-glazing and replacement of component parts of installation, instructions for proper cleaning and routine maintenance of curtain wall including recommended frequency.
1.7.
1.7.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications: 1.7.1.1. Fabricators: Ensure insulating glass unit fabricators have membership and certification in IGMAC. IGMAC members shall participate in certification program and successfully pass a Compliance Audit within last 6 months. Fabricators to employ a full time professional structural engineer (Licensed Professional). Fabricator to provide periodic field service representation during construction. Installers: Provide work of this Section executed by competent installers with minimum 10 years experience in the application of Products, systems and assemblies specified and with approval and training of the Product manufacturers. Licensed Professionals: Employ a full time professional structural engineer carrying minimum $2,000,000.00 professional liability insurance and is registered in the Province of Ontario having minimum 5 years experience in design of curtain wall and aluminum panels. Engineer to provide structural calculations, review applicable independent product test reports, installation instructions, and application method.
1.7.1.2.
1.7.1.3.
1.7.2.
Certifications: 1.7.2.1. Sealant Certification: 1.7.2.1.1. Submit written certification from sealant manufacturer that sealant applications in specified systems have been reviewed and approved as completely appropriate for its intended uses in systems as shown and detailed on Shop Drawings, designating drawing number, date and revision, with regard to design criteria and other requirements of the Contract Documents and compatibility with components and adjacent materials together with life expectancy of sealant materials detailed and specified. Ensure specific reference is made to compatibility of glass edge seal with adjacent materials, together with life expectancy of sealant materials detailed and specified. Submit Product information on the sealant to be used, complete with recommendations and installation instructions. Ensure sealants are verified by SWRI in accordance with ASTM C719 and ASTM C661. Provide to sealant manufacturer, Shop Drawings showing size of lites, design loads and sealant dimensions for evaluation and statement on stress.
1.7.2.1.2. 1.7.2.1.3. 1.7.2.1.4.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 8
1.7.2.2. Sealed Glazed Units: 1.7.2.2.1.
Submit to Consultant a written certification from sealed unit manufactured that sealed units of curtain wall assemblies have been reviewed as completely appropriate for their intended use in system shown. They are to be detailed on Shop Drawings, designating drawing number, date and requirements of the Contract Documents, compatibility with components and adjacent materials and thermal safety of glass constructions together with life expectancy of glazing materials detailed and specified in the glazing system. Take into account any stresses developing from solar radiation or other causes (prior to or during installation of the glass) and allow for protection or methods of handling and storage of glass to avoid such stresses and conform to safety requirements for glass application as set out in ASTM C1036. Ensure sealed units are capable of being removed and replaced from exterior. Submit to Consultant detail drawing indicating procedure for removal and replacement of any damaged sealed unit of glass.
1.7.2.2.2.
1.7.2.2.3.
1.7.2.3.
Corrosion Analysis: 1.7.2.3.1. Provide a component-by-component analysis of potential corrosion resulting from galvanic action between materials, for components of curtain wall and aluminum panels and provide report. Submit Engineering Report to Consultant, for review prior to submission of Shop Drawings. Ensure sample and test results are available upon request. Separate dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic action. Provide letter of confirmation from Engineer specified herein that infill components, accompanying trims and flashings and attachments to adjacent construction are designed to eliminate potential for galvanic action between components.
1.7.2.3.2. 1.7.2.3.3.
1.7.3.
Visual Mock-Ups: 1.7.3.1. Erect in-situ visual mock-up at corner location as directed by Consultants review, minimum 2 bays in width and include height sufficient to include 2 vision panels and 1 spandrel panel above and below such vision panels. Ensure mock-up is complete including but not necessarily limited to correct glass, spandrel glass panels, connections, firestopping, sealants, air seal gaskets and anchorage systems. Adjust mock-up at no extra cost to Owner as required to obtain acceptance. Mock-up when accepted will become part of completed work and minimum standard in matching balance of work.
1.7.3.2. 1.7.3.3.
1.8.
1.8.1. 1.8.2.

Ordering: Comply with manufacturers ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. Packing and Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturers original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 9
1.8.3. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1.8.3.1. 1.8.3.2. 1.8.3.3. Store parts to permit natural ventilation over finished surfaces.
Under conditions of high humidity, supply heating or forced air ventilation to prevent accumulation of surface moisture. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle material and components to avoid damage. Protect curtain wall material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after curtain wall installation.
1.9.
1.9.1.
SITE CONDITIONS
Ambient Conditions: Maintain surface of substrates and ambient temperatures constantly between 38 deg C (100 deg F) and 5 deg C (41 deg F) during application and curing of sealants and adhesives and during installation of glazing.
1.10.
1.10.1.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer Warranty: 1.10.1.1. Warrant work of this Section for a period of 5 years against defects and/or deficiencies in accordance with General Conditions of Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period, to satisfaction of Consultant and at no expense to Owner. Defects include but are not limited to weathertightness of curtain wall, structurally sound and free from distortion, deflection, misalignment, continuity of air/vapour barrier, insulating glass units are free from condensation, fogging of material, obstruction of vision, loosening of glazing and anchorage buckling, water penetration beyond air/vapour seal, fading, discolouration of finish, failure of glazing, joint sealant against staining, adhesion and cohesion, bond failure and extensive colour fading. 1.10.1.2. Warrant factory sealed insulating units against defects for a period of 10 years. Warrant factory sealed insulating units free from material obstruction of vision as result of dust or film formation on internal glass surfaces by any cause, under normal conditions anticipated under this Project, other extrinsic glass breakage, but including breakage due to thermal shock and temperature differential due to inherent glass or glazing fault.

2.1.1.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer List for Curtain Wall: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 2.1.1.1. 2.1.1.2. 2.1.1.3. 2.1.1.4. 2.1.1.5. Alumicor Limited; www.alumicor.com Commercial Aluminum Systems Inc.; www.commercial-aluminum.com Ferguson Corporation; www.ferguson.ca Kawneer Co. Canada, Ltd.; www.kawneer.com Zimmcor; www.zimmcor.com
PAGE 08 44 00 - 10
2.1.1.6.
This Specification is based on 1600 Wall System1 in size as shown on Drawings outside glazed pressure plate format by Kawneer Architectural Aluminum Curtain Wall Systems, including perimeter trims, stools, accessories, shims and anchors, and perimeter sealing of curtain wall framing. Other systems by manufacturers listed herein will be accepted provided it meets or exceeds the requirements of this Specification and after a full review by the Consultant. Source Quality: Provide aluminum curtain wall system specified herein from a single source.
2.1.1.7. 2.1.2.
Manufacturer List for Glass: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 2.1.2.1. 2.1.2.2. 2.1.2.3. 2.1.2.4. 2.1.2.5. AGC Flat Glass North America Ltd.; www.na.agc-flatglass.com Guardian Industries Canada Corp.; www.guardian.com Pilkington Building Products; www.pilkington.com PPG Canada, Inc.; www.ppg.com Viracon; www.viracon.com
2.1.3.
This specification is based on unit glazing by Viracon. Other glazing systems by manufacturers listed herein will be accepted provided it meets or exceeds the requirements of this Specification and after a full review by the Consultant.
2.2.
2.2.1.
MATERIALS
Description: 2.2.1.1. 2.2.1.2. 2.2.1.3. System Performance Requirements: Wind loads: Provide Curtain Wall system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures as required by the OBC. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E283. Air 2 2 infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft (0.3 l/s m ) at a static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf (300 Pa). Water Resistance, (static): The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no leakage at a static air pressure differential of 12 psf (575 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501. Water Resistance, (dynamic): The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with AAMA 501.1. There shall be no leakage at an air pressure differential of 12 psf (575 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501. Uniform Load: A static air design load of 40 psf (1915 Pa) shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E330. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member at design load. At structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall occur. Loads: Design curtainwall system to withstand a load of 0.5kN applied over an area 100 mm (4) X100 mm (4) located at any point in the glass or mullions. Seismic: When tested to AAMA 501.4, system must meet design displacement of 0.010 x the story height and ultimate displacement of 1.5 x the design displacement.
2.2.1.4.
2.2.1.5.
2.2.1.6.
2.2.1.7. 2.2.1.8.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 11
2.2.2. Performance/Design Criteria: 2.2.2.1.
Drawings and details are diagrammatic and are intended to show design concept, configuration, components and arrangements; they are not intended to identify nor solve completely problems of thermal, deflection and structural movements, air pressure equalization, air and vapour barriers, assembly framing, fixings and anchorages, moisture disposal, water penetration and problems at the glass line associated with glazing installation, movements, pressure fracture or thermal shock and weather seal. Final engineering design of curtain wall is responsibility of this trade. Material types, sizes and/or thicknesses shown on Drawings are diagrammatic and must be engineered to suit intended sizes and profiles. Include cladding, glazing, insulation, air/vapour barriers, system components, metal trims, thermal breaks, firestopping, smoke seals, closures, fascias, flashings, anchorage, fixings, reinforcing and related items of work to provide a complete cladding system to meet design criteria. Comply with requirements of OBC and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, which shall be minimum, except where more stringent requirements are specified herein. Design glazing systems and framing to prevent thermal shock and pressure fracture damage to glass. Design aluminum work as shown to provide free and noiseless movement of components of assembly due to structural erection or dead loads, without buckling, oil canning of any component and/or transmitting of stresses to any members. Coordinate maximum allowable reaction loads with Structural Drawings. Ensure metal faces of flashings, caps, bases and soffits are visually flat under all lighting conditions to limitations specified hereinafter. Ensure finish on aluminum is uniform and consistent within each component and from component to component. Locate sealants, gaskets, air/vapour seals, thermal separations, drainage slots and holes as shown or specified in this Section as required to obtain design requirements. Ensure components and assemblies exterior to air barrier drain to building exterior.
2.2.2.2.
2.2.2.3. 2.2.2.4. 2.2.2.5.
2.2.2.6. 2.2.2.7. 2.2.2.8. 2.2.2.9.
2.2.2.10. Design, assemble and secure Work in a manner that will keep any stresses on sealants within sealant manufacturer's recommended working range within factors of safety specified. 2.2.2.11. Ensure vertical and horizontal mullion caps are continuous full height and length of window units and horizontal caps shall butt to vertical mullion caps and trims. 2.2.2.12. Extrude pressure plates to dimensions of glass panes. Design pressure plates and glass retainers to place uniform pressure on glass, to prevent distortion of glass. Jointing of pressure plates need not necessarily follow snap-on cap jointing locations. 2.2.2.13. Ensure grain and extruding direction or rolling direction of horizontal mullion caps, trims, flashings, bases and sills are horizontal and in same direction. 2.2.2.14. Accurately shape mullion and cover caps at intersecting joints to obtain hairline joints, just wide enough to permit thermal expansion and contraction. 2.2.2.15. Design and assemble curtain wall to permit re-glazing without removal of structural mullion sections. 2.2.2.16. Ensure fasteners within curtain wall system are concealed.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 12
2.2.2.17. Design attachments which will permit replacement of individual units during construction or in subsequent usage of building without dismantling or disturbance to adjoining components or units. In addition, accomplish such replacement without use of extra exposed fasteners, splices, covers and like that alter original design features. 2.2.2.18. Provide accessories, closures and trims required and necessary to complete work. 2.2.2.19. Thermally break frame members, except where structural glazing is employed. Provide thermal breaks between exterior and interior components and sufficient metal on interior side of glass to provide total absence of condensation on interior metal surfaces under maintained design conditions at specified relative humidity. 2.2.2.20. Thermal Movement: Design components of installation to allow for thermal movement resulting from a surface temperature differential of 92 deg C (165 deg F) (-18 deg C (0 deg F) to 74 deg C (165 deg F)). 2.2.2.21. Design frames so edges of inner pane of insulating glass units do not fall more than 8 deg C (14.4 deg F) below temperature of centre of inner pane. 2.2.2.22. Winter Design Conditions: 2.2.2.22.1. 2.2.2.22.2. Temperature: 22 deg C (72 deg F) interior and -23 deg C (-10 deg F) exterior. Relative humidity: 30% RH.
2.2.2.23. Summer Design Conditions: 2.2.2.23.1.1. 2.2.2.23.1.2. Temperature: exterior. 24 deg C (75 deg F) interior and 32 deg C (90 deg F)
Relative humidity: 50% RH.
2.2.2.24. Structural Building Movement and Tolerances: 2.2.2.24.1. Dead and Live Loads: Design curtain wall system and fixing to accommodate differential structural movements; 9 mm (3/8) typical live load deflection (13 mm (1/2) at Mechanical/Electrical floors), 1.6 mm (1/16) subsidence of columns, creep and thermal movement of the structure and other elements. Coordinate final calculations. Allow for a differential deflection of floor slabs, beams and wall framing after curtain wall and aluminum panel installation for anticipated primary structural deflections, as required by structural design. Do not reduce glass bite below 3 mm (1/8"). Deflection summary for anticipated primary structural deflections, as shown on Structural Drawings. Design curtain wall system so the failure of any 1 element (eg. bolt, anchor or embed) will not result in progressive failure of the wall. Ensure design of curtain wall and aluminum framing and panels, with fixing devices to structure, accommodates building construction tolerances in accordance with those specified in AISC and Structural Drawings. Be responsible for agreeing to tolerances of other trades that may affect the work of this Section prior to start of Shop Drawings.
2.2.2.24.2.
2.2.2.24.3. 2.2.2.24.4. 2.2.2.24.5.
2.2.2.24.6.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 13
2.2.2.25. Structural Design Requirements: 2.2.2.25.1.
Design work to withstand within acceptable deflection limitations, its own weight, forces applied by movements of building structure and attached adjacent components and maximum design loads due to pressure and suction of wind, snow, ice, rain and hail. Design curtain wall to accept 150% of design loads without failure or permanent deformation. Design work to accommodate within its components, expansion and contraction due to cyclic temperature changes, shrinkage, moisture changes, creep in component materials, movement due to differential hoisting, distortions, misalignment, joint seal failures, noise, undue stress on securement devices and components and any other damage. Design work to accommodate expansion and contraction between this work, work of other Sections and building structure due to cyclic temperature changes, to prevent damages, twisting, distortion, misalignment, buckling, noise, undue stress on components and securement devices to work of this Section, work of other Sections and building structure. Ensure work accommodates, by means of expansion/contraction provisions, any movements within building structure and adjacent construction caused by short and long term structural movements, creep, column shortening, deflection, torsion, sway and racking. Expansion/contraction provisions shall ensure no damages, distortion, misalignment of work of this Section, building structure, adjacent construction and connections occur and shall ensure thermal, vapour barrier, air infiltration/exfiltration and water and weathertightness requirements are maintained. Design curtain wall connections to building structure and to adjacent construction to take into account peculiarities as may be found on this Project; to ensure no possibility of weakening, loosening or fracturing occurring due to vibrations from any source. Examine As-Built documents provided by others for structural steel and concrete work and make field observations and measurements of these works, verifying As-Built information. Start of fabrication and installation of curtain wall and aluminum panel work will be deemed as acceptable of AsBuilt condition. Ensure forces imposed by building movement, cladding movement and movement induced by temperature change do not cause distortions, bow, twist and racking of curtain wall components and system alignment is maintained. Determine elastic deflection of panels by visual flatness requirements specified herein. Design sill assemblies to sustain a concentrated load of 1112 N (250 lbs) at any point. Design light gauge steel structural members in accordance with CSA S136. Design light gauge aluminum structural members in accordance with CSA S157.
2.2.2.25.2. 2.2.2.25.3.
2.2.2.25.4.
2.2.2.25.5.
2.2.2.25.6.
2.2.2.25.7.
2.2.2.25.8.
2.2.2.25.9.
2.2.2.25.10. 2.2.2.25.11. 2.2.2.25.12.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 14
2.2.2.25.13.
Design curtain wall and glazing systems (including accessories) to resist minimum wind pressure as required to meet design criteria and designated in OBC for this specific location of Project. Design systems supported by structural building frame system to compensate for tolerances and deflection limitations stipulated in Contract Documents. Design special components, brackets and saddles to allow for connection to framing members. Ensure deflection limitations for span distributions as directly related to exterior wall system and related cladding whether positive or negative (pressure or suction) comply with following: In all cases, limit deflection of any member, in direction parallel to wall plane, when member carries its full design load, not to exceed 75% of design clearance dimension between that member and panel, glass, or other part immediately below it. Deflection of any framing member in a direction normal or perpendicular to the plane of the wall when subjected to a uniform and/or concentrated load deflection test in accordance with ASTM E330, loads shall not: exceed L/360 of its clear span or 19 mm (3/4") whichever is less. For horizontal mullions and members, deflection measured parallel to face of glass; a maximum of greater of L/180 or an amount which allows reduction of glass bite to not exceed 3 mm (1/8") at mid-height of any glass light due to member deflection. For horizontal and vertical members retaining glass panels; deflection limits shall be such that integrity of glass and air seals are maintained at design loading. Permanent deformation of members due to applied loads is not permitted. Design anchors, fasteners, bracing and framing fastened directly to structure, structurally adequate in accordance with requirements of CSA S16 using Limit States Design. Where extra bracing and/or supports are required to stabilize curtain wall assembly, provide such structural members whether shown on Drawings or not. Provide reinforcement in mullions as required, without increasing sight lines of aluminum members. Utilize Limit States Design in sizing of glass and employ a safety factor for glass to statistical probability of failure of 8 glass lites per 1000. Comply with requirements of CAN/CGSB-12.20-M for design of glass. Replace broken or damaged sealed units prior to application of Substantial Performance of the Work. In addition, ensure design of glazing takes into consideration characteristics of mullions and effects of connections and sealants at frame junctions. Ensure glass is heat strengthened or tempered as required in order to meet the wind load, failure probability specified and accommodate thermal stresses as required to meet building codes and/or standards. Design work to accommodate tolerance requirements permitted of building structure and thermal, seismic and live load movements of building structure as stipulated in Contract Documents.
2.2.2.25.14.
2.2.2.25.15.
2.2.2.25.15.1.
2.2.2.25.15.2.
2.2.2.25.15.2.1. 2.2.2.25.15.3.
2.2.2.25.15.4.
2.2.2.25.16.
2.2.2.25.17.
2.2.2.25.18.
2.2.2.25.19.
2.2.2.26. Seismic Loads: In accordance with OBC;
PAGE 08 44 00 - 15
2.2.2.27. Water and Moisture Design Requirements: In designing and engineering the Work, use following principles: 2.2.2.27.1. Design system to rain screen principle. Make provision to drain to exterior face of assembly at every floor level to create horizontal compartmentalization and provide vertical compartmentalization at each vertical mullion to control any water, air and condensation occurring within curtain wall construction while maintaining air seal between interior and exterior. Ensure drain holes are adequate to drain water. Design, fabricate and install assembly to be watertight under design conditions in combination with movements occurring due to loads imposed. Ensure frames provide pressure equalization to glazing pockets at vision and spandrel panels and reveal base and sill panels, Ensure curtain wall system is self-draining with framing components to curtain wall assembly profiled to drain off any moisture to exterior. Screen drainage ports to exterior.
2.2.2.27.2. 2.2.2.27.3.
2.2.2.28. Air and Vapour Design Requirements: 2.2.2.28.1. Ensure a vapour barrier consistent with rain screen principle is continuously installed at inner frame perimeter as an integral part of curtain wall system design to provide a complete and impervious air and vapour barrier. No detectable drafts are permitted. It is the responsibility of Contractor to design and provide air/vapour seal between curtain wall, aluminum panels, trim and expansion joints at roof, base structure, masonry and other components of building. Ensure maximum water vapour transmission including joints is 20 Imperial perms. Design and reinforce rigid air/vapour barriers to withstand acceptable load deflection limitations, their own weight, insulation weight and design loads.
2.2.2.28.2.
2.2.2.28.3. 2.2.2.28.4.
2.2.2.29. Firestopping/Smoke Seals: Coordinate with Section 07 84 00 for firestopping/smoke seal assemblies at floor levels where indicated and where required by local building authorities. Submit firestopping/smoke seal assemblies and fixing methods for review. 2.2.3. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221M, minimum 3 mm (1/8) wall thickness, size accurately formed as shown on Drawings, extruded aluminum alloy AA-6063-T6 for aluminum. Ensure surfaces are free from defects impairing appearance, strength and durability. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209M, minimum thickness 3 mm (1/8") of type and characteristics to match finished extrusions; ensure sheet which is not exposed is Utility Aluminum mill finished; for intricate forming with decorative finishes use AA-1100 and for siding and exposed panels use AA-3003 with specified finish. Perimeter Anchors: Aluminum. When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action. Sunshade: 1600 SunShade by Kawneer: An aluminum sunshade (consisting of outriggers, louvers, and fascia which may be selected from standard configurations, modified configurations, or customized) that is anchored directly to the vertical curtain wall mullions. Outriggers shall be painted in colour to match clear anodized curtainwall finish. Outriggers: Wedge with an angular fascia, circular louvers. Anodize all components where possible.
TM
2.2.4.
2.2.5. 2.2.6.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 16
2.2.7.
Light Shelf: Aluminum light shelf system InLighten by Kawneer consisting of anchor channels, support beams, fascia trims and Aluminum Composite Material (ACM) panels that is anchored directly to the Curtain Wall intermediate horizontal members. 2.2.7.1. 2.2.7.2. Light shelf location shall be as detailed on the architectural drawings. End Treatment: Use types below where shown on drawings. 2.2.7.2.1.1. 2.2.7.2.1.2. 2.2.7.2.2. 2.2.7.2.2.1. Wall to Wall light shelf end treatment; recommended for wall to wall applications (with open-end assembly) or End Caps light shelf end treatment; recommended for punched opening applications (with closed-end assembly). Standard cap design. Standard Design: Fascia Cap model: Consists of top and bottom ACM panel surfaces with separate interior extruded aluminum fascia. Provide trim with half bullnose profile.
2.2.7.3.
Light shelf assembly dimensions shall be as follows: 2.2.7.3.1. 2.2.7.3.2. 2.2.7.3.3. Overall light shelf assembly nominal thickness shall be (63.5 mm) 2-1/2. Overall projection depth shall be as detailed on the architectural drawings, maximum depth is 762 mm (30"). ACM panels shall be 3mm thick.
2.2.7.4. 2.2.8.
Anchor channels and fascia trims finish: Select from Kawneer standard paint colors to match Consultants sample.
Aluminum Composite Material (ACM) panels shall be painted. 2.2.8.1. 2.2.8.2. Top panel of Fascia Cap model and Continuous Panel model shall be painted white. Bottom panel of Fascia Cap model shall be painted to match Consultants sample.
2.2.9. 2.2.10.
Panel Joint Trim for Fascia Cap model: Colour - White. Screws, Bolts and Fasteners: At exterior to air seal and/or penetrating air seal, use Type 304 Series stainless steel or hardened aluminum. Fully to interior of air seal, use cadmium plated or Series 400 stainless steel is acceptable. Internal Frame Sealant: Non-sag type, either 1 or 2 component ultra low-modulus, pre-pigmented, neutral cure elastomeric silicone sealant conforming to ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, G, M, A and O. Supply in standard colours as selected. Supply 1 of following: 2.2.11.1. Dow Corning 983 Silicone Glazing and Curtainwall Adhesive/Sealant by Dow Corning. 2.2.11.2. GE UltraGlaze SSG4400" by Momentive Performance Materials.
2.2.11.
2.2.12.
Backpan Sealant: Non-sag type, 2 component. Supply in standard colours as selected. Supply 1 of following: 2.2.12.1. Dow Corning 983 Silicone Glazing and Curtainwall Adhesive/Sealant by Dow Corning.
2.2.13.
Thermal Break Component: www.ensinger.ltd.uk.
Glassfibre
impregnated
nylon,
Polymide
by
Ensinger
Ltd.;
PAGE 08 44 00 - 17
2.2.14. 2.2.15. 2.2.16. 2.2.17.
Light Gauge Sheet Metal: Commercial quality galvanized sheet steel to ASTM A653/A653M, Designation Z275 (G90) unless otherwise specified. Miscellaneous and Sub-Frame Steel: CSA G40.21, Grade 300W, prime painted. Shims: Aluminum utility sheet when not in contact with concrete; stainless steel when in contact with concrete or cementitious substances of thickness required, or hot dip galvanized steel. Insulation for Spandrels and Firestopping: Provide foil faced or standard mineral wool (as required), rigid or semi-rigid board insulation, CurtainRock 40 (foil faced and/or standard) by Roxul Inc. or Curtain Wall CW 90 (foil faced and/or standard) by Thermafiber. Ensure insulation has a thermal resistance value of not less than RSI=0.704 per 25 mm (R=4 per inch) thickness at a mean 3 temperature of 24 deg C (75 deg F) and a minimum nominal density of 64 kg/m (4 pcf). Ensure deformation of insulation does not exceed 10% when tested at 1.2 kPa (25 psf) in accordance with CAN/ULC-S702, Type 1 and ASTM C165. Thickness as indicated. Tape foil faced insulation at spandrel panels. Dielectric Separator: Provide best grade, quick drying non-staining alkali resistant bituminous paint or epoxy resin solution or membrane type to acceptance of Consultant. Adhesive for Insulation: Compatible, permanent type recommended by insulation manufacturer and suitable when fully coated to hold insulation totally bonded for life of building. Metal Air/Vapour Barriers: Galvanized sheet metal for metal/air vapour barriers, backpans and air seals minimum 0.912 mm (20 ga) thick, sheet steel galvanized to requirements specified herein and Designation Z275 (G90). Insulation Retainers: Aluminum bars spaced no greater than 400 mm (16) oc. Gun Welded Pins: Alternative at Contractor's option to stick clips, 3 mm (1/8") dia. galvanized steel pins with cup heads of length to suit insulation thickness and suitable for gun shot welding to metal air/vapour barriers. Stick Clips: Consisting of 25 mm (1") diameter perforated disc base with integral 3 mm (1/8") square sharpened pin of moulded polyvinyl chloride. Ensure pin lengths suit insulation thickness and clips have 25 mm x 25 mm (1" x 1") galvanized sheet steel retainers punched to lock on pins. Adhere with structural silicone sealant. Adhesive for Stick Clips: High-strength, resilient adhesive having a drying time of 1 to 30 minutes (rapid initial set) and 24 hour final set. Ensure adhesive is compatible with specified insulation adhesive, insulation, galvanized steel and polyvinyl chloride. Primer for Adhesives: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer for particular materials to be adhered. Stack Joint Flashing: Provide aluminum or stainless steel embedded in silicone sealant. Pre-seal as required. Touch-Up Paint: As recommended by aluminum finish manufacturer. Touch-up paint for welded galvanized areas; 2 coats of zinc-rich paint to CGSB 1-GP-171, "Crown Zinc 51-900" by Crown Diamond, "Galvafroid Grade SB" by W.R. Meadows of Canada or "Mobilzinc 2" by Mobil Paints.
2.2.18. 2.2.19. 2.2.20.
2.2.21. 2.2.22.
2.2.23.
2.2.24.
2.2.25. 2.2.26. 2.2.27.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 18
2.2.28. Air/Vapour Transition Membrane System: Provide 1 of following:
2.2.28.1. Flexible Membrane: Cold applied, reinforced modified bitumen membrane, minimum 1 mm (40 mils) thick, reinforced with non-woven polyester fabric, membrane covered with plastic film 1 side, self-adhesive on the other, cut to suit design and lap requirements; Perm-ABarrier by Grace Construction Products, Blueskin SA by Bakor Inc., IKO AquaBarrier AVB by IKO Industries Ltd., Air Shield by W.R. Meadows of Canada or 110/110LT SelfAdhered by Tremco Canada. Primer as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 2.2.29. Glazing Materials: 2.2.29.1. Ensure selected glazing accessories for each condition are fully compatible with contact surfaces of frames, other accessories used in glazing system and contact surfaces of compounds used on insulated glass units. Wood or other organic materials are not acceptable for use in glazing systems, including spacer blocks. 2.2.29.2. Edge Blocking for Glass: 60 - 70 Durometer neoprene, silicone or EPDM, channel shaped, 100 mm - 150 mm (4" - 6") long. 2.2.29.3. Spacers: Black anodized aluminum alloy of adequate rigidity, continuous with bent corners and welded joints. Design spacer to accommodate seals and desiccant. 2.2.29.4. Setting Blocks, Void Filler Blocks Under Pressure Bars, Anti-Walk Blocks: Neoprene ASTM C542, or silicone or EPDM, having 80 to 90 Durometer Shore A' hardness. 2.2.29.5. Glazing Tape: Preformed, 100% solids polyisobutylene butyl, paper release, reinforced centre. Acceptable Products: Polyshim 2 by Tremco Canada or equivalent by Protective Treatments Incorporated. Test to ensure compatibility with edge-seal. 2.2.29.6. Neoprene Gaskets: Black, closed cell neoprene of approximately 5 to 15 Durometer Shore A' hardness suitable for 50% compression when installed. 2.2.29.7. Glazing Gaskets for Curtain Wall: In compliance with ASTM C864. Composite system consisting of a silicone compatible EPDM rubber lock-on upper gasket with a precision extruded sealant portion for either interior or exterior application to custom designed aluminum frame or glass stop with integral nib designed to accept profile of strip. Acceptable Product; "Visionstrip" by Tremco Canada. 2.2.29.8. Silicone Compatible Rubber Extrusions: Gaskets and accessories such as wedges, pre-set spacers and shims for use in glazing applications and other building joint applications. SCR-900 Rubber Extrusions by Tremco Canada for standard design or profile size and configuration to suit design requirements. 2.2.29.9. Preshim Glazing Tape: Preformed, ribbon-shaped, non-skinning, 100% solids, nonoxidizing polyisobutylene: butyl, paper release, EPDM Shim with continuous synthetic rubber spacer rod of 60 Durometer hardness. Acceptable Products: "Polyshim II Tape" by Tremco Canada, or "PTI-606" by Protective Treatments Inc. Ensure tape is sufficiently wide and thick to completely cover bite area of glazing unit when unit is pushed into place. 2.2.29.10. Sealant for Heel Bead Airseal: One component, medium modulus silicone sealant conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS. Acceptable Products: "Dow Corning 795 Silicone Building Sealant" by Dow Corning in accordance with Section 07 92 00. Ensure compatibility with edge seal of glazing unit. 2.2.30. Glazing: 2.2.30.1. Except for glass types and composition specified below, all other provisions of Section 08 80 00, on glass and glazing apply to this Section. Final glass thickness to be determined from the results of testing defined in herein and by calculations.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 19
2.2.31. Design to withstand a load of 0.5 kN applied over an area 100 mm x 100 mm:
2.2.31.1. All glass and glazing details shall be reviewed for thermal and design sizes (loads) and approved by the glass manufacturer. 2.2.31.2. The glass manufacturer shall perform a thermal stress and load stress analysis. 2.2.31.3. Ensure glass bears manufacturer's labels indicating quality. Leave labels in place until final cleaning. 2.2.31.4. Tempered Glass (TGL): Clear transparent tempered glass conforming to ASTM C1048, Kind FT and meeting requirements of ANSI Z97.1, minimum 6 mm (1/4) thick. Ensure surface compression is equal to or greater than 68.9 MPa (10 000 psi). 2.2.31.5. Tempered Laminated Glass (TLGL): Clear transparent tempered laminated glass conforming to ASTM C1172, Kind LT and meeting requirements of ANSI Z97.1, minimum 6 mm (1/4") thick overall; clear PVB interlayer of 1.6 mm (0.060") thickness. 2.2.31.6. Performance Criteria for Factory Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Factory sealed insulating glass units to requirements of CAN/CGSB-12.8-M using dual seal. Maintain separation of panes with non-corrosive desiccant filled spacer core. Dehydrate air space and hermetically seal inner and outer panes at periphery with flexible sealer. Ensure thermal resistance of 2 glazing system edge seals are minimum 0.06 m C/W for units having service conditions of 2 interior building relative humidity of greater than 35% and minimum 0.035 m C/W for other areas. 2.2.31.7. Insulated Glass Unit Type: 2.2.31.7.1. Factory Sealed Insulating Glass Unit (Type VG-1): Insulated glass assembly consisting of outboard pane of 6 mm (1/4) thick clear tempered glass TGL (2 layers of 3 mm (1/8) clear tempered glass (TLGL) laminated with 1.6 mm (0.060) thick clear PVB interlayer), with Low E' Solarban 60 by PPG) coating on surface 2, minimum 12 mm (1/2) airspace filled with 90% argon gas and inboard pane of 6 mm (1/4") thick clear tempered glass TLGL, and conforming to requirements specified herein. Factory Sealed Insulating Glass Unit for Doors (Type VG-2): Insulated glass assembly consisting of outboard pane of 6 mm (1/4) thick clear tempered glass TGL (2 layers of 3 mm (1/8) clear tempered glass (TLGL) laminated with 1.6 mm (0.060) thick clear PVB interlayer), with Low E' Solarban 60 by PPG) coating on surface 2, minimum 6 mm (1/4) airspace filled with 90% argon gas and inboard pane of 6 mm (1/4") thick clear tempered glass TLGL, and conforming to requirements specified herein. Spandrel Glass (Type SG-1): Insulated glass assembly consisting of outboard pane of 6 mm (1/4) thick clear tempered TGL with Low E' Solarban 60 by PPG) coating on surface 2, minimum 13 mm (1/2) airspace filled with 90% argon gas and inboard pane of 6 mm (1/4") thick clear tempered glass TGL with solid ceramic frit conforming to CAN/CGSB12.9-M, Type 2, Class A, Style 1 Ceramic Coated, Form I Insulating glass unit, and conforming to requirements specified herein in colour to match Consultants sample.
2.2.31.7.2.
2.2.31.7.3.
2.2.31.8. Manufacture factory sealed insulating glass units to IGMAC recommendations. 2.2.32. Exterior Doors: Doors are based on AA 250 by Kawneer. Provide doors complete with required hardware except for lock cylinders. Provide VG-2 for door glazing.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 20
2.2.33. Fabrication: 2.2.33.1. Curtain Wall: 2.2.33.1.1.
Drawing details of curtain wall are based on design performance requirements and criteria specified herein, frame depth and back section, cap depths and configuration as shown. Ensure extrusion thickness is adequate to satisfy loading and deflection, as required and indicated. Form accurate extrusions with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles free from any defects. Insofar as practical, execute fitting and assembly of unitized components in shop with various parts or assemblies ready for erection on site. Take field measurements and levels required to verify or supplement those shown for proper layout and installation of Work. Coordinate dimensional tolerances in adjacent building elements and confirm prior to commencement of Work. Commencement of installation floor by floor shall be construed as acceptance of building conditions. Ensure curtain wall does not deviate from tolerances specified. Maintain dimensional tolerances from vertical and horizontal planes with closest possible accuracy. Where curtain wall occurs in curved plane, machine butt joints of horizontal members to accurately follow a segmented line along curve of building wall. Ensure means of anchoring curtain wall has sufficient adjustment to permit correct and accurate alignment. After adjustment, positively lock anchorage devices in manner to preclude movement, once alignment is achieved. Isolate aluminum bearing contact with dissimilar materials. Ensure method of isolation is to Consultant's acceptance. Make allowances for deflection of structure above when making connection thereto, and ensure that no structural load is transmitted to aluminum curtain wall. Ensure grain of sheet and direction of finish for flashings and panels on building are in the same direction. Make panels free of machine marks. Conceal nuts, bolts, screws, clips and other means of fastening in finished Work, except where shown or specified. Countersink and conceal fixing screws. Ensure screws are oval head, Phillips or Robertson head, set flush with adjacent surfaces. Weld aluminum where required with inert metal arc equipment by methods recommended by manufacturer. Ensure welders qualify according to CSA W47.2. Make exposed welds continuous and flush with adjacent surface. Do not mar surface finishes with welds in back of exposed aluminum. Do not deform exposed metal and finish in any way by welding.
2.2.33.1.2. 2.2.33.1.3. 2.2.33.1.4. 2.2.33.1.5.
2.2.33.1.6. 2.2.33.1.7. 2.2.33.1.8.
2.2.33.1.9. 2.2.33.1.10.
2.2.33.1.11. 2.2.33.1.12.
2.2.33.1.13.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 21
2.2.33.1.14.
Weld steel, where required, in accordance with CSA W59. Ensure welded joints are of adequate strength and durability with jointing tight and flush. Ensure welder is fully approved by Canadian Welding Bureau and fabricator certified to CSA W47.1, Division 3. Where it is necessary to weld components already galvanized, remove galvanizing for 50 mm (2") around weld and paint over welds where galvanizing is removed as specified hereinafter. Insert concealed galvanized and zinc chromate coated steel reinforcement into frame members and any other units as required, sized to adequately withstand snow and wind pressure requirements of OBC. Curtain wall closures thickness for exposed or concealed locations: Minimum 3 mm (1/8"). At junction of mullions and adjoining structure, notch extrusion stem at head and/or sill as required to allow for correct, uninterrupted installation of flashings and air seals integrated into system as indicated. Include thermal barriers and miscellaneous EPDM pads, shims and washers. Glass Rabbet: Ensure rabbet depth is no less than 25 mm (1") deep to allow adequate engagement of variables such as temperature, manufacturing tolerances and site installation. Provide weepholes in glazing cavity to drain water leakage to exterior. Provide drainage tubes as necessary to conduct water safely through isolated insulated areas to direct exterior discharge. Seal around tubes. No visible welds or other fastening methods of fabrication will be accepted at sun shades and light shelves. Fabricate frame systems complete with mullions, head and sill frames, spigots and plugs for horizontals, spline gaskets, thermal break pressure plates, filler pieces, snap-on caps, and other necessary components. Where horizontal and/or vertical mullions terminate or are interrupted and would otherwise expose an open end of tube, provide plug consisting of colour matching aluminum finished to fit with hair-line joint and either welded or mechanically fixed in position with totally concealed stainless steel fasteners.
2.2.33.1.15.
2.2.33.1.16. 2.2.33.1.17.
2.2.33.1.18. 2.2.33.1.19.
2.2.33.1.20.
2.2.33.1.21. 2.2.33.1.22.
2.2.33.2. Spandrel Panel Assembly: 2.2.33.2.1. Ensure spandrel panel assembly consists of minimum foil faced insulation R8.3 thermal value and 19 mm (3/4") air space between insulation and second surface of spandrel glass. Include cold rolled framing, furring, brackets, clips, hangers and incidental components as required for secure fastening and provide weathertight installation including non-corrosive fasteners. Tape joints at perimeter of foil faced insulation to create an air seal. Provide openings at interior gasket to allow for air ventilation and drainage of cavity. Provide for condensation and inner wall drainage at sill members and other shapes which would otherwise tend to trap water.
2.2.33.2.2.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 22
2.2.33.3. Flashing and Trim: 2.2.33.3.1.
Furnish metal flashing members, trim and accessories in contact with framing members under this Section. Fabricate exposed, concealed or semi-concealed flashing and closure sections from finish-matching 2.5 mm (3/32") thick aluminum from stock as previously specified. Be responsible for accurate cutting, drilling and fitting of dissimilar and aluminum components which penetrate this work. Provide matching custom formed or brake shape trim sections at capped peak, sill section to overlap separate counter flashing and end rafter edge trim to interface with metal cladding.
2.2.33.3.2. 2.2.33.3.3.
2.2.33.4. Louvres: Refer to Section 08 91 00. 2.2.33.5. Doors: 2.2.33.5.1. Ensure aluminum doors have bevelled glazing beads designed for neoprene glazing system; except at exterior doors with insulating lites, use glazing system compatible with secondary sealant of the glass unit. Equip doors with full weatherstripping at perimeter. Install weatherstripping throughout the full length and width of the doors at jambs and heads. Fabricate doors and frames complete with necessary internal reinforcements, cutouts, recesses, mortising or milling operations required for a rigid assembly and to accommodate finish hardware. Ensure connections have adequate strength. Fabricate frames with joints accurately fitted and securely joined together in a manner to ensure tightly fitting joints. Internally caulk and seal corners of frames and joints exposed to water penetration using a material compatible to resist flow at the high surface summer temperatures to be experienced by the metal.
2.2.33.5.2. 2.2.33.5.3.
2.2.33.5.4.
2.2.34.
Finishes: 2.2.34.1. Clear Anodized Finish: Ensure aluminum finish is clear anodized in accordance with Aluminum Association; www.aluminum.org, Finish Designation AA-M12C22A41, Class I, minimum 0.018 mm (0.7 mils) thick for exterior exposure and AA-M12C22A31, Class II, minimum 0.01 mm (0.4 mils) thick for interior exposure. 2.2.34.2. Exposed Stainless Steel Finish: ASTM A167, Series Type 316, ANSI No. 4 brushed finish. 2.2.34.3. Painting: 2.2.34.3.1. 2.2.34.3.2. Prime steel at building interior and not exposed to view or to exterior environmental conditions with oil alkyd primer. Provide a heavy coating of bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of aluminum and galvanized steel which would otherwise come in direct contact with structural steel, concrete and masonry. Paint welded, galvanized items where galvanizing has been removed for welding. Make Good corrosion protection using 2 coats of touch-up primer for galvanized steel. Make Good protection on steel primed with oil alkyd primer using same primer.
2.2.34.3.3.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 23
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury Project No: 2011.008 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1.
3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
Verification of Conditions: 3.1.1.1. 3.1.1.2. Verify actual site dimensions and location of adjacent materials prior to commencing work. Notify Consultant in writing of any conditions which would be detrimental to the installation. Ensure openings and recesses to receive work of this Section and sill plates are within acceptable tolerances.
3.1.2.
Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements, fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. Evaluation and Assessment: Commencement of work implies acceptance of previously completed work.
3.1.3.
3.2.
3.2.1.
PREPARATION
Surface Preparation: 3.2.1.1. Ensure masonry and concrete surfaces to receive adhesives and sealants are dry, firm, sound, smooth, suitable for bond, and free from loose material, projections, ice, frost, slick, grease, oil and other matter detrimental to bond. Remove dust and other loose material from openings.
3.2.1.2.
3.3.
3.3.1. 3.3.2.
INSTALLATION
Glazing: Glass shall be outside glazed and held in place with extruded aluminum pressure plates anchored to the mullion using stainless steel fasteners spaced no greater than 9" on center. Water Drainage: Each light of glass shall be compartmentalized using joint plugs and silicone sealant to divert water to the horizontal weep locations. Weep holes shall be located in the horizontal pressure plates and covers to divert water to the exterior of the building. Supply anchorage devices and inserts to appropriate trades where required for building in or castingin-place and instruct as to proper location and position. Erect work plumb, level and and true to line and in proper alignment and relationship to established lines and grades, without warp or rack of frames. Erection Tolerances: Maintain following tolerances: 3.3.5.1. 3.3.5.2. 3.3.5.3. 3.3.5.4. 3.3.5.5. 3.3.5.6. maximum variation from plane or location shown on Shop Drawings: 1.6 mm (1/16) in 4420 mm (14 6) of length. maximum offset from true alignment between 2 identical members abutting end-to-end in line: 0.8 mm (1/32). racking of face: 3 mm (1/8) maximum. racking in elevation: nil. Deviation from true plumb over full height of building: maximum 6 mm (1/4"). Deviation from true straightness in plane over full length of each building face; maximum 6 mm (1/4").
3.3.3. 3.3.4. 3.3.5.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 24
3.3.5.7. 3.3.5.8.
Maximum variation in any column-to-column space or 6 m (20' - 0") run: 3 mm (1/8"). Ensure tolerances of relationship of individual components are as follows: 3.3.5.8.1. 3.3.5.8.2. member to member, maximum 0.4 mm (1/64"). out of plane between faces of 2 halves of split mullions, 0.8 mm (1/32").
3.3.5.9.
Joint width, mullion snap-on cap to mullion snap-on cap; maximum 1.6 mm (1/16"). Ensure each joint is of uniform width.
3.3.5.10. Joint width between soffits and base and sill panels; maximum 3 mm (1/8") and of uniform width. Do not apply sealants to joints between panels; use only "dry" gasket system of sealing. 3.3.5.11. Keep panel joints to a minimum and as shown. Ensure panel sizes are uniform and to direction of Consultant. 3.3.5.12. Tolerances are not cumulative. 3.3.5.13. Flatness of Panels Defined: 3.3.5.13.1. Ensure exposed flashing components have a visual flatness acceptable to Consultant and in such manner that slope of any surface at any point does not exceed 0.5% from nominal plane of surface when measured in any direction at 25 mm (1") intervals when ambient temperature is at 22 deg C (72 deg F) and under any combination of performance conditions. This requirement is also applicable to conditions and jointing of components in same plane and to transition from 1 component to another or similar component in same plane. Short length distortion ripples, edge distortions, "oil canning", "telegraphing of fasteners" and like will not be permitted. Make provisions to allow for differential thermal expansion between stiffeners, recessed slots and exposed metal of curtain wall system to take place without noise and without buckling of surface.
3.3.5.13.2.
3.3.5.14. Dimensional tolerances of outer dimensions of metal flashing: +/-0.8 mm in 1220 mm (+/1/32" in 4' - 0") measured at any point. 3.3.6. Ensure devices for anchoring frame assemblies have sufficient adjustment to permit correct and accurate alignment. After alignment, positively secure anchorage devices to prevent movement other than those designed for expansion and contraction. Take into consideration climatic conditions prevailing at time of installation. Ensure site located fixings are subject to Consultant's review. Perform welding and drilling of steel and drilling of concrete as required to install fixings. Repair concrete chipped by drilling or fixing operations. Installed adjacent to each other, group components with shop applied finishes which relate most closely to 1 another, with regard to colour and appearance. Coordinate work of this Section with and provide connection for compartmentalization of air spaces provided under other Sections. Cooperate and coordinate work of this Section with Section executing fire stopping and smoke seal work. Provide thermal insulation and air/vapour barriers compatible and continuous with adjacent thermal and air/vapour barrier systems.
3.3.7. 3.3.8. 3.3.9.
3.3.10.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 25
3.3.11.
Ensure a uniform, continuous thermal and vapour barrier effect. Where adjacent insulation and vapour barriers are to be provided under other Sections, coordinate work such that thermal and vapour barrier continuity is achieved. Locate vapour barrier on warm-in-winter side of insulation. Isolate metal air/vapour barriers with thermal breaks and spacers. Gun-apply a continuous bead of sealant to joints and air/vapour barrier junctions with adjacent construction. Liberally butter screw fastenings with sealant. Supply and install flexible, continuous membrane and gasket air/vapour barrier seals between work of this Section and adjacent construction and at deflection and expansion connections, where required. Apply membrane to concrete and masonry with adhesive and retain with continuous aluminum or galvanized steel plates or bars and non-corrosive mechanical fasteners. Vulcanize or overlap joints to ensure a continuous seal. Provide air tight seals at penetrations in air/vapour barriers. Adhere stick clips for insulation to metal air/vapour barriers at 300 mm (12") oc both ways. As an alternative, gun weld apply pins to metal substrates in lieu of stick clips, provided clips do not easily break off and weld burn-through does not occur. Ensure other methods of retaining insulation tight to metal air/barrier are subject to Consultants approval. Support adhesive-applied clips in place until adhesive has set. Cut insulation as required and fit snugly to penetrations, obstructions, openings and corners. Butt insulation boards tightly. Cut out back of board insulation as required to accommodate substrate irregularities and build up over cut out areas on other side as required to ensure thermal barrier uniformity unless otherwise indicated or approved. Install insulation to thicknesses shown on Drawings. Press insulation boards firmly and tightly to barrier or substrate impaling them on clips without bending clips. Butt insulation boards tightly at joints. Install retainers to clips. Fill irregular shaped voids within assemblies with fibrous packing insulation to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. Protect exterior finished surfaces by installing snap-on caps only when building is closed in and when possibility of damage due to construction has been minimized, to approval of Consultant. Provide structural steel framing and supports required to support work of this Section unless indicated to be provided under other Sections. Supply and install flexible sheet waterproofing membrane at transition to copings and parapets. Lap, adhere and seal joints in membrane in accordance with recommendations of membrane manufacturer to provide a watertight, continuous membrane. Glazing: 3.3.26.1. Clean rabbets, stops and glass edges of dust, dirt, moisture, oil and other foreign matter detrimental to glazing material adhesion. Ensure drainage holes are not blocked. 3.3.26.2. Mask surfaces subject to staining and wherever necessary to ensure neat appearance of glazing bead. Remove masking as work progresses. 3.3.26.3. Accurately size glass to fit openings allowing clearances following trade practices. Cut glass cleanly and carefully; nicks, damaged edge conditions will not be accepted. Replace glass which has nicked or otherwise damaged edges.
3.3.12. 3.3.13. 3.3.14. 3.3.15.
3.3.16. 3.3.17.
3.3.18. 3.3.19.
3.3.20. 3.3.21. 3.3.22. 3.3.23. 3.3.24. 3.3.25.
3.3.26.
PAGE 08 44 00 - 26
3.3.26.4. Replace defective materials and materials damaged due to faulty installation, careless handling or other causes resulting from work of this Section. 3.3.26.5. Remove glazing stops and replace in original locations, using original fasteners, securely set and accurately aligned. 3.3.26.6. Use shims, spacers and setting blocks of proper size to support and hold glass in position independent of glazing tape and gaskets. Place 2 setting blocks under each unit at quarter points. Place spacers located directly opposite each other on both sides of glass, at maximum 610 mm (24") centres and maximum 300 mm (12") from corners and uniformly spaced. Arrange shims, spacers, setting blocks and shims so as to avoid blocking water transfer inside frames. 3.3.26.7. Install preformed tapes to ensure complete contact on surface of glass, pressure plates and stops. Make joints only at corners of sash or frame. Fit tape accurately with tight joints, free from tension, without gaps and cracks. 3.3.26.8. Install glazing gaskets in continuous lengths between corners, not stretched and seal joints at corners to prevent entry of water and air movement. 3.3.26.9. At top of sealed glass units, at mid point of rebate, supply and install 50 mm (2") wide finger compressible closed cell foam pad to prevent convection currents occurring within glazing rebate. 3.3.26.10. Set glass properly centred with uniform bite and face and edge clearance, free from twist, warp or other distortion likely to develop stress. Ensure bite is minimum 19 mm (3/4). 3.3.26.11. Handle and install glass in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Prevent nicks, abrasion and other damage likely to develop stress on edges. 3.3.26.12. Install glazing materials to obtain complete adhesion over full bite area of unit and to be free from gaps, air bubbles and embedded foreign matter. Use primer for elastomeric compounds. Use sufficient bedding compound so that when glass is pressed into place excess compound is forced well out around entire margin. 3.3.26.13. Ensure a weathertight and rattle-free seal for glass cushioning. 3.3.26.14. Ensure a continuous seal between glazed element and frame flush with sight line. 3.3.27. 3.3.28. 3.3.29. 3.3.30. Sealants: Refer to Section 07 92 00 for sealants. Louvres: Refer to Section 08 91 00 for provision of louvres. Doors: Prepare openings for installation of Doors. instructions. Install doors in accordance with manufacturers
Sealants: Seal joints between frame assemblies and adjacent construction except where specified to be done under other Sections and within glazed assemblies where required to maintain weathertightness and integrity of air/vapour barrier. Seal junctions in sheet metal air/vapour barriers and between air/vapour barriers and adjacent construction. Conform to requirements of Section 07 92 00.
3.4.
3.4.1.

PAGE 08 44 00 - 27
3.4.1.2. Curtain Wall Site Testing: 3.4.1.2.1.
Submit in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Testing shall be performed per AAMA 503 by a qualified independent testing agency. Refer to Testing Section for payment of testing and testing requirements. Conduct 3 field tests of full scale section of curtain wall prior to commencement of installation of curtain wall at designated location in accordance with requirements of AAMA 503 for following performance values of water resistance: Conduct field water penetration tests at Project design water penetration test pressure. Water Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E1105. No uncontrolled water leakage is permitted when tested at a static test pressure of two-thirds the specified water penetration pressure but not less than 8 psf (383 Pa). Air Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 783. Allowable air infiltration shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount indicated in 2 the performance requirements or 0.09 cfm/ft , which ever is greater. Include cost of prototype testing previously described in Contract Price. Modify and alter prototype as necessary to obtain required test results at no cost to Owner. Pay cost of re-testing. Pay costs for modification and refabrication of rejected test units or portion thereof until tests are completed satisfactorily.
3.4.1.2.2.
3.4.1.2.3.
3.4.1.2.4.
3.4.1.2.5. 3.4.1.2.6.
3.4.1.3. 3.4.2.
Manufacturers Field Services: Upon Owners written request, provide periodic site visit by manufacturers field service representative.
3.5.
3.5.1.
CLEANING
Clean work of this Section in accordance with "Cleaning Procedure" as recommended by Aluminum Company of Canada in publication D.I. 650, 1962 "Care During Construction and as recommended by finish applicator. Clean and polish glass on exterior and interior and remove markings indicating presence of glass. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris.
3.5.2. 3.5.3.
3.6.
3.6.1.
PROTECTION
Protect installed products finish surfaces from damage during construction. Protect aluminum curtain wall system from damage from grinding and polishing compounds, plaster, lime, acid, cement, or other harmful contaminants. Protect finishes with strippable coating that will not mar, nor deface finish on removal, or a similar method designed to afford an equivalent amount of protection. Leave protected coating intact until damage risk is past or immediately prior to final cleaning. In addition to foregoing, ensure finish surfaces are protected by adequate covering to ensure no detrimental effect on any and contaminants or other effects or elements.
3.6.2.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 08 44 00 - 28
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 08 44 26 Project No: 2011.008 STRUCTURALLY GLAZED CURTAIN WALL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.
1.1.1.
SUMMARY
Section includes corner-supported structurally glazed curtain wall system, consisting of, but not limited to the following: 1.1.1.1. 1.1.1.2. 1.1.1.3. 1.1.1.4. 1.1.1.5. 1.1.1.6. 1.1.1.7. 1.1.1.8. Coordination of structural steel supports with glazed assembly hardware. Glass and glazing, including stainless steel pressure plate fittings and appurtenances. Stainless steel trim and closures to join contiguous materials to the metal and glass assemblies, including finishes. Sealants, including structural silicone, gaskets, elastomeric and metal flashing within assemblies, and between assemblies and contiguous construction. All glass entrance and vestibule doors and hardware along with all glass walls and hardware. Decorative aluminum fins. Coordination of electrical, security, fire alarm, and wayfinding/signage-related items. Anchors, fixings, attachments, reinforcements and steel reinforcing required for a complete installation, except those specifically indicated as being provided by other trades, but including cantilever dead load struts and wind ties to primary structure. Coordination of waterproofing membrane at foundation wall, metal panels and corner supported glazed assembly.
1.1.1.9.
1.1.1.10. Structural calculations. 1.1.1.11. Support and fastening elements required by other trades. 1.1.1.12. Coordination with other trades, including those that have components of their work installed on or within the assemblies, including, but not limited to, wiring routing, and conduit placement and control systems placement. 1.1.1.13. Shop drawings, structural calculations, samples, manufacturers data, certifications of compliance and selected samples of materials and warranties pertaining to the cladding assemblies. 1.1.1.14. Material samples. 1.1.1.15. Performance and visual mockups. 1.1.1.16. Scheduling and monitoring of the Work. 1.1.1.17. Storage, handling, protecting and cleaning. 1.1.1.18. Source and field quality control testing. 1.1.1.19. Warranties.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 1
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 08 44 26 Project No: 2011.008 STRUCTURALLY GLAZED CURTAIN WALL
1.1.2. The work of this Section is Design/Build which is a process where the Contractor awarded this portion of the work is responsible for the structural and performance, design, fabrication and installation of the assemblies in accordance with the design intent, design criteria, performance requirements, applicable codes at the time of award, and ordinances and requirements of local officials. Structural and operational design requires the certification of a registered structural engineer. Additionally, the Contractor will be responsible for preparation and submittal of samples, shop drawings, product data, calculations, tests reports, and other required submittals for the review of the design team and authorities having jurisdiction. Fabrication and installation of the Work without the acceptance of shop drawings by the design team and authorities having jurisdiction not allowed and will be at the Contractors risk and costs. Mockup construction and testing is also a requirement of this portion of the Work and their costs included in the Contractors Bid. Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.1.3.1. 1.1.3.2. 1.1.3.3. 1.1.3.4. 1.1.3.5. 1.1.3.6. Aluminum composite metal (ACM) panel cladding: Section 07 42 43, Aluminum Composite Metal Panel System. Sealant requirements: Section 07 92 00, Sealants. Standard aluminum curtain wall system: Section 08 44 00, Curtain Wall. Provision of lock cylinders: Section 08 71 00, Finish Hardware. Glazing requirements: Section 08 80 00, Glass and Glazing. Provision of door contacts: Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security.
1.1.3.
1.2.
1.2.1.
DESCRIPTION
Glazed Assembly: Corner-Supported Structural Glazed Assemblies consisting of structural columns supporting glazing support hardware at the building perimeter with tempered glass supported on through glass stainless steel corner patch plates and hardware. The assembly is to be watertight.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. 1.3.1.4. 1.3.1.5. 1.3.1.6. 1.3.1.7. 1.3.1.8. 1.3.1.9. AAMA: American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org. ANSI: American National Standards Institute. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; www.ashrae.org. AWS: American Welding Society; www.aws.org CPSC: Consumer Product Safety Commission. EPDM: Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer. GANA: Glass Association of North America. MSDS: Material Safety Data Sheets. SHGC: Solar Heat Gain Coefficient.
1.3.1.10. SWRI: Sealant Waterproofing & Restoration Institute; www.swrionline.org. 1.3.1.11. VT: Visual Transmittance.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 2
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 08 44 26 Project No: 2011.008 STRUCTURALLY GLAZED CURTAIN WALL 1.4.
1.4.1.
DEFINITIONS
Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS): Structural steel supporting the corner supported structurally glazed curtain wall consists of structural steel members and their connections fire resistive coatings painted but not covered with other architectural finishes. Structural steel used to support work of this section is to be provided by structural engineer and to be coordinated for glazing supports/patch plates. Coordinate .welding or fastening structural steel with glazing supports with Consultant. Contractor: As used in this Section, the Contractor is the entity responsible for providing design, within the profiles and dimensions indicated, engineering, fabrication and installation of the work, in this Specification complying with the criteria specified. Structural Engineer: Full time licensed structural engineer, employed and paid by the Contractor, carrying professional liability insurance, with a minimum 5 years experience in the design of assemblies similar in scope to those for the Project, including drawings, testing program development, test-result interpretation, and comprehensive engineering analyses that show the systems' compliance with the specified requirements. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. Structural Sealant Glazing: Application where a sealant not only can function as a barrier against the passage of air and water through a building envelope, but also provides structural support and attachment of glazing and other components to a curtain wall and other framing system. 1.4.4.1. 1.4.4.2. Adhesive Failure: Failure when sealant pulls away from the substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant material behind. Cohesive Failure: Failure when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate from each substrate because sealant-to-sealant bond strength exceeds sealants internal strength.
1.4.2.
1.4.3.
1.4.4.
1.5.
1.5.1.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
General: Comply with the applicable provisions of the referenced standards except as modified by governing codes and the Contract Documents. Where a recommendation or suggestion occurs in the referenced standards, such recommendation or suggestion shall be considered mandatory. In the event of conflict between referenced standards, this specification or within themselves, the more stringent standard or requirement shall govern. 1.5.1.1. 1.5.1.2. 1.5.1.3. 1.5.1.4. 1.5.1.5. 1.5.1.6. 1.5.1.7. AAMA TIR-A9: Metal Curtain Wall Fasteners. AAMA 1503-09: Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections. ANSI Z97.1-04(09): Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test. ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1-10: Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. ASTM A36/A36M-08: Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. ASTM A143/A143M-07: Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of HotDip Galvanized Structural Steel and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement ASTM A153/A153M-09: Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
PAGE 08 44 26 - 3
1.5.1.8. 1.5.1.9. ASTM A167-99(09): Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting ChromiumNickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. ASTM A240/A240M-11a: Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications
1.5.1.10. ASTM A325-10:Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength 1.5.1.11. ASTM A480/A480M: Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip 1.5.1.12. ASTM A572/A572M-07: Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy ColumbiumVanadium Structural Steel 1.5.1.13. ASTM A666-10: Standard Specification for Annealed Cold-Work Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar 1.5.1.14. ASTM A890/A890M-10: Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium-NickelMolybdenum Corrosion-Resistant, Duplex (Austenitic/Ferritic) for General Application 1.5.1.15. ASTM B221-08: Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 1.5.1.16. ASTM C661-06(11): Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer. 1.5.1.17. ASTM C719-93(10): Standard Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement (Hockman Cycle). 1.5.1.18. ASTM C794-06(10): Standard Test Method for Adhesion-In-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 1.5.1.19. ASTM C1036-06: Standard Specification for Flat Glass. 1.5.1.20. ASTM C1048-04: Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 1.5.1.21. ASTM C1172-09: Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. 1.5.1.22. ASTM E330-02(10): Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 1.5.1.23. ASTM E699-09: Standard Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing, Quality Assurance, and Evaluating of Building Components 1.5.1.24. ASTM E1300-09: Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings. 1.5.1.25. ANSI/AWS D1.1/D1.1M-10: Structural Welding Code - Steel 1.5.1.26. CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201 II-04 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 4
1.6.1.
Coordination Drawings: 1.6.1.1. Prepare coordination drawings where work of other Sections is integrated in the work of this Section for efficient installation of different components, and when coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities in the work of this Section. 1.6.1.1.1. 1.6.1.1.2. 1.6.1.1.3. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. Indicate required installation sequences. Refer to Divisions 22, 23 and 26 for specific coordination drawing requirements for mechanical and electrical installations.
1.6.2.
Coordination: 1.6.2.1. Notify concerned trades of items required to be incorporated into work of separate Sections. Certain components specified in this Section include items closely integrated with entrances, glazing components, flashing pieces, and architectural metalwork specified in other Section that require close coordination with such allied trades. Be responsible for coordination with these other trades to ensure correct installation procedures and results. Coordinate and cooperate with adjacent cladding systems subcontractors by installing closures and trim supplied by work of other Sections and installed directly into the glazed assemblies. Verify actual locations of embeds and existing adjacent structural supports by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Prior to start of Shop Drawings, coordinate tolerances of other trades that may affect the work of this Section.
1.6.2.2.
1.6.2.3.
1.6.3.
Preliminary, Prefabrication and Pre-installation Meetings: 1.6.3.1. Prior to the start of the Work, meet at the Project site to review material selections, availability of materials, personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays, methods and sequence of structural glass enclosure installation, structural load limitations, special details and conditions, standard of workmanship, quality control requirements, testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures, job organization, coordination with other trades, and other pertinent topics related to the Work.
1.7.
1.7.1.
DESIGN CRITERIA AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

General: 1.7.1.1. Comply with the applicable design criteria and performance requirements specified below. Note that Contract Drawings and details are not intended to identify and solve the following: thermal deflection and structural movements, air pressure equalization, air blast, assembly framing, fixings and anchorages, moisture disposal, water penetration or problems at the glass line associated with glazing installation, movements, pressure fracture or thermal shock. Final engineering design of is responsibility of this Section. Material types, sizes and/or thicknesses shown on Drawings must be engineered to suit intended sizes and profiles.
1.7.1.2.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 5
1.7.1.3. Design attachments to permit replacement of individual units during construction or in subsequent usage of building without dismantling or disturbance to adjoining components or units. In addition, accomplish such replacement without use of extra exposed fasteners, splices, covers and similar items that may alter original design features.
1.7.2. 1.7.3.
General Design Criteria for Assemblies: Comply with the following. Loading Requirements: Design, fabricate and install the work of this Section to withstand the inward, outward and lateral pressures indicated below. 1.7.3.1. Cladding Assembly: 1.7.3.1.1. 1.7.3.1.2. 1.7.3.1.3. Dead Load: Actual weight of materials incorporated in work. Glass panels, excluding steel: Minimum 0.57 Kpa (12 psf) and 0.5kN (112 lbs) applied over an area 100 mm X 100 mm (4 x 4). Interior Loading: Provide interior assemblies (vestibules) capable of withstanding uniform test pressure of 240 Pa (5 psf) inward and 240 Pa (5 psf) outward. Loads Imposed by the Work of Other Trades: Information describing the final requirements and specifications for the work of other trades, including reasonable loads, will be provided in subsequent packages. Loads Imposed on Primary Supports: The work of this Section shall not cause re-design of primary structure supports. Loads imposed to the building structure shall be less than the assumed loads indicated on Building Structural Engineers structural drawings Wind Loads: As defined in the OBC Temperatures: Range specified below.
1.7.3.1.4.
1.7.3.1.5.
1.7.3.1.6. 1.7.3.1.7. 1.7.4.
The Following Applies to Structural Silicone. 1.7.4.1. 1.7.4.2. 1.7.4.3. 1.7.4.4. Wind pressure shall be supported in tension or shear, but not tension and shear simultaneously. Allowable tension stress shall not exceed 137 kPa (20 psi) at design pressures and loads. Shear stress shall not exceed one psi per one-half of the long length. Structural silicone shall not support dead load. Structural silicone shall not experience adhesive or cohesive failure.
1.7.5.
Temperature: Design, fabricate and install components to provide for to allow for thermal movement resulting from a surface temperature differential of 92 deg C (165 deg F) (-18 deg C (0 deg F) to 74 deg C (165 deg F)). 1.7.5.1. Winter Design Conditions: 1.7.5.1.1. 1.7.5.1.2. 1.7.5.2. Temperature: 22 deg C (72 deg F) interior and -23 deg C (-10 deg F) exterior. Relative humidity: 30% RH.
Summer Design Conditions: 1.7.5.2.1.1. Temperature: 24 deg C (75 deg F) interior and 32 deg C (90 deg F) exterior. 1.7.5.2.1.2. Relative humidity: 50% RH.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 6
1.7.6. Wind Loading: 1.7.6.1. Exterior Wind Loading: Provide exterior assemblies capable of withstanding uniform test pressure of 958 Pa (20 psf) inward and 958 Pa (20 psf) outward when tested in compliance with ASTM E330. Design assemblies, including aluminum panels, to accept 150 percent of design wind loads without failure or permanent deformation. Ensure the system can withstand inward and outward minimum wind pressures at Project location determined in accordance with cladding wind load requirements.
1.7.6.2. 1.7.6.3. 1.7.7.
Structural Movements: 1.7.7.1. Design work of this Section to provide free and noiseless movement of components of assembly due to structural deflection or dead loads, without buckling, oil canning of any component and/or transmitting of stresses to any members. Accurately shape each plate at intersecting joints to obtain uniform joints no wider than required to permit thermal expansion, contraction and racking without contact of joint components. Design work to accommodate within its components, expansion and contraction due to short and long term structural movements, cyclic temperature changes, shrinkage, moisture changes, creep in component materials, movement due to differential hoisting, distortions, torsion, sway, racking, deflection, misalignment, joint seal failures, noise, undue stress on securement devices and components and other damage. Design work to accommodate expansion and contraction within the work, and between work of other Sections and building structure due to short and long term structural movements, cyclic temperature changes, twisting, distortion, torsion, sway, racking, deflection, misalignment, buckling, column shortening, creep, noise, undue stress on components and securement devices to work of this Section, work of other Sections and building structure. Expansion/contraction provisions shall cause no damage, distortion, misalignment of work of this Section, building structure, adjacent construction and connections. Allow for a differential deflection of floor slabs, beams and wall framing and columns after assembly installation for anticipated primary structural deflections, as required by structural design.
1.7.7.2.
1.7.7.3.
1.7.7.4.
1.7.7.5. 1.7.7.6.
1.7.8.
Deflection Criteria: 1.7.8.1. Maximum full load deflections, parallel to the glass plane, shall not exceed 75 percent of the design clearance dimension between that member and the panel, glass, or other part immediately adjacent. Deflections under wind loads shall not exceed l/180 for walls with flexible finishes and l/240 elsewhere. Submit engineering calculations to show maximum deflections based on full panel loads uniformly distributed, building deflections, thermal stresses, and erection tolerances. Glass, sealants and interior finishes shall not be included to contribute to framing member strength, stiffness or lateral stability, unless required in Contract Documents. Splice joints which permit thermal and other movements by slippage within the joint shall be assumed to have zero moment capacity.
1.7.8.2. 1.7.8.3. 1.7.8.4. 1.7.8.5.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 7
1.7.9. Analysis: Requirements specified herein shall be analytically and mathematically proven, except for those requirements called for to be proven exclusively by physical testing methods. Calculations and related data and their application in engineering, fabrication, assembly and installation shall be the responsibility of the Structural Engineer. Glass Design Criteria: Glass thicknesses shown and heat treatment specified are minimum requirements based upon glass manufacturer's regularly published literature. Provide glass thicknesses and heat-strengthened lites in compliance with ASTM E1300, as required to meet specified design criteria and performance requirements, in-service conditions and the following. Limit the statistical probability of failure to 8 lights per 1000 lights at project wind pressure based upon a 60second uniform load duration. Unacceptable Conditions: Vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noise or vibration created by thermal movement, structural movement, or wind; thermal movement transferred to building structure; loosening, weakening or failure of fasteners, attachments or other components. Design Modifications: Make design modifications of work shown only as may be necessary to meet performance requirements and coordinate the work. Variations in details and materials which do not adversely affect appearance, durability or strength shall be submitted to the Consultant for review. Maintain the general exterior design concept without altering profiles and alignments shown. Unless otherwise defined by the Contract Documents, appearance of exposed elements of the assembly shall be consistent throughout the Project.
1.7.10.
1.7.11.
1.7.12.
1.8.
1.8.1.
SUBMITTALS
General: 1.8.1.1. For coordination purposes, submit preliminary shop drawings that update the Proposal Documents for this work, or contain similar information to the Proposal Documents, at the Consultants 100-percent completion of the base building contract documents. Submit Samples, technical material and pre-test results for review prior to submission of Shop Drawings. Submit test reports on material testing and assembly testing as specified.
1.8.1.2. 1.8.1.3. 1.8.2.
Structural Engineer responsibilities: 1.8.2.1. 1.8.2.2. 1.8.2.3. 1.8.2.4. 1.8.2.5. Preparation and supervision of Shop Drawings production and structural calculations. Submission of structural analysis and calculations. Stamping and signing each Shop Drawing and associated structural calculations. Submissions for coordination meetings. Obtaining approvals from Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
1.8.3.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of components of the work of this Section prepared by, sealed and signed by the Structural Engineer. Indicate where and how the proposed design deviates from the Contract Documents. When the survey of the primary structural steel supports is available, adjust dimensions on Shop Drawings accordingly before submitting them to the Consultant. 1.8.3.1. 1.8.3.2. Prepare details at not less than 1-1/2 inches equals one foot scale. Show scaled elevations, plans and sections of each plane of the assemblies.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 8
1.8.3.3. Include large scale details that cannot be shown in elevations or sections. Include 3dimensional or axonometric drawings to illustrate conditions difficult to show in 2dimensions. Include typical and atypical details for every member, joint, anchorage and glazing system. Show details of support system, method of attachment to building structure, anchorage details and interface with adjacent work. Show component locations and intersection details. Detail fastening and sealing methods and product joinery to ensure proper performance of field installation. Provide interfacing details with adjacent work. Show line of air seal including continuity of air seal and membrane flashing with adjacent trades. Show method of isolating dissimilar materials.
1.8.3.4. 1.8.3.5. 1.8.3.6. 1.8.3.7. 1.8.3.8. 1.8.3.9.
1.8.3.10. Show provisions for expansion and contraction. 1.8.3.11. Show dimensioned adjustment provisions in anchors (fixings) that will be used to attach assemblies to primary structural system. 1.8.3.12. Provisions for adjustment of anchors relative to tolerances of building structure: Provide maximum structure deviation which the anchor can accommodate (level, up, down, in and out) at edge of slab, columns and corners. 1.8.3.13. Show method of accommodating wind induced, thermal, and live load differential vertical and horizontal movement. 1.8.3.14. Provide material properties and other information needed for structural analyses. 1.8.3.15. Final comment on Shop Drawings will be contingent upon complete submission of structural calculations, documentation, certifications, approvals of anchors, firestop assemblies, Samples, mockups and test reports. 1.8.3.16. Provide copies of final reviewed Shop Drawings to authorities having jurisdiction and obtain their approval thereof. 1.8.4. Layout Drawings for Anchorage: 1.8.4.1. 1.8.4.2. 1.8.5. 1.8.6. Submit details for areas of the building for which exterior cladding will be attached, including fixings. For connections to steel, coordinate the location of the support and patch pattern with the building structural steel fabricator.
Erection Drawings: Provide detailed erection drawings, and erection sequence and descriptions. Product Data: Submit manufacturers literature and specifications describing the general properties of each material and accessory to be used in the work, including primary function, quality, performance, location and details of construction relative to materials, preparation instructions, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. Include a statement that each product to be provided is recommended for the application shown. In addition, include complete instructions for handling, storing, mixing, priming, installing, curing and protecting each glazing material. Samples: Submit labeled samples to indicate product, characteristics, and location in the Work. Provide sufficient samples to establish the acceptable variation in color and textures for materials exposed in the finished work. Compliance with other requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor.
1.8.7.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 9
1.8.7.1. Submit full size samples of the following components of the system. For steel components, paint one-half of the Samples, in the color selected. For aluminum components, submit Samples of color and finish prepared as specified on respective aluminum components for both extrusion and sheet. Show proposed range of color and sheen variation. Mark direction of metal grain and rolling and paint application on back of control Samples. 1.8.7.1.1. 1.8.7.1.2. 1.8.7.1.3. 1.8.7.1.4. 1.8.7.1.5. 1.8.7.1.6. 1.8.7.1.7. 1.8.7.1.8. 1.8.7.1.9. 1.8.7.2. 1.8.7.3. Finish metal Samples (3); 12-inch sq. each type. Stainless steel patch fittings (3). Spacer pads; typical assembly (3). Glass lights (3); 24-inch square of each type. Perimeter glazing channel (3); 24-inch long. Fastening devices (3) of each type. Finish hardware (3) of each type. Gaskets (3); 12-inch long of each type. Sealants, cured samples (3); 12-inch long of each type and color.
Mark direction of metal grain on back of control Samples. Sealant manufacturers production run Samples of metal, glass, gasketing and setting blocks to be used to perform adhesion and compatibility tests both prior to site work, and progressively as construction proceeds. Samples of finish prepared as specified on respective stainless steel components. Indicate proposed range of color and sheen. Mark direction of metal grain on back of control Samples. Repeat Samples as many times as required to obtain Consultants approval of range. Sealant manufacturers production run Samples of metal, glass, gasketing and setting blocks to be used to perform adhesion and compatibility tests both prior to sitework, and progressively as construction proceeds.
1.8.7.4.
1.8.7.5. 1.8.7.6.
1.8.8.
Glazing Schedule: Submit a glazing schedule listing glass types, thicknesses, and composition of glass assemblies, coatings and heat treatment, for each location. Cross reference with elevations submitted as Shop Drawings. Calculations: Submit the following. 1.8.9.1. Sealed and signed calculations prepared by the Structural Engineer, providing design assumptions regarding loadings related to applicable Standards, and authorities having jurisdiction. Submit detailed designs of framing members, as well as detailed designs of anchorage hardware including but not limited to, clip angles, washers, anchor bolts, welds and torque pressures. State proposed materials and their allowable shear and bending stresses, ensuring failure load is substantiated by previous tests and in accordance with AAMA TIR-A9. Calculations verifying conformity with specified loading requirements of this Section. Design calculations and tabular data for design of members, including methods of attachment to supporting structure with design loads and maximum support reactions. Prepare calculations in a clear and comprehensive manner so they can be easily reviewed and cross-referenced to applicable Shop Drawing detail.
1.8.9.
1.8.9.2. 1.8.9.3.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 10
1.8.9.4. For review, type and location of fixing with regard to loads applied to building structure. Include deflection summary for anticipated primary structural deflections, as shown on Structural Drawings. Calculations for anchor clips, inserts and fasteners and/or assemblies including patch fittings and stiffeners. Analysis shall include loadings diagrams of superimposed loads to be transferred to and accommodated by the building structure for each type of anchor, fastener and connection demonstrating that loads imposed to primary building structure are less than the assumed loads indicated on structural drawings. Calculations for expansion and contraction. Stability calculations. SHGC, SC, VT and U-factors (winter and summer) for each type of glass and glass assembly. Provide calculations of SHGC and U-value in accordance with applicable standards. Reference thermal calculations to corresponding glass Samples. Ensure Samples bear manufacturers labels indicating composition, thermal performance of glass (SHGC, SC, VT and U-factors) and applicable coatings. Local bending of member components in plain diagonal deformation.
1.8.9.5.
1.8.9.6. 1.8.9.7. 1.8.9.8.
1.8.9.9.
1.8.9.10. Strength of embedded anchor assemblies as well as pull out and/or reaction forces shared with the building structure. 1.8.10. Glass manufacturers Substantiating Data: Data showing that the probability of breakage, at the design wind pressure, does not exceed the specified probability of breakage for each type, size and thickness of glass. Tests and Evaluation Reports: 1.8.11.1. Prior to fabrication, submit certified test data performed by an independent approved laboratory displaying results of testing program carried out on glazed assemblies proposed for this Project. 1.8.11.2. Provide test report on adhesion to production Samples of metal and glass testing in accordance with ASTM C794. 1.8.11.3. Glazing Assembly Stress Analysis: Mathematically and analytically prove requirements specified herein, except for those requirements proven exclusively by physical testing methods. 1.8.11.3.1. Airblast Load Stress Analysis: Submit results of an airblast load stress analysis showing system capacity to resist airblast loads from acting on the external surface of the glazing assembly. The glazing assembly must also be able to withstand the subsequent structural rebound of the system in the outward direction to the same performance criteria as for its inward response. Furthermore the system capacity shall be demonstrated for blast loading applied to the internal surface of the glazing assembly and the subsequent structural rebound of the system in the inward direction to the same performance criteria as under externally applied blast load. 1.8.11.3.2. Thermal Stress Analysis: Submit results of a thermal stress analysis for glazing, including any stresses developing from solar radiation or other causes, prior to or during installation of glass, and allow for protection or method of handling and storage of glass to avoid such stresses and conform to safety requirements for glass application in accordance with ASTM C1036.
1.8.11.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 11
1.8.11.3.3. Identify glazing which can be expected to fail under service conditions and submit recommendations for resolution of problem to avoid glazing failure. 1.8.12. Laboratory Test Results: 1.8.12.1. Prior to fabrication, submit existing test results applicable for work of this Section from a testing organization conforming to requirements of ASTM E699 and acceptable to Consultant. 1.8.12.2. Allow sufficient time for testing, evaluation, alterations and re-testing as required so not to interrupt construction progress schedule for Project. Pay costs for modification, refabrication and reinstallation of rejected test units or portion thereof until tests are completed satisfactorily. 1.8.12.3. As soon as possible after award of Contract, submit Shop Drawings that include full size details with actual dimensions and thickness of component parts, engineering calculations, describing test unit assemblies and test procedures for Consultants review. 1.8.12.4. Perform thermal performance calculations per ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1 or AAMA 1503. 1.8.13. Certifications: Submit the following. 1.8.13.1. Document Review: Before commencing work, submit a written statement signed by the Contractor and the manufacturer/fabricator certifying that the Contract Documents, shop drawings and product data have been reviewed with material manufacturers' qualified technical representatives and that they agree the selected materials are proper, compatible with contiguous materials and adequate for the application shown. 1.8.13.2. Certifications: 1.8.13.2.1. Glass Manufacturer: Submit manufacturer certification that glass to be provided for the Project meets the criteria specified. 1.8.13.2.2. Document Review: Before commencing work, submit a written statement signed by the Contractor and the manufacturer/fabricator certifying that the Contract Documents, shop drawings and product data have been reviewed with material manufacturers' qualified technical representatives and that they agree the selected materials are proper, compatible with contiguous materials and adequate for the application shown. 1.8.13.3. Sealants: 1.8.13.3.1. Submit to glass manufacturer detailed diagrams, schedules and other information required for proper evaluation of glazing methods, wind load, assemblies and building movement, magnitude of thermal expansion, blocking, sealing, surface preparation and other procedures which may affect the assemblies for compliance with requirements of this Section, applicable codes and Contract Documents. 1.8.13.3.2. Test samples of substrate materials that will be in contact with sealant to the sealant manufacturer for compatibility and peel adhesion testing. 1.8.13.4. Written certification from sealant manufacturer that: 1.8.13.4.1. Sealant applications for the assemblies, as detailed on Shop Drawings and indicated on Contract Drawings have been reviewed and approved as appropriate for their intended use with regard to design criteria and other requirements of the Contract Documents.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 12
1.8.13.4.2. Sealants have been reviewed for compatibility with adjacent (contact) materials together with life expectancy of sealant materials detailed and specified, including specific reference for compatibility of laminated glass edge seal with adjacent materials. 1.8.13.4.3. Life expectancy of sealant materials as detailed and specified is achievable. 1.8.13.4.4. Product information on the sealants to recommendations and installation instructions. be used, complete with
1.8.13.4.5. Ensure that sealants are verified by SWRI in accordance with ASTM C719 and ASTM C661. 1.8.13.4.6. Provide to sealant manufacturer Shop Drawings showing size of lites, design loads and sealant dimensions for evaluation and statement on stress. 1.8.14. 1.8.15. Provide manufacturers certification that differing glazing materials are compatible where multiple materials are in contact with each other. Interlayer of Laminated Glass: Submit certification from glass fabricator that interlayer used in glass lamination will not delaminate nor be subject to ghosting, framing and staining (edge delamination) when exposed to the elements, and when in contact with silicone sealants. Record Documents (As-Built) Drawings: Comply with the requirements of Division 01.
1.8.16.
1.9.
1.9.1.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Submit maintenance instructions in accordance with Section 01 70 00. Include in Maintenance Manual: 1.9.1.1. 1.9.1.2. 1.9.1.3. 1.9.1.4. 1.9.1.5. Printed copies of maintenance instructions for corner supported structural sealant glazed assemblies. Proper care and maintenance of assemblies and hardware. Copy of each duly reviewed Shop Drawings in their most recent amended form. Complete explanation of operation principles and sequences. Complete parts and materials list with numbers and glass sizes, method statement of reglazing and replacement of component parts of installation.
1.9.2.
Submit instructions for proper cleaning and routine maintenance of glazed assemblies and all glass doors together with recommended cleaning materials and maintenance frequency.
1.10.
1.10.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Sealant Manufacturer: Provide in-house services including full design, engineering and installation service for structural sealant glazing as a single entity. Subcontracting with outside sources for any of these services is not acceptable. Glass Fabricators: Glass fabricators are subject to approval by Consultant, Structural Engineer and the patch fitting manufacturer prior to start of production. When the survey of the primary structural steel supports is available; adjust dimensions on Shop Drawings accordingly before submitting them to the Consultant. Welding: Verify and confirm that welding of structural components will be performed by fabricators certified in accordance with AWS, and are qualified to weld stainless steel using TIG equipment. Verify and confirm that welders are familiar with welding procedures for structural welding of carbon and stainless steel, aluminum and sheet steel.
1.10.2.
1.10.3.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 13
1.10.4. 1.10.5. Installers: Competent installers with minimum 10 years experience in the application of products, systems and assemblies specified and with approval and training of the product manufacturers. Patch Fitting Manufacturer Qualifications: Not less than 10 years experience in the actual production of specified products. Components shall be factory fabricated and engineered by single entity.
1.11.
1.11.1. 1.11.2.
VISUAL AND PERFORMANCE MOCKUPS

Provide the following: In Situ Visual Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. Build mockup of size and using materials indicated on the Drawings. 1.11.2.1. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship and finishes are approved by Consultant. 1.11.2.2. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. Mock-up upon acceptance may become part of the completed work.
1.11.3.
Construct performance mockup, as specified below, at the testing laboratory site. 1.11.3.1. Build mockup of size and using materials indicated on the Drawings. 1.11.3.2. The performance mockup will be used to: 1.11.3.2.1. Provide a test assembly so that all trades whose work is represented by the mockup can verify their materials, installation methods and clearances, and to allow for necessary adjustments before proceeding with the work on the Project. 1.11.3.2.2. Demonstrate assembly and erection procedures, and compliance with the criteria and performance specified by conducting tests specified below. 1.11.3.2.3. Provide a standard for materials, workmanship and quality to be matched for the Work on the Project. 1.11.3.2.4. Complete and set minimum standard in matching remainder of the work, subject to passing of tests.
1.11.4.
Ensure mockups are complete with glass, connections, sealants, and anchorage systems. Make corrections requested by the Consultant to mockups, at no extra cost to Owner, until visual acceptance is obtained, and the tests results are successful. Notify Consultant 14 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed and tested. Obtain Consultants review of mockups before start of this work. Record appearance of reviewed mockups, and dismantling with digital photographs (minimum 4 megapixels) taken from all angles, indicating all visible components of assemblies. Mockup Testing: 1.11.8.1. Source Quality Control: Due to the uneven deformation of the facade, the joints of the individual panels will experience varying displacements, measured perpendicular to the face of the glass panel. Conduct tests to prove the glass panels can accommodate the most severe stresses due to predicted warping, without failure.
1.11.5. 1.11.6. 1.11.7. 1.11.8.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 14
1.11.8.2. Test Sequence: Conduct tests on Mockup in the following sequence. Provide both static loading and cyclic loading as specified. 1.11.8.2.1. Field glass replacement procedure. 1.11.8.2.2. Pre-load. 1.11.8.2.3. Perform static structural testing, both positive and negative, at 100 percent of the design wind load. Repeat test 3 times. 1.11.8.2.4. Perform static structural testing, both positive and negative, at 150 percent of the design wind load. 1.11.8.2.5. Test criteria includes minimum joint widths and that clearances shall be maintained 1.11.8.2.6. No attachment damage and glass breakage is allowed. 1.11.9. Design and adjust the glass quality, thickness and composition; neoprene, EPDM or silicone pads, and the corner patch plate detailing according to the test results to ensure that the stresses due to warping deformations are accommodated.
1.11.10. Components and assembled systems (elastomeric pads, setting blocks, sealants, etc.), as shown on the Drawings or substitutions approved by those specified herein, shall be used in the tests. Upon successful completion of the tests, the identical components and assembled systems must be used in the actual construction of the building. In the event of test failure, substitute as required and approved by those specified herein to successfully complete tests, and use the identical components and assembled systems in the construction of the building. 1.11.10.1. Static Loading: Conduct tests with glass panels as specified herein, supported by 4 stainless steel patch plates, as indicated. One of the corners shall be free to move perpendicular to the face of the glass. 1.11.10.1.1. Stage 1: The glass panel shall be gradually loaded with sand bags to a pressure of 2.5 x maximum design pressure. No glass panel shall fail under this load. 1.11.10.1.2. Stage 2: The free corner shall be lowered in several steps in a deflectioncontrolled manner, perpendicular to the face of the glass, until failure. The final deformation shall be recorded and compared to the predicted deformation of the structure.
1.12.
1.12.1. 1.12.2. 1.12.3. 1.12.4. 1.12.5. 1.12.6.

Manufacture, crate, store, handle and ship materials in manner providing unscratched and undamaged units delivered to site. Time delivery of materials to site to ensure uninterrupted progress of installation work. Store parts to permit natural ventilation over finished surfaces. Under conditions of high humidity, supply heating or forced air ventilation to prevent accumulation of surface moisture. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 15
1.13.1.
SITE CONDITIONS
Ambient Conditions: 1.13.1.1. Maintain surface of substrates and ambient temperatures constantly between 100 deg F and 41 deg F during application and curing of sealants and adhesives and during installation of glazing. 1.13.1.2. Do not apply sealant under adverse weather conditions, when joints to be sealed are damp, wet or covered with frost, or when ambient temperatures are below those recommended by manufacturer for proper installation. Maintain minimum temperature of application during application and for 8 hours after application. Consult manufacturer for specific instructions before proceeding.
1.14.
1.14.1.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. Field Measurements: Check openings by field measurement before fabrication to ensure proper fitting of work; indicate measurements on shop drawings. 1.14.2.1. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without measurements, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit.
1.14.2.
1.14.3.
Joints: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated and until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.15.
1.15.1.
WARRANTIES
Manufacturer Warranty: 1.15.1.1. Warrant work of this Section for a period of 5 years against defects and/or deficiencies in accordance with General Conditions of Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period, to satisfaction of Consultant and at no expense to Owner. Defects include but are not limited to weathertightness of curtain wall, structurally sound and free from distortion, deflection, misalignment, continuity of air/vapour barrier, loosening of glazing and anchorage buckling, water penetration beyond air/vapour seal, fading, discolouration of finish, failure of glazing, joint sealant against staining, adhesion and cohesion, bond failure and extensive colour fading.

2.1.1.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer List for Corner Supported Structurally Glazed Curtain Wall Patch Fittings and Hardware: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 2.1.1.1. 2.1.1.2. 2.1.1.3. C.R. Lawrence; www.crlawrence.ca Epco Architectural Hardware; www.epcocorp.com Sadev USA; www.sadevusa.com
PAGE 08 44 26 - 16
2.1.1.4. This Specification is based on products by C.R. Lawrences spider fittings as listed below in sizes as shown on Drawings including perimeter trims, accessories, shims and anchors, and perimeter sealing of curtain wall framing. Other systems by manufacturers listed herein will be accepted provided it meets or exceeds the requirements of this Specification and after a full review by the Consultant.
2.1.2.
Manufacturer List for Glass: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 2.1.2.1. 2.1.2.2. 2.1.2.3. 2.1.2.4. 2.1.2.5. 2.1.2.6. AGC Flat Glass North America Ltd.; www.na.agc-flatglass.com Guardian Industries Canada Corp.; www.guardian.com Pilkington Building Products; www.pilkington.com PPG Canada, Inc.; www.ppg.com Viracon; www.viracon.com This specification is based on glazing by PPG. Other glazing systems by manufacturers listed herein will be accepted provided it meets or exceeds the requirements of this Specification and after a full review by the Consultant.
2.1.3.
Manufacturer List for Sealants: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 2.1.3.1. 2.1.3.2. Dow Corning Corp. www.dowcorning.com General Electric Co, www.ge.com
2.2.
2.2.1. 2.2.2.
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Regulatory Requirements for Safety Glass Standard: "Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials". Comply with CPSC 16 CRF Part 1201 II,
Performance Requirements: Provide glass door assemblies that comply with specified design and performance characteristics. Test system by a recognized testing laboratory or agency in compliance with specified test methods. Provide certified test results. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities. Corrosion Analysis: 2.2.4.1. Engage a licensed engineer who is an expert in corrosion, to conduct a component-by component analysis of potential corrosion resulting from galvanic action between materials, for components of curtain wall and aluminum panels and provide report. Submit Engineering Report to Consultant, for review prior to submission of Shop Drawings. Ensure Sample and test results are available upon request. Separate dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic action. Provide letter of confirmation from Engineer specified herein that infill components, accompanying trims and flashings and attachments to adjacent construction are designed to eliminate potential for galvanic action between components.
2.2.3. 2.2.4.
2.2.4.2. 2.2.4.3.
2.2.5.
Preconstruction Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: As specified in Section 08 44 00.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 17
2.3.1.
MATERIALS
Glazing: Except for glass types and composition specified below, all other provisions of Section 08 80 00, on glass and glazing apply to this Section. Final glass thickness to be determined from the results of testing defined in herein and by calculations. 2.3.1.1. 2.3.1.2. 2.3.1.3. 2.3.1.4. 2.3.1.5. Design to withstand a load of 0.5 kN applied over an area 100 mm x 100 mm: All glass and glazing details shall be reviewed for thermal and design sizes (loads) and approved by the glass manufacturer. The glass manufacturer shall perform a thermal stress and load stress analysis. Ensure glass bears manufacturer's labels indicating quality. Leave labels in place until final cleaning. Tempered Glass (TGL): Clear transparent tempered glass conforming to ASTM C1048, Kind FT and meeting requirements of ANSI Z97.1, minimum 6 mm (1/4) thick. Ensure surface compression is equal to or greater than 68.9 MPa (10 000 psi). Glass Types: 2.3.1.6.1. 2.3.1.7. Tempered Glass (Type VG-3): 19 mm (3/4) clear tempered glass (TGL) conforming to requirements specified herein.
2.3.1.6.
Spider Wall Vertical and Top Rail: Fabricated from brushed stainless steel clad aluminum extrusions of alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use intended and required for application of finish indicated, but not less than strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B221 for 6063-T5. For use with 3/4 glass to vertically support glass of curtain wall system. CRL NH3BSSL Brushed Stainless by C.R.Lawrence. Provide gaskets, blocks and sealants as required for use. Spider Wall Bottom Rail: Fabricated from brushed stainless steel clad aluminum extrusions of alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use intended and required for application of finish indicated, but not less than strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B221 for 6063-T5. For use with 3/4 glass to support glass of curtain wall system. CRL SR6SBS34SL Brushed Stainless by C.R. Lawrence. Provide gaskets, blocks and sealants as required for use. All Glass Doors: Center pivot doors as manufactured by C.R.Laurence of Canada www.crlaurence.ca: 2.3.1.9.1. 2.3.1.9.2. Glass type: (VG-3). Stainless Steel Clad Aluminum Extrusions: Stainless steel sheet cladding complying with ASTM A167, alloy 316, laminated to aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B221, 6063-T5. Base Rail for Doors: 150 mm (6) stainless steel clad aluminum base rail for 19 mm (3/4) glass with weatherseal CRL DR6SBS34SL Brushed Stainless Steel Finish Complete with lock and center-hung pivot set 370SC Satin Chrome by C.R.Lawrence. Top Rail for Doors: 100 mm (4) stainless steel clad aluminum rail for 19 mm (3/4) glass with weatherseal CRL DR4SBS34S Brushed Stainless Steel Finish by C.R.Lawrence.
2.3.1.8.
2.3.1.9.
2.3.1.9.3.
2.3.1.9.4.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 18
2.3.1.9.5. Double Floating Header: stainless steel clad aluminum double floating header (72) for 19 mm (3/4) glass CRL 3FH4BSD Brushed Stainless Steel Finish By C.R.Lawrence. Complete with overhead hidden door closer CRL 20104M18 by C.R.Lawrence with adjustable spring power 105 degree holdopen overhead concealed closer with 7/8 Extended Spindle. Jamb for Side Lites: Standard stainless steel InKan Weatherstrip for 19 mm (3/4) glass with weatherstrip material. Hardware: Threshold: Provide 100 mm (4) stainless steel threshold. Panic Bar at Main Doors: Provide Blumcraft DB100F3RKBS Brushed Stainless Steel Right Hand Reverse Rail Mount Keyed Access F Exterior Top Securing Deadbolt Handle. Interior Vestibule Handles: Provide Blumcraft DB132F4RKBS Brushed Stainless Steel Left Hand Reverse Rail Mount F Exterior Top and Bottom Secured Deadbolt Handle.
2.3.1.9.6. 2.3.1.9.7. 2.3.1.9.7.1. 2.3.1.9.7.2.
2.3.1.9.7.3.
2.4.
2.4.1.
METAL MATERIALS
Mild Steel: 2.4.1.1. 2.4.1.2. Structural Carbon Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars: As provided by Structural Consultant to ASTM A36/A36M or ASTM A572/A572M, as noted. Electrodes, Welding Rods, And Filler Metals: provide in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.1/D1.1M requirements. Furnish materials compatible in strength and appearance with the parent material joined. High Strength Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A325. Highstrength bolts shall be subject to ASTM A143/A143M hydrogen embrittlement. Hot-dip galvanize according to 1.5.1.22. ASTM A153/A153M.
2.4.1.3.
2.4.2.
Stainless Steel Shapes, Plates, Sheet and Fasteners: 2.4.2.1. Bars, strips and plates, Type 316L, ASTM A666. The material shall meet or exceed the following properties for thicknesses. 2.4.2.1.1. 2.4.2.1.2. 2.4.2.1.3. 2.4.2.2. Min. yield strength: 32 ksi. Tensile strength: 75-83 ksi. Min. strain at fracture; 45 percent.
Bars, strips and plates where greater strength than Type 316L is required: ASTM A240/A240M meeting or exceeding the following properties for thicknesses. 2.4.2.2.1. 2.4.2.2.2. 2.4.2.2.3. Min. yield strength: 67 ksi. Tensile strength: 93-122 ksi. Min. strain at fracture: 25 percent.
2.4.2.3. 2.4.2.4.
Sheet (non-structural): ASTM A480/A480M. Stainless sheet to be stretcher leveled and stress-relieved. Bolts and Screws: Stainless steel.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 19
2.4.2.5. Where exposed in finished surfaces, shall be socket-head countersunk type screws, spanner head bolts, or socket head cap screws, as indicated on the Drawings and to the approval of the Consultant. Powder actuated or explosive fasteners are not permitted. Finish exposed surfaces by electropolishing and then glass bead blasting to match Consultants control sample.
2.4.2.6. 2.4.2.7. 2.4.3.
Stainless Steel Castings: 2.4.3.1. Type: ASTM A572/A572M grade 4A, Casting grade CD3MN, (equivalent wrought grade 2205). This material shall meet or exceed the following properties: 2.4.3.1.1. 2.4.3.1.2. 2.4.3.1.3. 2.4.3.2. 2.4.3.3. 2.4.3.4. 2.4.3.5. Minimum yield strength: 460 MPa. Tensile strength: 640-840 MPa. Minimum strain at fracture: 25 percent.
Surfaces: Electropolished and glass bead blasted to match Consultants control sample. The design materials shall be adapted to the required accuracy of measurement and the required surface conditions. External and internal quality: The external and internal quality shall conform to VDG specification P695. Model materials shall be adjusted to required dimensional accuracy and surface conditions. Castings shall be investment cast.
2.4.4.
Decorative Aluminum Fins: Provide clear anodized aluminum fins composed of 3 mm thick rectangular aluminum fins with 1/2 bullnose on front face, and square back face. Provide clear anodized outriggers where shown on Drawings. Reinforce with aluminum extrusions or angles to prevent sagging and oil canning of aluminum between outriggers. Outriggers to be bolted to additional through-glass fasteners. Corner connections to be welded, ground and anodized.
2.5.
2.5.1.
ACCESSORIES
Sealants: Clear silicone sealant to comply with requirements of Section 07 90 00. 2.5.1.1. 756 Silicone Building Sealant, non-staining, for exterior use and field use. and 995 Silicone Building Sealant for field use. 983 Silicone Building Sealant for use in the shop. by Dow Corning Corp. SCS 900 Silpruf NB for exterior use and field use and Ultraglaze 4400 Silicone Structural Glazing Sealant for shop use. by the General Electric Co. www.ge.com.
2.5.1.2. 2.5.2. 2.5.3. 2.5.4.
Glazing Materials: Provide materials and installation procedures for glass setting required in compliance with Section 08 80 00. Transition Air/Vapour Barrier Membrane: In accordance with 07 25 00. Spider Fittings: 2.5.4.1. 2.5.4.2. Brushed Stainless Steel Swivel Combination Fasteners for 3/4 thick glass CRL RSF10BS by C.R.Lawrence. Brushed Stainless: 4 Way Spider Fitting: PMH4BS 4-Way Arm heavy Duty Post Mount Spider Fitting by C.R.Lawrence.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 20
2.5.4.3. 2.5.4.4. 2.5.5. Brushed Stainless Double Arm V Heavy Duty Post or Column Mount Spider Fitting: PMH2VBS by C.R.Lawrence. Brushed Stainless Single Heavy Duty Post or Column Mount Spider Fitting: PMH1L by C.R.Lawrence.
Non-Corrosive Fasteners: 2.5.5.1. 2.5.5.2. 2.5.5.3. Screws and bolts up to and including 5/16-inch in diameter tapped into aluminum or stainless steel shall be type 316 alloy stainless steel. Bolts 3/8-inch in diameter or heavier shall be stainless steel if located outboard of the airseal and type 316 stainless steel. Where exposed in finished surfaces, fasteners shall be socket-head countersunk type screws, spanner head bolts, or socket head cap screws, as indicated on the Drawings and to the approval of the Consultant. Powder-actuated or explosive fasteners are not permitted.
2.5.5.4. 2.5.6.
Shim Pack Materials: 2.5.6.1. 2.5.6.2. Shim packs that only resist compressive forces may be high-impact plastic, Korolath type or equal. Shim pack subject to shear forces shall be doughnut-type stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel plates pinned together or interlocking high-impact plastic shims acting as a monolithic shim.
2.6.
2.6.1.
FABRICATION
General: 2.6.1.1. Supply components required for proper anchorage. Fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication, unless otherwise specified herein. Sizes of glass doors and profile requirements of fittings and hardware are indicated on the Drawings. 2.6.1.2.1. Fabricate holes and cutouts to receive hardware and patch hardware before tempering glass. Do not permit cutting, drilling or other alterations to glass after tempering. Fabricate work to accommodate required fittings, hardware, anchors, reinforcement, and accessory items.
2.6.1.2.
2.6.1.2.2. 2.6.2. 2.6.3.
Uniformity of Finish: Abutting members shall not have an integral color of variation greater than half the range indicated in the sample submittal, as judged solely by the Consultant. General: Do not start fabrication until the survey of the primary structural steel supports is available and the Shop Drawings have been reviewed. 2.6.3.1. 2.6.3.2. Use no materials, equipment or practices that may adversely affect the function, appearance or durability of the completed assemblies. Complete assemblies in compliance with the specified criteria without buckling; opening of joints; undue stress on fasteners, sealants and gaskets; cracking of glass; noises or other harmful effects.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 21
2.6.3.3. Conform strictly to the materials, finishes, shapes, profiles, sizes, thicknesses, and joint locations required by the Contract Documents. Match materials to produce continuity of line, texture and color. Shop-fabricate and assemble the work of this Section in the shop, wherever possible. 2.6.3.4.1. 2.6.3.4.2. 2.6.3.4.3. 2.6.3.4.4. Design assemblies to minimize site assembly. Work not shop-assembled shall be shop-fitted. Assembly procedures on-site shall be simple to execute and capable of execution within the time(s) allowed in the schedule. Components exposed in finished work shall be free from warping; oil-canning effects; the telegraphing of welds, studs, and other fasteners; streaks; and tool or die marks. Fabricate components with edges exposed to view prior to finishing.
2.6.3.4.
2.6.3.4.5. 2.6.3.5.
Fabricate components to drain to the exterior water-passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system. Manufacturers Standards: Materials, components, and systems incorporated in the Work shall be in accordance with the recommended standards and procedures of their respective manufacturers. Jointing and Reinforcing: Accurately fit and firmly secure exposed metal perimeter joints with metal to metal hairline contacts. Work shall be properly reinforced for hardware, anchors and other attachments. 2.6.3.7.1. 2.6.3.7.2. 2.6.3.7.3. Jointing and splicing of members shall be concealed. Separate metal surfaces in such a manner that metals do not move on metals. Use materials that are low-friction, or sealants or gaskets as applicable. Design connections between different materials, or different alloys of same metal to accommodate differential thermal movement of materials to be connected.
2.6.3.6.
2.6.3.7.
2.6.4.
Sealant and Gasket Applications: 2.6.4.1. Surfaces to receive sealants shall be treated (cleaned, primed or unprimed) in accordance with the recommendations of the sealant manufacturer. Joints and joint surfaces shall be clean, dry and free of any materials that may have an adverse effect on the performance of the sealant and gasket materials. 2.6.4.1.1. 2.6.4.1.2. 2.6.4.1.3. 2.6.4.2. Do not use sealant that has started to set in its container or a sealant that has exceeded the shelf life as published by sealant manufacturer. Color (custom) of sealant will be selected by the Consultant. Provide sealing mechanisms (sealant and gaskets) where indicated on the Drawings or where required for a permanently weather tight installation.
Conceal sealants from view unless otherwise approved by the Consultant. Exposed sealants shall be consistent in dimension with neat, uniform edges.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 22
2.6.4.3. Sealing mechanism and use for each location shall be as indicated on approved shop drawings. 2.6.4.3.1. 2.6.4.3.2. 2.6.4.3.3. 2.6.4.3.4. 2.6.4.4. 2.6.4.5. 2.6.4.6. 2.6.4.7. 2.6.4.8. In those locations where a mechanism is necessary but is not indicated, it shall be of a type recommended by the Contractor and approved by the Consultant. Design sealed joints and apply sealants and gaskets in accordance with written recommendations of their manufacturers. Alloys, compounds, etc. of gasket materials shall be appropriate for the function intended and are subject to approval by the Consultant. Gasket manufactures and suppliers are subject to approval by the Consultant.
Tape adjoining surfaces prior to sealant installation to ensure a neat, uniform and straight edge of bead. Fill joints continuously and completely with sealant and tool to form a uniform and neat concave surface. Carefully remove masking immediately after tooling. Work which deviates from these requirements shall be subject to rejection. Bolting: 2.6.4.8.1. High Strength Bolting: Provide in accordance with RCSC Specification. Fully pre-tension the bolts for slip-critical and bearing connections in accordance with "Turn-of-Nut Tightening" or "Calibrated Wrench" requirements, unless otherwise noted. The use of "Alternate Design" bolts or "Direct Tension Indicator" devices is not permitted unless accepted by Consultant for the specific application. Secure bolts against loosening by lock nuts or a similar product. Secure bolts connecting parts with slotted holes against loosening by suitable means.
2.6.4.8.2. 2.6.4.8.3. 2.6.4.9.
Welding Procedures: Provide in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.1/D1.1M and employ AWS qualified welders. Make continuous fillet welds, using not less than the minimum fillet specified by ANSI/AWS D1.1/D1.1M, unless otherwise noted. Grind exposed welds flush, to match adjacent metal. Bevel cut base metal before welding to maintain continuity of line at joints.
2.6.4.10. Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations, before finishing. Exposed edges of metal shall be finished to match finish of face of work. 2.6.5. Exposed flashing and closures: Minimum 0.1406 -inch thick (10 gage) 316L stainless steel plate, prefinished to match framing members.

3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
Verification of Conditions: 3.1.1.1. Prior to start of installation of each system, inspect the building and verify conditions and dimensions as being acceptable to receive the Work of this Section.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 23
3.1.1.2. 3.1.2. Verify elevations of concrete and steel strongbacks, and position of embeds and other anchorages for compliance with the requirements.
Field sealant tests: 3.1.2.1. 3.1.2.2. Prior to start of sealant installation, test proposed sealants for resistance to peeling, on materials they will contact, in accordance with ASTM C794. When tests fail, consult with sealant manufacturer and Consultant, and follow the manufacturers recommendations for corrective actions. Repeat tests until the peel test is successful. 3.1.2.2.1. Start sealant installation on the building only after the tests are successful.
3.1.3. 3.1.4. 3.1.5.
Notify General Contractor, with copy to Consultant, in writing of conditions detrimental to installation. Remedy conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Evaluation and Assessment: Commencement of work implies acceptance of previously completed work.
3.2.
3.2.1.
GENERAL
Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare substrates, apply primers and install the work of this Section, including components, and accessories in accordance with their manufacturer's instructions, when available, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the Work. Caution all trades to refrain from cutting, burning, welding and grinding around the exterior wall materials. Sparks or metal filings from these operations will cause permanent damage to the glass. Damage to glass, regardless to event, will require the lite to be removed and replaced with new material at no cost to the Owner.
3.2.2.
3.3.
3.3.1.
PREPARATION
Cleaning: Clean glazing channels, stops and rabbets to receive glazing materials of obstructions and deleterious substances which might impair the work. Remove protective coatings which might interfere with bond of sealants. Priming: Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds, except where manufacturer provides written reports of tests conducted by an independent testing agency which demonstrates that primer or sealer is not required for the conditions of use and the substrates involved. When priming, comply with manufacturer's recommendations both for materials and procedures. Inspection: Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation. Do not install pieces which are improperly sized or have damaged edges, scratches or abrasion or other evidence of damage. Remove labels from glass immediately after installation. 3.3.3.1. 3.3.3.2. Furnish inserts as required at proper times for setting in adjoining construction. Where structural sealant will occur, Remove dust and other loose material from openings. Prepare surfaces that will come into contact with structural sealant according to structural sealant manufacturers written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes cleaning and priming surfaces.
3.3.2.
3.3.3.
3.3.4. 3.3.5.
Field-check the locations of the primary structural steel that will support the glazed assemblies, and elevations of concrete and the locations of anchor bolts which shall receive structural steel. Report discrepancies to General Contractor, with copy to Consultant, before the Work proceeds.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 24
3.4.1.
INSTALLATION
Erection procedures shall be in accordance with proposals submitted by Contractor, and approved by Consultant. 3.4.1.1. 3.4.1.2. 3.4.1.3. Inform the Consultant when fabricated sections are ready for inspection prior to erection. Prior to erection, survey anchorage elements. If the survey indicates that the tolerances have been exceeded, the anchorage details shall be adjusted accordingly. Ensure patch hardware is sufficiently long to support the glazing at locations required by design. Adjust glass using hardware adjustments to meet required tolerances of curtain wall system.
3.4.2.
Embeds, Anchors and Connections: Coordinate embedded anchorage items with affected trade without delaying the Work. Provide embed layouts, setting diagrams, templates, and tolerances as required for installation. 3.4.2.1. 3.4.2.2. Provide anchors and connections to fully satisfy their required purpose of adjustability, movement and load transfer. Provide anchor adjustment capability for full range of specified tolerances for building structure, but not less than 25 mm (1) in all directions. Submit details and schedule for the glazed assemblies anchor embeds, sizes, types, clearance requirements and tolerances. Glazed assemblies anchors shall accommodate maximum structural deviation (level, up, down, in and out) at edge of slab, exposed beams, columns and corners. The glazed assemblies shall be capable of accommodating a plus or minus one inch erection tolerance in structural concrete. Additional tolerance for live load and dead lead movements will be provided by the Engineer of Record. Bracket design and load transfer to the structure shall be done early, and detailed to minimize modifications to the floor slab edge structure. 3.4.2.2.1. Anchors and connections not designed for movement shall prevent such movement by appropriate means. Anchors and connections designed for movement shall be of such construction that friction is low enough to allow for movement without causing buckling and other damage, and without causing binding and noises. Provide means for back-off prevention such as lock washer or spot welding. No liquid thread locks are permitted. Where slots or oversized holes are provided for adjustment only, secure connection after final adjustment. Interlocking serrations in extruded aluminum brackets and washers are preferred. Steel weld washers with 0.25-inch minimum thickness are acceptable with steel brackets.
3.4.2.2.2.
3.4.2.2.3. 3.4.2.2.4.
3.4.2.3.
Avoid excess shimming that may induce additional stress on the fastener. 3.4.2.3.1. 3.4.2.3.2. The total thickness (t) of a shim pack shall not exceed a dimension equal to the diameter (d) of the fastener/anchor. Where t>d, the fastener/anchor shall be recalculated to take into account the additional stress from bending on the fastener with the assumption that the shim does not contribute to resistance to fastener bending. Additional stress due to bending shall be added to tension stress and the tension/shear interaction analyzed.
3.4.2.3.3. 3.4.2.4.
Install fasteners at an approved spacing. Do not penetrate gutters and drainage systems.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 25
3.4.2.5. 3.4.2.6. 3.4.2.7. Exposed fasteners shall occur only where expressly permitted by the Consultant and shall be equally and symmetrically spaced, as approved by the Consultant. Exposed fastener heads shall be finished to match fastened materials. Provide sealed lap joints, end dams and transitions to gutters.
3.5.
3.5.1.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
As recommended by glazing and hardware manufacturer.
3.6.
3.6.1.
WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE
Where indicated and required to prevent water infiltration in the building, first prime contact surfaces and install waterproof membrane fully adhered to substrate, paying particular attention to adhesion of perimeter and penetrations to provide a continuous exterior waterproof barrier.
3.7.
3.7.1.
AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

Where indicated and required, install compatible air/vapour barrier in accordance with Section 07 25 00, as a transition between curtain wall and building air/vapour barrier to provide a continuous air/vapour barrier behind cladding systems.
3.8.
3.8.1.
GLAZING INSTALLATION
Standards: Comply with recommendations and requirements of GANA Glazing Sealing Systems Manual and Glazing Manual unless otherwise shown or specified, and as required to meet the performance/criteria specified. Install glass as recommended by glazing and corner patch manufacturer. General Requirements: 3.8.2.1. 3.8.2.2. 3.8.2.3. 3.8.2.4. Glass and glazing materials shall be compatible with each other and adequate for their intended purpose. Each material type shall be in accordance with details and approved shop drawings. Protect adjoining surfaces on glazing materials against staining or damage. Glazing rabbets shall be clean, dry and free of materials that might adversely affect the bond and seal of the glazing materials or the drainage of the rabbet. Install glass and glazing under the climatological conditions recommended by the fabricator. Prime surfaces to receive glazing materials unless recommended otherwise by the manufacturer.
3.8.2.
3.8.2.5. 3.8.3.
Center glass in each opening to provide the purchases and clearances as recommended by the glass manufacturer and approved by the Consultant. 3.8.3.1. Apply no tape, ribbons or markings to the glass.
3.8.4.
Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation. 3.8.4.1. 3.8.4.2. Do not install pieces that are improperly sized or have damaged edges, scratches or abrasion or other evidence of damage. Remove labels from glass immediately after installation.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 26
3.8.5. Set glass to produce the greatest possible degree of uniformity in appearance. 3.8.5.1. 3.8.5.2. 3.8.6. Where safety glazing is scheduled or required, install glass after detaching removable safety glazing label unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction. If local authorities require permanent labeling, install glass with permanent safety glazing label in concealed or inconspicuous locations subject to selection by the Consultant.
Installation of Glazing Gaskets: 3.8.6.1. Miter-cut and seal joints of glazing gaskets in accordance with their manufacturers instructions to provide a continuous watertight and airtight seal at corners and other locations where joints are required. Vulcanize corner joints where compatible with installation procedure. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lights. Glazing gaskets shall be injection-molded, vulcanized, or heat-welded at the corners to form a continuous closure.
3.8.6.2. 3.8.6.3.
3.8.6.4. 3.8.6.5. 3.8.7. 3.8.8. 3.8.9.
Tool exposed surfaces of glazing materials to provide a slight wash away from the glass. Install exposed tapes and gaskets with a slight protrusion above stops in final compressed condition. Glass-To-Glass and Glass-to-Metal Glazing: Apply silicone rubber sealant to abutting surfaces of glass or metal in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Install glass to be capable of withstanding temperature changes, wind loading and impact from operation (operable sash) without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure or seal and excessive deterioration of glazing materials.
3.9.
3.9.1.
SITE QUALITY CONTROL:

Connections and Anchors: Verification that anchors are properly placed, welded or bolted. Verification that correct anchoring and/or materials are used in lieu of others where there are field changes. Inspection of welding and bolting where connections are stressed to 50 percent or more of allowable values. Verification of the calibration of wrenched, review of bolting procedures and inspection of joint surfaces prior to bolting for all bolted connections related to the exterior enclosure. Verification of welders license, qualifications and welding procedures for all welds related to the exterior enclosure. Verification of proper welding or bolting of reset connections. Qualification for Shop and Field Welding: Qualify welding operators and welding procedures in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.1/D1.1M requirements, using the same type of equipment and welds to be used in the Work. Visual Inspection of Field Connections: Perform visual inspection of bolted and welded connections in the Work. Examine surfaces, size, quality and placement of each connection to verify installation in accordance with Contract Documents and actioned shop drawings. Measure 15 percent of welds, length and profile, selected at random. Testing of High-Strength Bolted Field Connections: Test with calibrated torque wrench at least 25 percent of bolts in each connection, but not less than 2 bolts. Joints: Verification that horizontal and vertical movement joints have been provided, and verification that joints are free from obstructions. The recording of unanticipated movement or displacement beyond performance criteria.
3.9.2.
3.9.3.
3.9.4. 3.9.5.
PAGE 08 44 26 - 27
3.9.6. Glass and Glazing: Verification that the glass is not defective and that the glazing gaskets meet Specifications. Verification that the location and size of setting and edge blocks are suitable and meet Specifications. Incorporate electrical wiring into curtain wall framing system. Coordinate with Electrical Drawings as required. Seal openings in framing system caused by electrical wiring with rubber or silicone grommets. Ensure wiring is concealed and non-corrosive.
3.9.7. 3.9.8. 3.9.9.
3.10.
3.10.1. 3.10.2.
PROTECTION
Protect installed products from material, equipment or practices that may impair the functioning, appearance and/or durability of the system until completion of project. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products for any reason, including damage caused by other trades before Substantial Completion. Promptly remove damaged material from the site.
3.11.
3.11.1. 3.11.2. 3.11.3. 3.11.4.
CLEANING
Clean work periodically to avoid damage by accumulation of foreign materials, including bird droppings, and immediately prior to completion: Clean surfaces in accordance with recommendations of each specific product manufacturers. Conduct cleaning operation from topmost levels down to avoid staining of cleaned surfaces from cleaning solution residue and run-off. Clean glasses with cleaning solution recommended by the glass manufacturer only, and ensure that cleaning solution is completely removed from the surface after cleaning.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 08 44 26 - 28
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 08 71 00 Project No: 2011.008 HARDWARE SCHEDULE AND CUT SHEETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.
1.1.1.
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. Hardware Schedule (attached) dated September 16, 2011. Hardware Cut Sheets (attached), dated September 16, 2011.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION
PAGE 08 71 00 - 1
GEO A KELSON
2 WEST BALES DRIVE, EAST GWILLIMBURY, ONTARIO
Architect RH Carter Architects Inc. 5040 Dundas Street West Toronto, Ontario Coordinator Mike Kamada Tel: 905-940-8358 - Ext: 270 Fax: 905-940-8362 Email: mikek@ucsh.com Consultant ----------------Boyd Roberton A.H.C. Tel: 905-940-8358 - Ext: 242 Fax: 905-940-8362 E-Mail: boydr@ucsh.com
Submittal Date: September 16, 2011
Upper Canada Specialty Hardware 7100 Warden Avenue Unit 1 Markham, Ontario, L3R 8B5
9/16/2011 Page 1
GEO A KELSON 2 WEST BALES DRIVE, EAST GWILLIMBURY, ONTARIO Submittal Date: September 16, 2011
Openings Schedule For Geo A Kelson
Heading Num.
Qty Opening Number(s)
Location 1
To/ From Location 2
Hand
Door Type
Nominal Width
Nominal Height
Door Thickness
Door Mat'l
Frame Mat'l
Label
Hardware Group
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
1 102 1 103 1 106 1 107 1 110 1 110A 1 111 1 115 1 116 1 117 1 119 1 201 1 205 1 205A 1 205B 1 206 1 207 1 207A 1 207B 1 208 1 212 1 301 1 302 1 314 1 314A 1 315 1 316 1 316A 1 317 1 321 1 321A 1 321B 1 322 1 325 1 MISC
LOBBY/ATRIUM 101 LOBBY/ATRIUM 101 MEN'S WASHROOM 106 WOMEN'S WASHROOM 107 STAIR NO. 4 EXTERIOR WAREHOUSE WAREHOUSE WAREHOUSE EXTERIOR EXTERIOR OWNER OFFICE 205 CORRIDOR OWNER OFFICE 205 OWNER OFFICE 205 CORRIDOR STAIR NO.4 CORRIDOR 207 STAIR NO.2 CORRIDOR MEZZANINE 211 CORRIDOR 1 302 STAIR NO.4 CORRIDOR 2 309
TO TO FROM FROM FROM FROM FROM TO TO FROM FROM TO TO TO TO TO FROM FROM FROM TO TO TO FROM TO
MAIL ROOM 102 PLANS ROOM 103 LOCKER/SHOWER LOCKER/SHOWER OFFICE SPACE 111 STAIR NO. 4 OFFICE SPACE 111 WOMEN'S WASHROOM 115 JANITOR ROOM 116 STAIR NO.2 STAIR NO.1 OWNER GYM 201 OWNER OFFICE 205 OWNER WASHROOM OWNER WASHROOM STORAGE 206 CORRIDOR MEZZANINE 211 CORRIDOR 207 STORAGE 208 OFFICE 212 COAT CLOSET 301 CORRIDOR 2 309 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL 314 MECHANICAL ROOM 316 PHONE/COMPUTER 315 EXTERIOR EXTERIOR STORAGE 317 OFFICE SPACE 321 OFFICE SPACE 321 ELEVATOR CONTROLLER ROOM CLOSET 322 JANITOR 325
LH LH RHR LHR LHR LHR LHR RH RH LHR LHR LH LH LH LH RH LHR RHR RHR RH LH RHR RH RH LH LH RH RH RHR RHR LHR BI-FOLD LH
A/A C/A C/A C/A B/A E/ B/A C/A C/A E/A E/A C/A C/A C/A C/A C/A B/A B/A B/A C/A C/A B/A B/A B/A C/A E/A E/A C/A B/A B/A C/A F/C C/A
914 914 914 914 914 914 914 914 914 914 914 914 914 914 914 914 914 914 914 863, 863 914 914 914 914 914 914 914 914 914 914 914 914 305, 305, 305, 305 914
2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692 2692
45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
WD WD WD WD HM HM HM WD WD HM HM WD WD WD WD WD HM HM HM WD WD WD HM HM HM WD HM HM WD HM HM WD WD WD -
HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM -
1 1/2 HR LABEL 001 002 003 004 1 1/2 HR LABEL 005 006 1 1/2 HR LABEL 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 1 1/2 HR LABEL 017 1 1/2 HR LABEL 018 1 1/2 HR LABEL 019 020 021 022 1 1/2 HR LABEL 023 3/4 HR LABEL 3/4 HR LABEL 024 025 026 027 028 029 1 1/2 HR LABEL 030 1 1/2 HR LABEL 031 032 033 034 035
LH / RHA D/B
MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL TO 314 CORRDOR 2 309 MECHANICAL ROOM 316 MECHANICAL ROOM 316 CORRIDOR 2 309 STAIR NO. 1 STAIR NO. 2 OFFICE SPACE 321 OFFICE SPACE 321 CORRIDOR 2 309 TO TO TO TO FROM FROM FROM FROM TO
9/16/2011
Page 2
Hardware Schedule For Geo A Kelson
Heading #1 1 Single door 102, LOBBY/ATRIUM 101 TO MAIL ROOM 102 914 x 2692 x 45 - WD DR x HM FR - 1 1/2 HR LABEL 4 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Latchset Surface Closer Kick Plate Floor Door Stop CB1379 114 X 101 L9010 03B 630 LH 4040XP REG AL GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) TM GSH 209 C26D 26D 630 AL C32D C26D LH
Heading #2 1 Single door 103, LOBBY/ATRIUM 101 TO PLANS ROOM 103 914 x 2692 x 45 - WD DR x HM FR 4 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Lockset Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Floor Door Stop CB1379 114 X 101 L9070T 03B 630 LH 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 GSH 209 C26D 26D 630 LH
C26D
Heading #3 1 Single door 106, MEN'S WASHROOM 106 FROM LOCKER/SHOWER 914 x 2692 x 45 - WD DR x HM FR 4 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Door Pull Push Plate Surface Closer Kick Plate Floor Door Stop STSCB1391 114 X 101 4009-2 C32D TB GSH 81A C32D (100 X 400) TM 4040XP REG AL GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) TM GSH 209 C26D 32D C32D C32D AL C32D C26D RHR
9/16/2011
Page 3
Heading #4 1 Single door 107, WOMEN'S WASHROOM 107 FROM LOCKER/SHOWER 914 x 2692 x 45 - WD DR x HM FR 4 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Door Pull Push Plate Surface Closer Kick Plate Floor Door Stop STSCB1391 114 X 101 4009-2 C32D TB GSH 81A C32D (100 X 400) TM 4040XP REG AL GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) TM GSH 209 C26D 32D C32D C32D AL C32D C26D LHR
Heading #5 1 Single door 110, STAIR NO. 4 FROM OFFICE SPACE 111 914 x 2692 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR - 1 1/2 HR LABEL 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Cylinder Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Exit Device Surface Closer Kick Plate Floor Door Stop Weatherstripping Door Sweep CB1368 114 X 101 20-057T-ICX 626 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 98-L-F US26D 996L-R US26D LHR #03 Lever 4040XP REG AL GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) TM GSH 209 C26D W-22 X 6298 W-24S X 914 C.A. 26D LHR
C26D AL C32D C26D C.A.
9/16/2011
Page 4
Heading #6 1 Single door 110A, EXTERIOR FROM STAIR NO. 4 914 x 2692 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Exit Device Surface Closer Overhead Door Stop Kick Plate Threshold Weatherstripping Door Sweep STSCB1399 114 X 101 NRP 98EO US26D LHR 4040XP EDA AL - LHR 104S C32D - INSTALL FOR 90 DEGREES GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) STMS CT-45 M.F. X 914 W-20S C.A. X 1/914 + 2/2692 W-24S X 914 C.A. 32D C26D AL C32D C32D M.F. C.A. C.A. LHR
Heading #7 1 Single door 111, WAREHOUSE FROM OFFICE SPACE 111 914 x 2692 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR - 1 1/2 HR LABEL 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Cylinder Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Exit Device Surface Closer Kick Plate Floor Door Stop Weatherstripping Door Sweep CB1368 114 X 101 20-057T-ICX 626 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 98-L-F US26D 996L-R US26D LHR #03 Lever 4040XP REG AL GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) TM GSH 209 C26D W-22 X 6298 W-24S X 914 C.A. 26D LHR
9/16/2011
Page 5
Heading #8 1 Single door 115, WAREHOUSE TO WOMEN'S WASHROOM 115 914 x 2692 x 45 - WD DR x HM FR 4 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Door Pull Push Plate Surface Closer Kick Plate Floor Door Stop CB1379 114 X 101 4009-2 C32D TB GSH 81A C32D (100 X 400) TM 4040XP REG AL GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) TM GSH 209 C26D 26D C32D C32D AL C32D C26D RH
Heading #9 1 Single door 116, WAREHOUSE TO JANITOR ROOM 116 914 x 2692 x 45 - WD DR x HM FR 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Lockset Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Surface Closer Kick Plate Floor Door Stop CB1379 114 X 101 L9080T 03B 630 RH 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 4040XP REG AL GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) TM GSH 209 C26D 26D 630 RH
AL C32D C26D
Heading #10 1 Single door 117, EXTERIOR FROM STAIR NO.2 914 x 2692 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Exit Device Surface Closer Overhead Door Stop Kick Plate Threshold Weatherstripping Door Sweep STSCB1399 114 X 101 NRP 98EO US26D LHR 4040XP EDA AL - LHR 104S C32D - INSTALL FOR 90 DEGREES GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) STMS CT-45 M.F. X 914 W-20S C.A. X 1/914 + 2/2692 W-24S X 914 C.A. 32D C26D AL C32D C32D M.F. C.A. C.A. LHR
9/16/2011
Page 6
Heading #11 1 Single door 119, EXTERIOR FROM STAIR NO.1 914 x 2692 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Exit Device Surface Closer Overhead Door Stop Kick Plate Threshold Weatherstripping Door Sweep STSCB1399 114 X 101 NRP 98EO US26D LHR 4040XP EDA AL - LHR 104S C32D - INSTALL FOR 90 DEGREES GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) STMS CT-45 M.F. X 914 W-20S C.A. X 1/914 + 2/2692 W-24S X 914 C.A. 32D C26D AL C32D C32D M.F. C.A. C.A. LHR
Heading #12 1 Single door 201, OWNER OFFICE 205 TO OWNER GYM 201 914 x 2692 x 45 - WD DR x HM FR 4 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Lockset Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Floor Door Stop CB1379 114 X 101 L9050T 03B 630 LH 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 GSH 209 C26D 26D 630 LH
C26D
Heading #13 1 Single door 205, CORRIDOR TO OWNER OFFICE 205 914 x 2692 x 45 - WD DR x HM FR 4 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Lockset Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Floor Door Stop CB1379 114 X 101 L9050T 03B 630 LH 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 GSH 209 C26D 26D 630 LH
C26D
9/16/2011
Page 7
Heading #14 1 Single door 205A, OWNER OFFICE 205 TO OWNER WASHROOM 914 x 2692 x 45 - WD DR x HM FR 4 1 1 Standard Hinge Privacy Set Floor Door Stop STSCB1391 114 X 101 L9044 03B 630 LH GSH 209 C26D 32D 630 C26D LH
Heading #15 1 Single door 205B, OWNER OFFICE 205 TO OWNER WASHROOM 914 x 2692 x 45 - WD DR x HM FR 4 1 1 Standard Hinge Privacy Set Floor Door Stop STSCB1391 114 X 101 L9044 03B 630 LH GSH 209 C26D 32D 630 C26D LH
Heading #16 1 Single door 206, CORRIDOR TO STORAGE 206 914 x 2692 x 45 - WD DR x HM FR 4 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Lockset Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Floor Door Stop CB1379 114 X 101 L9080T 03B 630 RH 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 GSH 209 C26D 26D 630 RH
C26D
9/16/2011
Page 8
Heading #17 1 Single door 207, STAIR NO.4 FROM CORRIDOR 914 x 2692 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR - 1 1/2 HR LABEL 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Cylinder Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Exit Device Surface Closer Kick Plate Floor Door Stop Weatherstripping Door Sweep CB1368 114 X 101 20-057T-ICX 626 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 98-L-F US26D 996L-R US26D LHR #03 Lever 4040XP REG AL GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) TM GSH 209 C26D W-22 X 6298 W-24S X 914 C.A. 26D LHR
Heading #18 1 Single door 207A, CORRIDOR 207 FROM MEZZANINE 211 914 x 2692 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR - 1 1/2 HR LABEL 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Exit Device Surface Closer Kick Plate Floor Door Stop Weatherstripping Door Sweep CB1368 114 X 101 BE 98-L-F US26D 996L-R US26D RHR #03 Lever 4040XP EDA AL - RHR GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) TM GSH 209 C26D W-22 X 6298 W-24S X 914 C.A. 26D C26D AL C32D C26D C.A. RHR
9/16/2011
Page 9
Heading #19 1 Single door 207B, STAIR NO.2 FROM CORRIDOR 207 914 x 2692 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR - 1 1/2 HR LABEL 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Cylinder Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Exit Device Surface Closer Kick Plate Floor Door Stop Weatherstripping Door Sweep CB1368 114 X 101 20-057T-ICX 626 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 98-L-F US26D 996L-R US26D RHR #03 Lever 4040XP REG AL GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) TM GSH 209 C26D W-22 X 6298 W-24S X 914 C.A. 26D RHR
Heading #20 1 Pair of doors 208, CORRIDOR TO STORAGE 208 863, 863 x 2692 x 45 - WD DR x HM FR 8 1 1 1 1 1 2 Standard Hinge Lockset Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Flush Bolt Flush Bolt Floor Door Stop CB1379 114 X 101 L9080T 03B 630 LH 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 FB458 UL US26D X 914 FB458 UL US26D X 305 GSH 209 C26D 26D 630 LH / RHA
C26D C26D C26D
Heading #21 1 Single door 212, MEZZANINE 211 TO OFFICE 212 914 x 2692 x 45 - WD DR x HM FR 4 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Lockset Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Floor Door Stop CB1379 114 X 101 L9050T 03B 630 RH 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 GSH 209 C26D 26D 630 RH
C26D
9/16/2011
Page 10
Heading #22 1 Single door 301, CORRIDOR 1 302 TO COAT CLOSET 301 914 x 2692 x 45 - WD DR x HM FR 4 1 1 Standard Hinge Latchset Floor Door Stop CB1379 114 X 101 L9010 03B 630 LH GSH 209 C26D 26D 630 C26D LH
Heading #23 1 Single door 302, STAIR NO.4 FROM CORRIDOR 2 309 914 x 2692 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR - 1 1/2 HR LABEL 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Cylinder Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Exit Device Surface Closer Kick Plate Floor Door Stop Weatherstripping Door Sweep CB1368 114 X 101 20-057T-ICX 626 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 98-L-F US26D 996L-R US26D RHR #03 Lever 4040XP REG AL GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) TM GSH 209 C26D W-22 X 6298 W-24S X 914 C.A. 26D RHR
9/16/2011
Page 11
Heading #24 1 Single door 314, CORRIDOR 2 309 TO MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL 314 914 x 2692 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR - 3/4 HR LABEL 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Lockset Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Surface Closer Kick Plate Floor Door Stop Weatherstripping Door Sweep CB1379 114 X 101 L9080T 03B 630 RH 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 4040XP REG AL GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) TM GSH 209 C26D W-22 X 6298 W-24S X 914 C.A. 26D 630 RH
AL C32D C26D C.A.
Heading #25 1 Single door 314A, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL 314 TO MECHANICAL ROOM 316 914 x 2692 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR - 3/4 HR LABEL 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Latchset Surface Closer Kick Plate Floor Door Stop Weatherstripping Door Sweep CB1379 114 X 101 L9010 03B 630 RH 4040XP EDA AL - RH GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) TM GSH 209 C26D W-22 X 6298 W-24S X 914 C.A. 26D 630 AL C32D C26D C.A. RH
9/16/2011
Page 12
Heading #26 1 Single door 315, CORRDOR 2 309 TO PHONE/COMPUTER 315 914 x 2692 x 45 - WD DR x HM FR 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Lockset Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Surface Closer Kick Plate Floor Door Stop Weatherstripping Door Sweep CB1379 114 X 101 L9080T 03B 630 LH 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 4040XP REG AL GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) TM GSH 209 C26D W-22 X 6298 W-24S X 914 C.A. 26D 630 LH
AL C32D C26D C.A.
Heading #27 1 Single door 316, MECHANICAL ROOM 316 TO EXTERIOR 914 x 2692 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Lockset Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Surface Closer Overhead Door Stop Kick Plate Threshold Weatherstripping Door Sweep STSCB1399 114 X 101 NRP L9080T 03B 630 LH 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 4040XP EDA AL - LH 104S C32D - INSTALL FOR 90 DEGREES GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) STMS CT-49 M.F. X 914 W-20S C.A. X 1/914 + 2/2692 W-24S X 914 C.A. 32D 630 LH
AL C32D C32D M.F. C.A. C.A.
9/16/2011
Page 13
Heading #28 1 Single door 316A, MECHANICAL ROOM 316 TO EXTERIOR 914 x 2692 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Lockset Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Surface Closer Overhead Door Stop Kick Plate Threshold Weatherstripping Door Sweep STSCB1399 114 X 101 NRP L9080T 03B 630 RH 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 4040XP EDA AL - RH 104S C32D - INSTALL FOR 90 DEGREES GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) STMS CT-49 M.F. X 914 W-20S C.A. X 1/914 + 2/2692 W-24S X 914 C.A. 32D 630 RH
AL C32D C32D M.F. C.A. C.A.
Heading #29 1 Single door 317, CORRIDOR 2 309 TO STORAGE 317 914 x 2692 x 45 - WD DR x HM FR 4 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Lockset Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Floor Door Stop CB1379 114 X 101 L9080T 03B 630 RH 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 GSH 209 C26D 26D 630 RH
C26D
9/16/2011
Page 14
Heading #30 1 Single door 321, STAIR NO. 1 FROM OFFICE SPACE 321 914 x 2692 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR - 1 1/2 HR LABEL 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Cylinder Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Exit Device Surface Closer Kick Plate Floor Door Stop Weatherstripping Door Sweep CB1368 114 X 101 20-057T-ICX 626 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 98-L-F US26D 996L-R US26D RHR #03 Lever 4040XP REG AL GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) TM GSH 209 C26D W-22 X 6298 W-24S X 914 C.A. 26D RHR
Heading #31 1 Single door 321A, STAIR NO. 2 FROM OFFICE SPACE 321 914 x 2692 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR - 1 1/2 HR LABEL 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Cylinder Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Exit Device Surface Closer Kick Plate Floor Door Stop Weatherstripping Door Sweep CB1368 114 X 101 20-057T-ICX 626 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 98-L-F US26D 996L-R US26D RHR #03 Lever 4040XP REG AL GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) TM GSH 209 C26D W-22 X 6298 W-24S X 914 C.A. 26D RHR
9/16/2011
Page 15
Heading #32 1 Single door 321B, OFFICE SPACE 321 FROM ELEVATOR CONTROLLER ROOM 914 x 2692 x 45 - WD DR x HM FR 4 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Lockset Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Overhead Door Stop CB1379 114 X 101 L9080T 03B 630 LHR 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 904S C32D 26D 630 LHR
C32D
Heading #33 1 Multi-door opening 322, OFFICE SPACE 321 FROM CLOSET 322 305, 305, 305, 305 x 2692 x 45 - WD DR x HM FR 8 1 2 Standard Hinge Bifold Track Kit Door Pull CB1379 114 X 101 C-515 X 4 DR 48" 4009-1 C32D TB 26D C32D BI-FOLD
Heading #34 1 Single door 325, CORRIDOR 2 309 TO JANITOR 325 914 x 2692 x 45 - WD DR x HM FR 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Hinge Lockset Cylinder Cons. Core Charge Surface Closer Kick Plate Floor Door Stop CB1379 114 X 101 L9080T 03B 630 LH 20-740-XP 626 PGMKD 50-231 4040XP REG AL GSH 80A C32D (200 X 876) TM GSH 209 C26D 26D 630 LH
AL C32D C26D
9/16/2011
Page 16
Heading #35 1 Elevation MISC __ x __ x __ - - DR x - FR 10 2 10 2 Construction Key Cosnt. Control Key Master Key Control Key 48-101-ICX 48-056-ICX 49-004-XP 49-005-XP
9/16/2011
Page 17
CB1379SteelFullMortiseHinge 3Knuckles TwoConcealedBallBearing FlushTips LoosePin RegularWeight Use:Formediumweightinteriordoorsofaverage frequencyservice. Pin:Flattiploosepin.Instainlesssteel fornonferroushinges.
SizeofPhilips flatheadscrews SizeOpen 41/2x4(114x101mm) 41/2x41/2(114x114mm) Gaugeof Metal 0.134(3.40) 0.134(3.40) Machine 1/2x1224(13x1224mm) 1/2x1224(13x1224mm) Wood 11/4x12(32x12mm) 11/4x12(32x12mm) #ofHoles 8 8
UpperCanadaSpecialtyHardware
ItemCode: Manufacturer: Date:
CB13793KnuckleFullMortiseHinge MontrealHinges 26Oct09 PAGE 1of1
STSCB1391StainlessSteelFullMortiseHinge 3Knuckles TwoConcealedBallBearing FlushTips LoosePin RegularWeight Use:Formediumweightinteriordoorsofaverage frequencyservice. Pin:Flattiploosepin.Instainlesssteel fornonferroushinges.
STSCB13913KnuckleFullMortiseHinge MontrealHinges 26Oct09 PAGE 1of1
CB1368SteelFullMortiseHinge 3Knuckles TwoConcealedBallBearing FlushTips LoosePin HeavyWeight Use:onheavydoorsordoorswherehighfrequency serviceisexpected. Recommendedforentrancedoorstopublicbuildings, officebuildings,hospitals,schools,apartmenthousesetc. andcorridorentrancedoorstooffices. Pin:Flattiploosepin.Instainlesssteel fornonferroushinges.
CB13683KnuckleFullMortiseHinge MontrealHinges 26Oct09 PAGE 1of1
STSCB1399StainlessSteelFullMortiseHinge 3Knuckles TwoConcealedBallBearing FlushTips LoosePin HeavyWeight Use:onheavydoorsordoorswherehighfrequency serviceisexpected. Recommendedforentrancedoorstopublicbuildings, officebuildings,hospitals,schools,apartmenthousesetc. andcorridorentrancedoorstooffices. Pin:Flattiploosepin.Instainlesssteel fornonferroushinges.
STSCB13993KnuckleFullMortiseHinge MontrealHinges 26Oct09 PAGE 1of1
Dimensions
BodySize:1"Widex63/4"Longx11/8"Deep GuideSize:1"Widex2"Longx5/64"Thick StrikeSize:15/16"Widex21/4"Longx5/64"Thick
AvailableFinishes BrushedChrome PolishedChrome OilRubbedBronze BrushedBronze BrushedAntiqueBrass BrushedBrass PolishedBrass BrushedNickel
C26D C26 C10B C10 C5 C4 C3 C15
Whentheactivedoorisopened,thelevercanbemovedtotheupposition,retracting theboltandallowingtheinactiveleaftobeopened.Whentheinactiveleafisclosed, thelevercanbemovedtothedownposition,projectingtheboltintothestrike andsecurelylockingtheinactiveleaf. Simplifiedinstallationinmetalframes.Roundboltheadrequiresonlyapunchedhole. Useofstrikeoptional.Specialdesignofguideandflatsidedbolttiptopreventboltrotation. Nonhanded. Bolttipis1/2"diameter. Boltthrowis3/4"witha7/8"verticaladjustment. Boltbacksetis3/4 Bolt backset is 3/4" StandardRodLengthis12",whichismeasuredfromthecenteroftheflushboltbodytothe bolttip.OptionalRodLengthsavailable6",9",18"and24"forfireratedDoors.Optional Rodlengthsavailable6",9",18",24",30",36"and48"fornonfirerateddoors.
MeetsANSI/BHMAA156.16,L04251. ULListed90MinuteFireDoors8'0"x10'0"
FB458FlushBolt Ives 8/17/2009 Page1of1
Schlage Commercial Cylinders

Schlage commercial cylinders are ideal for a wide range of commercial applications, from airports, hospitals, universities and offices, to research laboratories, and government and military buildings. Since our cylinders can be used in a wide range of Schlage and competitors locks, you can pair the lock you need with the security level that fits your application.
Everest Primus XP Mortise Cylinder
Springs Top pins Master pins (as required) Bottom pins
Cam screw Cam Shell Sidebar Sidebar springs Side bit milling Drill-resistant plug (optional) 5 Finger pins Finger pin springs
Full Size Interchangeable Core Cylinders for Schlage Locksets

Full Size Core Only
Number -00 0-10 0-70-XP Mechanism Conventional core Conventional core for hotel function (specify hand) Primus XP core (not available in hotel function)
Available 606 and 66 finish only. Order control keys separately.
Full Size IC Housings for Bored Deadlocks, Less Core

Lockset Series Description Outside B500-Series Inside B50, H, S00-Series Outside Inside of B5 Outside Inside B610-08** -061 -06 B610-07 B610-08 Number B610-0, B610-05 Specify Finish 605, 609, 61, 61, 619, 65, 66, and 716 605, 609, 61, 61, 619, 65, 66, and 716 605, 606, 609, 610, 611, 61, 61, 616, 65, 66 605, 606, 609, 61, 61, 65, 66 See Note Below
B600 / 700-Series
Specify finish of B610-01 inside snap-on faceplate ordered separately for BC16 and B66/76. **Inside housing does not include snap-on faceplate
KS43F KS72F KS92M Full Size Interchangeable Core Padlocks

Part # Shackle Dimensions A B C
LESS CYLINDER - FULL SIZE INTERCHANGEABLE CORE BRASS BODY KSA00 KSD00 KSF00 KSG00 STEEL BODY KS7M00 KS7F00 KS9M00
7 16 7 16 8 8 8 8 8
/ / / /

/ / / / / / /
Note: To order Primus XP add the suffix - XP to the Primus part number. (Example: 12-345-XP)
11/ 1 1
/ / /
7 8 7 8
15
Full Size Interchangeable Core Mortise Cylinders
1 1/
Cylinder Only
Compr. Ring & Spring
With Blocking Ring
Cylinders for Schlage L-Series Mortise Locks

Core Mechanism Design L&N Escutcheons (cylinders with compression ring) Sectional Trim (cylinder with compression ring, spring and /8 blocking ring). 9060 requires 1/ blocking ring. Function All Except Below L9060P Outside L985P, L986P Hotel Funtions All Except Below L9060P Outside L985P, L986P Hotel Funtions Conventional 0-008 0-00 0-010* 0-18 0-00 + 6-08 + 5-08-00 0-00* Primus, Primus XP 0-798, 0-798-XP 0-78, 0-78-XP N/A 0-776, 0-776-XP 0-78, 0-78-XP N/A Housing Less Core 0-007 0-0 + 6-08 0-007 0-17 0-0 + 6-08 + 6-08-050 0-17 Cam for All Functions Except L9060 Outside
L583-489
Cam for L9060 Outside
K510-680
* Hotel function cores are handed. Specify hand of door.
Mortise Cylinders with Straight Cam for Exit Devices

Number 6-091 Conventional core 0-061 0-76, 0-76-XP Primus/Primus XP core 0-771, 0-771-XP 0-059 Housing less core 6-06
Notes 1. . . .
Core Mechanism
Collar Compression ring & spring

/8 blocking rings + compression ring & spring
Compression ring & spring

/8 blocking rings + compression ring & spring
Straight Cam, Other Applications
K510-730
None Compression ring & spring
Available 605, 606, 609, 610, 61, 61, 65, and 66 finish. Cores furnished 606 and 66 only. To differentiate between Classic and Everest, specify keyway. Example: C or CP (Classic), C1 (Everest). Everest C1 keyway standard. All cylinders are 11/ long. Specify LKB if 0-bitted Primus XP cylinders are required less key blanks.
16
Full Size Interchangeable Core Cylinders for Exit Devices, Aluminum Doors, etc.
Interchangeable Core Rim Cylinders for Exit Devices

Number 0-057 0-757 0-757-XP 0-079 Core Mechanism Conventional core Primus core Primus XP core Housing only, less core
Available 605, 606, 609, 610, 61, 61, 65 and 66 finish.
Cylinders for Adams Rite MS and 4700 Series Lori 4500 Series and Corbin Russwin DL3000 Series
Number 6-098 0-06 0-766 0-766-XP 0-060 Core Mechanism Conventional core Conventional core Primus core Primus XP core Housing less core Collar Compression ring & spring
16 16 16
/ + /8 blocking rings / + /8 blocking rings / + /8 blocking rings
K510-711
Adams Rite MS Cam
None
These cylinders include set screw pack B0-050 for Adams Rite locks.
Cylinders for Adams Rite 4070 Series Deadlocks

Number 0-091 0-7 0-7-XP 0-090 Core Mechanism Conventional core Primus core Primus XP core Housing less core Collar
16 16 16
/ + /8 blocking rings / + /8 blocking rings / + /8 blocking rings
B520-378
Adams Rite 070 Cam
None
Notes 1. . . .
Mortise cylinders available 605, 606, 609, 610, 61, 61, 65, and 66 finish. Cores furnished 606 and 66 only. To differentiate between Classic and Everest, specify keyway. Example: C or CP (Classic), C1 (Everest). All cylinders are 11/ long. Specify LKB if 0-bitted Primus XP cylinders are required less key blanks.
17
Everest Primus XP: The top choice for all new and existing key systems.
Traceability
Primus XP and restricted keys are marked with ID number
Strong patent protection

by multiple utility and design patents, allowing Schlage to control key blank distribution and provide varying levels of enforceable key control, even for conventional Everest keys
HIGH SECURITY
Everest Primus XP
Patent protected keys with exclusive side bitting and positive key control
25% larger key bow

More space for special stamping and easier handling
MEDIUM SECURITY
Everest Restricted
Conventional patented keys with a high level of key control in a mid-priced cylinder
15% Thicker key

for added strength
Primus XP side bit milling

factory cut to provide geographical exclusivity for end users or dealers and operate pick-resistant secondary locking mechanism
Six standard key cuts

for easy dealer service with standard pin kits and key machines; Primus XP keys can operate conventional cylinders
BASIC SECURITY
Everest Open
Conventional patented keys sold exclusively through commercial dealers
Classic Primus XP: Maintain and upgrade older key systems.

Strong key protection
by Schlage to control Primus XP key blank distribution for positive, enforceable protection against unauthorized key duplication
HIGH SECURITY
Classic Primus XP
Patented and restricted keys with exclusive side bit milling and positive key control
Five or six standard key cuts Primus XP side bit milling

factory cut to provide geographical exclusivity for end users or dealers and operate pickresistant secondary locking mechanism for easy dealer service with standard pin kits and key machines; Primus XP keys can operate conventional cylinders
BASIC SECURITY
Classic Conventional
Keys for standard commercial and residential security
5
Security Levels
The Primus system features multiple levels of security. For the Classic Primus XP system, security increases from Level One through Level Four. For Everest Primus XP, security increases from Level Seven to Level Nine. Each level requires an appropriate I.D. card and/or signature verification for key duplication. All levels utilize patent-protected Primus cylinders and keys to protect against unauthorized duplication. To select the proper level of security, consideration should be given to the overall key control, convenience and service required for the installation.
High security and patented cylinders with patented keys distributed with geographic exclusivity.
PIcK rESIStAnt!
CLASSIC Primus XP
Ideal for existing key systems patent protected through 0 National Non-Exclusive
EVEREST Primus XP
Ideal for new key systems patent protected through 0
Typical Applications
Dealer Controlled System
Dealer Exclusive
Owned & stocked by dealers; resold to end users. Keys bear unique Dealer ID based upon three digit zip-code exclusivity of side bit milling.
Dealer Exclusive
Small Businesses Restaurants Doctors Offices
Owned & stocked by dealers; resold to end users. Keys bear unique Dealer ID based upon three digit zip-code exclusivity of side bit milling.
Dealer Controlled System

End User Exclusive Systems
LEVEL XP
Stocked by distributors and resold to end users via commercial locksmiths; All Level 1 locksmiths have the same side bit millings.
Strip Mall Shops Small Businesses Upscale Homes
Consider Everest Open for Commercial Exclusivity
LEVEL XP
1+ 2 3
LEVEL XP
Dealer Exclusive
Dealers that sell directly to end users are eligible for side bit milling exclusivity. Exclusivity is for the dealer physical location time zone.
LEVEL XP
Office Buildings Banks Private Schools Healthcare Residences
Dealer Exclusive
Dealers that sell directly to end users are eligible for side bit milling exclusivity. Exclusivity is for the dealer physical location time zone.
LEVEL XP
8 9
End User Exclusive Systems
LEVEL XP
End User Exclusive

Exclusivity is based on either random assignment or on the first 2 digits of the zip code, depending on end user commitment.
LEVEL XP
End User Exclusive

Exclusivity is based on either a time zone or nationwide basis, depending on end user commitment.
Educational Facilities Healthcare Facilities Large Office Complexes Government Buildings Detention Centers Franchises
End-User Exclusive
Exclusivity is based on random assignment, on the first 2 digits of the zip code, on time zone, or on a nationwide basis, depending on end user commitment.
LEVEL XP
6
Security Levels
Everest Keyway
Classic Keyway
Patented until 2014 Patented until 2024 Commercial Applications Maximum Key Duplication Restrictions Some Key Duplication Restrictions No Key Duplication Restrictions SFIC Available Check Pin Finger Pins/Side Bar Configuration #7 finger pin used for added security Bulk Pack Available Master keying available for Levels 2, 3 and 4 Master keying available for Levels 1+, 2 , 3 and 4 Master keying available for all Levels
7
AvailableFinishes 605 PolishedBrass 606 BrushedBrass 612 BrushedBronze 613 OilRubbedBronze 625 PolishedChrome 626 BrushedChrome 629 PolishedStainlessSteel 630 BrushedStainlessSteel 03LEVER
Material:Forgedbrass,bronzeand caststainlesssteel
BWROUGHTROSE B WROUGHT ROSE

*Pictureshownwith"17"LeverStyle
2916"(65mm)DiameterAvailableforuseonLSeries knobandleverdesigns.Orderbyletterdesignation correspondingtothedesignanddiameterdesired.
ExtraHeavyDutyMortiseLocks TheSchlageLSeriesmortiselocklineisaheavydutycommercialmortiselockcontainingawidearrayofknobandleverdesigns.Itisavailableinavariety ofkeyedandnonkeyedfunctions,andinmostpopulardecorativefinishes.ItisU.L.Listedandcanbespecifiedforapplicationsinoffices,schools,hospitals, hotels,andcommercialbuildings,aswellasresidences.TheLSerieslockmeetsorexceedstheANSIA156.13specification,makingitthebestchoiceforany buildingwheresecurity,safety,anddesigncompatibilityaretheprimeconsiderations.TheLSerieslockusesonecommonmortiselockcaseforalltrim. Thisallowsexcellentdesignflexibilityintrimcombinationssuchasknobbylever,leverbyknob,aswellasknobbyknoborleverbylever.Theoutstanding featureofitsquicklyreversiblehanding,allowingorderstobefilledquicklyatthedistributorlevelfromstockonhand.OurL9000Seriesmortiselockcan beeasilyhandedonsitewithoutdisassemblingthelockcase.
LSeriesMortise03LeverBRose SchlageLock 23Oct09 Page1of2
CommonFunctions:
L9050 Office/Entry
Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideismadeinoperativebykeyoutside orbyturninginsidethumbturn.Whenoutsideis locked,latchboltisretractedbykeyoutsideorby knob/leverinside.Outsideknob/leverremains lockeduntilthumbturnisreturnedtoverticalor unlockedbykey.Auxiliarylatchdeadlocks latchboltwhendoorisclosed. Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedbykey.Unlockedfrom outsidebykey.Insideknob/leveralwaysfreefor immediateexit.Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchbolt whendoorisclosed. Latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorbyknob/lever inside.Outsideknob/leveralwaysinoperative. Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchboltwhendooris closed. Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside sideatalltimes. Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedbyinsidethumbturn. Turninginsideknob/leverorclosingdoorunlocks outsideknob/lever.Tounlockfromoutside, removeemergencybutton,insertemergencyturn (furnished)inaccessholeandrotate.
Specifications
Applications:Forcommercialandinstitutionalbuildingswherethefinestinmortiselocksarerequired. Certifications:L9000:ANSIA156.13Series1000,Grade1OperationalandSecurity,ULListedfor3hour firedoor(exceptL9076andL9077).WithinterchangeablecoreULListedauxiliarylockfor3hourfiredoor. cylinders:Grade2Security.L400:ANSIA156.5Grade1 WithConcealedCylinder: A156.13Grade1OperationalandSecurity.ANSI/ASTMF47676Grade40,ULListed. ExposedTrim: Levers:Leversareavailableinforgedbrassorbronzeandcaststainlesssteel.Designsavailabletomatch DSerieslevers. MediterraneanDesigns:Forgedbrassleverandrosedesigns. Escutcheons:Lescutcheonsarecoldforgedbrassorbronzeandstainlesssteel.Nescutcheonsare heavywroA=28"(54mm)diameterwroughtbrass,bronzeorstainlesssteel. x11mm). B=2916"(65mm)diameterwroughtbrass,bronzeorstainlesssteel Roses: TrimCombinations:Availablewithknobbothsides,leverbothsides,orknobxleverwithroseor escutcheonbothsides. DoorRange: 14"(44mm)Standard.18"(35mm)to22"(64mm)Regularpartsassembledtoorder. 1 4 (44mm)Standard.1 8 (35mm)to2 2 (64mm)Regularpartsassembledtoorder. Over22"(64mm)doorrangesvarybyfunction.Nescutcheonavailablefor14"(44mm)doorsstandard. 2"(51mm)to28"(60mm)Regularpartsassembledtoorder.Specifydoorthicknessifotherthan14". CaseSize:4716"x616"x1"(113mmx154mmx25mm). ArmoredFront:14"x8"x732"(32mmx203mmx6mm)Standard.116"x8"x732" (27mmx203mmx6mm)Optional. Spacing:Knoborlevertocylinder,378"(98mm);knoborlevertothumbturnhub,216"(68mm). Deadbolt:1"(25mm)Throwstainlesssteel. Latchbolt:4"(19mm)Throwstainlesssteelwithantifrictiontongue. Backset:24"(70mm)Only.
L9070 Classroom
L9080 Storeroom
L9010 PassageSet L9040 PrivacySet
*Please inquiry for additional L-Series Functions
LSeriesMortise03LeverBRose SchlageLock 23Oct09 Page2of2
LSERIESFULLLISTOFFUNCTIONS
L9010 PassageLatch Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeithersideatall times.Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress. L9040/LV9040 Bath/BedroomPrivacyLock LockLatchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedbyinsidethumbturn.Turning insideknob/leverorclosingdoorunlocksoutside knob/lever.Tounlockfromoutside,removeemergency button,insertemergencythumbturn(furnished)in accessholeandrotate.Insideleverisalwaysfreefor immediateegress. L9044/LV9044 PrivacyWithCoinTurnOutside Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedbyinsidethumbturnoroutside cointurn.Operatinginsideknob/lever,closingdoor, rotatinginsidethumbturnorrotatingoutsidecointurn unlocksoutsideknob/lever.SpecifyperL283056for Torxscrews.Availablewithrosetrimonly.(Previously XL11868 L9440/LV9440 PrivacyWithDeadbolt Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside. Deadboltthrownorretractedbyinsidethumbturn. Throwingdeadboltlocksoutsideknob/lever.Rotating insideknob/leversimultaneouslyretractsdeadboltand latchbolt,andunlocksoutsideknob/lever.Tounlock fromoutside,removeemergencybutton,insert emergencythumbturninaccessholeandrotate.Inside leverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress.(Previously XL11761)
L9444/LV9444 PrivacywithDeadboltandCoinTurnOutside Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside. Deadboltthrownorretractedbyinsidethumbturnor outsidecointurn.Throwingdeadboltlocksoutside knob/lever.Rotatinginsideknob/leversimultaneously retractsdeadboltandlatchbolt,andunlocksoutside knob/lever.Rotatingoutsidecointurnretractsdeadbolt andunlocksoutsideknob/lever.SpecifyperL283056 forTorxscrews.Availablewithrosetrimonly.Inside leverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress.(Previously XL11868) L0170 HalfDummyTrim Knob/leverononesidefixedbymountingbar. L0172 FullDummyTrim Knob/leveronbothsidesfixedbymountingbar. L9175 HalfDummyTrimwithLockCase Fixedknob/leverononesideinoperable.Includeslock caseandarmoredfront.OptionssameasL9176below. L9176 FullDummyTrimwithLockCase Fixedknob/leveronbothsides.Includeslockcaseand blankarmorfront.MaybeorderedwithoptionalXL11 743armoredfrontwithcutouttoreceivedeadbolt.
SINGLECYLINDERNONDEADBOLT FUNCTIONS
L9050/LV9050 OfficeandInnerEntryLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideismadeinoperativebykeyoutsideorby turninginsidethumbturn.Whenoutsideislocked, latchboltisretractedbykeyoutsideorbyknob/lever inside.Outsideknob/leverremainslockeduntil thumbturnisreturnedtoverticalorunlockedbykey. Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchboltwhendoorisclosed. Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress. Page1of5
L9056/LV9056 L9050withAutomaticUnlocking Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideismadeinoperativebykeyoutsideorby rotatinginsidethumbturn.outsideknob/leverunlocked bykeyoutsideorthumbturn.Rotatinginsideknob/lever simultaneouslyretractslatchboltandunlocksoutside knob/lever.Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchboltwhen doorisclosed.Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediate egress.(PreviouslyXL11776) L9070/LV9070 ClassroomLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedbykey.Unlockedfromoutside bykey.Insideknob/leveralwaysfreeforimmediate exit.Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchboltwhendooris closed.Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress. L9076/LV9076 ClassroomHoldbackLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedbykey.Whenlocked,latchbolt retractedbykeyoutsideorknob/leverinside.Auxiliary latchdeadlockslatchboltwhendoorisclosed.Depress insideknob/leverandturnkey360forholdback feature.Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress L9080/LV9080 StoreroomLock Latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorbyknob/lever inside.Outsideknob/leveralwaysinoperative. Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchboltwhendoorisclosed. Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress. L9080EL/LV9080EL ElectricallyLocked(FailSafe) Outsideknob/levercontinuouslylockedby24VACor DC.Latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorbyknob/lever inside.Switchorpowerfailureallowsoutside knob/levertoretractlatchbolt.Auxiliarylatchdeadlocks latchboltwhendoorisclosed.Insideknob/leveralways freeforimmediateexit.Insideleverisalwaysfreefor immediateegress.
L9080EU/LV9080EU ElectricallyUnlocked(FailSecure) Outsideknob/leverunlockedby24VACorDC. Latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorknob/leverinside. Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchboltwhendoorisclosed. Insideknob/leveralwaysfreeforimmediateexit.Inside leverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress. L9080ELRX/L9080EURX RequesttoExit(RX)ElectrifiedLock SameasL9080ELandL9080EUfunctions.Inaddition,a microswitchpositionedinsidethelockcasemonitors theretractorcrank,andisactuatedwhenrotationof theinsideoroutsideknob/leverrotatestheretractor hub.Theswitchsignalstheuseofthatopeningto securitysystems,allowinganondisruptivemeansof immediateegress.SpecifyperL283059fornormally closedcontacts(default).SpecifyL283125fornormally opencontacts.Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediate egress.(PreviouslyXL11807)
SINGLECYLINDERDEADBOLTFUNCTIONS
L9453/LV9453 EntranceLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedby20rotationofthumbturn. Deadboltthrownorretractedby90rotationof thumbturn.Whenlocked,keyoutsideorknob/lever insideretractsdeadboltandlatchboltsimultaneously. Outsideknob/leverremainslockeduntilthumbturnis restoredtoverticalposition.Throwingdeadbolt automaticallylocksoutsideknob/lever.Auxiliarylatch deadlockslatchboltwhendoorisclosed.Insideleveris alwaysfreeforimmediateegress. L9456/LV9456 CorridorLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside. Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyoutsideorinside thumbturn.Throwingdeadboltlocksoutside knob/lever.Turninginsideknob/leversimultaneously retractsdeadboltandlatchboltandunlocksoutside knob/lever.Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediate egress. L9465 Closet/StoreroomLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside. Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyoutside. Page2of5
L9473 Dormitory/BedroomLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside. Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyoutsideor thumbturninside. L9480/LV9480 StoreroomLockWithDeadbolt Latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorbyleverorknob inside.Outsideknob/leveralwaysfixed.Deadbolt thrownorretractedbykeyoutsideorthumbturn inside.Turninginsideknob/leversimultaneously retractsbothdeadboltandlatchbolt.Auxiliarylatch deadlockslatchboltwhendoorisclosed.Insidelever isalwaysfreeforimmediateegress.(Previously XL11591) L9485/LV9485 PrisonFunctionLock Latchretractedbykeyoutsideorknobinside.Outside knobalwaysfreespinning.Deadboltonlythrownor retractedbyguardskey.Insideknobbecomesfixed whendeadboltisthrown.Prisonerskeyonlyretracts latchbolt.Furnishedstandardwithtamperresistant Torxscrews.SpecifyperXL11557. L9485/LV9485 HotelorRestroomLock Latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorbyknob/lever inside.Outsideknob/leveralwaysfixed.Deadbolt thrownorretractedbyinsidethumbturn.When deadboltisthrown,allkeysbecomeinoperative exceptemergencyordisplaykeys.Turninginside knob/leverretractsbothdeadboltandlatchbolt simultaneously.Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchbolt whendoorisclosed.Insideleverisalwaysfreefor immediateegress.
L9486/LV9486 HotelorRestroomLockwith DoNotDisturbIndicator Latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorbyknob/lever inside.Outsideknob/leveralwaysfixed.Deadbolt thrownorretractedbyinsidethumbturn.When deadboltisthrown,DONOTDISTURBplateis displayed.Allkeysbecomeinoperativeexcept emergencyordisplaykeys.Turninginsideknob/lever retractsbothdeadboltandlatchboltsimultaneously. Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchboltwhendooris closed.Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediate egress. L9486xL583375/LV9486xL583375 L9486withOccupiedIndicator Latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorbyknob/lever inside.Outsideknob/leveralwaysfixed.Deadbolt thrownorretractedbyinsidethumbturn.When deadboltisthrown,OCCUPIEDplateisdisplayed andallkeysbecomeinoperativeexceptemergency keys.Turninginsideknob/leversimultaneously retractsbothdeadboltandlatchbolt.Auxiliarylatch deadlockslatchboltwhendoorisclosed.(Previously XL11580)Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediate egress. L9496 PrivacywithOccupiedIndicator Knob/leverretractslatchboltfromeitherside.Deadbolt thrownorretractedbykeyoutside(retractionbykey requiredintheeventofanemergency)orinside thumbturn.Throwingdeadboltlocksoutside knob/leveranddisplaysOCCUPIEDplate.Rotating insideknob/leversimultaneouslyretractsbothdeadbolt andlatchboltandunlocksoutsideknob/lever.Inside leverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress.(Previously XL11885)

Page3of5
DOUBLECYLINDERNONDEADBOLT FUNCTIONS
L9060/LV9060 ApartmentEntranceLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedbykeyfrominside.When locked,latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorknob/lever inside.Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchboltwhendooris closed.Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress. L9071/LV9071 ClassroomSecurityLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedbykeyfromeitherside.When locked,latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorknob/lever inside.Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchboltwhendooris locked.Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress. L9077/LV9077 ClassroomSecurityHoldbackLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedbykeyfromeitherside.When locked,latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorknob/lever inside.Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchboltwhendooris locked.Depressinsideknob/leverandturnkey360for holdbackfeature.Insideleverisalwaysfreefor immediateegress. L9082/LV9082 InstitutionLock* Latchboltretractedbykeyfromeitherside.Knob/lever onbothsidesalwaysinoperative.Auxiliarylatch deadlockslatchboltwhendoorisclosed. L9082EL/L9082EU L9082ElectricallyLockedorElectrically UnlockedBothSides* EEL:Outsideandinsideknoborlevercontinuallylocked electrically.Latchboltretractedbykeyeitherside. Switchorpowerfailureallowsoutsideandinside knob/levertoretractlatchbolt.Auxiliarylatchdeadlocks latchboltwhendoorisclosed.EU:Outsideandinside knob/leverunlockedelectrically.Latchboltretractedby keyeitherside.Switchorpowerfailurekeepsinsideand outsideknob/leverlocked.Auxiliarylatchdeadlocks latchboltwhendoorisclosed.(PreviouslyXL11452)
DOUBLECYLINDERDEADBOLTFUNCTIONS
L9457/LV9457 ClassroomSecurityLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside. Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyfromeitherside. Throwingdeadboltlocksoutsideknob/lever.Turning insideknob/leversimultaneouslyretractsdeadboltand latchboltandunlocksoutsideknob/lever.Insideleveris alwaysfreeforimmediateegress. L9466 Store/UtilityRoomLock* Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside. Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyfromeitherside. L9482/LV9482 InstitutionLockwithDeadbolt* Latchboltretractedbykeyfromeitherside.Knob/lever onbothsidesalwaysinoperative.Deadboltthrownor retracedbykeyeitherside.Auxiliarylatchdeadlocks latchboltwhendoorisclosed.SpecifyperXL11543.
FULLMORTISEDEADLOCKS
L9460 CylinderxThumbturnLock Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyoutsideor thumbturninside. L9462 DoubleCylinderLock* Deadboltoperatedbykeyfromeitherside. L9463 ClassroomLock Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyfromoutside. Insidethumbturncylinderretractsdeadbolt,butcannot projectit. L9464 CylinderLock Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyfromoneside.No trimonoppositeside. L9460xXL11635 L9460withPull Knob/leverbothsidesfixed.Deadboltthrownor retractedbykeyoutsideorthumbturninside. Page4of5
L9460xXL11886 SingleCylinderDeadlockwithPull Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyoutsideor thumbturninside.Nolatch,butinsideknoborleveris springloaded.Rotatinginsideknob/leveralsoretracts deadbolt.Fixedoutsideknob/lever. L9462xXL11886 DoubleCylinderDeadlockwithPull Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyfromeitherside. Nolatch,butinsideknob/leverisspringloaded. Rotatinginsideknob/leveralsoretractsdeadbolt.Fixed outsideknob/lever. L9464xXL11886 DeadlockwithPull Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyfromoneside.No latch,butinsideknob/leverisspringloaded.Rotating insideknob/leveralsoretractsdeadbolt.Fixed outsideknob/lever.
SPECIALFUNCTIONS
L9040/LV9040 PrivacyWithTurnsBothSides Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedbyinsideoroutsidethumbturn. Operatinginsideknob/lever,closingdoororrotating eitherthumbturnunlocksoutsideknob/lever.Specify perXL11446. L9110xXL11741 FullDummyTrimwithLockCase* Springloadedknob/leverbothsides.Includeslockcase andblankarmoredfront.Maybeorderedwithoptional XL11743armoredfrontwithcutouttoreceivedeadbolt
L463 ClassroomLock Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyfromoutside. Insidethumbturncylinderretractsdeadbolt,butcannot projectit. L464 CylinderLock Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyfrom oneside.Notrimonoppositeside. L480 DoorBolt Deadboltthrownorretractedby thumbturnfromoneside.Notrimon oppositeside. L496 DeadboltwithOccupiedIndicator Deadboltthrownorretractedbykey outsideorthumbturninside.When deadboltisthrownOCCUPIEDplateis displayed.(PreviouslyXL11911)
SMALLMORTISEDEADLOCKS
L460 CylinderxThumbturnLock Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyoutsideor thumbturninside. L462DoubleCylinderLock* Deadboltoperatedbykeyfromeitherside. Page5of5
LSERIESFULLLISTOFFUNCTIONS
L9010 PassageLatch Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeithersideatall times.Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress. L9040/LV9040 Bath/BedroomPrivacyLock LockLatchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedbyinsidethumbturn.Turning insideknob/leverorclosingdoorunlocksoutside knob/lever.Tounlockfromoutside,removeemergency button,insertemergencythumbturn(furnished)in accessholeandrotate.Insideleverisalwaysfreefor immediateegress. L9044/LV9044 PrivacyWithCoinTurnOutside Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedbyinsidethumbturnoroutside cointurn.Operatinginsideknob/lever,closingdoor, rotatinginsidethumbturnorrotatingoutsidecointurn unlocksoutsideknob/lever.SpecifyperL283056for Torxscrews.Availablewithrosetrimonly.(Previously XL11868 L9440/LV9440 PrivacyWithDeadbolt Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside. Deadboltthrownorretractedbyinsidethumbturn. Throwingdeadboltlocksoutsideknob/lever.Rotating insideknob/leversimultaneouslyretractsdeadboltand latchbolt,andunlocksoutsideknob/lever.Tounlock fromoutside,removeemergencybutton,insert emergencythumbturninaccessholeandrotate.Inside leverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress.(Previously XL11761)
L9444/LV9444 PrivacywithDeadboltandCoinTurnOutside Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside. Deadboltthrownorretractedbyinsidethumbturnor outsidecointurn.Throwingdeadboltlocksoutside knob/lever.Rotatinginsideknob/leversimultaneously retractsdeadboltandlatchbolt,andunlocksoutside knob/lever.Rotatingoutsidecointurnretractsdeadbolt andunlocksoutsideknob/lever.SpecifyperL283056 forTorxscrews.Availablewithrosetrimonly.Inside leverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress.(Previously XL11868) L0170 HalfDummyTrim Knob/leverononesidefixedbymountingbar. L0172 FullDummyTrim Knob/leveronbothsidesfixedbymountingbar. L9175 HalfDummyTrimwithLockCase Fixedknob/leverononesideinoperable.Includeslock caseandarmoredfront.OptionssameasL9176below. L9176 FullDummyTrimwithLockCase Fixedknob/leveronbothsides.Includeslockcaseand blankarmorfront.MaybeorderedwithoptionalXL11 743armoredfrontwithcutouttoreceivedeadbolt.
SINGLECYLINDERNONDEADBOLT FUNCTIONS
L9050/LV9050 OfficeandInnerEntryLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideismadeinoperativebykeyoutsideorby turninginsidethumbturn.Whenoutsideislocked, latchboltisretractedbykeyoutsideorbyknob/lever inside.Outsideknob/leverremainslockeduntil thumbturnisreturnedtoverticalorunlockedbykey. Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchboltwhendoorisclosed. Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress. Page1of5
L9056/LV9056 L9050withAutomaticUnlocking Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideismadeinoperativebykeyoutsideorby rotatinginsidethumbturn.outsideknob/leverunlocked bykeyoutsideorthumbturn.Rotatinginsideknob/lever simultaneouslyretractslatchboltandunlocksoutside knob/lever.Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchboltwhen doorisclosed.Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediate egress.(PreviouslyXL11776) L9070/LV9070 ClassroomLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedbykey.Unlockedfromoutside bykey.Insideknob/leveralwaysfreeforimmediate exit.Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchboltwhendooris closed.Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress. L9076/LV9076 ClassroomHoldbackLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedbykey.Whenlocked,latchbolt retractedbykeyoutsideorknob/leverinside.Auxiliary latchdeadlockslatchboltwhendoorisclosed.Depress insideknob/leverandturnkey360forholdback feature.Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress L9080/LV9080 StoreroomLock Latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorbyknob/lever inside.Outsideknob/leveralwaysinoperative. Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchboltwhendoorisclosed. Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress. L9080EL/LV9080EL ElectricallyLocked(FailSafe) Outsideknob/levercontinuouslylockedby24VACor DC.Latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorbyknob/lever inside.Switchorpowerfailureallowsoutside knob/levertoretractlatchbolt.Auxiliarylatchdeadlocks latchboltwhendoorisclosed.Insideknob/leveralways freeforimmediateexit.Insideleverisalwaysfreefor immediateegress.
L9080EU/LV9080EU ElectricallyUnlocked(FailSecure) Outsideknob/leverunlockedby24VACorDC. Latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorknob/leverinside. Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchboltwhendoorisclosed. Insideknob/leveralwaysfreeforimmediateexit.Inside leverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress. L9080ELRX/L9080EURX RequesttoExit(RX)ElectrifiedLock SameasL9080ELandL9080EUfunctions.Inaddition,a microswitchpositionedinsidethelockcasemonitors theretractorcrank,andisactuatedwhenrotationof theinsideoroutsideknob/leverrotatestheretractor hub.Theswitchsignalstheuseofthatopeningto securitysystems,allowinganondisruptivemeansof immediateegress.SpecifyperL283059fornormally closedcontacts(default).SpecifyL283125fornormally opencontacts.Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediate egress.(PreviouslyXL11807)
SINGLECYLINDERDEADBOLTFUNCTIONS
L9453/LV9453 EntranceLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedby20rotationofthumbturn. Deadboltthrownorretractedby90rotationof thumbturn.Whenlocked,keyoutsideorknob/lever insideretractsdeadboltandlatchboltsimultaneously. Outsideknob/leverremainslockeduntilthumbturnis restoredtoverticalposition.Throwingdeadbolt automaticallylocksoutsideknob/lever.Auxiliarylatch deadlockslatchboltwhendoorisclosed.Insideleveris alwaysfreeforimmediateegress. L9456/LV9456 CorridorLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside. Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyoutsideorinside thumbturn.Throwingdeadboltlocksoutside knob/lever.Turninginsideknob/leversimultaneously retractsdeadboltandlatchboltandunlocksoutside knob/lever.Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediate egress. L9465 Closet/StoreroomLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside. Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyoutside. Page2of5
L9473 Dormitory/BedroomLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside. Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyoutsideor thumbturninside. L9480/LV9480 StoreroomLockWithDeadbolt Latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorbyleverorknob inside.Outsideknob/leveralwaysfixed.Deadbolt thrownorretractedbykeyoutsideorthumbturn inside.Turninginsideknob/leversimultaneously retractsbothdeadboltandlatchbolt.Auxiliarylatch deadlockslatchboltwhendoorisclosed.Insidelever isalwaysfreeforimmediateegress.(Previously XL11591) L9485/LV9485 PrisonFunctionLock Latchretractedbykeyoutsideorknobinside.Outside knobalwaysfreespinning.Deadboltonlythrownor retractedbyguardskey.Insideknobbecomesfixed whendeadboltisthrown.Prisonerskeyonlyretracts latchbolt.Furnishedstandardwithtamperresistant Torxscrews.SpecifyperXL11557. L9485/LV9485 HotelorRestroomLock Latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorbyknob/lever inside.Outsideknob/leveralwaysfixed.Deadbolt thrownorretractedbyinsidethumbturn.When deadboltisthrown,allkeysbecomeinoperative exceptemergencyordisplaykeys.Turninginside knob/leverretractsbothdeadboltandlatchbolt simultaneously.Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchbolt whendoorisclosed.Insideleverisalwaysfreefor immediateegress.
L9486/LV9486 HotelorRestroomLockwith DoNotDisturbIndicator Latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorbyknob/lever inside.Outsideknob/leveralwaysfixed.Deadbolt thrownorretractedbyinsidethumbturn.When deadboltisthrown,DONOTDISTURBplateis displayed.Allkeysbecomeinoperativeexcept emergencyordisplaykeys.Turninginsideknob/lever retractsbothdeadboltandlatchboltsimultaneously. Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchboltwhendooris closed.Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediate egress. L9486xL583375/LV9486xL583375 L9486withOccupiedIndicator Latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorbyknob/lever inside.Outsideknob/leveralwaysfixed.Deadbolt thrownorretractedbyinsidethumbturn.When deadboltisthrown,OCCUPIEDplateisdisplayed andallkeysbecomeinoperativeexceptemergency keys.Turninginsideknob/leversimultaneously retractsbothdeadboltandlatchbolt.Auxiliarylatch deadlockslatchboltwhendoorisclosed.(Previously XL11580)Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediate egress. L9496 PrivacywithOccupiedIndicator Knob/leverretractslatchboltfromeitherside.Deadbolt thrownorretractedbykeyoutside(retractionbykey requiredintheeventofanemergency)orinside thumbturn.Throwingdeadboltlocksoutside knob/leveranddisplaysOCCUPIEDplate.Rotating insideknob/leversimultaneouslyretractsbothdeadbolt andlatchboltandunlocksoutsideknob/lever.Inside leverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress.(Previously XL11885)

Page3of5
DOUBLECYLINDERNONDEADBOLT FUNCTIONS
L9060/LV9060 ApartmentEntranceLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedbykeyfrominside.When locked,latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorknob/lever inside.Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchboltwhendooris closed.Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress. L9071/LV9071 ClassroomSecurityLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedbykeyfromeitherside.When locked,latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorknob/lever inside.Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchboltwhendooris locked.Insideleverisalwaysfreeforimmediateegress. L9077/LV9077 ClassroomSecurityHoldbackLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedbykeyfromeitherside.When locked,latchboltretractedbykeyoutsideorknob/lever inside.Auxiliarylatchdeadlockslatchboltwhendooris locked.Depressinsideknob/leverandturnkey360for holdbackfeature.Insideleverisalwaysfreefor immediateegress. L9082/LV9082 InstitutionLock* Latchboltretractedbykeyfromeitherside.Knob/lever onbothsidesalwaysinoperative.Auxiliarylatch deadlockslatchboltwhendoorisclosed. L9082EL/L9082EU L9082ElectricallyLockedorElectrically UnlockedBothSides* EEL:Outsideandinsideknoborlevercontinuallylocked electrically.Latchboltretractedbykeyeitherside. Switchorpowerfailureallowsoutsideandinside knob/levertoretractlatchbolt.Auxiliarylatchdeadlocks latchboltwhendoorisclosed.EU:Outsideandinside knob/leverunlockedelectrically.Latchboltretractedby keyeitherside.Switchorpowerfailurekeepsinsideand outsideknob/leverlocked.Auxiliarylatchdeadlocks latchboltwhendoorisclosed.(PreviouslyXL11452)
DOUBLECYLINDERDEADBOLTFUNCTIONS
L9457/LV9457 ClassroomSecurityLock Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside. Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyfromeitherside. Throwingdeadboltlocksoutsideknob/lever.Turning insideknob/leversimultaneouslyretractsdeadboltand latchboltandunlocksoutsideknob/lever.Insideleveris alwaysfreeforimmediateegress. L9466 Store/UtilityRoomLock* Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside. Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyfromeitherside. L9482/LV9482 InstitutionLockwithDeadbolt* Latchboltretractedbykeyfromeitherside.Knob/lever onbothsidesalwaysinoperative.Deadboltthrownor retracedbykeyeitherside.Auxiliarylatchdeadlocks latchboltwhendoorisclosed.SpecifyperXL11543.
FULLMORTISEDEADLOCKS
L9460 CylinderxThumbturnLock Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyoutsideor thumbturninside. L9462 DoubleCylinderLock* Deadboltoperatedbykeyfromeitherside. L9463 ClassroomLock Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyfromoutside. Insidethumbturncylinderretractsdeadbolt,butcannot projectit. L9464 CylinderLock Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyfromoneside.No trimonoppositeside. L9460xXL11635 L9460withPull Knob/leverbothsidesfixed.Deadboltthrownor retractedbykeyoutsideorthumbturninside. Page4of5
L9460xXL11886 SingleCylinderDeadlockwithPull Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyoutsideor thumbturninside.Nolatch,butinsideknoborleveris springloaded.Rotatinginsideknob/leveralsoretracts deadbolt.Fixedoutsideknob/lever. L9462xXL11886 DoubleCylinderDeadlockwithPull Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyfromeitherside. Nolatch,butinsideknob/leverisspringloaded. Rotatinginsideknob/leveralsoretractsdeadbolt.Fixed outsideknob/lever. L9464xXL11886 DeadlockwithPull Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyfromoneside.No latch,butinsideknob/leverisspringloaded.Rotating insideknob/leveralsoretractsdeadbolt.Fixed outsideknob/lever.
SPECIALFUNCTIONS
L9040/LV9040 PrivacyWithTurnsBothSides Latchboltretractedbyknob/leverfromeitherside unlessoutsideislockedbyinsideoroutsidethumbturn. Operatinginsideknob/lever,closingdoororrotating eitherthumbturnunlocksoutsideknob/lever.Specify perXL11446. L9110xXL11741 FullDummyTrimwithLockCase* Springloadedknob/leverbothsides.Includeslockcase andblankarmoredfront.Maybeorderedwithoptional XL11743armoredfrontwithcutouttoreceivedeadbolt
L463 ClassroomLock Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyfromoutside. Insidethumbturncylinderretractsdeadbolt,butcannot projectit. L464 CylinderLock Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyfrom oneside.Notrimonoppositeside. L480 DoorBolt Deadboltthrownorretractedby thumbturnfromoneside.Notrimon oppositeside. L496 DeadboltwithOccupiedIndicator Deadboltthrownorretractedbykey outsideorthumbturninside.When deadboltisthrownOCCUPIEDplateis displayed.(PreviouslyXL11911)
SMALLMORTISEDEADLOCKS
L460 CylinderxThumbturnLock Deadboltthrownorretractedbykeyoutsideor thumbturninside. L462DoubleCylinderLock* Deadboltoperatedbykeyfromeitherside. Page5of5
98/99 Rim Exit Device
299Strike
98F/99F Fire Exit Rim Device
299FStrike
499FStrikewithMullion
98and99rimexitdevices foralltypesofsingleanddoubledoorswithmullion,ULlistedforPanicExit
Hardware.DevicesareANSIA156.32001Grade1.The98devicehasasmoothmechanismcaseandthe 99devicehasagroovedcase.Therimdeviceisnonhandedexceptwhenthefollowingdeviceoptionsare used:SD(SpecialDogging),2(DoubleCylinder)orSS(SignalSwitch).SeeOppositepageforavailable used: SD (Special Dogging), 2 (Double Cylinder) or SS (Signal Switch). See Opposite page for available outsidetrimanddevicefunctions.Coversstockhollowmetaldoorswith86or161cutoutsonsingledoors (maycovercutoutsonpairsconsulttemplate). 98Fand99Frimfireexitdevicesforalltypesofsingledoorsupto4x10(1219mmx3048mm)or 8x10(2438mmx3048mm)doubledoorswith9954or9854mullion,ULlistedforFireExitHardware. DevicesareANSIA156.32001Grade1.The98Fdevicehasasmoothmechanismcaseandthe99Fdevice hasagroovedcase.Therimdeviceisnonhandedexceptwhenthefollowingdeviceoptionsareused:2(Double Cylinder)orSS(SignalSwitch).
DeviceFunctions DeviceshipsEO/DT/NL.Fieldselectable. ForTP,K,orLremoveNLdrivescrew fromdevice DeviceLengths 324"to3(711mmto914mm)DoorSize 4210"to4(864mmto1219mm)DoorSize Strikes 299DullBlackOptionalStrikesAvailable 299Fand499F(formullions)forfiredevice DoggingFeature Hexkeydoggingstandard DoggingOptions CDCylinderDogging SDSpecialCenterCaseDogging LDLessDogging FireExitDevicecannotbemechanicalDogged ElectricOptionsavailableforbothratedandnonrateddevices LatchBolt Deadlocking,/"(19mm)throw Centerlinefrom 39/"(1011mm) FinishedFloor 39/"(1008mm)withMullion TrimDetail EO=ExitOnly DT=DummyTrim(PullNotforFireDevices) NL=NightLatch(KeyRetractsLatchbolt) NLOP=NightLatchOptionalPullRequired NLOP = Night Latch Optional Pull Required L=Lever(KeyLockasandUnlocks) LNL=LeverNightLatch LBE=LeverBlankEscutcheon(Always OperableNoCylinder) LDT=LeverDummyTrim(PullwhenDogged NotforFireDevices) "F"isaddedtotheendoftheaboveto becomerated
Availableinthefollowingfinishes:C3(PolishedBrass),C4(BrushedBrass),C10(BrushedBronze),
C26(PolishedChrome),C26D(BrushedChrome,C28(BrushedAluminum),313AN(DuranodicDarkBronze), 315AN(BlackAnodized)andC32D(BrushedStainlessSteel)forthe98Fdeviceonly.
98/99RimExitDeviceand98F/99FRimFireRatedExitDevice VonDuprin 18Aug09 Page1of1
TrimFunctionOptions: EO=ExitOnly DT=DummyTrim(Pull) NL=NightLatch(KeyRetractsLatchbolt) NLOP=NightLatchOptionalPullRequired L=Lever(KeyLocksandUnlocks) LNL=LeverNightLatch LBE=LeverBlankEscutcheon(Always OperableNoCylinder) LDT=LeverDummyTrim(PullwhenDogged) TL=Thumbturn(KeyLocksandUnlocksUse withDTTrim) TLBE=Thumbturn(BlankEscutcheonAlways OperableNoCylinderUsewithDTTrim) Availableinthefollowingfinishes: C3 PolishedBrass C4 BrushedBrass C10 BrushedBronze Brushed Bronze C26 PolishedChrome C26D BrushedChrome C28 BrushedAluminum 313AN DuranodicDarkBronze 315AN BlackAnodized
996LTrim
03Lever
996LTrimwith03Lever VonDuprin 03/03/10 Page1of1
AvailableFinishes BrushedChrome BrushedStainlessSteel OilRubbedBronze BrushedBronze BrushedBrass BrushedNickel BrushedAluminum C26D C32D C10B C10 C4 C15 C28
Door Pull/Push 4000 Series, 4000 Style, 12" c.c., 1" dia. Centre 12" (304.8) Item # Example: 40(series) 12 (Length) - 2 (Diameter) = 4012-2 + Finish Material 1" (25.4) dia.
GSH4000SeriesDoorPulls GalleryHardware 7Jul09 Page1of1
AvailableFinishes BrushedStainlessSteel PolishedStainlessSteel OilRubbedBronze BrushedBronze BrushedBrass PolishedBrass BrushedAluminum OptionalMounting: NoScrews/Tape WithScrews WithTape
C32D C32 C10B C10 C4 C3 C28
GaugeSizeCodes: SuffixA=.050(1.27) SuffixB=.062(1.57) SuffixC=.125(1/8"(3.17)) Otherthicknessesrequiredmustbespecified. Other thicknesses required must be specified. HowtoOrder: Specifyproductnumberwithgaugecode. (Ex.81A=.050(1.27)xsizexfinish= GSH81A5"x20"C32D)
*SizetoSuit
GSH81SeriesPushPlate GalleryHardware 12/16/09 Page1of1
NEW4040XPclosershippedwithEDAarm,standardplasticcover,andselfreaming andtappingscrews. Nonsizedcylinderisadjustableforinteriordoorsto50andexteriordoorsto40. Closermountsparallelarm(EDAarm)oneitherrightorleftswingingdoors. Optionalhingesideandtopjambmountwithoptionalregulararm. CloserstomeetADArequirements.See4040XPSeriespage49. Standardoroptionalcustompowdercoatfinish. Optionalplatedfinishonmetalcover,armandfasteners. OptionalSRIprimerforinstallationsincorrosiveconditionsisavailablewithpowdercoatonly. Optionaldesignerseriesmetalcover ULandcULlistedforselfclosingdoorswithoutholdopen. 4040XPcanbeusedwithall4041accessories.
4040XPSeriesCloser LCN 05/05/10 Page1of1
GlynnJohnson90seriesholdersandstopsarethemostruggedmodelsavailablefor heavydutyapplications.Thechannelissurfacemountedtothedoor,mostoftenwith sexbolts,andthejambbracketissurfacemountedtothejamb,requiringminimaldoor andframepreparation. Theseversatileunitscanbeusedinconjunctionwiththemostsurfaceapplieddoor closers.Theprovidedtemplatesallowforvariablemountingpositions,rangingfrom85 to110HoldOpen/Stopangle.Thesetemplatesaredesignedforinstallationinalmost alltypesofdoors,includingdoorswithconventionalbutttypehingesorspecialtyhinges. Specifications: NonHanded CompatibilitywithDoorClosers SingleActingDoors Interior/ExteriorApplications
Durable EasytoInstall ImprovedCorrosionResistance FunctionConversionKitsAvailable
AvailablePlatedFinishes C3 PolishedBrass C4 SatinBrass C10 SatinBronze C10B OilRubbedBronze C10B Oil Rubbed Bronze C32 PolishedStainlessSteel C32D SatinStainlessSteel
PowderCoatFinishes PowderCoatBrass PowderCoatBronze PowderCoatAluminum PowderCoatDarkBronze Powder Coat Dark Bronze PowderCoatBlack ChromelikeCoating
SP4 SP10 SP28 SP313 SP313 SPBLK 652
Note: Thischartillustratesthemostcommontypesofhinginganddooropeningsizes.
90SeriesSurfaceOverheadDoorHolders/Stops GlynnJohnson 15Jan10 PAGE 1of1 1 of 1
Specifications: NonHanded CompatibilitywithDoorClosers Single/DoubleActingDoors Interior/ExteriorApplications Durable ReducedDoorPrep ImprovedCorrosionResistance FunctionConversionKitsAvailable
AvailableFinishes:
PolishedBrass BrushedBrass BrushedBronze OilRubbedBronze PolishedStainlessSteel BrushedStainlessSteel PowderCoatBrass PowderCoatBronze PowderCoatAluminum PowderCoatDarkBronze PowderCoatBlack ChromelikeCoating
GlynnJohnson100seriesholdersandstopsprovidethemostreliableand versatileconcealedoverheaddoorcontrol.Theyaredesginedforinstallation onvirtuallyalltypesofdoorsmountedonconventionaltypebutthinges,pivots, continuoushinges,swingclearhingesandnumerousotherspecialtyhinges. Theseversatileunitscanbeusedinconjunctionwiththemostsurfaceapplied doorclosers.Thetemplatesallowsforvariblemountingpositions,rangingfrom 85to110degreeHoldOpen/Stopangle.Thesetemplatesaredesignedfor installationinalmostalltypesofdoors,includingdoorswithconventional installation in almost all types of doors, including doors with conventional butttypehingesorspecialtyhinges. 100SeriesSizingChart
C3 C4 C10 C10B C32 C32D SP4 SP10 SP28 SP313 SPBLK 652
100SSeriesStopOnly (SuffixS)WhentheHoldOpenfunctionisnotrequired,theStopOnlyfunctionprovides thesameeffectivedoorcontrolminustheHoldOpenfeature.TheStopOnlymodelmay beusedonfiredoors 100HSeriesHoldOpen (SuffixH)TheHoldOpenfunctionshouldbeusedwhereitisdesiredtoholdadooropen atapredeterminedpositionforshortorlongperiodsoftime,permittinganunobstructed at a predetermined position for short or long periods of time, permitting an unobstructed trafficflowthroughtheopening.Thesemodelsarebothselectiveandadjustable,featuring themostreliableHoldOpenmechanismavailable.Theyfeatureacontrolknobwhich protrudesfromthefaceofthedoorandturnstheHoldOpenfunctiononoroff.Setinthe inactiveposition,theunitactsasastopandshockabsorber.Thetensiononthe HoldOpenmechanismcanbeadjustedusinganallenwrenchtooffsetaircurrentsor otherexteriorconditions.TheHoldOpentensionadjustmentislocatedinthebottomof thetrackinthetopofthedoor. 100FSeriesFrictionHoldOpen (SuffixF)FrictionHoldOpenmodelsprovideanalternativeholdingmethod,idealfor heavypatientroomdoors,closetdoorsorsimilarapplicationswheremultipleHoldOpen positionsaredesired.Thefrictiontensionisadjustedusinganallenwrenchandanopen endwrench.Thefrictiontensionadjustmentislocatedonthetopofthesliderinthechannel.
ItemCode: Manufacturer: Date: 100SeriesConcealedOverheadDoorHolders/Stops GlynnJohnson 1/19/2010
PAGE 1of1
AvailableFinishes BrushedStainlessSteel PolishedStainlessSteel OilRubbedBronze BrushedBronze BrushedBrass PolishedBrass BrushedAluminum OptionalMounting: NoScrews/Tape WithScrews WithTape
C32D C32 C10B C10 C4 C3 C28
SizetoSuitDoor Size to Suit Door

Size to Suit
MetalKickPlatesaremadefrom18ga material. SuffixA=.050(1.27) SuffixB=.062(1.57) SuffixC=.125(1/8 (3.17)) Suffix C = .125(1/8"(3.17)) Otherthicknessesrequiredmustbespecified. HowtoOrder: Specifyproductnumberwithgaugecode. (Ex.80A=.050(1.27)xsizexfinish= GSH80A8"x34.5"C32D)
GSH80SeriesKickPlate GalleryHardware 12/16/09 Page1of1
AvailableFinishes BrushedChrome OilRubbedBronze BrushedBrass PolishedBrass C26D C10B C4 C3
2 in 1 floor stop. Doubles your value by saving time,
moneyandfrustration.
High and low rise, spring loaded stop.
GSH2092in1FloorStop GalleryHardware 7Jul09 Page1of1
CT45Threshold KNCrowderManufacturing 7Jul09 Page1
CT49Threshold KNCrowderManufacturingInc. 27Aug09 Page1of1
W20N for use with closers or hold open devices in order to provide a continuous seal
W20SWeatherstrip KNCrowderManufacturing 7Jul09 Page1
W22Weatherstrip KNCrowderManufacturing 7Jul09 Page1
W24SDoorSweep KNCrowderManufacturing 7Jul09 Page1
BI-FOLD & PIVOTING C-103-4 Hanger SYSTEMS
HEAVY-DUTY
C-515 QUICK RELEASE PIVOT KIT C-204 TRACK

This kit includes a C-510 heavy-duty pivot complete with thrust bearings for extra heavy load. The top pivot clamps onto the track and new top plates reduce costs of prepping doors. The C-996 Quick Release Hanger (supplied) has a quick disconnect stud which allows hanger body and stud to be inserted into the track while mounting. The top plate is mounted to the top of door and then clips into the quick disconnect stud, thus reducing installation time. Hinges by others. Use with Extruded Aluminum C-204 Track, 6061T6 Alloy Load capacity 150 lbs. per panel/leaf.
Up to 150 lbs. per panel
new
C-204
C-515 COMPLETE KIT FOR 2 DOORS BI-FOLDING

BI-FOLDING KITS AVAILABLE FROM 48" [1219MM] TO 144" [3658MM] TRACK WIDTH AND UP TO 4 DOORS
OPTIONAL PRODUCTS
C-515-2 QUICK DISCONNECT STUD (1) C-996 HANGER (1) C-510-1 TOP PIVOT PLATE (1) C-515-4 TOP PIVOT STUD (1) C-204 TRACK X LENGTH (OPENING WIDTH) (1) C-510-3 BOTTOM PIVOT STUD (1) C-515 ADJUSTMENT ROD (1)
3/8" HEX NUT (1)
C-515-1 TOP PLATE (1)
C-510-2 TRACK CLAMP (1)
C-515-5 LOCK NUT (2)
C-913 Guide & C-914 Guide Channel. (See page 70 for more details)
KITS COME COMPLETE WITH SCREWS
C-515-3 DOOR PLATE (2)
C-510-4 BOTTOM PIVOT PLATE WITH THRUST BEARING (1)
5/16 X 1" HEX SOC CAP SCREW (2)
PLAN VIEWS SHOWING CLEARANCE BETWEEN DOORS
OPENING WIDTH (TRACK LENGTH) C-515 2-DOOR KIT ALLOW 1/16" [1.6 mm] C-515 4-DOOR KIT
OPENING WIDTH (TRACK LENGTH) ALLOW 1/16" [1.6 mm] ALLOW 1/8" [3.2 mm] ALLOW 1/16" [1.6 mm]
Bi-fold & Pivot Systems
C-515 DETAIL
MIN 3-1/16" [77.8 mm] MAX 3-9/16" [90.5 mm] 3-1/2" [88.9 mm] 1-15/16" [49.2 mm]
1-3/4" [44.5 mm]
WALL
1-9/16" [39.7 mm] 1" [25.4 mm] 1-9/16" [39.7 mm] 1-7/8" [47.6 mm] PIVOTING DOOR MOVING DOOR 1 - PLACE DOOR ON BOLT 3 - LOCK ADJUSTMENT
MIN 1-1/4" [31.8 mm] MAX 1-3/4" [44.5 mm]
2 - ADJUST WITH ROD C-515-3 DOOR PLATE (5/16" X 1-1/4" X 3-3/4")
www.kncrowder.com
A PRODUCT OF K. N. CROWDER MFG. INC.
57
1.1.1.
SECTION 08 91 00 LOUVRES
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide louvres including but not limited to following: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. additional steel support framing. extruded aluminum prefinished wall louvres. insect screens. caulking.
1.2.2.
Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. Provision of concrete walls: Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. Provision of precast concrete cladding system: Section 03 45 00, Precast Architectural Concrete.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org. PVDF: Polyvinylidene Fluoride. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (formerly known as Steel Structures Painting Council); www.sspc.org.
1.3.2.
Reference Standards: 1.3.2.1. 1.3.2.2. 1.3.2.3. 1.3.2.4. ASTM C920-11 CISC/CPMA 2-75 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants - A Quick-Drying Primer for Use on Structural Steel
CSA G40.20/G40.21-04(09) - General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel SSPC-05 - The Society for Protective Coatings, Systems Specifications, SSPC Painting Manual, Volume 2 and
PAGE 08 91 00 - 1
1.4.1.
SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings: 1.4.1.1. Submit Shop Drawings for work of this Section in accordance with Section 01 30 00. In addition to minimum requirements indicate following: 1.4.1.1.1. 1.4.1.1.2. 1.4.1.2. structural supports and framing provided as part of this Section. provision for structural and thermal movement between louvres and adjacent materials.
Employ a registered structural engineer specified herein is responsible for: 1.4.1.2.1.1. 1.4.1.2.2. production and review of Shop Drawings. stamping and signing each Shop Drawing and any associated calculations performed.
1.4.2.
Samples: Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Submit following samples in sizes indicated: 1.4.2.1. 1.4.2.2. louvres minimum 600 mm (24") square in finish as specified herein. louvre flashing minimum 300 mm (12") square in finish as specified herein.
1.5.
1.5.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications: 1.5.1.1. Installers: Provide work of this Section executed by competent installers with minimum of 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies specified and with approval and training of the Product manufacturers. Licensed Professionals: Employ a full time professional structural engineer carrying a minimum $2,000,000.00 professional liability insurance and is registered in the Province of Ontario.
1.5.1.2.
1.6.
1.6.1. 1.6.2.

Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Coordinate deliveries to comply with construction schedule and arrange for strategic off-the-ground, undercover storage locations. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1.6.2.1. 1.6.2.2. Properly wrap louvres with protective coverings and put in suitable crates to prevent distortion and damage. Carefully unload, handle and store to prevent damage. Protect work of this Section from damage. Protect other work from damage resulting from this Work. Repair or replace damaged work to satisfaction of Consultant at no cost to Owner.
1.7.
1.7.1.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer Warranty: Warrant work of this Section for period of 5 years against defects and/or deficiencies in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period, to satisfaction of Consultant and at no expense to Owner. Defects include but are not limited to extensive colour fading.
PAGE 08 91 00 - 2
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury Project No: 2011.008 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1.
2.1.1.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer List: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 2.1.1.1. 2.1.1.2. 2.1.1.3. 2.1.1.4. The Airolite Company, LLC; www.airolite.com C/S Construction Specialties Company; www.c-sgroup.com McGill Architectural Products; www.the-mcgill-group.com Ventex by TenPlus Architectural Products Ltd.; www.tenplus-online.com
2.1.2.
Substitution Limitations: Comparable Products from other manufacturers not listed herein will be accepted provided they meet requirements of this Specification after full review by Consultant.
2.2.
2.2.1.
MATERIALS
2.2.2.
Performance/Design Criteria: 2.2.2.1. Structural Design: 2.2.2.1.1. Ensure louvre members deflect no more than L/180 of span between supports when subjected to wind load of 958 Pa (20 psf) applied horizontally to louvre face. Employ a registered structural engineer specified herein to: design components performance. for work of this Section requiring structural
2.2.2.1.2. 2.2.2.1.2.1. 2.2.2.1.2.2.
be responsible for determining sizes, joint spacing to allow thermal movement and loading of components in accordance with applicable codes and regulations.
2.2.2.2. 2.2.2.3. 2.2.3. 2.2.4. 2.2.5.
Vibration Control: Ensure louvre members do not vibrate when subjected to above wind loading. Provide integral bosses as required. Thermal Movement: Design louvres to accommodate expansion and contraction of components due to temperature changes.
Aluminum Extrusions: Supply AA 6063-T5 alloy, exposed surfaces prefinished as specified. Fasteners: Supply screws, bolts, nuts, washers, rivets and other fasteners incorporated into aluminum sections of tamperproof aluminum or ANSI Series 300 stainless steel. Anchoring Devices: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or other non-corrosive metal compatible with aluminum. Steel anchors may be used provided they are zinc coated and insulated from aluminum.
PAGE 08 91 00 - 3
2.2.6.
Sealant: Non-sag type, multi-component polyurethane sealant conforming to ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, G, M, A and O. Supply in standard colours as selected. Supply 1 of following: 2.2.6.1. 2.2.6.2. 2.2.6.3. Sonoplastic NP 2" by ChemRex Inc.; www.chemrex.com. Sikaflex -2c NS by Sika Canada Inc.; www.sika.ca. DYmeric 240 by Tremco Canada; www.tremcosealants.com
2.2.7. 2.2.8. 2.2.9. 2.2.10. 2.2.11.
Structural Steel Supports: Supply new material conforming to CSA G40.20/G40.21, Grade 300W, cleaned to SSPC-SP 3 requirements and shop primed with primer conforming to CISC/CPMA 2-75. Bituminous Coating: Supply "Bakor 410-02" by Bakor Inc.; www.bakor.com. Insect Screen: Supply manufacturer's standard 14 x 18 mesh. Blank-Off Panels: Supply fixed aluminum sheet over back of louvres in lieu of bird screens where required by mechanical. Metal Sills: Supply 1 mm (0.040") (18 B and S ga) aluminum complete with cover plates at sill joints and drip deflectors at sill ends and at abutting vertical surfaces. Finish to match louvers.
2.3.
2.3.1.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
Louvre Type: Supply aluminum construction, 50 mm (2") deep, high performance drainable fixed extruded mullion Louver, C/S 2 Model A2097 with heads, sills, jambs and mullions: 0.063 (1.60mm). Fixed blades 0.063 (1.60mm) or equivalent equal McGill Architectural Products, TenPlus Architectural Products Ltd or Ventex with following performance qualities: 2.3.1.1. AMCA Performance: A 100 mm x 100 mm (4 x 4) unit shall conform to the following: 2.3.1.1.1. 2.3.1.1.2. 2.3.1.1.3. Free Area 0.821 sq. m. (8.84 sq. ft.) Free area velocity at the point of beginning water penetration 317.0 m/min (1040 FPM) Intake Pressure drop at the point of beginning water penetration 3.302 mm (0.13 in. H2O)
2.3.2.
Fabrication: 2.3.2.1. 2.3.2.2. Form blades, mullions and frames to sizes and shapes indicated. Provide louvre blades with extruded aluminum blade supports in section modulus and depth to resist loads anticipated and meet design requirements specified. Provide integral reinforcing ribs to prevent bowing and distortion. Accurately cut and fit components to produce tight hairline junctures. Securely fasten frame members together with adequate concealed welds and seal with sealant to ensure watertight joints. Fabricate insect screens using aluminum mesh securely locked into a heavy extruded aluminum channel frame. Install insect screens on the inside of louvres and screw fasten to frames to permit removal if required. Coat surfaces of aluminum in contact with steel, concrete and/or masonry using specified bituminous coating.
2.3.2.3.
2.3.2.4.
2.3.2.5.
PAGE 08 91 00 - 4
2.3.3. Finish: 2.3.3.1.
Clear Anodized Finish: Ensure aluminum finish is clear anodized in accordance with Aluminum Association; www.aluminum.org, Finish Designation AA-M12C22A41, Class I, minimum 0.018 mm (0.7 mils) thick.
2.4.
2.4.1.

Tests and Inspections: 2.4.1.1. Structural Inspection: Ensure a registered structural engineer specified herein inspects work of this Section during fabrication.

3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
3.1.2.
3.2.
3.2.1. 3.2.2.
INSTALLATION
Secure support frames to openings. Install louvres plumb or true to slope and at correct location in openings, with insect screens on inside. Method of attachment shall be concealed. Caulk perimeter of frames to adjacent materials or to supports using joint backing and sealant. Neatly tool and finish joints.
3.3.
3.3.1.

3.3.2. 3.3.3.
Non-Conforming Work: Replace damaged work which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, restored or cleaned, to satisfaction of Consultant at no cost to Owner. Manufacturer Services: Arrange for Product manufacturers technical representative to: 3.3.3.1. 3.3.3.2. 3.3.3.3. 3.3.3.4. meet and discuss installation procedures and unique conditions at the Place of the Work. inspect substrate surfaces and recommend solutions to accommodate adverse conditions. periodically visit and inspect installation and report unsatisfactory conditions to the Contractor. attend final inspection and to submit written certification that Products, systems and assemblies have been installed in accordance with manufacturers requirements.
3.4.
3.4.1.
CLEANING
Maintain aluminum work in a clean condition throughout construction period, so it will be without deterioration or damage at time of acceptance. Select methods of cleaning which will promote achievement of uniform appearance for materials that weather or age with exposure.
PAGE 08 91 00 - 5
3.4.2.
Immediately before time of Substantial Performance, clean aluminum work thoroughly, inside and out. Demonstrate proper cleaning methods to Owner during this final cleaning. Prepare a "Cleaning and Maintenance Manual" listing types of cleaning compounds and cleaning methods of the work and submit 2 copies to Consultant.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 08 91 00 - 6
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 14 21 00 Project No: 2011.008 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.
1.1.1.
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Provide electric traction elevators including but not limited to following: 1.2.1.1. 1.2.1.2. 1.2.1.3. 1.2.1.4. 1.2.1.5. 1.2.1.6. commercial, standard pre-engineered electric traction passenger elevators. elevator car enclosures, hoistway entrances and signal equipment. operation and control systems. accessibility provisions for physically disabled persons. equipment, machines, controls, systems and devices as required for safely operating specified elevators at their rated speed and capacity. materials and accessories as required to complete elevator installation.
1.2.2.
Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. 1.2.2.3. 1.2.2.4. 1.2.2.5. 1.2.2.6. 1.2.2.7. 1.2.2.8. 1.2.2.9. Temporary guardrails at elevator openings: Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls. Installation of inserts, sleeves and anchors in concrete: Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. Installation of inserts, sleeves and anchors in masonry: Section 04 20 00, Masonry Units. Provision of hoist beam, Lifeline attachments capable of withstanding 5000 lb load. Provide a minimum of 2 at the top, front of each hoistway, Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel. Provision of pit ladders, steel framing, auxiliary support steel and guide-rail brackets: Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Providing steel angle sill supports and grouting hoistway entrance sills and frames: Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Provision of pit waterproofing: Section 07 16 00, Cementitious Waterproofing. Access door for access to governor: Section 08 31 13, Access Doors and Frames. Provision of floor tile for elevator cab: Section 09 30 00, Tiling.
1.2.2.10. Finish painting: Section 09 91 00, Painting. 1.2.2.11. Heating and ventilating hoistways and machine rooms: Division 23, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning. 1.2.2.12. Heat and smoke sensing devices: Division 23, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.
PAGE 14 21 00 - 1
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 14 21 00 Project No: 2011.008 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
1.2.2.13. Providing electrical service to elevators, including fused disconnect switches: Division 26, Electrical. 1.2.2.14. Emergency power supply, temporary lighting (including temporary lighting in hoistway for machine space with switch located in hoistway on the strike jamb side of top landing door), transfer switch and auxiliary contacts: Division 26, Electrical. 1.2.2.15. Convenience outlets and illumination in machine room, hoistway and pit: Division 26, Electrical. 1.2.2.16. Provision of intercom system conduit and wiring: Division 27, Communications.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. 1.3.1.4. 1.3.1.5. ADAAG: ADA Standard for Accessible Design, 1994. COLA: Cost of Living Allowance. NAAMM: National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org. ULC: Underwriters Laboratories of Canada; www.ulc.ca. UL: Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com.
1.3.2.
Reference Standards: 1.3.2.1. 1.3.2.2. 1.3.2.3. ASME A17.1/B44-10 ASTM A167-99(09) ASTM A1008/A1008M-11 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators - Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting ChromiumNickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip - Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength LowAlloy with Improved Formability - Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and high-Strength LowAlloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric] - Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire Profiles, and Tubes [Metric] - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities
1.3.2.4.
ASTM A1014/A1011M-10
1.3.2.5. 1.3.2.6. 1.3.2.7. 1.3.2.8. 1.3.2.9.
ASTM B209M-10 ASTM B221M-07 ICC/ANSI A117.1-09
CSA G40.20/G40.21-04(09) - General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel NFPA 70-11 - National Electrical Code - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows - Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
1.3.2.10. NFPA 80-10 1.3.2.11. CAN/ULC S104-M10 1.3.2.12. UL 10B
PAGE 14 21 00 - 2
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury SECTION 14 21 00 Project No: 2011.008 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 1.4.
1.4.1.
Coordination: Coordinate installation of anchors, bearing plates, brackets and other related accessories.
1.5.
1.5.1.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit following Product data: 1.5.1.1. 1.5.1.2. 1.5.1.3. 1.5.1.4. 1.5.1.5. cab design, dimension and layout. layout, finishes, accessories and available options. system capacity and performance. controls, signals and operating system. colour selection charts for cab and entrances.
1.5.2.
Shop Drawings: 1.5.2.1. Show equipment and signal arrangement, clear inside pit and hoistway dimensions, car, guide rails, buffers and other components in hoistway. Maximum rail bracket spacing. Provide plans, elevations, sections and details of assembly, erection, anchorage and equipment location. Indicate elevator system capacities, sizes, performances, safety features, finishes and other pertinent information. Show clearances and travel of car. Show floors served, travel distances, maximum loads imposed on building structure at points of support and similar considerations of elevator work. Indicate electrical recommendations. power requirements and branch circuit protection device
1.5.2.2. 1.5.2.3. 1.5.2.4. 1.5.2.5. 1.5.2.6. 1.5.2.7. 1.5.2.8.
Indicate maximum loads imposed on building structure, Hoist beam requirements, Locations and sizes of access doors. Show location and details of hoistway door and frames. Ensure a registered structural engineer specified herein is responsible for: 1.5.2.8.1. 1.5.2.8.2. production and review of Shop Drawings. stamping and signing each Shop Drawing and any associated calculations performed.
1.5.3. 1.5.4.
Samples: Submit samples of exposed finishes and materials selected for elevator system materials and components. Submit colour charts of exposed finishes and materials for colour selection. Certificates: Inspection and acceptance certificates of elevator system installation.
PAGE 14 21 00 - 3
1.6.1.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance Contracts: 1.6.1.1. Interim Maintenance: 1.6.1.1.1. 1.6.1.1.2. 1.6.1.1.3. 1.6.1.2. Provide for full maintenance of elevators taken over by Owner for use, during construction. Submit a weekly cost for each unit, during period following acceptance of unit, until Substantial Performance of the Work. Prorate costs for interim maintenance, based on relative numbers of elevators (and unit costs for each) being used by Owner.
First Year Maintenance: 1.6.1.2.1. Provide full-maintenance of elevators specified herein for 12 months following successful completion of Acceptance Testing and subsequent placing of equipment into normal Owner operation. State a common start date for elevators specified herein. Maintenance service be performed during regular working hours of regular working days and shall include regular time call back service. Include this maintenance cost in Contract Price, but identify amount to permit Owner separating operating cost from capital equipment cost. Perform maintenance work with competent personnel under direct supervision and employment. Use fully qualified personnel to be available on site, without unreasonable delay. Maintain an adequate stock of parts locally.
1.6.1.2.2. 1.6.1.2.3. 1.6.1.2.4.
1.6.1.3.
Service Contract Proposal: 1.6.1.3.1. Upon Bid submission, deliver a proposal covering Full Maintenance Services for elevators specified herein, meeting maintenance schedules and procedures, for a 5-year period following completion of First Year Maintenance included with this work. Base proposal on labour rates and material indices in effect at time of Bidding and subject to annual escalation. State labour rate and material index used, as well as percentages of the Contract to be escalated by each. Ensure annual escalation does not exceed changes to COLA as reported by Statistics Canada. Owner may, at its discretion, exercise its option of accepting this proposal at any time within the 1-year maintenance period included with this work.
1.6.1.3.2.
1.6.1.3.3. 1.6.1.3.4. 1.6.2.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Include 2 copies of following: 1.6.2.1. 1.6.2.2. operation and maintenance instructions. parts list, with recommended parts inventory.
PAGE 14 21 00 - 4
1.7.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications: 1.7.1.1. Manufacturer: Provide work of this Section executed by competent manufacturers with minimum 10 years experience in the fabrication, installation and service of elevators of the type and performance specified. The manufacturer shall have a documented quality assurance program. The manufacturer shall install the elevator. Licensed Professionals: Employ a full time professional structural engineer carrying minimum $2,000,000.00 professional liability insurance and is registered in the Province of Ontario. Inspection and Testing: In accordance with requirements of local jurisdiction, obtain required permits, inspections and tests.
1.7.1.2.
1.7.1.3.
1.8.
1.8.1. 1.8.2.

Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Coordinate delivery of elevator and material throughout construction. Storage and Handling Requirements: Store elevator materials in protected environment in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

2.1.1.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer List: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 2.1.1.1. 2.1.1.2. 2.1.1.3. 2.1.1.4. Kone Corporation; www.kone.com Otis Elevator; www.otis.com Schindler Elevator Corporation; www.us.schindler.com ThyssenKrupp Elevator; www.thyssenkruppelevator.com
2.1.2.
Substitution Limitations: This Specification is based on Kones EcoSpace electric traction elevator system. Comparable systems from manufacturers listed herein will be accepted provided they meet requirements of this Specification.
2.2.
2.2.1.
MATERIALS
Description: 2.2.1.1. Regulatory Requirements: Where required, provide a Pre-Start Health and Safety Review in accordance with the Occupational Health and Safety Act (Ontario), Regulation 851, as amended. Refer to Section 01 40 00 for further requirements.
2.2.2.
Performance/Design Criteria: 2.2.2.1. Design Performance: Comply with requirements of ICC/ANSI A117.1 and local authorities having jurisdiction to ensure accessibility requirements are met.
PAGE 14 21 00 - 5
2.2.2.2. Car Performance: 2.2.2.2.1. 2.2.2.2.2. 2.2.2.3. Car Speed +/-5% of contract speed under any loading condition or direction of travel. Car Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold (per code) up to 125% of rated load.
System Performance: 2.2.2.3.1. 2.2.2.3.2. 2.2.2.3.3. 2.2.2.3.4. 2.2.2.3.5. 2.2.2.3.6. 2.2.2.3.7. Vertical Vibration (maximum): 25 mg. Horizontal Vibration (maximum): 25 mg. Jerk Rate (maximum): 1.3 ft/sec3. Acceleration (maximum): 1.3 ft/sec2. In Car Noise: 55 dB(A). Leveling Accuracy: +/-5 mm (+/-0.2). Starts per hour (maximum): 120.
2.2.2.4.
Fire-Rated Entrance Assemblies: Opening protective assemblies including frames, hardware and operation shall comply with CAN/ULC-S104-M, UL 10B and NFPA 80. Provide entrance assembly units bearing Class B or 1-1/2 hour label by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (2 hour label in Canada). Structural Design: Employ a registered structural engineer specified herein to: 2.2.2.5.1. 2.2.2.5.2. design components for work of this Section requiring structural performance. be responsible for determining sizes, yield strengths, gauge thicknesses and joint spacing to allow thermal movement and loading of components in accordance with applicable codes and regulations.
2.2.2.5.
2.2.3.
Steel: 2.2.3.1. 2.2.3.2. 2.2.3.3. Sheet Steel for Exposed Work: Stretcher-leveled, cold-rolled, commercial-quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M, matte finish. Sheet Steel for Unexposed Work: Hot-rolled, commercial-quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A1011/A1011M. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: New material conforming to CSA G40.20/G40.21.
2.2.4.
Stainless Steel: 2.2.4.1. 2.2.4.2. Minimum Type 304 complying with ASTM A167, with standard tempers and hardness required for fabrication, strength and durability. Supply with mechanical finish on fabricated work in location shown or specified with texture and reflectivity required (Federal and NAAMM nomenclature). Protect with adhesive plastic film or paper covering.
2.2.5.
Aluminum: 2.2.5.1. 2.2.5.2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209M, alloy 6063-T52. Extrusions: ASTM B221M, alloy 6063-T52.
2.2.6.
Ceramic Floor Tile: Type (POR-1) Refer to Section 09 30 00.
PAGE 14 21 00 - 6
2.3.1.
EQUIPMENT
Control Closet Components: 2.3.1.1. Controller: 2.3.1.1.1. 2.3.1.1.2. 2.3.1.1.3. 2.3.1.1.4. Provide microcomputer based control system to perform all functions of safe elevator motion. Provide a serial cardrack and main CPU board containing a non-erasable EPROM and operating system firmware. Variable field parameters and adjustments shall be contained in a non-volatile memory module. Properly shield each controller cabinet containing memory equipment from line pollution. Design microcomputer system to accept reprogramming with minimum system down time. Protect high voltage (110V or above) contact points inside controller cabinet from accidental contact in a situation where controller doors are open. Controller shall be separated into two distinct halves; Motor Drive side and Control side. High voltage motor power conductors shall be routed and physically segregated from the rest of the controller. Controller Location: Within 30.48 m (100'-0"). Controller(s) shall be located in a remote cabinet or room within 140''-0" (42.6 m) wire feet of the elevator machine.
2.3.1.1.5. 2.3.1.1.6.
2.3.1.1.7.
2.3.1.2. 2.3.1.3.
Drive: Provide Variable Voltage Variable Frequency AC drive system to develop high starting torque with low starting current. Elevator Operation: 2.3.1.3.1. Simplex Collective Operation: Using a microprocessor-based controller, operation shall be automatic by means of the car and hall buttons. If all calls in the system have been answered, the car shall park at the last landing served. Zoned Car Parking. Relative System Response Dispatching.
2.3.1.3.2. 2.3.1.3.3. 2.3.1.4.
Car Operating Features: 2.3.1.4.1. 2.3.1.4.2. 2.3.1.4.3. 2.3.1.4.4. 2.3.1.4.5. 2.3.1.4.6. Full Collective Operation Fan and Light Control. Load Weighing Bypass. Firefighters Service Phase I and Phase II Ascending Car uncontrolled Movement Protection. top of car inspection station. access at top.
PAGE 14 21 00 - 7
2.3.1.5. Additional operating features to include: 2.3.1.5.1. 2.3.1.5.2. Provide provisions for coaxial cable for CCTV. CCTV by others. Emergency Battery Power Supply: When the main line power is lost for longer than 5 seconds the emergency battery power supply provides power automatically to the elevator controller. The elevator will rise or lower to the first available landing, open the doors, and shut down. The elevator will return to service upon the return of normal main line power. An auxiliary contact on the main line disconnect and shunt trip breaker (if used) will be provided by others.
2.3.2.
Hoistway Components: 2.3.2.1. Machine: AC gearless machine, with permanent magnet synchronous motor, direct current electro-mechanical disc brakes and integral traction drive sheave, mounted to the car guide rail at the top of the hoistway. Governor: Friction type over-speed governor rated for the duty of the elevator specified. Car Guide Rails: Steel rails with brackets and fasteners. Positioning System: System consisting of magnets and proximity switches. Buffers, Car and Counterweight: Polyurethane buffer. Hoistway Operating Devices: 2.3.2.6.1. 2.3.2.6.2. 2.3.2.6.3. 2.3.2.7. Emergency stop switch in the pit. Terminal stopping switches. Emergency stop switch on the machine.
2.3.2.2. 2.3.2.3. 2.3.2.4. 2.3.2.5. 2.3.2.6.
Wiring for hoistway electrical devices includes: 2.3.2.7.1. 2.3.2.7.2. 2.3.2.7.3. 2.3.2.7.4. 2.3.2.7.5. 2.3.2.7.6. 2.3.2.7.7. 2.3.2.7.8. 2.3.2.7.9. hall panels. pit emergency stop switch. traveling cable for car. Frames: 1.897 mm (14 ga) sheet steel, bolted construction. Sills: Extruded aluminum. Doors: Hollow metal construction with vertical internal channel reinforcements. Fire Rating: Entrance and doors shall be ULC fire-rated for 1-1/2 hour. Entrance Finish: #4 brushed stainless steel. Entrance Markings Jamb Plates: Provide standard entrance jamb tactile markings on both jambs, at floors. Flush mount plates. Plate finish to match frame/door.
2.3.3.
Car Components: 2.3.3.1. 2.3.3.2. Car Frame: Provide care frame with adequate bracing to support platform and car enclosure. Platform, Heavy Loading Type: All steel car platform to accommodate 1-piece loads weighing up to 25% of the rated capacity.
PAGE 14 21 00 - 8
2.3.3.3. Car Guides: Provide guide-shoes mounted to top and bottom of both car and counterweight frame. Each guide-shoe assembly shall be arranged to maintain constant contact on the rail surfaces. Provide retainers in areas with Seismic design requirements. Steel Cab Finishes: 2.3.3.4.1. 2.3.3.4.2. 2.3.3.4.3. 2.3.3.4.4. Cab Wall Finishes: Brushed type 304 stainless steel. Cab Front Finish: Brushed type 304 stainless steel. Car Door Finish: Brushed type 304 stainless steel. Ceiling and Lighting: A drop ceiling, comprised of 3 panel Polygal Translucent suspended ceiling with T-5 Florescent lighting and brushed aluminum frame. Panels: removable: Coordinate clip system with panel vendor. Handrail: 38 mm (1.5) diameter round brushed aluminum tube to be located on back wall of car enclosure.
2 Flooring: By others (Not to exceed 0.19 m (2 sqft) & 13 mm (1/2") finished depth.).
2.3.3.4.
2.3.3.4.5. 2.3.3.4.6. 2.3.3.4.7. 2.3.3.4.8. 2.3.3.5.
Threshold: Aluminum. Protective pad hooks and quilted fire retardant protective pads: Provide pad buttons with non-suspended ceiling.
Emergency Car Signals: 2.3.3.5.1. Emergency Siren: Ensure siren mounted on top of cab is activated when alarm button in car operating panel is engaged. Ensure siren has rated sound pressure level of 80 dB(A) at a distance of 900 mm (36) from device. Ensure siren responds with a delay of not more than 1 second after activation of alarm button. Emergency Car Lighting: Provide emergency power unit employing a 12-volt sealed rechargeable battery and totally static circuits which illuminates elevator car and provide current to alarm bell in event of building power failure. Emergency Exit Contact: An electrical contact shall be provided on the car-top exit.
2.3.3.5.2.
2.3.3.5.3. 2.3.3.6. 2.3.4.
Ventilation: No fan.
Elevator Control System for Inspections and Emergency: 2.3.4.1. 2.3.4.2. 2.3.4.3. 2.3.4.4. 2.3.4.5. 2.3.4.6. Provide devices within controller to run the elevator in inspection operation. Provide devices on car top to run the elevator in inspection operation. Provide within controller an emergency stop switch to disconnect power from the brake and prevents motor from running. Provide the means from the controller to mechanically lift and control the elevator brake to safely bring car to nearest available landing when power is interrupted. Provide the means from the controller to reset the governor over speed switch and also trip the governor. Provide the means from the controller to reset the emergency brake when set because of an unintended car movement or ascending car over speed.
PAGE 14 21 00 - 9
2.3.4.7. 2.3.5. Provide the means for the control to reset elevator earthquake operation.
Signal Devices and Fixtures: 2.3.5.1. 2.3.5.2. Car Operating Panel: Provide car-operating panel with all push buttons, key switches, and message indicators for elevator operation. Provide full height integral car operating panel. Ensure panel contains a bank of round, mechanical, illuminated buttons marked to correspond to landings served, emergency call button, door open button, door close button and key switches for lights, inspection and exhaust fan. Buttons have amber illumination (halo) and be flat flush. Ensure buttons have raised text and Braille markings on left hand side. Ensure car operating display panel is amber 7 segment. Provide amber texts, when illuminated. The full height car operating panel shall have a polycarbonate face plate that is shatterproof and impact resistant in a color and pattern per manufacturers standard selection.
2.3.6.
Additional features of car operating panel shall include: 2.3.6.1. 2.3.6.2. 2.3.6.3. 2.3.6.4. 2.3.6.5. 2.3.6.6. 2.3.6.7. Car Position Indicator within operating panel (amber). Elevator Data Plate marked with elevator capacity and car number on car top. Help buttons with raised markings. In car stop switch per local code. Firefighter's hat. Firefighter's Phase II Key-switch. Call Cancel Button. Pre-programmed integrated ADA phone (complete description of krms features included as standard) Help Button/Communicator. Activation of help button will initiate two-way communication between car and a location inside the building, switching over to alternate location if call is unanswered, where personnel are available to take the appropriate action. Visual indicators are provided for call initiation and call acknowledgement. Firefighter's Phase II emergency in-car operating instructions.
2.3.6.8. 2.3.7.
Hall Fixtures: Wall mounted hall fixtures shall be provided with necessary push buttons and key switches for elevator operation. Wall mounted hall fixtures shall have a polycarbonate face plate that is shatterproof and impact resistant in a color per manufacturers standard selection. 2.3.7.1. Hall fixtures shall feature round, mechanical, illuminated buttons in raised fixture housings. Hall fixtures shall correspond to options available from that landing. Buttons shall be flat flush in vertically mounted fixture. Hall fixtures should not be jamb-mounted. Hall lanterns shall feature amber illumination. Hall Lanterns and Chime: A directional lantern visible from the corridor shall be provided at each hall entrance. When the car stops and the doors are opening, the lantern shall indicate the direction in which the car is to travel and a chime will sound. The chime will sound once for up and twice for down.
2.3.7.2.
2.3.8.
Door Operator Equipment: 2.3.8.1. Door Operator: Provide a closed loop permanent magnet VVVF high-performance door operator to open and close car and hoistway doors simultaneously. Ensure door movement is cushioned at both limits of travel. Provide electro-mechanical interlock at each hoistway entrance to prevent operation of elevator unless doors are closed and locked. Provide an electric contact on car at each car entrance to prevent operation of elevator unless car door is closed.
PAGE 14 21 00 - 10
2.3.8.2. Arrange door operator so in case of interruption or failure of electric power, doors can be readily opened by hand from within car, in accordance with applicable code. Provide emergency devices and keys for opening doors from landing as required by local code. Ensure doors open automatically when car has arrived at or is leveling at respective landings. Ensure doors close after a predetermined time interval or immediately upon pressing of a car button. Provide a door open button in car. Ensure momentary pressing of this button reopens doors and resets time interval. Provide door hangers and tracks for each car and hoistway door. Contour tracks to match hanger sheaves. Design hangers for power operation with provisions for vertical and lateral adjustment. Ensure hanger sheaves have polyurethane tires and pre-lubricated sealed-forlife bearings. Electronic Door Safety Device: Equip elevator car with an electronic protective device extending full height of car. When activated, this sensor shall prevent doors from closing or cause them to stop and reopen if they are in process of closing. Ensure doors remain open as long as flow of traffic continues and close shortly after last person passes through door opening.
2.3.8.3.
2.3.8.4.
2.3.8.5.

3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
Verification of Conditions: 3.1.1.1. 3.1.1.2. 3.1.1.3. Notify Consultant in writing of any conditions which would be detrimental to the installation. Examine substrates, supports, and other conditions under which elevator work is to be performed. Prior to start of Work, verify: 3.1.1.3.1. 3.1.1.3.2. actual site dimensions and location of adjacent materials prior to commencing work. hoistway is in accordance with shop drawings. Dimensional tolerance of hoistway from shop drawings: -0 mm (-0 inches) to +50 mm (+2). Do not begin work of this section until dimensions are within tolerances. projections greater then 50 mm (2) must be beveled not less then 75 degrees from horizontal. landings have been prepared for entrance sill installation. Traditional sill angle or concrete sill support shall not be required. verify elevator pit has been constructed in accordance with requirements, is dry and reinforced to sustain vertical forces, as indicated in approved submittal. Verify that sumps or sump pumps located within pit will not interfere with installed elevator equipment. control space has been constructed in accordance with requirements, with access coordinated with elevator shop drawings, including Sleeves and penetrations. installation of GFCI protected 20-amp in pit and adjacent to each signal control cabinet in control space.
3.1.1.3.3. 3.1.1.3.4. 3.1.1.3.5.
3.1.1.3.6.
3.1.1.3.7.
PAGE 14 21 00 - 11
3.1.2. Evaluation and Assessment: Commencement of work implies acceptance of previously completed work.
3.2.
3.2.1. 3.2.2.
PREPARATION
Coordinate installation of anchors, bearing plates, brackets and other related accessories. Protection of In-Place Conditions: Do not use elevators for any purpose during construction period before Substantial Performance of the Work.
3.3.
3.3.1. 3.3.2. 3.3.3. 3.3.4.
INSTALLATION
Install equipment, guides, controls, car and accessories in accordance with manufacturers installation methods and recommended practices. Ensure work is performed by competent elevator installation personnel in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44, manufacturers installation instructions and approved Shop Drawings. Comply with Canadian Electrical code and NFPA 70 for electrical work required during installation. Properly locate guide rails and related supports at locations in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and approved Shop Drawings. Anchor to building structure using isolation system to minimize transmission of vibration to structure. Securely fasten hoistway frames to fixing angles mounted in hoistway. Coordinate installation of sills and frames with other trades. Painting/Galvanizing: 3.3.6.1. Provide ferrous metals installed in hoistway is shop primed with a rust inhibitive primer or galvanized to minimum Z120.
3.3.5. 3.3.6.
3.4.
3.4.1.
CONSTRUCTION
Interface with Other Work: 3.4.1.1. 3.4.1.2. Guide rail brackets attached to steel shall be installed prior to application of fireproofing. Coordinate construction of entrance walls with installation of door frames and sills. Maintain front wall opening until elevator equipment has been installed. 3.4.1.2.1. 3.4.1.2.2. 3.4.1.2.3. Ensure adequate support for entrance attachment points at all landings. Coordinate wall openings for hall push buttons, signal fixtures and sleeves. Each elevator requires sleeves within the hoistway wall. Coordinate emergency power transfer switch and power change pending signals as required for termination at the primary elevator signal control cabinet in each group. Coordinate interface of elevators and fire alarm system. Coordinate interface of dedicated telephone line.
3.4.1.2.4. 3.4.1.2.5.
3.5.
3.5.1.

Site Tests and Inspections: 3.5.1.1. Provide required inspections, tests, permits and fees for elevator installation. Arrange for inspections and make required tests. Deliver to Owner upon completion and acceptance of elevator work.
PAGE 14 21 00 - 12
3.5.1.2. Acceptance Testing: Upon completion of elevator installation and before permitting use of elevator, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by Code and governing regulations or agencies. Perform other tests, if any, as required by governing regulations or agencies. Structural Inspection: Ensure a registered structural engineer specified herein inspects work of this Section during erection/installation. Advise Owner, Contractor, Consultant and governing authorities in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on elevator.
3.5.1.3. 3.5.1.4. 3.5.2.
3.6.
3.6.1. 3.6.2. 3.6.3.
ADJUSTING
Lubricate operating system components in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Make necessary adjustments of operating devices and equipment to ensure elevator operates smoothly and accurately. Perform final adjustments and necessary service prior to substantial completion.
3.7.
3.7.1. 3.7.2.
CLEANING
Before final acceptance, remove protection from finished surfaces and clean and polish surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for type of material and finish provided. At completion of elevator work, remove tools, equipment and surplus materials from site. equipment rooms and hoistway. Remove trash and debris. Clean
3.8.
3.8.1.
CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
Demonstration: 3.8.1.1. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations and daily maintenance of elevators. Review emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of failure in operation and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in normal procedures to be followed in checking for sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Make a final check of each elevator operation, with Owner's personnel present, immediately before date of Substantial Performance. Ensure control systems and operating devices are functioning properly.
3.8.1.2.
3.9.
3.9.1.
PROTECTION
At time of Substantial Performance of elevator work, or portion thereof, provide suitable protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other such methods or procedures to protect elevator work from damage or deterioration. Maintain protective measures throughout remainder of construction period.
3.10.
3.10.1.
ATTACHMENTS
ELEVATOR SCHEDULE: 3.10.1.1. Elevator No. 1: 3.10.1.1.1. Elevator Model: KONE EcoSpace gearless traction elevator 3.10.1.1.2. Equipment Control: KCM831
PAGE 14 21 00 - 13
3.10.1.1.3. Landings: 3. 3.10.1.1.4. Openings: 3 front openings. 3.10.1.1.5. Travel: 8534 mm. 3.10.1.1.6. Rated Capacity: 1360 kg (3000 lbs). 3.10.1.1.7. Rated Speed: 0.762 m/s (150 ft/min). 3.10.1.1.8. Clear Inside Dimensions (WxD): 1981 mm x 1524 mm (6-6 x 5-0) 3.10.1.1.9. Cab Height: Nominal 3048 mm (10 - 0). 3.10.1.1.10. Clear height under suspended ceiling: 2921 mm (9 6) 3.10.1.1.11. Entrance Width & Type: 1067 mm (3 6) & Center Opening 3.10.1.1.12. Entrance Height: 2743 mm (9 0) 3.10.1.1.13. Door Type: One speed single slide. 3.10.1.1.14. Main Power Supply: 208 volts, +/-5% of normal, 3 Phase, with a separate equipment grounding conductor. 3.10.1.1.15. Operation: Simplex. 3.10.1.1.16. Machine Location: Inside the hoistway mounted on car guide rail. 3.10.1.1.17. Control Space Location: Remote Closet. 3.10.1.1.18. Elevator Equipment shall conform to the requirements of seismic zone: NonSeismic. 3.10.1.1.19. Maintenance Service Period: 12 Months
END OF SECTION
PAGE 14 21 00 - 14
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury Project No.: 2011.008 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1.
1.1.1.
SECTION 14 84 24 FALL ARREST SYSTEMS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1.2.
1.2.
1.2.1.
SUMMARY
Work included: Provide fall arrest anchor system including but not limited to the following: 1.2.1.1. fall arrest anchor equipment.
1.2.2.
Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete. 1.2.2.1. 1.2.2.2. 1.2.2.3. 1.2.2.4. 1.2.2.5. 1.2.2.6. Provision of structural steel: Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel. Provision of open web steel joists: Section 05 21 19, Open Web Steel Joists. Provision of metal decking: Section 05 30 00, Metal Decking. Provision of fully adhered TPO roofing: Section 07 54 24, TPO Roofing Fully Adhered. Provision of flashing: Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. Provision of sealants: Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants.
1.3.
1.3.1.
REFERENCES
Reference Standards: 1.3.1.1. 1.3.1.2. 1.3.1.3. 1.3.1.4. 1.3.1.5. 1.3.1.6. 1.3.1.7. ASTM B221-08 CSA G164-M92(R03) CSA W59-03(08) CSA W47.2-11 CAN/CSA-Z91-02(R08) CAN/CSA-Z271-10 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes. - Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles. - Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding). - Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Aluminum. - Health and Safety Code for Suspended Equipment Operations. - Safety Code for Suspended Elevating Platforms.
Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act Window Cleaning Regulation 859/90 as amended by 523/92, and 213/91 as amended by 631/94 (Construction Projects).
PAGE 14 84 24 - 1
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury Project No.: 2011.008 1.4.
1.4.1.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING CERTIFICATION

Submit shop drawings showing complete layout and configuration of complete fall arrest anchor system, including all components and accessories. Clearly indicate design and fabrication details, window drops, hardware, and installation details. Shop drawings to include installation and rigging instructions and all necessary Restrictive and NonRestrictive Working Usage Notes and General Safety Notes. Ensure a registered structural engineer specified herein is responsible for: 1.4.3.1. 1.4.3.2. production and review of Shop Drawings. stamping and signing each Shop Drawing and any associated calculations performed.
1.4.2. 1.4.3.
1.4.4.
Submit Shop Drawings for following work bearing the stamp of a Professional Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario: 1.4.4.1. anchors, and other fall arrest components.
1.5.
1.5.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications: 1.5.1.1. Installers: Provide work of this Section executed by competent installers with minimum 5 years experience in the application of Products, systems and assemblies specified and with approval and training of the Product manufacturers. Welding to be executed by certified welders in accordance with CSA W59 and CSA W47.2 requirements. Licensed Professionals: Employ a full time professional structural engineer carrying minimum $2,000,000.00 professional liability insurance and is registered in the Province of Ontario. 1.5.1.3.1. Structural Design and Inspection: Design fall arrest anchors.
1.5.1.2. 1.5.1.3.
1.5.2.
Insurance: Manufacturer to carry specific liability insurance (products and completed operations) in the amount of $10,000,000.00 to protect against product/system failure and $2,000,000.00 errors and omissions.
1.6.
1.6.1. 1.6.2.
MAINTENANCE DATA
Submit 1 copy of system manual and log book with initial inspection certification and inspection signoff data included. Submit 2 copies of a reduced plastic laminated as-built shop drawing showing equipment locations and details. This drawing is to be posted near exits onto the roof.

2.1.1.
MANUFACTURER
Manufacturers List: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 2.1.1.1. PRO-BEL ENTERPRISES LTD. Toll free: 1-800-461-0575. Telephone: 905-427-0616, Fax: 905-427-2545, info@pro-bel.ca.
PAGE 14 84 24 - 2
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury Project No.: 2011.008
2.1.1.2.
Substitution Limitations: Comparable products from other manufactures not listed herein will be accepted in writing providing they meet requirements of this specification after a full review by Consultant.
2.1.2.
Description: 2.1.2.1. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following regulations: 2.1.2.1.1. Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act Window Cleaning Regulation 859/90 as amended by 523/92, and 213/91 as amended by 631/94 (Construction Projects). Ontario Building Code 2006, 4.4.4.1. Anchor Systems on Building Exterior to be provided where any portion of the roof is more than 8 m (26-3) above adjacent ground level, for maintenance operations. CAN/CSA-Z271 Safety Code for Suspended Elevating Platforms and CAN/CSA-Z91 Health and Safety Code for Suspended Equipment Operations.
2.1.2.1.2.
2.1.2.1.3. 2.1.3.
Performance / Design Criteria: 2.1.3.1. All systems herein to conform to the Ontario Building Code 2006, 4.4.4.1. Anchor Systems on Building Exterior to be provided where any portion of the roof is more than 8 m (26-3) above adjacent ground level, for suspended maintenance operations. System to be designed to support loads of a bosuns chair and occupant for fall arrest anchor and exterior maintenance using a temporary platform complete with fall protection. Design fall arrest anchor system to suit building and in accordance with plans, specifications, standards, and regulations/codes contained in sections System Requirements and Regulatory Requirements. Locate anchorages to suit suspension equipment that will be used on the building with respect to items such as reach, rigging, spacing, roof edge condition, and similar items. Design all anchor components to provide adequate attachment to the building and suited to current fall arrest anchor system practices. Ensure compatibility with industry standard equipment. Ensure all anchor components conform to proper engineering principles and have been designed by a Professional Engineer qualified in the design of fall arrest anchor system, its application and safety requirements. Design system fall arrest safety anchors and equipment supports to comply with the following structural requirements: 2.1.3.7.1. Fall Arrest Safety Anchors: designed to a maximum fall arresting force of typically 8.0 kN (1800 lbs) when wearing a body harness with a safety factor of 2 without any permanent deformation and to 22.24 kN (5000 lbs) against fracture or detachment.
2.1.3.2. 2.1.3.3.
2.1.3.4. 2.1.3.5.
2.1.3.6.
2.1.3.7.
2.1.3.8.
Structural Design: Employ a registered structural engineer specified herein to: 2.1.3.8.1. 2.1.3.8.2. design components for work of this Section requiring structural performance. be responsible for determining sizes, yield strengths, gauge thicknesses and joint spacing to allow thermal movement and loading of components in accordance with applicable codes and regulations.
PAGE 14 84 24 - 3
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury Project No.: 2011.008 2.2.
2.2.1. 2.2.2.
EQUIPMENT
PBE-75-00A1 Steel pier weld to structure roof anchor with flashing Note: Any additional reinforcing of the structure as required to suit loading of roof anchors is to be designed, supplied and installed by others.
2.3.
2.3.1. 2.3.2. 2.3.3. 2.3.4. 2.3.5.
SAFETY & TIE-BACK ANCHORS

Safety U-bars: Type 304 stainless steel with yield strength of 240 MPa (35 Ksi). U-bar to be not less than 19 mm (3/4") diameter material with 38 mm (1-1/2") eye opening. Securement bolts: mild steel, Type 300W with yield strength of 300 MPa (44 Ksi), hot dipped galvanized to CSA G164. Hollow steel section (HSS) piers: mild steel, Type 300W with yield strength of 350 MPa (50 Ksi). Wall thickness to suit application, hot dipped galvanized to CSA G164. Base plate and all other sections: galvanized mild steel as above with yield strength of 300 MPa (44 Ksi). Thickness and securement to suit application. Seamless spun aluminum flashing (for steel pier anchors): Type 6061-T6 alloy to ASTM B221 with deck flange flashed in to CRCA recommendations. Seal top of aluminum flashing with conformable mastic tape and torch applied heat-shrink rubber collar flashing. Miscellaneous bolts, nuts and washers: mild steel, Type 300W with yield strength of 300 MPa (44 Ksi), hot dipped galvanized to CSA G164 or Type 304 stainless steel with yield strength of 240 MPa (35 Ksi).
2.3.6.

3.1.1.
EXAMINATION
Examine surfaces and areas upon which the work of this section depends. Report to the Contractor in writing, defects of work prepared by other trades and other unsatisfactory site conditions, which would cause defective installation of products, or cause latent defects in workmanship and function. Verify site dimensions. Commencement of work will imply acceptance of prepared work.
3.1.2. 3.1.3.
3.2.
3.2.1. 3.2.2. 3.2.3. 3.2.4. 3.2.5.
INSTALLATION
Install equipment in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturers recommendations. Co-ordinate installation with work of related trades. Install all work true, level, tightly fitted and flush with adjacent surfaces as required. Deform threads of tail end of anchor studs after nuts have been tightened to prevent accidental removal or vandalism. If reinforcing of the roof support structure is required for the roof to withstand applied forces of the fall arrest anchor system; reinforcing is to be designed, engineered, supplied and installed by others.
3.3.
3.3.1.

Complete initial inspection and provide certification for inclusion in log book.
PAGE 14 84 24 - 4
Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury Project No.: 2011.008
3.3.2.
Non-Conforming Work: Replace damaged work which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, restored or cleaned to satisfaction of Consultant at no cost to Owner.
3.4.
3.4.1. 3.4.2.
FINAL ADJUSTING AND INSPECTION

Adjust and leave equipment in proper working order. Complete final inspection and provide certification for inclusion in log book.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 14 84 24 - 5

Typcal Glass Design GEO.a.kelson

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Typcal Glass Design GEO.a.kelson

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Architectural Specifications for: Renovation and Expansion at 2 Bales Drive, East Gwillimbury.

Issued for CORE AND SHELL

Project No.: 2011.008

SECTION 00 01 05 LIST OF CONSULTANTS

SECTION 00 01 05 LIST OF CONSULTANTS

CIVIL ENGINEERING CONSULTANT

SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS

PROJECT TITLE PAGE LIST OF CONSULTANTS TABLE OF CONTENTS

2011-09-30 2011-09-30 2011-09-30

RHC RHC RHC

1 Only 1 and 2 1 thru 2

CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS X *00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 2011-09-30 OWNER 1 thru 6

DIVISION 04 MASONRY X 04 20 00 MASONRY UNITS 00 2011-09-30 RHC 1 thru 13

SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.0 4.1 .1 4.2 .1 5.0 5.1 .1

Complete and submit all Appendices with Bid Form.

SECTION 00 24 02 PROCUREMENT SCOPE

GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK

1.1.1.4. 1.1.1.5. 1.1.1.6. 1.1.1.7. 1.1.1.8. 1.1.1.9.

SECTION 00 24 02 PROCUREMENT SCOPE

SECTION 00 30 00 AVAILABLE INFORMATION

Comply with Division 1 requirements and documents referred to herein.

SECTION 00 41 00 BID FORM

SECTION 00 41 00 BID FORM

SECTION 00 41 00 BID FORM

The Corporate Seal of

(Bidder - please print)

was hereunto affixed in the presence of:

Authorized signing officer

Authorized signing officer

Authorized signing officer

SECTION 00 41 00 BID FORM

Appendix A Contract Documents

SECTION 00 41 00 BID FORM

Appendix B List Of Bidders

SECTION 00 41 00 BID FORM

SECTION 00 41 00 BID FORM

/cu m /cu m /cu m /cu m /cu m /cu m /cu m /cu m

/sq m /sq m /cu m

SECTION 00 41 00 BID FORM

SECTION 00 41 00 BID FORM

SECTION 00 41 00 BID FORM

Appendix F Contract Values

SECTION 00 41 00 BID FORM

SECTION 00 41 00 BID FORM

Appendix G Labour And Material Bond

and which is an integral part of the Bid Form.

685109 Ontario Limited as Owner and

GC 6.5 Delay 6.5.2 Delete last sentence.

SECTION 01 10 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Comply with Division 1 requirements and documents referred to herein.

SECTION 01 10 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.4.4. 1.4.5. 1.4.6.

DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK

SECTION 01 10 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 10 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

INTERRUPTIONS IN THE WORK SCHEDULE

INCLEMENT WEATHER AND COLD WEATHER WORK

SECTION 01 10 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PLACE OF THE WORK

1.13.2. 1.13.3. 1.13.4.

DEMOLITION, SECURITY AND ACCESS

SETTING OUT THE WORK

SECTION 01 10 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS